En32ser 1

distributed by www.minilablaser.
com
QSS-32 series
Service Manual
Issued in June 2005
– for service personnel only –

distributed by www.minilablaser.com
CHAPTER DESCRIPTION
1.Cautions for work
2.Replacement and adjustment of parts
3.Mode
4.Troubleshooting
5.Operation sequence
6.Electrical parts
7.Setup for service personnel
8.Appendix
Notes to service personnel

Be sure to read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of the correct procedures before servicing the
machine.
The printer processor uses both tapping truss head screws and spike truss head screws. When attaching the screws once
removed, make sure they are on their original positions. These screws are used for the place where grounding is required.
Tapping truss head screw
Spike truss head screw (green)
Washer head screw (for ground)
SCREW
System program:
• QSS-32 series: Ver. 4
• QSS-32 PRO series: Ver. 4
• S-900SA/S-1700SA: Ver. 4
• QSS-32 DLS series: Ver. 2
! It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual to the others except the service personnel.
! The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
! Illustrations in this manual may vary depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
"UNLHA(32).DLL" is Mr. Micco's free software.
DIGITAL ICE is a trademark of Kodak.
Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
MultiMediaCard™ is a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG company in Germany and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard
Association).
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Other product and company names mentioned here in may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Symbols of
trademarks, ™ and ®, are not added.
System configuration
The machine configurations of the systems are as follows.
System Scanner Control Station Laser Printer Paper Processor

QSS-3201 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213
QSS-3201SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM





S-900SA S-2/S-3 CS-1

S-1700SA S-2/S-3 CS-1
QSS-3202 PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

Printer
QSS-3202SM PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
Printer
QSS-3203 PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217
Printer
QSS-3203SM PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217SM
Printer
QSS-3211 DLS S-2/S-3 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3211SM DLS S-2/S-3 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
QSS-3212 DLS S-2/S-3 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213
QSS-3213 DLS S-2/S-3 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217
iii
Explanation of manual
Description for each specification
This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedure for each specification may differ.
For the different procedures depending on the specifications
The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.
Specification Mark
Normal specification [N]
SM specification [SM]
There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.
About the chapters
" 1. Cautions for work

Contains information on how to achieve safety in service operations. Be sure to read precautions thoroughly and
carefully.
" 2. Replacement and adjustment of parts
Describes how to remove or replace component parts and units, and how to adjust each part in replacement.
" 3. Mode
Shows the service personnel mode transition.
" 4. Troubleshooting
Describes how to solve the troubles.
" 5. Operation sequence
Describes the operation sequence of machine.
" 6. Electrical parts
Describes the PCBs used in this machine.
" 7. Setup for service personnel
Describes the setup procedures for service personnel.
" 8. Appendix
Describes the wiring diagram.
Marks and symbols used in this manual
Definitions of the marks and symbols used in this manual are as follows:
This is called the alert symbol mark.

Text following this mark contains particularly important information concerning safety. Be sure to heed this information.
This mark is used in conjunction with the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, according to the extent of
influence (injury) on persons or damage to physical property.
The Important symbol indicates operations or procedures requiring caution, instructions and supplementary explanations
that need to be followed.
The pointing finger symbol indicates the manual or section where you can find additional information.
The Note symbol indicates functions or instructions which are convenient if you know.
iv
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual
The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.
Processing solutions Abbreviations

Color Developer CD
Bleach Fixer BF
Stabilizer STB
v
This page is intentionally blank.
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
System configuration ............................................................................................................................. iii
Explanation of manual ...........................................................................................................................iv
Description for each specification ..................................................................................................iv
About the chapters .........................................................................................................................iv
Marks and symbols used in this manual ........................................................................................iv
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ............................................................v
1. Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................... 10010
Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................................................10010
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation .................................................................................................................. 10030
For safe operation .................................................................................................................................................10030
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts .................................10040
Laser Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................10050
Precautions against LED .......................................................................................................................................10060
2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing covers ................................................................................................................... 20010
Removing covers (Printer section) .......................................................................................................................20010
Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM] ....................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (scanner section) ......................................................................................................................20030
Removing covers (film carrier section) ................................................................................................................20040
Removing covers (Desk section) ..........................................................................................................................20050
Adjusting the belt tension ....................................................................................................... 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) ..........................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) ......................................................................................................20120
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ...............................................................................................................20125
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section) ...................................................................................................20130
Display monitor section .......................................................................................................... 20310
Replacing the display monitor ..............................................................................................................................20310
Replacing the display monitor (DLS specification) .............................................................................................20320
Scanner section ..................................................................................................................... 20610
Removing the scanner unit [S-2/S-3] ...................................................................................................................20610
Removing the scanner unit [S-4] ..........................................................................................................................20610
Removing the LED light source unit [S-2/S-3] ....................................................................................................20620
Removing the LED light source unit [S-4] ...........................................................................................................20620
Adjusting the scanner section after replacement ..................................................................................................20650
vii
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II) ..................................................................................... 20700

Replacing the film carrier .....................................................................................................................................20700
Removing the advance unit ..................................................................................................................................20710
Replacing and adjusting the film feed motor ........................................................................................................20720
Replacing and adjusting the spool key motor .......................................................................................................20730
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door drive axis .........................................................................................20740
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door motor ...............................................................................................20750
Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit ..................................................................................................20760
Adjusting the light lock door drive timing ...........................................................................................................20780
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II) .................................................................. 20850
MMC auto focus section adjustment ....................................................................................................................20850
Desk section ........................................................................................................................... 21110
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate .............................................................................................21110
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter ................................................................................................................21120
Adjusting the gap of the negative cleaner brush ...................................................................................................21150
Paper magazine section ......................................................................................................... 22000
Checking the paper magazine ...............................................................................................................................22000
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine mount ......................................................................................22100
Paper supply unit ................................................................................................................... 25610
Removing the paper supply unit ...........................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ...................................................................................25620
Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor ........................................................................25630
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor ....................................................................................25640
Adjusting the imprint pressure of the CVP ...........................................................................................................25650
Removing paper supply unit A .............................................................................................................................25660
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit ...................................................................................................................25810
Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit .................................................................................25820
Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit ..............................................................................................25830
Banding shooting ..................................................................................................................................................25910
Paper Advance Unit 1 ............................................................................................................ 26510
Removing paper advance unit 1 ...........................................................................................................................26510
Paper Advance Unit 2 ............................................................................................................ 26550
Removing paper advance unit 2 ...........................................................................................................................26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and adjusting the pressure timing for the arm(s)
...............................................................................................................................................................................26560
Adjusting the arm position ....................................................................................................................................26570
Processor loading unit ............................................................................................................ 26610
Removing the processor loading unit ...................................................................................................................26610
Laser unit ............................................................................................................................... 26710
Removing the laser unit ........................................................................................................................................26710
Zigzag adjustment .................................................................................................................. 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ........................................................................................26810
Drive section .......................................................................................................................... 27230
Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack ..................................................................................................................27230
Adjusting the position of the dryer rack ...............................................................................................................27260
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension .................................................................................................................27270
viii
Order classification section .................................................................................................... 27410

Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray .........................................................................................27410
Removing the print conveyor unit ........................................................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray .........................................................................................................................27430
Removing the print sorter unit ..............................................................................................................................27440
Replenishment package unit .................................................................................................. 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ......................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] .....................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] ........................................................................27830
3. Mode
Passwords .............................................................................................................................. 30500
Passwords .............................................................................................................................................................30500
Passwords (DLS specification) .............................................................................................................................30600
Mode structure chart .............................................................................................................. 31000
Mode structure chart (Order Display) ...................................................................................................................31000
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) ............................................................................................................31010
Mode structure chart (Menu display) ...................................................................................................................31020
Mode structure chart (Setup) ................................................................................................................................31030
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] .......................................................................................................31040
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] ....................................................................................................31040
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ...................................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] ................................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) .....................................................................................................................31060
Mode structure chart (Net Order) .........................................................................................................................31500
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Scanner) ......................................................................... 31610
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Scanner] .............................................................................31610
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Scanner] .......................................................................31620
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Scanner] .............................................................................31630
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Scanner] ...........................................................................................31640
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [Stand Alone Scanner] ....................................................................31650
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Scanner] ...............................................................................31660
Mode structure chart (Net Scan Mode) [Stand Alone Scanner] ...........................................................................31670
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer) ............................................................................ 31710
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ...............................................................................31710
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Printer] .........................................................................31720
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ...............................................................................31730
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Printer] .............................................................................................31740
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] [Stand Alone Printer] ................................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer] .............................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Printer] .................................................................................31770
ix
DLS mode structure chart ...................................................................................................... 32000

DLS mode structure chart .....................................................................................................................................32000
QSS mode structure chart (Order Display) ...........................................................................................................32010
QSS mode structure chart (Menu display) ............................................................................................................32020
QSS mode structure chart (Setup) ........................................................................................................................32030
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] ...............................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] ............................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ...........................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] ........................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Maintenance) .............................................................................................................32060
Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32500
Service Parameters ................................................................................................................................................32500
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................32510
Magazine Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup ........................................................................................................................................................32530
Monitor Setup [Stand Alone Scanner] ..................................................................................................................32540
Data Initialization .................................................................................................................................................32550
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Scanner] ............................................................................................................32560
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer] ..............................................................................................................32561
Area Registration ..................................................................................................................................................32570
Parameter 1 ...........................................................................................................................................................32590
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] ........................................................................................................................33030
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] .....................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ...........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] ........................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] .......................................................................................................................................33060
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500
Thermosensor Calibration ....................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] ....................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] .................................................................................................................33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ...........................................................................................................................33580
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ....................................................................................................................33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ................................................................................................................33600
Operator Selections ............................................................................................................... 34500
Operator Selections [N] ........................................................................................................................................34500
Operator Selections [SM] .....................................................................................................................................34500
x
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35000

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AFC-II) .................................................................................................35000
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 AFC-II) ........................................................................................................35010
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 MMC-II) ...............................................................................................35030
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AMC-II) ................................................................................................35040
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (MFC) ...................................................................................................................35050
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Input Section) ..................................................................................................................................35200
Input Check (Printer) ............................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [N] .................................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Input Section) ...............................................................................................................................35300
Output Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35320
Reading and Writing Data ....................................................................................................................................35400
Reading and Writing Data [Stand Alone Scanner] ...............................................................................................35410
Procedures for Backup & Restore Software .........................................................................................................35450
System Version Check ..........................................................................................................................................35500
System update for each control PCB (CPU) .........................................................................................................35600
Operation Information ..........................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification [N] ....................................................................................................................................35800
Machine Specification [SM] .................................................................................................................................35800
Machine Specification [Stand Alone Scanner] .....................................................................................................35810
Self-diagnostic ......................................................................................................................................................35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic .................................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 36000
Paper sensor adjustment .......................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction ............................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction .....................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment .............................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ............................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ........................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction .......................................................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction .................................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment ............................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ......................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .............................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization ....................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ...............................................................................................................36710
Scanner Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-2/S-3] .................................................................................................37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-4] .......................................................................................................37000
Light Source Registration .....................................................................................................................................37010
Focus Adjustment .................................................................................................................................................37020
Light Source Update .............................................................................................................................................37030
xi
Laser Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 37300

Laser Unit Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information ............................................................................................................ 37500
Saving the Logdata ...............................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data .......................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time .......................................................................................37520
System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error .................................................................37530
Saving the DLS log file ........................................................................................................................................37600
Flatbed execution display ....................................................................................................... 38000
Flatbed execution display .....................................................................................................................................38000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................... 4001
Classification of errors and attention messages ......................................................................................................4001
Suffix number display .............................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4190
Symptoms caused by poor wiring connection(s) (scanner section) [S-4] ..............................................................4190
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (scanner section) [S-2/3] ..........................................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section) ...........................................................................4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ........................................................................4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ...............................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4240
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-4] ...................................................................................4240
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-2/S-3] ............................................................................4250
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (desk section) ...........................................................................................4251
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section) ........................................................................................4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section) ...................................................................................4253
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart ................................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the order display. ........................4302
An abnormal print is made .....................................................................................................................................4304
Checking for media drive defect .............................................................................................................................4305
PC does not start properly. ......................................................................................................................................4306
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print ...................................................................... 4400
BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction) .................................................................................4400
Line like a bar code (film advance direction) .........................................................................................................4401
Light density line (white) (paper advance direction) ..............................................................................................4450
Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction) ...............................................................................4451
Light color is appeared in unexposure position ......................................................................................................4452
Stripped pattern like a wavy line ............................................................................................................................4453
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ............................................................................................. 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ...........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart ....................................................................... 4600
About the scanner adjustment chart ........................................................................................................................4600
DLS Error Messages ................................................................................................................ 4900
DLS Error Messages ...............................................................................................................................................4900
xii
System Error messages (No. 3-) .............................................................................................. 4910

No. 3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full ........................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full .......................................................................................................4910
No. 3-3 WIP Partition Is Full ................................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-4 WIP Partition Is Full ................................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ...................................................................................................................4911
Archive Error messages (No. 6-) .............................................................................................. 4920
No. 6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ..............................................................................................................4920
Archive Error messages (No. 10-) ............................................................................................ 4961
No. 10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ............................................................................................................4961
No. 10-10 Error While Uploading Network Order ...............................................................................................4961
No. 10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name ............................................................................4962
No. 10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ..........................................................................................................4962
No. 10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ...............................................................................4963
No. 10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name ............................................................................4963
No. 10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ...............................................................................4964
No. 10-19 Connection Processing Failed .............................................................................................................4965
No. 10-20 Busy Modem .......................................................................................................................................4965
Archive Error messages (No. 12-) ............................................................................................ 4970
No. 12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed ..........................................................................................................4970
No. 12-2 Print Initialization Failed .......................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-7 Rendering Error .....................................................................................................................................4972
No. 12-8 Printing Error .........................................................................................................................................4972
No. 12-11 Print Service Error ...............................................................................................................................4974
No. 12-13 Print Creation Error .............................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-14 Order Queuing Failed ..........................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-40 Error Preparing a Print .........................................................................................................................4977
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-) .................................................................................. 4980
No. 13-12 CD Authoring Complete ......................................................................................................................4980
No. 13-13 CD Authoring Complete ......................................................................................................................4980
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver ........................................................................ 40101
No. 101 Start the QSS and enter the Net Scan mode. .........................................................................................40101
No. 103 The QSS is already connected to another QSS TWAIN driver. Would you like to search for another QSS?
...............................................................................................................................................................................40101
No. 107 48 bit image may not correspond, depending on application. Would you like to enable the setting? 40107
No. 110 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Check the QSS. .................................................................40107
No. 115 The COM port for the external controller is already occupied by another application. Confirm the use
condition of the COM port. ..................................................................................................................................40108
No. 116 Failed to open the COM port for the external controller. .....................................................................40108
No. 117 Would you like to stop processing? ......................................................................................................40109
No. 502 Failed to connect with the QSS. Would you like to search the QSS? ................................................40110
No. 504 This version does not match the QSS. ..................................................................................................40110
No. 505 Communication has been disconnected. The QSS TWAIN driver will be closed. ............................40111
No. 508 A QSS TWAIN driver has been started. Multiple QSS TWAIN drivers cannot be started together. .40111
No. 512 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Quit the process. ................................................................40112
No. 513 Language version of message data is incorrect. Messages are displayed in English. .........................40113
No. 514 There is insufficient memory. ...............................................................................................................40113
xiii
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500

No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ........................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ................................................................40502
No. 0503[N][SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ......................................................................................................40502
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ....................................................................................40504
No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. .......................................................................................................................40506
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ..........................................................................................................40506
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ...................................40508
No. 0510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. .........................................................................................................40510
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. ..........................................................................................................................40514
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 40700
No. 0700-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .................................................40700
No. 0701-####[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ............................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ........................................................................................40702
No. 0703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? .................40702
No. 0704[SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package.
...............................................................................................................................................................................40704
No. 0705-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .................................................40704
xiv
Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000

No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...................................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ...................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .............................................41002
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B .............................................41002
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ................................................................................41004
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ................................................................................41004
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................................41010
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ...............................................................................41010
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ....................................................................41012
No. 1013 Outputting. . . ......................................................................................................................................41012
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ......................................................................41014
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? ........................................................................................................41016
No. 1024 Would you like to register the correction value? ................................................................................41024
No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. ..............................................................................................................41026
No. 1027-#### Profile data was not found. ........................................................................................................41026
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ...................41028
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ........................................................................................41028
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. ..........................................................................................................41030
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. ...............................................................41030
No. 1032 One moment please. . . ........................................................................................................................41032
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. .......................................................................41034
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. ...............................................................................................41038
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. ......................................................................................................41038
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. .....................................................................................................................41040
No. 1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete. ..............................................................................................................................................41040
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . ............................................................41042
No. 1047-#### Close printer door. .....................................................................................................................41046
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. ...............................................................41048
No. 1052-#### The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C .........................................................41052
No. 1053 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C .............................................41052
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ...............................................................................................................41064
No. 1067 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C ................................................................................41066
No. 1068 Replace the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C ..............................................................................41068
No. 1072 Paper color intensity is low. Execute correction? ..............................................................................41072
No. 1074-#### Sensors may be dirty. ................................................................................................................41074
No. 1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key. .................................41080
No. 1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. ..................................................................................................41080
Attention message: Scanner .................................................................................................. 41302
No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning? .......................................................................................................41302
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty. .......................................................................................................41304
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ...........................................41306
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet. ..................................................................................41312
No. 1314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range. ...............................................................................41314
No. 1315-#### LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted.process cannot be continued. ......................41314
No. 1316 Focus Adjustment failed. ....................................................................................................................41316
No. 1317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction. ........................................................................41316
No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. .................................................................41318
xv
Attention message: Film carrier ............................................................................................. 41400

No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. ........................................................................................................................41400
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. ......................................................................................................................41400
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC. ....................................................................................................................41402
No. 1403 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process. ............................................................................................41402
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete. ........................................................................................................41404
No. 1405-#### Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. .............................................................................41404
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier. ........................................................................................................41408
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. ............................................................................41410
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing? ....................................................41412
No. 1413 Input the frame number .......................................................................................................................41412
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected. .....................................................................................................41414
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane. .............................................................................................................................41416
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover. .......................................................................................................41416
No. 1420 Select the DX code. ............................................................................................................................41420
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed. ..............................................................41420
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane. .............................................................................................................................41422
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier. ............41423
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed. ...............................................................41423
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete. ........................................................................41423
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC. ...........................................................................................................................41426
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ..41426
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. .........................................................................................41428
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly. ....................................................................................41428
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size. ......................................................................................................................41430
No. 1431 Attach the 120 AFC. ...........................................................................................................................41430
No. 1432 Attach the MMC. ................................................................................................................................41432
No. 1433 Attach the AMC. .................................................................................................................................41432
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
...............................................................................................................................................................................41434
No. 1438 Set the attachment. ..............................................................................................................................41438
No. 1439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan? ...................................................................41438
xvi
Attention message: Disk/Media 1 ........................................................................................... 41500

No. 1500 Would you like to stop outputting media? ..........................................................................................41500
No. 1501 The media is write protected. ..............................................................................................................41500
No. 1502 Replace the media.### ........................................................................................................................41502
No. 1503 The appropriate file was not found.### ..............................................................................................41502
No. 1504 Image Destination for the print channel is not set. .............................................................................41504
No. 1505 Exif Information could not be read. ....................................................................................................41504
No. 1506 Would you like to remove the USB Flash Memory? ..........................................................................41506
No. 1508 There are some files that could not get written to the media. Would you like to stop processing? ...41508
No. 1509 Write the data. ##### Order Number .................................................................................................41508
No. 1510 Read the data. Set the media. ..............................................................................................................41510
No. 1511 Write the data. Set the media. .............................................................................................................41510
No. 1512 Data was not read from the media. .....................................................................................................41512
No. 1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? .....................................................................41512
No. 1514 Remove the USB Flash Memory. .......................................................................................................41514
No. 1515 Data is too large to write. ....................................................................................................................41514
No. 1516 Data is too large to read. .....................................................................................................................41516
No. 1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ..................................................................................................41516
No. 1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select different one. ........................................................41518
No. 1519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files? .........................41518
No. 1520 Select the template. .............................................................................................................................41520
No. 1521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print. .......................................................41520
No. 1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one? ..........................................................41522
No. 1523 It was not registered as an option. .......................................................................................................41522
No. 1524 CD-R External Writing System is being output. ................................................................................41524
No. 1526 Cannot disconnect the USB flash memory. Do you want to try again? .............................................41526
No. 1527 Write the data. Set the media. .............................................................................................................41526
No. 1528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing. ...................................................41528
No. 1529 Failed to read the bar code. .................................................................................................................41528
xvii
Attention message: Disk/Media 2 ........................................................................................... 41530

No. 1530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists. ....................41530
No. 1531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected. ..................41530
No. 1532 Write the data. .....................................................................................................................................41532
No. 1533 Data was saved to the storage media. .................................................................................................41532
No. 1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ........................41534
No. 1535 USB Flash Memory is not set. ............................................................................................................41534
No. 1536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media? ...............................................41536
No. 1537 The appropriate file was not found.#### ............................................................................................41536
No. 1538 There are still orders remaining for output. Click the Output Media icon to output. ........................41538
No. 1539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media. ...................................................41538
No. 1540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting. ........................................41540
No. 1541 The data for media output is waiting to be written. Settings cannot be changed until the data is written to
media. ....................................................................................................................................................................41540
No. 1542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ......................................41542
No. 1543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? ...41542
No. 1545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written. ......................................................41544
No. 1546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity
Setting. ..................................................................................................................................................................41546
No. 1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media. .................................................................41546
No. 1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ...........................................................41548
No. 1549 Data is too small to read. ....................................................................................................................41548
Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................. 41550
No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. ....................................................................................................41550
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? .............................................................41550
No. 1552-#### The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ............................................41552
Attention message: Pricing unit .............................................................................................. 41600
No. 1601-#### Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet. ..................................................................41600
No. 1603-#### The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. ...................................................................41602
No. 1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check ............................................................................................................41604
xviii
Attention message: NMC ....................................................................................................... 41620

No. 1621 Would you like to delete the order? ....................................................................................................41620
No. 1622 Would you like to quit the Net Order Receipt? ..................................................................................41622
No. 1634 Data could not be received. Would you like to delete the order? ......................................................41634
No. 1636 Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print Channel Setting is Normal Print. ............................41636
No. 1637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted. ....................................................................41636
No. 1638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted. ..............41638
No. 1639-#### Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted. ......................................................41638
No. 1641 Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm the Print Channel. ............................................................41640
No. 1642 Destination to save image is not set for the QSS Print Channel. Confirm the Print Channel. ..........41642
No. 1643 The appropriate file was not found. ....................................................................................................41642
No. 1644 Exif Information was not read. ...........................................................................................................41644
No. 1645 Data is too large to read. .....................................................................................................................41644
No. 1646 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ..................................................................................................41646
No. 1647 The appropriate file was not found. ....................................................................................................41646
No. 1648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? ....41648
No. 1649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed to write. .............................................................41648
No. 1650 Data is too small to read. ....................................................................................................................41650
No. 1653 The output media size is too large. The data cannot be output to the External System. ...................41652
No. 1657 Hold On Save could not be executed. Secure enough space, then restart processing. ......................41656
No. 1659 Calibrating... Would you like to stop the calibration? .......................................................................41658
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................... 41800
No. 1801-#### Execute software upgrade. .........................................................................................................41800
Attention message: Main ........................................................................................................ 41900
No. 1900-#### It was not registered as an option. .............................................................................................41900
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. .........................................41900
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. ..................................41902
No. 1903-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . ..........................................................................................41902
No. 1904-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . ..........................................................................................41904
No. 1905 Program Timer was not set. ................................................................................................................41904
No. 1909 Title was not set. .................................................................................................................................41908
No. 1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted. ..................................................................................41910
No. 1911 This Title data already exist. ...............................................................................................................41910
No. 1912 There is no format. New format will be created. ...............................................................................41912
No. 1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you like to edit? .......................................................41912
No. 1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No more data can be added. ........................................41914
No. 1920-#### Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. ................................41920
No. 1921-#### Capacity Booster Key was detected. .........................................................................................41920
No. 1922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings. .....................................................................41922
No. 1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than External System. ..................................................41922
No. 1924 Set the paper width wider than 203 mm for the Long Print. ..............................................................41924
No. 1925 Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode? .......................................................................................41924
No. 1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". .......................41926
No. 1927-#### Sort by Output Media Frame Number function cannot be used. ...............................................41926
No. 1928 DPOF file output function cannot be used. .........................................................................................41928
No. 1933 Select an input media other than the Compact Archive Unit. ............................................................41932
xix
Attention message: Compact archive unit .............................................................................. 43370

No. 3371-#### Could not execute Hold On Save. .............................................................................................43370
No. 3372 There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save. ...............................................................................43372
No. 3373 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Would you like to continue? ................43372
No. 3374 The Compact Archive Unit could not be used. Confirm the setting. .................................................43374
No. 3375 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Stop the process. ..................................43374
Attention message: Edit ......................................................................................................... 44000
No. 4001 Are you sure about deleting? ..............................................................................................................44000
No. 4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more. ..............................................................................44002
No. 4003-#### Image cannot be inserted into the specified position. ................................................................44002
No. 4004-#### Graphics are too large to insert. .................................................................................................44004
No. 4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width. .44006
No. 4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. .............................................................................44006
No. 4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder including the files. ...................................................44008
No. 4010 Specify the image area. .......................................................................................................................44010
No. 4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version. ...............................................................................44014
No. 4015 Selected file already exists. .................................................................................................................44014
No. 4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small. ...........................................44016
No. 4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? ...............................................................................................44018
No. 4019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import? ............44018
No. 4020-#### Failed to write the file. ...............................................................................................................44020
No. 4021 Failed to read the file. .........................................................................................................................44020
No. 4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range. .............................................................44022
No. 4024 Select the layer. ...................................................................................................................................44024
No. 4025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used. .............................................44024
No. 4026 The image size is too large to insert. ..................................................................................................44026
No. 4027 The same data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ............................................................44026
No. 4028 Failed to export the Image Save File. .................................................................................................44028
No. 4029 The drive is empty. .............................................................................................................................44028
No. 4030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data. .................................................................................44030
No. 4031 There is insufficient space left on the disk. ........................................................................................44030
No. 4032 Template size is too large to read. ......................................................................................................44032
No. 4033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template. ....................44032
No. 4034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area. ...........................................................................44034
No. 4035 Additional phrases could not be saved. ..............................................................................................44034
No. 4036 The image size is too small to insert. ..................................................................................................44036
No. 4037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ....................................................44036
No. 4038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? ...44038
No. 4039 Image size during editing is too large. ................................................................................................44038
No. 4040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field. .................................................44040
No. 4041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used. ...............................................................................44040
No. 4042 Single Form is not positioned. ............................................................................................................44042
No. 4043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area. ...................................................................................44042
No. 4044 Single Form is overlapped. .................................................................................................................44044
No. 4045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned. .................................................................44044
No. 4046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled. ............................44046
No. 4047 The selected font was not found. ........................................................................................................44046
No. 4048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print. ...............................................................................44048
No. 4049 No more items can be added. ..............................................................................................................44048
xx
Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ..................................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ...................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB ................................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ...............................................................................45503
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD ..........................................45504
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ...........................................45504
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB ........................................45504
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. .......................................................................45507
No. 5508[N] The processing solution level is too low. ......................................................................................45508
No. 5508[SM] The processing solution level is too low. ...................................................................................45508
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ...............................................................................................45508
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. .........................................................................................................45510
No. 5511[N] The circulation pump has stopped. CD .........................................................................................45511
No. 5513[N] The circulation pump has stopped. BF ..........................................................................................45511
No. 5515[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 .....................................................................................45511
No. 5511[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ......................................................................................45511
No. 5513[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. BF .......................................................................................45511
No. 5515[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ..................................................................................45511
Error message: Processor 2 .................................................................................................. 45519
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD .....................................................................................................................45519
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ......................................................................................................................45519
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ...................................................................................................................45519
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. .................................................................................................................45522
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...............................................................................................45524
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ...............................................................................................45524
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...........................................................................................45524
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ......................................................................................................45530
No. 5531 The dryer cover is open. .....................................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ................................................................45532
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. .......................................................................................45532
No. 5534-#### Print Sorter Unit operation error. ...............................................................................................45534
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. .......................................................................................45534
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ...............................................................................................................45536
No. 5538-#### Backup data error. Processor ....................................................................................................45538
No. 5539 Print Conveyor Unit was removed. .....................................................................................................45538
No. 5549-#### Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ...........................................................45548
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ....................................................................................................................45550
xxi
Error message: SM replenishment ......................................................................................... 45700

No. 5700-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ....................................................................45700
No. 5701-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ....................................................................45700
No. 5702-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ....................................................................45700
No. 5703-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ...................................................................45700
No. 5704-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .....................................................................45700
No. 5705-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B .....................................................................45700
No. 5706-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ......................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45708
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45708
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ......................................................................................45710
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W .......................................................................................45710
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...................................................................................45710
Error message: Printer 1 ........................................................................................................ 46012
No. 6012-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................................46012
No. 6013-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B .....................................................................................46012
No. 6014-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .................................................................................46014
No. 6015-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .................................................................................46014
No. 6016-#### Paper Cutter operation error. .....................................................................................................46016
No. 6017-#### Paper has jammed in the printer section. ...................................................................................46016
No. 6021-#### Paper remains in the printer section. .........................................................................................46020
No. 6049 Pressure Guide operation error. ..........................................................................................................46048
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. ....................................................................................................46054
No. 6056-#### Printer system error. ..................................................................................................................46056
No. 6069 The printer top cover is open. .............................................................................................................46068
No. 6073-#### Synchronous Sensor error. .........................................................................................................46072
No. 6074 B Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46074
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46074
No. 6076-#### Polygon Mirror control error. ....................................................................................................46076
No. 6077-#### Interlock error. ...........................................................................................................................46076
No. 6081-#### Backup data error. Printer .........................................................................................................46080
No. 6082-#### Setup error. ................................................................................................................................46082
No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error. ........................................................................................................46086
No. 6101-#### Paper Hold Motor operation error. ............................................................................................46100
No. 6104-#### Printer Door is open. ..................................................................................................................46104
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46104
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46104
No. 6107-#### R Laser temperature is out of range. .........................................................................................46107
No. 6112-#### Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ...........................................................................46112
No. 6113-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C .................................................................................46112
No. 6134-#### Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. .............................................................46134
No. 6135-#### Arm Unit 1 operation error. .......................................................................................................46134
No. 6136-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .................................................46136
No. 6137-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. .................................................46136
xxii
Error message: Printer 2 ........................................................................................................ 46138

No. 6138-#### Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. ...................................................................46138
No. 6139-#### Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. .................................................................46138
No. 6140-#### Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. .................................................................................46140
No. 6141-#### Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. ...............................................................................46140
No. 6142-#### Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. ................................................46142
No. 6143-#### Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. ..............................................46142
No. 6148-#### Paper End Sensor A error. .........................................................................................................46148
No. 6149-#### Paper End Sensor B error. .........................................................................................................46148
No. 6150-#### Paper End Sensor C error. .........................................................................................................46148
No. 6151-#### Paper Loading Sensor error. ......................................................................................................46151
No. 6152-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ...............................................................................46152
No. 6153-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. .............................................................................46152
No. 6155-#### Exposure Start Sensor error. ......................................................................................................46154
No. 6157-#### Paper Sensor 1 error. .................................................................................................................46156
No. 6158-#### Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error. .......................................................................................................46158
No. 6159-#### Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error. ...................................................................................................46158
No. 6160-#### Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. .....................................................................................................46158
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. .......................................................46172
No. 6177-#### Laser Unit temperature is out of range. .....................................................................................46176
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ..............................................................................................................46178
No. 6187 Setup calculation error. .......................................................................................................................46186
Error message: Scanner ........................................................................................................ 46302
No. 6303-#### Scanner Zoom 1 operation error. ...............................................................................................46302
No. 6304-#### Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. ...............................................................................................46304
No. 6305-#### Scanner Focus operation error. ..................................................................................................46304
No. 6306-#### Scanner IRIS operation error. ....................................................................................................46306
No. 6309-#### Scanner change of light error. ...................................................................................................46308
No. 6311-#### Scanner data error. .....................................................................................................................46310
No. 6319-#### Backup data error. Scanner AFC ..............................................................................................46318
No. 6321-#### Focus auto adjustment error. .....................................................................................................46320
No. 6322-#### Scanner input balance error. ......................................................................................................46322
No. 6324 F stop value range error. .....................................................................................................................46324
No. 6327-#### Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. ...................................................46326
No. 6329-#### Analog setting communication error. ........................................................................................46328
No. 6330-#### Digital setting communication error. .........................................................................................46330
No. 6331-#### Line scanning communication error. .........................................................................................46330
No. 6332-#### Light Source adjustment error. ..................................................................................................46332
No. 6333-#### The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error. ...................................................................46332
No. 6336-#### Scanner Zoom operation error. ..................................................................................................46336
xxiii
Error message: Film carrier .................................................................................................... 46400

No. 6400-#### Perforation Sensor error. ...........................................................................................................46400
No. 6401-#### Loading Sensor error. ................................................................................................................46400
No. 6402-#### Ready Sensor error. ...................................................................................................................46402
No. 6403-#### 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ..................................................................................46402
No. 6407-#### Spool Key operation error. ........................................................................................................46406
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked. .............................................................................................................46408
No. 6409-#### The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ......................................................................................46408
No. 6410-#### Film Sensor error. ......................................................................................................................46410
No. 6411-#### Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed. ................................................46410
No. 6412-#### 135 DX Sensor 1 error. ..............................................................................................................46412
No. 6423 Auto focus error. .................................................................................................................................46422
No. 6424-#### Mount Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46424
No. 6425-#### Mount detection error. ...............................................................................................................46424
No. 6426 The lane is out of position. ..................................................................................................................46426
No. 6429-#### System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) .............................................................................46428
No. 6431 Auto focus error. .................................................................................................................................46430
No. 6432-#### Mount Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46432
No. 6433-#### Mount detection error. ...............................................................................................................46432
No. 6434-#### Mount detection (inlet) error. ....................................................................................................46434
No. 6435-#### Mount insertion operation error. ................................................................................................46434
No. 6436-#### Mount elevator operation error. .................................................................................................46436
No. 6437-#### Mount eject operation error. ......................................................................................................46436
No. 6438-#### 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped. .............................................................................................46438
No. 6439-#### The film strip is too short for processing. ..................................................................................46438
No. 6441-#### The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ......................................................................................46440
No. 6442-#### The perforation of the film may be broken. ..............................................................................46442
No. 6443 Move Table operation error. ...............................................................................................................46444
No. 6444 Cartridge is out of position. ................................................................................................................46444
Error message: Disk/Media .................................................................................................... 46502
No. 6503 Formatting could not be executed. ......................................................................................................46502
No. 6504 Backup data could not be read. ...........................................................................................................46504
No. 6505 Backup data could not be written. ......................................................................................................46504
No. 6506-#### Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). ...........................................................46506
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................... 46550
No. 6551-#### Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ..............................................................................46550
No. 6552-#### Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit ........................................................................................46552
No. 6554-#### Calibration Plate advance error. ................................................................................................46554
xxiv
Error message: Pricing unit .................................................................................................... 46600

No. 6600-#### Pricing Unit communication error. ............................................................................................46600
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ..........................................................................................................46600
No. 6602-#### Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ..........................................................................................46602
No. 6603-#### Backup data error. PU ..............................................................................................................46602
Error message: D-ICE control ................................................................................................ 46640
No. 6640-#### System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) .........................................................................................46640
No. 6641-#### Backup Data error. D-ICE Control PCB ..................................................................................46640
No. 6642-#### D-ICE Control PCB error. .........................................................................................................46642
No. 6643-#### Digital Masking Unit operation error. .......................................................................................46642
Error message: Software upgrade ......................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...................................46802
Error message: Image processing PCB ................................................................................. 46822
No. 6822-#### Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. .................................................................46822
Error: Main ............................................................................................................................. 46900
No. 6900-#### Main control system error. ........................................................................................................46900
No. 6901-#### ARCNET communication error. ...............................................................................................46900
No. 6902-#### LVDS communication error. .....................................................................................................46902
No. 6903-#### Serial communication error. ......................................................................................................46902
No. 6906-#### Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? ................................................................46906
No. 6907-#### The file was not found. ..............................................................................................................46906
No. 6908-#### Processing response error. .........................................................................................................46908
No. 6909-#### CPU was reset. Abort the process. ...........................................................................................46908
No. 6913-#### System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ................................................................46912
No. 6916-#### PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error. .................................................................................46916
No. 6918-#### Failed to start the DLS. ..............................................................................................................46918
No. 6922-#### Device control error. ..................................................................................................................46922
Error: Compact Archive Unit .................................................................................................. 48360
No. 8361 Archive File read error. .......................................................................................................................48360
No. 8362 Archive File write error. .....................................................................................................................48362
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. ............................................................................................48362
No. 8364 Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ..............................................................................................48364
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................... 49000
No. 9000-#### Edit mode System error. ...........................................................................................................49000
No. 9001-#### Edit mode Information file error. .............................................................................................49000
No. 9002-#### Edit mode Image data error. .....................................................................................................49002
No. 9003-#### Edit mode Image read error. .....................................................................................................49002
5. Operation sequence
Starting up/Closing down Operation ...................................................................................... 50500
Startup sequence ...................................................................................................................................................50500
Startup sequence (DLS specification) ..................................................................................................................50501
Startup sequence for PC ........................................................................................................................................50510
ARCNET communication ....................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow ............................................................................................................................50520
How to use the fiber cutter ....................................................................................................................................50520
How to use the aspirator .......................................................................................................................................50520
xxv
Data flow chart ....................................................................................................................... 50600

Data flow in printing (negative/positive) ..............................................................................................................50600
Data flow in printing (media) ...............................................................................................................................50610
Data flow in data saving .......................................................................................................................................50620
Data flow to the CD-R external writing system ...................................................................................................50630
Data flow to the CAU ...........................................................................................................................................50640
Data flow in the image processing PCB ...............................................................................................................50650
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB ................................................................................................................................50660
Data flow of the Net Scan mode [Stand Alone Scanner] .....................................................................................50670
Data flow in the Image Processing PCB [Stand Alone Scanner] .........................................................................50680
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification) ...................................................................................... 50800
Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS specification] .................................................50800
Data flow in printing [DLS specification] ............................................................................................................50810
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification] .......................................................................................................50820
Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification] ..............................................................................50830
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification] ................................................................................................50840
Film carrier section ................................................................................................................. 51010
Film feed operation (135) .....................................................................................................................................51010
Film feed operation (MMC) .................................................................................................................................51510
Film advance operation (AMC) ............................................................................................................................51550
Paper path diagram ................................................................................................................ 55000
Paper path diagram ...............................................................................................................................................55000
Paper advance operation ....................................................................................................... 55100
Paper supply operation (loading operation) ..........................................................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation) .....................................................................................................55200
Exposure advance operation .................................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation) ..................................................................................55400
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation) ..................................................................................55500
Paper rewind operation .........................................................................................................................................55600
Paper splicing operation .......................................................................................................................................55700
Paper end operation ..............................................................................................................................................55800
Fogged paper operation ........................................................................................................................................55900
Processor paper advance operation ...................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation .......................................................................................................................56100
Print conveyor unit operation ................................................................................................. 56200
Print conveyor unit operation ...............................................................................................................................56200
Print sorter unit operation ....................................................................................................... 56300
Print sorter unit operation .....................................................................................................................................56300
6. Electrical parts
Position of electrical parts (desk section) ............................................................................... 61000
Desk section (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) ..........................................................................................61000
xxvi
Position of electrical parts (scanner section) .......................................................................... 62000

Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-2] ...........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-2] .............................................................................................62050
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section) ................................................................... 62100
135/240 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ....................................................................................................................62100
135/240 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ......................................................................................................62150
120 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ...........................................................................................................................62200
120 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) .............................................................................................................62250
135/240 MMC-II (positions of PCBs) ..................................................................................................................62400
135/240 MMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................................................................62450
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................................................................62500
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................................................................62550
MFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) ....................................................................................62660
MFC (position and description of electrical parts) ...............................................................................................62670
Position of electrical parts (printer section) ............................................................................ 63000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) .......................................................................................................................63000
Printer section (positions of electrical parts) ........................................................................................................63050
Paper magazine mounts A, B and C (positions of electrical parts) ......................................................................63051
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts) ...................................................................................................63060
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63070
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) .......................................................................................63080
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63090
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63100
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts) ............................................................................................63110
Description of PCB (processor section) ................................................................................. 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] ...........................................................................................................63200
Processor section (position of PCB) [SM] ............................................................................................................63200
Positions of electrical parts (processor section) ..................................................................... 63250
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] .............................................................................................63250
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] ..........................................................................................63250
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) ............................ 63260
Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) .......................................................63260
xxvii
Descriptions of PCB (desk section) ........................................................................................ 64000

Image processing PCB (J390864) ........................................................................................................................64000
Image correction PCB (J390913) .........................................................................................................................64010
D-ICE control PCB (J390946) ..............................................................................................................................64030
D-ICE PCB (J390903) ..........................................................................................................................................64040
D-ICE control PCB and removing the D-ICE PCB ..............................................................................................64045
DIMM (I090499) ..................................................................................................................................................64050
Scratch mend PCB 2 (J390905) ............................................................................................................................64060
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] (J390904) ..........................................................64070
Data change-over PCB (J390906) ........................................................................................................................64080
ARCNET HUB PCB (J390479) ...........................................................................................................................64100
Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645) ..................................................................................................................64110
Keyboard switch PCB (J390794) .........................................................................................................................64120
Colorimeter control PCB (J390801) .....................................................................................................................64130
PU control PCB (J307103) ...................................................................................................................................64140
Power PCB (J390938) ..........................................................................................................................................64160
Description of power supply (desk section) .........................................................................................................64170
Description of PCB (scanner section) .................................................................................... 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390879) ...................................................................................................................65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390768) [S-2/S-3] .....................................................................................................65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4] ............................................................................................................65010
LED driver PCB ...................................................................................................................................................65020
Power supply (scanner) .........................................................................................................................................65060
PM driver ..............................................................................................................................................................65070
Description of PCB (film carrier section) ................................................................................ 65200
Connecting PCB 1 (J390756) ...............................................................................................................................65200
Connecting PCB 2 (J390482) ...............................................................................................................................65210
Connecting PCB 3 (J490255) ...............................................................................................................................65220
Driver PCB 1 (J390368) .......................................................................................................................................65230
Driver PCB 2 ........................................................................................................................................................65240
Sensor PCB (J390757) ..........................................................................................................................................65250
Power PCB (J390755) ..........................................................................................................................................65260
Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051) ..............................................................................................................65270
Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784) ..............................................................................................................65270
Connecting PCB 4 (J390579) ...............................................................................................................................65280
Connecting PCB (J390371) ..................................................................................................................................65290
Sensor PCB (J390385) ..........................................................................................................................................65300
Connecting PCB (J390372) ..................................................................................................................................65310
Sensor PCB (J390394) ..........................................................................................................................................65320
MMC connecting PCB (J390483) ........................................................................................................................65330
MMC sensor PCB (J390389) ................................................................................................................................65340
AMC connecting PCB (J390700) .........................................................................................................................65350
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390779) ...................................................................................................................65360
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709) ...........................................................................................................................65370
Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit (W411413/W411414) ......................................................................................65380
Connecting PCB 1 (J390783) ...............................................................................................................................65390
Connecting PCB 2 (J490291) ...............................................................................................................................65400
xxviii
Description of PCB (printer section) ....................................................................................... 66000

Printer control PCB (J390947) .............................................................................................................................66000
Laser control PCB (J390919) ...............................................................................................................................66010
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390866) ................................................................................................................................66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390867) ................................................................................................................................66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J390868) ................................................................................................................................66040
Triple magazine PCB (J390835) ..........................................................................................................................66050
Laser I/O PCB (J390945) .....................................................................................................................................66060
B and G laser drivers (J390973) Laser unit (Type A1) .......................................................................................66070
B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1) .......................................................................................66070
AOM driver (I124020) .........................................................................................................................................66080
CVP PCB (J390943) .............................................................................................................................................66090
Power supply (printer section) ..............................................................................................................................66100
Description of PCB (processor section) ................................................................................. 66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [N] ..................................................................................................................66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM] ...............................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [N] ........................................................................................................................66210
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM] .....................................................................................................................66210
Processor relay PCB (J390917) ............................................................................................................................66220
SM I/O PCB (J390330) [SM] ...............................................................................................................................66600
Power supply (processor) .....................................................................................................................................67400
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) .................................................................................68050
Cables .................................................................................................................................... 68100
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable ........................................................................68100
Handling the flat cable ..........................................................................................................................................68200
Power ON/OFF ...................................................................................................................... 68500
Operation when the power supply is turned on ....................................................................................................68500
When power is not supplied to input and output sections (How to use the starter jumper) ................................68550
7. Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................... 70010
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) ........................................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) .................................................70020
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Scanner] ..................................................................................................70021
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer] ....................................................................................................70022
Procedure for downgrading the profile data .........................................................................................................70025
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..................................................70040
Processor setting check [N] ..................................................................................................................................70050
Processor setting check [SM] ...............................................................................................................................70050
xxix
8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts ..................................................................................................... 80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Desk Section) ..........................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Scanner Section) .....................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer Section) .......................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] ...........................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM] ........................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N] .............................................................................................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM] ..........................................................................................80110
Positions of paper jam release labels .................................................................................... 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels ....................................................................................................................80210
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] ..............................................................................................................................80310
Service personnel tool list [SM] ...........................................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................... 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ..............................................................................................................81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) ..............................................................................81020
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors ................................................................... 81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] .......................................................................................81510
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ..................................................... 88000
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ...................................................................................88000
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89000
Table of wiring diagrams ......................................................................................................................................89000
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89010
Wiring diagram table [S-4] ...................................................................................................................................89010
xxx
1000
Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010

Description of warning (signal words) ..............................................................................................................10010
1 Cautions for work

Location of warning labels ................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation ............................................................................................................... 10030
For safe operation ..............................................................................................................................................10030
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ..............................10040
Laser Precautions ...............................................................................................................................................10050
Precautions against LED ...................................................................................................................................10060
1000 1/1
10010
Description of warning (signal words)
• Signal words identify the level of injuries that can potentially occur.
• The signal words used in this manual and found on labels, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, are assigned according to the
level of potential risk.

• Warning labels are located at or near the part of the machine that pose the indicated danger. If ignored, death or serious injury occurs,
or the machine breaks down. Be sure to follow the indications in the manuals or on the warning labels.
• The warnings include a signal word, the type and extent of the danger, and information to avoid danger.
• Carefully read and follow the warnings included in this manual and on the warning labels before operating the machine.
This indicates situations that if not immediately avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in non-life threatening injury. It is also used to indicate situations
which may cause damage to physical property.
Example of warning label

Warning (signal word)
Symbol mark (warning

indication)
Warning text (warning

indication)
SIGNALWORD
10010 1/1
10020
Location of warning labels
The following shows the locations and types of warning labels and the parts number on this machine. Heed the clearly indicated warnings
and operate safely without accidents. If the warning labels on the machine become illegible or peel off, contact your place of purchase and
exchange them with new labels.
Though the machine appearance of some models may be different from figures, locations of warning labels are same as shown in figures.

Input Section
1 1
13
1
G068043
Printer processor section

10 9 3 4
10 2 11
6
11
11
8
1
;;;
;; ;;
;;
;;;
;; ;;
;;;
;; ;;
;; ;;;
;;; ;;;
;;;
;; ;;; ;;;; ;
;;;
;; ;; ;;;;;
;;;;
;; ;;; ;;;;
;
;;;;
;;
;;;;
;;
;;;;
;;
;
3 4 3 1
1
G068044
10020 1/4
10020
135/240 AFC-II

12
G071691
14
G050548
15
G061413
1 2
A023349-01 A023200-01
3 4
A022523-01 A022531-01
10020 2/4
10020
5 6
A022509-01

7
A234392-01
8
A234350-01
9 10
A022536-01 A023202-01
11 12
A515330-01 A227560-01
10020 3/4
10020
13
A063381-01

14 15
A031010-01 A064649-01
10020 4/4
10030
For safe operation
For safe operation
For safe operation
! General precautions

• Prior to any part replacement or mechanical adjustment, be sure the main power supply is turned off.
• Since the work which uses key operations cannot turn off the circuit breaker, mechanical operation check during it
requires particular attention.
IMPORTANT
• Ground wires (green and yellow) are connected to the covers and units of the machine.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires as they were.
• Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).
! Precautions for processing solutions
• This machine uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.
• Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
• Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.
10030 1/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions against electric shock
• If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the machine, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the machine.

• Pay attention to avoid shocks when performing troubleshooting, wiring checking, or voltage/current measurement.
• When replacing a fuse or PCB, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and the main power supply. Wait for 10 seconds
or more before replacement.
! Precautions for operating rotary section
• Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove the cover unless it is specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine before performing any work.
Keep away your hands from the machine during operation.
If your hand or the like is caught and you cannot move, ask someone around you to turn off the circuit breaker at once.
! Precautions for operating heating section
• The lamp for light source, processing solution heater, dryer heater, and motor generate an intense heat.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered. Cool the
lamp for light source for 15 minutes or more after turning off the lamp.
After the temperature is fully lowered, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine and perform
the operation.
Each cooling time of heaters and motors differs depending on the status of operation that has been performed.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with flowing water and contact a physician as soon as possible.
10030 2/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions for movable units
• There is a danger of hands being caught by the open/close covers or doors, or by the movable units.
When opening and closing covers or doors, be sure to hold them firmly.

When moving a unit manually, hold the specified parts only.
When working with a unit which automatically moves, or when working around the unit, be sure to turn off the circuit
breaker and main power supply.
If your hand is caught and you cannot move, immediately call for help to turn off the circuit breaker.
! Precautions for using edged tools
• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

Do not remove the covers from edged tools. Keep hands away from edged tools.
When operating near edged tools, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply.
• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

When replacing an edged tool with a new one, do not touch the edge.
10030 3/3
10040
For safe operation
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

electrical parts
If an electronically charged human body touches electronic parts such as PCBs, it may adversely affect the electronic parts.
When handling the electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools to prevent the components on the PCB from being damaged due

to static electricity.
Also use the static-dissipative tools for maintenance of the digital-related units or engines.
Static-dissipative tool
Description Remarks
Portable Static-Dissipative Field Service Kit Use this kit when replacing or installing/removing the electronic parts from the
machine. This kit consists of four items of Static-Dissipative Work Mat, Wrist
Strap, all-in-one Ground Cord, and Alligator Clips.
Static-Dissipative conductive gloves Use this to prevent that sebum on your hand adheres when you touch a PCB.
Wrist strap Use this when checking the electronic parts.
• When using the static-dissipative tool, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the unit and the main power supply, and
wait 10 seconds or more to carry out operation.
10040 1/1
10050
For safe operation
Laser Precautions
The laser machinery is built into the printer.

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to laser radiation.
• Do not perform the operation that is not described in this manual.
• Do not perform printing operations while the safety switch is released.
Location of laser labels
The labels for the laser are placed on this machine.
When the triple magazine is not equipped When the triple magazine is equipped
5 1
5 1
2
2 3
3 4 4
G068048
1 2
3 4
10050 1/2
10050
For safe operation
10050 2/2
10060
For safe operation
Precautions against LED
The LED machinery is built into the scanner.

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to LED radiation.
• Do not remove any parts except specified ones.
• Do not take a direct look with optical instruments.
Location of LED labels
The labels for the LED precautions are placed on this machine.
Do not remove those labels.
1 2 G070355
1 2
10060 1/2
10060
For safe operation

10060 2/2
2000
Removing covers ................................................................................................................. 20010

Removing covers (Printer section) ....................................................................................................................20010
Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM] .................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (scanner section) ...................................................................................................................20030
Removing covers (film carrier section) .............................................................................................................20040
Removing covers (Desk section) .......................................................................................................................20050
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting the belt tension .................................................................................................... 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) .......................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) ...................................................................................................20120
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ............................................................................................................20125
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section) ................................................................................................20130
Display monitor section ....................................................................................................... 20310
Replacing the display monitor ...........................................................................................................................20310
Replacing the display monitor (DLS specification) ..........................................................................................20320
Scanner section ................................................................................................................... 20610
Removing the scanner unit [S-2/S-3] ................................................................................................................20610
Removing the scanner unit [S-4] .......................................................................................................................20610
Removing the LED light source unit [S-2/S-3] .................................................................................................20620
Removing the LED light source unit [S-4] ........................................................................................................20620
Adjusting the scanner section after replacement ...............................................................................................20650
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II) .................................................................................. 20700
Replacing the film carrier ..................................................................................................................................20700
Removing the advance unit ...............................................................................................................................20710
Replacing and adjusting the film feed motor .....................................................................................................20720
Replacing and adjusting the spool key motor ....................................................................................................20730
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door drive axis .....................................................................................20740
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door motor ............................................................................................20750
Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit ...............................................................................................20760
Adjusting the light lock door drive timing ........................................................................................................20780
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II) ................................................................ 20850
MMC auto focus section adjustment .................................................................................................................20850
Desk section ........................................................................................................................ 21110
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate ..........................................................................................21110
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter .............................................................................................................21120
Adjusting the gap of the negative cleaner brush ................................................................................................21150
Paper magazine section ...................................................................................................... 22000
Checking the paper magazine ............................................................................................................................22000
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine mount ...................................................................................22100
Paper supply unit ................................................................................................................. 25610
Removing the paper supply unit ........................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ................................................................................25620
Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor ....................................................................25630
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor .................................................................................25640
Adjusting the imprint pressure of the CVP .......................................................................................................25650
Removing paper supply unit A ..........................................................................................................................25660
2000 1/2
2000
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................ 25810

Removing the exposure advance unit ................................................................................................................25810
Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit ..............................................................................25820
Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit ...........................................................................................25830
Banding shooting ...............................................................................................................................................25910
Paper Advance Unit 1 .......................................................................................................... 26510
Removing paper advance unit 1 ........................................................................................................................26510
Paper Advance Unit 2 .......................................................................................................... 26550
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing paper advance unit 2 ........................................................................................................................26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and adjusting the pressure timing for the
arm(s) .................................................................................................................................................................26560
Adjusting the arm position ................................................................................................................................26570
Processor loading unit ......................................................................................................... 26610
Removing the processor loading unit ................................................................................................................26610
Laser unit ............................................................................................................................. 26710
Removing the laser unit .....................................................................................................................................26710
Zigzag adjustment ............................................................................................................... 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ....................................................................................26810
Drive section ........................................................................................................................ 27230
Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack ..............................................................................................................27230
Adjusting the position of the dryer rack ............................................................................................................27260
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension ..............................................................................................................27270
Order classification section .................................................................................................. 27410
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray ......................................................................................27410
Removing the print conveyor unit .....................................................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray .....................................................................................................................27430
Removing the print sorter unit ...........................................................................................................................27440
Replenishment package unit ............................................................................................... 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ..................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] ..................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] .....................................................................27830
2000 2/2
20010
Removing covers
Removing covers
Removing covers (Printer section)
When the triple magazine is not equipped

4
When the triple magazine is equipped
2
6
Remove screws with this mark.
Loosen screws with this mark.

G069801
No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Printer side cover 8 When the triple magazine unit is equipped, the number of screws for
the printer side cover is six.
20010 1/2
20010
Removing covers

(Q'ty)
2 Printer rear cover 16
3 Printer door 1 -
4 Printer door 2 -
5 Printer door 3 -
6 Printer top cover -
20010 2/2
20020
Removing covers
Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM]
6
9

8
3
11
10 2

G069802
20020 1/2
20020
Removing covers
13
Holder (2)

Conveyor guide
12

G070010

(Q'ty)
1 Processor cover 1 4
2 Sub-tank top cover -
3 Processor rear cover 2
4 Processor door 1 2 Remove this after first removing the mounting plate of the processor
door 1.
5 Processor door 2 2 Remove this after first removing the mounting plate of the processor
door 2.
6 Processor cover 4 7
7 Processor drive cover 4
8 Conveyor damper cover 2
9 Angle bracket cover - Remove this after removing the dryer side cover.
10 Distribution plate cover 3 Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
11 Dryer side cover 4
12 Sorter cover 1
13 Conveyor cover 4 Remove this after removing holder (2) and the conveyor guide.
20020 2/2
20030
Removing covers
Removing covers (scanner section)

4
2
3 G068522

(Q'ty)
1 Scanner top cover
2 Scanner front cover 2 Remove this after first removing the scanner top cover.
3 Scanner lower cover 3 Remove this after removing the scanner top cover, the scanner front
cover and the film cleaner mount.
4 Scanner rear cover 3 Remove this after first removing the scanner top cover.
5 Film cleaner mount 2
20030 1/1
20040
Removing covers
Removing covers (film carrier section)
135/240 AFC-II
2
Screws (top cover)
Connecting PCB 2 3

6
Cable guide
4 5

G057591

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 3 Remove this after removing PCB cover 2 and the flat cable of
connecting PCB 2.
2 PCB cover 1 2
3 Bottom cover 1 4 On some units, bottom covers 1 and 2 are changed into a set form.
4 Bottom cover 2 3
5 Bottom cover 3 5
6 Maintenance cover -
7 PCB cover 2 2
120 AFC-II
5
2
3 1
4 G051071
20040 1/4
20040
Removing covers

(Q'ty)
1 Drive motor cover 1
2 Belt cover 1 3
3 Belt cover 2 2
4 PCB cover 2
5 Bottom cover 1 4
6 Bottom cover 2 1

110 AFC-II
2 5
1
3
4 G052612

(Q'ty)
2 Belt cover 1 4
3 Belt cover 2 2
4 PCB cover 2
5 Bottom cover 1 4
6 Bottom cover 2 1
135/240 MMC-II
1
2 G052613
20040 2/4
20040
Removing covers

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 2
2 PCB cover 3
3 Bottom cover 2
135 AFC-II
1 3
5
Rewinding detection unit

6
Rewinding unit 4
G057592

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 3
3 Belt cover 1 2 Remove this after removing the rewinding detector unit and the
rewinding unit.
4 Belt cover 2 2 Remove this after removing belt cover 1.
5 Bottom cover 1 4
6 Bottom cover 2 1
135/240 AMC-II
1
2 G060694
20040 3/4
20040
Removing covers

(Q'ty)
1 Top cover 3
2 Front cover 5
3 Loading stocker mount cover 2
20040 4/4
20050
Removing covers
Removing covers (Desk section)

3

G068535

(Q'ty)
1 PC rear cover 6
2 PC side cover 6 Remove this after removing the PC rear cover.
3 Rear cover 16
4 Monitor table cover 2
20050 1/1
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section)
18
View from the arrow

19
16,17
20
15

14
Exposure advance unit (far side)
21
12
13
11
10 22
7,8
9
5
6
2 3
G069803
IMPORTANT
• All views of belts are from the side of printer doors.
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration

1 Paper magazine motor A belt 411 to 637 g 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(4.0 to 6.3N) A
2 Paper supply motor A belt 1086±214 g 1.0 mm Paper supply motor A

(10.7±2.1N)
3 Paper supply motor B/C belt 638±136 g 1.0 mm Paper supply motor B/C
(6.3±1.3N)
4 Paper magazine motor C belt 412 to 637 g 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(4.0 to 6.3N) C
20110 1/3
20110

5 Paper magazine motor B belt 441 to 657 g 2.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(4.3 to 6.4N) B
6 Paper advance motor 1 belt 198±43 g 1.0 mm Paper advance motor 1

(1.9±0.4N)
7 Paper supply arm motor (left) 255±48 g 5.0 mm Paper supply arm motor
belt (2.5±0.5N) (left)

8 Paper supply arm motor (right) Paper supply arm motor
belt (right)
9 Exposure advance motor 1 belt 200 to 230 g 1.0 mm Pre-exposure advance
(2.0 to 2.3N) pressure release motor 1
10 Exposure advance pressure 90 to 130 g 1.0 mm Pre-exposure advance

change motor 2 belt (0.9 to 1.3N) pressure release motor 2
11 Exposure advance pressure 90 to 140 g 1.0 mm Exposure advance

change motor 1 belt (0.9 to 1.4N) pressure change motor 1
12 Exposure advance motor 1 belt 1050 to 1150 g 1.0 mm Exposure advance

(10.3 to 11.3N) motor 1
13 Exposure advance motor 2 belt 900 to 1000 g 2.0 mm Exposure advance

(8.8 to 9.8N) motor 2

(2.1±0.5N)
15 Pressure guide motor belt 294±59 g 1.0 mm Pressure guide motor

(2.9±0.6N)
16 Paper advance arm motor (right) 280±60 g 5.0 mm Paper advance arm
belt (belt width: 10 mm) (2.7±0.6N) motor (right)
17 Paper advance pressure change Paper advance pressure
motor (left) belt (belt width: 10 change motor (left)
mm)
16 Paper advance arm motor (right) 383±46 g 8.0 mm Paper advance arm
belt (belt width: 8 mm) (3.8±0.5N) motor (right)
17 Paper advance pressure change Paper advance pressure
motor (left) belt (belt width: 8 change motor (left)
mm)
20110 2/3
20110

18 Lane select motor (left) belt 178±33 g 5.0 mm Lane select motor (left)
19 Lane select motor (right) belt (1.8±0.3N) Lane select motor
(right)

(5.7±1.0N)

21 Paper advance belt 270±53 g 2.0 mm Tension pulley
(2.7±0.5N)
22 Advance belt No need to adjust the belt tension.
20110 3/3
20120
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section)

2
G070006

1 Sorter motor timing belt 330±10 g 2.7 mm Motor mount
(3.24±0.1N)
2 Sorter chain*1 275±25 g 10 mm Two tension plates

(2.7±0.25N)
(17 order
specification)
425±25 g
(4.17±0.25N)
(14 order
specification)
3 Conveyor motor timing belt*2 - - Conveyor motor (four

screws)
4 Drive motor belt*3 265 to 296 g 1.6 mm Drive motor (four

(2.6 to 2.9N) screws)
5 Dryer rack drive chain It is automatically tensed. No adjustment is needed.
*1. Remove all the print receiving trays, then adjust tension on the sorter chain belt.
*2. The procedure for adjusting the conveyor motor timing belt is shown below:
20120 1/2
20120
Adjust the timing belt so that part A is 15.4±0.9 mm by moving the conveyor motor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

G070007
*3. For details, refer to ☞ 27270.
20120 2/2
20125
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter)

1 G072390
Colorimeter
1 Paper advance motor belt 163±30 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
(1.6±0.3N) tension pulley
Paper advance motor belt 74±15 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the

(0.73±0.15 tension pulley
N)
NOTE
• There are two types of belt tensions for the colorimeter unit. The strength differs depending on the belt positions.
20125 1/1
20130
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section)
135/240 AFC-II
3
4
2

1
G051066
135/240 AFC-II
1 Film feed belt (135 insertion 0.77±0.17N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the
section) (79±17 g) tension pulley
2 Film feed motor drive belt 1.73±0.39N 0.5 mm Mounting position of the
(176±40 g) motor
3 Film feed belt 1.95± 0.34N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the

(199±35 g) tension pulley
4 Rewinding drive belt 0.91±0.05N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the

110 AFC-II, 120 AFC-II

3
G051067
20130 1/3
20130

1 Winding drive belt (120 AFC- 0.66±0.15N 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
II) (67±15 g) tension pulley
Winding drive belt (110 AFC- 0.66±0.15N 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
II) (67±15 g) tension pulley

2 Film feed belt 0.27±0.07N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the
(118±24.5 g) motor
135 AFC-II
G057664
135 AFC-II
1 Film feed belt 0.28±0.08N 0.5 mm Attaching position of the
(28.5±8.3 g) tension pulley
(118±24 g) motor
20130 2/3
20130
135/240 AMC-II
2

1
G060695
135/240 AMC-II
1 Loading arm drive belt 0.083±0.015N 2.0 mm Mounting position of the
(8.5±1.5 g) motor
2 Ejection roller belt - - -
20130 3/3
20310
Display monitor section
Replacing the display monitor IMPORTANT

• Remove the connectors on keyboard switch
PCB if the standard PC is equipped.
! Procedure
2. Remove the monitor mount. (Loosen four
screws.)
Replacing the display monitor
Monitor table
1. Disconnect the connector(s).
RGB connector (Monitor)
Power supply connector (Monitor)
2. Remove the monitor table cover. (two

screws)
Display monitor
Power supply connector
RGB connector
J/P171
J/P176
J/P172
Mouse
Keyboard
G068525
Monitor table cover ! Adjustment after replacement

G068523
3. Remove the monitor fixing angle bracket. 1. Carry out the monitor setup.
(two screws) ☞ 32530
Monitor fixing angle bracket
G068524
Removing the monitor mount

J/P171 (Keyboard switch PCB)
Keyboard
Mouse
20310 1/1
20320
Replacing the display monitor (DLS 2. Remove the monitor table cover. (two
screws)
specification)
Touch monitor
! Procedure RGB cable
Serial connector
Replacing the standard type monitor

RGB connector (Monitor)

2. Remove the monitor table cover. (two
screws)
Standard type monitor
RGB connector
PC rear cover
Rear cover
Monitor table cover
G072414
3. Remove the PC rear cover and the rear

cover.
☞ 20050
4. Disconnect the RGB connector.
Monitor table cover

G068523
3. Remove the monitor fixing angle bracket and

then remove the monitor. (two screws)
Monitor fixing angle bracket
RGB connector
G072416
5. Remove the monitor fixing angle bracket and

then remove the monitor. (two screws)
NOTE
• The procedure of removing them is same as for
the standard type monitor.
G068524
Replacing the touch monitor (option)

! Adjustment after replacement
1. Disconnect the connector(s). 1. Adjust the monitor.
Serial connector (Monitor) ☞ 88000
20320 1/1
20610
Scanner section
Scanner section
Removing the scanner unit [S-2/S-3] 5. Remove the scanner unit. (three adjusting
screws)
NOTE
There are different scanner removal procedures for S-2/S-3 and
S-4. • Depending on the unit, the adjusting screw may be
changed to the hex. nut.
• For S-4 details, refer to the following:
Viewed from right side
• Refer to ☞ Removing the scanner unit [S-4].
Film ready J/P60
lamp
! Precautions for scanner unit Adjusting
replacement screws

IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the scanner unit, items shown below
are necessary in returning the defective unit.
Scanner unit Defective scanner unit
Scanner unit
Logdata All of the data when the problem occurs
Backup data All of the backup data when the problem
occurs
Viewed from left side

• Save the following data before replacing the
scanner unit. J/P61
J/P62
• Save the all data in Close Down Checks or Reading
and Writing Data. J/P68
☞ 35400
• Logdata ☞ 37500 Adjusting
• Be sure to include the QssSeqMain.log and screw
QssDspMain.log for Logdata.
J/P69
! Procedure
J/P67
1. Remove the film carrier.
2. Remove the scanner top cover and the
scanner front cover. P120 G068521
☞ 20030
3. Disconnect the connector(s). ! Adjustment after reattaching
J/P60 (Scanner unit)
J/P61 (Scanner unit) 1. Attach the film ready lamp. (one screw)
2. Adjust the swing and tilt/light axis.
J/P68 (Scanner unit) ☞ 37000
J/P69 (Scanner unit) 3. Carry out the light source registration.
P120 (Relay connector) ☞ 37010
4. Remove the film ready lamp. (one screw) 4. Carry out the focus adjustment.
☞ 37020
5. Update the light source.
☞ 37030
20610 1/3
20610
Scanner section
Removing the scanner unit [S-4] 6. Remove the scanner unit. (four screws)
Viewed from right side
J/P62
! Precautions for scanner unit Film ready
J/P61
lamp
replacement
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the scanner unit, items shown below J/P60

Scanner unit Defective scanner unit J/P68, 69
Scanner unit
occurs

scanner unit.
Viewed from left side
• Save the all data in Close Down Checks or Reading
and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
J/P67
• Logdata ☞ 37500
• Be sure to include the QssSeqMain.log and
! Procedure

scanner front cover.
☞ 20030
3. Remove the LED light source unit. J16 (upper) J17 (lower)
☞ 20620
4. Remove the film ready lamp. (one screw)
J/P60, 61, 62 (Scanner unit: near top)
J/P67, 68, 69 (Scanner unit: near center)
J16 (Relay connector (AFC): two screws and two
spacers)
J17 (Relay connector (AFC): two screws and three G081997
spacers)
IMPORTANT ! Adjustment after reattaching
• J16, J17: Connecting the relay connector
(AFC) in an incorrect location may damage 1. Attach the film ready lamp. (one screw)
the PCB or AFC.
• Two spacers are attached in order to ground
2. Check that Light Axis Adjustment and
the AFC and scanner main body.
Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right
When reattaching J16 and J17 connectors, positions.
return the spacers to their original positions. ☞ 37000
NOTE
• Swing and Tilt/Light Axis for the S-4 scanner unit
cannot be adjusted because the scanner unit and its
frame constitute a single device.
3. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
20610 2/3
20610
Scanner section
4. Carry out the focus adjustment.

☞ 37020
☞ 37030
20610 3/3
20620
Scanner section
Removing the LED light source unit 3. Disconnect the connector(s).

[S-2/S-3] LED light source unit LED light source unit
Type 0, 1 Type 2, 3
J/P166 J/P175
There are different LED light source removal procedures for S-
2/S-3 and S-4. J/P167 J/P176
J/P168 J/P177
• For S-4 details, refer to the following:
J/P163 J/P163
• Refer to ☞ Removing the LED light source unit [S-4].
IMPORTANT 4. Remove the LED light source unit. (three

• If an electrostatically charged human body touches the screws)
LED light source unit, it may adversely affect the built-in
electrical parts (LED element).
Use the static-dissipative tool as you work with the
electrical parts such as PCBs.
☞ 10040
! Precautions for replacement

There are several types of the LED light source unit and one of
them is attached.
How to distinguish the type is shown below.
• You can also check it on the System Version Check
Connector of the
display. ☞ 35500
LED light source
• Number seal is attached on the top of LED light source LED light source unit unit
unit.
G068520
! Warning when replacing the LED light

source unit
IMPORTANT
• If the shield finger has not been attached to the
scanner base panel, attach the shield finger of LED
light source unit in the position specified below, then
attach the LED light source unit.
Number sticker LED light source unit
Shield finger attachment position
G074595
LED cooling fan

LED light source unit Number sticker
Type 0 Without number sticker (no
longer available)
Type 1 1 (no longer available)
Type 2 2
Type 3 3
• For the details about LED light source unit, refer to

20 mm
☞ Details of LED light source unit 62050.
! Procedure

2. Remove the scanner top cover, the scanner Base panel
front cover and scanner lower cover.
☞ 20030 Shield finger
G082018
• When replacing the LED light source unit without the
ND filter solenoid, it is necessary to reattach the ND
20620 1/5
20620
Scanner section
filter solenoid used last time for the LED light source solenoid in the direction of an arrow. Then,
unit. adjust the clearance between the rotating
1. Remove the ND filter solenoid from the LED plate and pin of the ND filter solenoid to
light source unit. (two screws) become 0 to 0.3 mm. (two screws)
2. Remove the spring from the ND filter Rotating plate

solenoid. Pin of the ND filter solenoid
LED light source unit

0 to 0.3 mm
Spring
Part A of the ND filter solenoid
G076398
6. Check that the ND filter turns ON/OFF

correctly by Output Check.
ND filter solenoid ☞ 35320
ND filter: ON
G076395
3. Attach the spring of a new LED light source

unit to the ND filter solenoid.
4. Attach the ND filter solenoid to the new LED
light source unit and tighten it up temporarily.
(two screws)
Spring
ND filter: OFF
G076399
! Adjustment after reattaching

ND filter solenoid
☞ 37010
G076397
5. Adjust the position of the ND filter solenoid 2. Carry out the focus adjustment.
while pressing the part A of the ND filter ☞ 37020
20620 2/5
20620
Scanner section
3. Update the light source. Removing the LED light source unit
☞ 37030
[S-4]
IMPORTANT
• If an electrostatically charged human body touches the
LED light source unit, it may adversely affect the built-in
electrical parts (LED element).
Use the static-dissipative tool as you work with the
electrical parts such as PCBs.

☞ 10040

S-4 LED light source unit(s) cannot be used with the S-2 or
the S-3.
How to distinguish the type is shown below.
• Examine the connector protruding from the LED light
source unit.
S-4: connected to the AFC/scanner driver PCB
S-2 and S-3: connected to the relay connector
• You can also check it on the System Version Check
display. ☞ 35500
• For details of the LED light source unit, refer to
☞ 62050.
! Procedure

2. Remove the scanner top cover, the scanner
front cover and scanner lower cover.
☞ 20030
☞ 65010
J/P56, 70, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144 (AFC/scanner driver
PCB)
J/P163 (ND filter solenoid connector)
4. Remove the LED light source unit. (three
screws)
ND filter solenoid
LED light source unit connector
G078476
20620 3/5
20620
Scanner section
! Warning when replacing the LED light 4. Attach the ND filter solenoid to the new LED
source unit light source unit and tighten it up temporarily.
(two screws)
IMPORTANT LED light source unit

• When replacing the LED light source unit without the
ND filter solenoid, it is necessary to reattach the ND
filter solenoid used last time for the LED light source Spring
unit.
1. Remove the ND filter solenoid from the LED

light source unit. (two screws)
2. Remove the spring from the ND filter
solenoid.
Spring
ND filter solenoid
G076397
5. Adjust the position of the ND filter solenoid

while pressing the part A of the ND filter
solenoid in the direction of an arrow. Then,
adjust the clearance between the rotating
plate and pin of the ND filter solenoid to
become 0 to 0.3 mm. (two screws)
ND filter solenoid Rotating plate
Pin of the ND filter solenoid
G076395
3. Attach the spring of a new LED light source

unit to the ND filter solenoid.
0 to 0.3 mm
Part A of the ND filter solenoid
G076398
20620 4/5
20620
Scanner section
6. Check that the ND filter turns ON/OFF

correctly by Output Check.
☞ 35320
ND filter: ON

ND filter: OFF
G076399

☞ 37010
☞ 37020
☞ 37030
20620 5/5
20650
Scanner section
Adjusting the scanner section after 5. Remove the scanner section.

replacement
! Precautions for replacement of
scanner section
Scanner section
IMPORTANT
• The scanner unit is very heavy. Be careful in
replacing.
• If you replaced the scanner section, items shown
below are necessary in returning the defective unit.

Scanner section Defective scanner unit
occurs

scanner section.
Film cleaner mount • Save the all data in Close Down Checks or Reading
and Writing Data.
G068395 ☞ 35400
• Logdata ☞ 37500
! Procedure • Be sure to include the QssSeqMain.log and
2. Remove the power supply cable from the ! Procedure
scanner unit.
NOTE
3. Remove the scanner top cover and the • The scanner section does not include film carriers and the
scanner rear cover. film cleaner.
☞ 20030
4. Remove the cable clamp and the connector. 1. Backup the data of the machine before
J/P60 (Scanner unit) replacing the scanner section.
J/P20, 21 (AFC/scanner control PCB) ☞ 35400
2. Replace the scanner section.
3. Read the system program.
☞ 35600
4. Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
J/P20, J/P21 5. Check the serial number of the scanner
section after replacement with the rating
plate and register it on the Machine
Specification display.
6. Carry out the sensor standard adjustment for
each AFC.
IMPORTANT
J/P60 • When the following AFC is set as option,
carry out the adjustment.
135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC

Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
☞ 35000 ☞ 35010 ☞ 35020
G074527
20650 1/2
20650
Scanner section
135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
☞ 35060
7. Adjust the swing and tilt/light axis.

☞ 37000

IMPORTANT
• If using S-4, confirm that Light Axis and
Swing and Tilt are properly adjusted.
☞ 37000
☞ 37010
☞ 37020
☞ 37030
20650 2/2
20700
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II)
Replacing the film carrier 3. Carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
4. Carry out the focus adjustment of the
! Replacing the 135/240 AFC-II scanner.
☞ 37020
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the adjustments below for each 135 and
240 lane. • For the 110 AFC-II, carry out the focus
adjustment for each magnification rate.
1. Attach the 135/240 AFC-II. 5. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto

Correction.
2. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment. ☞ 35020
☞ 35000
3. Carry out the DX sensor standard 6. Check the operation of the 110 AFC-II.
adjustment.
☞ 35000 ! Replacing the 135/240 MMC-II or AMC-II
4. Carry out the light source registration. 1. Attach the 135/240 MMC-II or AMC-II.
☞ 37010
2. Check the Emission Lamp and Detection
5. Carry out the focus adjustment of the Sensor Position Adjustment.
scanner.
☞ 35030
☞ 37020 ☞ 35040
IMPORTANT NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, carry out the focus • Check if the filament image on the emission
adjustment for each magnification rate. adjustment chart is in the center of the emission
adjustment chart. When the filament image is in
6. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto the center, the adjustment is not necessary.
Correction.
☞ 35000
7. Check the operation of the 135/240 AFC-II.
! Replacing the 120 AFC-II
1. Attach the 120 AFC-II.

2. Configure the system so that it can "see" the
120 AFC-II diffuser.
☞ 34500
3. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment.
☞ 35010
☞ 37010
scanner.
☞ 37020
6. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto
Correction.
☞ 35010
7. Check the operation of the 120 AFC-II. Emission adjustment chart Filament image
G052617
1. Attach the 110 AFC-II. ☞ 37010
2. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment. 4. Carry out the focus adjustment of the
scanner.
☞ 35020 ☞ 37020
20700 1/2
20700

Correction.
☞ 35030
☞ 35040
6. Check the operation of the 135/240 MMC-II
or AMC-II.
1. Attach the 135 AFC-II.

2. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment.
☞ 35060
3. Carry out the DX sensor standard
adjustment.
☞ 35060
☞ 37010
scanner.
☞ 37020
IMPORTANT
• For the 135-II, carry out the focus adjustment
for each magnification rate.
Correction.
☞ 35060
7. Check the operation of the 135 AFC-II.
! Replacing the MFC
1. Attach the MFC.

☞ 37010
3. Carry out the area registration.
☞ 32570
IMPORTANT
• In case of using the attachment other than the
crop card of MFC, carry out Area Registration
for each attachment.
scanner.
☞ 37020
Correction.
☞ 35050
6. Check the operation of the MFC.
20700 2/2
20710
Removing the advance unit • J/P1034 (Driver PCB 2)

Driver PCB 2
attaching plate
! Procedure
1. Remove the top cover.

☞ 20040
2. Remove the magnetic head PCB cover.
(three screws)
3. Remove the magnetic head PCB. (two

screws and one mounting spacer)
Mounting spacer
Driver PCB 2 cover
G068371
8. Remove the driver PCB 1 attaching plate.

(two screws)
Magnetic head PCB

Magnetic head PCB cover
G068370

• J/P1040 (Magnetic head PCB)
Driver PCB 1 attaching plate
NOTE G070721
• Depending on the unit, J/P1041, J/P1042 and 9. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P1043 may not exist.
• J/P1027 (Driver PCB 1)
5. Remove the driver PCB 2 attaching plate. • J/P1028 (Driver PCB 1)
(two screws) • J/P1029 (Driver PCB 1)
6. Remove the driver PCB 2 cover. (two • J/P1030 (Driver PCB 1)
screws) • J/P1056 (Relay connector)
20710 1/3
20710
10. Remove the advance unit. (six screws) 12. Open the sensor PCB wiring cover to the
Screw A
direction indicated by the arrow, and remove
Screw B
the flat cable. (Loosen one screw out of
three.)
Screw C
NOTE
• The end of the wiring cover can be opened by
removing a screw out of three.
Wiring cover

Flat cable
Advance unit
G068373
11. Turn over the advance unit with the film feed G054662
motor on.
Advance unit ! Precautions when reattaching
• Reattach the flat cable carefully to the correct direction.
☞ 68200
• Reattach the advance unit by turning over it with the
advance motor on. Be careful not to give pressure to the
flat cable.
• When reattaching the advance unit, reattach it while
Lay pushing it to the arrow direction (the reference surfaces).
down.
IMPORTANT
• The lengths of the advance unit screws are
different. Be sure to attach the appropriate
Lift. screw.
Refer to Step 10.
• Screw A (Socket head bolt M3 × 4)
• Screw B (Socket head bolt M3 × 8)
• Screw C (Socket head bolt M3 × 6)
Reference surfaces Advance unit
Flat cables Film feed motor
G054661
IMPORTANT
• When the advance unit is turned over, be Rail Rail
careful not to apply excessive load to the flat
cable.
G068377
20710 2/3
20710
• After reattaching it, check that the lane is switched

smoothly. Also check that the wiring is not caught in the
lane.
20710 3/3
20720
Replacing and adjusting the film ! Adjustment after replacement

feed motor
1. Adjust the drive belt tension.
☞ 20130
! Procedure 2. Using Output Check, check that the Film
Feed Motor operates.
1. Remove the top cover. ☞ 35300
☞ 20040
2. Remove the PCB cover. (two screws)

• J/P1056 (Relay connector)
4. Remove the motor unit. (two screws)
Motor unit
PCB cover
G068372
5. Remove the film feed motor. (four screws)

Film feed motor
Noise reducing
plate
Motor mounting plate
G057593
! Precautions when reattaching

• Reattach the motor mounting plate and the noise reducing
plate in the order shown in the figure above.
20720 1/1
20730
Replacing and adjusting the spool 6. Remove the guide plate. (two screws)
key motor Guide plate
! Procedure
1. Remove the PCB attaching plate. (two

screws)
2. Remove the PCB cover. (two screws)

Driver PCB 2
attaching plate
Spool key motor

G057594
1. When mounting the motor unit, adjust the

position of the motor mounting plate so that
the drive transfer gear operates smoothly.
2. Using Output Check, check that the Spool
Key Motor rotates smoothly.
Driver PCB 2 cover ☞ 35300
G068371

4. Remove the motor unit. (two screws)
Motor unit
G068374
5. Remove the spool key motor. (two screws)
20730 1/1
20740
Replacing and adjusting the light

lock door drive axis
! Procedure

☞ 20040
2. Remove the advance unit.

☞ 20710
3. Disconnect the connectors.
Cartridge guide
J/P1029 (Driver PCB 1) Roll plate
Spring
4. Remove the powder limiter. (two screws) G051098
5. Remove the cartridge limit switch. (one 8. Remove the light lock door drive axis. (one
E-ring)
screw)
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• When removing the light lock door drive axis,
• When removing the cartridge limit switch, be
be careful not to lose the spring.
careful not to lose the detection pin.
6. Remove the guide plate. (two screws) Spring Light lock door
drive axis
7. Remove the cartridge guide. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
E-ring
• When removing the cartridge guide, be
careful not to lose the spring for the lock
plate.
Cartridge limit switch
Guide plate Detection pin
Cartridge guide
G051099
1. When reattaching the cartridge guide, check

that the cartridge guide slides smoothly and
the cartridge holder can be opened and
closed smoothly.
Cartridge holder
Powder limiter
Cartridge guide
G074328
Cartridge guide
G053517
20740 1/1
20750
Replacing and adjusting the light

lock door motor
! Procedure

☞ 20040

3. Remove the film feed motor unit.
☞ 20720
4. Remove the light lock door motor. (two
screws)
Light lock door motor
G052463
1. Adjust the tension on the film feed motor

drive belt.
☞ 20130
2. Using Output Check, check that the Light
Lock Door Motor operates.
☞ 35300
20750 1/1
20760
Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit

• As for the following two kinds of magnetic head units, the content of the replacement and the replacement procedures are
different.
• Shape of the magnetic head cover is different when magnetic head units are different.
Magnetic head covers

☞ Type not equipped with the
magnetic preamplifier PCB ☞ Type equipped with the
magnetic preamplifier PCB
G078467
! Type not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB
IMPORTANT
• The type not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB is no longer manufactured. To replace this type of
magnetic head unit, it is necessary to replace it with the magnetic head unit which is equipped with the magnetic
preamplifier PCB.
• For replacing the magnetic head unit which is not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB, prepare all the parts as detailed
below and replace all of them completely.
Description Part No. Q'ty

135/240 AFC-ll (R/W) HFI unit (R/W) Z023309 1
PCB attaching plate (1) A081369 1
Shield plate A075824 1
135/240 AFC-ll (R) HFI unit (R) Z023307 1
PCB attaching plate (1) A081369 1
Shield plate A075824 1
! Replacing the type of unit which is not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB
NOTE
• Replacing methods are different between the R/W type and the R type.
20760 1/7
20760
For the R/W type, refer to ☞ For 135/240 AFC-ll (R/W).

For the R type, refer to ☞ 135/240 AFC-ll (R).
! Type equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB

• If the magnetic head unit is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB, replace the HFI unit only.
Description Part No. Q'ty

135/240 AFC-ll (R/W) HFI unit (2) Z023310 1
135/240 AFC-ll (R) HFI unit (1) Z023308 1

! Replacing the type of unit which is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB
• Refer to ☞ Replacing the type of unit which is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB.
! Replacing the type of unit which is not equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB
! For 135/240 AFC-ll (R/W)

Refer to ☞ 20710.
2. Disconnect the connector (J/P1015) of the writing head from the sensor PCB.
Sensor PCB
J/P1015
G078329
3. Remove the magnetic head PCB attaching plate. (three screws)

IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head PCB attaching plate must be replaced in reassembling.
4. Remove the two mini clamps.
IMPORTANT
• The removed mini clamps are not used in reassembling.
• When reassembling, wiring must be fixed to the holes (which were used for mounting the mini clamps) with the
mini band. Refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.
20760 2/7
20760
Mini clamps
Screws

Magnetic head PCB attaching plate
G078330
5. Remove the shield plate. (two screws)

IMPORTANT
• In reassembling, the shield plate must be replaced.
6. Remove the magnetic head unit together with the angle bracket. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head unit and the angle bracket must be replaced as a set in reassembling.
• For assembly, refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.
Shield plate
Screws Magnetic head unit
Angle bracket
G067399
7. Reassemble by reversing the above-mentioned procedure.

IMPORTANT
• The parts below must be replaced in reassembling.
• Magnetic head PCB
• Magnetic head PCB attaching plate
• Shield plate
• Magnetic head unit and angle bracket (assembly)
• When attaching the advance unit, connect the connectors (J/P1040 and J/P1043) to the magnetic head PCB.
20760 3/7
20760
! 135/240 AFC-ll (R)
NOTE
• You do not need to remove the advance unit because it has no write head.
1. Remove the upper guide (1) cover. (three screws)

2. Disconnect the connectors (J/P1040 and J/P1042) of the magnetic head PCB and remove the magnetic
head PCB. (two screws, one coupling nut)
IMPORTANT

• The flat cable is connected to the connector (J/P1040) on the magnetic head PCB. Be sure to read Handling
the flat cable described in Service Manual chapter 6., then work properly.
• The magnetic head PCB must be replaced in reassembling.
• When assembling, connect the connectors (J/P1040 and J/P1043) to the magnetic head PCB.
3. Remove the magnetic head PCB attaching plate. (three screws)
IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head PCB attaching plate must be replaced in reassembling.
4. Remove the two mini clamps.
IMPORTANT
• The removed mini clamps are not used in reassembling.
• When reassembling, wiring must be fixed to the holes (which were used for mounting the mini clamps) with the
mini band. Refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.
Mini clamps
Coupling nut Screw
Screws J/P1040
Screws
J/P1042
Upper guide (1) cover Magnetic head PCB Magnetic head PCB attaching plate
G078327
5. Remove the shield plate. (two screws)

IMPORTANT
• In reassembling, the shield plate must be replaced.
6. Remove the magnetic head unit together with the angle bracket. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• The magnetic head unit and the angle bracket must be replaced as a set in reassembling.
• For assembly, refer to ☞ Precautions when reattaching.
20760 4/7
20760
Shield plate
Screws Magnetic head unit
Angle bracket

G067399

IMPORTANT
• The parts below must be replaced in reassembling.
• Magnetic head PCB
• Magnetic head PCB attaching plate
• Shield plate
• Magnetic head unit and angle bracket (assembly)
! Replacing the type of unit which is equipped with the magnetic preamplifier PCB
1. Remove the advance unit. (Only for 135/240 AFC-ll (R/W)

Refer to ☞ 20710.
2. Disconnect the connector (J/P1015) of the writing head from the sensor PCB. (Only for 135/240 AFC-ll
(R/W)
Sensor PCB
J/P1015
G078329
3. Remove the magnetic head cover and the magnetic preamplifier PCB. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not lose small parts.
4. Disconnect the connectors (J/P1041 and J/P1042) of the magnetic preamplifier PCB. [There is no
J/P1041 in 135/240 AFC-ll (R).]
20760 5/7
20760
5. Remove the magnetic head unit. (two screws)

J/P1041
Magnetic head cover Screws J/P1042 Screws

Magnetic preamplifier PCB Angle bracket Magnetic head unit
G078326

IMPORTANT
• Attach the magnetic preamplifier PCB temporarily with the long spacer and screw, and attach the magnetic
head cover.
After attaching the magnetic head cover, insert the short spacer in the direction of the arrow and fix it with the
screw.
Long spacer Magnetic head cover
Magnetic preamplifier PCB Short spacer

G078328
20760 6/7
20760

• When reattaching the magnetic head unit, push it on the reference surface.
Reference surfaces
Angle bracket

Magnetic head unit
G078325
• Fix the wiring of connector (J/P1043) to the hole (which was used for mounting the mini clamp) with the mini band. (1)
Mini band
G078323
20760 7/7
20780
Adjusting the light lock door drive

timing
! Procedure

☞ 20040

☞ 20710
3. Remove the cartridge guide.
☞ 20740
4. Remove the holder. (one screw)
IMPORTANT
• When removing the holder, be careful not to
lose the nut.
5. Turn idle gear 1 in the direction indicated by
the arrow until it touches the baffle.
6. While idle gear 1 is in contact with the baffle,
engage idle gear 2 with the drive axis gear
and leave as only one tooth is unengaged.
Holder
Drive axis gear
Leave one
tooth of the
gear open.
Idle gear 2
Idle gear 1
Cartridge guide
G051100
7. Reattach the holder. (one screw)

IMPORTANT
• Reattach it carefully not to change the gear
engagement position.
20780 1/1
20850
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II)
Manual Mount Carrier Section (135/240 MMC-II)
MMC auto focus section adjustment swing is within the tolerance level. (four
screws)
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the LM guide installation block so as
• Carry out this adjustment when the auto focus error not to give pressure to the LM guide.
occurs, or when the worm wheel does not swing within
the tolerance level of 4 mm (± one tooth) after adjusting 5. After adjusting it within the tolerance level,
the position of the emission lamp and detection sensor. carry out the focus adjustment.
☞ 37020
! Procedure 6. To check the operation, scan the mount in

normal process.
! Worm wheel adjustment
! When it cannot be adjusted
1. Bring up Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
display. 1. Operate AF Motor via Output Check.
NOTE ☞ 35300
• Bring up Film Carrier Unit Adjustment display NOTE
before removing the top cover, or Mount • When the worm wheel operates, check that it
operation error appears and adjustment cannot moves smoothly near the upper and lower death
be performed correctly. point.
Bringing up the display 2. Loosen the screws of the LM guide
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various installation block. (four screws)
Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
☞ 35030 3. Adjust the installation position of the bearing
holder so that the worm wheel moves
2. Remove the top cover, and set the MMC. smoothly. (two screws)
☞ 20040 Screws
3. When the worm wheel does not swing within
the tolerance level of 4 mm (± one tooth),
carry out the auto focus operation in
Detection Sensor Position Adjustment and
loosen the screws of the LM guide
installation block. (four screws)
LM guide installation blocks
Bearing holder
G060704
4. Repeat the procedure 1 to 3 in Worm wheel

adjustment.
5. Carry out Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
(MMC).
☞ 35030
LM guide screws
☞ 37020
LM guides
7. To check the operation, scan the mount in
G060702 normal process.
4. While checking the swing of the worm wheel,
fix the LM guide installation block so that the
20850 1/1
21110
Desk section
Desk section
Replacing the colorimeter and the NOTE

• Remove cable clamps on colorimeter unit.
calibration plate
J/P156 and J/P157
The following procedures for the colorimeter are explained here.
# Replacing the colorimeter unit
# Replacing the colorimeter
# Replacing the calibration plate

IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter unit consists of the following items.
Colorimeter unit
G068538
3. Remove the colorimeter unit.

(two screws)
Colorimeter unit
FD for Calibration plate

Colorimeter calibration data
G068540
• When replacing the colorimeter, remember that the
colorimeter, the calibration plate, and the FD for
calibration make a set. Replace them as one set.
• When replacing the calibration plate, remember that the
calibration plate and the FD for calibration data make a
G068536
set. Replace them as one set.
4. Attach the colorimeter unit.
! Replacing the colorimeter unit 5. Upgrade the colorimeter unit.
☞ 35600
1. Remove the rear cover. 6. Follow the procedures in Replacing the
☞ 20050 calibration plate.
2. Disconnect the connector(s). ☞ Replacing the calibration plate
J/P156 (Relay connector) 7. Adjust the colorimeter unit.
J/P157 (Relay connector)
☞ 35100
! Replacing the colorimeter
21110 1/2
21110
Desk section
2. Remove the colorimeter top cover. (2) Insert the FD for calibration data into the
(two screws) floppy disk drive.
Colorimeter top cover. (3) Click YES: OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration
data FD are displayed.
(4) Click YES: OK.
Register the data in the FD to the colorimeter.
(5) Click YES: OK.
Confirm the registration.

(6) Replace the calibration plate stored in the
colorimeter unit with new one.
G068537
(7) Click YES: OK.
3. Remove the fixing plate from the colorimeter. Data is updated.
(Loosen two mounting nuts.)
(8) Click YES: OK.
4. Disconnect the connector of the colorimeter The screen returns to the Colorimeter
and replace the colorimeter. Calibration display.
Connector
2. Check if updating has been performed
properly.
Fixing plate
NOTE
• Check that the colorimeter data and the calibration
plate data are the same.
(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter

Calibration display, then click Confirming
the Colorimeter and Calibration Plate
Data.
(2) Click YES: OK since the FD for calibration
data has already been set in step 1 (2).
The confirmation display appears. Check that
the message It matches the Colorimeter Data
appears.
At this time, S/No. of the calibration plate is
Fixing nuts
G068539
registered.
5. Carry out height adjustment of the (3) Click YES: OK.

colorimeter. The screen returns to the Colorimeter
☞ 21120 Calibration display.
6. Follow the procedures in Replacing the (4) Remove the FD for calibration data from the
calibration plate. floppy disk drive.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate
! Replacing the calibration plate
1. Update the calibration plate data.

NOTE
• Register the new calibration plate data to the
machine.
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various
Adjustment → Colorimeter Calibration
(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter

Calibration display, then click Updating the
Calibration Plate Data.
21110 2/2
21120
Desk section
Adjusting the height of the 5. Remove the colorimeter mount and turn it
over. (three screws)
colorimeter
IMPORTANT
• Do not damage the cable(s) since the
IMPORTANT adjustment is carried out with the
• Carry out the height adjustment securely if colorimeter of connector(s) connected.
the colorimeter unit is replaced.
Cable Colorimeter mount
! Procedure

NOTE
• If you go on to this adjustment work after you install the
new colorimeter, proceed to step 3.

☞ 21110
2. Remove the colorimeter top cover.
(two screws)
Colorimeter top cover.
J/P188 G072362
6. Turn the leading end control holder to adjust

the height of colorimeter leading end so that
it is align with the back face of the
colorimeter mount. Use the colorimeter
height adjustment jig.
IMPORTANT
G068537 • The colorimeter height adjustment jig is a
3. Loosen the lock screw on the leading end service personnel tool. Refer to Service
personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
control holder of the colorimeter.
• Set the colorimeter height adjustment jig on
NOTE
groove of the leading end control holder and
• The lock screw is at the lower part of the turn it.
colorimeter. Loosen it through the square hole
using a hexagonal screwdriver. Leading end of the measurement part
Colorimeter height adjustment jig
Square hole
Hexagonal screwdriver
Back face of the colorimeter

Leading end control holder Lock screw mount
G072361
Groove of the leading end
4. Disconnect the connectors of the paper control holder
sensor(s). G072363
J/P188 (Paper sensors 1 and 2)
21120 1/2
21120
Desk section
! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit
1. Tighten the lock screw on the leading end

control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
Square hole

Use the handle side of the jig.
G072364
NOTE Hexagonal screwdriver
• Use the handle side of the colorimeter height
adjustment jig to check the height of colorimeter Leading end control holder Lock screw
leading end. G072361
7. Make sure that the height of colorimeter 2. Set the colorimeter mount to the positioning
leading end is align with the back face of the holes and attach by pushing it in the direction
colorimeter mount, and then turn the leading indicated by the arrow. (three screws)
end control holder approximately 30 degree Positioning holes
to the lowering direction (clockwise).
NOTE
• This changes the standard value (0) of the height
of colorimeter leading end from the base of the
colorimeter mount to - 0.1 mm. One revolution
(360 degree) of the leading end control holder
makes 1 mm movement.
Colorimeter mount
IMPORTANT
• If the colorimeter leading end is out of back
face of the colorimeter mount, it may damage
the calibration plate or test prints.
Turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree

to the lowering direction (clockwise).
G074587
Colorimeter leading end

Leading end control holder
G072365
8. Reassemble the parts as they were.
21120 2/2
21150
Desk section
Adjusting the gap of the negative

cleaner brush
! Procedure
1. Remove the negative cleaner.

2. Adjust the position of the negative cleaner
brush to set the film advance force to 35±5 g.

(two adjusting screws)
35±5 g
Film
Brush
G051138
21150 1/1
22000
Paper magazine section
Checking the paper magazine of the reel plate and nut plate. Refer to
Step 7.
Check item
Paper Check that paper is neat in shape.
magazine Check that paper guides are attached securely.
Check that the reel plate is closed securely.
! Procedure

1. Check that the position of the magazine reel
plate corresponds to the paper width which is
in use.
Dark room type magazine
82.5
89
0.3 mm
102
114
117
120
The third from the left is unused.
Reel plate Scale

G072381
127
3. Place the paper magazine on the level floor.

130
IMPORTANT
152
• Place the paper magazine on the level floor to

check the magazine reel plate correctly
165
because the paper magazine may deforms.

178
4. Set the paper tube onto the spindle.

Paper tube
203
210
216
240
254
279
305
G072384
2. Set a scale on the magazine to check that

the deformation of the reel plate is within 0.3
mm.
IMPORTANT
• When the deflection of paper magazine reel G072371
plate is 0.3 mm or more, check the condition NOTE

• Use the paper tube that corresponds to the paper
width that is set to the paper magazine.
22000 1/2
22000
5. Set the spindle to the paper magazine. 7. Check the condition of reel plate and nut
plate.
6. Check that the deformation of the magazine
reel plate is within 0.3 mm inside from the Dark room type magazine
paper guide.
IMPORTANT
• Set a scale onto the reel plate and turn the
spindle to check the deformation of the reel
plate.
• When the deflection of paper magazine reel

plate is 0.3 mm or more, check the condition
of the reel plate and nut plate. Refer to
Step 7.
Reel plate
Paper tube
Reel plate and nut plates
G074530
NOTE
• Do not loosen or tighten the screws at the side
with the dents since they are fixed.
Scale
Dark room type magazine
Dents
Scale
Paper guide face
0.3 mm
Inside
G072370
G074436
IMPORTANT
• If there is nothing wrong with the condition of
reel plate and nut plate, and the reel plate's
deflection is 0.3 mm or more, replace the reel
plate.
22000 2/2
22100
Adjusting the zigzagging of the Example: When the first test print is misaligned in the left.
paper magazine mount First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
! Procedure
A
A
IMPORTANT
• The zigzagging of the magazine mount must be
adjusted for each paper magazine A, B and C.

• When adjusting the zigzagging of the magazine
mount, make a test print using the maximum size of
paper which has been used.
1. Make the test prints via Test Print 1/2 for
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
2. Take the second test print as a standard.
Check that the difference between lines A on
the first and second test prints is within 0.5
mm.
Example: When the first test print is misaligned in the right.
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print

A
Paper advance
direction
A
G072367
3. If differences between lines A on first test

print and second test print is not within 0.5
mm, adjust the position of the magazine
mount.
For each magazine
• For magazine mount B, refer to ☞ Adjusting magazine
mount B.
• For magazine mount C, refer to ☞ Adjusting magazine
mount C.
• For magazine mount A, refer to ☞ Adjusting magazine
mount A.
! Adjusting magazine mount B
IMPORTANT
• Measure the dimension shown below before
Paper advance adjusting the positioning pin for magazine mount B.
direction
G072383
22100 1/5
22100
It will help you to restore after adjustment of the • When the adjusting screw is turned 360
positioning pin. degree, the positioning pin moves
approximately 0.7 mm.

Fixing screws
Scale
G072374
1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning

pin for the magazine mount B. (Loosen two
fixing screws.) Positioning pin Nut
Adjusting screw
2. Adjust the positioning pin for the magazine G072378
mount B. (one adjusting screw and one nut) 3. When magazine B is set on the positioning
When the first test print Adjust the positioning pin pin after the positioning pin is adjusted,
is misaligned in the right. downwards. (Turn the check that the gap under the magazine B is
Step 2 positioning pin 0.5 mm.
counterclockwise.) Magazine B
When the first test print Adjust the positioning pin
is misaligned in the left. upwards. (Turn the positioning
Step 2 pin clockwise.)
IMPORTANT
• When the fixing screws on the positioning pin
are to be tighten, push and secure the pin in
the directions indicated by arrows 1 and 2.
Magazine mount B
G072379
4. If the gap under the magazine B is not 0.5

mm when the magazine B is set on the
positioning pin, loosen the screws on
magazine mount B. (four screws)
22100 2/5
22100
5. Adjust the position of the magazine mount B It will help you to restore after adjustment of the
so that the gap under magazine B is 0.5 mm positioning pin.
when magazine B is set on the positioning
pin. (two adjusting screws and two nuts)
6. Tighten screw(s) on the magazine mount B.
(four screws)
Loosen this screw.
Adjusting screw and nut

Loosen these screws.
Loosen this screw.

Magazine mount B Scale
G072380
7. Carry out Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment
of magazine mount B, repeat Step 1 to
Step 7.
! Adjusting magazine mount C
IMPORTANT Measure here.

adjusting the positioning pin for magazine mount C.
G072375
1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning

pin for the magazine mount C. (Loosen two
fixing screws.)
2. Adjust the positioning pin for the magazine
mount C. (one adjusting screw and one nut)
When the first test print Adjust the positioning pin to the
is misaligned in the right. left. (Turn the positioning pin
Step 2 counterclockwise.)
is misaligned in the left. right. (Turn the positioning pin
Step 2 clockwise.)
IMPORTANT
22100 3/5
22100
• When the adjusting screw is turned 360 6. Tighten screw(s) on the magazine mount C.
degree, the positioning pin moves (three screws)
Screws

Screw Magazine mount C
G072377

Positioning pin ☞ 36060
of magazine mount C, repeat Step 1 to
Step 7.
Fixing screws
! Adjusting magazine mount A
IMPORTANT
adjusting the positioning pin for magazine mount A.
It will help you to restore after adjustment of the
positioning pin.
Nut Adjusting
G072376
3. After adjusting the positioning pin, check that

positioning pin goes into the positioning hole
of the magazine smoothly when removing
and attaching.
4. If positioning pin is not smoothly inserted into
the hole, loosen the screws of the magazine
mount C. (three screws)
5. Adjust the position of the magazine mount C
so that the positioning pin goes into the hole
smoothly.
Scale
Measure here.
Positioning pin
G072373
22100 4/5
22100
1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning 5. Adjust the position of the magazine mount A
pin for the magazine mount A. (Loosen two so that the positioning pin goes into the hole
fixing screws.) smoothly.
2. Adjust the positioning pin for the magazine 6. Tighten screw(s) on the magazine mount A.
mount A. (one adjusting screw and one nut) (three screws)
is misaligned in the right. right. (Turn the positioning pin
Step 2 counterclockwise.)

is misaligned in the left. left. (Turn the positioning pin
Step 2 clockwise.)
IMPORTANT
• When the adjusting screw is turned 360
degree, the positioning pin moves
Magazine mount A
G072369

☞ 36060
of magazine mount A, repeat Step 1 to
Step 7.
Fixing screws
Positioning pin
Nut
Adjusting screw
G072368
3. After adjusting the positioning pin, check that

positioning pin goes into the positioning hole
of the magazine smoothly when removing
and attaching the magazine A.
4. If positioning pin is not smoothly inserted into
the hole, loosen the screws of the magazine
mount A. (three screws)
22100 5/5
25610
Paper supply unit
Paper supply unit
Removing the paper supply unit ! Adjusting the attaching position
When the original paper supply unit is reattached

! Procedure 1. It is not necessary to adjust.
Removing the paper supply unit When the new paper supply unit is attached
1. Pull out the paper supply unit. 1. Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment.
2. Hold part A and lift up the paper supply unit ☞ 36000
to the direction of the arrow. 2. When the paper supply unit is replaced,

IMPORTANT check that the unit can be stored smoothly in
the main body.
• The paper supply unit is heavy. Do not drop it
and handle it carefully after removing. 3. Check if the right angle adjustment of the
cutter unit is completed correctly.
☞ 25620
4. Carry out Paper Advance Length Correction.
☞ 36050
☞ 36060
Part A
Upper rail
Paper supply
unit
Lower rail
G068526
IMPORTANT
• Set the paper supply unit on the lower rail and
then set it on the upper rail.
25610 1/1
25620
Paper supply unit
Removal and the right angle 6. Remove the mounting angle bracket. (one
screw)
adjustment of the cutter unit
! Procedure
Removing the cutter unit

1. Pull out the paper supply unit.
2. Disconnect the connectors.

J/P134 (Cut motor) Cutter cover
J/P135 (Cut home sensor and cut end sensor)
J/P364 (paper loading sensor)
3. Remove the cutter unit. (two screws) Angle bracket G068529
Cutter unit
Adjusting the position of the sensor holder
1. Reattach the cutter cover. (two screws)
2. Attach the mounting angle bracket. (one
screw)
3. Fix the sensor holder temporarily. (two
screws)
4. Position the sensor holder so that it is 0 to
0.5 mm lower than the cutter lower blade.
(two screws)
NOTE
• Usually, if the cutter lower blade is contacted and
J/P134 the sensor holder is attached, it becomes within
J/P135 and J/P364 the above standard range. Finally, confirm the
G068527 standard dimension of the sensor holder and cutter
4. Remove the sensor holder. (two screws) lower blade.
Sensor holder
Cutter unit
G068528
5. Remove the cutter cover. (two screws)
25620 1/3
25620
Paper supply unit
Contact
0 to 0.5
mm
Sensor

holder
Cutter lower
Adjusting
blade
screw
Nut
Cutter unit back face Cutter unit

positioning
plate
G068530
Cutter lower blade
IMPORTANT
Cutter unit front front face
• To adjust the right angle of the cutter unit,
Sensor holder move the cutter unit positioning plate pushing
onto the reference surface of the paper
supply unit.
Cutter unit positioning plate
G068532
The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit

1. Loosen two screws on the cutter unit
positioning plate, then carry out the right
angle adjustment using the adjustment
screw. (Loosen one screw and one nut.)
IMPORTANT
• Loosen two screws on the cutter unit and test
the right angle adjustment for the cutter unit. Reference surface G068531
" Point
Check the right angle of the paper cut section by
matching up with cut edges as shown illustration
below.
Paper The first print
advance
direction
A B
Paper
emulsion
side
The second print

G052651
25620 2/3
25620
Paper supply unit
• If the cutting end is as shown in A, adjust the

cutting angle by moving the cutter unit positioning
plate in the direction indicated by the arrow A as
shown above.
• If the cutting end is as shown in B, adjust the
cutting angle by moving the cutter unit positioning
plate in the direction indicated by the arrow B as
shown above.
25620 3/3
25630
Paper supply unit
Adjusting the timing of the paper View from direction A
supply pressure change sensor
! Procedure
1. Activate the paper supply pressure

change motor in the Output check to turn
the paper supply pressure change sensor
to DARK.

Paper advance rollers
2. Pull out the paper supply unit and check the Pressure release arm
condition of the cam.
Rotation direction
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of
the paper supply pressure change sensor in
order to set the cam of the paper supply unit
to be in the vertical position to the pressure
release arm. (one set-screw)
NOTE
• The arm opens fully and the paper advance rollers
release pressure.
Paper supply pressure change sensor
Detection
plate
Cam Detection
(vertical plate
Cam (vertical
position) position)
Direction A Paper advance rollers
Set-
screw G068544
4. Repeat steps from ☞ 1 through ☞ 3 and

adjust the position of the detection plate of
the paper supply pressure change sensor in
order to set the cam of the paper supply unit
Paper supply to be in the vertical position to the pressure
unit release arm.
! Checking after adjustment
1. Check the center part of the paper (around
the position of 450 mm) for the banding in
case printing several gray prints with the
paper advance length of 914 mm.
2. If the banding appears at the center part of
the paper (around the position of 450 mm),
adjust the position of the detection plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow.
Cam (vertical
position) IMPORTANT
• The banding disappears if you adjust the
position of the detection plate in the arrow
G068545 direction. However, note that an advance
25630 1/3
25630
Paper supply unit
failure may occur if you process paper with the position of the detection plate in the
the paper advance length of 82.5 mm. direction indicated by the arrow.

Detection Detection
plate plate
Paper supply pressure change sensor Paper supply pressure change sensor
G078434 G078435
3. Check the center part of the paper (around 6. Repeat Checking after adjustments from
the position of 450 mm) for the banding in ☞ 1 through ☞ 5 to adjust the position of the
case printing several gray prints with the detection plate of the paper supply unit so
paper advance length of 914 mm. that no banding or paper jam occurs.
4. Check if paper is advanced properly in case
of printing with paper advance length of 82.5 ! Supplement
mm.
5. If paper jam occurs in case of printing with 1. There are two types of cams for the paper
supply unit, which are new and old types.
the paper advance length of 82.5 mm, adjust
The new type has more allowance with regard to
banding and paper jam.
New type cam Old type cam
G078436
25630 2/3
25630
Paper supply unit
2. There is an attaching direction for the new

type cam.
Refer to the illustration below.
New type cam

Mark

Direction of
arrow B
Mark
View in the Direction of Arrow B
G078437
25630 3/3
25640
Paper supply unit
Adjusting the paper hold timing of 2.35±0.5 mm away from the edge of the
paper hold sensor. (one set-screw)
the paper hold motor Hexagonal screwdriver
Detection plate
Cam
! Procedure

2. Set a hexagonal screwdriver onto the
detection plate and loosen one of two set-

screws on the paper hold motor.
Detection plate
Cam
Paper hold sensor

Detection plate
Cam
Center of the paper

Paper hold sensor hold sensor
2.35±0.5 mm
G070029
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of

G068543
the paper hold motor.

(5) Tighten the set-screws of the paper hold
motor. (two set-screws)
(1) Look and adjust from the direction indicated 4. Operate the paper hold motor via Output
by arrow. check to check that the pressure pin is align
Detection plate with the guide when the paper hold sensor
is LIGHT.
☞ 35310
0.0 mm
Pressure
Guide pin
View from this side.

G068542
(2) Turn the detection plate with a hexagonal

screwdriver clockwise to make the cam in a
horizontal position.
(3) Loosen another set-screw of the paper hold
motor that is loosened in step 2. (Loosen one
of the two set-screws.)
(4) Keep the cam in a horizontal position and Paper hold motor
adjust the detection plate at the position of
G068547
25640 1/1
25650
Paper supply unit
Adjusting the imprint pressure of ☞ 80310

Head adjustment jig
the CVP
! Procedure

2. Loosen the two screws on the correction
value printing unit.

Paper supply unit

G070034
4. Adjust the correction value printing unit

position by turning the adjusting screw
according to the thickness of the head
adjusting jig.
Correction value printing unit
Correction value
printing unit
Adjusting screw
G070033
3. Set the head adjusting jig in the paper supply

unit.
IMPORTANT
• The head adjustment jig is the service
personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel
tool list.
G070035
5. Tighten the two screws of the correction

value printing unit.
6. Make actual prints, then check the printing
density of the CVP unit.
25650 1/1
25660
Paper supply unit
Removing paper supply unit A 2. Attach paper supply unit A pushing it in the
direction indicated by the arrows 1 and 2. (six
screws)
! Procedure
1. Remove the paper supply unit.

☞ 25610 Paper supply
unit A
J/P321 (paper supply motor A)
3. Remove paper supply unit A in the direction

indicated by arrow 1. (six screws)
IMPORTANT
• Be careful about that the paper supply unit
falls down in the arrow 2 direction when you
take paper supply unit A from the paper
supply unit.
J/P321
Paper supply
unit A
Paper supply
unit A
G068534
When the original paper supply unit A is reattached

1. Check that the paper supply unit is set to the
machine main body smoothly.
2. Check the adjustment of Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction → Paper Magazine
A.
☞ 36060
When the new paper supply unit A is attached

Paper supply
unit A 1. Check that the paper supply unit is set to the
machine main body smoothly.
G068533 2. Adjust Paper Advance Length Correction
→ Paper Magazine A.
! Adjusting the attaching position
☞ 36050
1. Attach paper supply unit A to the paper 3. Check the adjustment of Arm Unit 1
supply unit temporarily. (six screws) Zigzagging Correction → Paper Magazine
A.
☞ 36060
25660 1/1
25810
Exposure advance unit
Removing the exposure advance 7. Remove the exposure advance unit. (four
screws)
unit
! Procedure
1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Remove paper advance unit 1.
☞ 26510 J/P342

3. Open the paper advance unit 2. J/P385
5. Remove the pressure guide.
6. Remove the reinforcement angle bracket
from the exposure advance unit. (four
screws)
NOTE
Pressure guide
• There is no position adjustment in attaching the
reinforcement angle bracket.
Reinforcement angle bracket G068511
1. The exposure advance unit has positioning

pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in
attaching the exposure advance unit.
! Adjustment after reattaching and setup

When the original exposure advance unit is
reattached
• It is not necessary to adjust.
When the new exposure advance unit is attached

1. Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. Adjust the zigzagging of the exposure
advance unit.
☞ 36080
3. Carry out the exposure advance adjustment.
☞ 36080
4. Check the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
G078385
25810 1/1
25820
Replacing the pressure guide in the

exposure advance unit
! Procedure

2. Open the paper advance unit 2.
3. Remove the pressure guide from the

exposure advance unit.
Pressure guide
G072366

When the original pressure guide is reattached
When a new pressure guide is attached

1. Carry out the exposure advance adjustment.
☞ 36080
2. Check the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
25820 1/1
25830
Banding adjustment for the pressure of the pressure roller at the inlet
side in the exposure advance unit. ☞ The
exposure advance unit banding at the area 24 to 27 mm from the
paper rear end
! Procedure 4. If the banding is found at the area that is not

mentioned above, perform adjustment
referring the banding shooting.
IMPORTANT ☞ 25910
• Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit
needs to be performed when the banding is found at ! The banding at the area 32 mm from the paper

the area 32 mm from the paper leading end or 24 to leading end
27 mm from the paper rear end.
32 mm 1. Turn the cam in the exposure advance unit to

release the pressure of the pressure roller at
the exit side and set the paper.
2. Make fine adjustments of the cam in the
exposure advance unit so that the pressure
Leading release amount of the pressure roller at the
end Rear end exit side is the thickness of about one sheet
of paper. Use the paper to check that the
pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
is equable at the right and left.
24 to 27 mm
Pressure roller at the exit side
Pressure roller
at the exit side
Pressure roller at the inlet
side
G072396
1. Make some prints of gray prints in the Print

mode. Cam G072398
NOTE
IMPORTANT
• Any paper size is acceptable.
• If the pressure needs to be adjusted, perform
2. When the banding is found at the area 32 the following adjustments.
mm from the paper leading end, adjust the
pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
3. Remove the pressure guide from the
exposure advance unit.
in the exposure advance unit. ☞ The
banding at the area 32 mm from the paper 4. Loosen the fixing screw of the exposure
leading end advance unit exit roller. (Loosen one fixing
screw.)
3. When the banding is found at the area 24 to
27 mm from the paper rear end, adjust the
25830 1/4
25830
5. Loosen the nut on the exposure advance unit and 2.5 mm, the banding may appear on the
exit roller. (Loosen one nut.) area 32 mm from the paper leading end.
6. Adjust the exit roller adjusting screw so that Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut
the pressure of the pressure guide at the exit
side in the exposure advance unit is equable
at the left and right. (one adjusting screw)
Pressure roller at Exit roller adjusting screw
the exit side Exit roller nut

Exit roller fixing 2.0 to 2.5 mm
screw
Scale
Inlet roller nut
Inlet roller
adjusting screw 2.0 to 2.5 mm
Inlet roller
fixing screw G072395
Pressure roller at IMPORTANT

the inlet side
Inlet roller Inlet roller nut • Tighten the fixing screw of the exposure
adjusting screw advance roller while the angle bracket of the
pressure roller unit is pressed in the direction
G072393
indicated by the arrow.
The direction of rotation of the adjusting
screw Screwdriver
The pressure of the pressure The direction of

roller rotation of the
adjusting screw
The pressure at the right side is Clockwise
stronger.
The pressure at the left side is Counterclockwise
stronger.
Pressure guide
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the zigzagging by turning the adjusting G072394
screw between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If adjustment 7. Make some gray prints in Print mode to see if
is performed out of the range between 2.0 the banding occurs.
NOTE
8. Repeat the pressure adjustment of the
pressure guide if the banding is found.
9. After completing the banding adjustment,
select Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging
Adjustment → Functions → Exposure
Advance Unit Inlet Roller Test Print
Advance (Paper Magazine A/B/C) to make
the test print.
IMPORTANT
• Print the test print with the maximum paper
width which has been used.
10. After completing the banding adjustment,
measure the dimensions between 0 mm-line
and 254 mm-line of right and left edges of
25830 2/4
25830
the test print and check that the differences ! The banding at the area 24 to 27 mm from the
are within 0.2 mm. paper rear end
Paper advance direction
1. Turn the cam on the exposure advance unit
to release the pressure of the pressure roller
A
at the exit side.
Left Right

Rear end
G068467
NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference.
Cut the paper at the center and put them together
to check the difference.
11. If the difference of right and left measured
values is 0.2 mm or more, carry out the
Exposure Advance Adjustment.
Pressure roller
Refer to 36080 ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in at the exit side
the exposure advance unit.
NOTE
• If the difference of right and left measured value is
within 0.2 mm, the zigzagging adjustment is Cam
G072399
completed.
2. Release the pressure of the pressure roller
12. Check the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging at the exit side and set the paper. Make fine
Correction. adjustments of the cam in the exposure
☞ 36060 advance unit so that the pressure release
amount of the pressure roller at the inlet side
is the thickness of about one sheet of paper.
25830 3/4
25830
3. Use the paper to check that the pressure of

the pressure roller at the inlet side is equable
at the right and left.

Pressure roller at
the inlet side
Cam
G072397
4. If the adjustment is required, perform the

same adjustment as the adjustment for the
exposure advance unit exit roller.
25830 4/4
25910
Banding shooting
Test Print 17 mm
32 mm

Leading end
Rear end
55 mm 55 mm
210 mm G072388
Paper path diagram
42.9 mm
Paper Advance Unit 1 70.5 mm
Arm
62.8 mm
Exposure advance motor 2 belt
72 mm
17 mm
Exposure position
17 mm
79 mm

G072400
25910 1/3
25910
! Banding shooting
Print condition Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to
All At the area 0 to 11 mm The bumper rubber for the laser Attach the bumper -
from the paper leading control box is detached. rubber.
end
At the area 32 mm from The pressure of the exit side Adjust the ☞ 25830
the paper leading end pressure roller in the exposure zigzagging of the
advance unit is inequable. exposure advance
unit.

Rear end: At about 17 mm The inlet side pressure roller Carry out the paper ☞ 36090
release amount of the exposure pressure operation
advance unit is too small. correction.
Rear end: At about 26 mm The inlet side pressure roller
release amount of the exposure
advance unit is too big.
At the area 24 to 27 mm The pressure of the inlet side Adjust the ☞ 25830
from the paper rear end pressure roller in the exposure zigzagging of the
advance unit is inequable. exposure advance
unit.
Banding is generated over The belt tension of exposure Check exposure ☞ 20110
the print in a cycle (210 advance motor 2 belt is advance motor 2
mm). maladjusted. belt.
Banding is generated over
the print in a cycle (55
mm).
Whole part of the print The screws of the exposure Tighten the screws ☞ 25810
(no cycle) advance unit are loose. of the exposure
advance unit.
It is given a vibration from - -
outside.
All jack bolts are not effective. Check the level of -
the printer.
The strength of the floor is - -
insufficient.
The banding cannot be Rear end: At about 61 mm The bumper rubber for the laser Attach the bumper -
found on the first and the control box is detached. rubber.
last prints in the At the area 45 to 48 mm The pressure pin of the paper Adjust the position ☞ 25640
Continuous Print. The from the paper rear end supply unit comes out of the of the pressure pin
banding cannot be found guide. of the paper supply
on the print when only IMPORTANT
unit.
one print is made. • This banding Guide
occurs when a
paper is being 0.0 mm
exposed while the
next paper to
expose is
advanced from the
paper supply unit Pressure
pin
to the exposure
advance unit.
25910 2/3
25910
Print condition Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to

Paper with an advance At the center part of the Mis-adjustment of the paper Adjust the position Refer to 25630
length of 914 mm paper (around the position supply unit cam position of the cam of the ☞ Checking after
of 450 mm) paper supply unit. adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• This banding
appears when the
paper supply unit
cam releases
pressure while the

paper with paper
advance length of
914 mm is being
exposed.
25910 3/3
26510
Paper Advance Unit 1
Removing paper advance unit 1 ! Adjusting the attaching position
1. Attach the paper advance unit 1.

! Procedure NOTE
• Remove two of four screws of the paper advance
1. Open the printer top cover. unit 1 to attach the unit.
2. Loosen screw(s) on paper advance unit 1. Loosen these screws.
(Loosen four screws.)


G070716

2. Set paper advance unit 1 to the positioning
pin.
G068506
3. Open the paper advance unit 1. 3. Tighten four screws of paper advance unit 1
temporarily.
4. Disconnect the connector(s). NOTE
• Attach two screws if you removed them in step 1
of Attaching position.
5. Remove paper advance unit 1 in the arrow Loosen these screws.
direction.

G070716
J/P333 and J/P334
G068507
26510 1/2
26510
4. Tighten the screw(s) pushing paper advance 2. Execute Test Operation for the Paper Stop
unit 1 in the direction of the arrow. (four Position Correction via F: Functions of
screws) Paper Advance Unit Correction.
Positioning pins Confirm the dimension between the front ends of arm
unit 2 and paper is from 3.0±0.5 mm.

Paper
Paper
Advance Unit
1
Tighten these screws.

G068508
Arm unit 2
5. Check paper advance unit 1 sets on the
positioning pin(s) normally in opening and
closing.
! Adjustment after reattaching 3.0±0.5 mm
G068452
When the original paper advance unit 1 is
reattached
3. If an adjustment is necessary, perform Paper
Advance Unit Correction.
1. It is not necessary to adjust. ☞ 36010
When the new paper advance unit 1 is attached

1. Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
26510 2/2
26550
Removing paper advance unit 2 2. Attach the connector(s) on paper advance

unit 2. (Six relay connectors)
IMPORTANT
! Removing • Carry out wiring on paper advance unit 2 as
shown below.
1. Open the printer top cover. • Check that any cables are not pinched or any
2. Open the paper advance unit 1. extra pressure is not on wiring in opening and
closing paper advance unit 2.

4. Remove screw(s) from paper advance unit 2.
(four screws)
J/P412
J/P413
Wiring
J/P323 G068548
3. Adjust the position of paper advance unit 2

so that the unit sets on the positioning pin(s)
J/P322 normally. (four screws)
J/P411
J/P410
Positioning
pin

G068503
5. Open paper advance unit 2 and remove it in

the arrow direction.
Paper
Advance Unit Paper Advance Unit 2
2
Positioning pin
G068505
When the original paper advance unit 2 is

reattached
1. It is not necessary to adjust.
G068504

When the new paper advance unit 2 is attached
1. Attach the paper advance unit 2. 1. Carry out Paper Advance Unit Correction.
☞ 36010
26550 1/1
26560
Removing the paper advance 4. Remove the paper advance pressure

change motor units (right and left). (three
pressure change motors (right and screws each)
left) and adjusting the pressure Paper advance pressure change motor unit (left)
timing for the arm(s)
! Procedure

☞ 26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change

motors (right and left)
1. Remove the upper guide (right). (four
screws, one plate) Paper advance pressure change
2. Remove the upper guide (left). (four screws) motor unit (right)
Upper guide (left)

G069797
Plate
J/P377 [Paper advance pressure change sensor (left)]
J/P378 [Paper advance pressure change sensor (right)]
J/P337 [Paper advance pressure change motor (left)]
J/P338 [Paper advance pressure change motor (right)]
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm

1. Adjust the position of the detection plates of
the paper advance pressure change sensors
(right and left).
(1) View the detection plate in the direction

Upper guide (right)
(2) Rotate the cam using a hexagonal
G068549 screwdriver to make the cam as shown in the
illustration.
3. Remove the lower guides (right and left).
(one screw and one nut each) (3) Loosen the set-screw of the detection plate.
(Loosen two set-screws.)
IMPORTANT
• If you remove the lower guides (right and left), (4) Adjust the position of the detection plate so
adjustment will be needed. that the detection plate is protruded by
3.6±0.5 mm from the Paper Advance
Lower guide (left)
Pressure Change Sensor (Left) or Paper
Lower guide (right)
G068550
26560 1/2
26560
Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right).

(two set-screws)
Viewed from the arrow
Arm (left) Arm (right)
Paper advance Paper advance

pressure pressure
change motor change motor
(left) (right)

Set-screws of Set-screws of the
the detection detection plate
plate
Cam Cam
Detection plate
Detection
plate
Paper Advance Paper Advance
Pressure Change Pressure Change
Sensor (Left) Sensor (Right)
Hexagonal
screwdriver
View from this side. View from this side.
Detection Detection plate

plate
3.6±0.5 mm
3.6±0.5 mm
Paper Advance
Pressure
Paper Advance Cam
Cam Change Sensor
Pressure (Right)
Change Sensor
(Left)
G069800
2. Attach the paper advance pressure change

motor units (right and left). (three screws
each)
3. Attach the lower guides (right and left). (one
screw and one nut each)
4. Adjust the position of the arm(s).
☞ 26570
5. Operate the Paper Advance Pressure
Change Motor (Left) or the Paper Advance
Pressure Change Motor (Right) via Output
check to check the pressure roller is
released when the Paper Advance
Pressure Change Sensor (Left) or the
Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor
(Right) is LIGHT.
☞ 35310
26560 2/2
26570
Adjusting the arm position Adjusting the position of the arm (left)
1. Carry out adjustment so that the dimension
between the lower guide of the arm unit and
! Procedure the rail is 53.9±0.2 mm. (one screw)
1. Remove paper advance unit 2. Lower guide

☞ 26550
2. Remove the upper guide (right). (four
screws, one plate)
3. Remove the upper guide (left). (four screws)

53.9±0.2 mm
Upper guide (left)
Plate
Upper guide (right) Rail

G068549 G069799
Adjusting the position of the arm (right) ! Checking after adjustment

1. Carry out adjustment so that the dimension
between the lower guide of the arm unit and 1. Test the paper advance.
the rail is 53.9±0.2 mm. (one screw)
Lower guide
53.9±0.2 mm
Rail
G069798
26570 1/1
26610
Processor loading unit
Removing the processor loading 5. Remove the processor loading unit. (four
screws)
unit
Positioning pin
! Procedure

☞ 26550

3. Remove the wiring cover. (two screws)
Wiring cover
Processor
loading unit
Positioning pin
G068509

G068510
1. The processor loading unit has positioning

pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in
attaching the processor loading unit.

When the original processor loading unit is
reattached
When the new processor loading unit is attached

J/P354 and J/P395
G068397 1. Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
26610 1/1
26710
Laser unit
Laser unit
Removing the laser unit 8. Disconnect the ground wire. (one screw)
PCB cover 2
Wiring cover
! Precautions for laser unit replacement
IMPORTANT Ground wire
• If you replaced the laser unit, items shown below

Laser unit Defective laser unit
Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be

checked
occurs
J/P1653
IMPORTANT
• Before replacing the laser unit, save all the data in J/P1663
Close Down Checks or Reading and Writing
PCB cover 1
Data.
J/P1619
☞ 35400
Paper advance section cooling fan 2
• There are two types of laser unit. One is type A1 G068512
and another one is type B1. For distinguishing the
type, refer to the following. 9. Disconnect the connector(s).
☞ 63080 J/P1619 (paper advance section cooling fan 2)
J/P1653 (B laser driver)
• Basically, when replacing the laser unit, replace it
J/P1663 (G laser driver)
with same type of laser unit.
10. Remove the AOM driver unit. (Loosen two
! Procedure screws.)

☞ 26550
3. Remove the processor loading unit.
☞ 26610
4. Remove the wiring cover. (Loosen two
screws.)
5. Remove PCB cover 1. (Loosen two screws.) Loosen this
screw.
6. Remove PCB cover 2. (11 screws)
7. Remove paper advance section cooling fan
2. (one screw) AOM driver unit
Loosen this screw.
G068513
IMPORTANT
• Raise the AOM driver and remove it, then
place on the processor top cover.
26710 1/4
26710
Laser unit
• Operate with extreme care for wiring to the 14. Disconnect the connector(s). (one screw)
laser unit, laser control PCB and laser I/O J/P1532 (Laser I/O PCB)
PCB. J/P1539 (Laser I/O PCB)
J/P1540 (Laser I/O PCB)
J/P1513 (Laser control PCB)
AOM driver unit
J/P1525 (Relay Connector)

IMPORTANT
• The positions of the relay connector(s) may
be changed.
• Remove the cable clamp(s) if it is attached to
the connector(s).
15. Remove the laser control box. (four screws)
J/P1516, J/P1517 and J/P1513
Processor top
cover
J/P1515
J/P1642
J/P1637
J/P1632 G068515
11. Disconnect the connector(s). J/P1539

J/P1525 and J/P1526
J/P1632 (B-AOM driver) J/P1532 and J/P1540
J/P1637 (G-AOM driver) Laser control box
J/P1642 (R-AOM driver)
12. Attach the AOM driver unit to the printer with
the connector(s) disconnected.
13. Remove the PCB plate. (five screws and one
spacer)
NOTE
• The reason why the PCB plate is removed is to
remove the optical fiber cable safely.
Laser control box
G068517
IMPORTANT
• Remove the laser control box. Turn it over
and place on the processor top cover.
• Take extreme care of wiring of the laser
control PCB and laser I/O PCB.
PCB plate Spacer Wiring cover
G068516
26710 2/4
26710
Laser unit
16. Remove three bumper mounts and a bumper 2. Attach the laser unit pushing the unit in the
angle bracket. (two screws) direction of the arrow (contact face). (four
screws)
IMPORTANT
Contact faces
• This is required only when you replace the
laser unit with new one.
Bumper mount

G068519
3. Attach wiring cover and PCB cover 1

carefully not to pinch any cables.
Bumper angle bracket Wiring cover

G072356
17. Remove the laser unit. (four screws)
PCB cover 1
G072359
Laser unit
G068514
When the original laser unit is reattached
! Adjusting the attaching position 1. Carry out the daily setup.
1. Attach the laser unit. When a new laser unit is attached
1. Attach three bumper mounts and a bumper
angle bracket to the new laser unit. (two
screws)
NOTE
• No position adjustment is needed for the bumper
mount(s) and the bumper angle bracket.
26710 3/4
26710
Laser unit
Bumper mount

Bumper angle bracket
G072356
2. Initialize the laser operation history.

☞ 35700
3. Carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction.
☞ 36020
4. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
5. Carry out the exposure magnification fine
adjustment.
☞ 36040
6. Check that the slippage of the main scanning
direction of the Exposure Position
Adjustment.
☞ 36030
7. Carry out the initial setup.
26710 4/4
26810
Zigzag adjustment
Zigzag adjustment
Adjusting the zigzagging of the

3. Adjust the zigzagging of the magazine
paper advance section mount.
Check item
☞ 22100
NOTE
All Check if leveling of the machine is completed
correctly. • If difference between part A on the first test
print and the second test print is within 0.5 mm,
Magazine Check that the shutter open/close arm works you do not have to adjust it.
mount properly. (When the printer door is closed, the
shutter open/close arm moves 10 mm and more Example: When the first test print skews to the right

at the outlet section of the magazine.)
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
! Procedure
A
1. Check the condition of the paper magazine.
A
☞ 22000
2. Adjust the zigzagging of the exposure
advance unit.
Refer to ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the

exposure advance unit in 36080.
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of the
exposure advance unit, make a test print
using the maximum size of paper which is in
use.
• If the exposure advance adjustment is
carried out for any one of magazine A, B or
C, the correction is complete.
• Measure the dimensions between 0 mm-
line and 254 mm-line on right and left edges
of the test print and check that the
differences are within 0.2 mm. If it is within Paper advance
0.2 mm, you do not have to adjust it. direction
G072383
4. When the zigzagging of the magazine

A
mount is adjusted, carry out the right angle

adjustment of the cutter unit.
Refer to ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter

unit 25620.
Right
Left
5. Carry out Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction.
☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction
for each paper magazine A, B and C.
Rear end
G068467 • Make test prints via Test Print
NOTE Confirmation 1/2 to check the zigzagging
• There is another method to check the difference. amounts (A - C) of two prints are within the
Cut the paper at the center and put them together tolerance level in the following table.
to check the difference between 0 mm-line and When they are within the tolerance level,
254 mm-line. the adjustment is not necessary.
26810 1/2
26810
Zigzag adjustment
NOTE the misalignment of the test print. If it is

within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
• For example, when the measurement values of
the second test print is 120 mm for both lines A Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
and C Center line
Check that the difference of dimension between
lines A and C on the first test print is within the
tolerance level in the following table.
Test Print Tolerance level
When the test print 1 is A−C is ±0.5 mm, both A and
A
457.0 mm width C are between 119.5 mm or

more and 120.5 mm or less.
914.0 mm width C are between 119 mm or
more and 121 mm or less.
Test print (first) Test print (second)
Line A Line A (120 mm)

A
G068463
NOTE
• After master correction of the exposure center
correction, carry out Exposure Center
Correction (for each Paper Magazine) again if
you are also using another paper magazine.
B
B
C
Line C Line C (120 mm)

G078473
6. Carry out the master correction of the

exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the master correction of the
exposure center correction for each paper
magazine A, B and C.
• Make a test print via Test Print
Confirmation with Master Value to check
26810 2/2
27230
Drive section
Drive section
Backlash adjustment of the dryer counterclockwise turn and tighten the lock
nut.
rack
Adjusting bolt
Plate of the drive unit
Gear of the dryer rack
! Procedure
Gear A
IMPORTANT
• The backlash adjustment is required when you
replace the dryer rack.

1. Remove the dryer rack.
2. Remove the duct. (one screw and one
washer)
Duct
Dryer rack
Plate
Screws
Lock nut
G069808
7. Remove the dryer rack. Attach the plate of

the drive unit in contact with the adjusting
G069806 bolt. (three screws)
3. Loosen one lock nut and three screws on the 8. Attach the dryer rack and the duct.
drive unit to let the unit move a little.
Lock nut ! Checking after adjustment
Adjusting bolt
1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or

Gear A abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.
Drive unit
G069807
4. Attach the dryer racks.

5. Keep pushing the plate of the drive unit in the
direction of the arrow and turn the adjusting
bolt until it contacts the plate.
IMPORTANT
• Check that the gear of the dryer rack and
gear A engage.
6. At the position where the adjusting bolt
contacts the plate, make 1.5
27230 1/1
27260
Drive section
Adjusting the position of the dryer View hole
rack
! Procedure
1. Open the dryer door and the dryer top cover.

2. Tilt the dryer rack.
3. Loosen the screws on the connector. (two

screws)
Dryer door
Dryer top cover
0.5 mm or less
Connector on the dryer rack side Connector on the body side
G052783
Loosen these screws. Connector 5. Loosen the screws on the lock plate which
Dryer rack secures the dryer rack. (two screws)
G071634
4. Adjust the connection so that the clearance 6. Adjust the position of the lock plate that
of the connectors is 0.5 mm or less. (two secures the dryer rack so that the lock works
screws) smoothly when setting the dryer rack. (two
screws)
IMPORTANT
• Pressing the connector strongly may damage Lock plate
the connector. If the clearance is too much
great, an error may occur.

G052781
7. Check the backlash between the gear of the

dryer and the gear of the dryer rack.
☞ 27230
8. After the adjustment, carry out the printing to
check.
27260 1/1
27270
Drive section
Adjusting the drive motor belt

tension
! Procedure
1. Remove processor cover 4. (seven screws)

☞ 20020
2. Adjust the position of the drive motor to fix

the drive motor belt so that it bends 1.6 mm
when pressing it by 265 to 296 g (2.6 to 2.9
N). (four screws)
Drive motor belt
Drive motor
Drive motor
G076385

! Checking after adjustment
1. Check if the drive motor operates normally.
27270 1/1
27410
Order classification section
Adjusting the stop position of the Print receiving tray
print receiving tray Dimension A
! Procedure
1. Remove the sorter cover.

☞ 20020
2. Loosen one screw on the sensor holder.

Then adjust the stop position of the print
receiving tray by moving the sensor holder
up and down.
Print sorter unit
Top of receiving tray rail
Sorter home sensor holder
G050751
4. Press the manual sorter switch several times

to check the stop position of the print
receiving tray.
If the stop position is not stable, check the timing belt
tension and the chain tension of the sorter motor and
adjust them properly.
NOTE
• Tension adjustment of the sorter motor timing belt
☞ 20120
• Adjustment of the chain tension
Print receiving tray
☞ 20120
Sorter home sensor holder
G050752
3. Adjust the sorter home sensor holder

position to stay the print receiving tray at the
position dimension A up from the top of
receiving tray rail.
NOTE
• Dimension A=2 ± 1 mm
27410 1/1
27420
Removing the print conveyor unit 6. Remove the conveyor guide. (three nuts)
Conveyor guide
! Procedure
1. Remove the processor drive cover.

☞ 20020
2. Open the squeegee unit top cover.
3. Lift up the lever and open the dryer door.

Squeegee unit top cover
Lever
G068387
7. Remove holder 1 (two screws) and holder 2

(two nuts).
Holder 2
Dryer door
G068389
4. Set a screwdriver on the cover of stay 2.

IMPORTANT
• Do this not to get your hands pinched with
stay 2 or the print conveyor unit after you
remove the screw from stay 2.
5. Remove the screw from stay 2 of the print
conveyor unit.
Stay 2
Holder 1
G068385
Screwdriver
J/P711: Conveyor motor
J/P778: Conveyor unit sensor
IMPORTANT
• Put the connector(s) in the square hole when
you attach the print conveyor unit.
G068384
27420 1/2
27420
9. Lift up the print conveyor unit in the direction 2. Adjust the position of the conveyor guide so
indicated by the arrow and remove it. that it does not contact with the roller(s) of
Square hole the dryer section. (three nuts)
Roller

J/P711 and
J/P778
Conveyor guide
Print conveyor unit

G068388
G068386
1. Be careful not to get your hands pinched with

stay 2 or the print conveyor unit.
Stay 2
Screwdriver
G068384
27420 2/2
27430
Replacing the print receiving tray 2. Press the end of receiving tray (3) with your
thumb, and remove receiving tray (2) in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
! Procedure Print sorter unit
Replacing print receiving tray (1)

1. Stop the print receiving tray to be replaced at
the print receiving position.
2. Push the pawl of the print receiving tray (2) in

the direction indicated by arrow A, then
remove the print receiving tray (1) in the
direction indicated by arrow B.
Print receiving tray (1)
A

Pawl
G052543

1. Remove the sorter cover.
☞ 20020
G050796 2. Remove paper guide (1). (two screws)
Paper guide (1)
Print sorter unit
1. Move the print receiving tray to be replaced
to the intermediate position.
Tray rail
G053522
3. Remove the tray rail. (one screw)
27430 1/2
27430
4. Remove the tray rails in numerical order by

sliding them in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
Print sorter unit

Tray rail
G050753
5. Insert a slotted blade screwdriver as shown

below, lift the print receiving tray slightly and
pull it out in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
G050390

7. Press the manual sorter switch, then check
that the print receiving tray operates
properly.
1. Adjust the stop position of the print receiving

tray.
☞ 27410
27430 2/2
27440
Removing the print sorter unit ! Precautions when reattaching

None
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer side cover.

☞ 20020
2. Remove the angle bracket cover.
Angle bracket cover

Pawls
G050756

J/P713: Relay connector
4. Remove the angle bracket. (two screws)
Angle bracket
G050757
5. Remove the print sorter unit in the direction

G050758
27440 1/1
27810
Replenishment package unit
Replacing the replenisher pump and the rating plate will not be determined
properly.
the water supply pump [SM] IN
Caps
(Do not remove this.)
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment packages.
3. Remove the pump mount. Poppet valves OUT

G050887
Arrangement for the replenisher pump and the • Be careful not to let the pump rotating part
water supply pump
come into contact with chemical or water.
7. Remove the pump as shown in the figure.
2. Push the main body backward. 3. Lift it up.
Tray units
1. Push. G050874
8. Remove the cover from the removed pump.

Cover
Lift up the cover holding the part

G050875
9. Take a note of the output amount displayed

on the new pump's rating plate.
G070020
The pump, for which the output amount measurement
4. Close the strainer unit valve of the pump to is no good, must be replaced.
be replaced. Output amount
5. Attach the tube clamps to the OUT side of
the hoses of the pump to be replaced.
6. Loosen the wire bands on the caps of the
Rating plate
pump to be replaced, and then remove the G050888
hoses. 10. Disconnect the connectors, and replace the
IMPORTANT pump.
J/P611, cord CD-A: CD-A replenisher pump
• For the replenisher pumps of CD-A, CD-B,
J/P612, cord CD-B: CD-B replenisher pump
CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, and STB, do not remove
J/P613, cord CD-C: CD-C replenisher pump
the new caps from the pumps. If they are
J/P617, 618: CD-W water supply pump
removed, the poppet valves may be taken off.
J/P614, cord BF-A: BF-A replenisher pump
Then the pump output amount indicated on
J/P615, cord BF-B: BF-B replenisher pump
J/P616, cord STB: STB replenisher pump
J/P619: STB-W water supply pump
Cord BF-W: BF-W water supply pump
27810 1/3
27810
12. Enter the output amount. IMPORTANT

Bringing up the display • For measurements of two or more
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output replenishment solutions, use a different
Amount Setting container for each solution.
If no different containers are available,
Setting for CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, CD-W, BF-A, clean the container before using.
BF-B, and STB
Enter the output amount written in step 9.
(4) Press on the Pump Output Amount
Setting display and select Pump Output
☞ 33030
Amount Setting.
Setting for BF-W and STB-W

(5) Select the pump for output.
Carry out pump output amount settings, and then enter
the measurement values. (6) Operate the pump by pressing the Manual
sorter switch.
! Adjustment after replacement (7) Check that the air does not remain in the
hose. Then repeat step (5) until the
1. Remove air from the replenisher pump and replenishment solution or water comes to the
the water supply pump (except BF-W and exit of the replenisher pipe or the water
STB-W). supply pipe.
IMPORTANT (8) Attach the air exhaust tool to the replenisher

pipe.
• If air remains in the pump, output cannot be
carried out accurately. Replenisher pipe and water
• If a large amount of air remains in the pump, supply pipe
the chemical may undergo oxidation, or
precise values may not be obtained because
air escapes during the measurement.
(1) Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor

cover 1. Air exhaust tool
☞ 20020
(2) Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply
pipe.
Remove the replenisher pipe and the water G050890
supply pipe from the sub-tank and fix the pipes
in the vertical position with the output ports IMPORTANT
front faced. • When air is exhausted for two or more
NOTE chemicals, be sure to start from CD-A
• Fix the replenisher pipe and the water pump.
supply pipe at the same height as when the • Before air exhausting from the pumps,
machine is operating. When the output be sure to clean the tool. If the tool is
amount is measured, the pipes should be not cleaned, contamination and
secured to obtain values correctly. chemical reaction may occur.
(3) Prepare a container for the replenishment NOTE
solution or water to be output. • The air exhaust tool is a service tool. Refer
Replenisher pipe and water to Service personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
supply pipe
(9) Exhaust the air from the replenisher pump
and the water supply pump by pulling the
cylinder of the syringe from the air exhaust
tool at one stroke.
Remove the air exhaust tool from the
replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe, and
discharge the air, water, or replenishment
solution.
IMPORTANT
Tape • When the air is exhausted by using the
G050889
air exhaust tool, the float of the
package may fall by the force of
27810 2/3
27810
attraction and the attention messages

such as Replace the Replenishment
Package with a new one. may be
displayed.
There may be still some replenisher
solution left in the package. Remove
the replenishment package from the
replenishment unit and shake it to
check if the float is rising.
• If the injection syringe slips out of the
air exhaust tool, the replenishment

solution or water may be splashed.
(10) After air has been exhausted by the air
exhaust tool, check that the air does not
remain in the hose.
2. Check the output amount.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's
Manual - Additional Operations & Setup
Manual -.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the difference between the
measured value and the output amount
entered in the machine is within ±3%. If the
difference is not within ±3%, check for
damage or clogging of the pipes. When there
is still no problem relating to those items, air
must be remained in the pumps. Exhaust air,
and measure output amount securely again.
• When the output amount for each
replenishment package is measured, the
remaining amount of each solution varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe to their original position.
4. Mark the label with a new pump output
amount.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Attach the sub-tank top cover and processor
cover 1 as they were.
IMPORTANT
• Do not leave the air exhaust tool without cleaning
after use. Otherwise the syringe packing may be
damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool before storing.
27810 3/3
27820
Replacing the probe [SM] 6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.
BF-B BF-A
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment package.
3. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB. (one screw)

Protection cover
STB CD-C CD-B CD-A
Probe nut
Probe
O-ring
Probe holder
G050893
G050891
7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the
probe nut securely using the probe replacing
4. Disconnect the tray unit connectors. jig.
J/P601: Tray unit A
J/P600: Tray unit B IMPORTANT
• The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
5. Remove the tray units.
• The probe (including the O-ring) should be
2. Lift it up. used properly for each solution.
Tray unit B
For CD-C solution, use the whole black
probe and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the
resin part is brown and the O-ring marked
with a green dot.
• The probe replacing jig is a service tool. Refer
to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
1. Press the lever.
Tray unit A
G050892
27820 1/1
27830
Adjusting the sensitivity of the 4. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB.
replenisher solution sensor [SM] (one screw)
Protection cover
! Procedure
1. Clean the LED and detection sections of the

replenishment solution sensor.
Trays

Replenishment solution Replenishment solution
package P-1 package P-2
G050891
5. Turn the VR of each sensor on the SM I/0

PCB counterclockwise fully.
Replenishment solution sensors

G050894
Sensor arrangement
G050898
VR Replenishment solution sensor

Counterclockwise Decreases the amount of light.
G050895
Clockwise Increases the amount of light.
2. Attach the replenishment package containing

the replenishment solution. 6. Adjust each VR according to each LED
condition which is OFF.
3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to 1. If LED turns ON by turning clockwise less than
ON position. twice from the left most position, carry out the
operation of ☞ If LED turns on by rotating less
than twice .
2. Carry out ☞ If LED turns on by rotating more
than twice if LED turns ON by turning clockwise
more than twice from the position which was fully
turned in the left.
Chemical VR No. LED No.
CD-A VR1 LED1
CD-B VR2 LED2
CD-C VR3 LED3
STB VR4 LED4
BF-A VR5 LED5
BF-B VR6 LED6
27830 1/2
27830
! If LED turns on by rotating less

than twice
1. If LED turns on when rotating the VR of each
replenishment solution sensor clockwise less
than twice, return the position of VR to the
left most and turn it three times clockwise
again.
IMPORTANT

• This includes the case when LED turns on
while the VR is at the left most position.
! If LED turns on by rotating more
than twice
1. While counting the rotation number of the VR
of each replenishment solution sensor, turn
the VR clockwise slowly and stop it at the
position when LED turns on.
IMPORTANT
• If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it
counterclockwise to the position where the
LED goes off. Then turn it clockwise again
until the LED lights up.
2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR
of the replenishment solution sensor
clockwise once to the right.
3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor
to adjust its sensitivity if total number of VR
rotations of each sensor exceeds 11 in
Step 1 and Step 2.
NOTE
• The maximum number of VR rotations for each
replenishment solution sensor is 13.
• When the float in the replenishment package
blocks off the replenishment solution sensor, the
LED goes off.
Floats Replenishment
solution
Replenishment package
Replenishment solution sensor

(detection)
Replenishment
Probe
solution
(LED)
G050897

27830 2/2
3000
3. Mode
Passwords ........................................................................................................................... 30500

Passwords ..........................................................................................................................................................30500
Passwords (DLS specification) ..........................................................................................................................30600
Mode structure chart ............................................................................................................ 31000
Mode structure chart (Order Display) ...............................................................................................................31000
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) .........................................................................................................31010
Mode structure chart (Menu display) ................................................................................................................31020
Mode structure chart (Setup) .............................................................................................................................31030
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] ....................................................................................................31040
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] .................................................................................................31040
3 Mode
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ................................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] .............................................................................................31050
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) ..................................................................................................................31060
Mode structure chart (Net Order) ......................................................................................................................31500
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Scanner) ...................................................................... 31610
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Scanner] ..........................................................................31610
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Scanner] ....................................................................31620
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Scanner] ..........................................................................31630
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Scanner] ........................................................................................31640
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [Stand Alone Scanner] .................................................................31650
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Scanner] ............................................................................31660
Mode structure chart (Net Scan Mode) [Stand Alone Scanner] ........................................................................31670
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer) ......................................................................... 31710
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ............................................................................31710
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ......................................................................31720
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Printer] ............................................................................31730
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Printer] ..........................................................................................31740
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] [Stand Alone Printer] .............................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer] ..........................................................31760
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Printer] ..............................................................................31770
DLS mode structure chart .................................................................................................... 32000
DLS mode structure chart ..................................................................................................................................32000
QSS mode structure chart (Order Display) ........................................................................................................32010
QSS mode structure chart (Menu display) ........................................................................................................32020
QSS mode structure chart (Setup) .....................................................................................................................32030
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] ............................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] .........................................................................................32040
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ........................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] .....................................................................................32050
QSS mode structure chart (Maintenance) ..........................................................................................................32060
3000 1/4
3000
Setup ................................................................................................................................... 32500

Service Parameters ............................................................................................................................................32500
Paper Specification Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................32510
Magazine Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup .....................................................................................................................................................32530
Monitor Setup [Stand Alone Scanner] ...............................................................................................................32540
Data Initialization ..............................................................................................................................................32550
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Scanner] .........................................................................................................32560
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer] ...........................................................................................................32561
Area Registration ...............................................................................................................................................32570
Parameter 1 ........................................................................................................................................................32590
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] .....................................................................................................................33030
3 Mode
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] ..................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] .....................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] ....................................................................................................................................33060
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................. 33500
Thermosensor Calibration .................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] .................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] ..............................................................................................................33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ........................................................................................................................33580
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting .................................................................................................................33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting .............................................................................................................33600
Operator Selections ............................................................................................................. 34500
Operator Selections [N] .....................................................................................................................................34500
Operator Selections [SM] ..................................................................................................................................34500
3000 2/4
3000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 35000

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AFC-II) ..............................................................................................35000
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 AFC-II) .....................................................................................................35010
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 MMC-II) ............................................................................................35030
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AMC-II) .............................................................................................35040
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (MFC) ...............................................................................................................35050
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Input Section) ..............................................................................................................................35200
Input Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35220
3 Mode
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Input Section) ............................................................................................................................35300
Output Check (Printer) ......................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [N] ...........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ........................................................................................................................35320
Reading and Writing Data .................................................................................................................................35400
Reading and Writing Data [Stand Alone Scanner] ............................................................................................35410
Procedures for Backup & Restore Software ......................................................................................................35450
System Version Check .......................................................................................................................................35500
System update for each control PCB (CPU) .....................................................................................................35600
Operation Information .......................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification [N] .................................................................................................................................35800
Machine Specification [SM] ..............................................................................................................................35800
Machine Specification [Stand Alone Scanner] ..................................................................................................35810
Self-diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................................35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic ..............................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ............................................................................................ 36000
Paper sensor adjustment ....................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction .........................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction ..................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment .........................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ....................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ...................................................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction ..............................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment .........................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ..................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .........................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization .................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ............................................................................................................36710
Scanner Unit Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-2/S-3] ..............................................................................................37000
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-4] ....................................................................................................37000
Light Source Registration ..................................................................................................................................37010
Focus Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................37020
Light Source Update ..........................................................................................................................................37030
3000 3/4
3000
Laser Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 37300

Laser Unit Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information .......................................................................................................... 37500
Saving the Logdata ............................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data ....................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time ....................................................................................37520
System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error ..............................................................37530
Saving the DLS log file .....................................................................................................................................37600
Flatbed execution display .................................................................................................... 38000
Flatbed execution display ..................................................................................................................................38000
3 Mode
3000 4/4
30500
Passwords
Passwords
Passwords
! Explanation
! Service personnel password
1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into
the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
3. Press the key, and then press the
key.
4. Enter the password (2260).
3. Mode
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.
NOTE
• After password input display appears, input the password
within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the
password, start it over again.
IMPORTANT
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the
floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy
disk drive or the floppy disk.)
! Deleting the service personnel password

key.
3. Enter the password except for 2260.
on each display.
! Deleting the owner password

2. Press the key while the key is
pressed on the Menu display to bring up the
Password Deletion display.
3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the
key.
NOTE
• After deleting the password, it is set to the initial
value (0123).
The Password Deletion display does not appear if
the password is not registered.
The Password Deletion display is appeared only
when deleting the password which has been
registered.
30500 1/1
30600
Passwords
Passwords (DLS specification) 2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into
the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
! Explanation key.
DLS mode and QSS mode need their own service personnel 4. Enter the password (2260).
passwords respectively. When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
For DLS mode, the password is used to proceed to the key on each display.
operator mode. For QSS mode, the password makes it
possible to display the service personnel mode and perform NOTE
each setting. • After password input display appears, input the password
NOTE within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the
• Quitting the application is performed at the close down
password, start it over again.
checks in the QSS mode.
IMPORTANT
! Service personnel password in DLS mode
3. Mode
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the
floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy
1. Select Service Operator from the disk drive or the floppy disk.)
Administration menu and press OK.
The password input display appears. ! Deleting the service personnel password

key.
3. Enter the password except for 2260.
on each display.
! Deleting the owner password
S072403
2. Press the key while the key is
pressed on the Menu display to bring up the
2. Enter the password (2260) and press OK. Password Deletion display.
Key Operator mode appears.
NOTE 3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the
• Service personnel floppy disk is unnecessary.
key.
NOTE
! Proceeding to the QSS mode • After deleting the password, it is set to the initial
value (0123).
1. Select QSS Menu in the Administration The Password Deletion display does not appear if
the password is not registered.
menu.
The Password Deletion display is appeared only
It proceeds to the QSS mode.
when deleting the password which has been
NOTE registered.
• The DLS mode can proceed to the QSS Menu
from either Operator mode or Key Operator ! Proceeding to the DLS mode
mode.
IMPORTANT
1. Select NO in the initial menu display of QSS
mode or PASS in the menu display.
• To display the Windows taskbar, it is It proceeds to the DLS mode.
necessary to proceed to the QSS mode from
Key Operator mode.
! Service personnel password in the QSS mode
30600 1/1
31000
Mode structure chart
Mode structure chart (Order Display)
3. Mode
S0000-00-SM04
Order Display
Item Reference
F Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF
Processor Drive ON/OFF
Rewind Paper
Media Copy
Start Adobe Photoshop
Net Order Mode ☞ 31500
Start Bravo Utility Refer to the Bravo
Service Manual.
Help Display
31000 1/1
31010
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display)
3. Mode
S0250-00-SM32
Judgment Display
Item Reference
Screen Saver
Print Size Change
Print Size Copy
DSA
1 Frame Magnification
Cancel 1 Frame Magnification
Setting
Print Image Fine Adjustment
Top-Bottom Information
Change
Top-Bottom Information Copy
Help Display
Image Rotation (only 1 Frame)
[-1] Image Rotation
[N] Correction Value, Counts
and DSA Hold
[Y] Y-correction Copy
[M] M-correction Copy
[C] C-correction Copy
[D] Density Correction Copy
[REPT] Print Counts Copy
[+1] DSA Copy
[PASS] Passed frame copy
Panorama Shutter ON/OFF
31010 1/2
31010
Item Reference
Reading Test Print Correction
Value
Color Conversion
Photometry Memory
Frame Selection
Change of Front Print Setting
Cropping Operations Copy
Auto Red Eye Correction
Change
Scene Correction
Copy Scene Correction
Copy Correction Data
3. Mode
Auto Correction Change
31010 2/2
31020
Mode structure chart (Menu display)
3. Mode
S0003-00-SM00
S0019-01-SM00
• SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks Quit the Close Down Checks
Quit The Application
Power OFF
Pricing Sheet Reissue
31020 1/2
31020
Item Reference
*1
Daily Totals Print Details Print Out Daily Totals
Daily Totals Export
Details for Input Media Extra Print Out Daily Totals
Charge Daily Totals Export
Details for JPEG Print Out Daily Totals
Daily Totals Export
Details for Index Print Print Out Daily Totals
Daily Totals Export
Media Copy Details Print Out Daily Totals
Daily Totals Export
Reset Daily Totals
Total Counter Reset
3. Mode
Daily Totals Export
Total Counter 2
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change
AFC Cleaning
Cleaning of Arm Unit 1
Extension Setup ☞ 31030
Processor Settings ☞ 31040
Operator Selections ☞ 31050
IX Data Settings Imprint Setting
Lab ID
Photofinishing Data Utilization
Noritsu-eNET Setting (SP1) Serial Number/Model Number Refer to Noritsu-eNET
setting system program
Network setting Setting Manual.
Dial-up setting
Upload configuration
Version check
e-mail setting
Price Setting Print Price Setting
Input Media Extra Charge
Setting
Index Print Price Setting
JPEG Price Setting
Standard Price Setting
Option Registration Option
Media
Option Software
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ 31060
*1. If pricing unit is not registered as an option, selecting this item is not available.
31020 2/2
31030
Mode structure chart (Setup)
3. Mode
S1000-00-SM00
Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
F Profile Chart Output (SP1)
F Printer Profile Calibration
F Print Check
F Black Balance Adjustment
F Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)
F Setup Switch
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
F Paper Specification Registration/Setup
Paper Setup
Print Channel Print Channel Selection Setting
Cut
Copy
Paste
Export
31030 1/2
31030
Item Reference
Scanner Setup Scanner Slope Correction (Negative) Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Reference Slope
DX Slope
Scanner Slope Correction (Positive) Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Scanner Slope
Parameters (Negative) Parameter 1 ☞ 32590
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
3. Mode
Service Parameter (SP1) ☞ 32500
Light Source Update
Light Source Registration (SP1) ☞ 37010
Area Registration (SP1) ☞ 32570
Flatbed Scanner Setup
Master Data Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
DSA
Monitor Setup ☞ 32530
Data Initialization (SP1) All Data ☞ 32550
Main
Auto Film Carrier
Image Processing
Printer
Processor
Colorimeter Unit
Pricing Unit
LASER
Correction Data for Brightness of the
Edge of Image Field
Scanner
Initial Setup (SP1)
Create Template Package Edit Edit Existing Format
New
New (Use division wizard)
31030 2/2
31040
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N]

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM].
3. Mode
S4000-00-SM00
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment
Amount Setting
F Manual Replenishment
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33030
F Pump Output Amount
Measurement
F Initial Replenishment
Operation (SP1)
Total Replenishment Amount ☞ 33040
Display
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
(SP1) Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33580
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33600
F: Drive Motor Revolution Count
Auto Adjustment
31040 1/3
31040
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM]
3. Mode
S4200-00-SM00
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Amount Setting
Measurement
Operation (SP1)
Display (SP2)
F Package Capacity
Setting (SP1)
F SM Forced
Replenishment Amount
Setting (SP1)
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
31040 2/3
31040
Item Reference
FDrive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment
3. Mode
31040 3/3
31050
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N]

This section differs depending on the machine specification. For the different points, refer to the following.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM].
3. Mode
S2000-00-SM00
! Operator Selections
Judgment Operation
Item Reference
Hold Key Reset
240 Print Counts User Advice (Camera Data)
PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order
Reprint Automatic Order
Sort Function by Each Frame
No. of Frames Setting of the Film Strip (135/120/110)
No. of Frames Setting of the Film Strip (240)
Judgment Display Specification
Display Design
Number of Display Items Switch
Color of PASS Frame
Color Selection of Print Frame Display
Color Selection of Frame Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Resetting
Selecting Judgment Type for the Input Media
Image Change of Judgment Display Screen Saver
31050 1/6
31050
Print Operation
Item Reference
Magazine Auto Change
Remaining Paper Amount Display
Paper Leading Edge Advance
Color Selection of Print Blank of Positive
Color Selection of Print Blank except Positive
PPI Image Decision Time
Net Order Mode
Spooler Place
Spooler Capacity
Spooler Used Space
3. Mode
Data to be sorted
Sort Order
Accept to receive orders in Normal Mode
Auto Printing Start
Wait time for printing
Display/Operation
Item Reference
Buzzer Volume*1 F Buzzer Test
Keyboard Buzzer*1
Buzzer Menu*1
*1. If you set the buzzer menu to other than Normal, you can not set the buzzer volume or keyboard sound.
Additional
Item Reference
Select the Type of Daily Totals reset
Film Carrier Rear Edge Fixed Dimension Frame Number
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Negative)
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Positive)
135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function
135/240 AMC Auto Focus
120 AFC Diffuser ☞ 34500
Paper Temperature Correction
Correction
Item Reference
DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction
Digital Masking Function
Positive Film Contrast Correction (120)
Positive Film Contrast Correction (others)
Positive Film Color Correction (120)
Positive Film Color Correction (others)
Judgment Image Sharpness Correction
CCD Noise Suppression
JPEG Block Noise Removal
Over Negative/Under Positive Frame Correction
31050 2/6
31050
Item Reference
Photometry Memory Function
Image Save
Item Reference
Saving Passed Images
Output Media Image Format
Arrangement by Output Media Frame Number
d-Storage*1
Retention Period
CD-R/RW
Writing Folder Format
Automatic writing to the CD-R external writing system*2
3. Mode
Viewer Software Selection
DPOF File Output
HD
Destination Folder Selection
Auto Media Output
*1. The d-Storage appears if you register d-Storage TYPE2 in Option Registration.
*2. Automatic writing to the CD-R external writing system is available if you register CD-R external writing system or Bravo in Option
Registration.
Viewer
Item Reference
Simple Viewer Software Selection
Viewer Software for Windows
Viewer Software for Macintosh
Selection of Deluxe Viewer Software
Shop Data
Front
Item Reference
240
Imprinting Selection
Imprinting User Advice (Camera Data)
Media
DPOF Printing Specification
Exif Printing Specification
Front Print Letter Color
Edge Color of Front Print Character
Front Print Font Size
Background Color of Front Print Text
31050 3/6
31050
Index
Item Reference
Hold of Index Print Counts
Archive Code Print
Reprint Code Print
135/120/110/Media
Index Print Specification
Prints of Order Number and Date
Print Date Setting
Minimum Index Print Frame Number
Arrangement by Frame Number
Index Print of Passed Frame
3. Mode
Index Print Background Color
240
Print of Title
Print Date Setting
Print Counts for each Print Type Display
Print Type Frame Display
Print Type Display Position
Contact Print
Item Reference
Frame F Reading the contact print
Background Color frame
Number of Blank Frames on Long Roll Film
Line Feed per Film Strip
Line Space
NOTE
• The Contact Print tab appears by installing the software for making the contact print in option registration.
Contents of Imprint
Item Reference
Copyright Mark F Input Contents of
Imprint
CVP/Back Print Data F CVP Imprinting
Selection
Index/Logo Data
F Reading Logo Data
PU/Store Name
PU/Telephone Number
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch (SP1)
Error Occurrence Selection*1 ☞ 34500
Replenishment Error (SP1)
31050 4/6
31050
Item Reference
Refilling Water Error (SP1)
Circulation Pump Error (SP1)
Order Classification Section Error (SP1)
*1. For the SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM].
Archive
Item Reference
Archive Selection
Archive Mode
Saving Passed Images*1
Preferred Code*3
Compact Archive Unit Type 2*2
3. Mode
Compact Archive Unit Output Setting*2
Output Image Quality
Output Image Size
*1. Appears if you select the Compact Archive Unit TYPE1 in Option Registration.
*3. Appears if you select both the Compact Archive Unit and the d-Storage in Option Registration at the same time.
NOTE
• The Archive tab appears if you set Compact Archive in Option Registration.
Lens Aberration
Item Reference
Lens Aberration
Name
Insufficient Brightness of the Edge of
Image Field
Correction Strength
Aspect Ratio
Chromatic Aberration
Strength (Vertical)
Strength (Horizontal)
Deflection
Strength (Vertical)
Pricing Sheet Print*1

Item Reference
Background Color
Pricing Sheet Print Counts
Pricing Sheet Image Part
Paper Fitting
*1. Appears if you set Pricing Unit Type to Print at the Option Registration screen.
31050 5/6
31050
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM]
3. Mode
S2000-00-SM00
• SP2: Display items can be supplemented by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Error Occurrence Selection ☞ 34500
Replenishment Package Error (SP1)
31050 6/6
31060
Mode structure chart (Maintenance)
3. Mode
S3000-00-SM00
Maintenance
Item Reference
Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment ☞ 35000
☞ 35010
☞ 35020
☞ 35030
☞ 35040
☞ 35050
☞ 35060
Colorimeter Calibration
F Confirming the Colorimeter
and Calibration Plate Data
F Updating the Calibration Plate
Data
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
F Test Paper Advance
F Paper Advance Test
F Cleaning Operation
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
F Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment
Paper Advance Unit Correction ☞ 36010
(SP1)
F Arm Unit 2 (Left)
Receive Stop Position
Correction Test
Operation
F Arm Unit 2 (Left)
Correction Test
Operation Confirmation
31060 1/7
31060
Item Reference
F Arm Unit 2 (Right)
Correction Test
Operation
Correction Test
F Test Operation for the
Paper Stop Position
Correction
F Paper Stop Position
Correction Test
3. Mode
Exposure Magnification ☞ 36020
Correction (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
F Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Exposure Position Adjustment ☞ 36030
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Exposure Magnification Fine ☞ 36040
Adjustment (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
31060 2/7
31060
Item Reference
Paper Advance Length ☞ 36050
Correction (SP1)
(Paper Magazine A)
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
(Paper Magazine B)
3. Mode
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
(Paper Magazine C)
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging ☞ 36060
Correction
F Test Print 1 (Paper
Magazine A)
1 (Paper Magazine A)
F Test Print 2 (Magazine
A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
Magazine B)
1 (Paper Magazine B)
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
Magazine C)
1 (Paper Magazine C)
31060 3/7
31060
Item Reference
Magazine C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A) without
Correction Value
(Paper Magazine A)
3. Mode
with Master Value
(Paper Magazine A)
with Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B) without
Correction Value
(Paper Magazine B) with
Master Value
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C) without
Correction Value
(Paper Magazine C) with
Master Value
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
Exposure Advance Adjustment ☞ 36080
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
31060 4/7
31060
Item Reference
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
F Exposure Advance
Pressure Inlet Roller
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
3. Mode
F Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
F Exposure Advance
Pressure Exit Roller Test
Print (Paper Magazine
A)
F Exposure Advance
B)
F Exposure Advance
C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
Paper Pressure Operation ☞ 36090
Correction
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
31060 5/7
31060
Item Reference
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
3. Mode
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1) Swing and Tilt/Light Axis ☞ 37000
Adjustment
Light Source Registration ☞ 37010
Focus Adjustment ☞ 37020
F Magnification Change
F Focus Auto Adjustment
F Result
Light Source Update ☞ 37030
Laser Unit Adjustment ☞ 37300
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment Compact Archive Unit ☞ 36700
Initialization
F Initialization of the
Compact Archive Unit
(SP1)
F Defragmentation of the
Compact Archive Unit Capacity ☞ 36710
Check (SP1)
Process Control Strip
Input Check Input Section ☞ 35200
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Output Check Input Section ☞ 35300
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Reading and Writing Data All Data Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy ☞ 35400
Disk)
Reading Data (Floppy Disk ->
CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy
Disk -> CPU) (SP1)
Writing All Data (CPU ->
Media) (SP1)
Reading All Data (Media ->
CPU) (SP1)
31060 6/7
31060
Item Reference
Service Data (SP1) Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy
Disk)
CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Disk -> CPU)
Media)
CPU)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500
Profile Data (SP1)
3. Mode
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600
Software Upgrade (NET)
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Daily Setup History
Laser Operation Record (SP1)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
F Program Timer Setting
F Machine Information
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
31060 7/7
31500
Mode structure chart (Net Order)
3. Mode
S0000-00-SM00
Order Display
Item Reference
Net Folder Registration
Receipt Record
31500 1/1
31610
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Scanner)
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Scanner]
3. Mode
S0000-00-SM01
Order Display
Item Reference
F Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF
Media Copy
Net Scan Mode ☞ 31670
Help Display
31610 1/1
31620
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Scanner]
3. Mode
S0000-00-SM02
Judgment Display
Item Reference
Screen Saver
Panorama Shutter ON/OFF
Color Conversion
DSA
Change
Help Display
[-1] Image Rotation
and DSA Hold
[+1] DSA Copy
Photometry Memory
Scene Correction
31620 1/1
31630
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Scanner]
3. Mode
S0003-00-SM01
S0019-01-SM01
Menu display
Item Reference
Power OFF
Pricing Sheet Reissue*1
Daily Totals*1
Daily Setup
AFC Cleaning
31630 1/2
31630
Item Reference
IX Data Settings Photofinishing Data Utilization
Dial-up setting
Version check
e-mail setting
*1
Price Setting
3. Mode
Media
Option Software
*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Scanner.
31630 2/2
31640
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Scanner]
3. Mode
S1000-00-SM01
Setup
Item Reference
Cut
Copy
Scanner Setup Scanner Slope Correction (Negative) Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Reference Slope
DX Slope
Scanner Slope Correction (Positive) Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Scanner Slope
Parameters (Negative) Parameter 1 ☞ 32590
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Service Parameter (SP1) ☞ 32500
Light Source Update
DSA
31640 1/2
31640
Item Reference
Main
Auto Film Carrier
Image Processing
Pricing Unit
Scanner
New
3. Mode
31640 2/2
31650
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [Stand Alone Scanner]
3. Mode
S2000-00-SM02
Judgment Operation
Item Reference
Hold Key Reset
240 Print Counts User Advice (Camera Data)*1
Display Design
Color of PASS Frame
Print Operation
Item Reference
Auto Calculation of Print Channel Scanning Magnification
31650 1/3
31650
Display/Operation
Item Reference
*1
Buzzer Volume F Buzzer Test
Keyboard Buzzer*1
Buzzer Menu*1
*1. If you set the buzzer menu to other than Normal, you cannot set the buzzer volume or keyboard sound.
Additional
Item Reference
3. Mode
135/240 AMC Auto Focus
120 AFC Diffuser ☞ 34500
Correction
Item Reference
Digital Masking Function
Digital Masking Unit
Positive Film Contrast Correction (120)
Positive Film Contrast Correction (others)
Positive Film Color Correction (120)
Positive Film Color Correction (others)
CCD Noise Suppression
Over Negative/Under Positive Frame Correction
Photometry Memory Function
Image Save
Item Reference
Arrangement by Output Media Frame Number
d-Storage*1
Retention Period
CD-R/RW
DPOF File Output
HD
Auto Media Output
*1. The d-Storage appears if you register d-Storage TYPE2 in Option Registration.
*2. Automatic writing to the CD-R external writing system is available if you register CD-R external writing system or Bravo in Option
Registration.
31650 2/3
31650
Viewer
Item Reference
Shop Data
Archive
Item Reference
Archive Selection
Archive Mode
3. Mode
Saving Passed Images*1
Preferred Code*3
Compact Archive Unit Type 2*2
Compact Archive Unit Output Setting*2
Output Image Size
*3. Appears if you select both the Compact Archive Unit and the d-Storage in Option Registration at the same time.
NOTE
• The Archive tab appears if you set Compact Archive in Option Registration.
Lens Aberration
Item Reference
Lens Aberration
Name
Image Field
Correction Strength
Aspect Ratio
Strength (Vertical)
Deflection
Strength (Vertical)
31650 3/3
31660
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Scanner]
3. Mode
S3000-00-SM00
Maintenance
Item Reference
☞ 35010
☞ 35020
☞ 35030
☞ 35040
☞ 35050
☞ 35060
Adjustment
Magnification Change
Focus Auto Adjustment
Result
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment Compact Archive Unit ☞ 36700
Initialization
Initialization of the
Defragmentation of the
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ☞ 36710
31660 1/2
31660
Item Reference
Disk)
CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Media) (SP1)
CPU) (SP1)
Disk)
Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy
Disk)
3. Mode
Format Floppy Disk
Media)
CPU)
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Program Timer Setting
Machine Information
Self-diagnostic (SP1) ☞ 35920
31660 2/2
31670
Mode structure chart (Net Scan Mode) [Stand Alone Scanner]
3. Mode
S0000-00-SM06
Net Scan Mode display

Item Reference
Connection Status
Pre-scanning Settings Frame Size
Input Media Type
Scanning Settings Resolution
Size
DIGITAL ICE Technology
48bit Image Capture
AMC Auto Focus for every mount
31670 1/1
31710
Mode structure chart (Stand Alone Printer)
Mode structure chart (Order Display) [Stand Alone Printer]
3. Mode
S0000-00-SM03
Order Display
Item Reference
Menu
Rewind Paper
Media Copy
Net Order Mode ☞ 31500
Start Bravo Utility Refer to the Bravo
Service Manual.
Help Display
31710 1/1
31720
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) [Stand Alone Printer]
3. Mode
S0250-00-SM32
Judgment Display
Item Reference
Screen Saver
Print Size Change
Print Size Copy
DSA
1 Frame Magnification
Cancel 1 Frame Magnification
Setting
Change
Help Display
[-1] Image Rotation
and DSA Hold
[+1] DSA Copy
Reading Test Print Correction
Value
31720 1/2
31720
Item Reference
Color Conversion
Frame Selection
Photometry Memory
Change Front Print Setting
Cropping Operations Copy
Auto Red Eye Correction
Change
Scene Correction
Copy Correction Data
3. Mode
31720 2/2
31730
Mode structure chart (Menu Display) [Stand Alone Printer]
3. Mode
S0003-00-SM02
S0019-01-SM00
Menu display
Item Reference
Power OFF
Pricing Sheet Reissue*1
Daily Totals
Daily Setup
31730 1/2
31730
Item Reference
Dial-up setting
Version check
e-mail setting
Price Setting*1
3. Mode
Media
Option Software
*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Printer.
31730 2/2
31740
Mode structure chart (Setup) [Stand Alone Printer]
3. Mode
S1000-00-SM02
Setup
Item Reference
Profile Chart Output
Printer Profile Calibration
Print Check
Black Balance Adjustment
Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)
Setup Switch
Paper Specification Registration/Setup
Paper Setup
Cut
Copy
Paste
Export
DSA
31740 1/2
31740
Item Reference
Main
Image Processing
Printer
Processor
Colorimeter Unit
Pricing Unit
LASER
Edge of Image Field
Initial Setup (SP1)
3. Mode
New
31740 2/2
31760
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] [Stand Alone Printer]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer].
3. Mode
S2000-00-SM03
Judgment Operation
Item Reference
Hold Key Reset
Sort Function by Each Frame
Display Design
Color of PASS Frame
Color Selection of Print Frame Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Display
Color Selection of Print Frame for 1 Frame Magnification Resetting
Print Operation
Item Reference
Magazine Auto Change
31760 1/5
31760
Item Reference
Color Selection of Print Margin except Positive Film
Net Order Mode
Spooler Place
Spooler Capacity
Spooler Used Space
Data to be sorted
Sort Order
Accept to receive orders in Normal Mode
Auto Printing Start
Wait time for printing
3. Mode
Display/Operation
Item Reference
Buzzer Volume*1 Buzzer Test
Keyboard Buzzer*1
Buzzer Menu*1
*1. If you set the buzzer menu to other than Normal, you cannot set the buzzer volume or keyboard sound.
Additional
Item Reference
Correction
Item Reference
Image Save
Item Reference
Output Media Image Format
d-Storage*1
Retention Period
CD-R/RW
DPOF File Output
HD
Auto Media Output
31760 2/5
31760
Viewer
Item Reference
Shop Data
Front
Item Reference
Media
DPOF Printing Specification
3. Mode
Exif Printing Specification
Front Print Letter Color
Edge Color of Front Print Character
Front Print Font Size
Background Color of Front Print Text
Index
Item Reference
Hold of Index Print Counts
Archive Code Print*1
Reprint Code Print*1
135/120/110/Media
Prints of Order Number and Date
Print Date Setting
Minimum Index Print Frame Number
Frame(s)
Index Print of Passed Frame
Contents of Imprint
Item Reference
Copyright Mark Input Contents of
Imprint
CVP/Back Print Data CVP Imprinting
Selection
Index/Logo Data
Reading Logo Data
PU/Store Name*1
PU/Telephone Number*1
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch
31760 3/5
31760
Item Reference
*1
*1. For the SM specification, refer to ☞ Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer].
Archive
Item Reference
Archive Selection
Archive Mode
3. Mode
Preferred Code
Compact Archive Unit Type 2
Compact Archive Unit Output Setting
Output Image Size
Lens Aberration
Item Reference
Lens Aberration
Name
Image Field
Correction Strength
Aspect Ratio
Strength (Vertical)
Deflection
Strength (Vertical)
Pricing Sheet Print*1

Item Reference
Background Color
Pricing Sheet Print Counts
Pricing Sheet Image Part
Paper Fitting
*1. Appears if you set Pricing Unit Type to Print at the Option Registration screen.
31760 4/5
31760
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] [Stand Alone Printer]
3. Mode
S2000-00-SM03
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch
31760 5/5
31770
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) [Stand Alone Printer]
3. Mode
S3000-00-SM00
Maintenance
Item Reference
Various Adjustment Colorimeter Calibration
Confirming the Colorimeter
Updating the Calibration Plate
Data
Test Paper Advance
Paper Advance Test
Cleaning Operation
Paper Sensor LED Light
(SP1)
Arm Unit 2 (Left)
Correction Test
Operation
Arm Unit 2 (Left)
Correction Test
Arm Unit 2 (Right)
Correction Test
Operation
Arm Unit 2 (Right)
Correction Test
31770 1/7
31770
Item Reference
Test Operation for the
Paper Stop Position
Correction
Paper Stop Position
Correction Test
Correction (SP1)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
Test Print (Paper
3. Mode
Magazine C)
Test Print Confirmation
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
(SP1)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Adjustment (SP1)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Correction (SP1)
Test Paper Advance
(Paper Magazine A)
Test Paper Advance
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
31770 2/7
31770
Item Reference
Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
Rewind
Test Paper Advance
(Paper Magazine B)
Test Paper Advance
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
Rewind
Test Paper Advance
(Paper Magazine C)
3. Mode
Test Paper Advance
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine C)
Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
Rewind
Correction
Test Print 1 (Paper
Magazine A)
Test Print 2 (Magazine
A)
Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
Rewind
Test Print 1 (Paper
Magazine B)
Test Print 2 (Paper
Magazine B)
Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
Rewind
Test Print 1 (Paper
Magazine C)
Test Print 2 (Paper
Magazine C)
Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
Rewind
31770 3/7
31770
Item Reference
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A) without
Correction Value
(Paper Magazine A)
with Master Value
(Paper Magazine A)
Magazine Values
Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
3. Mode
Rewind
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B) without
Correction Value
Master Value
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
Rewind
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C) without
Correction Value
Master Value
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
Rewind
(SP1)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
31770 4/7
31770
Item Reference
Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
Exposure Advance
3. Mode
A)
Exposure Advance
B)
Exposure Advance
C)
Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
Rewind
Correction
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
Rewind
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
31770 5/7
31770
Item Reference
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 37300
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment*1 ☞ 36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check*1 ☞ 36710
3. Mode
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Disk)
CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Disk -> CPU) (SP1)
Media) (SP1)
CPU) (SP1)
Disk)
Disk)
Format Floppy Disk
Disk -> CPU)
Media)
CPU)
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Daily Setup History
31770 6/7
31770
Item Reference
Program Timer Setting
Machine Information
3. Mode
31770 7/7
32000
DLS mode structure chart
3. Mode
S072402
Operator display
Item Reference
Order Picture Package
Custom
Preview Density & Color
Filter
Lighting Correction
Zoom & Crop
Red Eye Correction
Dust & Scratch
Borders & Text
Order Status WIP
Archive
System Status Printer ☞ Printer Status display
Scanner
Media Input
Media Output
System
Output Metering
Help
Manage Operator
Key Operator
Service Operator
QSS Menu
32000 1/3
32000
3. Mode
S072405
Key Operator display

Item Reference
System Setup Preview Image Setup
Index Print Setup
Disk Drive Management
Print Management
System Defaults
Picture Package Setup
System Diagnostics
KODAK Picture Center Online
Network Management
Device Setup Scanner
Order Status Same as Operator display
System Status
32000 2/3
32000
3. Mode
S072406
Printer Status display

Item Reference
Replenishment On/Off
Paper Remaining
Version information
32000 3/3
32010
QSS mode structure chart (Order Display)
3. Mode
S072404
Order Display
Item Reference
F Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF
Rewind Paper
Help Display
32010 1/1
32020
QSS mode structure chart (Menu display)
3. Mode
S0003-00-SM00DLS
S0019-01-SM00DLS
Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks*1 Quit the Close Down Checks
Power OFF
Daily Totals Totals of paper processing
Daily Setup
AFC Cleaning
32020 1/2
32020
Item Reference
Option Software
*1. When the service personnel password (2260) has been entered, the value of Total Counter in Daily Totals can be reset.
3. Mode
32020 2/2
32030
QSS mode structure chart (Setup)
3. Mode
S1000-00-SM00DLS
Setup
Item Reference
F Setup Switch
F Paper Specification Registration/Setup
Scanner Setup Parameters (Negative) Service Parameter (SP1) ☞ 32500
Light Source Update
Main
Auto Film Carrier
Image Processing
Printer
Processor
Colorimeter Unit
LASER
Edge of Image Field
Scanner
Initial Setup (SP1)
32030 1/1
32040
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM].
3. Mode
S4000-00-SM00
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Amount Setting
F Manual Replenishment
(SP1)
Measurement
Operation (SP1)
Display (SP2)
F: Drive Motor Revolution Count
Auto Adjustment
32040 1/2
32040
QSS mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM]
3. Mode
S4200-00-SM00
Processor Settings
Item Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Amount Setting
(SP2)
Setting
Operation (SP1)
Display (SP2)
F Package Capacity
Setting (SP1)
F SM Forced
Setting (SP1)
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting☞ 33500 ☞ 33590
F: Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment
32040 2/2
32050
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM].
3. Mode
S2000-00-SM00DLS
Print Operation
Item Reference
Display/Operation
Item Reference
Buzzer Volume F Buzzer Test
Additional
Item Reference
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
32050 1/2
32050
QSS mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM]
3. Mode
S2000-00-SM01DLS
Processor
Item Reference
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
32050 2/2
32060
QSS mode structure chart (Maintenance)
3. Mode
S3000-00-SM00
Maintenance
Item Reference
☞ 35010
☞ 35020
☞ 35030
☞ 35040
☞ 35060
Colorimeter Calibration
F Confirming the Colorimeter
F Updating the Calibration Plate
Data
F Paper Advance Test
F Cleaning Operation
F Paper Sensor LED Light
(SP1)
F Arm Unit 2 (Left)
Correction Test
Operation
F Arm Unit 2 (Left)
Correction Test
32060 1/7
32060
Item Reference
Correction Test
Operation
Correction Test
F Test Operation for the
Paper Stop Position
Correction
F Paper Stop Position
Correction Test
3. Mode
Correction (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Adjustment (SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
32060 2/7
32060
Item Reference
Correction (SP1)
(Paper Magazine A)
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
(Paper Magazine B)
3. Mode
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
(Paper Magazine C)
Confirmation (Paper
Magazine C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
Correction
Magazine A)
F Test Print 2 (Magazine
A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
Magazine B)
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
Magazine C)
32060 3/7
32060
Item Reference
Magazine C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A) without
Correction Value
(Paper Magazine A)
3. Mode
with Master Value
(Paper Magazine A)
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B) without
Correction Value
Master Value
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C) without
Correction Value
Master Value
Master and Paper
Magazine Values
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
(SP1)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
32060 4/7
32060
Item Reference
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
F Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
3. Mode
F Exposure Advance
Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
F Exposure Advance
A)
F Exposure Advance
B)
F Exposure Advance
C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
Correction
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine A)
F Loading (Paper
Magazine B)
32060 5/7
32060
Item Reference
F Loading (Paper
Magazine C)
F Rewind
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine A)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine B)
F Test Print (Paper
Magazine C)
(Paper Magazine A)
3. Mode
(Paper Magazine B)
(Paper Magazine C)
Adjustment
F Magnification Change
F Focus Auto Adjustment
F Result
Laser Unit Adjustment ☞ 37300
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Disk)
CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
Disk -> CPU) (SP1)
Media) (SP1)
CPU) (SP1)
Disk)
Disk)
Format Floppy Disk
Disk -> CPU)
Media)
32060 6/7
32060
Item Reference
CPU)
Profile Data
DLL/Driver
Daily Setup History
F Program Timer Setting
3. Mode
F Machine Information
32060 7/7
32500
Setup
Setup
Service Parameters ! DSA Sharpness Difference Ratio (Initial value:

0) (Input range: 0 to 10)
Bringing up the display Adjust the DSA sharpness.
When the setting value is set to 0 or 10, it is adjusted by the
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup →
default value. With the setting value of 1, the sharpness of
Parameters (Negative) → Service Parameter
DSA (AS) is adjusted by tenth part of the default value.
With the setting value of 2, 3⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10, the default value
goes like 2/10, 3/10⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10/10.
NOTE
• For example, if the value of 2 is not sufficient but the
value of 3 is too much in adjusting the sharpness, set the
value to 5 for DSA Sharpness Difference Ratio and set
the value to 5 for AS. This means the value of DSA
Sharpness Difference Ratio is set to 0 and that of AS is
set to 2.5.
3. Mode
! Auto Red Eye Correction Judgment Rate
(Tungsten) (Initial value: 0) (Input range: −99 to
+99)
The strength of the auto red eye correction judgement for the
film that was shot under a tungsten light can be adjusted.
In the case of the film that was shot under a tungsten light, the
area other than eyes may be corrected incorrectly because face
is reddish.
G074621 NOTE
NOTE • As the setting value gets smaller, the auto red eye
• Only the Digital Masking Silverization Assessment Level is correction for the film that was taken under a weaker
shown onscreen for DLS specification systems. tungsten light will not be carried out.
! Explanation ! Scanner (initial value: ON)

This is the scanner correction switch.
The parameters, which vary automatic correction by the
scanner, can be changed. ON Normal Print
IMPORTANT D_OFF Only density correction is OFF (Only density
• CCD Noise Suppression Strength can be used for correction is average photometry.)
positive film. C_OFF Only color correction is OFF (Only color correction
is the average photometry.)
NOTE
None Both density and color corrections are OFF (the
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password average photometry).
(2260).
SetUp This setting is not used.
! DSA Contrast Difference Ratio (Initial value: 0)
(Input range: 0 to 10) ! PJP Analyzer (initial value: 0)
Adjust the DSA contrast. Use this function to collect the correction pattern data at
When the setting value is set to 0 or 10, it is adjusted by the customer's shop. The correction data of PJP is output to
default value. When the setting value is set to 1, the whole C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Tmp\ANALYSER.TXT.
area of DSA auto contrast (AC), high light area (ACh) and 0 Not output to the file.
shadow area (ACs) are adjusted by the tenth part of the default
1 Output to the file.
value.
With the setting value of 2, 3⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10, the default value
goes like 2/10, 3/10⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅10/10. ! Tungsten Negative Correction Rate (Initial
NOTE value: 80) (Input range: 0 to 99)
• For example, if the value of 2 is not sufficient but the Set the correction rate when the scanner judges that the
value of 3 is too much in adjusting the contrast, set the negative that was taken under a tungsten light. A setting value
value to 5 for DSA Contrast Difference Ratio and set the of 80 corresponds to no correction. The smaller the value, the
value to 5 for AC. This means the value of DSA Contrast greater the correction.
Difference Ratio is set to 0 and that of AC is set to 2.5.
32500 1/3
32500
Setup
! Digital Masking Silverization Judgment Level If image cannot be read, change the setting value to -2 and
(Initial value: 0) (Input range: -75 to +25) repeat the same procedure.
Setting the Ag removing failure rate is available.

If Ag removing failure rate exceeding the set value is detected, 0 The default value is 0.
automatically turns OFF the digital masking function and
prints.
If the value is set to under 0, the image is
detected with the lower sensitivity of CCD.
+25 The default value is 0. -4 The image quality may be get lower.
The smaller the value is set, the keener

detection of Ag removing failure is.
-75 ! Target Value 2 (Negatives) (Initial value: 0)
(Input range: -4 to 0)
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
! CF (Initial value: 80) (Input range: 0 to 99) • Do not change the setting. This function is not in
use.
Correction rate for the color failure can be set.
The setting of small value makes a color failure occurs easily ! Basic Color Correction Switch (Initial value: 0)
but pure colors can be obtained. (Input range: 0 to 1)
The smaller value is set, the more color

Changes how to calculate for the scanner correction according
0 to the negatives. Different effect can be obtained by
failures occurs. However, pure colors can be
obtained. combining with this Basic Color Correction Switch and
Scanner Color Correction Switch in the user mode.
The default value is 80. 1 The negative color correction used before upgrading
99 the software (same as Ver. 2.02)
0 The negative color correction after upgrading the
software
! Target Value 1 (Negatives) (Initial value: 0) IMPORTANT

(Input range: -4 to 0) • Setting the Basic Color Correction Switch to 1
cannot completely bring back the color correction
This mode is to be used only when the image cannot be
before Ver. 2.02 because the image is already
detected by the scanner because the base density of the
improved.
negative film is light.
Usually, do not use this function. • Basic Color Correction Switch is not available for
120 films.
IMPORTANT
• By combining the setting of Basic Color Correction
• If the setting is changed for the normal negative, the Switch and Scanner Color Correction Switch
print quality may be get lower. Also, the image may (Negative), six types of effects can be obtained for
not be able to be detected. 135/240/110 films.
• When the negative film that cannot be detected (by ☞ 32590
poor Ag removing, etc.) becomes detectable by
135/240/110 Scanner Color Correction Switch (Negative)
setting the D-ICE off, do so and do not use this
function. Standard Frame Order
• In other way, the film stop position can be also Basic Color 0 A B C
available even it is manual operation. Insert the Correction 1 D E F
negative pressing the N key of the operation Switch
keyboard or pressing the F4 key of the full
keyboard.
When changing the value, set it from 0 to -1, and carry out the
Light Source Registration and Focus Adjustment.
To check that image can be detected properly, process the
negative film.
32500 2/3
32500
Setup
Detail of effect
A As against the color correction: 0, standard color
correction: 0, the change of the color to the yellow tone
under the same scene can be controlled.
B As against the correction of A, the change of the color to
the yellow tone under the same scene can be controlled.
C As against the correction of A, the color failure can be
controlled. However, the effect of 1CH decreases.
D As against the correction of A, the color correction at the
under scene can be controlled.
E As against the correction of B, the color correction at the
F As against the correction of C, the color correction at the
3. Mode
32500 3/3
32510
Setup
Paper Specification
Registration/Setup

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper
Specification Registration/Setup
Unexposed length of leading end: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm
22-step setup print: 320 mm

G068485
3. Mode
S1028-00-SM00

! Explanation
A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out. 22-step setup print: 320 mm
! Paper Type Selection/Paper Magazine G068486
Selection
A maximum of three available paper types can be set.
! Paper Magazine Selection

Select the paper magazine used for setup of each paper type.
127 (1) or the OK The magazine for which paper
like specification is registered
127 (1) or the − The magazine which is registered and
like for which paper specification is not
registered
# # # (#) − The magazine which is not registered
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Carry out System Exposure Light Intensity Setting, Paper
Gamma Setup, Black Balance Adjustment, and Printer
Profile Calibration for each paper type.
Test prints are one sheet of 22-step setup print for setting the
exposure light intensity , one sheet of 22-step setup print for Unexposed length of leading end: 12 mm
adjusting the paper gamma setup, one sheet of 22-step setup
print for adjusting the black balance, and three sheets of test Each step length: 12 mm
prints for the printer profile calibration.
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup are printed 3
times at most.
20-step, 22-step setup prints: 320 mm
G068484
32510 1/3
32510
Setup
! Functions Make two sheets of 22-step setup prints and one sheet of 20-
step test print.
! Profile Chart Output
Make five test prints for creating the printer profile.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
3. Mode
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89mm G068484
! Print Check
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
When a problem occurs, sample images 1 to 7 are printed.
Then, the machine can be checked using the sample prints.
89mm
Sample 1: Print for CMS and gamma checks
A print of sample image with the CMS setting ON.
9.5 mm
14.5 mm
Sample 2: Print for CMS and gamma checks
A print of sample image with the CMS setting OFF
89mm
Sample 3: Letter confirmation print
14.5 mm A print of letter image.
G052519 Sample 4: Print for banding and laser checks

NOTE The print contains three kind of gray colors.
• There is no adjustment for outputting the printer profile. NOTE
• The printer profile need to be created for each paper type. • The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.
! Printer Profile Calibration Sample 5: Print for banding and laser checks
Calibrate the printer profile. A solid gray print.
Make test prints for calibrating the printer profile and calibrate NOTE
them with the colorimeter unit. • The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this.
Sample 6: Print for laser check
A print of test chart.
NOTE
display this.
Sample 7: Print for laser check
A print of test chart.
NOTE
display this.
32510 2/3
32510
Setup
! Black Balance Adjustment • Normally, set the setup switch to ON.
Adjust each R,G and B color automatically so as to show the NOTE

black letters as black. • The service personnel password (2260) is required to
The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print. display this.
3. Mode
G068486
! Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)

Adjust each R,G and B color manually so as to show the black
letters as black.
NOTE
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification
Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be
carried out automatically. To carry out the fine
adjustment just a little more, do it by Black Balance
Adjustment (Manual).
Select the most appropriate color (black).
G063985
! Setup Switch
When the setup switch is ON, high density section is
calculated and setup to be the most appropriate Dmax.
When the setup switch is OFF, setup within the range of the
colorimeter specification (Dmax: 2.2 D or less).
IMPORTANT
• If you change the setup switch, it is necessary to
carry out the operation from the initial setup again.
32510 3/3
32520
Setup
Magazine Registration/Setup The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.

Menu → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine
Registration/Setup
22-step setup print: 320 mm
3. Mode
G068485
IMPORTANT
• To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper
Specification Registration/Setup of the paper
type needs to be completed.
NOTE
• The test prints are printed 3 times at most.
S1035-00-SM00
! Functions
! Explanation
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper ! Paper Specification Registration/Setup
gamma setup is carried out. Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper
Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
Setup OK The magazine is registered for setup and
its paper specification is also registered.
☞ 32510
Setup − The magazine is registered for setup and
its paper specification is not registered.
Magazine OK The magazine not for setup is registered
Registration and the magazine registration setup is
completed.
Magazine − The magazine not for setup is registered
Registration and the magazine registration setup is not
completed.
− The magazine not for setup is not
registered and the magazine registration
setup is not completed.
! Magazine Registration/Setup (Paper width: 82.5

to 305 mm) (Paper surface: 1 to 4)
You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper
type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.
32520 1/1
32530
Setup
Monitor setup ! Adjustment

Follow the procedure below to setup.
Menu → Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup Working place environment check
Brightness adjustment
Monitor setup
3. Mode
! Brightness Adjustment
Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key (button)
of the display monitor.
1. Make setting for color temperature according
to the value displayed on the monitor.
S1030-00-SM00
2. Set the contrast to the maximum.
! Explanation 3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
of the density between the BGR digital
The display monitor can be adjusted basically and
values 0, 0, 0 and 10,10,10 can barely be
mechanically. Also display monitor color can be adjusted to
the print color according to the operating environment of the
recognized.
machine.
! Monitor Setup
IMPORTANT
• Before carrying out the monitor setup, check if the 1. Make a test print.
color can be recognized at your working place. If
NOTE
necessary, change the environment of the working
place. • When Only Color Adjustment Pattern is
selected, one test print for adjustment is made.
! Brightness Adjustment When All is selected, seven prints including a test
print for adjustment are made.
Carry out the basic adjustment using the hard key (button) of
the display monitor. 2. According to the instructions on the display,
adjust the monitor color so that the sample
IMPORTANT
• The brightness adjustment is required according to
the operating environment.
! Monitor Setup
Make a test print and adjust the monitor color by visual check.
32530 1/2
32530
Setup
image on the display monitor matches the ORDER: Save profile

test print color. The monitor profile data that matches the setting is
made and overwritten the data.
D: Detail Setting
Detail setting screen is displayed and the selected
image can be corrected in detail.
3. After all adjustments are finished, select
Save Profile. A new monitor profile is made
and the data is overwritten.
3. Mode
Color pallet
S1241-02-SM00
Image selection section
S1241-02-SM01
Color pallet
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
color pallet using the mouse.
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
sample image.
REPT: Data Initialization
The monitor calibration data is initialized.
N: Check
Images which is adjusted and not adjusted are
displayed.
32530 2/2
32540
Setup
Monitor Setup [Stand Alone ! Adjustment

Scanner] Follow the procedure below to setup.
Bringing up the display Working place environment check

Menu → Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
Brightness adjustment
Monitor setup
3. Mode
! Brightness Adjustment
Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key (button)
of the display monitor.
1. Make setting for color temperature according
to the value displayed on the monitor.
2. Set the contrast to the maximum.
3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
S1030-00-SM00
! Explanation of the density between the BGR digital

values 0, 0, 0 and 10,10,10 can barely be
The display monitor can be adjusted basically and recognized.
mechanically. Also display monitor color can be adjusted
according to the operating environment of the machine. ! Monitor Setup
IMPORTANT
• Before carrying out the monitor setup, check if the 1. Make a test print.
color can be recognized at your working place. If NOTE
necessary, change the environment of the working • In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, any sample
place. print cannot be made. Click PASS:> Next.
! Brightness Adjustment 2. According to the instructions on the display,

perform the color adjustment so that the
Carry out the basic adjustment using the hard key (button) of color of sample image on the display monitor
the display monitor. seems to be the standard color.
IMPORTANT
• The brightness adjustment is required according to
the operating environment.
! Monitor Setup
Color can be visually adjusted.
IMPORTANT
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, any sample
print cannot be made. Therefore, the color matching
cannot be performed. The sample image can be
adjusted so that it seems as standard color.
Color pallet
S1241-02-SM00
32540 1/2
32540
Setup
3. Mode
S1241-02-SM01
Color pallet
By selecting the color pallet with the mouse, you can
adjust the monitor color so that the sample image on
the monitor seems to be the standard color.
By selecting a sample image, you can adjust the
monitor color so that the sample image on the monitor
seems to be the standard color.
REPT: Data Initialization
The monitor calibration data is initialized.
N: Check
Images which is adjusted and not adjusted are
displayed.
ORDER: Save profile
The monitor profile data that matches the setting is
made and overwritten the data.
D: Detail Setting
Detail setting screen is displayed and the selected
image can be corrected in detail.
3. After all adjustments are finished, select
Save Profile. A new monitor profile is made
and the data is overwritten.
32540 2/2
32550
Setup
Data Initialization

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization
3. Mode
S1022-00-SM00
! Explanation
The data which is saved in the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data (data writing).
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media. However, be sure to update the light source when reading out data from the floppy
disk.
☞ 35400
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.
Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

All Data BkData0100 Main data All data indicated on the left is
initialized at a time.
BkData0120 User Setting data
BkData0200 Main (Setup) data
BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData1700 Correction Value related data
BkData0300 Auto Film Carrier data
BkData0400 Image Processing data
BkData2700 Printer data
BkData0900 Processor data
BkData1000 Colorimeter Unit data
BkData1100 Pricing Unit data
32550 1/4
32550
Setup

All Data BkData2100 Laser related data
roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
the Edge of Image Field
Bk0300_SCN Scanner data
BkData2900 Scanner data
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg135_8
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
3. Mode
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5 (*1)
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh
• (*1) This is the data which has not been used after upgrading the system program.
32550 2/4
32550
Setup

Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
BkData0200 Master Data
Each Setup History
BkData0205 Laser Setup
3. Mode
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction
Image Processing BKData0400 Image Processing PCB Setting
Auto film carrier BkData0300 Adjustment data of AFC
Printer BkData2700 Each data of Printer
Processor BkData0900 Each data of Processor
Colorimeter BkData1000 Each data of Colorimeter
Pricing Unit BkData1100 Price setting data except the print
price setting
Basic price setting data
Total data
LASER BkData2100 Each data of Laser
Correction data for brightness roi_SHD.bin Correction data for brightness of the
of the Edge of Image Field Edge of Image Field
Scanner Bk0300_SCN Area Registration
Light Axis Adjustment
Light Source Registration
Focus Adjustment
Parameter (negative)
BkData2900 Each data relating to D-ICE control
PCB
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg135_8
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
32550 3/4
32550
Setup

Scanner MisregMMC_5 (*1) Erasing Scratch data
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
3. Mode
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh
! Data that are not initialized when initialization executed

Basically, data are initialized when initialization is executed.
Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.
Data which are not initialized
Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, laser
operation record
32550 4/4
32560
Setup
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Scanner]

3. Mode
S1022-00-SM01
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
disk data or the backup media. However, be sure to update the light source when reading out data from the floppy
disk.
☞ 35400
32560 1/4
32560
Setup

BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData0300 Auto Film Carrier data
*1
Bk0300_SCN Scanner data
BkData2900 Scanner data
3. Mode
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg135_8
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5 (*1)
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh
32560 2/4
32560
Setup

Option Registration
Error Record
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
3. Mode
Auto film carrier BkData0300 Adjustment data of AFC
*1
price setting
Total data
Scanner Bk0300_SCN Area Registration
Light Axis Adjustment
Light Source Registration
Focus Adjustment
Parameter (negative)
BkData2900 Each data relating to D-ICE control
PCB
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg135_8
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5 (*1)
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
32560 3/4
32560
Setup

Scanner MisregCROP_1.Izh Erasing Scratch data
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh
3. Mode

operation record
32560 4/4
32561
Setup
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer]

3. Mode
S1022-00-SM02
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
disk data or the backup media.
☞ 35400
32561 1/2
32561
Setup

BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData2700 Printer data
BkData0900 Processor data
BkData1000 Colorimeter Unit data
*1
3. Mode
BkData2100 Laser related data
roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
the Edge of Image Field

Option Registration
Error Record
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
Each Setup History
BkData0205 Laser Setup
Printer BkData2700 Each data of Printer
Processor BkData0900 Each data of Processor
Colorimeter BkData1000 Each data of Colorimeter
*1
price setting
*1
Total data
LASER BkData2100 Each data of Laser
Correction data for brightness roi_SHD.bin Correction data for brightness of the
of the Edge of Image Field Edge of Image Field

operation record
32561 2/2
32570
Setup
Area Registration 4. After carrying out Area Registration, the

focus adjustment is required.
☞ 37020
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Area
Registration
! Adjustment procedure (for MFC)
1. Set the MFC attachement to carry out the

Area Registration.
NOTE
• In case of other than the crop card attachment of
MFC, area is not registered automatically at the
light source registration.
• In the case of the crop card attachment of MFC,
area is registered automatically at the light source
registration.
3. Mode
2. Click YES: Enter.
NOTE
• The Area Registration starts automatically.
3. When you continue the operation to set
another film carrier, repeat the steps above.
S1047-00-SM00 4. After carrying out Area Registration, the
focus adjustment is required.
! Explanation ☞ 37020
Register the valid range of CCD.
IMPORTANT
• After carrying out Area Registration, the focus
adjustment is required.
☞ 37020
! Attached Film Carrier
The film carrier which is attached is displayed.
When the film carrier is not attached or attached improperly, −
− − − − is displayed.
! Registration
When the film size has already been registered, ON is
displayed. When it is not registered, OFF is displayed.
! Adjustment procedure (for other than

MFC)
1. Set the film carrier to carry out the Area

Registration.
NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, switch the lane to 135 or
240 securely.
NOTE
• The Area Registration starts automatically.
32570 1/1
32590
Setup
Parameter 1 ! Fogged Density Skip Rate (Initial value: 0)

(Input range: 0 to 99)
Bringing up the display Set the judgement level of density to skip the fogged negative.
Menu → Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Parameters
(Negative) The smaller the value is, the lower the skip
0
rate becomes.
99 The larger the value is, the higher the skip

rate becomes.
! Fogged Area Skip Rate (Initial value: 0) (Input

range: 0 to 99)
3. Mode
Set the judgement level of area to skip the fogged negative.
The smaller the value is, the lower the skip

0
rate becomes.

S1051-00-SM00 rate becomes.
! Explanation
Set the reference to judge the scanned film.
! Panorama Film Judgment Rate (Initial value: 0)
(Input range: −10 to 5)
! Under-exposed Negative Skip Rate (Initial
value: 0) (Input range: 0 to 99) Set the judgement level of 135 negative panorama frame.
Set the judgement level to skip the under-exposed negative.
The smaller the value is, the easier the
-10 detection as panorama is carried out.
The smaller the value is, the lower the skip
0
rate becomes.
The larger the value is, the more difficult the

5
detection as panorama is carried out.
rate becomes.
! Scanner Color Correction Switch (Negative)

(initial value: Standard)
! Over-exposed Negative Skip Rate (Initial value:
0) (Input range: 0 to 99) Switch the negative color correction (color tone of the whole
image) of the scanner.
Set the judgement level to skip the over-exposed negative.
Standard The correction between Frame and Order
The smaller the value is, the lower the skip Frame The correction using the information of a
0 frame
rate becomes.
Order The correction using the order information
99 The larger the value is, the higher the skip IMPORTANT
rate becomes. • The different effect can be obtained by combining
with the setting of Basic Color Correction Switch
of Service Parameters.
☞ 32500
32590 1/2
32590
Setup
! Scanner Graduation Correction Switch • It is slow at bringing up the PJP display after
(Negative except for 120) (initial value: ON) scanning the images and also it takes time to show
the next display.
In the case of 135, 240 or 110 negative film, the correcting
procedure of Shadow Area and Highlight Area are switched. NOTE
ON The contrast is corrected by frame with scene • For detecting the face of figure, the face sensing
judgement. technology OKAO Vision by OMRON Corporation is
adopted.
OFF The image is printed as if it is printed using the
analog machine. • The shots on which this correction does not work or
difficult to work are as follows.
! Scanner Graduation Correction Switch (120 When the shot is a portrait in profile or the image size of the
negative) (initial value: OFF) portrait is too small (less than 20 X 20 pixels as a rough standard)
When anything other than a person is shot (the subject is an
In the case of 120 negative film, the correcting procedure of
animal, a scenery, etc.)
Shadow Area and Highlight Area are switched.
When the shot is made in the over/under exposed condition, and
3. Mode
ON The contrast is corrected by frame with scene its subject has no contrast on the face
judgement.
OFF The image is printed as if it is printed using the
analog machine.
! Basic Density Correction Switch (Initial value:

1) (Input range: 0 to 3)
Select the intensity of density correction by scanner.
Detecting the face of the figure in the image corrects the
density or contrast for the shot under electronic flash or
backlighted automatically.
There are four levels of the intensity of density correction.
Setting Details Face
detection
0 The negative density correction Invalid
that the shot under electronic
flash or backlighted is not
enhanced.
1 Negative density correction that Valid
the shot under electronic flash or (Standard)
backlighted is enhanced.
the shot under electronic flash or (moderately
backlighted is enhanced. accurate)
the shot under electronic flash or (highly
backlighted is enhanced. accurate)
IMPORTANT
• When a specific under scene is scanned several
times by setting 1 or 2 or 3 for Basic Density
Correction Switch, the density values read by the
scanner may be uneven.
Selecting 0 for Basic Density Correction Switch
makes the density values even, but correction is not
performed for the shot under electronic flash or
backlighted.
• Highly accurate correction can be obtained with the
large value. But it is slow at calculating the
correction value and takes longer time for the
images to appear after inserting the films.
• The calculation of the correction value is performed
not only for the scene you want but also the every
scanned scene.
32590 2/2
33030
Setup
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] IMPORTANT

• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment
Description for each specification operation at machine installation.
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See • When the initial replenishment operation has been
below for the description for each specification. carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed,
activate the pump of the relevant hose to remove air
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Pump Output Amount using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
Setting [SM].
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump
Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4003-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1

to 200.0 ml)
On Pump Output Amount Setting via Function, each output
amount of replenisher pumps is measured and the
measurement values are compared.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change the pump output amount except for
when changing the pump.
! Functions
! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure each output amount of the
replenisher pumps and refilling water pumps.
! Initial Replenishment Operation

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.
After operating each replenisher pump for a specified time,
the air remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
33030 1/2
33030
Setup
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] IMPORTANT

• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment
operation at machine installation.
! Display • When the initial replenishment operation has been
Bringing up the display carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed,
activate the pump of the relevant hose to remove air
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump
using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
Output Amount Setting
☞ 27810
3. Mode
S4202-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1

to 200.0 ml)
On Pump Output Amount Setting via Function, each output
amount of replenisher pumps, water supply pumps, and
refilling water pumps are measured and the measurement
values are compared.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change the pump output amount except for
when changing the pump.
☞ 27810
! Functions
! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure each output amount of the
replenisher pumps, water supply pumps, and refilling water
pumps.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenisher pump is activated via the
pump output amount measurement of Functions,
amount remaining is subtracted.
! Initial Replenishment Operation

this.
After operating each replenisher pump, water supply pump,
refilling water pump for a specified time, the air remaining in
the hose can be extracted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
33030 2/2
33040
Setup
Total Replenishment Amount Total Replenishment Amount

Display [N] Display [SM]

! Display
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See
below for the description for each specification. Bringing up the display
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Total Replenishment Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total
Amount Display [SM]. Replenishment Amount Display
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total
Replenishment Amount Display
3. Mode
S4203-01-SM00
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount (Input range: 0.00

to 99999.99 mL)
S4004-00-SM00
The total replenishment amount can be checked and set.
! Explanation ! Remaining (Initial value: Package Capacity)

(Input range: 0.00 to Package Capacity)
! Total Replenishment Amount
When the prints have been processed, the amount discharged
The total replenishment amount can be checked. from the replenisher pump is subtracted from the remaining
amount. When replacing the package before the replenishment
! Replenishment Lack Time package gets completely empty, it returns to the initial value.
(Initial value: Package Capacity)
The replenishment stops when the waste solution tank is full
or when the replenisher solution is empty. Replenishment
Lack Time is accumulated according to the paper amount ! Package Capacity
which are processed after the replenishment is stopped. Carry The package capacity which has been set in the Package
out the replenishment after the error is released. Capacity Setting via Functions is displayed.
NOTE
• When the replenisher switch is turned off, the message ! Functions
appears and the process stops after the replenishment lack
time reaches 600 seconds.
! Package Capacity Setting
! Clear The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.
Clear the value which is accumulated.
NOTE # Replenishment Alarm Value (Initial value: -5%)
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to (Input range: -50 to +50%)
display the clear button. When the percentage of the replenishment
remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the
replenishment package capacity became smaller
than the Replenishment Alarm Value, 5708-5709
33040 1/2
33040
Setup
Replenishment Package solution remaining

error. occurs.
☞ 45708
# Package Capacity Setting (Input range: 0.1 to

9999.9 mL)
Set the replenishment solution amounts for the
replenishment packages.
! SM Forced Replenishment Setting

this.
# SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting

(Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input
3. Mode
range: 0.0 to 999.9 mL)
In the case of 3201
SM Forced
CD-A 58.1
CD-B 58.1
CD-C 83.0
BF-A 41.7
BF-B 60.5
STB 30.0
In the case of 3203

SM Forced
CD-A 55.3
CD-B 55.3
CD-C 79.0
BF-A 41.7
BF-B 60.5
STB 30.0
This is the limit amount when carrying out forced

replenishment.
When the forced replenishment amount reaches this
value, each replenishment pump stops.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change it to any other value than the
initial value of the forced replenishment amount.
# Revolution Count
The number of pump revolution when each pump
operates replenishment with the value input in
Forced Replenishment Amount Setting is
displayed.
33040 2/2
33060
Setup
Correction Setting [SM]

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Correction
Setting
3. Mode
S4205-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Correction Setting
The amount of replenish and water supply can be increased
depending on the paper process amount.
! Replenishment Correction Rate

The standard replenishment amount including the water
supply amount can be changed by the same rate, without
changing the value of Standard Replenishment Amount
Setting.
NOTE
• The replenishment correction rate can be changed by
entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Refilling Water Level 2

It switches Refilling Water Amount according to the operating
environment of the machine.
• Standard: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the
Refilling Water Amount Setting 2.
• Low Humidity: It becomes the refilling water amount set
in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Humidity).
• Low Processing Amount: It becomes the refilling water
amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low
Processing Amount).
Refer to ☞ 33510 Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].
33060 1/1
33500
Processor Standard Setting
Thermosensor Calibration

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor
Standard Setting → Thermosensor Calibration
3. Mode
S3005-00-SM00
! Explanation
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).
! Measurement Value (Initial value: 0.0°C) (Input

range: 10 to 52°C (Correction value: 0 to ±3°C)
Measure the temperature with a mercury thermometer and
enter the measured values.
! Correction Value
When the measured temperature is entered, the correction
value, subtracting the displayed temperature from the
measured temperature, will be automatically entered.
! Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the
thermosensor is displayed.
33500 1/1
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] # Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level
OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling
Description for each specification Water Level is set to ON. (For automatic refilling
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See water during start up checks and normal
below for the description for each specification. processing.)
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Refilling Water Amount
Setting [SM]. # Refilling Water Amount Setting2
Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water
! Display Level ON. (For automatic refilling during start up
checks.)
Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4008-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the
machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value:
Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to
999.9 ml)
Refilling Refilling
Water Water
Amount Amount
Setting 1 Setting 2
CD-W 186.0 79.5
BF-W 185.0 56.0
STB1-W 360.0 71.4
STB2-W 139.0 71.8
STB3-W 130.0 79.4
STB4-W 202.0 71.5
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling

water pump is set.
33510 1/2
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] Water Level is set to ON. (For automatic refilling
water during start up checks and normal
processing.)
! Display
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
Bringing up the display Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Level ON. This setting is valid when the Refilling
Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting Water Level 2 of Correction Setting has been set
to Standard. (For automatic refilling during start
up checks.)
# Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low
Humidity for Refilling Water Level 2 of
Correction Setting for Refilling Water Amount
3. Mode
Setting 2 (Standard).
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low

Processing Amount)
For Refilling Water Amount 2 (Standard), when
Low Processing Amount is selected for Refilling
Water Level 2 of Correction Setting, each
refilling water amount is set.
Each refilling water amount can be set according to
the amount of evaporation when processing amount
S4204-00-SM00
is low (for each machine or time of year).
! Explanation IMPORTANT
• The initial values of Refilling Water Amount 2
! Process Specification (Low Humidity) and Refilling Water Amount 2
(Low Processing Amount) are the same as that
The process specification which has been registered in the of Refilling Water Amount Setting 2. Do not
machine specification is displayed. change them.
☞ 35800 If it is necessary to change the settings, the
setting values are specified.
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value:
Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to
999.9 ml)
Refilling Refilling Water
Water Amount Setting 2
Amount Refilling Water
Setting 1 Amount 2 (Low
Humidity)
Refilling Water
Amount Setting 2
(Low Processing
Amount)
CD 151.0 58.5
BF 197.0 35.0
STB1 350.0 71.4
STB2 118.0 71.8
STB3 127.0 79.4
STB4 184.0 50.5
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling

water pump is set.
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level
OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling
33510 2/2
33580
Cleaning Water Amount Setting

Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4009-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (initial

value: 14.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the operation time of the cleaning pump.
! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial

value: 3.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the stopping time of the cleaning pump.
! Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 10.0) (input

range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor starts operation after the
cleaning pump starts the output operation.
! Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input

range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor stops operation after the
cleaning pump finishes the output operation.
33580 1/1
33590
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting

Standard Setting → Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting
3. Mode
S4011-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Lane Select Operating Time (after Paper Front

End Detected) (Initial value: PP-1213: 6.09 sec,
PP-1217: 4.79 sec) (Input range: 0.00 to 9.90
sec)
Set the timing of turning on the dryer selection solenoid after
the dryer select sensor detects the paper front end.
! Returning Operating Time (Initial value: PP-

1213: 7.26 sec, PP-1217: 5.76 sec) (Input range:
0.00 to 9.90 sec)
Set the timing of turning off the dryer selection solenoid after
the dryer select sensor does not detect the paper front end.
33590 1/1
33600
Drive Motor Revolution Count

Setting

Standard Setting → Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting
3. Mode
S4012-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Drive Motor Setting Value (Standards value:

PP-1213: 125, PP-1217: 216)
The setting count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.
! Drive Motor Revolution Count

The present count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.
! Functions
! Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment

The count of the drive motor revolution is adjusted
automatically.
NOTE
• When the drive motor has been replaced and the machine
type registration of the machine specification has been
changed, it is adjusted.
33600 1/1
34500
Operator Selections
Operator Selections
Operator Selections [N] IMPORTANT

• Normally, use with ON.
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See ! Circulation pump error
below for the description for each specification. Circulation pump error can be set ON/OFF.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Operator Selections [SM]. Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
NOTE IMPORTANT
• There are only [N] and [SM]specification for the Stand Alone • Normally, use with ON.
Printer.
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, only the display ! Order Classification Section error
(Additional) appears. Errors related to order classification section can be set
ON/OFF.
! Onscreen Display (Processor) Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Operator Selections →
Processor
! Onscreen Display (Additional)
Additional
S2000-00-SM06
! Explanation
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service
S2000-00-SM05
mode are explained.
! 120 AFC Diffuser
! Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch
The 120 AFC diffuser can be set to "Used" or "Not in use".
Processor drive and Processor dryer operate continuously.
This operates even when processing is not carried out. Setting Details
IMPORTANT Used If the 120 AFC diffuser is in use
• Normally, use with OFF. Using the 120 AFC diffuser increases
scanner accumulation time by a factor of
! Replenishment error 2.5.
Not in use If the 120 AFC diffuser is not in use
Errors related to replenishment can be set ON/OFF.
Scanner accumulation time is normal
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Refilling water error

Errors related to refilling water can be set ON/OFF.
34500 1/3
34500
Operator Selections
Operator Selections [SM]
! Onscreen Display (Processor)

Processor
120 AFC diffuser

G082013
IMPORTANT
• Perform the following adjustments after changing
the 120 AFC diffuser setting from "In use" to "Not in
3. Mode
use" or vice versa.
Item Reference
• 120 AFC diffuser settings do not affect the MFC 120

attachment.
S2000-00-SM07
! Explanation
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service
mode are explained.
! Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch

Processor drive and Processor dryer operate continuously.
This operates even when processing is not carried out.
IMPORTANT
• Normally, use with OFF.
! Replenishment error
Errors related to replenishment can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Replenishment package error

Replenishment package error can be set to ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Refilling water error

Errors related to refilling water can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
34500 2/3
34500
Operator Selections
! Circulation pump error

Circulation pump error can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Order Classification Section error

Errors related to order classification section can be set
ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
3. Mode
34500 3/3
35000
Maintenance
Maintenance
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment ! Explanation

(135/240 AFC-II) ! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0
mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm)
The difference between the prescanning position and the
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment actual scanning position can be corrected.
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
NOTE
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end,
it can be corrected automatically with Scanning Position
Auto Correction of Functions mode.
• When changing the print position for all frames
intentionally, input the correction value. For example,
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to
left.
3. Mode
Film inserting
direction
Direction of misalignment Print

S3099-00-SM00 when the minus correction is
carried out G057680
! Auto Gain Standard Value (Initial value: 200)

The standard value is used for gain adjustment of the 135
loading sensor, perforation sensor, ready sensor and DX
sensor.
! 135 Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
The loading sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
NOTE
• Only 135 lane has the loading sensor.
! Perforation Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
S3099-00-SM01
NOTE The perforation sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
(2260). ! Ready Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to
• * is displayed by entering the service personnel password.
255)
• Carry out the adjustment with the 135/240 film carrier The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
attached to the machine.
• When the (135) lane is selected for the attached film carrier, ! Film Ejection Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0
the display for adjusting the 135 film carrier appears. If the to 255)
(240) lane is selected, that for adjusting the 240 film carrier
The film ejection sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
appears.
NOTE
• When the lane is moved while the display for adjustment is
• Because the film carrier type is different depending on
appearing, the display for various adjustments appears.
the machine model, the gain value might not be
displayed.
35000 1/3
35000
Maintenance
! DX Sensor 1, 2, 3, and 4 Gain Values (Input NOTE

range: 0 to 255) • A film is used for adjustment.
DX sensors 1 and 2 or DX sensors 3 and 4 are adjusted so that
the two sensors have the same sensitivity respectively. ! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
! LED Light Intensity Value (Input range: 0 to 1. Select Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
255) Adjustment.
This adjustment is automatically carried out.
The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the auto gain standard
value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by NOTE
changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each • A film is not used for adjustment.
sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor
sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative. ! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
! DX Sensor Gain Value (without Film) (Input
1. Select Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment.
3. Mode
range: 0 to 255)
The gain value (without film) of each DX sensor is displayed.
NOTE
• A film is not used for adjustment.
! Functions
! DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
! Scanning Position Auto Correction
Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position 1. Select DX Sensor Standard Adjustment.
and the actual scanning position can automatically be
adjusted.
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

The LED light intensity and sensitivity of each sensor are
automatically adjusted.
NOTE
• Both lanes are adjusted at the same time regardless of the
lane which is set.
S3099-00-SM02
! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment 2. Insert the film into the film carrier.
Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each NOTE
sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out • Use the film containing two frames or more, of
simultaneously. which base density is light.
3. Remove the ejected film.
! DX Standard Adjustment
The standard adjustment of the 135 DX sensor and 240 DX
4. The adjustment is complete, and the
correction value is input automatically.
sensor can be carried out.
! DX Code Reading
! DX Code Reading
DX code reading test for either the 135 lane or 240 lane can be 1. Select DX Code Reading.
carried out.
2. Load the film to the film carrier.
! DX Sensor Level Display 3. Remove the ejected film.
The gain value of each DX sensor is displayed. 4. The reading is complete, and the result is
displayed.
! Adjustment NOTE
• Only the reading code, reading count and frame
! Scanning Position Auto Correction No. are displayed.
• The frame code, such as ##E, is displayed as the
1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction. display frame No.
• A maximum of 80 frames can be displayed. (a
maximum of 80 frames for the half size)
35000 2/3
35000
Maintenance
S3099-00-SM02
! DX Sensor Level Display
1. Select DX Sensor Level Display.
3. Mode
S3099-00-SM02
NOTE
• The A/D value is the gain value detected at real time.
• The gain value (without film) indicates the fixed value
obtained by standard adjustment.
35000 3/3
35010
Maintenance
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 ! Scanning Position Correction 1 (Initial value:
100 %) (Input range: 95.00 to 105.00 %)
AFC-II)
The correction amount of the difference between the
prescanning position and the actual scanning position is
Bringing up the display displayed.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Film Carrier Unit Adjustment ! Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to
255)
! Film Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to 255)

The film sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
! Ready Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to
3. Mode
255)
The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
! LED Light Intensity Value (Input range: 0 to

255)
value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each
S3004-00-SM00 sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor
NOTE sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative.
(2260). ! Functions
• Carry out the adjustment with the 120 film carrier attached to
the machine. ! Scanning Position Auto Correction
Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position
! Explanation and the actual scanning position can automatically be
corrected.
! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0
mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm) ! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
The difference between the prescanning position and the The LED light intensity and sensor sensitivity of each sensor
actual scanning position can be corrected. are adjusted.
NOTE NOTE
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end, • A film is not used for adjustment.
Auto Correction of Functions mode. ! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
• When changing the print position for all frames Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each
intentionally, input the correction value. For example, sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to simultaneously.
left.
! Adjustment
Film inserting
direction
1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction.
NOTE
Direction of misalignment Print • A film is used for adjustment.
when the minus correction is
carried out G057680
35010 1/2
35010
Maintenance
1. By selecting the sensor LED light intensity

adjustment, the value is automatically
adjusted.
NOTE
! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
1. By selecting the sensor sensitivity

adjusted.
NOTE
3. Mode
35010 2/2
35020
Maintenance
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (110 ! Loading Sensor Gain Value (Initial value: 200)
AFC-II)
Bringing up the display ! Perforation Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment to 255)
The perforation sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

255)
The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.

255)
3. Mode
value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each
sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor
sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative.
! Functions
S3098-00-SM00 ! Scanning Position Auto Correction

NOTE Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password and the actual scanning position can automatically be
(2260). corrected.
• Carry out the adjustment with the 110 film carrier attached to
the machine. ! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
The LED light intensity and sensor sensitivity of each sensor
! Explanation are adjusted.
NOTE
! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0 • A film is not used for adjustment.
actual scanning position can be corrected. Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each
NOTE sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out
• If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end, simultaneously.
Auto Correction of Functions mode. ! Adjustment
intentionally, input the correction value. For example, ! Scanning Position Auto Correction
left. 1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction.
NOTE
• A film is used for adjustment.
Film inserting
direction
1. By selecting the sensor LED light intensity

adjusted.
carried out G057680 NOTE
35020 1/2
35020
Maintenance
1. By selecting the sensor sensitivity

adjusted.
NOTE
3. Mode
35020 2/2
35030
Maintenance
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment 2. Remove the condensing lens unit.

(135/240 MMC-II)

Lens unit
3. Mode
G068477
3. Remove the lens unit guide. (two screws)
S3201-00-SM00
NOTE
• Functions appears when the service personnel password is
entered.
• Carry out the adjustment with the 135/240 MMC-II attached
to the machine.
! Functions Lens unit guide
G068478
! Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor Position
Adjustment 4. Select Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor
Position Adjustment [Remove the Top
Adjust the standard position of the emission lamp and
Cover].
detection sensor for auto focus.
NOTE
• Use three types of adjustment jigs for Emission
! Adjustment Lamp and Detection Sensor Position Adjustment.
• These are the service personnel tools. Refer to
Service personnel tool list.
Adjustment
☞ 80310
1. Remove the top cover. Emission adjustment
chart
☞ 20040
Scanner adjustment chart Height

(mount) adjustment jig
G052618
35030 1/4
35030
Maintenance
5. Adjust a height of the mount carrier. the gear counterclockwise moves it

downward.
(1) Attach the height adjustment jig to the MMC- Mount carrier sensor light-tight plate
II. Worm wheel
Height adjustment jig
3. Mode
Adjustment
screwdriver
Projection
Marks
G052616
(3) After adjusting the height, mark the

adjustment position on the worm wheel.
IMPORTANT
• Mark on the worm wheel which is near
G052615
the projection.
(2) Turn the AF motor worm gear through the • Put the marks on the front edge of the
adjusting hole on the mount carrier sensor worm wheel tooth and on the projection
light-tight plate, and adjust a height of the which is right down the tooth.
mount carrier so that it fits with the height
adjustment jig. NOTE
NOTE • The marks are used for position adjustment
of the AF detection sensor.
• Turning the worm gear clockwise moves
the mount carrier upward, whereas turning (4) Remove the height adjustment jig from the
MMC-II.
35030 2/4
35030
Maintenance
6. Adjust the position of the AF emission (2) Adjust the attaching position of the AF
sensor. emission sensor PCB so that the filament
image is in the center. (Loosen two screws.)
(1) Insert the emission adjustment chart into the AF emission
MMC-II. sensor PCB
IMPORTANT
• The emission adjustment chart jolts.
Attach the chart so that it comes to the
center of the mount carrier.
3. Mode
G052620
(3) Remove the emission adjustment chart.

7. Adjust the position of the AF detection
sensor.
(1) Set the scanner adjustment chart to the

MMC-II.
Emission adjustment chart Filament image
G052617
NOTE
• Check if the filament image on the
emission adjustment chart is in the center
of the emission adjustment chart. When the
filament image is in the center, the
adjustment is not necessary.
Scanner adjustment chart Target triangle marks

(mount)
G052621
IMPORTANT
• Set the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) with the target triangle marks
at the far side.
(2) Adjust the attaching position of the AF
detection sensor to bring the worm wheel to
35030 3/4
35030
Maintenance
the position marked when the height of the • The worm wheel may come near the
mount carrier was adjusted. (Loosen two marked position due to a rotation of the
screws. Two adjusting screws) worm wheel. In this case, return the
worm wheel to the position before the
Screws
rotation.
• Turn the adjusting screws every 180°
alternately. Turning one adjusting
screw fully at a time may cause the
screw to be blocked.
• When the worm wheel does not swing
within the tolerance level (about 4 mm),
adjust the auto focus section.
☞ 20850
IMPORTANT
3. Mode
• The worm wheel may come near the
marked position due to a rotation of the
AF detection sensor Adjusting screws worm wheel. In this case, return the
G052622
rotation.
IMPORTANT • Turn the adjusting screws every 180°
• The tolerance level of swing is about alternately. Turning one adjusting
within 4 mm (corresponds to one screw fully at a time may cause the
tooth). screw to be blocked.
(3) Remove the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) from the MMC-II.
8. Attach the top cover, lens unit and lens unit
guide.
The swing range (4 mm) viewed from the

front
One tooth each

(about 2 mm)
for left and
right
The swing range (4 mm) viewed from the

top
G060701
• Check that the marked tooth of the
gear swings 2 mm each for left and
right referring to the mark on the
projection.
35030 4/4
35040
Maintenance
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment 2. Remove the condensing lens.

(135/240 AMC-II) Condensing lens

G068479
3. Mode
3. Remove the mount advance guide. (one
screw)
S3327-00-SM00
NOTE
• Functions appears when the service personnel password is
entered.
• Adjust the 135/240 AMC-II attached to the machine.
! Functions
Mount advance guide
Adjustment G068480
Adjust the standard position of the emission lamp and 4. Remove the condensing lens unit guide. (two
detection sensor for auto focus. screws)
! Adjustment

Adjustment

☞ 20040
Condensing lens unit guide

G068481
5. Select Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor

Position Adjustment.
NOTE
• Use three types of adjustment jigs for Emission
Lamp and Detection Sensor Position Adjustment.
• These are the service personnel tools. Refer to
35040 1/4
35040
Maintenance
☞ 80310 the gear counterclockwise moves it

downward.
Mount carrier
Worm wheel sensor light-
tight plate
Scanner adjustment chart Emission adjustment

(mount) chart
Height adjustment
jig
3. Mode
G060680
6. Adjust a height of the mount carrier.

NOTE
Marks Adjustment
• There are two types of adjustment jigs for AMC-II screwdriver
and for MMC-II. G060679
(3) After adjusting the height, mark the

(1) Attach the height adjustment jig to the AMC- adjustment position on the worm wheel.
II.
Height adjustment jig for AMC-II
Block section Marks
G060705
G060677
IMPORTANT
(2) Turn the AF motor worm gear through the
adjusting hole on the mount carrier sensor • Put the mark on the worm wheel as in
light-tight plate, and adjust a height of the the illustration.
mount carrier so that it fits with the height • Put the marks on the front edge of the
adjustment jig. worm wheel tooth and on the block
section which is above the tooth.
NOTE
• Turning the worm gear clockwise moves NOTE
the mount carrier upward, whereas turning • The marks are used for position adjustment
of the AF detection sensor.
(4) Remove the height adjustment jig from the
AMC-II.
35040 2/4
35040
Maintenance
7. Adjust the position of the AF emission 8. Adjust the position of the AF detection
sensor. sensor.
(1) Insert the emission adjustment chart into the (1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (mount) to
AMC-II. the AMC-II.
IMPORTANT Scanner adjustment chart (mount)
• The emission adjustment chart jolts.

Attach the chart so that it comes to the
center of the mount carrier.
Emission adjustment chart
3. Mode
Target
triangle
marks
Filament
image
G060687
IMPORTANT
• Set the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) with the target triangle marks
at the far side.
detection sensor to bring the worm gear to the
position marked when the height of the
mount carrier was adjusted. (Loosen two
G060678
screws. Two adjusting screws)
NOTE
• Check if the filament image on the
emission adjustment chart is in the center
of the emission adjustment chart. When the
filament image is in the center, the
adjustment is not necessary.
emission sensor PCB so that the filament
image is in the center. (Loosen two screws.)
Screwdriver
Emission sensor PCB
Adjusting screws G060685

G060682
(3) Remove the emission adjustment chart.
35040 3/4
35040
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• The tolerance level of swing is about
within 4 mm (corresponds to one
tooth).
3. Mode
One tooth each for
left and right
(Approx. 2 mm)
G060706
• Check that the marked tooth of the
gear swings 2 mm each for left and
right referring to the mark on the block
section.
IMPORTANT
• The worm wheel may come near the
marked position due to a rotation of the
worm wheel. In this case, return the
rotation.
• Turn the adjusting screws every 180°
alternately. Turning one adjusting
screw fully at a time may cause the
screw to be blocked.
(3) Remove the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) from the AMC-II.
9. Attach the top cover, condensing lens, mount
advance guide, and condensing lens guide.
35040 4/4
35050
Maintenance
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (MFC) ! Adjustment

1. Set the attachment to the film carrier.
NOTE
• You can use any attachment.
• A film is used for adjustment.
2. Click the Scanning Position Auto
Correction in the Functions.
3. Set the film to the attachment and press
the Yes key appears.
NOTE
3. Mode
• Use a film of which the image appears properly.
• Set the film and the machine automatically starts
Scanning Position Auto Correction.
4. Set the film to the attachment and press the
Yes key.
NOTE
S3390-00-SM01
• When the machine completes Scanning Position
Auto Correction, Complete appears.
! Explanation

actual scanning position can be corrected.
NOTE
Auto Correction of Functions mode.
intentionally, input the correction value. For example,
left.
Film inserting
direction

carried out G057680
! Functions

and the actual scanning position can automatically be
corrected.
35050 1/1
35060
Maintenance
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135

AFC-II)
Bringing up the display Film inserting

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment direction

carried out G057680
! Auto Gain Standard Value (Initial value: 200)

Not in use for the 135
AFC-II
It is the standard value to adjust the gain of the DX sensor.
3. Mode
! 135 Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0
to 255)
! Perforation Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
S3099-00-SM0029 The perforation sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
IMPORTANT
• Although displayed, do not use the Functions for the
255)
240 film carrier adjustment display which is not used for
adjustment of 135 AFC-II. It appears because the The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
adjustment mode of the 135 AFC-II is same as that of
the 135/240 AFC-II. ! Film Ejection Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0
to 255)
NOTE
• The number of setting items increases when the the service The film ejection sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
personnel password (2260) is entered. NOTE
• Because the film carrier type is different depending on
! Explanation the machine model, the gain value might not be
displayed.
mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm) ! DX Sensor 1, 2, 3, and 4 Gain Values (Input
range: 0 to 255)
actual scanning position can be corrected. DX sensors 1 and 2 or DX sensors 3 and 4 are adjusted so that
the two sensors have the same sensitivity respectively.
NOTE
Auto Correction of Functions mode. 255)
• When changing the print position for all frames The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the auto gain standard
intentionally, input the correction value. For example, value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
when carrying out minus correction, the image moves to changing the light intensity value of all DX sensors. Each
left. sensor other than DX sensor is adjusted so that the sensor
sensitivity becomes the constant level without negative.
! DX Sensor Gain Value (without Film) (Input

range: 0 to 255)
The gain value (without film) of each DX sensor is displayed.
35060 1/3
35060
Maintenance
! Functions ! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
! Scanning Position Auto Correction 1. Select Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment.

and the actual scanning position can automatically be NOTE
corrected. • A film is not used for adjustment.
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment ! DX Sensor Standard Adjustment

The LED light intensity and sensitivity of each sensor are
automatically adjusted. 1. Select DX Sensor Standard Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity of each sensor in the following
table is adjusted.
3. Mode
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment
135 AFC-II 135 Loading Sensor, 135 Perforation
Sensor, 135 Ready Sensor, and 135
DX Sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4
S3099-00-SM02
! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment 2. Insert the film into the film carrier.
NOTE
Adjustment for the sensitivity at the detection side of each
sensor and the sensor LED light intensity can be carried out • Use the film containing two frames or more, of
simultaneously. which base density is light.
! DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
4. The adjustment is complete, and the
The 135 DX sensor standard adjustment can be done. correction value is input automatically.
! DX Code Reading ! DX Code Reading
The DX Code Reading test can be done.
1. Select DX Code Reading.
2. Load the film to the film carrier.
The gain value of each DX sensor is displayed.
! Adjustment 4. The reading is complete, and the result is
displayed.
! Scanning Position Auto Correction NOTE
• Only the reading code, reading count and frame
1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction. No. are displayed.
This adjustment is automatically carried out. • The frame code, such as ##E, is displayed as the
display frame No.
NOTE
• A film is used for adjustment. • A maximum of 80 frames can be displayed. (a
maximum of 80 frames for the half size)
1. Select Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment.
NOTE
35060 2/3
35060
Maintenance
S3099-00-SM02
1. Select DX Sensor Level Display.
3. Mode
S3099-00-SM02
NOTE
• The A/D value is the gain value detected at real time.
• The gain value (without film) indicates the fixed value
obtained by standard adjustment.
35060 3/3
35100
Maintenance
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ! Adjustment
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction,

Advance Length Correction
→ Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
1. Execute Test Paper Advance via
Functions.
2. Open the printer top cover,and then remove
the test paper from the paper advance unit 1
and 2.
Paper
3. Mode
S3088-00-SM00
! Explanation
Correct the paper stop position and feed error so that each Paper Advance Unit 2
step, such as 20-step, 22-step test prints, can be measured
G068474
correctly by the colorimeter.
NOTE
3. Draw the first line on the paper at 116 mm
away from the test paper edge, then the
(2260).
second line at 201 mm away from the first
position.
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +0.5 mm)
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller from the
paper front end to the measurement position.
! Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0)

(Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller.
First line Second line
G068475
! Functions
4. Execute Paper Test Advance via
Functions.
! Test Paper Advance
When the test is executed, the paper with the length of 345
5. Insert the test paper with the first line into the
mm is advanced to the paper advance unit 1 and 2. colorimeter.
6. Press the key.
! Paper Test Advance The test paper stops at the first line.
Adjust the colorimeter unit. 7. Press the or key and adjust so that
the first line and the front ends of paper
! Cleaning operation loading guide align.
Use the densitometer cleaning sheet and clean the colorimeter NOTE
unit advance roller. • Press the key to return the test paper to the
NOTE front.
• The densitometer cleaning sheet is a service personnel
tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
35100 1/2
35100
Maintenance
• Press the key to advance the test paper to the

back.
Front end of paper loading guide
First line
3. Mode
G068476
8. Press the key to advance the test

paper to the second line.
9. Press the or key and adjust so that
the second line and the front ends of paper
loading guide align.
10. Press the key to remove the test
paper.
! Colorimeter cleaning
1. Execute Cleaning operation of Functions.

2. Insert the densitometer cleaning sheet into
the colorimeter.
NOTE
• The densitometer cleaning sheet is a service
personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool
list.
☞ 80310
3. Press the key.
The densitometer cleaning sheet is advanced to the
colorimeter.
4. Press the key again.
The densitometer cleaning sheet is ejected.
35100 2/2
35200
Maintenance
Input Check (Input Section)

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Input Section
S3128-00-SM00
3. Mode
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
NOTE
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, the colorimeter unit is not loaded in the input section.
• For the Stand Alone Printer, film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit are not equipped to the input section.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-135)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF 135 Lane Limit Switch ON When the 135 lane is detected.
2 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 1 When the film carrier is attached.*1
3 ON/OFF Film Carrier Code Detector 2
6 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor ON When the film carrier is locked.
7 DARK/LIGHT Rewinding Sensor LIGHT When the film jam is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT 135 Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT 135 Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT 135 Perforation Sensor LIGHT When the perforation is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 1 DARK When the DX code is detected.*2
12 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 1 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.*2
13 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 2 DARK When the DX code is detected.
17 ### Attached Film Carrier Displays the attached film carrier.
*1. Film Carrier Code Detector
Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3 detector 4
135/240 AFC OFF ON OFF OFF
Not attached ON ON ON ON
*2. This one sensor detects both the DX code and the Film.
35200 1/7
35200
Maintenance
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-240)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF 240 Lane Limit Switch ON When the 240 lane is detected.
6 ON/OFF Film Carrier Lock Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
3. Mode
11 DARK/LIGHT VEI Sensor LIGHT When the VEI is at the fourth
position
12 ON/OFF IPI Limit Switch ON When the undeveloped cartridge is
set.
13 ON/OFF Cartridge Limit Switch ON When the cartridge is set.
(Turns ON when both switches 1 and
2 detect the cartridge.)
Film carrier Film Carrier Code Film Carrier Code Film Carrier Code Film Carrier Code
Detector 1 Detector 2 Detector 3 Detector 4
135/240 AFC OFF ON OFF OFF
*2. This one sensor detects both the DX code and the Film.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-Others)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
2 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF AFC/Scanner control PCB. ☞ 65000
Turn OFF all.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
Film Carrier Section (120 AFC)

No. Display Status
6 DARK/LIGHT Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Film Feed Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Film Sensor DARK Turns DARK/LIGHT repeatedly
while the film is advanced.
35200 2/7
35200
Maintenance
No. Display Status

Turn OFF all.
120 AFC OFF OFF ON ON
3. Mode
No. Display Status
6 DARK/LIGHT Loading Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Ready Sensor DARK When the film is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Perforation Sensor LIGHT When the perforation is detected.
Turn OFF all.
110 AFC ON ON OFF ON
Film Carrier Section (135/240 MMC)

No. Display Status
5 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Home Sensor DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
6 ON/OFF Mount Insertion Cover Open Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
8 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Upper) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Lower) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Mount Insertion Cover Sensor DARK When the mount insertion cover is
closed.
11 ON/OFF Mount Sensor ON When the mount is detected.
35200 3/7
35200
Maintenance
No. Display Status

Turn OFF all.
135/240 ON OFF ON ON
MMC
3. Mode
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AMC-II)
No. Display Status
4 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Home Sensor DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Upper) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Mount Carrier Sensor (Lower) DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
8 ON/OFF Mount Sensor ON When the mount is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Insertion Sensor 1 DARK When the mount is not set.
10 DARK/LIGHT Insertion Sensor 2 DARK When the mount is not set.
11 ON/OFF Mount Sensor (Inlet) ON When the mount is detected.
12 DARK/LIGHT Mount Elevator Sensor DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
13 ON/OFF Ejection Sensor ON When the mount is detected.
Turn OFF all.
Film carrier Film carrier code Film carrier code Film carrier code
detector 1 detector 2 detector 3
135/240 AMC-II OFF ON ON
Not attached ON ON ON

No. Display Status
35200 4/7
35200
Maintenance
No. Display Status

11 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 1 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.
14 DARK/LIGHT 135 DX Sensor 3 (Film Detection) DARK When the film is detected.
Turn OFF all.
3. Mode
135/240 AFC ON OFF OFF OFF
Film Carrier Section (MFC)

No. Display Status
5 ON/OFF Attachment Detection Switch 1 When the attachment is set.*2
6 ON/OFF Attachment Detection Switch 2
11 ON/OFF Film Pressure Switch ON When the film pressure holder is set.
12 DARK/LIGHT Table Home Sensor DARK When the move table is home
position.
Turn OFF all.
MFC ON ON ON OFF
35200 5/7
35200
Maintenance
*2. Attachment Detection Switch
Attachment Attachment Attachment Attachment Attachment Attachment

Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch Detection Switch
1 2 3 4 5
135F ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
135P OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
135H ON ON OFF OFF OFF
135FP ON ON OFF ON OFF
135FW OFF OFF ON ON OFF
135FPW ON OFF ON ON OFF
110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
240 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
120 (6 × 4.5) OFF ON ON OFF OFF
3. Mode
120 (6 × 6) ON ON ON OFF OFF
120 (6 × 7) OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
120 (6 × 8) ON OFF OFF ON OFF
120 (6 × 9) OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Crop Card ON ON ON ON ON
Adjusting OFF ON ON ON ON
Attachment

No. Display Status
1 ##.#°C LED Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the LED.
Scanner Unit [S-2/S-3]

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 1 Pre-Home Sensor DARK Home position
2 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 1 Home Sensor DARK Home position
3 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 2 Pre-Home Sensor DARK Home position
4 DARK/LIGHT Zoom 2 Home Sensor DARK Home position
5 DARK/LIGHT IRIS Sensor DARK Home position
6 ##.#°C Scanner Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the scanner.
7 OK/-*1 Capacity booster OK When the capacity booster is attached
Scanner Unit [S-4]

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Zoom Home Sensor DARK Home position
2 DARK/LIGHT Focus Home Sensor DARK Home position
3 ##.#°C Scanner Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the scanner.
4 OK/-*1 Capacity booster OK When the capacity booster is attached
*1. Displays the detection status of capacity booster A. The following messages will appear when pressing the F key on the Order Display to pass
through the Input Check display in starting up the machine.
• When the detection of ON has changed to -, the attention message No.1920 Capacity Booster Key cannot be detected. Make sure
connecting conditions. appears.
• When the detection of - has changed to ON, the attention message No.1921 Capacity Booster Key is detected. appears.
Colorimeter unit
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK When the paper is detected.
35200 6/7
35200
Maintenance
No. Display Status

3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
4 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF colorimeter control PCB.
☞ 64130
5 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
Be sure to turn OFF.
D-ICE control PCB

No. Display Status
2 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-2 OFF D-ICE control PCB.
☞ 64030
Be sure to turn OFF.
3. Mode
35200 7/7
35210
Maintenance
Input Check (Printer)

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Printer
3. Mode
S3245-00-SM00
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
seconds.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 (Right) DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B7 (Left) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C1 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C2 DARK When the pin is detected.
14 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C7 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
15 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Displays the attached paper magazine.
16 ### Attached Paper Magazine C Displays the attached paper magazine.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B DARK When the paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor C DARK When the paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Loading Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Cut Home Sensor DARK Home position: When the cutter is
opened.
5 DARK/LIGHT Cut End Sensor DARK When the cutter is closed.
6 DARK/LIGHT Hold Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
35210 1/4
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

7 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) DARK When the left arm is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) DARK When the right arm is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Supply Pressure Change Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
10 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
11 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) ON When the cover is closed.
13 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-2 OFF printer control PCB. ☞ 66000
Turn OFF all.
3. Mode
*1
18 OK/- Capacity booster B OK When the capacity booster A is
attached
*1. Displays the detection status of capacity booster B. The following attention messages appear when closing the Input Check display on the
starting up of the machine.
• When the detection of ON has changed to -, the attention message No.1920 Capacity Booster Key cannot be detected. Make sure
connecting conditions. appears.
• When the detection of - has changed to ON, the attention message No.1921 Capacity Booster Key is detected. appears.
Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A7 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Displays the attached paper magazine.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A DARK When the paper is detected.
Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 1 DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Start Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 2 DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
4 ##.#°C Inner Temperature Displays the inner temperature of printer.
35210 2/4
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

Turn OFF all.
Engine Section
Display Status
2 Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchr Normal
nchronous onous When the polygon mirror rotates
properly
Asynch Abnormal
3. Mode
ronous When the polygon mirror does not
rotate properly
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror is ON.
The polygon mirror driver outputs the signal which indicates the stability of the polygon mirror rotation.
3 Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchr When the polygon mirror is
nchronous onous synchronous and either of R/G/B
laser or all lasers is/are emitting
Asynch When the polygon mirror
ronous asynchronous
When the polygon mirror is
synchronous and either of R/G/B
laser or all lasers is/are not emitting
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror and R/G/B laser are ON.
When either of R/G/B laser is not emitting, it depends on the timing of measurement and the laser light intensity
whether synchronous or asynchronous appears.
When checking if there are any problems in the laser output, check with the output check. ☞ 35310
4 OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are
B Laser Light Source Status normal.
No The laser unit is deteriorated.
Good The G/B laser driver is not connected
properly, or is damaged.
The laser light intensity depends on the electric current applied to the laser diode. When the laser diode is being
deteriorated, add the electric current to acquire the specified amount of output. No Good is displayed when the
current value exceeds the limitation.
5 ##.#°C R Laser Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the R laser.
6 ##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
7 ##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When the polygon mirror rotates
properly
- When the polygon mirror does not
rotate properly
8 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-1 OFF Displays the dip switch setting of the
9 ON/OFF DIP Switch 61-2 OFF laser control PCB. ☞ 66010
Turn OFF all.
16 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
17 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
18 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
35210 3/4
35210
Maintenance
Display Status
19 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
20 ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1) *1 ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal
21 ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *1
ON (ready for printing)
*1. Laser unit (Type A1) is only displayed.
NOTE
• When B laser judgement signal 1, 2 and G laser judgement signal 1, 2 are all off: Laser unit (Type A1)
• When B laser judgement signal 1, 2 and G laser judgement signal 1, 2 are all on: Laser unit (Type B1)
Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 1)
Display Status
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
3. Mode
3 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Left) DARK When the paper is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Center) DARK When the paper is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Right) DARK When the paper is detected.
Turn OFF all.

Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Pressure Guide Sensor DARK When the paper pressure is released.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Left) DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right) DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
Turn OFF all.
35210 4/4
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM].
! Display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
3. Mode
S3090-00-SM00
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
seconds.
Processor Section
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat
operates normally
13 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
14 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
15 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
16 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
17 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
35220 1/4
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

19 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF processor control PCB. ☞ 66200
Turn OFF all.
22 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of power PCB 2 is
connected.
23 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
24 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
25 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
26 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
*1. Displays OK when all circulation pump is rotating normally.
Displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring when an error occurs. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
3. Mode
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.
Dryer Section
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is
turned off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Center) DARK When the paper is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) DARK When the paper is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Dryer Lane Select Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
Order Classification Section

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Sorter Home Sensor DARK Home position: Print receiving position
2 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
4 DARK/LIGHT Conveyor Unit Sensor DARK When the conveyor unit is set.
35220 2/4
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [SM]
! Display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
3. Mode
S3090-00-SM00
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
seconds.
Processor Section (1)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
8 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
10 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
11 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
12 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
13 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF processor control PCB. ☞ 66200
Turn OFF all.
18 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of power PCB 2 is
connected.
19 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
20 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
21 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
22 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
*1. Displays OK when all circulation pump is rotating normally.

Displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring when an error occurs. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
35220 3/4
35220
Maintenance
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
2 ON/OFF CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
3 ON/OFF CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
4 ON/OFF CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor ON Home position
5 ON/OFF BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
6 ON/OFF BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
7 ON/OFF STB Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
8 DARK/LIGHT CD-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
3. Mode
9 DARK/LIGHT CD-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
10 DARK/LIGHT CD-C Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
11 DARK/LIGHT BF-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
12 DARK/LIGHT BF-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
13 DARK/LIGHT STB Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
14 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-1 ON When the replenishment package is set.
15 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-2 ON When the replenishment package is set.
16 ON/OFF Water Supply Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
Dryer Section
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is
turned off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Center) DARK When the paper is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) DARK When the paper is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Dryer Lane Select Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Sorter Home Sensor DARK Home position: Print receiving position
2 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
4 DARK/LIGHT Conveyor Unit Sensor DARK When the conveyor unit is set.
35220 4/4
35300
Maintenance
Output Check (Input Section)

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Input Section
3. Mode
S3126-00-SM00
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
NOTE
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, the colorimeter unit is not loaded in the input section.
• For the Stand Alone Printer, film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit are not equipped to the input section.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC - 135)
No. Display Operation
1 Film Ready Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Film Ready Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Film Feed Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Film Feed Motor Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Panorama Shutter Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC - 240)

stop.
stop.
stop.
4 Film Feed Motor Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Spool Key Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 Light Lock Door Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
35300 1/4
35300
Maintenance

stop.
stop.
stop.

stop.
3. Mode
stop.
stop.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AMC-II)

stop.
stop.
3 Mount Carrier Slide Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 AF Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Mount Insertion Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 Mount Elevator Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
7 Mount Ejection Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 MMC)

stop.
stop.
3 Mount Carrier Slide Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 AF Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.

stop.
stop.
stop.
4 Panorama Shutter Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
35300 2/4
35300
Maintenance
Film Carrier Section (MFC)

stop.
stop.
3 Table Slide Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Film Pressure Magnet Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Film Viewer Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
LED Light Source Unit
3. Mode
1 ND Filter Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 LED Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 LED Heater (High) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 LED Heater (Medium) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 LED Heater (Low) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 B LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 G LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 R1 LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 IR LED Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 LED Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the LED unit.
NOTE
• ND Filter Solenoid, LED Cooling Fan, LED Heater (High), LED Heater (Medium), LED Heater (Low), B LED, G LED, R1
LED, IR LED and LED thermosensor are built in the LED light source unit.
• The heater of the LED light source unit can be changed in the three levels for (H), (M) or (L).
Scanner Unit [S-2/S-3]
1 Zoom motors 1, 2 Press the YES/START key to make Zoom 1 Pre-Home
Sensor and Zoom 2 Pre-Home Sensor repeat
DARK/LIGHT.
2 IRIS Motor Press the YES/START key to make the IRIS Sensor repeat
the DARK/LIGHT cycle once.
Scanner Unit [S-4]

1 Zoom Motor Press the YES/START key to make Zoom Home Sensor
repeat DARK/LIGHT.
2 Focus Motor Press the YES/START key to make the Focus Home Sensor
repeat the DARK/LIGHT cycle once.
35300 3/4
35300
Maintenance
Colorimeter Unit
1 Paper Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Pressure Change Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
D-ICE Control PCB

1 Buzzer Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3. Mode
35300 4/4
35310
Maintenance
Output Check (Printer)

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Printer
3. Mode
S3246-00-SM00
! Explanation
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor B/C Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Cut Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Paper Magazine Motor B Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Paper Magazine Motor C Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 Paper Magazine Lamp B/C Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
repeatedly.
8 Paper Sensor LED Power Supply OFF Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)

1 Ribbon Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Dot Head (1st Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Dot Head (2nd Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Paper Hold Motor Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
repeatedly.
5 Paper Supply Arm Motor (Left / Right) Press the YES/START key to operate forward/backward
operation repeatedly.
Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit)

1 Paper Magazine Motor A Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor A Press the YES/START key to operate once.
35310 1/3
35310
Maintenance

3 Paper Magazine Lamp A Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
stop.
Exposure Advance Unit

1 Exposure Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
repeatedly.
3 Exposure Advance Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to turn pressure/pressure release
3. Mode
repeatedly.
stop.
Engine Section
1 Polygon Mirror OFF Press the YES/START key to stop the polygon mirror.
Press the NO/STOP key to start the operation of the polygon
mirror.
2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1,2 ON Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Laser Unit Heater ON Press the YES/START key for Laser Unit Heater ON.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn off the laser unit heater.
4 R Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the R laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the R laser output.
5 G Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the G laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the G laser output.
6 B Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the B laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the B laser output.
7 G Laser Reset (SP1) *1 Press the YES/START key to reset the G laser.
8 B Laser Reset (SP1) *1 Press the YES/START key to reset the B laser.
*1. Laser unit (Type A1) is only displayed.
Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchron When the polygon mirror rotates properly and is
nchronous ous stable
• When entering the output check
• When turning ON the polygon mirror
Asynchro When the polygon mirror does not rotate
nous properly
• When turning OFF the polygon mirror
35310 2/3
35310
Maintenance
Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchron When either of R/G/B laser is emitting
nchronous ous • When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser output is turned
ON
Asynchro When all the R/G/B lasers are not emitting
nous • When entering the output check
• When the polygon mirror asynchronous
• When the R/G/B laser output are all OFF
This part checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser.
Since the Synchronous Check cannot be carried out in the same condition as the usual printing operation even if
all the R/G/B lasers light, a problem may occur in the usual operation with no trouble at the Output Check.
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are normal.
B Laser Light Source Status
3. Mode
No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
The G/B laser driver is not connected properly,
or is damaged.
##.#°C Displays the temperature of the R laser.
##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
- When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous

1 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
2 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
3 Lane Select Motor (Left) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.
4 Lane Select Motor (Right) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.
5 Paper Advance Motor 3 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
stop.

1 Paper Advance Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
2 Pressure Guide Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.
4 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.
35310 3/3
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM].
! Display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Processor
3. Mode
S3210-00-SM00
! Explanation
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 CD Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 BF Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 CD Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 BF Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 STB Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
11 Tank Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
12 Cleaning Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
13 Exhaust Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
35320 1/4
35320
Maintenance

16 Signal Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

1 CD-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 BF-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
stop.
3. Mode
stop.
stop.
Dryer Section
1 Dryer Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Dryer Heater 1 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
stop.
stop.
5 Dryer selection Solenoid Press the YES/START key to operate once.

1 Sorter Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Conveyor Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
35320 2/4
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [SM]
! Display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Processor
3. Mode
S3210-00-SM00
! Explanation
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 CD Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 BF Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
stop.
stop.
stop.
12 Cleaning Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
13 Exhaust Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
16 Signal Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
35320 3/4
35320
Maintenance

1 CD-A Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 CD-B Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 CD-C Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 CD-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 BF-A Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 BF-B Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
7 BF-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 STB Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
9 STB 4-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3. Mode
10 Circulation Pump Stand-by Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
Dryer Section
1 Dryer Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
stop.
stop.
stop.
5 Dryer selection Solenoid Press the YES/START key to operate once.

1 Sorter Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Conveyor Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
35320 4/4
35400
Maintenance
Reading and Writing Data This function is very useful when creating a print
channel using the data of other machine.
It is possible to read User Setting data from the
Bringing up the display INITIAL DATA1 or Back Up DATA that is saved in
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing the user level.
Data • Data related to the input section is written to INITIAL
DATA1.
• Data related to the printer and exposure is written to
INITIAL DATA2.
• Data related to the processor section is written to
INITIAL DATA3.
• Data related to the scanner and film carrier are
written to INITIAL DATA4.
• When the Reading Data is carried out in the user
level, the data cannot be read individually. All the
3. Mode
data is read from a floppy disk.
• Be sure to update the light source when having
performed Reading Data from the floppy disk
written the data of Back Up DATA of user level or
Back Up DATA of service personnel level.
☞ 6. Scanner data (Dctrl.lzh)
NOTE
• For the Stand Alone Printer, there is not the INITIAL
S3075-00-SM00 DATA4 FD.
Back Up DATA FD
! Explanation
Main (*1) Main.lzh
! 1. Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading Image Processing (*1) Image.lzh
Data (Floppy Disk → CPU) Pricing Unit (*1) Pu.lzh
The data can be read or written individually when the service Printer (*2) Printer.lzh
personnel password (2260) has been entered. Colorimeter unit (*2) Color.lzh
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level) LASER (*2) Laser.lzh
When carrying out Reading Data/Writing Data via Service
Correction Data for Brightness roi_SHD.lzh
Data, four floppy disks are required to save the data for each
of the Edge of Image Field (*2)
input, printer, processor, and scanner section.
Processor (*3) Proc.lzh
NOTE
• The FDs shown below are required. Auto Film Carrier (*4) Afm.lzh
Scanner (*4) Dctrl.lzh
User level Service personnel level
Misreg135_1.lzh
Back Up DATA INITIAL DATA1
Misreg135_2.lzh
INITIAL DATA2
Misreg135_4.lzh (*5)
INITIAL DATA3
Misreg135_6.lzh
INITIAL DATA4
Misreg135_8.lzh
Misreg135_9.lzh
IMPORTANT Misreg240_1.lzh
• When Writing Data is carried out in the user level, Misreg240_4.lzh
the individual data is written in the same manner as Misreg135_5.lzh (*5)
that in the service level.
Misreg240_7.lzh
• When Writing Data is carried out via Service Data,
Misreg240_8.lzh
Data which is to be written to the Back Up DATA of
user level is separated to the FDs of INITIAL Misreg240_9.lzh
DATA1, INITIAL DATA2, INITIAL DATA3, and Misreg110_1.lzh
INITIAL DATA4. Misreg110_9.lzh
• When the Reading Data is carried out via Service Misreg110_11.lzh
Data, User Setting Data appears. The Operator
Selections, IX Data Settings (except serial Misreg2B_1.lzh
number) and Print Channel Setting (except image MisregMMC_3.lzh
data) are read after reading the User Setting Data. MisregMMC_5.lzh (*5)
35400 1/3
35400
Maintenance
Back Up DATA FD IMPORTANT

MisregMMC_7.lzh • Use this mode to read the data into the laser control
MisregMMC_8.lzh PCB.
MisregAMC_3.lzh • The data cannot be read into the laser control PCB
MisregAMC_5.lzh (*5) via All Data Reading or Service Data Reading.
MisregAMC_7.lzh • Some data of BkData2100 is to be read.
MisregAMC_8.lzh
! 4. Writing All Data (CPU → Media), Reading All
MisregCROP_1.Izh Data (Media → CPU)
MisregMFC_1.Izh
Backup the data to the media except FD.
MisregMFC_2.Izh
The data to backup is as follows.
MisregMFC_4.Izh
Data Contents
MisregMFC_6.Izh
BkData####.dat The data saved with the usual
MisregMFC_7.Izh
3. Mode
backup
MisregMFC_8.Izh
idphoto.ini*1 ID photo data
MisregMFC_9.Izh
Template*1 Frame data set in the print
• (*1) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA1 for channel setting
Service Data. Client.mdb*1 Customer information in the
• (*2) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA2 for edit data
Service Data. PackExData.ini*1 Package frame information set
• (*3) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA3 for by user
Service Data. SplitSize.ini*1 Tiling data
• (*4) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA4 for ToneCurve.ini *1
Data of the tone curve shape in
Service Data. the Edit Mode
• (*5) This item is not contained in the backup depending PuFormatData.ini*1 Data that recorded the coupon
on the version of the system program. print standard format and the
NOTE insertion image path
• (*5) of the list is the data which has not been used PuFormatExData.ini*1 Data that recorded the coupon
after the upgrading the system program. print format which the user
If upgrading, the data cannot be deleted created and the insertion image
automatically. So the data which has not been used path
after the upgrading may still be contained in the PuPrt*1 All the image data inserted in
backup. the coupon print is saved in this
holder.
IMPORTANT
• The data relating to the auto film carrier (Auto gain *1. Not saved as backup data for DLS specification.
standard value and Frame stop position correction)
is stored in the EEP-ROM of the AFC/Scanner ! 5. Data unable to back up
control PCB. Therefore, it cannot be saved to a The following data cannot be saved in the Reading and
floppy disk. Writing Data. When replacing the HDD or PC main unit, be
sure to save the following data beforehand.
! 2. Format Floppy Disk
Data name Save to
Format (Initialize) floppy disks. Data can only be written onto
Image data C:\Image
a floppy disk which has been formatted.
Image saved Data in Edit C:\EditData
IMPORTANT mode
• Available floppy disk: 3.5 inch type 2 HD
• Floppy disks must be 1.44 MB format but not 1.2 MB IMPORTANT
format. • The saving destination of Image data may be
changed. When you back up, check the destination
! 3. Reading the laser history (floppy disk → on the Operator Selections display.
CPU)
If an error occurs on the laser, read the data to analyze it. ! 6. Scanner data (Dctrl.lzh)
When replacing the laser control PCB, read the data that is Among the scanner data written in the floppy disk, the data
saved using function of writing data. updated by the Light Source Update is pressed and saved with
setting the data other than that of the maximum/minimum
magnification to 0.
35400 2/3
35400
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• When having read the floppy disk data made a
backup, the Light Source Update is necessary after
reading the data. For this reason, the software is set
as follows.
Software contents (after reading FD data)
Set to be updated the light source automatically after the daily
setup.
Set the attention message urging you to update the light source to
occur by switching the film carrier.
• When the daily setup is not performed after writing

the FD data to QSS, be sure to update the light
source. ☞ 37030
3. Mode
NOTE
• The reason why the Light Source Update is necessary is
that the Light Source Update data saved on the side of
QSS at that point will be available and will not be
updated to the normal data even though the backup data
has been read normally.
And also, the second reason is that the FD data made a
backup remains as initial value after initializing the data.
• The reason why the data updated by the Light Source
Update is set to 0 in writing to FD is to reduce the storage
capacity and to save in one FD.
! Functions
! Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to
save to the media except FD.
Only the media type set as Input/Output in option registration
can be carried out the path setting.
NOTE
(2260).
! Data that will not be replaced by

backup data
Basically, all data are replaced by backup data if read or
written.
Some data are not replaced however, which are listed below.
Data that are not replaced

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper
remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2
Laser Operation Record*1
*1. Reading the laser operation record is not available from reading
all data or service data but available from reading the laser
history (floppy disk → CPU).
35400 3/3
35410
Maintenance
Reading and Writing Data [Stand • Data related to the scanner and film carrier are
written to INITIAL DATA4.
Alone Scanner] • When the Reading Data is carried out in the user
level, the data cannot be read individually. All the
Bringing up the display data is written to a floppy disk.
It is possible to read User Setting data from the
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing
INITIAL DATA1 or Back Up DATA that is saved in
Data
the user level.
• Be sure to update the light source when having
performed Reading Data from the floppy disk
written the data of Back Up DATA of user level or
Back Up DATA of service personnel level.
☞ 4. Scanner data (Dctrl.lzh)
Back Up DATA FD
Main (*1) Main.lzh
3. Mode
Image Processing (*1) Image.lzh
Pricing Unit (*1) Pu.lzh
Auto Film Carrier (*4) Afm.lzh
Scanner (*4) Dctrl.lzh
Misreg135_1.lzh
Misreg135_2.lzh
Misreg135_4.lzh (*5)
S3075-00-SM00
Misreg135_6.lzh
! Explanation Misreg135_8.lzh
Misreg135_9.lzh
! 1. Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading Misreg240_1.lzh
Data (Floppy Disk → CPU) Misreg240_4.lzh
The data can be read or written individually when the service Misreg135_5.lzh (*5)
personnel password (2260) has been entered. Misreg240_7.lzh
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level) Misreg240_8.lzh
When carrying out Reading Data/Writing Data via Service
Data, two floppy disks are required to save the data for each Misreg240_9.lzh
input and scanner section. Misreg110_1.lzh
NOTE Misreg110_9.lzh
• The FDs shown below are required. Misreg110_11.lzh
User level Service personnel level Misreg2B_1.lzh
Back Up DATA INITIAL DATA1 MisregMMC_3.lzh
INITIAL DATA4 MisregMMC_5.lzh (*5)

MisregMMC_7.lzh
MisregMMC_8.lzh
IMPORTANT MisregAMC_3.lzh
• When Writing Data is carried out in the user level, MisregAMC_5.lzh (*5)
the individual data is written in the same manner as
that in the service level. MisregAMC_7.lzh
• When Writing Data is carried out via Service Data, MisregAMC_8.lzh
data which is to be written to the Back Up DATA of MisregCROP_1.Izh
user level is separated to the FDs of INITIAL MisregMFC_1.Izh
DATA1 and INITIAL DATA4.
MisregMFC_2.Izh
• When the Reading Data is carried out via Service
MisregMFC_4.Izh
Data, User Setting Data appears. The Operator
Selections, IX Data Settings (except serial MisregMFC_6.Izh
number) and Print Channel Setting (except image MisregMFC_7.Izh
data) are read after reading the User Setting Data. MisregMFC_8.Izh
This function is very useful when creating a print
MisregMFC_9.Izh
channel using the data of other machine.
• Data related to the input section is written to INITIAL • (*1) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA1 for
DATA1. Service Data.
35410 1/2
35410
Maintenance
• (*4) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA4 for NOTE

Service Data.
• The reason why the Light Source Update is necessary is
• (*5) This item is not contained in the backup depending that the Light Source Update data saved on the side of
on the version of the system program. QSS at that point will be available and will not be
NOTE updated to the normal data even though the backup data
• (*5) of the list is the data which has not been used has been read normally.
after the upgrading the system program. And also, the second reason is that the FD data made a
If upgrading, the data cannot be deleted backup remains as initial value after initializing the data.
automatically. So the data which has not been used • The reason why the data updated by the Light Source
after the upgrading may still be contained in the Update is set to 0 in writing to FD is to reduce the storage
backup. capacity and to save in one FD.
IMPORTANT ! Functions
• The data relating to the auto film carrier (Auto gain
standard value and Frame stop position correction) ! Path Setting
3. Mode
is stored in the EEP-ROM of the AFC/Scanner
control PCB. Therefore, it cannot be saved to a When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to
floppy disk. save to the media except FD.
Only the media type set as Input/Output in option registration
! 2. Format Floppy Disk can be carried out the path setting.
NOTE
Format (Initialize) floppy disks. Data can only be written onto
a floppy disk which has been formatted. • It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).
IMPORTANT
• Available floppy disk: 3.5 inch type 2 HD ! Data that will not be replaced by
• Floppy disks must be 1.44 MB format but not 1.2 MB backup data
format.
Basically, all data are replaced by backup data if read or
! 3. Writing All Data (CPU → Media), Reading All written.
Data (Media → CPU) Some data are not replaced however, which are listed below.
Backup the data to the media except FD. Data that are not replaced
The data to backup is as follows. Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, order
number, archive number, total counter 2
Data Contents
BkData####.dat The data saved with the usual
backup
! 4. Scanner data (Dctrl.lzh)

Among the scanner data written in the floppy disk, the data
updated by the Light Source Update is pressed and saved with
setting the data other than that of the maximum/minimum
magnification to 0.
IMPORTANT
• When having read the floppy disk data made a
backup, the Light Source Update is necessary after
reading the data. For this reason, the software is set
as follows.
Software contents (after reading FD data)
Set to be updated the light source automatically after the daily
setup.
Set the attention message urging you to update the light source to
occur by switching the film carrier.
• When the daily setup is not performed after writing

the FD data to QSS, be sure to update the light
source. ☞ 37030
35410 2/2
35450
Maintenance
Procedures for Backup & Restore 2. The Backup Preferences display appears.
Software
IMPORTANT
• To backup at the recovery when installing, backup the
QSS system data, as well.
☞ 35400
! Backup data
Backup data
DLS system data minilab folder
Index logo data Logos folder
3. Mode
NOTE
• When the data other than above is to be saved, it can be
added optionally.
S072409
! Start procedure 3. Select the destination for saving the data.

For saving the daily data at close down checks, it is
1. Quit the application at Close down checks recommended to save the data to drive U or a storage
media such as MO and Zip. Prepare the storage media
in the QSS menu to switch to the Windows
of 64 MB or more.
desktop display. When changing the setting data, it is recommended to
2. Bring up the DLS Backup & Restore save the data to CD-R.
display. IMPORTANT
Bringing up the display • When making the backup before carrying out
Start → Programs → Administrative tools (common) recovery of the IPW, it is recommended to
→ DLS System Management Software → save the data to CD-R.
BackupRestore 4. Click OK.
5. When you want to save optional data, use
the following procedure.
(1) Put a check mark to the check box next to

Select additional files?
(2) Select the data you want to save in the
Source list. And drag the selected data to the
Destination list.
6. When you save the data to a storage media,
insert the media.
S072408
7. Click Start Backup.
! Backup procedure
1. Select Actions and Preferences from the

menu.
35450 1/2
35450
Maintenance
8. The Backup Process display appears. 4. Make sure that the check boxes of Restore
Registry? and Restore archive database
index file? have not been checked.
When the check boxes have been checked, remove the
checks.
IMPORTANT
• When the Restore archive database index
file? check box is checked, the archive
database index file is returned to the setting
data which have been saved. The changed
data after saving become invalid.
IMPORTANT
• When restoring the data after carrying out
recovery of the IPW, be sure to put a check
3. Mode
mark to the Restore archive database index
file? check box.
5. Click Start Restore.
6. The Restore Process display appears.
S072410
9. When the message appears, click Yes.

10. Click Start.
Saving the data starts.
11. When the data saving is complete, click Exit.
12. When you finished to save the data to a
storage media, remove the media.
! Restore procedure
1. When the data have been saved to a storage

media, insert the media.
2. Load the TOC file.
(1) Open the drive or directory where the backup
data have been saved.
(2) Right-click the Backup.TOC file. S072412
(3) Click Load TOC. 7. Click Start.

8. When the message appears, click Yes to
All.
Reading the data starts.
9. When the data reading is complete, click
Exit.
10. When you read the data from a storage
media, remove the media.
S072411
3. The data to read to the Destination list

appear.
35450 2/2
35500
Maintenance
System Version Check ! Explanation

NOTE
Bringing up the display • The display returns to the Maintenance display by
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → System Version pressing NO: End, but it returns to the Software
Check Upgrade display if pressed it on the Software Upgrade
display.
! Accessories
# CPU
The name of each control PCB is displayed.
NOTE
• For DLS specification, pricing unit, NMC and
NMC2 do not appear.
3. Mode
S3059-01-SM00
S3059-01-SM01
S3059-01-SM02
35500 1/2
35500
Maintenance
# Version # Communication
The system program version number saved on all The communication status of all control PCBs is
control PCBs is displayed. displayed.
IMPORTANT OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option,
• You can check the type of the laser unit by
not connected.
checking the version name of the LASER.
Laser unit Display ! Profile Data

Type A #.# # # ×1A1 The profile data version is displayed.
Type B #.# # # ×1B1 NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password
• The Auto Film Carrier version name indicates (2260) has been entered.
the LED light source unit used by [S-2/S-3].
LED light source unit Display ! DLL/Driver
3. Mode
Type 0 Not displayed The versions of DLL and SYS file (driver) are displayed.
Type 1 # # # # L1 NOTE
*1 • It is displayed only when the service personnel password
Type 2 # # # # L2
(2260) has been entered.
Type 3*2 # # # # L3
*1. If you use LED light source kit 2 and LED light
source unit type 2, it is necessary to upgrade the
version as mentioned below.
Specification Version
For QSS specification 2.0 or later
For DLS specification 1.0 or later
*2. To use LED light source unit type 3, upgrade the

software to the following version.
For QSS specification 2.02 or later
For the Stand Alone Scanner 2.01 or later
specification
For DLS specification 1.02 or later
• The Auto Film Carrier unit name indicates the

type of scanner unit used in [S-4].
Scanner type Display
S-4*1 #### S4
*1. To use S-4, upgrade software to the versions indicated

below.
For QSS specification 4 or later
For the Stand Alone Scanner 4 or later
specification
For DLS specification Not corresponded
NOTE
• If there is an error such as the system program
cannot be executed or read, the boot flash version is
displayed.
35500 2/2
35600
Maintenance
System update for each control PCB The software upgrade is carried out individually for each
control PCB (CPU).
(CPU) NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password
(2260) has been entered.
IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the
system of each control PCBs.
! Operation
For details about how to perform Software Upgrade,
refer to Updating the QSS software in Installation 1. Before upgrading, backup the system data.
procedures of the QSS software. ☞ 35400
☞ 88000 IMPORTANT
• When the external PC compatible with the CT-1 or QSS
• This backup data is stored just incase that the
printer driver has been connected, do not receive the
version upgrade would be failed, and used for
order or make prints before or during software
returning to the previous version.
upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
3. Mode
• When the CD-R external writing system has been 2. When Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) is
connected, be sure not to turn on/off the power supply selected, set the program CD.
just before or during upgrading. Upgrading may not be Each control PCB (CPU) is upgraded.
performed normally.
IMPORTANT
Bringing up the display • Data reading after upgrading is not necessary
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade as upgrading does not initialize the system
data.
Do not read the backup data of the previous
version after upgrading is successfully ended
as it may malfunction.
However, since the procedure differs
depending on the versions, be sure to refer to
the REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTION for
details.
3. Backup the system data after upgrading.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to backup the system data of the new
version, and be careful not to mix the backup
data of the previous version with the new one.
! Data
S3060-00-SM00
! Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and

! Explanation software to be upgraded
NOTE At replacing any of the control PCBs, check the check box of
• When the software upgrade is completed, the alarm the software to be upgraded, and then carry out upgrading
informs the completion of the upgrade. After 1 minute, (HD).
the display changes to the System Version Check
Control PCB Software to System file name
display automatically. Pressing NO: End also changes
be upgraded
the display to the System Version Check display.
Processor control Processor proc0.sys proc1.sys
PCB*1
! Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
Printer control Printer supply0.sys supply1.sys
Copy the system program from the program CD to the PCB*1
directory for software upgrade and save it.
AFC/scanner Auto film afm0.sys afm1.sys
Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data
control PCB*3 carrier
saved in the directory for software upgrade.
PU control Pricing Unit pu0.sys pu1.sys
! Software Upgrade (HD) PCB*1*2
D-ICE control D-ICE control dctrl0.sys dctrl1.sys
Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data PCB PCB
saved in the directory for software upgrade.
D-ICE PCB digital ICE d_ice.sys
35600 1/2
35600
Maintenance
Control PCB Software to System file name

be upgraded
Laser control LASER laser0.sys laser1.sys
PCB*1
Image processing Image image0.sys image1.sys
PCB processing
PCB
Image correction Image special0.sys special1.sys
PCB correction PCB
Colorimeter Colorimeter color0.sys color1.sys
Control PCB*1 unit
*1. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, be sure not to check the
check boxes because they are not set.
*2. Not displayed for DLS specification.
3. Mode
*3. In case of the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
! The location of the system program

Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
CD-ROM\Sys
Software Upgrade (HD)
C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Data\Sys
35600 2/2
35700
Maintenance
Operation Information ! Functions
! Laser Record Setting

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine When replacing the laser unit, reset each set value to 0.
Specification
3. Mode
S3322-00-SM00
S3063-00-SM00 IMPORTANT
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not
! Explanation appear.
• In case of the QSS-Kids, this does not appear.
! Error Record
NOTE
The error record is displayed in order from the latest one • The date when the data is reset is displayed on the lower
which has occurred. left part of the display.
The latest 20 errors can be checked.
NOTE
• Up to 500 errors can be checked when the service
personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Any older data than the latest 500 errors will be deleted.
! Daily Setup History

The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data
prior to that will be deleted.
IMPORTANT
appear.
! Laser Operation Record

Each Laser (R, G and B) Turned ON Time Record, Turned
ON Operation Count, Polygon Mirror Operation Time and
Operation Count are displayed.
IMPORTANT
appear.
35700 1/1
35800
Maintenance
Machine Specification [N] ! Processing Solution Display

Set the display of the chemical solution names by process
Description for each specification specification.
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See Processing solution name
below for the description for each specification. CD BF STB
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Machine Specification P1 P2 PS
[SM]. P1 P2 P3
CD BF TCS
! Display PS1 PS2 PS3
Bringing up the display PJ1 PJ2 PJ3
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine
Specification ! Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)
The language loaded by the system program can be set.
3. Mode
ENGLISH KOREAN
JAPANESE PEKINESE
FRENCH TAIWANESE
GERMAN DANISH
ITALIAN GREEK
SPANISH DUTCH
PORTUGUESE FINNISH
RUSSIAN SWEDISH
INDONESIAN -
! HELP Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)

The language used to display the HELP messages of
Attention/Error can be set.
S3066-00-SM00
NOTE ! Installation Date
(2260). The installation date of the machine can be checked and set.
! Power Supply Specification

! Explanation
The power supply specification of the machine can be
! Machine Type Registration checked.
Register the machine type. Power supply specification table

1P2W 200 V 3P-3W 220 V
IMPORTANT
1P2W 208 V 3P-3W 230 V
• If the message After restarted, execute following
adjustment is displayed after changing the machine 1P2W 220 V 3P-3W 240 V
type, carry out following settings. 1P2W 230 V 3P-4W 346 V
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment 1P2W 240 V 3P-4W 380 V
☞ 33600 1P-3W 100/200 V 3P-4W 400 V
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33030 3P-3W 200 V 3P-4W 415 V
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500 3P-3W 208 V 3P3W/1P2W 100/200 V
! Serial Number (Input range: 00000000 to

! Terminal name (Initial value: computer name)
99999999)
Setting QSS terminal name is available.
The serial number of the machine can be specified and
checked for the input section, the printer and the processor
individually. ! Functions
At the installation, enter the production number.
! Program Timer Setting
! Process Specification (Input range: 0 to 60)
The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
Use this mode to set the process specification for the machine. At the installation, set the date/time and program timer.
35800 1/3
35800
Maintenance
! Machine information Machine Specification [SM]

The machine type information is displayed.
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine
Specification
3. Mode
S3066-00-SM01
NOTE
(2260).
! Explanation
! Machine Type Registration

Register the machine type.
IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following
adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
type, carry out following settings.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment
☞ 33600
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33030
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500

99999999)
The serial number of the machine can be specified and
checked for the input section, the printer and the processor
individually.
! Process Specification (Input range: 0 to 60)

Use this mode to set the process specification for the machine.
35800 2/3
35800
Maintenance
! Processing Solution Display ! SM Replenishment Setting

Set the display of the chemical solution names by process Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.
specification.
Processing solution name ! Functions
CD BF STB
P1 P2 PS
P1 P2 P3 The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
At the installation, set the date/time and program timer.
CD BF TCS
PS1 PS2 PS3
! Machine information
PJ1 PJ2 PJ3
! Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)
3. Mode
ENGLISH KOREAN
JAPANESE PEKINESE
FRENCH TAIWANESE
GERMAN DANISH
ITALIAN GREEK
SPANISH DUTCH
PORTUGUESE FINNISH
RUSSIAN SWEDISH
INDONESIAN -

! Installation Date
The installation date of the machine can be checked and set.

The power supply specification of the machine can be
checked.
Power supply specification table
1P2W 200 V 3P-3W 220 V
1P2W 208 V 3P-3W 230 V
1P2W 220 V 3P-3W 240 V
1P2W 230 V 3P-4W 346 V
1P2W 240 V 3P-4W 380 V
1P-3W 100/200 V 3P-4W 400 V
3P-3W 200 V 3P-4W 415 V
3P-3W 208 V 3P3W/1P2W 100/200 V
! Terminal name (Initial value: computer name)

Setting QSS terminal name is available.
! Circulation Pump Stand-by Function

Circulation Pump Stand-by function can be set in this mode.
35800 3/3
35810
Maintenance
Machine Specification [Stand Alone ! Installation Date

Scanner] The installation date of the machine can be checked and set.

! Display The power supply specification of the machine can be
checked.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Power supply specification table
Specification 1P2W 200 V 1P2W 230 V
1P2W 208 V 1P2W 240 V
1P2W 220 V
! Functions
3. Mode
At the installation, set the date/time.
! Machine information
S3066-00-SM02
NOTE
(2260).
! Explanation
! Machine Type Registration

Register the machine type.

99999999)
The Serial Number of the machine can be set or checked.
! Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)

ENGLISH KOREAN
JAPANESE PEKINESE
FRENCH TAIWANESE
GERMAN DANISH
ITALIAN GREEK
SPANISH DUTCH
PORTUGUESE FINNISH
RUSSIAN SWEDISH
INDONESIAN -

35810 1/1
35920
Maintenance
Self-diagnostic scanned image though the scanned image saved to the storage
media was normal.
Bringing up the display Diagnosis

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Input Memory)
Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) -> Image
Description for Self-diagnostic Processing PCB (Expanded Memory)
In Self-diagnostic, there are Image Path Check and Media Drive Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) -> Main PC
Self-diagnostic.
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory)
• For the details of Media Drive Self-diagnostic, refer to Image Correction
☞ Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
Image Correction PCB Solo Check
Image Correction PCB Connection Check
! Film Series Image Path
3. Mode
Put a check mark for Film Series Image Path and perform the
following checks, if the following errors occur or there is lack
of uniformity on the scanned image.
IMPORTANT
• 6642:D-ICE Control PCB error.
• 6822−10, 11, 21: Image Processing PCB Image
data operation error.
Diagnosis
Image Correction PCB Solo Check
S3348-00-SM00 D-ICE PCB Memory Check
Image Path Check D-ICE PCB Internal Image Path Check
Scanner -> D-ICE PCB Input Section
D-ICE PCB -> Main PC
D-ICE PCB -> Image Processing PCB (Input Memory)
Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) -> Main PC
Image Processing PCB -> Main PC
Photometry Section Dirt Check
NOTE
• The Film Series Image Path is not displayed for the
Stand-alone Printer.
Failed portion display
! Test Print
Put a check mark for Test Print and perform the following
checks, if an abnormal print is made from the scanned image
though the scanned image saved to the storage media was
normal.
S3408-00-SM00 NOTE
• Also perform the checks in the following conditions.
! Explanation • Lines and noises are seen on the print.
• The color on the print is not good. (Black and white are
! Image Path Check not good.)
Transfer the data in each data path to judge the failure part by • The color on the print gets worse by performing the
the CRC check or data comparison. setup.
! Media Series Image Path

Put a check mark for Media Series Image Path and perform
the following checks, if an abnormal print is made from the
35920 1/4
35920
Maintenance
• The color on the print does not become better by ! Test Print Check Result
performing the setup.
Check the test print and put a checkmark to either of Good or
Diagnosis No Good of Test Print Check Result. Then the result of the
Image Correction PCB Solo Check diagnostics appears.
! Save Result
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Input Memory)
Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) -> Image The result of Image Path Check can be saved in a file.
Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) IMPORTANT
Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) -> Laser • The test result should be saved in
Control PCB C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-
Test Print Check Result ##\LogData\DiagLogImgPass.Log.
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) • Only one file is available to save the result.
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Composite Memory)
! Clear Result
3. Mode
Image Composition
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) Delete the result of Image Path Check.
Image Correction
! Result
AOM Setup Value
The result of the test is displayed after Image Path Check is
completed.
NOTE
NOTE
• The Test Print is not displayed for the Stand-alone
• The AOM setup value may be displayed as Unknown in
Scanner.
the following condition.
• When making the test print, Dairy Setup or Initial Setup
! Media Series Image Path/Film Series Image
has not been performed for the selected paper.
Path/Test Print
Put a checkmark for all the Media Series Image Path, Film ! Checking procedure
Series Image Path and Test Print, and perform the following
checks when you are not sure what the problem is. 1. Select a Test Item.
NOTE
NOTE
• The diagnosis contains all the results of Media Series
• When a checkmark is given to the Test Print,
Image Path, Film Series Image Path and Test Print.
select a test print image.
! Test Print Image selection 2. The dialog for the Image Path Check
appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to
Select the image to transfer from the images for checking the
start the test.
laser or the files.
NOTE 3. The parts with the problems are shown in the
• Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files Failed portion display.
only.
Causes of the problem
! Paper Magazine for Test Print Scanner unit

LVDS Cable (Scanner Unit - D-ICE PCB)
Set the magazine to make a test print.
D-ICE PCB
! Test Print Advance Length LVDS Cable between D-ICE PCB - Image Processing PCB
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A]
Set the paper advance length to make a test print.
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]
! Execution Time Scratch mend PCB 2
Data change-over PCB
Displays the expected time for the diagnostics.
DIMM
! Start Test Contact between D-ICE PCB ↔ Scratch mend PCB 1
[J484A]
The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start
Contact between D-ICE PCB ↔ Scratch mend PCB 1
Test. Click YES to start the diagnostics.
[J485]
Image processing PCB
Image correction PCB
35920 2/4
35920
Maintenance
Causes of the problem Media Drive Self-diagnostic

LVDS Cable between Main PC and Image Processing PCB
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB Bringing up the display
LVDS cable between Image Processing PCB and Laser Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic →
Control PCB Media Drive Self-diagnostic
Laser control PCB
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (CCD Side)
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (Light
Source Side)
Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being
adjusted.)*1
Failed to diagnose. (Focus Adjustment is not executed.)*1
Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.)*1
3. Mode
Failed to diagnose.*1
R Laser Deterioration
G Laser Deterioration
B Laser Deterioration
R Laser Failure
G Laser Failure
B Laser Failure
Setup failure S3406-00-SM00
R Laser failure or Setup failure NOTE

G Laser failure or Setup failure • For DLS specification, DVD-RAM does not appear.
B Laser failure or Setup failure
IMPORTANT
The processing solution is out of control.
• For DLS specification, since the five slots card reader
*1. When the dirt in the photometry section was not checked media is set to write protected, the diagnosis cannot be
properly, the message "Failed to diagnose." appears. performed.
IMPORTANT
• The message, Failed to diagnose. (LED light source ! Explanation
temperature is being adjusted.), Failed to diagnose.
(Focus Adjustment is not executed.), Failed to ! Media Drive Self-diagnostic
diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.), or Failed
Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when reading and
to diagnose. may be displayed when the self-
writing from/to the media drive is not performed normally.
diagnosis is not performed normally in checking the
For the media drive diagnostic, the following process is
scanner unit/light source section.
carried out to get result. The fixed data on the hard disk is
written to the specified drive and the data is returned to the
hard disk. Then the fixed data on the hard disk and the data
returned to the hard disk are compared.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when the
following message appears even though the media
is set to the media drive.
• 1503:The appropriate file was not found.
• 1510:Read the data. Set the media.
• 1511:Write the data. Set the media.
• 1512:Data was not read from the media.
! Drive
The media drive with the check mark is performed the writing
test.
! Name
Displays the name of media drive.
35920 3/4
35920
Maintenance
! Failed Counts • In the case of other than CD-R/RW, when the

data is added then the Media Drive Self-
The denominator shows the number of tests and the numerator diagnostic is finished, the data is deleted.
shows the number of tests failed.
2. Put a check mark for the drive to perform the
! Communication System writing test.
Displays the communication type of media drive. 3. Set the Executed Counts and Data Size.
! Failed Information
4. Clicking Start Writing Test displays the
dialog. Click YES to start the test.
Displays the cause of error when performing the writing test
of media drive. 5. The cause of error is displayed in the Failed
Information.
! Executed Counts (Initial value: 5) (input range: Causes of the problem
1 to 60) Media is not set.
3. Mode
Can set how many tests are performed to write the data set to The media is write protected.
Data Size into the media drive. Capacity error.
Data Comparison error.
! Data Size (MB) (Initial value: 10) (input range: 1
to 500) Failed to read and write.
Can set the data size to perform the writing test to the media
drive.
! Execution Time
Displays the time required for performing the writing test to
the media drive.
NOTE
• The Execution Time varies depending on the number of
drives with the check marks, Executed Counts and Data
Size.
! Start Writing Test

The Media Drive Self-diagnostic dialog appears, click Yes to
start the diagnostic.
! Save Result
The result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic can be saved in a
file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result of writing to the media drive is saved
in C:\NoristuKoki\QSS-
##\LogData\DiagLogMedia.Log
• Only one file is available to save the writing test
result of the media drive.
! Clear Result
Delete the result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
! Checking procedure
1. Insert the media to perform the writing test

into the media drive.
IMPORTANT
• In the case of CD-R/RW, do not use the
important media since the data is overwritten.
35920 4/4
36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Paper sensor adjustment • The paper end sensor A is not displayed when the triple
magazine unit is not attached.

! Adjustment
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Check that each printer cover of the printer

section and printer doors are closed.
2. Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not
displayed if the service personnel password has
3. Mode
not been input.
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is completed normally, OK is
displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor
is from 1 to 169
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is not completed normally, − is
S3370-00-SM00
displayed.
NOTE −: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked 0 or 170 or more
and set by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Paper Sensor Adjustment (standard value: 5)

(input range: 0 to 255)
It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light
intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each
sensor is from 1 to 169.
• When the paper sensor LED light intensity adjustment
was finished abnormally, the numeric value input section
becomes 0 and the status section becomes -.
! Functions
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
function, the sensors below are adjusted.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment
Paper end sensor A, B or C
Paper loading sensor
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right)
Exposure start sensor
Paper sensor 1
Paper sensors 2 (left, center, and right)
36000 1/1
36010
Paper Advance Unit Correction ! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position
Correction Test Operation Confirmation
Bringing up the display The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is
moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction ! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position
Correction Test Operation
The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is
moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position

Correction Test Operation Confirmation
The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is
moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.
3. Mode
! Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position
Correction
The input correction value is invalidated and the paper is
advanced to the arm unit 2.
! Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation

S3386-00-SM00 Confirmation
NOTE The input correction value is validated and the paper is
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password advanced to the arm unit 2.
(2260).
! Adjustment
! Explanation
Correct the receive/release stop position of the paper advance
1. Execute Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop
unit. Position Correction Test Operation via F:
Functions.
IMPORTANT
• When the paper advance unit correction is carried
2. Open the printer top cover and check the
out by paper magazine A, B or C, it is complete. condition of arm unit 2.
3. Input the correction value so that the
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position distance between the upper end of paper
Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −2.0
to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (left) is corrected.
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position

Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −2.0
to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (right) is corrected.
! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value:

0.0) (Input range: −5.0 to +5.0)
The stop position of paper which is advanced to arm unit 2 is
corrected.
! Functions
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position

Correction Test Operation
The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is
moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.
36010 1/2
36010
guide in paper advance unit 1 and front end 8. Input the correction value so that the
of arm unit 2 becomes 55.3±0.5 mm. dimension between the front ends of arm unit
2 and paper becomes 3.0±0.5 mm.
Paper Advance
Unit 1
55.3±0.5 mm
Arm unit 2
(upper)
Paper
3. Mode
Upper
paper
guide
G068451
NOTE
• Positive correction makes the arm unit move away Arm unit 2
from paper advance unit 1 and negative correction
makes it move close.
4. After inputting the correction value, execute
Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position 3.0±0.5 mm
Correction Test Operation via F:
Functions, then check that the value is G068452
55.3±0.5 mm. NOTE

• Positive correction moves the paper arm unit 2
5. Correct the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop away from the front end of paper and negative
position in the same way. correction moves to close.
6. Execute Test Operation for the Paper Stop 9. After inputting the correction value, execute
Position Correction via F: Functions. Paper Stop Position Correction Test
7. Open the printer top cover and check the Operation Confirmation via F: Functions,
condition of arm unit 2 and paper. then check that the value is 3.0±0.5 mm.
36010 2/2
36020
Exposure Magnification Correction ! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine

A/B/C)
Bringing up the display Validate each correction value to make test prints.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment NOTE
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
Correction print.
A B Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 100 mm is
printed.
• The print pattern of the test print made with Test Print
3. Mode
(Confirmation) is as same as that made with Test Print
but of which color of the center line on the test prints
differ. (Red)
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP
imprinting.
! Adjustment
1. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.

S3318-00-SM00
IMPORTANT
NOTE
• Make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you use.
(2260).
2. Measure length A on the test print.
! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the
paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is
carried out for any one of magazine A, B or C, it is
G068453
complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or 3. Select the line from part A and input the
more, make a test print with the maximum paper measured value in part B.
size which you used, then measure the length IMPORTANT
between most outside lines of it.
• Measure the length of 160 line usually.
! Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 160.0 • When you do not have the paper of 178 mm
mm) (Input range: 65.0 to 295.0 mm) width or more, measure the length between
most outside lines of it.
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the
actual measurement value can be entered. 4. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
! Functions 5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within
±0.1 mm of the specified length.
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/B/C)
6. Perform exposure center correction.
Invalidate each correction value to make test prints. ☞ 36070
NOTE 7. Carry out the Exposure Position
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 100 mm is Adjustment.
printed.
☞ 36030
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP
imprinting.
36020 1/1
36030
Exposure Position Adjustment ! BLOCK-B Yellow Offset Value of Main

Scanning
Bringing up the display Measure the dimension between the cyan and yellow lines on
BLOCK-C 0i and input the measured value if there is no
image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position
test print BLOCK-B.
Adjustment
! BLOCK-D1 Check Image Selection 1 for Sub
Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Input the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with
the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D1.
! BLOCK-D2 Check Image Selection 2 for Sub

Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
3. Mode
Input the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with
the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
! Functions

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
S3313-00-SM00
NOTE
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 355.6 mm is
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password printed.
(2260).
imprinting.
! Explanation
! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine
Carry out correction so that the exposure position in the laser
unit is positioned at the center of the test print. Correct the A/B/C)
positions of the R, G, B laser main and sub scanning. Validate each correction value to make test prints.
IMPORTANT NOTE
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
out for any one of magazine A, B or C, it is print.
complete.
Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or
more, make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you used, then measure the dimension of
the most outside line of it. G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 355.6 mm is
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 1 for Main printed.
Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line • The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP
Input the number and letter of the image where the cyan line imprinting.
aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! Adjustment
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main
Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line 1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Input the number and letter of the image where the cyan line Correction has been completed.
aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B. ☞ 36020
! BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main
2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
Scanning IMPORTANT
Measure the dimension between the cyan and magenta lines • Make a test print with the maximum paper
on BLOCK-C 0i and input the measured value if there is no size which you use.
image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the 3. Check the number of the part where the cyan
test print BLOCK-B.
line aligns with the magenta line on the test
print BLOCK-B. And check the number of the
36030 1/3
36030
part where the cyan line aligns with the the part where the cyan line aligns with the
yellow line. yellow line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line Magenta line
Yellow line
Cyan lines
3. Mode
Cyan line Yellow line
G068456
G068454 IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT • Check the line using the loupe.
• Check the line using the loupe. • Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
Service personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
☞ 80310 7. Input each checked number.
4. Check BLOCK-C 0i and input the offset 8. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
value of main scanning and make a Test Functions.
Print again if there is no part where the cyan
line aligns with the magenta/yellow line on 9. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and
the test print BLOCK-B. yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B
make the straightest line comparing with the
Minus correction
other columns.
Check area
Plus correction
G068455
5. Input each checked number.

6. Check the number of the part where the cyan
line aligns with the magenta line on the test
print BLOCK-D1. And check the number of
G068457
10. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and

yellow) of the column 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1
36030 2/3
36030
and D2 make the straightest line comparing

with the other columns.
IMPORTANT
• When the print is made via Test Print
(Confirmation), it is exposed on the same
position, 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1 and D2.
Check area
3. Mode
G068458
11. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and

yellow) make a straight line in BLOCK-E. If it
is not the straight line, carry out the Exposure
Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
IMPORTANT
• Check line 160 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm
width or more, make a test print with the
maximum paper size which you used, then
check the dimension of the most outside line
of it.
Y
G068459
36030 3/3
36040
Exposure Magnification Fine NOTE

Adjustment printed.
Bringing up the display imprinting.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification ! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine
Fine Adjustment A/B/C)
Validate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
3. Mode
G066121
printed.
imprinting.
! Adjustment
S3329-00-SM00
1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction and Exposure Position
NOTE
Adjustment have been complete.
(2260).
☞ 36020
☞ 36030
! Explanation 2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of
B, G and R on the both sides of a print. • Check line 160 usually.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification fine adjustment is maximum paper size which you used, then
carried out for any one of magazine A, B or C, it is
complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or
more, make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you used, then measure the dimension of
the most outside line of it.
! Magenta Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the
! Yellow Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the
! Functions

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
36040 1/2
36040
check the dimension of the most outside line • When correcting the magenta line to the left, input
of it. + correction value.
4. Input the correction value.
5. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
6. Check the magenta and yellow lines make a
straight line with cyan line in the vertical
direction at 0 on the test print again.
7. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment
again.
☞ 36030
3. Mode
1 dot
+correction −correction
G068460
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
☞ 80310
3. Carry out the correction so that the magenta
and yellow lines make a straight line with
cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on the
test print.
IMPORTANT
• Check line 160 usually.
maximum paper size which you used, then
check the dimension of the most outside line
of it.
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan
lines make one line, carry out the fine
adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of
the test print.
NOTE
• When correcting the magenta line to the right,
input minus correction value.
36040 2/2
36050
Paper Advance Length Correction NOTE

imprinting.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment ! Test Paper Advance checks
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Length
Correction Validate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0
mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second.
NOTE
imprinting.
! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B/C)

The paper is loaded.
3. Mode
! Rewind
The paper is rewound.
! Adjustment
1. Set the magazine to carry out the paper

advance length correction on the magazine
S3385-00-SM00
mount A/B/C.
NOTE
• It can be set by entering the service personnel password 2. Select paper magazine A/B/C.
(2260). 3. Carry out Test Paper Advance of
Functions.
! Explanation 4. Open the printer top cover, and then remove
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed the paper from the paper advance unit 1 and
error. 2.
IMPORTANT Paper Advance Unit 1
• It is necessary to carry out paper advance length
correction for each paper magazine A, B and C.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial

value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: 145.0 to 155.0
mm)
The first paper is for the correction of the paper which has just
been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the
paper loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance
feed error.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial Papers Paper Advance Unit 2
value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: 180.0 to 220.0
mm)
G068461
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance
roller feed error.
5. Measure each test paper length of the first
and second paper which are removed.
! Functions 6. Enter each measurement dimension.

7. After correcting, carry out Test Paper
! Test Paper Advance Advance Confirmation of F: Functions
Invalidate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0 and be sure to make a print and check if the
mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second. advance length is correct.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of
the first and second test papers at the same time.
36050 1/2
36050
8. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it

according to the following procedure.
When the print advance length of the first paper after
loading is not correct.
When the Carry out +correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is long.
When the Carry out −correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is short.
When the print advance length of the second or later

paper after loading is not correct.
Reset the measurement dimensions for Test Paper
3. Mode
Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and
adjust them again.
36050 2/2
36060
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction NOTE

print.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction
G066121
• The advance length of the test print is 457.0 mm.
imprinting.
! Test Print 2 (Paper Magazine A/B/C)

Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
3. Mode
NOTE
imprinting.
! Test Print 2 (Confirmation) (Paper Magazine

A/B/C)
S3388-00-SM00
Validate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper print.
because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each
paper magazine A, B and C.
G066121
! A − C (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −2.0 • The advance length of the test print is 914.0 mm.
to +2.0 mm) • The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP
imprinting.
The correction for each magazine (paper width and surface) is
necessary.
! Magazine A, Magazine B, Magazine C The paper is loaded.
You can select paper magazine A/B/C.
! Rewind (Paper Magazine A/B/C)
! Functions The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
! Test Print 1 (Paper Magazine A/B/C) ! Adjustment

Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the
NOTE
exposure advance unit has been completed.
☞ 36080
imprinting. 2. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the
magazine mount has been completed.
! Test Print 1 (Confirmation) (Paper Magazine ☞ 22100
A/B/C) 3. Check that the right angle adjustment of the
Validate the correction and output two test prints. cutter unit has been finished.
Refer to ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter
unit 25620.
36060 1/3
36060
4. Set the paper magazine to be carry out arm Check that the difference of dimension of lines A
unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine and C (on the second test print) is within the
mount A/B/C. tolerance level in the following table.
5. Select paper magazine A/B/C. Test Print Tolerance level

6. Execute Test Print 1 or Test Print 2 of F: 457.0 mm width C are between 119.5 mm or
Functions. more and 120.5 mm or less.
7. Measure the difference of lines A and C on When the test print 2 is A−C is ±1.0 mm, both A and
the second test print. And input the value to 914.0 mm width C are between 119 mm or
(A−C). more and 121 mm or less.
IMPORTANT
• Input the correction value in millimeter (mm). IMPORTANT
• Use a scale to measure the dimensions of • If the difference of dimensions of lines A and
lines A and C on the test print. C (on the second test print) is out of the
3. Mode
tolerance level, input the correction value to
NOTE A−C.
• When the measured values of the test print are line
A>C Plus correction
A: 121 mm and C: 120 mm, for example, see the
below. A<C Minus correction
• Line A (121 mm) − Line C (120 mm) = Correction
NOTE
value A − C (1 mm)
• When correcting 1.0 mm in (A-C), the zigzagging
Line A
of approx. 1.0 mm can be corrected on the test
print.
9. Check that the difference of dimension
A
between lines A and C on the first and

second test prints is within the tolerance
level in the following table.
NOTE
• For example, when the measurement values of the
second test print is 120 mm for both lines A and C
Check that the difference of dimension between
lines A and C on the first test print is within the
tolerance level in the following table.
Test Print Tolerance level
457.0 mm width C are between 119.5 mm or
more and 120.5 mm or less.
914.0 mm width C are between 119 mm or
more and 121 mm or less.
B
C
Line C
G068462
8. After the correction, make test prints in Test

Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And
then check that the difference of dimensions
of lines A and C (on the second test print) is
within the dimension in the following table.
NOTE
• For example, when the measurement value of line
A (on the second test print) is 120 mm
36060 2/3
36060
Test print (first) Test print (second)
Line AA
Line A (120 mm)
A
B
3. Mode
C
Line C Line C (120 mm)

G078473
IMPORTANT
• If the differences of dimensions of lines A and
C (on the first and second test prints) are out
of the tolerance level, check the zigzag
adjustment of the magazine mount.
☞ 22100
36060 3/3
36070
Exposure Center Correction NOTE

• When the correction value is over ±9.9 mm, the
correction value display part turns red and it cannot be
registered.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Center Correction
! Functions
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/B/C) without

Correction Value
Invalidate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center
Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
Paper Magazine) to make a test print.
! Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B/C)

with Master Value
3. Mode
Validate Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and
make a test print.

A/B/C) with Master and Paper Magazine Values
S3387-00-SM00 Validate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center
Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
! Explanation Paper Magazine) to make a test print.
NOTE
The exposure center correction can be carried out for each
paper width and surface.
print.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the Master (Exposure Center Correction
Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
Paper Magazine) for each paper magazine A/B/C.
G066121
! Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper • When making test prints in Functions, a print with the
Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: − advance length of 100 mm is made and the paper width
2.0 to +2.0 mm) 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.
The reference line is corrected to be in the center on the test
paper for each paper magazine (for each paper width and ! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B/C)
emulsion type). The paper is loaded.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 1) Paper ! Rewind

Left End − Center (Initial value: 127.0 mm)
(Input range: 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm) The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Input the length from the left end to the center line on the
leading end of the test print. ! Adjustment
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 2) Center Exposure Center Correction (Master)

− Paper Right End (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input 1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the
range: 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm) exposure advance unit has been completed.
Input the length from the the center line to the right end on the ☞ 36080
leading end of the test print.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction Value)
☞ 22100
The exposure center correction value which is calculated from
the input values of master (Exposure Center Correction Value 3. Check that Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
1) and (Exposure Center Correction Value 2) is displayed. Correction has been completed.
☞ 36060
36070 1/2
36070
4. Check that Exposure Zoom Rate 5. Carry out Test Print Confirmation with
Correction has been completed. Master value of F: Functions.
☞ 36020 6. Measure dimension B from the left end to the
5. Set the paper magazine to carry out Master center line on the test print.
(Exposure Center Correction Value) to
IMPORTANT
magazine mount A/B/C.
• When measuring the test print, use the front
6. Select paper magazine A/B/C. end of the test print.
7. Carry out Test Print without Correction Center line
Value of F: Functions. Front end of the test print
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you use.
8. Measure the length from the left end to the
3. Mode
center line and the length from the center line
to the right end on the leading end of the test
print.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
A
G068464
7. Carry out correction so that dimension B is

half of the paper width.
B > a half of the paper width Minus correction
B < a half of the paper width Plus correction
8. After correcting, carry out Test Print

Confirmation with Master and Paper
Magazine Valuesof F: Functions and be
sure to make a print to check if the exposure
center is correct.
G068463
9. Input each measurement dimension.

10. After correcting carry out Test Print
Confirmation with Master Value of F:
Functions and be sure to make a print and
check if the exposure center is correct.
Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper

Magazine)
exposure advance unit has been completed.
☞ 36080
☞ 22100
3. Set the paper magazine for Exposure Center
Correction to the magazine mount A/B/C.
4. Select paper magazine A/B/C.
36070 2/2
36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment A piece of paper with the advance length of 457 mm is
printed.
NOTE
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment imprinting.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
Adjustment ! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine
A/B/C)
Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start
Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
Correction and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 457 mm is
printed.
NOTE
3. Mode
print.
G066121
S3316-00-SM00 imprinting.
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to bring up this ! Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test
display. Print (Paper Magazine A/B/C)
Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit inlet roller,
! Explanation and then a test print is made.
NOTE
Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance
Motor Speed Correction are carried out. • A piece of paper with the advance length of 305.0 mm is
Zigzagging due to the pressure of the inlet roller and exit roller printed.
of exposure advance unit is corrected.
! Exposure Advance Pressure Exit Roller Test
IMPORTANT Print (Paper Magazine A/B/C)
• If the exposure advance adjustment is carried out
for any one of magazine A, B or C, the correction is Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit exit roller,
complete. and then a test print is made.
NOTE
! Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper • A piece of paper with the advance length of 305.0 mm is
Measurement Value (Initial value: 25.4 mm) printed.
(Input range: 22.4 to 28.4 mm)
The Exposure Start Position is corrected.
Measure the length between the test paper front end and 0 The paper is loaded.
mm-line, then input measured value.
! Rewind
! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm)
! Adjustment
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of
the test paper and input measured value.
Exposure Advance Adjustment
1. Select and execute Test Print (Paper
! Functions Magazine A, B or C) via F:Functions.
2. Measure the length between the paper front
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/B/C) end and 0 mm-line of the test print, then
Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure input the measured value in Paper Front
Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Correction and then make a test print. Value.
36080 1/6
36080
3. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure
254 mm line of the test print, then input the advance unit
value in 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test
Paper Measurement Value.
1. Select and execute Exposure Advance
Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper
Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value Magazine A, B or C) via F:Functions.
IMPORTANT
A • Print the test print with the maximum paper
width which has been used.
2. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and
254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test
print and check that the difference is within
0.2 mm.
3. Mode
A
Left Right
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement

Value
G068465
4. Select and execute Test Print Confirmation

(Paper Magazine A, B or C) via
F:Functions. Rear end G068467
5. Check that each measurement of a test print IMPORTANT

that is made is same as followings. • If the difference between the right and left
Length between the paper front end 25.4 mm measured values is ±0.2 mm or more, carry
and 0 mm-line out the following adjustment.
Length between 0 mm-line and 254 254.0 mm NOTE
mm-line
• There is another method to check the difference.
Cut the paper at the center and put them together
to check the difference between lines A and B.
3. Lift up the paper advance units 1 and 2.
A
Rear end
G068466
36080 2/6
36080
4. Remove the pressure guide. (two locks) 6. Loosen the fixing screw of the exposure
Paper Advance Unit 1 advance unit inlet roller. (Loosen one fixing
Locks screw.)
7. Loosen the nut of the exposure advance unit
inlet roller. (Loosen one nut.)
8. Adjust the adjusting screw of the exposure
advance unit inlet roller. (one adjusting
screw)
Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut
3. Mode
Exit roller fixing
screw
Pressure guide Paper Advance Unit 2
G068468
5. Check that the dimension of inlet roller

adjusting screw of exposure advance unit is Pressure guide Inlet roller
fixing screw
between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If an adjustment is
necessary, loosen the nut of the inlet roller
and adjust the screw. (Loosen one nut, Inlet roller Inlet roller nut
adjust one screw.) adjusting screw
Exit roller adjusting screw G072393

Exit roller nut Carry out adjustment for the advance error that is
measured in ☞ 2 of Exposure Advance Unit
Zigzagging Adjustment referring to the following
table.
When the measurement value on the LEFT
is longer
Paper Rotation direction of Rotation
advance the screw amount of the
2.0 to 2.5 mm error screw
(mm)
0.2 to 0.3 Counterclockwise Approximately
Scales 45°
Inlet roller nut 0.4 Counterclockwise Approximately
60°
Inlet roller 0.6 Counterclockwise Approximately
adjusting screw 2.0 to 2.5 mm
90°
G072395 0.9 Counterclockwise Approximately
IMPORTANT 135°
• Make a test print again. Measure the lengths
between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line on right When the measurement value on the RIGHT
and left edges of the test print. If the is longer
difference is not within 0.2 mm, carry out the
following adjustment. Paper Rotation direction of Rotation
• Adjust the zigzagging by turning the adjusting
error screw
screw between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If adjustment
(mm)
is performed out of the range between 2.0
and 2.5 mm, the banding appears on the area 0.1 to 0.2 Clockwise Approximately
32 mm from the paper front end. 45°
0.3 Clockwise Approximately
60°
36080 3/6
36080
Paper Rotation direction of Rotation IMPORTANT

• If the difference between the right and left
error screw
measured values is ±0.2 mm or more,
(mm)
readjust from ☞ 6 of Exposure Advance
0.5 Clockwise Approximately Unit Zigzagging Adjustment.
90°
0.9 Clockwise Approximately 13. Adjust the exposure advance unit exit roller
135° following the same procedure.
14. Check the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
IMPORTANT Correction.
• Tighten the fixing screw of the exposure ☞ 36060
advance roller while the angle bracket of the
pressure roller unit is pressed in the direction
Checking (pressure roller at the exit side)
IMPORTANT
3. Mode
Screwdriver
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the exit side in
the exposure advance unit, check the followings
since the banding may be found at the area 32 mm
from the paper leading end.
1. Turn the cam in the exposure advance unit to
release the pressure of the pressure roller at
the exit side and set the paper.
Pressure guide 2. Make fine adjustments of the cam in the

exposure advance unit so that the pressure
G072394
release amount of the pressure roller at the
exit side is the thickness of about one sheet
9. Attach the pressure guide to the exposure of paper. Use the paper to check that the
advance unit. pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
10. Check the pressure of the pressure rollers at is equable at the right and left.
the exit and inlet sides in the exposure
advance unit.
Refer to ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the exit side).
Refer to ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side).
11. Again, select and execute Exposure
Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print
(Paper Magazine A/B/C) via F:Functions.
12. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and
254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test
print and check that the difference is within
0.2 mm.
A
Left Right
Pressure roller
at the exit side
Cam G072398
Rear end G068467
36080 4/6
36080
IMPORTANT 1. Turn the cam on the exposure advance unit

to release the pressure of the pressure roller
• If the pressure adjustment is required,
at the exit side.
perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance
Unit Zigzagging Adjustment.
3. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to
see if the banding occurs at the area 32 mm
from the paper leading end.
32 mm
3. Mode
Leading
Rear end
end
G074601
NOTE Pressure roller

• Any paper size is acceptable. at the exit side
Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side)

Cam
IMPORTANT G072399
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the inlet side 2. Release the pressure of the pressure roller
in the exposure advance unit, check the followings at the exit side and set the paper. Make fine
since the banding may be occurred at the area 24 to adjustments of the cam in the exposure
27 mm from the paper rear end. advance unit so that the pressure release
amount of the pressure roller at the inlet side
is the thickness of about one sheet of paper.
36080 5/6
36080
3. Use the paper to check that the pressure of

the pressure roller at the inlet side is equable
at the right and left.
3. Mode
Pressure roller at
the inlet side
Cam
G072397
IMPORTANT
• If the pressure adjustment is required,
perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance
Unit Zigzagging Adjustment.
4. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to
see if the banding occurs at the area 24 to 27
mm from the paper rear end.
Leading
end Rear end
24 to 27 mm
G074602
NOTE
36080 6/6
36090
Paper pressure operation correction NOTE

print.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
G066121
imprinting.

The paper is loaded.
! Rewind
3. Mode
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
! Adjustment
1. Select and execute Test Print via

F:Functions.
NOTE
S3389-00-SM00
• 13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in
the list below.
! Explanation • When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by print No. and the revolution pulse count are
adjusting the clearance between the pressure roller of the printed on the back print.
exposure advance unit and the paper.
Print No. Revolution pulse Test print
IMPORTANT count (pps) advance length
• Carry out paper pressure operation correction for (mm)
each paper type. 1 1733 152
• Copy the paper width correction value that the 2 1600 153
correction is finished to the same paper type paper 3 1545 154
magazine.
4 1502 155
5 1466 156
! Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial
value: 1) (input range: 1 to 13) 6 1434 157
7 1405 158
Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller.
8 1378 159
9 1353 160
! Functions
10 1329 161
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/B/C) 11 1307 162
12 1285 163
Prints the gray test prints (13 patterns).
Test prints with the advance length of 152 mm to 164 mm is 13 1265 164
printed.
NOTE 2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP from the rear end on the test print. Check the
imprinting. table below and input the correction pattern
No. as the correction value.
A/B/C) Banding position Correction
Rear end: At about 26 mm +2
Validate the Paper Pressure Operation Correction to make a
test print.
A test print which number is registered to the paper pressure
operation correction is made.
36090 1/2
36090
Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end

Banding (26 mm at the rear end) +2
Test print with no Print No.

banding
3. Mode
G068471
Banding position Correction

Rear end: At about 17 mm −2
Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end

−2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)
10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding
Print No.

G072389
3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each

paper magazine type.
36090 2/2
36100
WB width correction ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine

A/B)
Bringing up the display Validate the correction value to make a test print.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → NOTE
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → WB Width Correction • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and
the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.
3. Mode
imprinting.
! WB width correction

☞ 22100
S3394-00-SM00 2. Check that the exposure center correction
has been completed.
! Explanation ☞ 36070
The margin correction can be carried out for each paper width 3. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
and surface.
4. Measure the right and left margins on the
IMPORTANT test print.
• When the correction is carried out for any one of
magazine A, B or C, it is complete.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of
WB and BL, because the image exposure position is
corrected.
! Paper Magazine (Input range: 82.5 to 305 mm)

Specify the paper magazine to be corrected.
! Left Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm)

Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 4.0
mm.
! Right Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm)

Correct the right margin of the test print so that it becomes 4.0
mm. G068472
5. Input the measured value in each item.

! Functions
6. Carry out Test Print Confirmation of F:
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B) Functions and make sure that the margin is
5.0 mm.
Invalidate the correction value to make a test print.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and
the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.
imprinting.
36100 1/1
36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
Compact Archive Unit Initialization sequentially. This reduces the time for the hard disk drive
to access the data.
• Carry out Defrag regularly to improve the performance
Bringing up the display of the computer.
→ Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit
Initialization
! Procedure
IMPORTANT ! Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit

• Carry out the Hard disk drive format for Compact
Archive Unit first when the compact archive unit is 1. Click F: Functions.
installed newly or the hard disk drive of the compact
archive unit is replaced.
2. Click Initialization of the Compact Archive
☞ 88000 Unit.
Windows 2000 format dialog is displayed.
3. Mode
S3401-00-SM00
! Explanation
G069963
The compact archive unit can be initialized or optimized.
3. Click Start.
IMPORTANT Initialization starts.
• The backup data of the compact archive unit is not IMPORTANT
made.
• You cannot change the setting of Capacity,
• If the data in the compact archive unit was initialized File system, Allocation unit size, and Enable
accidentally, it cannot be recovered. Compression on the format dialog.
• If you select the Enable Compression, it takes
! Functions approx. 35 minutes.
• If you select Quick Format, it finishes in a few
! Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit of seconds.
The image data which is saved in the hard disk drive of the
compact archive unit can be initialized. ! Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit
NOTE
1. Click F: Functions.
display this.
! Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit

The hard disk drive of the compact archive unit can be
optimized.
NOTE
• A fragmented hard disk drive stores parts of a file in
many different locations. Defrag is placing all data
36700 1/2
36700
2. Click Defragmentation of the Compact

Archive Unit.
Disk Defragementer is displayed and the optimization
(defragmentation) starts.
3. Mode
G069964
IMPORTANT
• If the fragments is 7%, it takes approx. 25
minutes for defragmentation.
NOTE
• After finishing the defragmentation,
Defragmentation Complete is sometimes
displayed. When the message is displayed, select
Close.
36700 2/2
36710
Compact Archive Unit Capacity ! Drive

Check You can check the drive and capacity to use the compact
archive.
Bringing up the display Drive

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Select the drive for the compact archive unit.
→ Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit
Capacity Check
IMPORTANT
• Check the drive letter of the hard disk drive for
When TYPE1 is selected compact archive unit in Windows Explorer.
• The conditions for a compact archive unit are as
follows.
• Hard disk
• Drive other than C drive
• Available 5 GB or more free space
3. Mode
Capacity
All capacity of the drive which is selected is displayed.
Free Space
Free space of the drive which is selected is displayed.
! Save Data
You can check the data saved in the compact archive.
S3402-00-SM00 All Order Counts

All order counts saved is displayed.
When TYPE2 is selected
All Frame Counts
All frame counts saved is displayed.
Hold on Save Frame Counts
Hold on save frame counts is displayed.
Hold on Save Used Space
Hold on save used space is displayed.
! Compact Archive Unit Capacity Setting
NOTE
• Appears when Compact Archive Unit TYPE2 is
selected.
You can set the size of the capacity used for the compact
archive unit and that of the space used for Hold on save.
S3402-00-SM01 Size to be used for Compact Archive Unit
Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for the
! Explanation compact archive unit.
Setting from 0.1 GB up to 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
You can check the compact archive unit capacity.
is available.
! Unit Number The size to be used for Hold on Save

You can set the unit number of the compact archive unit. Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for Hold on
Save.
NOTE Setting from 0 GB up to a 50% of the capacity to be used for
• If there are some QSS with which are equipped the Compact Archive Unit is available.
compact archive unit, change the unit number in order to
identify each archive unit. Default Size
• When TYPE 2 is selected, the archive code (2x−xxxx⋅ ⋅ ⋅ Put the settings of the size to be used to the default as for the
⋅) does not appear. compact archive unit and the Hold on save.
NOTE
• The values are changed to the following.
36710 1/2
36710
• Size of the space to be used for Compact Archive

Unit: 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
• The size of the space to be used for Hold on save:
50% of the size of space to be used for Compact
Archive Unit
3. Mode
36710 2/2
37000
Scanner Unit Adjustment
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis IMPORTANT

Adjustment [S-2/S-3] • The order of priority of the film carriers which are
used for the swing and tilt adjustment and light
axis adjustment is as follows.
There are different Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
procedures for S-2/S-3 and S-4. Priority Film carrier to be set
• For S-4 details, refer to the following: 1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)*1
2 120 AFC-II
• Refer to ☞ Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment [S-4].
3 110 AFC-II
*1. For the 135/240 AFC-II, use the 135 lane to carry out
Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment
! Graph
When the image is scanned, the A/D value of each CCD pixel
3. Mode
is graphed out simultaneously.
! Display
Adjust the graph display area.
# Display Area (Horizontal), Light Axis

Adjustment (initial value: 470) (input range: 1
to 2670)
The horizontal display area of the light axis
adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is
narrowed, the horizontal axis is magnified.
# Display Area (Horizontal), Swing and Tilt

S3396-01-SM02 Adjustment (initial value: 470) (input range: 1
to 3500)
IMPORTANT
The horizontal display area of the swing and tilt
• After replacing the scanner unit, carry out adjustment adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is
following the procedures below.
1. Carry out ☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or
readjusting the scanner unit). # Display Area (Vertical) (input range: 1 to 4096)
2. Carry out ☞ Adjustment of swing and tilt (when The display area of the graph vertical-axis can be
replacing or readjusting the scanner unit). set. If the display area is narrowed, the vertical-axis
3. Carry out Light Source Registration. is magnified.
☞ 37010
4. Carry out Focus Adjustment. # Graph
☞ 37020 Each graph is displayed by selecting the check
5. Carry out Light Source Update. boxes of B, G, R, and IR.
☞ 37030 IMPORTANT
• When checking only for the light axis adjustment of the
• When the Light Axis Adjustment and Swing
scanner unit and swing and tilt adjustment, follow the
and Tilt Adjustment are carried out, be sure to
procedure below.
do at G only.
1. Carry out ☞ Checking the light axis (when only
checking). ! Focus value (initial value: 0) (input range: −300
2. Carry out ☞ Checking the swing and tilt (when only to +300)
checking).
If necessary, the focus value can be changed.
! Explanation
! Light Axis Adjustment
Adjust the vertical and horizontal tilt of the scanner unit.
! Threshold (input range: 0 to 4096)
For the waveform selected in Graph of Display, Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold, in which the part over the
threshold is added up, is displayed.
37000 1/10
37000
! Light Axis Adjustment Check 3. Adjust the scanner unit position so that the
upper value of waveform comes to the center
Carry out light axis adjustment check.
of trapezoidal graph.
NOTE
(Loosen the three adjusting screws and three fixing
• Check that the difference between the right and left nuts.)
values of Number of Pixels Exceeding the Threshold in
NOTE
the graph for the light axis check is within 4 pixels.
• Depending on the unit, the adjusting screw may be
changed to the hex. nut.
! Result
Same position
The result is displayed as OK or No Good.
! Swing and Tilt Adjustment
! Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check
3. Mode
Check the swing and tilt adjustment.
NOTE
• Change the focus value continuously, check if the focus
best positions are equal at the front and rear.
After completing, the result is displayed on the pop-up
display.
! Result
The result is displayed as OK or No Good.
NOTE
• After the Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check, if the
Trapezoidal graph
deviation of front and rear focus best position is 6 or less, S3396-01-SM01
OK appears. Fixing nuts
Adjusting
! Resolution
screws
The resolution of the waveform selected in Graph of Display
is calculated and displayed for each B, G, and R.
! Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing Fixing nut

or readjusting the scanner unit)
This is the procedure for replacing or readjusting the scanner
unit. Adjusting
Follow the procedure and adjust the scanner unit until the screw
result becomes OK.
IMPORTANT
• OK is displayed when the difference between the
right and left values of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold is within 4 pixels.
• When only checking the light axis of scanner unit, G068473
refer to ☞ Checking the light axis (when only
checking).

scanner front cover.
☞ 20030
2. Set the AFC to the scanner section without
setting the scanner adjustment chart to the
AFC.
37000 2/10
37000
IMPORTANT 1 2
• When moving the scanner unit in the arrow

direction, loosen the fixing nuts and draw in
the arrow direction.
3. Mode
S3396-01-SM02
G072392 7. Adjust the light axis of scanner unit so that
4. When the upper value of waveform on the the difference between the Number of
trapezoidal graph comes to the Pixels Exceeding the Threshold for 0 to
approximately center of four displays after 2670 and 2670 to 5340 becomes within 4
adjusting the scanner unit position, attach and the Result becomes OK.
the scanner adjustment chart to the AFC. (Loosen the three adjusting screws and three fixing
nuts.)
IMPORTANT
• For precautions for handling the scanner IMPORTANT
adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600. • Press the scanner unit against left back side
to adjust.
5. Set the AFC securely in the machine. • Adjust the adjusting screw so that the
6. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar, waveform of swing and tilt, and light axis can
Display Area, Threshold, and Display be seen on the display.
Area Setting so that the relation between
Adjusting screw 1 Fixing nut
the waveforms and the horizontal red lines in
both right and left graphs is shown as Fixing nut
follows. Adjusting screw
(1) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar so

that only the largest waveform for the light
axis adjustment (1 pixel side) can be seen. Fixing nut
(2) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,

Light Axis Adjustment of Display Area
(Horizontal) and Display Area Setting so
Adjusting
that only the largest waveform for the light screw 2
axis adjustment (5340 pixel side) can be seen
in the display below.
NOTE
• When performing Display Area Setting,
only the image 2 shown in the display
moves right and left.
G068473
• When performing Light Axis Adjustment
of Display Area (Horizontal), the " Point
waveforms 1 and 2 shown in the display When turning the adjusting screw, the waveform may
are enlarged or reduced. be moved, or unnecessary waveform may be displayed.
(3) Adjust the Threshold so that the middle of In that case, return to ☞ 6, and adjust again so that the
the peak of the waveform and the red line only necessary waveform can be seen.
which indicate the threshold cross the
positions of 1 and 2 shown in the display.
37000 3/10
37000
" Point Area Setting so that the relation between

Example: In the following case, adjust the adjusting the waveforms and the horizontal red lines in
screws 1 and 2 so that the difference of Number of both right and left graphs is shown as
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold becomes within 4. follows.
Number of Pixels 0 to 2670 2670 to 5340
Exceeding the
(1) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar so
Threshold that only the largest waveform for the light
axis adjustment (1 pixel side) can be seen.
Value 334 339
Adjusting screw 1 Adjust this in the tightening direction. (2) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
Adjusting screw 2 Adjust this in the loosening direction.
8. After the difference of Number of Pixels axis adjustment (5340 pixel side) can be seen
Exceeding the Threshold becomes within in the display below.
4, tighten the fixing nuts and adjusting
3. Mode
NOTE
screws, then click Light Axis Adjustment • When performing Display Area Setting,
Check. only the image 2 shown in the display
NOTE moves right and left.
• When the Result is OK, carry out swing and tilt • When performing Light Axis Adjustment
adjustment. of Display Area (Horizontal), the
• When the Result is No Good, carry out light axis waveforms 1 and 2 shown in the display
adjustment again. are enlarged or reduced.
9. Carry out swing and tilt adjustment. (3) Adjust the Threshold so that the middle of
☞ Adjustment of swing and tilt (when replacing or the peak of the waveform and the red line
readjusting the scanner unit)Reference which indicate the threshold cross the
IMPORTANT
1 2
• After adjusting the light axis, the swing and tilt
adjustment is required.
! Checking the light axis (when only

checking)
IMPORTANT
• This is the procedure for only checking the light axis
of the scanner unit.
1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the

135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II,
use the 120 AFC-II and the 110 AFC-II for
S3396-01-SM02
checking.
4. Check that the differences of Number of
Priority Film carrier to be set Pixels Exceeding the Threshold for 0 to
1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 2670 and 2670 to 5340 become the values
2 120 AFC-II shown in the table below.
3 110 AFC-II IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC-II (135
lane) is less than the following value,
IMPORTANT
• For precautions for handling the scanner
adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.
2. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar,
Display Area, Threshold, and Display
37000 4/10
37000
checking the Light Axis Adjustment of the The range of the blue lines The range of the blue lines
120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II is not required. The range of the red lines
Film carrier to be set Difference of G values
when checking the
light axis adjustment
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) ±37 pixels
120 AFC-II ±28 pixels
5. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from

the AFC.
IMPORTANT
• If the adjustment mode is finished while the
3. Mode
scanner adjustment chart is being adhered,
the chart gets damaged because the AFC
initial-activated operation starts.
S3396-01-SM02
! Adjustment of swing and tilt (when
replacing or readjusting the scanner IMPORTANT
unit) • If the waveform cannot be seen, check for the
position to which the scanner adjustment
This is the procedure for replacing or readjusting the scanner chart is attached and for Light Axis
unit. Adjustment.
Follow the procedure and adjust the scanner unit until the ☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or
result becomes OK. readjusting the scanner unit)
IMPORTANT 5. Adjust the resolution of the right and left
• OK appears when the value is 6/54 step or less. graphs to the approx. maximum.
• When only checking the swing and tilt of scanner (Loosen the two adjusting screws and two fixing nuts.)
unit, refer to ☞ Checking the swing and tilt (when IMPORTANT
only checking).
• Press the scanner unit against back side to
adjust.
1. Remove the scanner top cover and the • Depending on the unit, the adjusting screw
scanner front cover. may be changed to the hex. nut.
☞ 20030
2. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the Fixing nut
AFC. Adjusting
screws
IMPORTANT
3. Set the AFC securely in the machine. Fixing nuts
4. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar and

Standard Position so that the relation
between the waveforms and the vertical red
and blue lines in both right and left graphs is
shown as follows.
(1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so

that the waveform of graph can be seen.
(2) Using Standard Position, carry out
adjustment so that the three waveforms are in G068473
between the red lines and the fine waveforms
" Point
are in the center of the blue lines.
When turning the adjusting screw, the position
between the vertical blue/red lines and the undulation
may be changed. In that case, return to ☞ 4, and adjust
37000 5/10
37000
the position between the vertical lines and the ! Checking the swing and tilt (when only
waveforms correctly again.
checking)
NOTE
• The resolution displays how much percentage the This is the procedure for checking whether the swing and tilt
height of the 8 small waveforms shares the height of the scanner unit is normal or not. Carry out the adjustment
of the 3 large waveforms. when the swing and tilt is not normal.
IMPORTANT 1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the

• Adjust while the unit fixing nut is loosened. If 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
the nut is secured, the adjustment may not be IMPORTANT
carried out because of the narrow adjustment
range. • When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II,
6. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment checking.
Check.
Priority Film carrier to be set
3. Mode
NOTE
1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)
• When the result is OK, the swing and tilt
adjustment is completed. 2 120 AFC-II
When it is No Good, return to ☞ 5 to carry out 3 110 AFC-II
the swing and tilt adjustment according to the
instructions on the display. This correction means
the rotation of the adjusting screw. IMPORTANT
7. Fix the scanner unit. • For precautions for handling the scanner
8. After the adjustment, carry out Light Axis 2. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
Adjustment Check of Light Axis
Adjustment. If the waveform is shifted, re- 3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar and
adjustment is required. Standard Position so that the relation
☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or between the waveforms and the vertical red
readjusting the scanner unit) and blue lines in both right and left graphs is
9. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from shown as follows.
the AFC.
(1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so
IMPORTANT that the waveform of graph can be seen.
adjustment so that the three waveforms are in
between the red lines and the fine waveforms
10. Attach the scanner top cover and scanner The range of the blue lines The range of the blue lines
front cover.
The range of the red lines
11. When it takes 20 minutes or more for the
light axis adjustment and swing and tilt
adjustment of the scanner unit, the ND filter
solenoid heats and malfunctions may occur.
When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source registration.
☞ 37010
☞ 37020
IMPORTANT
• After adjusting the swing and tilt, the light
source registration is required.
S3396-01-SM02
37000 6/10
37000
IMPORTANT Swing and Tilt/Light Axis

• If the waveform cannot be seen, check for the Adjustment [S-4]
position to which the scanner adjustment
chart is attached and for Light Axis
Adjustment. Bringing up the display
☞ Light Axis Adjustment (when replacing or Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
readjusting the scanner unit) → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment
4. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment
Check.
5. Check that the value on the 135/240 AFC-II
(135 lane) is less than the value in the
following table.
IMPORTANT
3. Mode
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC-II (135
lane) is less than the following value,
checking the Swing and Tilt Adjustment of
the 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II is not
required.
Film carrier to be set Difference of G
values when
checking the swing
and tilt adjustment
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 27/54 step S3396-01-SM02
120 AFC-II 27/54 step IMPORTANT

110 AFC-II 24/54 step • After replacing the scanner unit, carry out adjustment
following the procedures below.
6. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from 1. Carry out ☞ Checking the light axis (when only
the AFC. checking).
2. Carry out ☞ Checking the swing and tilt (when only
IMPORTANT checking).
3. Carry out Light Source Registration.
☞ 37010
initial-activated operation starts. 4. Carry out Focus Adjustment.
☞ 37020
7. Attach the scanner top cover and scanner 5. Carry out Light Source Update.
front cover. ☞ 37030
! Explanation
The scanner's Swing and Tilt/Light Axis are adjustable.
IMPORTANT
• The order of priority of the film carriers which are
used for the swing and tilt adjustment and light
axis adjustment is as follows.
1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)*1
2 120 AFC-II
3 110 AFC-II
*1. For the 135/240 AFC-II, use the 135 lane to carry out
Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
! Graph
37000 7/10
37000
! Display the light axis confirmation graph is within the value

indicated in the table below.
Light Axis Confirmation Table
# Display Area (Horizontal), Light Axis Film carrier to be set Difference of G values
Adjustment (initial value: 452) (input range: 1 when checking the
to 2670) light axis adjustment
The horizontal display area of the light axis 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) ±37 pixels
adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is 120 AFC-II ±28 pixels
# Display Area (Horizontal), Swing and Tilt

Adjustment (initial value: 452) (input range: 1 ! Result
to 3500)
The horizontal display area of the swing and tilt The result is displayed as OK or No Good.
3. Mode
adjustment graph can be set. If the display area is NOTE
narrowed, the horizontal axis is magnified. • Although No Good may be displayed onscreen when
using S-4, the system is functioning normally as long as
# Display Area (Vertical) (Initial value: 3500) the value does not exceed that shown in the Light Axis
(Input range: 1 to 4096) Adjustment Confirmation Table.
The display area of the graph vertical-axis can be
set. If the display area is narrowed, the vertical-axis ! Swing and Tilt Adjustment
is magnified.
! Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check
# Graph
You can check the G value difference and swing and tilt
Each graph is displayed by selecting the check
adjustment at the same time.
boxes of B, G, R, and IR.
NOTE
IMPORTANT • Change the focus value continuously, check if the focus
• When the Light Axis Adjustment and Swing best positions are equal at the front and rear.
and Tilt Adjustment are carried out, be sure to After completing, the result is displayed on the pop-up
do at G only. display.
Check the value to see if it has dropped below that shown
! Focus value (initial value: 1302) (input range: − in the table below.
245 to +1561) Swing and Tilt Adjustment Confirmation Table
If necessary, the focus value can be changed. Film carrier to be set Difference of G
values when
checking the swing
! Light Axis Adjustment
and tilt adjustment
! Threshold value (Initial value: 600) (Input 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 27/54 step
range: 0 to 4096) 120 AFC-II 27/54 step
110 AFC-II 24/54 step
For the waveform selected in Graph of Display, Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold, in which the part over the
threshold is added up, is displayed.
! Result
! Light Axis Adjustment Check The result is displayed as OK or No Good.
You can check G value differences and light axis adjustment NOTE
at the same time. • Although No Good may be displayed when using S-4,
NOTE the system is functioning normally as long as the value is
less than that shown in the Swing and Tilt Adjustment
• Confirm that the difference expressing the Number of
Confirmation Table.
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold on the left and right of
! Resolution
37000 8/10
37000
! Checking the light axis (when only 1 2

checking)
IMPORTANT
• This is the procedure for only checking the light axis
of the scanner unit.

135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II,
checking.
3. Mode
1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)
S3396-01-SM02
2 120 AFC-II
3 110 AFC-II 4. Verify that the difference in the TAGNumber
of Pixels Exceeding the ThresholdTAG
between TAG0 to 2670TAG and TAG2670 to
IMPORTANT 5340TAG is within the range shown on the
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart, TAGLight Axis Adjustment Confirmation
refer to ☞ 4600. TableTAG.
NOTE
2. Set the AFC securely in the machine.
• You need not check the Light Axis Adjustment
3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar, of the 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II if the value of
Display Area, Threshold, and Display the 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) is less than the
Area Setting so that the relation between value shown on the Light Axis Adjustment
the waveforms and the horizontal red lines in Confirmation Table.
both right and left graphs is shown as Light Axis Confirmation Table
follows.
Film carrier to be set Difference of G values
when checking the
(1) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar so light axis adjustment
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) ±37 pixels
axis adjustment (1 pixel side) can be seen.
(2) Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar, 110 AFC-II ±28 pixels
that only the largest waveform for the light IMPORTANT
axis adjustment (5340 pixel side) can be seen • If the difference of Number of Pixels
in the display below. Exceeding the Threshold is more than the
value shown in the Light Axis Adjustment
NOTE Confirmation Table, theScanner unit, the
• When performing Display Area Setting, AFC-II, and/or the Scanner adjustment
only the image 2 shown in the display chart may be defective.
moves right and left.
• When performing Light Axis Adjustment
5. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from
of Display Area (Horizontal), the the AFC.
waveforms 1 and 2 shown in the display IMPORTANT
are enlarged or reduced.
(3) Adjust the Threshold so that the middle of scanner adjustment chart is being adhered,
the peak of the waveform and the red line the chart gets damaged because the AFC
which indicate the threshold cross the initial-activated operation starts.
37000 9/10
37000
! Checking the swing and tilt (when only IMPORTANT

checking) • If no waveform is visible, check the position at
This is the procedure for checking whether the swing and tilt which the scanner adjustment chart is
of the scanner unit is normal or not. attached.
4. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment
1. Adhere the scanner adjustment chart to the Check.
135/240 AFC-II (135 lane).
5. Verify that the difference in resolution
IMPORTANT between 0 to 2670 and 2670 to 5340 is
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC-II, within the range shown on the Swing and
use the 120 AFC-II and the 110 AFC-II for Tilt Adjustment Confirmation Table.
checking. NOTE
Priority Film carrier to be set • You need not check the Light Axis Adjustment
1 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) of the 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II if the value of
3. Mode
the 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) is less than the
2 120 AFC-II value shown on the Swing and Tilt Adjustment
3 110 AFC-II Confirmation Table.
Swing and Tilt Adjustment Confirmation Table
IMPORTANT Film carrier to be set Difference of G
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart, values when
refer to ☞ 4600. checking the swing
and tilt adjustment
2. Set the AFC securely in the machine. 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane) 27/54 step
3. Carry out adjustment using the scroll bar and 120 AFC-II 27/54 step
Standard Position so that the relation 110 AFC-II 24/54 step
between the waveforms and the vertical red
and blue lines in both right and left graphs is IMPORTANT
shown as follows. • If the difference of Resolution is more than
the values in the Swing and tilt adjustment
(1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so check table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, and
that the waveform of graph can be seen. Scanner adjustment chart may be
defective.
adjustment so that the three waveforms are in 6. Remove the scanner adjustment chart from
between the red lines and the fine waveforms the AFC.
IMPORTANT
The range of the blue lines
The range of the red lines the chart gets damaged because the AFC
S3396-01-SM02
37000 10/10
37010

• The registration is not required for the films which are not
to be used.
• For 135, 240, 120, MMC-II, AMC-II, and MFC, the light
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment source registration for each negative and positive is
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration carried out internally.
NOTE • For 110, the light source registration only for negative is
• You can carry out the same correction of light source carried out internally.
registration in the Scanner Setup.
! Registration
3. Mode
! Adjustment procedure (for other than

MFC)
1. Set the film carrier to carry out the Light

Source Registration.
NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, switch the lane to 135 or
S1046-00-SM00 240 securely.
! Explanation
NOTE
The operations below are carried out automatically. • Light Source Registration starts automatically.
1. Checking the CCD sensitivity After Light Source Registration is finished,
Light Source Registration is complete is
2. Executing the Area Registration (registering the valid
displayed.
range of CCD)
☞ 32570 3. Click YES: Enter.
NOTE
• Area Registration is necessary for attachments other
than the crop card attachment of MFC.
3. Correcting the ND filter dispersion
4. Calculating the gain value and the offset value
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• Because the CCD valid range of the MMC-II and • The light source registration for other than the crop
AMC-II are calculated with 135 lane of 135/240 card is executed at the attachment for adjusting.
AFC-II or 135 AFC-II, there are limits to carry out
Light Source Registration and Area Registration.
• When installing the machine, replacing the scanner
unit or carrying out Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment of scanner unit, be sure to carry out
Light Source Registration of MMC-II and AMC-II
or Area Registration, after carrying out Light
Source Registration with 135 lane of 135/240
AFC-II and 135 AFC-II or Area Registration
NOTE
• For another film carrier, carry out light source
registration for each film size.
• After carrying out Light source Registration or Area
Registration, the focus adjustment is required.
37010 1/2
37010
• The light source registration for the crop card is

executed at the crop card attachment.
Attachment for adjustment
3. Mode
Crop card attachment
G078428
1. Set the crop card attachment for MFC

needing light source registration or the
attachment for MFC adjustment.
NOTE
• Light Source Registration starts automatically.
After Light Source Registration is finished,
Light Source Registration is complete is
displayed.
4. When you continue the operation by setting
another attachment, repeat the steps above.
5. In case of using other than the crop card
attachment of MFC, carry out Area
Registration.
☞ 32570
37010 2/2
37020
Focus Adjustment # Graph

Each graph is displayed by selecting the check
boxes of B, G, R, and IR.
IMPORTANT
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment • When the Focus Adjustment is carried out, be
sure to do at G only.
! Focus Value
Enter the focus value.
! Resolution
3. Mode
! Functions
! Magnification Change
Changes the magnification rate of the scanner zoom lens.
! Auto Focus Adjustment

S3230-01-SM00
Carry out the auto focus adjustment.
! Explanation ! Result Display

Correct the deviation of the focus caused by the scanning Display the result of the auto focus adjustment.
height of each film carrier.
After replacing or adding the film carrier, the focus IMPORTANT
adjustment is required. • Refer to the following items for focus adjustment
procedure of each film carrier.
IMPORTANT
• Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for 135/240
• Before carrying out Focus Adjustment, Light
AFC-II, 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II).
Source Registration or Area Registration is
required. • Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for 135/240
MMC-II and 135/240 AMC-II).
• After carrying out Focus Adjustment, Light
Source Update is required. • Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for other than
the MFC: crop card attachment).
! Graph • Refer to ☞ Adjustment procedure (for other than
the MFC: crop card attachment).
! Adjustment procedure (for 135/240
! Display AFC-II, 120 AFC-II and 110 AFC-II)
IMPORTANT
# Display Area (Horizontal) (input range: 1 to • Focus for S-2/S-3 and S-4 is automatically adjusted
3500) to a different rate of magnification.
The display area of the graph horizontal-axis can be Scanner types Magnification
set. If the display area is narrowed, the horizontal S-2/S-3 ×0.621 to ×2.001
axis is magnified.
S-4 ×0.621 and ×1.344
# Display Area (Vertical) (input range: 1 to 4096)

The display area of the graph vertical-axis can be
set. If the display area is narrowed, the vertical-axis
AFC.
is magnified.
IMPORTANT
37020 1/6
37020
2. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position filter solenoid heats and malfunctions may
so that the relation between the waveform of occur.
the graph and the longitudinal red and blue When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
lines in the graphs is shown as follows. minutes, then carry out the light source update.
8. Carry out Light Source Update.
(1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so ☞ 37030
that the waveform of graph can be seen.
(2) Using the Standard Position key, carry out ! Adjustment procedure (for 135/240
adjustment so that the three waveforms are
MMC-II and 135/240 AMC-II)
between the blue lines and the fine
waveforms are between the red lines.
IMPORTANT
The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines • For the focus adjustment of 135/240 AMC-II and
135/240 MMC-II, adjusting with each magnification
rate from ×0.720 to ×1.251 must be carried out all at
3. Mode
once.
• If you closed the mode or moved the stop position of
the scanner adjustment chart before finishing the
adjustment with all magnification rate, adjust it from
×0.720.
• Focus for S-2/S-3 and S-4 is automatically adjusted
to a different rate of magnification.
Adjustment procedures for 135/240 MMC-II and
135/240 AMC-II are the same as those for S-2/S-3.
Scanner types Magnification
S-2/S-3 ×0.720 to ×1.251
S-4 ×0.621 and ×1.344
S3230-01-SM00 1. Set the scanner adjustment chart to the

3. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II.
of the graph is approx. maximum. IMPORTANT
4. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment. • For precautions for handling the scanner
NOTE adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.
• Adjust the focus for each film carrier. 2. Check that the magnification rate is ×0.720.
IMPORTANT 3. Change the value for Display Area
(Horizontal) of 250 to 1300.
• If the message The measurement failed.
appears, carry out the focus adjustment again 4. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position
while the waveform is displayed in the graph. so that the relation between the waveform of
5. Enter the magnification rate which is not the graph, the longitudinal red and blue lines,
registered to Focus Auto Adjustment using and orange area in the graphs is shown as
Magnification Change in Functions. follows.
NOTE
(1) Check that all of the waveforms B, G, R for
• Set Magnification Change for each film mask.
the focus adjustment can be seen and the
• The magnification rate which is not registered to waveform for light axis checking is in the
Focus Auto Adjustment can be checked using orange area. If the waveform cannot be seen,
Result in Functions.
• The focus value is displayed for the magnification
rate which is already registered. - is displayed for
the magnification rate which is not registered. And
nothing appears if there is no need for setting the
item.
6. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
focus adjustment of the scanner unit, the ND
37020 2/6
37020
or out of the area, adjust it with Adjust (L) between the blue lines and the fine
and Adjust (R). waveforms are between the red lines.
Waveform B, G, R for the light axis check The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines
3. Mode
Waveform B, G, R for the focus adjustment
S3230-01-SM01
S3230-01-SM02
IMPORTANT
5. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution
• For the 135/240 MMC-II and 135/240 of the graph is approx. maximum.
AMC-II, the waveform may not be
shown because the positioning of the 6. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
scanner adjustment chart (mount)
which is set to the MMC is not decided.
IMPORTANT
In this case, adjust the mount carrier by • If the message The measurement failed.
pressing Adjust (L) and Adjust (R). appears, carry out the focus adjustment again
while the waveform is displayed in the graph.
NOTE
• Adjust (L) and Adjust (R) buttons can be
7. Select the next magnification rate using
used only when the magnification rate is
Magnification Change in Functions.
×0.720. 8. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• For the focus adjustment of 135/240 AMC-II
and 135/240 MMC-II, adjusting with each
magnification rate from ×0.720 to ×1.251
must be carried out all at once.
filter solenoid heats and malfunctions may
occur.
Adjust (L) and Adjust (R) When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source update.
☞ 37030
S3230-01-SM01
(2) Restore the value in Display Area ! Adjustment procedure (for other than
(Horizontal) to 250 to show only the the MFC: crop card attachment)
waveform for the focus adjustment.
(3) Using the Standard Position key, carry out IMPORTANT
adjustment so that the three waveforms are • For other than the crop card attachment of MFC, it is
always necessary to carry out Area Registration for
each attachment before carrying out Focus
adjustment. ☞ 32570
37020 3/6
37020
• For the focus adjustment of MFC, the adjustment for or out of the area, adjust it with Adjust (L)
all magnification rate from ×0.621 to ×1.344 is and Adjust (R).
required.
• If you closed the mode or moved the position of the Waveform B, G, R for the light axis check
scanner adjustment chart before finishing the
adjustment with all magnification rate, adjust for all
again from ×0.621.
1. Attach the MFC to the machine and press

Yes in the Focus Adjustment, and the
message "Place the attachment, then set
the Focus Chart." appears.
2. Set the scanner adjustment chart to the
MFC:135 F attachment and press Yes.
3. Mode
135F attachment
Waveform B, G, R for the focus adjustment

S3230-01-SM01
IMPORTANT
• In the case of the MFC:135 F
attachment, waveform of the scanner
adjustment chart may not appear. In
this case, adjust the attachment
position by pressing Adjust (L) and
Adjust (R).
NOTE
• Adjust (L) and Adjust (R) buttons can be
used only when the magnification rate is
×0.621.
Scanner adjustment chart
G078433
3. Check that the magnification rate is ×0.621.

4. Change the value for Display Area
(Horizontal) of 250 to 1300. Adjust (L) and Adjust (R)
5. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position
so that the relation between the waveform of
the graph, the longitudinal red and blue lines,
and orange area in the graphs is shown as S3230-01-SM01
follows. (2) Restore the value in Display Area
(Horizontal) to 250 to show only the
(1) Check that all of the waveforms B, G, R for waveform for the focus adjustment.
the focus adjustment can be seen and the
waveform for light axis checking is in the
(3) Using the Standard Position key, carry out
orange area. If the waveform cannot be seen,
37020 4/6
37020
between the blue lines and the fine 2. Set the scanner adjustment chart to the
waveforms are between the red lines. MFC: crop card attachment and press Yes.
The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines Scanner adjustment chart
3. Mode
G078431
3. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position

so that the relation among the waveform, the
range between the longitudinal red lines and
the range between the longitudinal blue lines
S3230-01-SM02 in the graph, is as follows.
6. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution (1) Check whether all of the waveforms B, G, R
of the graph is approx. maximum.
for the focus adjustment are shown. If the
7. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment. waveform cannot be seen, or out of the area,
adjust it with Adjust (L) and Adjust (R).
IMPORTANT
• If the message The measurement failed. IMPORTANT
appears, carry out the focus adjustment again • In the case of the MFC: crop card
while the waveform is displayed in the graph. attachment, the waveform may not
appear. In this case, adjust the
8. Select the next magnification rate using attachment position by pressing Adjust
Magnification Change in Functions. (L) and Adjust (R).
occur.
11. If MFC: Crop card is attached, carry out
☞ Adjustment procedure (for other than the
MFC: crop card attachment). Adjust (L) and Adjust (R)

☞ 37030
! Adjustment procedure (for other than S3230-01-SM01
the MFC: crop card attachment) (2) Using the Standard Position key, carry out
IMPORTANT
• Focus adjustment for the MFC: crop card
attachment requires adjusting magnification of
×0.621 only.
1. Attach the MFC to the machine and press

Yes in the Focus Adjustment, and the
message "Place the attachment, then set
the Focus Chart." appears.
37020 5/6
37020
between the blue lines and the fine

waveforms are between the red lines.
The range of the blue lines The range of the red lines
3. Mode
S3230-01-SM02
4. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution

of the graph is approx. maximum.
IMPORTANT
• If the message The measurement failed.
appears, carry out the focus adjustment again
while the waveform is displayed in the graph.
occur.
8. If other than the MFC: Crop card is
attached, carry out ☞ Adjustment procedure
(for other than the MFC: crop card
attachment).
☞ 37030
37020 6/6
37030
Light Source Update 2. Click YES: Enter.

NOTE
Bringing up the display • Light Source Update starts automatically. After
Light Source Update is finished, Light Source
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Registration is complete is displayed.
→ Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update
NOTE
• You can carry out the same correction of Light Source Update NOTE
in the Scanner Setup. • When you continue the operation to set another
film carrier, repeat the steps above.
IMPORTANT
• For other than the crop card, update the light source
3. Mode
at the attachment for adjustment.
• For the crop card, update the light source at the crop
card attachment.
S1046-00-SM01
! Explanation
The light source amount changes every day due to the
operating environment. Correct the changed light source
intensity value in Light Source Update.
NOTE
• Be sure to update the light source after the focus Crop card attachment
adjustment for the scanner unit or after reading data from
the backup FD.

! Registration
! Adjustment procedure (for other than G078428

MFC) 1. Set the crop card attachment for MFC
needing light source update or the MFC
1. Set the film carrier to carry out the Light attachment for adjustment.
Source Update.
NOTE
NOTE
• For the 135/240 AFC-II, be sure to switch the lane
• Light Source Update starts automatically. After
to 135 or 240.
Light Source Update is finished, Light Source
Registration is complete is displayed.
37030 1/2
37030

NOTE
• When you continue the operation by setting
another attachment, repeat the steps above.
3. Mode
37030 2/2
37300
Laser Unit Adjustment
Laser Unit Adjustment
Laser Unit Adjustment Condition Details

R laser control temperature 27.7°C to 28.3°C
IMPORTANT
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Laser Unit Adjustment • The error message of error No. 6107 R Laser
temperature is out of range. appears under the
following condition.
R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C
and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper
limit temperature) again.
R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C
and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature falls under 25.0°C (lower
limit temperature) again.
☞ 46107
3. Mode
! Laser Unit Thermosensor Display Section
The temperature of the laser unit temperature sensor is
displayed.
NOTE
• The laser unit control temperature is adjusted to become
S3271-00-SM00 within the controlled temperature by using the laser unit
heater and the laser unit cooling fan 1, 2 which are
equipped in the laser unit.
! Explanation
• The laser unit control temperature becomes within the
Laser Unit Thermosensor controlled temperature, and then controlling temperature
of the R laser will start.
R Laser Thermosensor
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.
R laser
Condition Details
r
ase
r
se
la
Bl
Laser unit control temperature 23.0°C to 42.0°C

G
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
ON sensor exceeds 30°C.
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
OFF sensor lowers to 27°C or less.
Laser unit heater: ON When the laser unit temperature
sensor lowers to 25°C or less.
Laser unit heater: OFF When the laser unit temperature
sensor exceeds 26°C.
Laser unit heater

IMPORTANT
• The error message of error No. 6177 Laser Unit
Laser unit
temperature is out of range. appears under the
G076396 following conditions.
NOTE Laser temperature is controlled once between
• Because the R laser thermosensor and laser unit 23.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more
thermosensor are inside of the laser unit, you cannot (standby status) and then the temperature exceeds
check each sensor. 45.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
Laser temperature is controlled once between
! R Thermosensor Display Section 23.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more
(standby status) and then the temperature falls
The temperature of R laser temperature sensor is displayed. under 20.0°C (lower limit temperature)again.
NOTE ☞ 46176
• Temperature control is equipped in the R laser and this
temperature control section has been adjusted to become
within the controlled temperature.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.
37300 1/1
37500
Operation Information
Saving the Logdata
! Explanation
If a problem occurs while the QSS is running, the operation
status when the problem occurs is recorded to HDD as a
Logdata file.
IMPORTANT
• Usually the Logdata file is stored automatically,
however it can be stored manually too. Select the
file to save, if necessary.
• The Logdata file is stored automatically in the
following conditions.
• When an error occurs:
3. Mode
• When an abnormality occurs in the system program:
S0100-WIN-SM00
• Up to 10 Logdata files that are stored automatically
are saved. When the number of Logdata files
2. Bring up the Start menu and select
exceeds 10, the files will be overwritten from the Accessories via Programs.
oldest one. 3. Select Windows Explorer.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time 4. Select C:\NKData\LogData in the Local
and the contents of the problem. Disc:C via My Computer.
NOTE
5. Select the necessary Logdata file.
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information NOTE
shown below with the Logdata and memory data. • The Logdata files that are stored automatically are
• Status when the problem occurs saved in compressed.
• Operation before the problem occurs • The file name is used from Logdata00.lzh to
Logdata09.lzh.
• With or without a error, its kind
• Select the necessary file referring to the saved
• Save the paper which is used when the problem time of Logdata file.
occurs.
• Any other things you realized 6. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key
with the file selected.
Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
! How to obtain
7. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
! To obtain Logdata recorded automatically Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
when the problem occurs
8. The file creating time and the contents about
NOTE the problem are recorded in the Copy of
• This is the data not included in saving at the same time. File.
Save the data if necessary, for example, when the 9. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
situation in which the problem occurs cannot be recurred.
☞ 37520 NOTE
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
1. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.
QSS software works.
NOTE ! To obtain Logdata at present
• For DLS specification, switch the DLS display to
the key operator mode or service operator mode NOTE
and then move to the QSS menu. It displays the • This is the data included in saving at the same time.
taskbar and makes the Windows key selectable. ☞ 37520
37500 1/2
37500
1. Press the L key while pressing the Ctrl key 9. The file creating time and the contents about
and the Alt key on the keyboard when the the problem are recorded in the Copy of
problem occurs. File.
NOTE 10. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
• For specifications other than DLS, the operation
NOTE
can be performed using only the Alt key and the L
key. • The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out this operation
immediately after the problem occurs. The
correct information cannot be recorded after
changing the mode or performing other
operations.
2. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if
3. Mode
QSS software works.
NOTE
• For DLS specification, switch the DLS display to
the key operator mode or service operator mode
and then move to the QSS menu. It displays the
taskbar and makes the Windows key selectable.
S0100-WIN-SM00

Accessories via Programs.
4. Select Windows Explorer.
5. Select C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-## in the Local
Disc:C via My Computer.
NOTE
• The machine type appears in the ## of QSS-##.
6. Select Logdata.
7. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key
with the file selected.
Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
NOTE
• When the Logdata file is stored manually, it is not
compressed.
8. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
37500 2/2
37510
Saving the memory data
NOTE
• This is the data included in saving at the same time.
☞ 37520
! Explanation
If a problem occurs during the QSS operation, the operation
status at present can be recorded as a memory data file.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• The recorded memory data is not the one recorded
automatically when the problem occurs.
3. Mode
Be sure to save the data when the problem occurs.
S1146-02-SM00
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time 2. Press Memory data inhale.
and the contents of the problem. The display to select CPU appears.
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information
shown below with the Logdata and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurs
• Operation before the problem occurs
• Save the paper which is used when the problem
occurs.
• Any other things you realized
! Saving procedure
Saving the memory data

1. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key
and the Alt key on the keyboard when the S1146-02-SM02
problem occurs. 3. Select the CPU you want.
The display to acquire the memory data appears. The available CPU is shown as an active button to be
IMPORTANT selected.
• Be sure to carry out this operation 4. After the dialog of Save As appears, select
immediately after the problem occurs. The output directory.
correct information cannot be recorded after
changing the mode or performing other
operations.
S1146-06-SM01
37510 1/2
37510
IMPORTANT
• The acquired file should be named the store
name, date and the running number.
• Example: Noritsu12-24-01
Noritsu (store name) 12 (month) -24 (day) -01
(running number)
3. Mode
37510 2/2
37520
Saving the memory data and ! Browse

Logdata at the same time Can change the saving destination of data to each media drive
or the like.
! START
Saves the memory data and Logdata to the files.
! CANCEL
Closes the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display
and returns to the QSS display.
! Saving procedure
Saving the memory data and Logdata
3. Mode
1. Press the Ctrl key, the Alt key and the Y key
on the keyboard when the problem occurs.
The Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display
appears.
NOTE
G074617 • For specifications other than DLS, the saving
display appears pressing only the Alt key and the
! Explanation Y key.
The memory data and Logdata at present can be compressed

and saved at the same time when a problem occurs in running
the QSS.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• The recorded memory data and Logdata are not the
ones recorded automatically when the problem
occurs.
Be sure to save the data when the problem occurs.
• The Logdata recorded automatically when the
problem occurs can be saved by Saving the
Logdata.
☞ 37500
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time
and the contents of the problem.
• For DLS specification, it is necessary to save the G074617
DLS log file.
IMPORTANT
☞ 37600
• Be sure to carry out this operation
NOTE immediately after the problem occurs. The
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information correct information cannot be recorded after
shown below with the Logdata and memory data. changing the mode or performing other
operations.
• Operation before the problem occurs 2. Click START in the display to save the
• With or without a error, its kind memory data and Logdata to the files.
• Save the paper which is used when the problem IMPORTANT
occurs. • Save the test result to C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-
• Any other things you realized ##_##\Log_Data\Memory\############.
! Save in
Shows the saving destination of the memory data and Logdata
files.
37520 1/2
37520
• Before clicking START, clicking Browse in

the display can change the saving destination
of data to each media drive or the like.
3. Mode
G074618
IMPORTANT
• When closing the Read All Memory Data &
Save LogData display forcibly using
Ctrl+Alt+Delete, the QSS and PC operations
may be unstable.
• If starting the memory data and Logdata
saving function during the QSS process
(printing, outputting to the media, etc.), the
QSS process and saving data at the same
time may be unstable.
3. When finishing saving the memory data and
Logdata, the screen returns to the QSS
display.
4. End
37520 2/2
37530
System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error

Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.
3. Mode
S1146-02-SM01
! Explanation
Since communication of each control PCB cannot be performed when No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs, it cannot
go into the System Version Check display from Extension.
When No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs, If System Version Check is used in the following procedure, it can go into
the System Version Check display easily.
! Procedure
No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs:

1. On the error display, press NO: Stop alarm and press F: Reserve to make this error to suspension.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press NO: Error clear. If NO: Error clear is pressed, ARCNET communication is performed again by
the main CPU, then the same error recurs and it cannot go into the System Version Check display smoothly.
2. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.
37530 1/2
37530
3. The System Version Check display appears.
3. Mode
S1146-02-SM01
4. The System Version Check display appears by clicking System Version Check.
S3059-01-SM00
5. Confirm the Version and Communication on the System Version Check display.
# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• Since communication data has collected on the ARCNET circuit when ARCNET communication error.
occurs, therefore, by the time OK is displayed, this thing will have time.
# Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.
Version is displayed.: It is communicating.
Version is not displayed.: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• As a result of main CPU's performing an ARCNET communication demand to each control PCB, when
main CPU receives the communication OK signal which each control PCB sent, the version of each control
PCB is displayed.
• If OK is displayed on Communication field, a version will remain displayed even if communication is
become - after that.
6. Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error.
☞ 50520
37530 2/2
37600
Saving the DLS log file
! Explanation
Save the log file of DLS software when a problem occurs
during the operation.
IMPORTANT
• It is also necessary to save Logdata and memory
data of QSS.
☞ 37520
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the following
information at the same time.
3. Mode
• Operation before the problem occurs
• Save the paper which is used when the problem
occurs.
• Any other things you realized
! Saving procedure
1. Press the Ctrl, the Alt, the SHIFT and the L

keys on the keyboard all together when a
problem occurs.
The command prompt appears and will be saved
automatically.
2. Select Quit The Application from Close
Down Checks in the QSS menu to display
the Windows display.
NOTE
• Switch the DLS display to the key operator mode
or the service operator mode and then move to the
QSS menu. It displays the taskbar and makes the
Windows key able to be selected.
Accessories via Programs.
4. Select Windows Explorer.
5. Copy DLSLOG_1.zip in X:\Kodak_Logs
which can be accessed from My Computer
via Local Disc:X, to a storage media.
NOTE
• The most recent file name is always set to
DLSLOG_1.
The previous file name is changed to _2, _3 or the
like automatically.
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.
37600 1/1
38000
Flatbed execution display

Menu
3. Mode
S0100-FB-SM00
! Explanation
It appears when selecting scanner as an input media on the
order display of QSS and pressing .
It does not appear with the check mark for auto color
correction.
IMPORTANT
• This display appears when using the FB scanner
(EPSON type) which is prepared by customers.
! Gamma (Initial value: 1.2) (Input range: 0.5 to

5.0)
Gamma of the image scanned by the FB scanner can be
adjusted.
IMPORTANT
• Gamma initialization is performed only when
bringing up the FB scanner execution display and
pressing Initializing Setting Value in the service
mode.
38000 1/1
4000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................ 4001

Classification of errors and attention messages ...................................................................................................4001
Suffix number display .........................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring .......... 4190
Symptoms caused by poor wiring connection(s) (scanner section) [S-4] ...........................................................4190
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (scanner section) [S-2/3] .......................................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section) ........................................................................4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ....................................................................4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ............................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4240
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-4] ................................................................................4240
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-2/S-3] .........................................................................4250
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (desk section) ........................................................................................4251
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section) .....................................................................................4252
4 Troubleshooting
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section) ................................................................................4253
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart .............................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the order display. ....................4302
An abnormal print is made ..................................................................................................................................4304
Checking for media drive defect .........................................................................................................................4305
PC does not start properly. ..................................................................................................................................4306
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print ................................................................... 4400
BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction) ..............................................................................4400
Line like a bar code (film advance direction) ......................................................................................................4401
Light density line (white) (paper advance direction) ...........................................................................................4450
Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction) ............................................................................4451
Light color is appeared in unexposure position ...................................................................................................4452
Stripped pattern like a wavy line .........................................................................................................................4453
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ........................................................................................... 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart .................................................................... 4600
About the scanner adjustment chart .....................................................................................................................4600
DLS Error Messages ............................................................................................................. 4900
DLS Error Messages ............................................................................................................................................4900
System Error messages (No. 3-) ........................................................................................... 4910
No. 3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full .....................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full ....................................................................................................4910
No. 3-3 WIP Partition Is Full .............................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-4 WIP Partition Is Full .............................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ................................................................................................................4911
Archive Error messages (No. 6-) ........................................................................................... 4920
No. 6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ...........................................................................................................4920
4000 1/14
4000
Archive Error messages (No. 10-) ......................................................................................... 4961

No. 10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host .........................................................................................................4961
No. 10-10 Error While Uploading Network Order ............................................................................................4961
No. 10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name .........................................................................4962
No. 10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host .......................................................................................................4962
No. 10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ............................................................................4963
No. 10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name .........................................................................4963
No. 10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ............................................................................4964
No. 10-19 Connection Processing Failed ..........................................................................................................4965
No. 10-20 Busy Modem ....................................................................................................................................4965
Archive Error messages (No. 12-) ......................................................................................... 4970
No. 12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed .......................................................................................................4970
No. 12-2 Print Initialization Failed ....................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-7 Rendering Error ..................................................................................................................................4972
No. 12-8 Printing Error ......................................................................................................................................4972
No. 12-11 Print Service Error ............................................................................................................................4974
4 Troubleshooting
No. 12-13 Print Creation Error ..........................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-14 Order Queuing Failed .......................................................................................................................4975
No. 12-40 Error Preparing a Print .....................................................................................................................4977
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-) ............................................................................... 4980
No. 13-12 CD Authoring Complete ..................................................................................................................4980
No. 13-13 CD Authoring Complete ..................................................................................................................4980
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver ...................................................................... 40101
No. 101 Start the QSS and enter the Net Scan mode. .....................................................................................40101
No. 103 The QSS is already connected to another QSS TWAIN driver. Would you like to search for another
QSS? ...................................................................................................................................................................40101
No. 107 48 bit image may not correspond, depending on application. Would you like to enable the setting?
............................................................................................................................................................................40107
No. 110 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Check the QSS. ..............................................................40107
No. 115 The COM port for the external controller is already occupied by another application. Confirm the use
condition of the COM port. ...............................................................................................................................40108
No. 116 Failed to open the COM port for the external controller. ..................................................................40108
No. 117 Would you like to stop processing? ...................................................................................................40109
No. 502 Failed to connect with the QSS. Would you like to search the QSS? .............................................40110
No. 504 This version does not match the QSS. ...............................................................................................40110
No. 505 Communication has been disconnected. The QSS TWAIN driver will be closed. .........................40111
No. 508 A QSS TWAIN driver has been started. Multiple QSS TWAIN drivers cannot be started together.
............................................................................................................................................................................40111
No. 512 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Quit the process. .............................................................40112
No. 513 Language version of message data is incorrect. Messages are displayed in English. ......................40113
No. 514 There is insufficient memory. ............................................................................................................40113
4000 2/14
4000
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500

No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. .....................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..........................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. .............................................................40502
No. 0503[N][SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ..................................................................................................40502
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. .................................................................................40504
No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. ....................................................................................................................40506
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .......................................................................................................40506
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ................................40508
No. 0510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. ......................................................................................................40510
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. .......................................................................................................................40514
Attention message: SM replenishment ................................................................................ 40700
No. 0700-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..............................................40700
No. 0701-####[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# .........................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .....................................................................................40702
No. 0703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? .............40702
4 Troubleshooting
No. 0704[SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package.
............................................................................................................................................................................40704
No. 0705-####[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..............................................40704
4000 3/14
4000
Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000

No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .........................................41002
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B ..........................................41002
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A .............................................................................41004
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................41004
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................41010
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ............................................................................41010
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ................................................................41012
No. 1013 Outputting. . . ...................................................................................................................................41012
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ...................................................................41014
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? .....................................................................................................41016
No. 1024 Would you like to register the correction value? .............................................................................41024
No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. ...........................................................................................................41026
No. 1027-#### Profile data was not found. .....................................................................................................41026
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ................41028
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. .....................................................................................41028
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. .......................................................................................................41030
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. ...........................................................41030
No. 1032 One moment please. . . .....................................................................................................................41032
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. ....................................................................41034
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. ............................................................................................41038
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. ...................................................................................................41038
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. ..................................................................................................................41040
No. 1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete. ...........................................................................................................................................41040
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . .........................................................41042
No. 1047-#### Close printer door. ..................................................................................................................41046
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. ............................................................41048
No. 1052-#### The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C ......................................................41052
No. 1053 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C ..........................................41052
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ............................................................................................................41064
No. 1067 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C .............................................................................41066
No. 1068 Replace the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C ...........................................................................41068
No. 1072 Paper color intensity is low. Execute correction? ...........................................................................41072
No. 1074-#### Sensors may be dirty. .............................................................................................................41074
No. 1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key. ..............................41080
No. 1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. ...............................................................................................41080
Attention message: Scanner ............................................................................................... 41302
No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning? ....................................................................................................41302
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty. ...................................................................................................41304
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ........................................41306
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet. ...............................................................................41312
No. 1314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range. ............................................................................41314
No. 1315-#### LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted.process cannot be continued. ...................41314
No. 1316 Focus Adjustment failed. .................................................................................................................41316
No. 1317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction. ....................................................................41316
No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. ..............................................................41318
4000 4/14
4000
Attention message: Film carrier ........................................................................................... 41400

No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. .....................................................................................................................41400
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. ...................................................................................................................41400
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC. .................................................................................................................41402
No. 1403 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process. .........................................................................................41402
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete. ....................................................................................................41404
No. 1405-#### Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. ..........................................................................41404
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier. .....................................................................................................41408
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. .........................................................................41410
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing? .................................................41412
No. 1413 Input the frame number ...................................................................................................................41412
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected. ..................................................................................................41414
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane. ..........................................................................................................................41416
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover. ....................................................................................................41416
No. 1420 Select the DX code. .........................................................................................................................41420
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed. ...........................................................41420
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane. ..........................................................................................................................41422
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier. .........41423
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed. ............................................................41423
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete. .....................................................................41423
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC. ........................................................................................................................41426
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. 41426
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. ......................................................................................41428
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly. .................................................................................41428
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size. ...................................................................................................................41430
No. 1431 Attach the 120 AFC. ........................................................................................................................41430
No. 1432 Attach the MMC. .............................................................................................................................41432
No. 1433 Attach the AMC. ..............................................................................................................................41432
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
............................................................................................................................................................................41434
No. 1438 Set the attachment. ...........................................................................................................................41438
No. 1439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan? ................................................................41438
4000 5/14
4000
Attention message: Disk/Media 1 ........................................................................................ 41500

No. 1500 Would you like to stop outputting media? .......................................................................................41500
No. 1501 The media is write protected. ...........................................................................................................41500
No. 1502 Replace the media.### .....................................................................................................................41502
No. 1503 The appropriate file was not found.### ...........................................................................................41502
No. 1504 Image Destination for the print channel is not set. ..........................................................................41504
No. 1505 Exif Information could not be read. .................................................................................................41504
No. 1506 Would you like to remove the USB Flash Memory? ......................................................................41506
No. 1508 There are some files that could not get written to the media. Would you like to stop processing? 41508
No. 1509 Write the data. ##### Order Number ..............................................................................................41508
No. 1510 Read the data. Set the media. ...........................................................................................................41510
No. 1511 Write the data. Set the media. ..........................................................................................................41510
No. 1512 Data was not read from the media. ..................................................................................................41512
No. 1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? ..................................................................41512
No. 1514 Remove the USB Flash Memory. ....................................................................................................41514
No. 1515 Data is too large to write. .................................................................................................................41514
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1516 Data is too large to read. ..................................................................................................................41516
No. 1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ...............................................................................................41516
No. 1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select different one. .....................................................41518
No. 1519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files? .....................41518
No. 1520 Select the template. ..........................................................................................................................41520
No. 1521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print. ....................................................41520
No. 1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one? .......................................................41522
No. 1523 It was not registered as an option. ...................................................................................................41522
No. 1524 CD-R External Writing System is being output. .............................................................................41524
No. 1526 Cannot disconnect the USB flash memory. Do you want to try again? ..........................................41526
No. 1527 Write the data. Set the media. ..........................................................................................................41526
No. 1528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing. ................................................41528
No. 1529 Failed to read the bar code. ..............................................................................................................41528
4000 6/14
4000
Attention message: Disk/Media 2 ........................................................................................ 41530

No. 1530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists. .................41530
No. 1531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected. ...............41530
No. 1532 Write the data. ..................................................................................................................................41532
No. 1533 Data was saved to the storage media. ..............................................................................................41532
No. 1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? .....................41534
No. 1535 USB Flash Memory is not set. .........................................................................................................41534
No. 1536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media? ............................................41536
No. 1537 The appropriate file was not found.#### .........................................................................................41536
No. 1538 There are still orders remaining for output. Click the Output Media icon to output. .....................41538
No. 1539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media. ...............................................41538
No. 1540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting. .....................................41540
No. 1541 The data for media output is waiting to be written. Settings cannot be changed until the data is written to
media. ................................................................................................................................................................41540
No. 1542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? ...................................41542
No. 1543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? 41542
No. 1545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written. ...................................................41544
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity
Setting. ...............................................................................................................................................................41546
No. 1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media. ..............................................................41546
No. 1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ........................................................41548
No. 1549 Data is too small to read. .................................................................................................................41548
Attention message: Colorimeter .......................................................................................... 41550
No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. .................................................................................................41550
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? ..........................................................41550
No. 1552-#### The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. .........................................41552
Attention message: Pricing unit ........................................................................................... 41600
No. 1601-#### Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet. ...............................................................41600
No. 1603-#### The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. ...............................................................41602
No. 1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check .........................................................................................................41604
4000 7/14
4000
Attention message: NMC ..................................................................................................... 41620

No. 1621 Would you like to delete the order? .................................................................................................41620
No. 1622 Would you like to quit the Net Order Receipt? ...............................................................................41622
No. 1634 Data could not be received. Would you like to delete the order? ...................................................41634
No. 1636 Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print Channel Setting is Normal Print. .........................41636
No. 1637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted. ................................................................41636
No. 1638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted. ...........41638
No. 1639-#### Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted. ...................................................41638
No. 1641 Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm the Print Channel. .........................................................41640
No. 1642 Destination to save image is not set for the QSS Print Channel. Confirm the Print Channel. .......41642
No. 1643 The appropriate file was not found. .................................................................................................41642
No. 1644 Exif Information was not read. ........................................................................................................41644
No. 1645 Data is too large to read. ..................................................................................................................41644
No. 1646 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ...............................................................................................41646
No. 1647 The appropriate file was not found. .................................................................................................41646
No. 1648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? .41648
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed to write. ..........................................................41648
No. 1650 Data is too small to read. .................................................................................................................41650
No. 1653 The output media size is too large. The data cannot be output to the External System. ................41652
No. 1657 Hold On Save could not be executed. Secure enough space, then restart processing. ...................41656
No. 1659 Calibrating... Would you like to stop the calibration? ....................................................................41658
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................ 41800
No. 1801-#### Execute software upgrade. .....................................................................................................41800
Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900
No. 1900-#### It was not registered as an option. ..........................................................................................41900
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. ......................................41900
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. ...............................41902
No. 1903-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . .......................................................................................41902
No. 1904-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . .......................................................................................41904
No. 1905 Program Timer was not set. .............................................................................................................41904
No. 1909 Title was not set. ..............................................................................................................................41908
No. 1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted. ...............................................................................41910
No. 1911 This Title data already exist. ............................................................................................................41910
No. 1912 There is no format. New format will be created. ............................................................................41912
No. 1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you like to edit? ....................................................41912
No. 1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No more data can be added. ....................................41914
No. 1920-#### Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. .............................41920
No. 1921-#### Capacity Booster Key was detected. ......................................................................................41920
No. 1922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings. ..................................................................41922
No. 1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than External System. ...............................................41922
No. 1924 Set the paper width wider than 203 mm for the Long Print. ...........................................................41924
No. 1925 Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode? ....................................................................................41924
No. 1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". ....................41926
No. 1927-#### Sort by Output Media Frame Number function cannot be used. ............................................41926
No. 1928 DPOF file output function cannot be used. .....................................................................................41928
No. 1933 Select an input media other than the Compact Archive Unit. .........................................................41932
4000 8/14
4000
Attention message: Compact archive unit ........................................................................... 43370

No. 3371-#### Could not execute Hold On Save. ..........................................................................................43370
No. 3372 There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save. ...........................................................................43372
No. 3373 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Would you like to continue? .............43372
No. 3374 The Compact Archive Unit could not be used. Confirm the setting. .............................................43374
No. 3375 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Stop the process. ...............................43374
Attention message: Edit ....................................................................................................... 44000
No. 4001 Are you sure about deleting? ...........................................................................................................44000
No. 4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more. ...........................................................................44002
No. 4003-#### Image cannot be inserted into the specified position. ............................................................44002
No. 4004-#### Graphics are too large to insert. ..............................................................................................44004
No. 4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width.
............................................................................................................................................................................44006
No. 4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. ..........................................................................44006
No. 4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder including the files. ................................................44008
No. 4010 Specify the image area. ....................................................................................................................44010
4 Troubleshooting
No. 4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version. ............................................................................44014
No. 4015 Selected file already exists. ..............................................................................................................44014
No. 4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small. ........................................44016
No. 4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? ...........................................................................................44018
No. 4019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import? ........44018
No. 4020-#### Failed to write the file. ...........................................................................................................44020
No. 4021 Failed to read the file. ......................................................................................................................44020
No. 4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range. ..........................................................44022
No. 4024 Select the layer. ................................................................................................................................44024
No. 4025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used. ..........................................44024
No. 4026 The image size is too large to insert. ...............................................................................................44026
No. 4027 The same data already exists. Would you like to overwrite? .........................................................44026
No. 4028 Failed to export the Image Save File. ..............................................................................................44028
No. 4029 The drive is empty. ..........................................................................................................................44028
No. 4030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data. ..............................................................................44030
No. 4031 There is insufficient space left on the disk. .....................................................................................44030
No. 4032 Template size is too large to read. ...................................................................................................44032
No. 4033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template. .................44032
No. 4034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area. ........................................................................44034
No. 4035 Additional phrases could not be saved. ...........................................................................................44034
No. 4036 The image size is too small to insert. ...............................................................................................44036
No. 4037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite? .................................................44036
No. 4038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data? 44038
No. 4039 Image size during editing is too large. .............................................................................................44038
No. 4040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field. ..............................................44040
No. 4041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used. ............................................................................44040
No. 4042 Single Form is not positioned. .........................................................................................................44042
No. 4043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area. ................................................................................44042
No. 4044 Single Form is overlapped. ..............................................................................................................44044
No. 4045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned. ..............................................................44044
No. 4046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled. .........................44046
No. 4047 The selected font was not found. .....................................................................................................44046
No. 4048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print. ...........................................................................44048
No. 4049 No more items can be added. ...........................................................................................................44048
4000 9/14
4000
Error message: Processor 1 ................................................................................................ 45500

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ...............................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB .............................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ............................................................................45503
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD .......................................45504
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ........................................45504
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB .....................................45504
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ....................................................................45507
No. 5508[N] The processing solution level is too low. ...................................................................................45508
No. 5508[SM] The processing solution level is too low. ................................................................................45508
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ............................................................................................45508
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. ......................................................................................................45510
No. 5511[N] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ......................................................................................45511
No. 5513[N] The circulation pump has stopped. BF .......................................................................................45511
No. 5515[N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ..................................................................................45511
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5511[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ...................................................................................45511
No. 5513[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. BF ....................................................................................45511
No. 5515[SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ...............................................................................45511
Error message: Processor 2 ................................................................................................ 45519
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD ..................................................................................................................45519
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ...................................................................................................................45519
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ................................................................................................................45519
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ..............................................................................................................45522
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ............................................................................................45524
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ............................................................................................45524
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ........................................................................................45524
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 5531 The dryer cover is open. ..................................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. .............................................................45532
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ....................................................................................45532
No. 5534-#### Print Sorter Unit operation error. ...........................................................................................45534
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ....................................................................................45534
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ............................................................................................................45536
No. 5538-#### Backup data error. Processor .................................................................................................45538
No. 5539 Print Conveyor Unit was removed. .................................................................................................45538
No. 5549-#### Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ........................................................45548
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ................................................................................................................45550
4000 10/14
4000
Error message: SM replenishment ...................................................................................... 45700

No. 5700-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A .................................................................45700
No. 5701-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B .................................................................45700
No. 5702-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C .................................................................45700
No. 5703-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ................................................................45700
No. 5704-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .................................................................45700
No. 5705-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ..................................................................45700
No. 5706-####[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ...................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45708
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45708
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...................................................................................45710
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ....................................................................................45710
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...............................................................................45710
4 Troubleshooting
Error message: Printer 1 ..................................................................................................... 46012
No. 6012-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ..................................................................................46012
No. 6013-#### Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ..................................................................................46012
No. 6014-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ..............................................................................46014
No. 6015-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ..............................................................................46014
No. 6016-#### Paper Cutter operation error. ..................................................................................................46016
No. 6017-#### Paper has jammed in the printer section. ................................................................................46016
No. 6021-#### Paper remains in the printer section. ......................................................................................46020
No. 6049 Pressure Guide operation error. .......................................................................................................46048
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. .................................................................................................46054
No. 6056-#### Printer system error. ...............................................................................................................46056
No. 6069 The printer top cover is open. ..........................................................................................................46068
No. 6073-#### Synchronous Sensor error. .....................................................................................................46072
No. 6074 B Laser control error. .......................................................................................................................46074
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ......................................................................................................................46074
No. 6076-#### Polygon Mirror control error. .................................................................................................46076
No. 6077-#### Interlock error. ........................................................................................................................46076
No. 6081-#### Backup data error. Printer .....................................................................................................46080
No. 6082-#### Setup error. .............................................................................................................................46082
No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error. .....................................................................................................46086
No. 6101-#### Paper Hold Motor operation error. .........................................................................................46100
No. 6104-#### Printer Door is open. ..............................................................................................................46104
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46104
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46104
No. 6107-#### R Laser temperature is out of range. ......................................................................................46107
No. 6112-#### Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ........................................................................46112
No. 6113-#### Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C ..............................................................................46112
No. 6134-#### Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. ..........................................................46134
No. 6135-#### Arm Unit 1 operation error. ....................................................................................................46134
No. 6136-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ..............................................46136
No. 6137-#### Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. ..............................................46136
4000 11/14
4000
Error message: Printer 2 ..................................................................................................... 46138

No. 6138-#### Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. ................................................................46138
No. 6139-#### Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. ..............................................................46138
No. 6140-#### Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. ..............................................................................46140
No. 6141-#### Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. ............................................................................46140
No. 6142-#### Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. .............................................46142
No. 6143-#### Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. ..........................................46142
No. 6148-#### Paper End Sensor A error. ......................................................................................................46148
No. 6149-#### Paper End Sensor B error. ......................................................................................................46148
No. 6150-#### Paper End Sensor C error. ......................................................................................................46148
No. 6151-#### Paper Loading Sensor error. ...................................................................................................46151
No. 6152-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ............................................................................46152
No. 6153-#### Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. .........................................................................46152
No. 6155-#### Exposure Start Sensor error. ...................................................................................................46154
No. 6157-#### Paper Sensor 1 error. ..............................................................................................................46156
No. 6158-#### Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error. ....................................................................................................46158
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6159-#### Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error. ................................................................................................46158
No. 6160-#### Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. ..................................................................................................46158
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. ....................................................46172
No. 6177-#### Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ..................................................................................46176
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ...........................................................................................................46178
No. 6187 Setup calculation error. ....................................................................................................................46186
Error message: Scanner ...................................................................................................... 46302
No. 6303-#### Scanner Zoom 1 operation error. ............................................................................................46302
No. 6304-#### Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. ............................................................................................46304
No. 6305-#### Scanner Focus operation error. ...............................................................................................46304
No. 6306-#### Scanner IRIS operation error. .................................................................................................46306
No. 6309-#### Scanner change of light error. ................................................................................................46308
No. 6311-#### Scanner data error. ..................................................................................................................46310
No. 6319-#### Backup data error. Scanner AFC ...........................................................................................46318
No. 6321-#### Focus auto adjustment error. ..................................................................................................46320
No. 6322-#### Scanner input balance error. ...................................................................................................46322
No. 6324 F stop value range error. ..................................................................................................................46324
No. 6327-#### Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. ................................................46326
No. 6329-#### Analog setting communication error. .....................................................................................46328
No. 6330-#### Digital setting communication error. ......................................................................................46330
No. 6331-#### Line scanning communication error. ......................................................................................46330
No. 6332-#### Light Source adjustment error. ...............................................................................................46332
No. 6333-#### The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error. ................................................................46332
No. 6336-#### Scanner Zoom operation error. ...............................................................................................46336
4000 12/14
4000
Error message: Film carrier ................................................................................................. 46400

No. 6400-#### Perforation Sensor error. ........................................................................................................46400
No. 6401-#### Loading Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46400
No. 6402-#### Ready Sensor error. ................................................................................................................46402
No. 6403-#### 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ...............................................................................46402
No. 6407-#### Spool Key operation error. .....................................................................................................46406
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked. ..........................................................................................................46408
No. 6409-#### The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ..................................................................................46408
No. 6410-#### Film Sensor error. ...................................................................................................................46410
No. 6411-#### Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed. .............................................46410
No. 6412-#### 135 DX Sensor 1 error. ...........................................................................................................46412
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6423 Auto focus error. ..............................................................................................................................46422
No. 6424-#### Mount Unit operation error. ...................................................................................................46424
No. 6425-#### Mount detection error. ............................................................................................................46424
No. 6426 The lane is out of position. ..............................................................................................................46426
No. 6429-#### System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) ..........................................................................46428
No. 6431 Auto focus error. ..............................................................................................................................46430
No. 6432-#### Mount Unit operation error. ...................................................................................................46432
No. 6433-#### Mount detection error. ............................................................................................................46432
No. 6434-#### Mount detection (inlet) error. .................................................................................................46434
No. 6435-#### Mount insertion operation error. ............................................................................................46434
No. 6436-#### Mount elevator operation error. ..............................................................................................46436
No. 6437-#### Mount eject operation error. ...................................................................................................46436
No. 6438-#### 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ..........................................................................................46438
No. 6439-#### The film strip is too short for processing. ..............................................................................46438
No. 6441-#### The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ..................................................................................46440
No. 6442-#### The perforation of the film may be broken. ...........................................................................46442
No. 6443 Move Table operation error. ............................................................................................................46444
No. 6444 Cartridge is out of position. .............................................................................................................46444
Error message: Disk/Media ................................................................................................. 46502
No. 6503 Formatting could not be executed. ...................................................................................................46502
No. 6504 Backup data could not be read. ........................................................................................................46504
No. 6505 Backup data could not be written. ...................................................................................................46504
No. 6506-#### Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). ........................................................46506
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 6551-#### Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ...........................................................................46550
No. 6552-#### Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit .....................................................................................46552
No. 6554-#### Calibration Plate advance error. .............................................................................................46554
4000 13/14
4000
Error message: Pricing unit ................................................................................................. 46600

No. 6600-#### Pricing Unit communication error. .........................................................................................46600
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46600
No. 6602-#### Pricing Unit Printer operation error. .......................................................................................46602
No. 6603-#### Backup data error. PU ...........................................................................................................46602
Error message: D-ICE control ............................................................................................. 46640
No. 6640-#### System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) ......................................................................................46640
No. 6641-#### Backup Data error. D-ICE Control PCB ...............................................................................46640
No. 6642-#### D-ICE Control PCB error. ......................................................................................................46642
No. 6643-#### Digital Masking Unit operation error. ....................................................................................46642
Error message: Software upgrade ....................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...............................46802
Error message: Image processing PCB .............................................................................. 46822
No. 6822-#### Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. ..............................................................46822
Error: Main ........................................................................................................................... 46900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6900-#### Main control system error. .....................................................................................................46900
No. 6901-#### ARCNET communication error. ............................................................................................46900
No. 6902-#### LVDS communication error. ..................................................................................................46902
No. 6903-#### Serial communication error. ...................................................................................................46902
No. 6906-#### Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? .............................................................46906
No. 6907-#### The file was not found. ...........................................................................................................46906
No. 6908-#### Processing response error. ......................................................................................................46908
No. 6909-#### CPU was reset. Abort the process. ........................................................................................46908
No. 6913-#### System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ............................................................46912
No. 6916-#### PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error. ..............................................................................46916
No. 6918-#### Failed to start the DLS. ...........................................................................................................46918
No. 6922-#### Device control error. ...............................................................................................................46922
Error: Compact Archive Unit ................................................................................................ 48360
No. 8361 Archive File read error. ....................................................................................................................48360
No. 8362 Archive File write error. ..................................................................................................................48362
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. .........................................................................................48362
No. 8364 Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ...........................................................................................48364
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000
No. 9000-#### Edit mode System error. ........................................................................................................49000
No. 9001-#### Edit mode Information file error. ..........................................................................................49000
No. 9002-#### Edit mode Image data error. ..................................................................................................49002
No. 9003-#### Edit mode Image read error. ..................................................................................................49002
4000 14/14
4001
Error and attention message regulation
Classification of errors and

attention messages
! Attention message
The message informed through the normal processing appears
as an attention message.
• When the replacement of consumable parts is necessary
• When the judgment of operator is necessary
• When a simple operation mistake has been made
! Error
The message informed when some abnormal error occurs
appears as an error.
• When there is something wrong with the machine
• When a serious operation mistake has been made,
performing the operation not allowed to be performed
4. Troubleshooting
! Error/Attention message number
Error/Attention message number are separated to main and
suffix numbers. In case of 1234-0001, 1234 is the main
number and 0001 is the suffix number.
Main number
It distinguishes the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging with the content of
the main number and the countermeasure.
Main number
Error 0001 to 4999
Attention message 5000 to 9999
Suffix number
It distinguishes error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurring condition
judging with the content of the suffix number and performs
the diagnosis.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, refer to Descriptions of
suffix number.
☞ 4002
4001 1/1
4002
Suffix number display For example, 3 is for the multiple condition of 1 and 2,
and 5 is for that of 4 and 1.
! The types of suffix number display ! How to determine the condition from
the total of bit operation
The procedure for bringing up the suffix number is classified
in the following three types. This section describes the procedure of determining the target
• Without suffix number condition from the displayed suffix number without the
knowledge of the bit operation theory.
• Displaying the condition with suffix number
• Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix number
1. Divide the displayed suffix number into each
digit.
! Without suffix number
NOTE
When the occurring condition is single • When the displayed suffix number is 13, it is
Example 1 divided into 1 and 3.
Suffix Condition 2. Replace them with the bits (1, 2, 4, 8)

number according to the object table below.
- The cover is opened. NOTE
• 1 → 1, 3 → 2 and 1
4. Troubleshooting
! Displaying the condition with suffix number (Object table)
When the occurring condition is multiple and only one of
Suffix number display Suffix number (bit)
them is the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number
appears with four digits. F 8 4 2 1
E 8 4 2
Example 2
D 8 4 1
Suffix Condition C 8 4
number
B 8 2 1
0001 The sensor has not turned to DARK.
A 8 2
0002 The sensor has not turned to LIGHT.
9 8 1
8 8
! Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix
number 7 4 2 1
6 4 2
When the occurring condition is multiple and some of them
are possible to be the objects of the occurring cause, the total 5 4 1
of the target suffix numbers (bit) appears. 4 4
NOTE 3 2 1
• The bit operation value appears by hexadecimal digit. 2 2
Example 3 1 1
0
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
(bit)
• It can be calculated by replacing the suffix number
0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. of hexadecimal digit with decimal and assigning it
0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. from the larger number.
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect. 3. Add 0 to the second digit or later to make the
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect. number of digits same as the original one.
0010 The sensor 5 does not detect. NOTE
• 1→10 (second digit), 2 and 1 are remained (first
NOTE digit).
• When the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects,
• For the second digit, add 0 once. For the third
0005 appears. When all the sensors are the objects, 001F
digit, add 0 two times.
appears.
• The suffix number (bit) assigned to each condition is
necessarily consisted of 1, 2, 4, 8 and 0.
As for the bit display, the other 3, 5, 6, 7... are used for
the multiple conditions.
4002 1/3
4002
(Example of determining) with the decimal digit and three digits with the
hexadecimal digit.
13 4C0 Thus, the number of digits can be less when there are
↓ ↓ more combinations which can be expressed as one digit.
Divide into each digit.
NOTE
1 3 4 C (12) 0
• A to F of the hexadecimal digit are handled as a number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
in the operation.
Replace with the suffix number of each condition.
(Conversion table)
1 2, 1 4 8, 4 Not in use
Return the number of digits by adding 0. Hexadecimal Decimal numeral Binary number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ numeral
10 2, 1 400 80, 40 Not in use 0 0 0
↓ ↓ 1 1 1
10, 2 and 1 400, 80 and 40 are the objects. 2 2 10
are the objects.
3 3 11
4 4 100
4. Check each condition by the target suffix 5 5 101
number (bit), and specify the occurring
6 6 110
condition.
4. Troubleshooting
7 7 111
NOTE
8 8 1000
• When the suffix number of 13 appears in the
condition of example 3, the numbers of 1, 2 and 9 9 1001
10 are the objects of the suffix numbers (bit). A 10 1010
From this, the occurring condition is recognized as B 11 1011
The sensors 1, 2 and 5 do not detect.
C 12 1100
Example 3 D 13 1101
Object Suffix Condition E 14 1110
number F 15 1111
(bit) 10 16 10000
$ 0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. FF 255 11111111
$ 0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. 3FF 1023 1111111111
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect.
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect.
Bit operation
$ 0010 The sensor 5 does not detect.
• When assigning sensor 1 of example 3 to the first digit
and sensor 2 to the second digit as in order, the bit
NOTE operation value is as follows in the case that only each
• To know more details of the bit operation mechanism, condition is ON.
refer to the following explanatory notes. This hexadecimal digit value is assigned as the bit of
single condition.
Digit When multiple conditions are the objects, the total bit
• Binary digit is the basic value of computer calculation assigned to each condition appears.
and expresses the state of ON and OFF of the signal.
Condition Suffix number (bit)
A digit of the binary digit is called as bit. It expresses two
types of numbers, 0 and 1, as one digit. Hexadecima Decimal Binary
When there are two types of bit (condition), it is l numeral numeral number
expressed by the binary digit with two digits and called as Sensor 1 1 1 1
2 bit. Sensor 2 2 2 10
• Decimal digit is generally used to express ten kinds of Sensor 3 4 4 100
numbers, 0 to 9, as one digit.
Sensor 4 8 8 1000
The combinations expressed as one digit are ten kinds.
Sensor 5 10 16 10000
• Hexadecimal digit is used to express 16 kinds of
numbers, 0 to F, as one digit. The combinations
expressed as one digit are 16 kinds.
• Each digit can be converted into other digits.
When there are ten types of conditions, it is 10 bit (ten
digits) by expressing with the binary digit, four digits
4002 2/3
4002
(Example) When the errors of sensors 1, 2 and 5

have occurred at the same time
Condition Suffix number (bit)
Hexadecimal Decimal Binary
numeral numeral number
Sensors 1, 2 and 5 13 19 10011
4. Troubleshooting
4002 3/3
4190
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Symptoms caused by poor wiring connection(s) (scanner section) [S-4]
Described for each model

The described place varies depending on the type of machine. See below for the description for each type of machine.
• For S-2/3, refer to ☞ 4200.
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each connector disconnected
(for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not connected.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a connector is
disconnected from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.
4. Troubleshooting
! Scanner section
Reference
☞ AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB
☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3) ☞ PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1)
☞ Scanner unit
! AFC/scanner control PCB

Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89010
Connector No. Symptom

J/P1 Connects to the film carrier The film ready lamp blinks in red.
relay connector (J17). No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. occurs.
relay connector (J16). No. 1405-19 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P3 Connects to the PM driver The film carrier does not feed the film.
(film feed motor). The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P5 Connects to the AFC/scanner No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
driver PCB.
J/P6 Connects to the scanner unit. The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . . while scanning.
J/P9 Inputs the power supply (+5 No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
V-1) from the multi power
supply (scanner) and the
power supply (+24 V-1) from
scanner power supply 2.
J/P11 Connects to the AFC/scanner No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. S-2/3 occurs.
driver PCB. After restarting, No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
Scanner type S-2/3 is displayed onscreen during System Version Check.
4190 1/4
4190

J/P18 Connects to the scanner unit. The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
IMPORTANT
• Zoom home sensor does not detect the scanner, causing zoom motor to overrun
and emit a strange sound. Zoom motor stops after a specified length of time.
The scanner will function normally if it is rebooted and initial operations are
performed after the connectors are plugged in properly.
J/P19 Connects to the AFC/scanner The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are being Adjusted.
driver PCB. When confirming LED Thermosensor in Input Check, the temperature does not change from
1.2°C.
J/P20 ARCNET No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. scanner AFC occurs soon after No. 1014
Connecting to D-ICE control The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears.
PCB
J/P21 ARCNET The buzzer sounds after No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . .
Connecting to D-ICE control appears, and then No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. D-ICE control PCB
PCB occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
! AFC/scanner driver PCB

J/P26 Connects to the AFC/scanner No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P27 Inputs power (+36 V-1) from LED does not light while the Order Display is onscreen.
scanner power supply 1. No.6332-0007 Light Source adjustment error. occurs during light source update.
B, G, R LED do not light during Output Check.
J/P28 Connects to control box Control box cooling fans stops.
cooling fans.
J/P29 Connects to the scanner unit. No. 6336-0002 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
J/P30 Supplies power (+5 V-2) to No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
the scanner unit.
J/P33 Connects to the AFC/scanner No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. S-2/3 occurs.
control PCB. After rebooting the system, No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB)
occurs.
Scanner type S-2/3 is displayed onscreen during System Version Check.
J/P37 Connects to the film carrier No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
lock sensor
J/P38 Connects to the film ready The film ready lamp turns off.
lamp.
J/P40 Connects to the power supply The power supply cooling fan stops.
cooling fan.
J/P41 Supplies power (+36 V-4) to No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
the film carrier relay
connector (J17).
J/P42 Supplies power (+5 V-2, +36 The film ready lamp lights in green.
V-4) to the PM driver (film The film carrier does not feed the film.
feed motor).
J/P43 Supplies power (+24 V-2) to The film cleaner stops operation.
the film cleaner.
J/P44 Connects to LED cooling fan LED cooling fan 2 stops.
2
J/P46 Connects to the film carrier Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
relay connector (J16) (GND).
J/P56 Connects to BG LED Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
(heater).
4190 2/4
4190

J/P57 Connects to LED cooling fan LED cooling fan 1 stops.
1
J/P64 Connects the ND filter No.6332-0007 Light Source adjustment error. occurs during light source update.
solenoid.
J/P65 Input the power supply (+5 No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
V-1) from multi power
supply (scanner) , (+36 V-1)
from scanner power supply 1
and (+24 V−1) from scanner
power supply 2.
J/P66 Connects to the AFC/scanner The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are being Adjusted.
control PCB. LED Thermosensor temperature at Input Check constantly reads 1.2° C; temperature does
not change.
J/P79 Connecting the LED light The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are being Adjusted.
source unit
J/P70 Connects to BG No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. occurs.
LED(thermosensor ).
J/P140 Connects to LED(B). No. 6322-0003 Scanner input balance error. occurs during light source update.
4. Troubleshooting
B LED does not light during Output Check.
J/P141 Connects to LED(G). No. 6332-0001 Light Source adjustment error. occurs during light source update.
G LED does not light during Output Check.
J/P142 Connects to LED(R1). No. 6322-0001 Scanner input balance error. occurs during light source update.
R1 LED does not light during Output Check.
J/P143 Connects to R LED(heater). Any malfunction does not occur on this condition.
J/P144 Connects to LED(IR). No. 6322-0004 Scanner input balance error. occurs during light source update.
! Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)


J/P90 AC power supply input The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P91 Supplies power (+36 V-1) to The film ready lamp blinks in red.
AFC/scanner driver PCB. No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.


J/P92 AC power supply input No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. occurs.
J/P93 Supplies power (+24 V-1) to No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error. occurs.
AFC/scanner driver PCB and No. 6336-0002 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
AFC/scanner control PCB.
! Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)


J/P94 AC power supply input No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
J/P95 Supplies power (+15 V-1) to No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
the scanner unit and Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
AFC/scanner driver PCB.
4190 3/4
4190
! PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1)


J/P127 Connects to the AFC/scanner The film carrier does not feed the film.
control PCB. The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P128 Inputs the power supply (+5 The film ready lamp lights in green.
V-2, +36 V-4) from the The film carrier does not feed the film.
AFC/scanner driver PCB.
J/P129 Connects to the film carrier The film ready lamp lights in green.
relay connector (J17). The film carrier does not feed the film.
! Scanner unit

J/P60 Connects to the D-ICE The system starts up normally. No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation
PCBs(LVDS) error. occurs when film scanning is started.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P62 Connects the AFC/scanner The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . . while scanning.
J/P69 control PCB. The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
IMPORTANT
• Zoom home sensor does not detect the scanner, causing zoom motor to overrun
and emit a strange sound. Zoom motor stops after a specified length of time.
The scanner will function normally if it is rebooted and initial operations are
performed after the connectors are plugged in properly.
J/P67 Connect to the AFC/scanner No. 6336-0002 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
J/P68 driver PCB. No. 6336-0001 Scanner Zoom operation error. occurs.
4190 4/4
4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (scanner section) [S-2/3]

• For S-4, refer to ☞ 4190.
! Condition for checking disconnection of connector

IMPORTANT
• As the symptom of disconnection of connector, only the symptom on each PCB of the triple paper magazine
specification is described.
the list.
4. Troubleshooting
! Scanner section
Reference
☞ AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB
☞ LED driver PCB ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)
☞ PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1) ☞ Scanner unit
! AFC/scanner control PCB

Connector No. Wiring diagram Symptom
J/P1 Connects to the film carrier ☞ S 4-1 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
relay connector. No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. occurs.
relay connector. No. 1405-19 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P3 Connects to the PM driver The film carrier does not feed the film.
(film feed motor). The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P5 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-1 No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
driver PCB.
J/P6 Connects to the scanner unit. ☞ S 1-4 The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . .
while scanning.
J/P7 For the LED light source unit ☞ S 1-6 The type of the LED light source unit is not displayed in System Version
types 1, 2 and 3: Connects to Check.
the R LED relay connector
J/P168.
J/P9 Power supply from multi ☞ S 1-2 No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
power supply (+5 V−1) and
scanner power supply 2 (+24
V−1)
J/P18 Connects to the scanner unit. ☞ S 12-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
J/P19 Connects to the LED driver ☞ S 12-3 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
PCB. being Adjusted.
4200 1/4
4200

J/P20 ARCNET ☞ - System No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
J/P21 ARCNET connection The message No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment
diagram please. . . appears and the system program does not starts.
No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control
PCB occurs.

J/P26 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-1 No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P27 Power supply from the multi ☞ S 1-2☞ S No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
power supply (scanner) (+5 12-1
V−1)
J/P28 Power supply from scanner The film ready lamp turns off.
power supply 1 (+36 V−1) The film carrier does not feed the film.
and scanner power supply 2
(+24 V−1)
4. Troubleshooting
J/P29 Connects to the scanner unit. ☞ S 12-2 No. 6306-0002 Scanner IRIS operation error. occurs.
J/P30 Connects to the scanner unit. No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
(+5 V−2)
J/P34 Jumper ☞ S 1-5 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
The film carrier does not feed the film.
J/P35 Jumper The film ready lamp blinks in red.
The film carrier does not feed the film.
J/P38 Connects to the film ready ☞ S 12-1 The film ready lamp turns off.
lamp and film carrier lock No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. occurs.
sensor.
J/P40 Power supply cooling fan, Power supply cooling fan or control box cooling fan 1, 2 stops.
control cooling fan 1, 2
J/P41 Connects to the film carrier ☞ S 1-8 No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
relay connector (+36 V−4).
J/P42 PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ S 1-3 The film ready lamp lights in green.
(+5 V−2, +36 V−4) The film carrier does not feed the film.
J/P43 Connects to the film cleaner ☞ S 1-5 The film cleaner stops operation.
(+24 V−2).
J/P46 Connects to the film carrier ☞ S 1-8 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
relay connector.
! LED driver PCB

J/P56 Connects to the LED light ☞ S 12-4 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
source unit. being Adjusted.
J/P57 Connects to LED cooling LED cooling fans 1 and 2 stop operations.
fans 1 and 2.
J/P64 Connects to the ND filter No malfunction occurs on this condition.
solenoid.
J/P65 Power supply from multi ☞ S 1-2 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
power supply (scanner) (+5 being Adjusted.
V−1), scanner power supply 1
(+5 V−1), scanner power
supply 2 (+24 V−1)
4200 2/4
4200

J/P66 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-3 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
control PCB. being Adjusted.
J/P70 Connects to the LED light No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment
source unit. error. occurs.
J/P79 Connects to the LED light ☞ S 12-4 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
source unit. being Adjusted.

J/P90 ☞ CS 1-1☞ S The film ready lamp blinks in red.
1-2 No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
J/P91 Supplies the power to ☞ S 1-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
AFC/Scanner driver PCB No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
(+36 V−1) and LED driver
PCB (+36 V−1).
4. Troubleshooting
J/P92 ☞ CS 1-1☞ S No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment
1-2 error. occurs.
J/P93 Supplies the power to ☞ S 1-2 No. 6327-0002 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment
AFC/Scanner driver PCB error. occurs.
(+24 V−1), AFC/Scanner
control PCB (+24 V−1) and
LED driver PCB (+24 V−1).

J/P94 ☞ CS 1-1☞ S No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
1-2 Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
J/P95 Supplies the power to scanner ☞ S 1-2 No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
unit (+15 V−1), Film Set Feeder cannot be used. is displayed.
AFC/Scanner driver PCB (+5
V−1) and LED driver PCB
(+5 V−1).
! PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1)

J/P127 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 4-1 The film carrier does not feed the film.
control PCB. The film ready lamp blinks in green.
J/P128 Connects to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 1-8☞ S 4- The film ready lamp lights in green.
driver PCB. 1 The film carrier does not feed the film.
J/P129 Connects to the film carrier ☞ S 4-1 The film ready lamp lights in green.
relay connector. The film carrier does not feed the film.
! Scanner unit
J/P60 Connecting to the LVDS and ☞ - System No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
D-ICE PCBs connection occurs.
diagram
4200 3/4
4200

J/P62 Connects the AFC/scanner ☞ S 1-4 The operation is not proceeded with the message, One moment please. . .
control PCB. while scanning.
J/P69 ☞ S 12-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
J/P67 Connect to the AFC/scanner ☞ S 12-2 No. 6306-0002 Scanner IRIS operation error. occurs.
J/P68 driver PCB. No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
4200 4/4
4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section)

IMPORTANT
• Symptom for the PC is not mentioned.
• As for the optional PCBs, only some of them are described about.
the list.
4. Troubleshooting
! Desk section
Reference
☞ Image processing PCB ☞ Image correction PCB
☞ D−ICE control PCB ☞ D−ICE PCB
☞ DIMM ☞ Scratch mend PCB 2
☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] ☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]
☞ Data change-over PCB ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB
☞ Power PCB ☞ Desk power supply 1
☞ Desk power supply 2
! Image processing PCB

J/P155 Connects to the image ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6822-0040 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
correction PCB. occurs.
J/P442 ARCNET ☞ CS 1-2 No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs
Connecting to D-ICE control and the system program does not start.
PCB No. 6901-0080 ARCNET communication error. Image Processing PCB
occurs.
J/P443 ARCNET No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control
Connecting to D-ICE control PCB occurs.
PCB
J/P444 Power supply from desk ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6901-0080 ARCNET communication error. Image Processing PCB
power supply 1 (+5 V−1) occurs.
J/P445 Connects to PCI- No. 6822-0002 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
LVDS/ARCNET PCB for occurs while scanning.
compact archive unit
(LVDS).
J/P450 Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
occurs while scanning.
J/P455 Connects to the laser control No. 6087-0003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs while printing.
PCB (LVDS). Then No. 6900-0800 Main control system error. and 6822-0008 Image
Processing PCB Image data operation error. occur.
The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.
J/P456 Connects to PCI- No. 6902-0002 LVDS communication error. Image Processing PCB
LVDS/ARCNET PCB occurs.
(LVDS).
4201 1/5
4201
! Image correction PCB

Connector No. Wiring Symptom
diagram
J/P154 Power supply from desk ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6822-0040 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
power supply 1 (+5 V−1) occurs.
J/P155 Connects to the image No. 6822-0040 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
processing PCB. occurs.
J/P1363 Memory - No. 6822-0003 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
J/P1364 Memory - occurs when carrying out 1 frame magnification processing for the scanned
image.
! D−ICE control PCB

J/P45 Connects to D-ICE PCB. ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6640-4000 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) occurs.
No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P50 Power supply from desk No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs
power supply 1 (+5 V−1) and the system program does not start.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE
Control PCB occurs.
J/P51 Connects to the PC. ☞ CS 2-1☞ CS No. 6900-0001 Main control system error. occurs while printing.
2-2
J/P52 Connects to the buzzer. ☞ CS 2-1 The buzzer does not sound.
J/P53 Connects the ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs
printer control PCB. and the system program does not start.
Control PCB occurs.
J/P54 Connects the ARCNET No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section
printer control PCB. Processor LASER occurs.
J/P71 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs
Connects the AFC/scanner and the system program does not start.
control PCB. No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
Connects the AFC/scanner and the system program does not start.
control PCB. No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control
PCB occurs.
J/P73 ARCNET No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control
Connects the image PCB occurs.
processing PCB.
Connects the image and the system program does not start.
processing PCB. No. 6901-0080 ARCNET communication error. Image Processing PCB
occurs.
Connects the PC control unit. and the system program does not start.
Control PCB occurs.
Connects the PC control unit. and the system program does not start.
Control PCB occurs.
J/P158 Inputs the power supply (+24 ☞ CS 1-3 The PC does not start automatically.
V-4) from printer I/O PCB 1. Any malfunction does not occur on this condition after starting up the PC
forcibly.
4201 2/5
4201
! D−ICE PCB
J/P45 Connects to D-ICE control ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6640-4000 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) occurs.
PCB. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P436 Connects to LVDS and ☞ - System No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
scanner section. connection occurs.
diagram
J/P437 Power supply from disk ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6640-4000 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) occurs.
power supply 1 (+5 V−1) No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P438 Connects to the image ☞ CS 2-1 No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.
processing PCB. occurs while scanning.
J/P480 Connects to DIMM. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P483 Connects to the scratch mend No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
PCB 2.
PCB1 [J484 A]
PCB1 [J484 A]
4. Troubleshooting
J/P486 Connects to the data change- No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P487 over PCB.
! DIMM
J/P480 Connects to D-ICE PCB. ☞ CS 2-1 No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
! Scratch mend PCB 2

! Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A]

J/P484A Connects to D-ICE PCB. ☞ CS 2-1 No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
! Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]

! Data change-over PCB

J/P487
! Colorimeter Control PCB

J/P180 Power supply from desk ☞ CS 1-3 No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
power supply 2 (+24 V−1)
J/P181 Connects to the paper sensor ☞ CS 2-4 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate
(LED PCB). advance error. occurs.
4201 3/5
4201

J/P182 Connects to the paper sensor ☞ CS 2-4 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate
1 and 2 (detection PCB). advance error. occurs.
J/P183 Connects to the colorimeter. ☞ CS 2-1☞ CS No. 6903-0002 Serial communication error. Colorimeter occurs.
J/P184 Connects to the PC. 2-4 No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
J/P185 Connects to the paper ☞ CS 2-4 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0001 Calibration Plate
advance motor. advance error. occurs.
J/P186 Connects to the pressure When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0006 Calibration Plate
change solenoid. advance error. occurs.
! Power PCB
J/P99 Supplies the power from the ☞ CS 1-1 The input section does not activate because power is not supplied to the desk
earth leakage circuit breaker. section.
J/P100 Jumper No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P101 Supplies the power to the The monitor is not turned on.
monitor and ATX power The PC does not start.
supply.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P102 Supplies the power to the ☞ CS 1-1☞ - The scanner section does not operate.
scanner section. System No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
connection
diagram
J/P104 Supplies the power to the ☞ CS 1-1 No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE
desk power supply 1 and 2. Control PCB occurs.
No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs
and the system program does not start.
The control unit cooling fan and D-ICE cooling fan do not rotate.
! Desk power supply 1

J/P112 Power supply from the ☞ CS 1- No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE
power PCB. 1☞ CS 1-2 Control PCB occurs.
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and
the system program does not start.
J/P121 Supplies the power (+5 V−1) ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE
to the D-ICE PCB, D-ICE Control PCB occurs.
control PCB, image No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and
processing PCB, and image the system program does not start.
correction PCB .
J/P122 Supplies the power to the D- ☞ CS 1-2 No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE
ICE PCB, D-ICE control Control PCB occurs.
PCB, image processing No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and
PCB, and image correction the system program does not start.
PCB (GND).
! Desk power supply 2

diagram
J/P113 Power supply from the ☞ CS 1- No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
power PCB. 1☞ CS 1-3 No. 6901-0100 ARCNET communication error. PU occurs.
4201 4/5
4201

diagram
J/P153 Supplies the power to the ☞ CS 1-3 No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
colorimeter control PCB, D- No. 6901-0100 ARCNET communication error. PU occurs.
ICE control PCB, control
unit cooling fan, and D-ICE
PCB cooling fan (+24 V−1).
4. Troubleshooting
4201 5/5
4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section)

IMPORTANT
the list.
! Printer section
4. Troubleshooting
Reference
☞ Printer control PCB ☞ Laser control PCB
☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2
☞ Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ Triple magazine PCB
☞ Laser I/O PCB ☞ B laser driver
☞ G laser driver ☞ CVP PCB
☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS3) ☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4)
☞ Laser power supply (PS5) ☞ B-AOM driver
☞ G-AOM driver ☞ R-AOM driver
! Printer control PCB

J/P200 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LP 1-1 No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
PCB 1.
J/P201 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LP 3-3 No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P202 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LP 3-2 No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
PCB 3.
J/P203 Connects to the printer I/O No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
PCB 3.
J/P204 Connects to the triple ☞ LP 3-16 No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
magazine PCB.
PCB 2.
PCB 3.
J/P208 Connects to the triple ☞ LP 3-16 No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
magazine PCB.
PCB 3.
J/P210 Connects to the CVP PCB. ☞ LP 3-15 The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P211 Connects to the magazine ☞ LP 3-2 All the magazine code sensors B and C turn DARK.
code sensor.
4202 1/9
4202

J/P212 Connects to the laser control ☞ LP 2-9 The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.
PCB.
J/P218 Power supply from the multi ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section
power supply (printer) (+5 V) Processor LASER occurs.
J/P219 ARCNET ☞ LP 2-3 No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs
Connecting to the laser and the system program does not start.
control PCB No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control
PCB occurs.
J/P220 ARCNET No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
Connecting to the laser
control PCB
J/P221 ARCNET ☞ - System No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section
Connecting to D-ICE control connection Processor LASER occurs.
PCB diagram
Connecting to D-ICE control and the system program does not start.
PCB No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE
Control PCB occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P223 ARCNET ☞ LP 2-3 No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the processor
control PCB.
J/P224 ARCNET No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the processor
control PCB.
! Laser control PCB

J/P1501 Connects to the B-AOM ☞ LP 2-9 The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1503 Connects to the R-AOM No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white
driver. prints are made.
J/P1505 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-3 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
multi power supply (printer) adjusted. (U).
(+12 V)
J/P1506 Power supply from the No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
multi power supply (printer)
(+5 V)
J/P1508 Connects to the B, G and R- ☞ LP 3-13 No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs after the message, Laser
AOM drivers. temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1511 Connects to the laser I/O ☞ LP 3-11 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
PCB. adjusted. (R) after the message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.
Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1512 Connects to the laser I/O The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
PCB. adjusted. after the message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.
J/P1513 Connects to the image ☞ - System No. 6087-0003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs while printing.
processing PCB (LVDS). connection Then No. 6900-0800 Main control system error. and 6822-0008 Image
diagram Processing PCB Image data operation error. occur.
The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LP 3-11 No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs after the message, Laser
temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
4202 2/9
4202

J/P1516 ARCNET ☞ LP 2-3 No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
Connects the printer control
PCB.
Connects the printer control and the system program does not start.
PCB. No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control
PCB occurs.
J/P1519 Connects to the B and G ☞ LP 3-14 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
laser drivers. adjusted.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer ☞ LP 2-3 The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.
control PCB.
J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit ☞ LP 3-11 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
and inner thermosensor. adjusted. (U).
! Printer I/O PCB 1

J/P232 Connects to the counter. ☞ LP 3-1 The counter stops operation.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P233 Connects to the paper The paper advance unit cooling fan stops operation.
advance unit cooling fan.
J/P234 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LP 1-2 The control box cooling fans 2, 3 and 4 stop operations.
PCB 3.
J/P235 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-2 The counter, paper advance section cooling fan, inner cooling fan, control
printer power supply 3 (+24 box cooling fans 1, 2, 3, and 4 stop operations.
V)
J/P237 Supplies the power to the ☞ LP 1-1 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation
printer power supplies 1, 2 error. occurs.
and 3.
J/P238 Power supply from the No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation
processor section error. occurs.
J/P239 Connects to the interlock No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
switch (printer door 2).
J/P240 Connects to the interlock No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
switch (printer door 1).
J/P241 Connects to the laser I/O No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
PCB.
PCB 2 and paper end sensor
B.
J/P245 Connects to the printer ☞ LP 1-1 No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P246 Connects to the triple ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
magazine PCB.
J/P247 Power supply from the multi ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation
power supply (printer) (+5 error. occurs.
V)
J/P248 Connects to the exposure ☞ LP 3-6 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation
advance pressure change error. occurs.
motors 1 and 2.
J/P249 Connects to the exposure ☞ LP 3-5 No. 6017-0001 Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs while
advance motors 1 and 2. printing.
J/P250 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-2 No. 6013-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001
magazine motors 1 and 2. Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs while printing.
4202 3/9
4202

J/P251 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation
printer power supply 1 (+24 error. occurs.
V)
J/P252 Connects to the processor No. 6101-0001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
I/O PCB 2.
J/P253 Connects to the triple No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while
magazine PCB. printing.
J/P254 Power supply from the No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001
printer power supply 2 (+36 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not
V) load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs while printing.
J/P255 Connects to the CVP PCB. The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P256 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-7 No. 6017-0003 Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs while
advance motor 2 and printing.
pressure guide motor.
J/P257 Connects to the inner ☞ LP 3-1 The inner cooling fan and control box cooling fan 1 stop operations.
cooling fan and control box
cooling fan 1.
4. Troubleshooting
! Printer I/O PCB 2
J/P258 Connects to the cut motor. ☞ LP 3-3 No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs while printing.
J/P259 Connects to the paper hold ☞ LP 3-4 No.6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and paper hold
sensor.
J/P260 Connects to the paper No. 6134-0002 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error.
supply pressure change occurs.
motor and paper supply
pressure change sensor.
J/P261 Connects to the cut home ☞ LP 3-3 No. 6021-0004 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor, cut end sensor and
paper loading sensor.
J/P262 Connects to the printer No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
control PCB.
PCB 1.
J/P264 Connects to the printer I/O No. 6101-0001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
PCB 1.
advance motor 1. printing.
J/P266 Connects to the paper No. 6135-0001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
supply motor B/C and paper
supply arm motor (right).
J/P267 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-3 No. 6012-0002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while
supply motor A. printing.
J/P268 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-4 No. 6135-0001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
supply arm motor (left).
4202 4/9
4202
! Printer I/O PCB 3

J/P271 Connects to the lane select ☞ LP 3-9 No. 6142-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation
motor (left) and paper error. occurs.
advance pressure change
motor (left).
J/P272 Connects to the lane select No. 6143-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right)
motor (right) and paper operation error. occurs.
motor (right).
J/P273 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-8 No. 6138-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
advance arm motor (left) occurs.
and paper advance arm No. 6139-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.
motor (right). occurs.
advance motor 3. printing.
J/P275 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6138-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
printer power supply 1 (+24 occurs.
V)
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6139-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.
occurs.
J/P276 Connects to the control box ☞ LP 3-1 The control box cooling fans 2, 3 and 4 stop operations.
cooling fans 2, 3 and 4.
J/P277 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LP 1-2 The control box cooling fans 2, 3 and 4 stop operations.
PCB 1.
J/P278 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-1 Paper magazine lamp B/C does not turn ON.
magazine lamp B/C.
J/P279 Connects to the printer ☞ LP 3-2 No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P280 Connects to the printer No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P281 Connects to the paper end No. 6021-0003 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensors B and C.
J/P282 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-10 No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensors 2 (left, center and
right).
J/P283 Connects to the paper sensor ☞ LP 3-7 No. 6021-0006 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
1 and pressure guide sensor.
J/P284 Connects to the zigzagging ☞ LP 3-5 No. 6021-0005 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
correction sensors (left and
right), exposure start sensor,
exposure advance pressure
change sensors 1 and 2.
J/P285 Power supply from the multi ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
power supply (printer) (+5
V)
J/P286 Connects to the arm sensors ☞ LP 3-8 No. 6138-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
(left and right). occurs.
occurs.
J/P287 Connects to the lane select ☞ LP 3-10 No. 6142-0002 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation
sensor (left) and paper error. occurs.
sensor (left).
J/P288 Connects to the lane select No. 6143-0002 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right)
sensor (right) and paper operation error. occurs.
sensor (right).
4202 5/9
4202
! Triple magazine PCB

J/P295 Connects to the paper ☞ LP 3-16 No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while
magazine motor A. printing.
J/P296 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp A does not turn ON.
magazine lamp A.
J/P297 Connects to the printer door No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
3 sensor.
J/P298 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A turn DARK.
magazine code sensor A.
J/P299 Connects to the paper end No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A.
PCB 1.
J/P301 Connects to the printer ☞ LP 3-16 No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB.
! Laser I/O PCB
4. Troubleshooting
J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LP 3-11 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
adjusted. (R) after the message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.
J/P1533 Connects to the interlock ☞ LP 1-1☞ LP No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
switch (printer top cover). 3-13
J/P1534 Connects to the printer I/O No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
PCB 1.
J/P1535 Power supply from the multi ☞ LP 1-3 No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs after the message,
power supply (printer) (+5 Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
V)
J/P1536 Connects to the laser control ☞ LP 3-11 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
PCB. adjusted. (R) after the message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.
J/P1538 Connects to the laser control The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
PCB. adjusted. after the message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.
J/P1539 Connects to the laser unit. No. 6076-0001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs after the message,
Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1540 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LP 3-12 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P1541 Power supply from the laser ☞ LP 1-3 No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
power supply (+24 V)
J/P1542 Connects to the B-AOM ☞ LP 3-13 The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1544 Connects to the R-AOM No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white
driver. prints are made.
J/P1549 Connects to the B and G ☞ LP 3-14 No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. or No. 6106 G Laser light
laser drivers. source status error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures are
being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1550 Power supply from the multi ☞ LP 1-3 The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
power supply (printer) (+12 adjusted. (R) after the message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.
V) Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1551 Connects to the laser unit ☞ LP 3-11 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
heater.
4202 6/9
4202
! B laser driver
J/P1653 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LP 2-9 The print whose color is blue only is made.
J/P1654 Connects to the laser control No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs after the message,
PCB. Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1655 Connects to the laser I/O No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs after the message,
! G laser driver
J/P1663 Connects to the laser unit. ☞ LP 2-9 No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs after the message,
Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1664 Connects to the laser control No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs after the message,
J/P1665 Connects to the laser I/O No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs after the message,
4. Troubleshooting
! CVP PCB
J/P500 Connects to the printer ☞ LP 3-15 The CVP unit does not operate.
control PCB.
J/P501 Connects to the printer I/O ☞ LP 1-2 The CVP unit does not operate.
PCB 1.
J/P502 Connects to the dot head and ☞ LP 3-15 The CVP unit does not operate.
ribbon advance motor.
! Printer power supply 1 (PS1)

J/P422 Supplies the power to the ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1
printer I/O PCBs 1 and 3 operation error. occurs.
(+24 V).
J/P428 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-1 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1
printer I/O PCB 1 operation error. occurs.

J/P420 Supplies power (+36 V) to the ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001
printer I/O PCB 1. Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not
load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs while printing.
J/P421 Supplies power (+36 V) to the No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001
printer I/O PCB 1. Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not
J/P430 Power supply from the printer ☞ LP 1-1 No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001
I/O PCB 1 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not

J/P424 Supplies power (+24 V) to ☞ LP 1-2 The counter, paper advance section cooling fan, inner cooling fan, control
the printer I/O PCB 1. box cooling fans 1, 2, 3, and 4 stop operations.
4202 7/9
4202

J/P431 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-1 The counter, paper advance section cooling fan, inner cooling fan, control
printer I/O PCB 1 box cooling fans 1, 2, 3, and 4 stop operations.
! Multi power supply (printer) (PS4)

J/P418 Supplies the power to the ☞ LP 1-3☞ LP No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section
printer I/O PCBs 1 and 3, 2-2 Processor LASER occurs.
printer control PCB, laser
I/O PCB and laser control
PCB (+5 V).
J/P419 Supplies the power to the The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being
laser I/O PCB and laser adjusted. (U).
control PCB (+12 V).
J/P432 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-1 No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section
processor section Processor LASER occurs.
! Laser power supply (PS5)
4. Troubleshooting
J/P433 Power supply from the ☞ LP 1-1 No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
processor section
J/P1614 Supplies the power to the No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
laser I/O PCB (+24 V).
J/P1615 Supplies the power to the No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
laser I/O PCB (+24 V).
! B-AOM driver
J/P1631 Connects to the laser control ☞ LP 3-13 The print whose color is blue only is made.
PCB.
J/P1632 Connects to the laser unit. The print whose color is blue only is made.
J/P1633 Connects to the laser I/O The print whose color is blue only is made.
PCB.
J/P1634 Connects to the laser control The print whose color is blue only is made.
PCB.
! G-AOM driver
J/P1636 Connects to the laser control ☞ LP 3-13 The print whose color is green only is made.
PCB.
J/P1637 Connects to the laser unit. The print whose color is green only is made.
J/P1638 Connects to the laser I/O The print whose color is green only is made.
PCB.
J/P1639 Connects to the laser control The print whose color is green only is made.
PCB.
4202 8/9
4202
! R-AOM driver
J/P1641 Connects to the laser control ☞ LP 3-13 No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white
PCB. prints are made.
J/P1642 Connects to the laser unit. No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white
prints are made.
J/P1643 Connects to the laser I/O No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white
J/P1644 Connects to the laser control No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white
4. Troubleshooting
4202 9/9
4203
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor)

IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from disconnection of connector is described only QSS-3203 (triple magazine specification) of each
PCB.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
the list.
4. Troubleshooting
! Processor section
Reference
☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Processor I/O PCB
☞ Processor relay PCB ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS3)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB2) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 (NFB3)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 (NFB4)
! Processor control PCB

J/P510 Connects to the processor I/O ☞ PP 3-4 No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
PCB. No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF
STB occurs.
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P511 Connects to the processor ☞ PP 2-1 No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
relay PCB. No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
occurs.
J/P512 Connects to the CD digital ☞ PP 3-3 No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
flowmeter.
J/P513 Print sensor, dryer select ☞ PP 3-9 No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs while
sensor printing.
J/P514 +5 V, +24 V ☞ PP 1-2 No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P515 Connects to the drive motor. ☞ PP 3-7 No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P516 Connects to the processing ☞ PP 3-8 No. 5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. occurs.
solution temperature sensor, No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
dryer temperature sensor.
4203 1/5
4203

P517 ARCNET ☞ LP 2-3 No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the printer
control PCB.
P518 ARCNET No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the printer
control PCB.
J/P519 Connects to the drive motor. ☞ PP 3-7 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
! Processor I/O PCB

J/P670 Rack stopper sensor ☞ PP 3-3 No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
J/P673 Hour meter The hour meter does not operate.
J/P674 24 V−1−1, 24 V−1−2, 24 V− ☞ PP 1-2☞ PP No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
3 2-1 No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P677 Connects to the CD ☞ PP 3-1 No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
circulation pump. No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
J/P678 Connects to the BF No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P679 Connects to the STB1 No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
circulation pump.
circulation pump.
circulation pump.
circulation pump.
J/P683 Connects to the ☞ PP 3-4☞ PP No malfunction occurs on this condition.
replenishment pump and 3-5
water supply pump.
J/P685 Connects to the refilling ☞ PP 3-5 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
water pump.
J/P686 Connects to the drive motor ☞ PP 3-7 The drive motor cooling fan, tank cooling fans 1, 2 and 3 stop operations.
cooling fan, tank cooling fans
1, 2 and 3.
J/P687 Connects to the effluent float ☞ PP 3-6 No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
switch.
J/P688 Connects to the ☞ PP 3-5 No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
replenishment solution level No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD
sensor and refilling water BF STB occurs.
tank level sensor.
J/P689 Connects to the processor ☞ PP 1-1 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
relay PCB (24 V).
J/P690 Power supply from processor ☞ PP 1-2 No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
power supply 2 (+24 V) No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD
BF STB occurs.
occurs.
J/P694 Connects to the processor ☞ PP 3-10 The processor condition lamp does not turn on.
condition lamp.
4203 2/5
4203

J/P695 Connects to the conveyor ☞ PP 3-11 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
unit.
J/P696 Connects to the dryer ☞ PP 3-9 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
selection solenoid.
J/P697 Connects to the sorter unit. ☞ PP 1-2 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P698 Power supply from processor ☞ PP 1-2☞ PP No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
power supply 1 (+5 V) 3-5 No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD
BF STB occurs.
J/P699 Connects to the processor ☞ PP 2-3 No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
control PCB. No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD
BF STB occurs.
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
! Processor relay PCB
diagram
J/P641 Connects to the processor I/O ☞ PP 1-1 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
PCB (24 V).
J/P643 Supplies the power to the All the systems do not start.
processor power supplies 1, 2
and 3.
J/P644 Connects to the dryer fan. ☞ PP 3-8 The dryer fan does not rotate.
J/P646 Supplies the power to the ☞ -System Starts up the processor only
printer. connection
diagram☞ PP
1-1
J/P648 Connects to the processor ☞ PP 2-1 No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
control PCB. No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
occurs.
J/P649 Connects to the power supply ☞ PP 3-3 The power supply cooling fan stops operation.
cooling fan.
J/P650 Connects to the processing ☞ PP 2-1 No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
solution float switch. No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
J/P651 Connects to the interlock ☞ PP 3-7 No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
switch (dryer cover).
J/P652 Connects to the interlock No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
switch (processor top cover).
J/P653 Connects to the dryer safety ☞ PP 3-10 No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P654 Connects to the processor I/O ☞ PP 2-1☞ PP No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
PCB. 1-1 No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
J/P655 Connects to the drive motor. ☞ PP 3-7 No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
4203 3/5
4203

diagram
J/P656 Power supply from the printer ☞ PP 1-2 Starts up the processor only
power supply 3 (+24 V)
J/P657 Connects to the dryer heater. ☞ PP 3-8 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P659
J/P660
J/P662 Connects to the processing ☞ PP 3-1 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
solution heater.
J/P663 Jumper ☞ PP 1-1 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
! Processor power supply 1 (PS1)

diagram
J/P791 Power supply from the ☞ PP 1- No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor relay PCB 1☞ PP 1-2
J/P792 Supplies the power to the ☞ PP 1-2
processor control PCB (+24
4. Troubleshooting
V) and processor I/O PCB
(+5 V).

diagram
J/P793 Power supply from the ☞ PP 1-2 No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
processor relay PCB No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF
STB occurs.
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
No. 5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
occurs.
J/P794 Supplies the power to the ☞ PP 1-2 No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
processor control PCB (+24 No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF
V) and processor I/O PCB STB occurs.
(+24 V).
occurs.
4203 4/5
4203

diagram
J/P795 Supplies the power to the ☞ PP 1-2 No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
processor control PCB (+24 No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF
V) and processor I/O PCB STB occurs.
(+24 V).
occurs.

diagram
J/P796 Power supply from the ☞ PP 1-2 Starts up the processor only
4. Troubleshooting
processor relay PCB
J/P797 Supplies the power to the ☞ PP 1-2 Starts up the processor only
processor relay PCB (+24 V).
J/P798 Supplies the power to the Starts up the processor only
processor relay PCB (+24 V).
! Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB2)

diagram
Power supply from TA2 to TA3 ☞ PP 1- No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the CD, BF and
1☞ PP 3- STB heaters turns to OFF.))
1☞ PP 3-8

diagram
Power supply from TA2 to TA3 ☞ PP 1- No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater
1☞ PP 3-8 turns to OFF.))

diagram
Power supply from TA2 to TA3 ☞ PP 1-1 All the systems do not start.
4203 5/5
4240
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-4]

• For S-2/3, refer to ☞ 4250.
! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the list below, the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this machine is turned ON with each fuse removed (for
example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like) are explained.
IMPORTANT
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time for a fuse.
! Scanner section
Reference
4. Troubleshooting
☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
+5 V-1 input power supply
from multi power supply
scanner)
F2 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The film ready lamp turns off.
+24 V-1 input power supply The film carrier does not feed the film.
from scanner power supply 2)
F3 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The film ready lamp blinks in red.
+36 V-1 input power supply No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
from scanner power supply 1)
F4 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 1410 Verify the film stop position appears.
+36 V-1 input power supply The image is not shown at the Film Stop Position screen and is still grayed out when it is moved
from scanner power supply 1) to the PJP screen.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
V power supply protection)

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
4240 1/2
4240

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T2.5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
240 V power supply
protection)
4. Troubleshooting
4240 2/2
4250
Symptoms caused by fuse blowout (scanner section) [S-2/S-3]

• For S-4, refer to ☞ 4240.

IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from blowout of fuse is described only QSS-3203 (triple magazine specification) of each PCB.
! Scanner section
4. Troubleshooting
Reference
☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ LED driver PCB
☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3)

Fuse No. Wiring diagram Symptom
F26 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +36 V−1 ☞ S 1-2 The film ready lamp blinks in red.
power supply protection) No. 1405-9F Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. occurs.
F27 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−2 The film ready lamp turns off.
power supply protection) The film carrier does not feed the film.
F28 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +5 V−1 ☞ S 1-8 No. 6429-0001 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB) occurs.
power supply protection)
! LED driver PCB

Fuse No. Wiring Symptom
diagram
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +5 V−1 ☞ S 1-2 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
power supply protection) being Adjusted.
F2 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +24 V−1 The message does not change from LED Light Source Temperatures are
power supply protection) being Adjusted.
F3 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +35 V−1 The LED light source unit does not turn on.
power supply protection) No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. or No. 1420
Select the DX code. occurs while film scanning.

diagram
F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 ☞ S 1-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
4250 1/2
4250

diagram
F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to 240 ☞ S 1-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.

diagram
F1 T2.5 AH/250 V (AC 200 to ☞ S 1-2 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
240 V power supply
protection)
4. Troubleshooting
4250 2/2
4251
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (desk section)

IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from blowout of fuse is described only the triple magazine of each PCB.
• Symptom for the PC is not mentioned.
! Desk section
Reference
☞ Keyboard switch PCB ☞ Power PCB
☞ Desk power supply 1 (PS2) ☞ Desk power supply 2 (PS3)
4. Troubleshooting
! Keyboard switch PCB
diagram
F24 T3.15/125 V (ATX power ☞ CS 1-4 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
supply protection)
! Power PCB
diagram
FL1 T5 A/250 V (Surge ☞ CS 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection)
FL2 T5 A/250 V (Surge This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection)
! Desk power supply 1 (PS2)

diagram
F1 T6.3 AH/250 V (AC 200 V ☞ CS 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
! Desk power supply 2 (PS3)

diagram
F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 V ☞ CS 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
4251 1/1
4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section)

IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from blowout of fuse is described only the triple magazine of each PCB.
! Printer section
Reference
☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3
☞ Laser I/O PCB ☞ CVP PCB
4. Troubleshooting
☞ Multi power supply (printer) ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS3)
☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4) ☞ Laser power supply (PS5)
! Printer I/O PCB 1

F32 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−1 ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1
power supply protection) operation error. occurs.
F33 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−2 No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +24 V−1 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
F35 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +36 V No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001
power supply protection) Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not
! Printer I/O PCB 3

F37 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−3 ☞ LP 1-2 No. 6138-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
power supply protection) occurs.
occurs.
F38 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−4 No. 6142-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left)
No. 6143-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right)
operation error. occurs.
4252 1/2
4252
! Laser I/O PCB

diagram
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +24 V−1 ☞ LP 1-3 No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs after the message, Laser
power supply protection) temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
F2 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−2 No. 6076-0001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs after the message,
power supply protection) Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
F3 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−3 No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
! CVP PCB
F25 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +36 V−1 ☞ LP 1-2 The CVP unit does not operate.
! Multi power supply (printer)
4. Troubleshooting
diagram
F1 AC 200 V power supply ☞ LP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
protection

diagram
protection

protection

protection
! Multi power supply (printer) (PS4)

protection
! Laser power supply (PS5)

protection
4252 2/2
4253
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section)

IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from blowout of fuse is described only QSS-3203 (triple magazine specification) of each PCB.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
! Processor section
Reference
☞ Processor I/O PCB ☞ Processor relay PCB
☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2)
4. Troubleshooting
☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS3)
! Processor I/O PCB

diagram
F14 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V ☞ PP 1-2☞ PP No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
power supply protection) 4-1 No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF
STB occurs.
occurs.
F15 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
power supply protection) No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.
occurs.
F16 T3.15 A/125 V ☞ PP 3-4 No malfunction occurs on this condition.
! Processor relay PCB

diagram
FL1 T5 A/250 V (Protection ☞ PP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
circuit for power surges)
FL2 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.
F1 T10 A/250 V (dryer heater) ☞ PP 3-8 The dryer heater does not operate.
F2 T10 A/250 V (processing ☞ PP 3-2 The processing solution heater does not operate.
solution heater)
F4 T6.3 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
4253 1/2
4253

diagram
F5 T3.15 A/250 V (CD heater) ☞ PP 3-2 The CD heater does not operate.
F6 T3.15 A/250 V (BF heater) The BF heater does not operate.
F7 T5 A/250 V (STB heater) The STB heater does not operate.
F9 T6.3 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F10 T5 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F11 T15 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F12 T3.15 A/250 V (dryer fan) The dryer fan does not operate.
F13 T6.3 A/250 V (DC +24 V ☞ PP 1-2 No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
power supply protection) No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
F14 T6.3 A/250 V (DC +24 V The system does not start.

diagram
F1 ☞ PP 1-1 This fuse has not been checked since it cannot be removed.

diagram

diagram
4253 2/2
4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear
from the order display.
NOTE
• The message No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please... appears when some operation with exposure is
carried out while the message is displayed. ☞ 41042
• The messages for laser temperature adjustment in the order display appear in order of Laser temperatures are being
adjusted.Approx.##sec, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U), Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R).
• Laser temperatures are being adjusted. If the message, (U) does not disappear, refer to ☞ Specifying the occurring cause: Laser
temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears.
• Laser temperatures are being adjusted. If the message, (R) does not disappear, refer to ☞ Specifying the occurring cause: Laser
temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.
• Processable range of the laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• Processable range of the R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• Measure the voltage of TP (ground) on each PCB for ground described in the flow chart.
! Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears.
4. Troubleshooting
Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears.
Reset the power supply and restart the system.
YES
The display of Laser temperatures are being adjusted. has disappeared.
NO
Less than
23.0°C.
Check the temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensoron the Input Check display. ☞ 35210
More than 42°C.
YES
The temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensor goes down by 1°C or more in ten minutes.
NO
The voltage between the pin 3 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 1 V,
which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 66010
YES NO
Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010
4302 1/7
4302
The voltage between the pin 7 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB is 0 V, which means the
laser unit cooling fan control is ON. ☞ 66010
YES NO
The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power to supply the laser unit cooling fan. ☞ 66060
YES NO
Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Laser unit cooling fan 1 rotates. ☞ 66050
4. Troubleshooting
YES NO
Failure in the laser unit cooling fan 1 ☞ 66050
Laser unit cooling fan 2 rotates. ☞ 66050
YES NO
Failure in the laser unit cooling fan 2 ☞ 66050
means the power supply to the laser unit heater.
YES NO
The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1538) of the laser I/O PCB and the ground is 24 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is OFF. ☞ 66060
YES NO
which means the laser unit heater control is OFF. ☞ 66010
YES NO
4302 2/7
4302
The voltage between the pin 4 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is over
0.45 V, which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor measurement voltage. ☞ 66010
NO YES
The ambient temperature may be high. Keep the ambient

temperature at less than 30°C.
Disconnect the connector (J/P1522) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins
3 and 4 on the laser unit thermosensor side is less than 4 kΩ (resistance value of the laser unit thermosensor
). ☞ 66010
YES NO
Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010 Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710
4. Troubleshooting
The temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up by 1°C or more in ten minutes. YES
NO
which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 66010
YES NO
which means the laser unit heater control is ON. ☞ 66010
YES NO
The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1538) of the laser I/O PCB and the ground is 0 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is ON. ☞ 66060
YES NO
means the power supply to the laser unit heater. ☞ 66060
YES NO
4302 3/7
4302
which means the laser unit cooling fan control is OFF. ☞ 66010
YES NO
means the power to supply the laser unit cooling fan. ☞ 66060
YES NO
4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between the pin 4 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is less
than 0.25 V, which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor. ☞ 66010
NO YES
Failure in the laser unit heater ☞ 63080
Disconnect the connector (J/P1522) on the laser control PCB. If the measured resistance value between pins 3
and 4 on the laser thermosensor side is more than 10 kΩ (resistance of the laser unit thermosensor ). ☞ 66010
YES NO
Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010 Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710
The problem is solved or the temperature is being adjusted properly.
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4).
4302 4/7
4302
! Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.
Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.
Reset the power supply and restart the system.
The display of Laser temperatures are being adjusted. has disappeared.
NO YES
The problem is solved or the temperature is being adjusted

properly.
The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is 1 V, which
4. Troubleshooting
means the R laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 66010
YES NO
The voltage between TP2 and TP9 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is 1 V, which means standard
voltage of R laser thermosensor. ☞ 66060
YES NO
It is below
27.7°C.
Check the temperature of the R Laser Thermosensor on the Input Check display. ☞ 35210
It is over 28.3°C.
Disconnect the connector (J/P1532) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins 7
and 8 on the R laser thermosensor side is less than 4.5 kΩ (resistance value of the R laser thermosensor ).
☞ 66010
YES NO
Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710
The voltage between TP2 and TP11 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is more than 350 mV
(measured voltage of R laser thermosensor).
YES NO
4302 5/7
4302
The voltage between the pins 2 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is over 350
mV, which means R laser temperature sensor measurement voltage. ☞ 66010
YES NO
The voltage between the pins 4 (+) and 5 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is over 2.5 V,
which means the Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 66010
YES NO
4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between TP2 and TP12 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is over 2.5 V, which means the
Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 66060
YES NO
The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1540) of the laser I/O PCB is over 0 V and
less than 2 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 66060
YES NO
Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710 Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Disconnect the connector (J/P1532) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins 7
and 8 on the R laser thermosensor side is over 5.4 kΩ (resistance value of the R laser thermosensor ).
YES NO
Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710
Reference
☞ 66060
YES NO
4302 6/7
4302
The voltage between the pins 2 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is less than
350 mV, which means the R laser sensor unit temperature measurement voltage. ☞ 66010
YES NO
The voltage between the pins 4 (+) and 5 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is less than
2.5 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 66010
YES NO
4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between TP2 and TP12 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is less than 2.5 V, which
means it is less than the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 66060
YES NO
The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1540) of the laser I/O PCB is over −2 V and
less than 0 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 66060
YES NO
Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710 Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.
4302 7/7
4304
An abnormal print is made
! Specifying the occurring place
The line appears inputting from the film. The line (irregular print) appears
in the setup print.
YES YES
The line appears inputting from the media. NO ☞ Inputting side is not good.
(around the scanner, D-ICE PCB
and around the AFC)
YES
Save the image data to the HDD after scanning the

film.
4. Troubleshooting
YES
Is the line appeared in the image when NO

checking the saved data on the PJP display (1
Frame Magnification)?
YES
Around the image processing PCB may not be ☞ Around the laser unit is not
good. good.
! Inputting side is not good. (around the scanner, D-ICE PCB and around the AFC)
Refer to the table below about an abnormal print which occurred because of around the scanner unit, D-ICE PCB and AFC.
No. Symptom Reference

1 BGR colors mixing line in the film advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4400
2 The line like a bar code in the film advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4401
! Around the laser unit is not good.

Refer to the below table about an abnormal print occurred because of around the laser unit.
No. Symptom Reference

1 The light density line (white) in the paper advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4450
2 The monochrome line perpendicular to paper advance direction is ☞ 4451
occurred.
3 The light color is appeared in unexposure position. ☞ 4452
4 The stripped pattern like a wavy line in the whole part of print is occurred. ☞ 4453
5 Banding is occurred. ☞ 25910☞ 36090
4304 1/1
4305
Checking for media drive defect
! Checking procedure
What is the drive?
Floppy disk drive CD-ROM and CD- Zip drive MO drive DVD-RAM drive Five slots card
R/RW drive reader
Clean the drive and read the same media again.

• Clean the MO drive with the optional MO head cleaner.
• Clean the floppy disk drive and DVD-RAM drive with a commercial cleaning kit.
• Except above drive are cleaned with the air duster or the like.
4. Troubleshooting
Not settled.
Read the other media.
Not settled.
Confirm that the Device status of each drive is become This device is working properly in the Device Manager.
• If not, each drive is not recognized.
Reinstall the driver or check the cable connection.
Not settled.
Check that the cable is securely connected.

• In the case of FD, if the cable is connected reversely, the access lamp is on all the time.
Not settled.
Check the ID setting of IDE. Check the ID setting of SCSI.

• In the case of CD, secondary and • In the case of MO drive, the SCSI ID is 0.
master. • In the case of DVD-RAM drive, the SCSI ID
• In the case of ZIP, secondary and slave. is 6.
High-spec PC:
Check that these are recognized on the BIOS
display of SCSI when starting up the personal
Not settled. computer.
Check that the BIOS setting is correct.
4305 1/1
4306
PC does not start properly.
This describes the diagnosis when the PC does not start properly.
For details of terms used below or operations, refer to the startup sequence for PC. ☞ 50510
! Specifying the occurring cause
IMPORTANT
• The diagnosis below is for widely used PC (Windows 2000).
Any explanation for the extension PCB such as the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB, which is used for the QSS only, is not
described here.
When the diagnosis is not effective to solve the problem, check the extension PCB used for the QSS only.
PC does not start properly.
Any messages in the monitor display?
4. Troubleshooting
YES NO
Power LED goes on and it beeps.
YES NO
1. Check the power supply cable.

2. Check the connection of mother board power supply connector.
3. Check the voltage of mother board power supply connector.
• ±12 V, ±5 V, ±3.3 V are detected.
4. Replace the ATX power supply.
5. Replace the Power Switch.
6. Replace the mother board.
Specify the beep sound.

1. Just once
2. Long beep: once, Short beep: twice
3. Repeating long beep
1. Check the connection of memory (DIMM).

1
2. Replace the memory (DIMM).
1. Check the video board connection.

2
2. Replace the video board.
1. Check the video cable connection.

3 2. Replace the video cable.
3. Replace the monitor display.
4. Replace the video board.
4306 1/4
4306
YES
Messages are shown during POST.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in starting up).
NO YES
Check the messages.

1. BIOS ROM checksum error - System halted
2. CMOS battery failed
3. CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded
4. Floppy disk(s) fail
5. HARD DISK INSTALL FAILURE
6. Primary master hard disk fail
7. Keyboard error or no keyboard present
8. Keyboard is locked out - Unlock the key
9. Invalid System Disk Replace the disk, then press any key
10. DISK BOOT FAILURE, INSERT SYSTEM DISK AND PRESS ENTER
4. Troubleshooting
1
2, 3 1. Replace the CMOS battery.

1. Check the floppy disk drive cable connection.

4 2. Replace the floppy disk drive cable.
3. Replace the floppy disk drive.
1. Check the IDE cable connection in the hard disk.

5, 6 2. Replace the IDE cable in the hard disk.
3. Replace the hard disk.
1. Check the keyboard cable connection.

7, 8
2. Replace the keyboard.
9 1. Check that no floppy disk is inserted.

2. Replace the floppy disk drive.
1. Recover the OS.

10 2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
4306 2/4
4306
NO
It stops during POST or reading NTLDR, or it restarts.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in
starting up).
NO YES
Check the messages.

1. It stops on the CPU or the memory test display, or it restarts.
2. It stops on the IDE connected device detecting display, or it restarts.
3. It stops on the SCSI connected device detecting display, or it restarts.
4. It stops before the message Starting Windows... for NTLDR appears, or it restarts.
1. Check the connection of memory (DIMM).

1
2. Replace the memory (DIMM).
4. Troubleshooting
1. Check the IDE cable connection in the hard disk.

2 2. Replace the IDE cable in the hard disk.
1. Check the SCSI ID.

2. Check the terminator.
3
3. Check the SCSI board connection.
4. Replace the SCSI board.
5. Replace the SCSI device.
1. Check the connection of extension board.

4
2. Replace the extension board.
It brings up the message during POST or reading NTLDR.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Reading the NTLDR (NT loader, which is the program to
start the OS).
NO YES
Check the messages.

1. NTLDR missing, Replace disk and press any key to continue
1. Recover the OS.

1
2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
4306 3/4
4306
NO
It stops while starting the OS, or it restarts.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Starting the OS.
NO YES
1. Recover the OS.

The STOP code error occurs while starting the OS.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Starting the OS.
NO YES
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The error of STOP code is shown by STOP0xXXXXXXXXX.
• Countermeasure for the STOP code error may be shown on the Microsoft's website.
IMPORTANT
• Record the error No. if the STOP code error occurs.
1. Recover the OS.

The PC starts.
4306 4/4
4400
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print
BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction)
4. Troubleshooting
G057580
IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.
! Features of symptom
• The BGR moire like a sample print or white stripes is occurring only printing from the film.
• The BGR moire appears in the film advance direction but not always straight stripe, it may be bent a little or like a pattern.
NOTE
• Because it appears in the film advance direction, when the advance length is shorter than the paper width (horizontal feed), it
may appear perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• In BGR, colorful stripes with which the color mixed variously occurs.
IMPORTANT
• This symptom is similar to the Line like a bar code ☞ 4401, be careful of their difference.
• It may be confirmed on the monitor display at PJP.
! Explanation and check point
! Explanation
When the dust around the slot for AFC scanning does not move together with a film, it occurs.
IMPORTANT
• When the dust does not move together with a film, the DIGITAL ICE and digital masking are not effective since the
position of dust is not specified.
! Check point
• Change the 135/240 AFC-II lane (135→240, 240→135) and check.
4400 1/2
4400
If it does not occur after changing the lane, the dust may attach to the previous lane. Clean the inside and outside of the AFC
again.
Clean slots (upper and lower), film path surface, protection glass of LED light source, condensing lens of AFC, insertion section,
rewinding section, each roller and etc. too.
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the AFC, clean the both lanes of AFC.
• Confirm that the dust does not remain in the slots for scanning or between the rollers, and clean the front and rear
sides carefully.
• If this symptom occurs when changing the lane (135→240, 240→135), clean around the dust prevention glass of scanner.
• Clean around the AFC, scanner and film path surface.
4. Troubleshooting
4400 2/2
4401
Line like a bar code (film advance direction)
4. Troubleshooting
G057581
IMPORTANT
• The moire like a sample print is occurred only printing from the film.
• The line is appeared in film advance direction.
NOTE
• Because it appears in the film advance direction, when the advance length is shorter than the paper width (horizontal feed), it
may appear perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• The line like a bar code and a pattern.
• The line (pattern) is regular and straight.
• The color is black or contained the BGR.
IMPORTANT
• This symptom is similar to the BGR colors mixing line ☞ 4400, be careful of their difference.
• It can be confirmed on the monitor display at PJP.
! Explanation
It is occurred by connector imperfect contact of the D-ICE PCB and abnormal of D-ICE PCB.
! Check point
• Reset the power supply.
• Check the connector contact around the D-ICE PCB.
D-ICE PCB: J/P45, 480, 483, 484A, 485, 486, and 487
• Replace D-ICE PCB and D-ICE control PCB. ☞ 64040
4401 1/1
4450
Light density line (white) (paper advance direction)
4. Troubleshooting
G057583
IMPORTANT
• The stripped pattern like a sample print occurs in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
• The line appears parallel to the paper advance direction.
! Explanation
It occurs when the dust adheres to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit, exposure advance unit or laser dustproof glass cover. Or,
it occurs due to the dust inside the laser unit.
! Check point
• Clean the glass surface of laser unit.
Refer to ☞ Cleaning the laser dustproof glass.
IMPORTANT
• When the line is not clear, the dust may adhere to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit or inside of the laser
unit. When the line is clear, the dust may adhere around the pressure guide.
• Clean the laser dustproof glass cover.
• Clean around the exposure section of exposure advance unit.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710
4450 1/2
4450
! Cleaning the laser dustproof glass
1. Open paper advance units 1 and 2.

G069089
2. Pull the knob to release the lock and remove the laser dustproof glass cover.
4. Troubleshooting
Knob Laser dustproof glass cover
G076407
3. Clean the laser dustproof glass with the enclosed cleaning sheet (soft cloth).
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the laser dustproof glass, clean it with the soft cloth in the direction from far to near or from near
to far at one stroke.
• If cleaning several times, clean in the same direction. If wiping in the opposite direction, the dust which has
been removed adheres on the dustproof glass again. Use the different side of the cleaning cloth every time in
order not to adhere the removed dust again.
• Do not use the alcohol when cleaning. Using alcohol may affect the print quality.
Rear
Laser dustproof glass
G086408
4450 2/2
4451
Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction)
4. Troubleshooting
G057579
IMPORTANT
• The monochrome line is appeared perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• The line appears at the same intervals.
! Explanation
Something noise may affect the laser unit. Or the inside of laser unit is abnormal.
! Check point
• Replace the B and G laser drivers. ☞ 66070
IMPORTANT
• B and G laser drivers are sharing the PCB.
4451 1/1
4452
Light color is appeared in unexposure position
4. Troubleshooting
G057585
IMPORTANT
• The light color is appeared in the unexposure position or low density position.
• The symptom like a sample print is occurred in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
! Explanation
The chemical may deteriorate or laser light may leak because the inside the laser unit is abnormal.
! Check point
• Process the control strip and check the color of the white part. If the problem occurs, the chemical has deteriorated. Replace the
chemical.
• Shield the center of the laser dustproof glass cover of the laser unit with a splicing tape and make a setup print. If there is a
difference between the unexposed position shielded by the splicing tape and regular unexposed position, the abnormal print is
caused by leakage of laser beam.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to adhere dust or damage to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit
4452 1/1
4453
Stripped pattern like a wavy line
4. Troubleshooting
G057584
IMPORTANT
• A stripped pattern like a wavy line.
• Appeared forward of the print.
! Explanation
Something noise may affect the laser unit. Or the inside of laser unit is abnormal.
! Check point
• Replace the B and G laser drivers. ☞ 66070
IMPORTANT
• B and G laser drivers are sharing the PCB.
4453 1/1
4500
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type)
The following table shows the conditions and the corrective action when error messages appear.
Error message Condition Countermeasure

The copy may be improperly The copy is out of the edge of the copy deck in the Put the copy properly on the copy deck in the
positioned, or the selected area is flatbed scanner. flatbed scanner so that it is not out of the deck.
too small. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The outline of copy is not clear. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The message appears when the image frame is too Remove the check mark for the DIGITAL
small with the digital ICE function valid. ICE Technology(TM) function.
Resize the image frame manually.
Flatbed Scanner Communication When the driver software for FB scanner has not Check the conditions shown on the left and
Error been installed then start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing again on the Order
display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
When the lock of FB scanner has not been released
4. Troubleshooting
There is insufficient memory. The memory of the personal computer is not Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
enough. image smaller.
There is nothing to scan. There is no copy on the copy deck. Place the copy correctly.
Cancel If the user interrupts the previewing or scanning Carry out the same previewing or scanning
Quit the process. operation operation again after deleting the message in
the message box.
There is insufficient space left on The hard disk space is not enough. Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
the hard disk. image smaller.
The copy may be improperly When the copy is protruded from the deck Place the copy on the deck not to protrude.
positioned.
When the copy is not protruded from it, release
the error message and enlarge or move the
image frame to fit the image.
Capturing communication error When using the FB scanner with QSS software Check the conditions shown on the left and
while using the FB scanner with another software then start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing Preview again on the Order Display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
All Data included the Tone Curve When the Setting Initialization button is clicked If you would like to initialize, select OK. If
and the Save Data are initialized. on the FB scanner execution display not, select Cancel.
Are you sure you want to initialize
them?
Cut Position Error When the upper left corner of brought area is Press the Preview button again.
recognized as placed in a wrong position (The
position of copy is not wrong.)
Cut Angle Error When the inner angle of brought area is not
recognized 90-degree (The angle of copy is not
wrong.)
DLL Load Completed When trying to load the DLL again although it is Quit the message display and execution display
already loaded of FB scanner by pressing the CLOSE button
DLL Load Failed When the DLL is not recognized as already and restart the FB scanner execution display by
installed pressing YES key in the order display.
When the installation of DLL is failed
The DLL was not loaded. When the DLL is not loaded
4500 1/2
4500
IMPORTANT
• If the messages of DLL Load Completed, DLL Load Failed or The DLL was not loaded. appears repeatedly, the DLL
data may be damaged or broken. Reinstall the QSS software as a corrective action. ☞ 88000
NOTE
• DLL is a driver for running the FB scanner execution display on the Order Display of QSS.
Location: My Computer\C\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Exe\NKC_ImageFBScan.dll
4. Troubleshooting
4500 2/2
4600
Diagnosis appendix: Scanner adjustment chart
About the scanner adjustment chart
IMPORTANT
• When the scanner adjustment chart itself is abnormal, if Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment or Focus Adjustment is
performed, fault may occur. Furthermore, since it cannot adjust normally, it may adversely affect the print quality.
• When you use the scanner adjustment chart, check whether there are any abnormalities in the scanner adjustment chart
referring to the display indicated below and the illustration of scanner adjustment chart.
• For handling the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart,
☞ Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart (for the 135/240 MMC-II and the 135/240 AMC-II).
! Normal scanner adjustment chart and display (swing and tilt/light axis adjustment)
Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment display
4. Troubleshooting
S3396-01-SM02
For confirming the light axis
For confirming the swing For confirming the swing

and tilt and tilt
G078399
! Explanation
• As for the normal scanner adjustment chart, eight about 20µm slots and three about 100µm slots are contained for the swing and
tilt, and the triangle slot for the light axis is contained in the inner side.
4600 1/5
4600
! Normal scanner adjustment chart and display (focus adjustment)

Focus Adjustment display
S3230-01-SM00
4. Troubleshooting
For checking the focus
G071789
! Explanation
• As for the normal scanner adjustment chart, three about 100µm slots, eight about 20µm slots and three about 100µm slots are
contained for the focus adjustment.
4600 2/5
4600
! When dust adheres on the scanner adjustment chart:

A part of waveform has collapsed.
S3396-01-SM04
4. Troubleshooting
Dust adheres.
Dust adheres.
G078401
IMPORTANT
! Explanation
• Since dust has adhered to the slot section, a part of waveform has collapsed.
4600 3/5
4600
! When the scanner adjustment chart is damaged:

Since the slot is damaged, the mountain of waveform has decreased.
4. Troubleshooting
S3396-01-SM03
The slot is damaged. The slot is damaged.
G078400
IMPORTANT
! Explanation
• Since the 20µm slot section for the Swing and Tilt confirmation is damaged, the mountain of waveform has decreased.
! Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart
IMPORTANT
• Check if dust adheres on the scanner adjustment chart. If dust adheres, remove it with a blower brush before
attaching.
• Do not fold the scanner adjustment chart as it is thin.
• Position the scanner adjustment chart correctly. Otherwise, the scanner unit cannot be adjusted properly. Be sure to
press the upper and left parts of the chart to the AFC as shown below and secure the upper and lower parts using
tapes.
• Do not use the scanner adjustment chart wrong side out. Place the scanner adjustment chart so that the stamp mark
of the film size can be read.
4600 4/5
4600
• After using the scanner adjustment chart, put it into a card case.
• The scanner adjustment chart is a service personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
Tapes Adjustment chart
G050982
4. Troubleshooting
! Precautions for handling the scanner adjustment chart (for the 135/240 MMC-II and
the 135/240 AMC-II)
IMPORTANT
• Check if dust adheres on the scanner adjustment chart. If dust adheres, remove it with a blower brush before
attaching.
• Do not fold the scanner adjustment chart as it is thin.
• Do not use the scanner adjustment chart wrong side out. Place the scanner adjustment chart so that the stamp mark
of the film size can be read.
• Set the scanner adjustment chart (mount) for 135/240 MMC-II and adjust it.
• For the 135/240 AMC-II, attach the single adaptor and ejection stocker, then set the scanner adjustment chart (mount)
to adjust.
• The scanner adjustment chart is a service personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
4600 5/5
4900
DLS Error Messages
DLS Error Messages
DLS Error Messages
Followings are the error messages that tells Contact your service
provider.
NOTE
• Errors other than below, see the Online Help.
System Error messages (No. 3-)
No. Contents Reference
3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full ☞ 4910
3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full
3-3 WIP Partition Is Full
3-4 WIP Partition Is Full
3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ☞ 4911
Archive Error messages (No. 6-)

6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ☞ 4920
4. Troubleshooting
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)
10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ☞ 4961
10-10 Error While Uploading Network
Order
10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize ☞ 4962
Customer Name
10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host
Scan Location
10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize
Member ID
Account ID
10-19 Connection Processing Failed ☞ 4965
10-20 Busy Modem
Rendering Error messages (No. 12-)

12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed ☞ 4970
12-2 Print Initialization Failed
12-7 Rendering Error ☞ 4972
12-8 Printing Error
12-11 Print Service Error ☞ 4974
12-13 Print Creation Error ☞ 4975
12-14 Order Queuing Failed
12-40 Error Preparing a Print ☞ 4977
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-)

13-1 CD Authoring Service Initialization ☞ 4980
Failed
4900 1/1
4910
☞ 88000
No. 3-1
WIP Partition is Half Full
No. 3-2
WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full
No. 3-3
WIP Partition Is Full
No. 3-4
WIP Partition Is Full
Error message release

Continue
Condition
Condition
• The number of completed WIP orders to be retained is set
too high.
4. Troubleshooting
• Too many orders are active in the system, due to one or more
of the following reasons:
• The WIP contains many paused orders.
• A backlog of orders is waiting to be processed.
• The printer is not operational.
• A printer error occurred.
Diagnosis
1. Right-click My Computer and select Manage to bring up the
Computer Management display.
2. Selecting Disk Management shows each Disk condition.
S072418
3. The display shows WIP (V:). Check if it is Healthy.
4. The display shows WIP (V:), but if it is not Healthy, format
WIP (V:).
5. If the display does not show WIP (V:), carry out recovery.
☞ 88000
6. It it does not complete successfully, replace the hard disk and
execute the recovery.
4910 1/1
4911
No. 3-6
Order Failed Image Analysis
Attention message release

Continue
Condition
Condition
An error occurred on the software.
Check Point
1 Bring up the WIP display to execute either of
followings.
• Restart printing from the order
• Makeover the order.
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
display.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 88000
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
☞ 88000
4. If it does not work out, execute the recovery.
☞ 88000
4911 1/1
4920
No. 6-1
Insufficient Store-It Disk Space

OK
Condition
Condition
There is insufficient disk space for the archive system. This is
why archiving is unavailable.
Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary order.
Diagnosis
2. Right-click My Computer and select Manage to bring up the
4. Troubleshooting
Computer Management display if it does not recover.
3. Selecting Disk Management shows each Disk condition.
S072418
4. The display shows Archive (U:). Check if it is Healthy.
5. The display shows Archive (U:), but if it is not Healthy,
format Archive (U:).
6. If the display does not show Archive (U:), carry out recovery.
☞ 88000
7. It it does not complete successfully, replace the hard disk and
execute the recovery.
☞ 88000
4920 1/1
4961
No. 10-9 No. 10-10

Cannot Connect to Upload Host Error While Uploading Network Order
Error message release Error message release

Retry or Cancel Retry or Cancel
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The network is not connected. • An error occurred while uploading to the upload services.
• The modem is not connected.
• The network configuration is not correct. Check Point
1 Have the key operator confirm that the network
Check Point configuration is correct.
1 Check the network and modem connections.
Diagnosis
configuration is correct. 1. Check if the modem is set correctly.
2. Check that the modem is normal.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis 3. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.
1. Check if the modem is set correctly.
2. Check that the modem is normal.
3. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.
4961 1/1
4962
No. 10-11 No. 10-12

Upload Server Cannot Recognize Cannot Connect to Upload Host
Customer Name
Retry or Cancel
Condition
Condition
Condition
Condition
• The Customer Name is missing.
• The server cannot recognize the price sheet associated with
• The Customer Name is not entered correctly.
the customer.
Check Point
Check Point
1 Confirm that the Customer Name is entered correctly.
1 Check the network and modem connections.
configuration is correct.
3 Restart the computer.
Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct. Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
4962 1/1
4963
No. 10-13 No. 10-14

Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Upload Server Cannot Recognize
Location Customer Name
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The Scan Location is missing. • The Member ID is missing.
• The Scan Location is not entered correctly. • The Member ID is not entered correctly.
Check Point Check Point

1 Confirm that the upload configuration is entered 1 Confirm that the Member ID and upload
correctly. configuration are entered correctly.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network 2 Have the key operator confirm that the network
configuration is correct. configuration is correct.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct. 1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.
4963 1/1
4964
No. 10-15
Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan
Location
Condition
Condition
• The Account ID is missing.
• The Account ID is not entered correctly.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the Account ID is entered correctly.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
4964 1/1
4965
No. 10-19 No. 10-20

Connection Processing Failed Busy Modem
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• An error has occurred when uploading the image file to • System Cannot Communicate with Modem
Upload Server.
Check Point
Check Point
1 Upload the image file again after a while.
1 Upload the image file again.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
2. Check if any problem occurs with the network cable.
4. Troubleshooting
4965 1/1
4970
No. 12-1 No. 12-2

Print Service Initialization Failed Print Initialization Failed

Continue Retry
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• Hard disk has an I/O problem. • Error in Hardware or Software Used for Communication
• Hard disk has no space.
• An error occurred on the software. Check Point
1 Restart the system.
Check Point
1 Restart the system. Diagnosis
Diagnosis ☞ 88000
1. Save the log data of DLS. 2. Restart the system.
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 88000 3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
2. Restart the system. ☞ 88000
☞ 88000
4970 1/1
4972
No. 12-7 No. 12-8

Rendering Error Printing Error

Continue Retry
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The partition of print buffer has no efficient disk capacity. • Error While Sending the Image To Printer
• Hard disk has an I/O problem.
• An error occurred on the software. Check Point
Check Point followings.
1 Restart printing on the WIP display. • Restart printing from the order
Diagnosis • Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
display.
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 88000
Diagnosis
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software. Failed parts Manual No.
☞ 88000 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
☞ CS 2-1 Control section
4972 1/1
4974
No. 12-11
Print Service Error
Condition
Condition
• A printer error occurred.
Check Point
Diagnosis
☞ 88000
☞ 88000
4. Troubleshooting
4974 1/1
4975
No. 12-13 No. 12-14

Print Creation Error Order Queuing Failed

Continue Continue
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
• The print products which do not correspond to the system • Although a print request was sent, all the order frames have
have been selected. been denied.
• There is no necessary template for the index print. • An error occurred on the software.

1 Makeover on the WIP display. 1 Bring up the WIP display to execute either of
2 Restart the system. followings.
Diagnosis • Makeover the order.
4. Troubleshooting
1. Save the log data of DLS. • Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
☞ 88000 display.
Diagnosis
☞ 88000 1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 88000
☞ 88000
4975 1/1
4977
No. 12-40
Error Preparing a Print
Condition
Condition
• The image file which is larger than 4800x7200 pixels has
been attempted to be imported by DLS.
• An error occurred while preparing a print.
Check Point
1 Press the image file to 4800x7200 pixels or less using
the external software.
followings.
4. Troubleshooting
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order
display.
Diagnosis
☞ 88000
☞ 88000
4977 1/1
4980
No. 13-12
CD Authoring Complete
No. 13-13
CD Authoring Complete

Continue
Condition
Condition
• The CD was authored successfully, but the CD drawer could
not be opened.
Check Point
1 Open the CD drawer manually, if necessary.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
1. Check if the CD drive is set to G drive.
4980 1/1
40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver
No. 101 No. 103

Start the QSS and enter the Net Scan The QSS is already connected to another
mode. QSS TWAIN driver. Would you like to
search for another QSS?
To connect to QSS again: Click OK. Attention message release
To stop connecting to QSS: Click Cancel. To connect to the same QSS again: Click No.
To connect to the other QSS: Click Yes.
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- This message appears when the QSS application of number
QSS to connect has not been started or when the QSS - This message appears when attempting to connect to
application has been started but it is not in the Net the QSS connected to other QSS TWAIN driver
Scan Mode while attempting to start QSS TWAIN already while attempting to start the QSS TWAIN
driver. driver.
NOTE NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to • This attention message appears on the external computer to
4. Troubleshooting
which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed. which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

1 Check that the destination QSS is in the Net Order To connect to the same QSS again
mode.
1. Click No.
2 Check if it is set to be in the Net Scan Mode. The attention message disappears.
To connect to QSS again 2. Wait until the connected QSS TWAIN driver finishes.
1. Click OK. 3. Start the QSS TWAIN driver again.
The attention message disappears. To connect to the other QSS
2. Check the status of QSS to connect. 1. Click Yes.
3. When it is not in the Net Scan Mode, set it to be in the Net The attention message disappears and the Search QSS PC
Scan Mode. appears.
4. Start the QSS TWAIN driver again. 2. Select the other QSS and click OK.
To stop connecting to QSS 3. Quit the QSS TWAIN driver once, and start it again.
When the QSS to connect has changed, the change does not
1. Click Cancel.
become available without quitting the QSS TWAIN driver
The attention message disappears.
once.
40101 1/1
40107
No. 107 No. 110

48 bit image may not correspond, Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS.
depending on application. Would you like Check the QSS.
to enable the setting?
Attention message release Click OK.
To enable the Capture 48bit Image setting: Click OK.
To stop the operation: Click Cancel. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Suffix Condition - This message appears when some error/attention
number message occurs on the side of QSS.
- This message appears when attempting to enable the
Capture 48bit Image setting in the Environmental NOTE
Setting display. • This attention message appears on the external computer to
which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.
NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Take a corrective action for the error/attention message occuring
on the side of QSS.
40107 1/1
40108
No. 115 No. 116

The COM port for the external controller is Failed to open the COM port for the
already occupied by another application. external controller.
Confirm the use condition of the COM
port. Attention message release
Retry, or Cancel
Attention message release • Select Retry to check the COM port again.
Retry, or Cancel • Select Cancel to make Wheelman unavailable and continue
• Select Retry to check the COM port again. processing.
• Select Cancel to make Wheelman unavailable and continue
processing. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Suffix Condition - At the start of QSS Twain Driver, commnication with
number the Wheelman is not available.
- At the start of QSS TWAIN Driver, the COM port is
NOTE
already occupied with another application and
communicating with Wheelman is not available. • This attention message appears on the external computer to
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to
40108 1/1
40109
No. 117
Would you like to stop processing?

YES or NO
• Select YES to stop the operation.
• Select NO to continue.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It is attempted to stop the operation by pressing the
NO key when using the Keyboard Expansion Kit.
NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to
4. Troubleshooting
40109 1/1
40110
No. 502 No. 504

Failed to connect with the QSS. Would This version does not match the QSS.
you like to search the QSS?
Error message release Click OK.
To connect to the same QSS again: Click Cancel.
To connect to the other QSS: Click OK. Condition
To stop the operation: Click Cancel.
Suffix Condition
number
Condition
- This message appears when the version of the QSS
Suffix Condition TWAIN driver and the version of the connected QSS
number are not same while attempting to start the QSS
- This message appears when the QSS to connect has TWAIN driver.
not started or the network is not connected properly
while attempting to start the QSS TWAIN driver. NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which
NOTE the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.
• This error message appears on the external computer to which • The version of the QSS TWAIN driver and the version of the
the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed. connected QSS need to be same.
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check the network connection. 1 Install the QSS TWAIN driver using the system
2 Restart the QSS. program CD of the connected QSS.
3 Start the QSS TWAIN driver.
40110 1/1
40111
No. 505 No. 508

Communication has been disconnected. A QSS TWAIN driver has been started.
The QSS TWAIN driver will be closed. Multiple QSS TWAIN drivers cannot be
started together.
Click OK. Error message release
Click OK.
Condition
- This message appears when the connected QSS has number
completed abnormally and the connection to the QSS - This message appears when attempting to start
TWAIN driver has been disconnected. several QSS TWAIN drivers from one external PC
while attempting to start the QSS TWAIN driver.
NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which IMPORTANT
the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.
• It is impossible to start several QSS TWAIN drivers from
one external PC at the same time.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Restart the QSS. NOTE
3 Check the network connection.
Check Point
1 Quit the QSS TWAIN driver.
40111 1/1
40112
No. 512
Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS.
Quit the process.

Clicking OK cancels the error message and quits the QSS TWAIN
driver.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- This message appears when some error/attention
message urging you to cancel the QSS TWAIN driver
occurs on the side of QSS.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Take a corrective action for the error/attention
message occuring on the side of QSS.
40112 1/1
40113
No. 513 No. 514

Language version of message data is There is insufficient memory.
incorrect. Messages are displayed in
English. Error message release
OK
Error message release • Selecting OK cancels the error message and quits the QSS
OK TWAIN driver.
• Selecting OK displays in English.
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
number
Suffix Condition
number - There is memory capacity shortage while using QSS
TWAIN driver.
- Display in the selected language is not available at
the start up or the Change Display.
NOTE
NOTE • This error message appears on the external computer to which
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point 1 Check if any other application is running.
1 Reinstall the QSS TWAIN driver. 2 Restart the external PC.
40113 1/1
40500
Attention message: Processor
No. 0500[N] No. 0501[N]

Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. The replenisher switch is turned on.
Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or automatic release
• The replenisher switch turns ON by pressing the YES key.
Condition
- The refilling water tank level sensor turns OFF. number
- After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a
Diagnosis specified number of seconds of replenishment lack
time has passed.
Blown fuses Manual No.
- After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210 specified time has passed with the replenishment
solution sensor ON.
Failed parts Manual No. - After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, manual
Refilling water tank level sensor ☞ 63250 replenishment or output amount measurement is
carried out.
4. Troubleshooting
• Disconnect the connector of the refilling water tank level
sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on
the jack side when the water temperature is between 10°C
and 35°C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is
not between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2).
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
Detailed diagram
☞ PP 3-5 Replenisher section (2)
40500 1/1
40502
Detailed diagram
No. 0502[N] ☞ PP 3-5 Replenisher section (2)
Add replenishment solution to the
replenishment tank.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Each replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF.
NOTE
• The name of processing solution causing this attention
message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
CD, BF or STB
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment solution level
sensor. If the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack
side is not between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ when the solution
temperature between is 10°C and 35°C, the level sensor is
defective.

Failed parts

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
40502 1/2
40502
NOTE
No. 0503[N][SM]
Empty the Effluent Tank.
Circuit diagram
Attention message release ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
YES or automatic release ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
• This attention message will be automatically released when ☞ PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB
the effluent tank is emptied.
Detailed diagram
Condition
☞ PP 3-6 Effluent section
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are not being made, each effluent float
switch turns ON.
NOTE
• The name of processing solution causing this attention
message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
CD, BF or STB
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check the solution level of the effluent tank.
2 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves
up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis

Effluent float switch ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the effluent float switch. If there
is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
the float is lowered, the float switch is defective.

Failed parts

Failed parts
40502 2/2
40504
No. 0505
Remove the prints from the Print Sorter
Unit.

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when
prints are removed.
NOTE
• While this message appears, the sorter is not activated.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The print full sensor turns DARK.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the print receiving tray and the print full
sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
Print full sensor ☞ 63260
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB
Detailed diagram
☞ PP 3-11 Print conveyor section/Print sort unit
40504 1/1
40506
No. 0506 No. 0507

Close the Dryer Cover. Close the Processor Top Cover.

YES or automatic release YES or automatic release
• This message will be released automatically when the dryer • The message will be automatically released when the
cover is closed. processor top cover is closed.
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- While prints are not being made, the interlock switch - While prints are not being made, the interlock switch
(dryer cover) turns OFF. (processor top cover) turns OFF.
- When auto cleaning is to be carried out, the interlock
NOTE switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive - When refilling with water is to be carried out, the
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop. interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
Check Point NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if the dryer top cover and the dryer door are • The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
securely closed. and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch
(processor top cover) turns OFF.
Diagnosis
Check Point
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260 Adjustment failure point Manual No.
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250
no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the Failed parts Manual No.
interlock switch is defective. Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 • Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400 you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
interlock switch is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Failed parts
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor relay PCB. # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Failed parts
NOTE
Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor relay PCB.
Circuit diagram
NOTE
☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
Detailed diagram ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ PP 3-7 Drive section ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
☞ PP 3-10 Dryer section (3)
40506 1/2
40506
Detailed diagram
☞ PP 3-7 Drive section
4. Troubleshooting
40506 2/2
40508
No. 0508
Paper remains in the processor. Are you
sure you want to turn the drive off?

YES or NO
• Select YES to turn OFF the drive.
• Select NO to finish the print mode with the drive being ON.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Although paper still remains in the processing rack or
dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive.
NOTE
• Processing time of the processor varies depending on the
specification.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.
40508 1/1
40510
No. 0510
Attach the Print Conveyor Unit.

• This attention message will be released when the print
conveyor unit is set.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT in the standby
status after the drive has stopped.
Check Point
1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63260
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
40510 1/1
40514
No. 0515
Set the Rack Stopper.

YES/START or automatic release
• This attention message will be released when the rack stopper
is set.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are not being made, the rack stopper
sensor turns OFF.
Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Failure in the attaching position adjustment ☞ 63250
of the rack stopper sensor

Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the rack stopper sensor. If there
is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the rack stopper sensor,
the sensor is defective.

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
40514 1/1
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
Check Point
No. 0700-####[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with 1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.
a new one.P-#
Diagnosis
YES Adjustment failure point Manual No.
This attention message will be released only when the Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 63250
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the sensor
replenishment package sensor once.)
Condition
Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63250
Suffix Condition SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
number
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly. Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
refilled forcibly.
☞ PP 2-4 Around SM I/O PCB
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
refilled forcibly. Detailed diagram
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns ☞ PP 3-13 SM Replenisher section (2)
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM
Replenishment Setting via Machine Specification, these
messages appear. When the following conditions, the tanks
are not refilled forcibly.
SM Detecting condition of the replenishment
Setting
ON The replenishment solution is not detected
when the power is ON.
The replenishment solution is not detected
when the replenishment package is replaced.
during output checks.
while measuring the output amount.
while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the
replenishment package is not detected at the
same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not carried out.
• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.

☞ 81510
40700 1/2
40700
No. 0701-####[SM]
Attach the Replenishment Package.P-#

• When the replenishment package is set, the message is
released automatically and attention message No.703 Would
you like to initialize the remaining amount of the
Replenishment Package? appears.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns OFF.
0002 Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns OFF.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
of the replenishment package sensor

Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package
sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the
jack side when a magnet is placed near the replenishment
package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
☞ PP 3-12 SM Replenisher section (1)
40700 2/2
40702
No. 0702[SM] No. 0703[SM]

Add water to the Water Supply Tank. Would you like to initialize the remaining
amount of the Replenishment Package?
YES Attention message release
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to bring up the message No. 0704: Press the
Suffix Condition [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of
number the Replenishment Package.
- The water supply tank level sensor turns OFF. • Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
Diagnosis
• When the replenishment package is replaced before it
Failed parts Manual No. becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Water supply tank level sensor ☞ 63250 Otherwise, the messages No. 5708 and 5709
• Disconnect the connector of the water supply tank level Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on will be displayed because the actual remaining amount
the jack side when the water temperature is between 10°C of the replenishment solution differs from the remaining
and 35°C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is amount in data.
4. Troubleshooting
not between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ. ☞ 45708
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600 • When the replenishment package is not replaced but
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 attached again, the process will be continued without
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400 initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment
package.
NOTE Condition
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Suffix Condition
number
Circuit diagram
- Before the replenishment package is completely
☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns
☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram OFF.
Diagnosis
Detailed diagram

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
Circuit diagram
40702 1/2
40702
Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting
40702 2/2
40704
Detailed diagram
No. 0704[SM] ☞ PP 3-12 SM Replenisher section (1)
Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the
remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the remaining amount of the
replenishment package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment package is replaced before it
becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Otherwise, the messages No. 5708 and 5709
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
will be displayed because the actual remaining amount
of the replenishment solution differs from the remaining
4. Troubleshooting
amount in data.
☞ 45708
• When the replenishment package is not replaced but
attached again, the process will be continued without
initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment
package.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Before the replenishment package is completely
empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns
OFF.
Diagnosis

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
Circuit diagram
40704 1/2
40704
NOTE
No. 0705-####[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with
a new one.P-# Circuit diagram
Attention message release ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
YES ☞ PP 2-4 Around SM I/O PCB
This attention message will be released only when the
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the
Detailed diagram
replenishment package sensor once.)
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
4. Troubleshooting
refilled forcibly.
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns
refilled forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
refilled forcibly.
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
• When the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has
been set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.
☞ 81510
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 63250
sensor

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63250
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
40704 2/2
41000
Attention message: Printer
No. 1000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
Paper Magazine A
No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
Paper Magazine B
Countermeasure message
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the
printing.
YES or NO
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
- Paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT.
NOTE
• Paper magazine A is an option. (Triple magazine
specification)
• When it is necessary to remove the paper, the message
Remove the paper remaining in the Printer Section.
appears following the attention message.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 (in case of B) ☞ 66040
Triple magazine PCB (in case of A) ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3
☞ LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB
Detailed diagram
☞ LP 3-2 Magazine unit
☞ LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit
41000 1/1
41002
No. 1002
Would you like to feed the leading edge of
paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 1003
Would you like to feed the leading edge of
paper? Paper Magazine B

YES or NO
• Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without
exposing.
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper
4. Troubleshooting
when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is
carried out or after you replaced the paper magazine.
NOTE
specification)
41002 1/1
41004
Circuit diagram
No. 1004
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine A Detailed diagram
No. 1005 ☞ LP 3-2 Magazine unit
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper ☞ LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit
Magazine B

• This attention message will be released automatically when
the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine code sensor A or B cannot detect
the paper magazine code. (All the code sensors turn
4. Troubleshooting
LIGHT.)
- Although either paper magazine code sensor A or B
detects the paper magazine code, the currently
selected print channel is inconsistent.
NOTE
specification)
Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not
soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is
correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it
will go.
Diagnosis
The adjusting position of the paper magazine -
code sensor is defective.

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 63051
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB
41004 1/1
41010
Detailed diagram
No. 1010 ☞ LP 3-2 Magazine unit
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper ☞ LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit
Magazine A
No. 1011
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine B

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine which is different from that set
in the print channel is set prior to starting print.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
specification)
Check Point
soiled.
correctly set.
will go.
4 Check the print channel setting.
Diagnosis
The adjusting position of the paper magazine ☞ 63051

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 63051
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41010 1/1
41012
No. 1012 No. 1013

The print channel is not set. Confirm the Outputting. . .
print channel.
Attention message release YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be canceled automatically after Condition
the all settings required in the print channel are entered, or the Suffix Condition
print channel is changed. number
- While printing, outputting to media, or when the
Condition paper is feeding in the printer, an attempt is made to
Suffix Condition access to the Menu display.
number
- A print channel with improper print channel setting is Check Point
selected.
1 Check the current print position.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
41012 1/1
41014
No. 1014
The system is being initialized, one
moment please. . .

• This attention message will be released automatically after
system initialization is completed.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- After the power supply has been turned ON, the
system is being initialized.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
Power PCB ☞ 64160

Failed parts
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
Refer to 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.
Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE control PCB.
Refer to 4201 ☞ Power PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB.
Failed part(s) [S-4]

☞ 4190
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010
41014 1/1
41016
No. 1017
Would you like to stop printing?

YES or NO
• Select YES to stop printing.
• Select NO to continue printing.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are being made, the NO key is pressed.
4. Troubleshooting
41016 1/1
41024
No. 1024
Would you like to register the correction
value?

YES or NO
• Select YES to start printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The message appears after measuring the test print in
the setup mode.
Check Point
1 Check the channel setting.
4. Troubleshooting
41024 1/1
41026
Circuit diagram
No. 1026
☞ LP 2-9 Around laser unit
Close the Printer Top Cover.
Detailed diagram
YES or automatic release.
☞ LP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
• The message will be automatically released when the printer
top cover is closed.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Interlock switch (printer top cover) turns OFF.
Check Point
1 Check that the printer top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
F3 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the interlock switch (printer top cover)

Interlock switch (printer top cover) ☞ 63050
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser power supply

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply (PS5).

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41026 1/2
41026
Suffix Condition
No. 1027-#### number
Profile data was not found. 0091 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the parameter file for gray control is not included in
Attention message release the hard disk.
YES
Diagnosis
Condition
Failure in the profile data Manual No.
Suffix Condition Install the profile data from the profile CD ☞ 88000
number corresponding to the main software.
0001 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the monitor profile data is not included in the hard
disk.
the monitor initial setting file is not included in the
hard disk.
the profile data of paper type 1 is not included in the
hard disk.
4. Troubleshooting
hard disk.
the profile data of paper types 1 and 2 are not
included in the hard disk.
hard disk.
the profile data of paper types 1, 2 and 3 are not
the flatbed scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
the flatbed scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
the positive scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
the positive scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
the reference table data (monitor) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
the reference table data (printer) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
the parameter file for chroma enhancement is not
41026 2/2
41028
No. 1028 Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
More than 3 correction keys of low, middle ATX mother board ☞ 88000
or high density area. Execute correction? Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
Attention message release NOTE
YES or NO • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
• Select YES to carry out the correction.
Circuit diagram
• Select NO to stop the correction.
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
IMPORTANT ☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
• When this error occurs, the colorimeter may be ☞ CS 2-1 Control section
calibrated with the calibration plate in a wrong position. ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
Stop the correction by clicking the NO key and start a
setup (for example, daily setup) all over again. ☞ CS 2-4 Around colorimeter unit
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
- When the measurement of the test print has been
completed in setup mode, the correction result is ±3
keys or more.
Check Point
1 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly set.
3 Verify that the processing racks are clean.
4 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a
cleaning sheet.
5 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• If the abnormal calibration data of the colorimeter unit is
registered by selecting YES for the message 1551: The
calibration plate data is out of range. Register the
data?, the attention message No. 1028 may appear.
• For the above case, perform Updating the Calibration
Plate Data. ☞ 21110
• Then carry out Updating the Calibration Plate Data. If
the same attention message appears, the corrective
action should be taken according to the following
diagnosis.
Diagnosis
In case of an adjusting failure
Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 21120
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate when it is ☞ 21110
scratched on.
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the ☞ 21110
colorimeter unit failure.
41028 1/2
41028
NOTE
No. 1029
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
Circuit diagram
Attention message release ☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
YES or NO ☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
• Select YES to measure the print again. ☞ CS 2-1 Control section
• Select NO to stop the operation. ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
☞ CS 2-4 Around colorimeter unit
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When measuring the test print, difference of the
density between each step is not detected.
- When measuring the test print, abnormal density is
detected.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the
colorimeter.
2 Check that the test print is correctly made.
cleaning sheet.
Adjustment.
Between steps
G078472
Diagnosis
For defective parts
scratched on.

Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX mother board ☞ 88000
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
41028 2/2
41030
No. 1030 No. 1031

Wait until printing is complete. Paper Specification Registration Setup
was not completed.
Return the Paper Magazine, if you removed it. Attention message release
Attention message release YES
• This attention message will be automatically released when Condition
the print channel is changed or the selected magazine is
attached. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - An attempt is made to print using the paper type
which has not been set up in the Paper Magazine
Suffix Condition Registration Setup, Weekly Setup, or the Printer
number Profile Calibration mode.
- When the paper magazine needs to be replaced
during printing Check Point
Check Point 1 Carry out the setup using the paper type which the
Paper Specification Registration Setup has been
4. Troubleshooting
1 Wait until printing is completed, and place the done.
selected paper magazine.
Diagnosis
Carry out Paper Specification Registration ☞ 32510
Setup.
41030 1/1
41032
No. 1032
One moment please. . .

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Scanning or printing is interrupted by pressing the
NO key.
Check Point
1 Wait until the interrupt process has been completed.
4. Troubleshooting
41032 1/1
41034
No. 1035
Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not
completed.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine which the Paper Magazine
Registration Setup has not been done is selected
when outputting the test print for monitor gamma
adjustment or profile chart.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine to which Paper
Magazine Registration Setup has been completed is
4. Troubleshooting
selected.
Diagnosis
Carry out Paper Magazine Registration ☞ 32520
Setup.
41034 1/1
41038
No. 1038 No. 1039

Paper type for the magazine is not set. Paper type specification is not set.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
- The paper type of the paper magazine with which - The paper type, the specification of which has not
printing or setup is to be carried out is not specified. been registered during printing or setup, is selected.

1 Check the paper type of the paper magazine. 1 Check that the paper type, the specification of which
has been registered, is selected.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Carry out Paper Magazine Registration ☞ 32520 Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Setup. Carry out Paper Specification Registration ☞ 32510
Setup.
41038 1/1
41040
No. 1040 No. 1041

Press the [ORDER] key. Unable to accept additional processing at
this time. The order will be counted. Wait
Attention message release until the output process is complete.
Condition YES
Suffix Condition The order number will be counted up automatically.
number
- Since the machine is waiting until the index prints Condition
have been made or the data has been output to the Suffix Condition
medium, another setting display cannot appear. number
- The 151st roll of film or 151st file of media in the
same order has been processed continuously.
NOTE
• The data capacity which can be stored in an order is limited.
4. Troubleshooting
41040 1/1
41042
NOTE
No. 1043
Laser temperature is being adjusted. One
moment please. . . Circuit diagram
Attention message release ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
YES or automatic release. ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
• When the temperature adjustment of the lasers B, G and R are ☞ LP 2-9 Around laser unit
completed and the machine becomes processable, it returns
automatically.
Detailed diagram
Condition ☞ LP 3-11 Laser unit (1)

Condition
The count down timer The B and G lasers are waited until the
is displayed in the temperatures become to be processable.
Order Display.
The count down timer The laser unit or R laser is waited until
is not displayed in the the temperature becomes to be
Order Display. processable.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The attention message appears until B and G lasers are
processable.
• When the laser unit is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U)
is displayed.
• When the R laser is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R)
is displayed.
• Processable range of the laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• Processable range of the R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• The laser unit heater works to shorten the time required for
adjusting the temperature to processable.
• You can check the temperatures of R laser and laser unit in
Laser Unit Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Diagnosis
Laser unit heater ☞ 63080
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 63050
B and G laser drivers ☞ 66070
Laser power supply
Laser unit ☞ 26710
IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.
41042 1/1
41046
NOTE
No. 1047-####
Close printer door.
Circuit diagram
Attention message release ☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
YES or automatic release ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
• This attention message will be released automatically when ☞ LP 2-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
the printer door is closed. ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
Detailed diagram
0001 The interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF.
0002 Printer door 3 sensor turns OFF.
NOTE
• The power is not supplied to some electrical parts when the
interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely
closed.
Diagnosis
of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2)
of the printer door 3 sensor

Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 63050
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switches (printer
door 1 and 2). If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3
on the plug side when you place a magnet close to the
interlock switches (printer door 1 and 2), the interlock
switches are defective.
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 63050
• Disconnect the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If
there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor,
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Triple magazine PCB.
41046 1/1
41048
No. 1048
Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output
has completed.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While printing, outputting to media, or when the
paper is feeding in the printer, the light source update
is required.
4. Troubleshooting
41048 1/1
41052
No. 1052-#### No. 1053

The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Would you like to feed the leading edge of
Paper Magazine C paper? Paper Magazine C
Countermeasure message Attention message release

Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the YES or NO
printing. • Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without
Attention message release exposing.
YES or NO
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing. Condition

number
Suffix Condition - An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper
number when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is
- Paper end sensor C turns LIGHT. carried out or after you replaced the paper magazine.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• When it is necessary to remove the paper, the message
Remove the paper remaining in the Printer Section.
appears after the attention message is displayed.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
41052 1/1
41064
No. 1065
Would you like to continue?

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Printer door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing using
paper magazine B or C.
NOTE
• This attention message appears when using the triple
magazine specification machine.
Check Point
1 Check that the printer door 3 is securely closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

• Disconnect the connectors of the printer door 3 sensor. If
when you place a magnet close to the printer door 3 (printer
door 1, 2) sensor, the sensor is defective.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
41064 1/1
41066
No. 1067
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine C

the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine code sensor C cannot detect the
paper magazine code. (All the sensors turn LIGHT.)
- The paper magazine code which is detected by paper
magazine code sensor C is different from the current
print channel setting.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
soiled.
correctly set.
will go.
Diagnosis

Paper magazine code sensor C ☞ 63051
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
41066 1/1
41068
No. 1068
Replace the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine C

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The paper magazine which is different from that set
in the print channel is set prior to starting print.
Check Point
soiled.
correctly set.
4. Troubleshooting
will go.
Diagnosis

Paper magazine code sensor C ☞ 63051
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
41068 1/1
41072
No. 1072
Paper color intensity is low. Execute
correction?

YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the correction.
• Select NO to stop the operation.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Paper color intensity is low as a result of the
calculated correction value in the setup mode.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
3 Check the solution condition using a control strip.
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
41072 1/1
41074

No. 1074-####
Paper sensor 1 (SE18) ☞ 63090
Sensors may be dirty.
Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25) ☞ 63110
Countermeasure message Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Intensity again.
YES Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Condition Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Condition NOTE
The light source level when the sensor status changes from • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more, when carrying out Paper
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment via Functions in Circuit diagram
Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Suffix Condition ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
number
4. Troubleshooting
(bit)
0001 Paper end sensor A (SE6)
0002 Paper end sensor B (SE4)
0004 Paper end sensor C (SE5)
Detailed diagram
0040 Exposure start sensor (SE14)
0080 Paper sensor 1 (SE18)
☞ LP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)
0100 Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25)
☞ LP 3-7 Paper advance unit 1
0200 Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
☞ LP 3-10 Paper advance unit 2 (3)
0400 Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
NOTE
• The corresponding sensor is displayed in the second line of the
message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Check the sensor status via Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor
LED light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A (SE6) ☞ 63051
Paper end sensor B (SE4)
Paper end sensor C (SE5)
Exposure start sensor (SE14) ☞ 63070
41074 1/1
41080
No. 1080 No. 1081

Unable to accept additional processing at The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
this time. Press the [ORDER] key.
Attention message release Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the
YES/START printing.
YES/START or NO/STOP
Condition
• Select YES/START to restart.
Suffix Condition
• Select NO/STOP to quit printing.
number
- The frame number for one order exceeds 10000. Condition
NOTE Suffix Condition
• When the frame number of the order becomes 10000 in number
processing with the auto order OFF, the processing scanning - Magazine Auto Change in the Operator Selections
operation or the media reading stops. display is valid, and the magazines A, B and C which
• Even if the attention message appears and processing stops, were equipped with paper of the same width and
processing in the same order can be continued until the frame surface are in the state of Paper End.
number becomes 10000.
4. Troubleshooting
41080 1/1
41302
Attention message: Scanner
No. 1302
Would you like to stop scanning?

YES or NO
• Select YES to eject the film and stop scanning.
• Select NO to continue scanning.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The NO key is pressed during film scanning or
judgement.
4. Troubleshooting
41302 1/1
41304
No. 1305 ☞ 89010
Photometry Section may be dirty.
Clean the parts in the Light Source Section and Photometry
Section. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, execute
the Scanner Change of Light in Daily Setup.
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the Area Registration, Light Source
Registration or Light Source Update is carried out,
the data sent from the CCD is abnormal.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Clean the LED light source section.
2 Check that the LED light source section is neither
damaged nor soiled.
3 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit
and AFC slot.
When you have the maintenance stick (option), clean
with it.
NOTE
• Bring up Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment display
without attaching the scanner adjustment chart. By checking
the condition of the graph, you may specify the occurring
cause.
Diagnosis
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
Scratch mend PCB 2 ☞ 64060
Data change-over PCB ☞ 64080
DIMM ☞ 64050
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 2
Multi power supply (scanner)
Desk power supply 1 ☞ 64170
Desk power supply 2
NOTE
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000
41304 1/1
41306
No. 1306
Update the light source. If film remains in
the Film Carrier, remove it.

YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the light source update.
• Select NO not to carry out the light source update.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The light source registration is not carried out, or a
specified time has passed after updating the light
source.
Check Point
1 Update the light source.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Register the light source. ☞ 37010
41306 1/1
41312
No. 1313
The Focus Adjustment was not completed
yet.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Film scanning is carried out when the DIGITAL
ICE Technology Correction of Operator Selection
is ON and the Focus Adjustment is not completed.
Check Point
1 Carry out the focus adjustment.
2 Check the setting of the DIGITAL ICE Technology
correction.
4. Troubleshooting
41312 1/1
41314
No. 1314 No. 1315-####

Light source evenness is out of allowable LED Light Source temperature is being
range. adjusted.process cannot be continued.

Clean the parts in the Light Source Section and Photometry YES
Section. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, execute
the Scanner Change of Light in Daily Setup. Condition
YES Suffix Condition
number
Condition 0001 The temperature of LED light source has exceeded
the upper limit (46 degree C) of Standby while
Suffix Condition processing.
number
0002 The temperature of LED light source has fallen below
- The light source blur value of each film size has the lower limit (44 degree C) of Standby while
exceeded the standard one due to the light source processing.
registration or light source update.
Check Point
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the room temperature is 15 to 30 degree
1 Clean the LED light source section. C.
2 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit 2 Clean the scanner filter.
and AFC slot.
3 Check the LED cooling fan rotation.
with it.
IMPORTANT
Diagnosis • If the above message appears when starting the
operation (when the QSS is turned on by the program
Failed parts Manual No. timer) or when performing the dairy setup, the operation
LED light source unit ☞ 62050 temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) may be
out of the specified range (15 to 30 degree C).
ND filter solenoid ☞ 62050 For the operation specification of the LED light source
LED driver PCB ☞ 65020 unit, refer to ☞ 62050.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610 • In the case above, each electrical part of the QSS is
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 normal.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Update the scanner light source after the operation
temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) is within
Scanner power supply ☞ 65060 the specified range.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Circuit diagram
☞ S 1-1 AC power supply connecting LED cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 62050
☞ S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 0, 1, 2) LED driver PCB ☞ 65020
☞ S 1-6 Around LED driver PCB LED light source unit ☞ 62050
Detailed diagram AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
☞ S 12-3 Around LED light source unit (1) Scanner power supply ☞ 65060
☞ S 12-4 Around LED light source unit (2) NOTE
☞ S 12-5 Around LED light source unit (1) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
☞ S 12-6 Around LED light source unit (2)
Circuit diagram

☞ S 1-1 AC power supply connecting
☞ 89010 ☞ S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 0, 1, 2)
☞ S 1-6 Around LED driver PCB
41314 1/2
41314
Detailed diagram

☞ 89010
4. Troubleshooting
41314 2/2
41316
No. 1316 No. 1317

Focus Adjustment failed. Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto
Correction.
YES Countermeasure message
Check whether the film is appropriate. For details, refer to the
Condition manual.
Suffix Condition
YES
number
- When Focus Auto Adjustment was performed, the Condition
waveform which can perform auto adjustment was
not obtained and a focus value has not been set. Suffix Condition
number
Check Point - The display was not detected properly when carrying
out the Scanning Position Auto Correction.
1 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit
and AFC slot.
When you have the maintenance stick (option), clean Check Point
with it. 1 Check that the appropriate film is used which is
4. Troubleshooting
2 Check whether the scanner adjustment chart is dirty including the normal display with clear edges.
or there is any distortion and also check the
attachment state.
3 Check a waveform and adjust a focus value again.
NOTE
• For confirming the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.
41316 1/1
41318
No. 1319
Scanner type was changed. The system
will be restarted.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Operating system recognized scanner type change at
start-up.
IMPORTANT
• If this attention message appears, scanner-related data
is initialized after the system is restarted.
After restarting the system either upload backup data or
re-register light source(s), readjust focus, and update
light sources again.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• This message appears when the main software recognizes a
scanner type change from S-2/S-3 to S-4 or from S-4 to S-2/S-
3.
• The detected scanner type is displayed in the third line.
Diagnosis

☞ 4190
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
41318 1/1
41400
Attention message: Film carrier
No. 1400 No. 1401

Lock the Film Carrier. Attach the Film Carrier.

• This attention message will be automatically released when • This attention message will be automatically released when
you lock the film carrier. you lock the film carrier.
Condition Condition
number number
- When the film is not processed with the film carrier, - When the film is not processed, all the film carrier
the film carrier lock sensor turns LIGHT. code detection turns OFF.

1 Check that the film ready lamp of the film carrier 1 Check the carrier code detector via input check with
does not blink in red. the film carrier attached.
2 Check the sensor status via input check. 2 If there is an optional film carrier besides the current
4. Troubleshooting
one, set it and specify the error caused by the film
NOTE carrier or main body.
• If the film carrier is not in position, the ready lamp blinks.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
When the error caused by the film carrier:
Film carrier lock sensor ☞ 62050
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Multi power supply (scanner) PS-3 ☞ 65060
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring Connecting PCB (135/240 AMC-ll) ☞ 65350
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
When the error caused by the main body:
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
Failed part(s) [S-4] AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
☞ 4190 Multi power supply (scanner) PS-3 ☞ 65060
NOTE Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring

☞ 89000
☞ 89010
☞ 4190
NOTE

☞ 89000
41400 1/2
41400

☞ 89010
4. Troubleshooting
41400 2/2
41402
No. 1402 No. 1403

Attach the 135/240 AFC. Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
Attention message release Countermeasure message

YES or automatic release Confirm the Film Cartridge.
• This attention message will be automatically released when Attention message release
you attach the film carrier. YES
Condition Condition

number number
- A film carrier other than the 135/240 AFC-II is - When the 240 cartridge is inserted into the film
attached when cleaning the 135/240 AFC-II at the carrier, the IPI sensor turns ON.
close down check.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Check if the IPI pawl of the 240 film cartridge is
1 Check that the 135/240 AFC-II is securely attached. folded back.
2 Check the carrier code detector via input check with 2 Check that the pin of the IPI sensor moves smoothly.
4. Troubleshooting
the film carrier attached. 3 Check the sensor status via input check.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Failed parts Manual No.
Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200 IPI sensor ☞ 62150
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200
Power PCB ☞ 65260 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Power PCB ☞ 65260
NOTE
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] NOTE

☞ 89000 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)

Wiring diagram [S-4] ☞ 89000
☞ 89010
☞ 89010
41402 1/1
41404
No. 1404 No. 1405-####

The IX frame data is incomplete. Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.

Press the [YES] key to scan again. If this error recurs, clean the YES
Magnetic Head. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release Condition
YES or NO
Condition
• Select YES to scan it again.
When the power supply is turned ON or the system is initialized
• Select NO to process the film.
after the error cancellation, the film carrier sensor turns DARK.
NOTE The machine detects an error in the sensor while checking at the
• When the above attention message appears, the frame beginning of film processing.
numbers which could not be read are displayed in the second
line.
Suffix Condition
number
Condition (bit)
Suffix Condition 0001 135 loading sensor
number 0002 135 ready sensor
4. Troubleshooting
- Some frames cannot be read when the read head 0004 135 perforation sensor
(camera track or photo finishing track) reads the IX
0008 DX sensor 1
data.
0010 DX sensor 3
Check Point 0080 Rewinding sensor
8000 Film needs to be removed due to reason not
1 Clean the magnetic head. applicable to any of the above sensor detections
Diagnosis NOTE
Read head ☞ 62150 Suffix number display.
Magnetic head PCB ☞ 65270 ☞ 4002
Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200
Check Point
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
Power PCB ☞ 65260 2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Adjustment.
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 3 Check the status of the sensors via input check.
NOTE Diagnosis
135/240 AFC-ll
☞ 89000 Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35000
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
☞ 89010
F26 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010

135 loading sensor ☞ 62150
135 ready sensor
135 perforation sensor
135 DX sensor 1
135 DX sensor 3
Rewinding sensor
41404 1/2
41404

Sensor PCB ☞ 65250 135 loading sensor ☞ 62650
Connecting PCB 2 ☞ 65210 135 ready sensor
Connecting PCB 4 ☞ 65280 135 perforation sensor
Connecting PCB 1 ☞ 65200 135 DX sensor 1
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 135 DX sensor 3
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Rewinding sensor
Power PCB ☞ 65260 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring Power PCB ☞ 65260
Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3] AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1). # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
Failed part(s) [S-4] Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
☞ 4190 Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 1 (PS1).

Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3] ☞ 4190
Failed part(s) [S-4] # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

☞ 4240 Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Failed part(s) [S-4]
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] ☞ 4240
☞ 89000
NOTE
Wiring diagram [S-4] • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
☞ 89010 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000
135 AFC-II
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35060 ☞ 89010

41404 2/2
41406

No. 1406-####
Remove the 240 film from the Film Carrier.
Attention message release NOTE
YES • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Condition Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000
Condition
The machine detects an error in the sensor while checking at the
☞ 89010
beginning of film processing.
Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0001 240 loading sensor
0002 240 ready sensor
4. Troubleshooting
0004 240 perforation sensor
0008 DX sensor 1
0040 Cartridge limit switches 1 and 2
NOTE
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment.
3 Check the status of the sensors and limit switches via
input check.
Diagnosis
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ☞ 35000

240 ready sensor
240 DX sensor 1
Cartridge limit switch 1 or 2
Sensor PCB ☞ 65250
Power PCB ☞ 65260
41406 1/2
41406

No. 1407-#### ☞ 89010

YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0001 Loading sensor
0002 Ready sensor
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Perforation sensor
NOTE
☞ 4002
Check Point
Adjustment.
3 Check the status of the sensors via input check.
Diagnosis

Loading sensor ☞ 62350
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Connecting PCB ☞ 65310
NOTE

☞ 89000
41406 2/2
41408
No. 1408-#### ☞ 89010

YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0001 Loading sensor
0002 Ready sensor
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Film sensor
NOTE
☞ 4002
Check Point
Adjustment.
Diagnosis

Ready sensor
Film sensor
NOTE

☞ 89000
41408 1/2
41408
No. 1409
Set the lane for the Film Carrier.

YES
NOTE
• This message will be displayed only when the 135/240 AFC is
attached.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The lane of 135/240 AFC-II is set to neither 135 nor
240.
Check Point
1 Check that the lane is correctly selected.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Check the limit switch status via input check.
Diagnosis
135 lane limit switch ☞ 62150
240 lane limit switch
Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240
Power PCB ☞ 65260
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
41408 2/2
41410

No. 1410
LED cooling fan 1 ☞ 62050
Confirm the film stop position in the Film
LED cooling fan 2
Carrier.
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
Countermeasure message Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Adjust the film stop position by using the cursor keys. When you Scanner power supply 1
change the frame size, select the desirable frame size and press the Scanner power supply 2
[YES] key.
Attention message release # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
PASS, YES or NO
• Select PASS to skip the frame and restart scanning from the Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
next frame. Refer to 4250 ☞ LED driver PCB.
• Select YES to start film scanning.
• Select NO to eject the film. Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4240
Condition
Suffix Condition NOTE
number • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
4. Troubleshooting
- The scanner cannot recognize the frames included in Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
the scanned data as proper images.
☞ 89000
NOTE
• The film stop position in the film carrier is not checked. Wiring diagram [S-4]
• The whole roll of a film is scanned from the leading edge to ☞ 89010
the rear edge and the image data is read.
• Then, the images which are recognized as frames by the
scanner are displayed on the screen sequentially.
• This attention message will appear when the image data of
frames which has unclear boundary between exposed area and
unexposed one is displayed on the screen.
Check Point
1 Insert the film in the reverse direction to check that it
stops at the same position.
2 Carry out the Scanning Position Correction.
3 Register the light source.
Diagnosis
F3 LED driver PCB ☞ 65020

Scanner unit ☞ 20610
Film feed motor (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 62150
Film feed motor cooling fan
Film feed motor (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
LED light source unit ☞ 20620
LED driver PCB ☞ 65020
41410 1/1
41412
No. 1412 No. 1413

The film is upside down. Would you like to Input the frame number
continue processing?
Attention message release YES or NO
YES or NO • Select YES to input the frame numbers.
• Select YES to start film scanning. • Select NO to start scanning without reading the frame
• Select NO to eject the film. numbers.
Condition Condition

number number
- When 135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4 detects the film DX - The frame number cannot be detected by 135 DX
code, it detects that the film is upside down. sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4 while processing 135 film. Or,
two or more frame number cannot be detected.
Check Point NOTE
1 Check if the DX sensor is not soiled. • This attention message appears only when the setting of
Frame No. Detect Error Correction in Additional tab of
4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment. Operator Selections is Manual.

Check Point
Diagnosis 1 Check that the DX code area of the film is not

fogged.
2 Check that the film without the DX code is not used.
Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35000 3 Check if the DX sensor is not soiled.
(135/240 AFC-II)
Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35060 Adjustment.
(135 AFC-II)

Diagnosis
135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135/240 AFC- ☞ 62150
II) Adjustment failure point Manual No.
135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650 Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35000
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250 (135/240 AFC-II)
135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370 Failure of DX sensor standard adjustment ☞ 35060
(135 AFC-II)
Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135/240 AFC- ☞ 62150
135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360 II)
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, or 4 (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
NOTE Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
☞ 89000
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260
☞ 89010 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
41412 1/2
41412
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
4. Troubleshooting
41412 2/2
41414
No. 1414
The FID number was not detected.
Input the FID number then press the [START] key to print the FID
number.
YES or NO
• Select YES to input the FID manually.
• Select NO to start scanning without reading the FID number.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- 240 DX sensor 1 or 2 cannot the FID code of the film.
Check Point
1 Check that the 240 DX sensor is soiled.
4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment ☞ 35000

240 DX sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 62150
Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 0, 1, 2)
☞ S 1-3 Around scanner mount
☞ S 1-8 135/240 AFC-II power supply circuit diagram
☞ S 4-1 135/240 AFC-ll (1)
Detailed diagram
☞ S 13-8 135/240 AFC-II (8)
41414 1/1
41416
No. 1416 No. 1417

Select the 240 lane. Close the Mount Insertion Cover.

NOTE • This message will be released automatically when the mount
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AFC-II is insertion cover is closed.
attached. NOTE
• This message will be displayed only when the 135/240 MMC-
Condition II is attached.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- 240 lane limit switch does not turn ON when Suffix Condition
cleaning the 240 lane for the AFC cleaning in the number
close down checks.
- When the power supply is turned ON or the system is
240 lane limit switch does not turn ON when initializing after the error cancellation, the mount
updating the 240 light source. insertion cover sensor turns LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the 240 lane is correctly selected. 1 Check that the mount insertion cover is closed.
2 Check the lane limit switch status via input check. 2 Check the status of the mount insertion cover sensor
via input check.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Diagnosis
240 lane limit switch ☞ 62150 Failed parts Manual No.
135 lane limit switch Mount insertion cover sensor ☞ 62450
Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240 MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330
Connecting PCB 3 ☞ 65220 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Power PCB ☞ 65260 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
NOTE Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) ☞ 89000
☞ 89000 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
☞ 89010
41416 1/1
41420
No. 1420 ☞ 89010
Select the DX code.

YES or NO
• Press the YES key to select the DX code.
• Select NO to start scanning without reading the DX code.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The DX code on the negative or position film is not
read while scanning.
Check Point
1 Check that the DX code area of the film is not
fogged.
2 Check that the film without the DX code is not used.
4. Troubleshooting
3 Check if the DX sensor is not soiled.
Adjustment.
5 Check the DX sensor status via input check.
Diagnosis
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment ☞ 35000

F3 LED driver PCB ☞ 65020

135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4 ☞ 62150
240 DX sensor 1 or 2
Relay PCB 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65210
Relay PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Relay PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
Power PCB ☞ 65260

NOTE

☞ 89000
41420 1/2
41420
No. 1421
Confirm the stop position of all the frames
to be processed.
Adjust the film stop position by using the cursor keys. When you
change the frame size, select the desirable frame size and press the
[YES] key.
PASS, YES or NO
• Select PASS to skip the frame and restart scanning from the
next frame.
• Select YES to start film scanning.
• Select NO to eject the film.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
- The film is inserted pressing the N key of the
operation keyboard or pressing the F4 key of the full
keyboard to check the frame stop position manually.
NOTE
• When scanning the film, the machine cannot recognize the
frame properly, adjust the stop position manually.
41420 2/2
41422
No. 1422
Select the 135 lane.

YES
NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AFC-II is
attached.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- 135 lane is not selected when cleaning the 135 lane
for the AFC cleaning in the close down checks.
Check Point
1 Check that the 135 lane is correctly selected.
2 Check the lane limit switch status via input check.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
135 lane limit switch ☞ 62150
240 lane limit switch
Power PCB ☞ 65260
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
41422 1/1
41423
No. 1423
Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment. Remove the film from the
Film Carrier.
No. 1424
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
being executed.
No. 1425
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
complete.

YES
NOTE
• This message will be displayed only when the positive film is
inserted.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- A positive film is inserted into the auto film carrier
when two or more hours passed after finishing the
previous sensor LED light source intensity
adjustment.
NOTE
• If the attention message No.1423 is released by removing the
film and pressing the YES key, the sensor LED light intensity
adjustment is carried out automatically.
In this time, attention messages Nos.1424 and 1425 appear.
After the sensor LED light intensity adjustment is completed,
the attention message is released automatically.
41423 1/1
41426
No. 1426 No. 1427

Attach the 110 AFC. Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment. If film remains in the Film
Attention message release Carrier, remove it.
• This attention message will be automatically released when Attention message release
you attach the film carrier. YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the light intensity adjustment.
Condition
• Select NO to stop the light intensity adjustment.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- A film carrier other than 110 AFC-II has been set
Suffix Condition
when carrying out the setup for 110 in the daily setup
number
or area registration.
- If a specified amount of time has elapsed since the
intensity of the sensor LED light source was
Check Point
previously adjusted and the sensor LED light source's
1 Check if the 110 AFC-II is set securely. intensity must be readjusted, but a light source update
is not necessary:
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
110 connecting PCB ☞ 65310
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
41426 1/1
41428
No. 1428 No. 1429

Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. Make sure that the mount is placed
correctly.
YES
Condition
- When the power supply is turned ON or the system is number
initializing after the error cancellation, the mount - When the mount is inserted for the first time, the
sensor turns ON. mount sensor does not turn ON.
- When the power supply is turned ON or the system is
initializing after the error cancellation, the ejection NOTE
sensor turns ON. • This attention message appears when the 135/240 AMC-II is
attached.
NOTE
• This attention message appears when the 135/240 AMC-II is Check Point
attached.
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if no mounts are left in the mount unit and the
Check Point mount stocker.
2 Check the status of the mount sensor and mount
1 Check if no mounts are left in the mount unit and the sensor (inlet) via input check.
mount stocker.
2 Check the status of the sensors via input check. Diagnosis
Diagnosis Failed parts Manual No.

Mount sensor ☞ 62550
Mount sensor (inlet)
Mount sensor ☞ 62550 MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340
Ejection sensor
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 NOTE
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000
☞ 89000 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
☞ 89010
41428 1/1
41430
No. 1430 No. 1431

Confirm the frame size. Attach the 120 AFC.

• This attention message will be automatically released when
Condition you attach the film carrier.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- A frame film which size is smaller than 120 frame Suffix Condition
size (6×6/6×7/6×8/6×9) selected in Machine Status number
of order display. - A film carrier other than 120 AFC-II is set when
carrying out 120 AFC-II cleaning in the AFC
NOTE cleaning mode.
• This attention message appears when the 120 AFC-II is
attached.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Check that the 120 AFC-II is securely attached.
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the frame size (6×6/6×7/6×8/6×9)
selected in Machine Status of order display is as Diagnosis
same as one inserted 120 frame size. Failed parts Manual No.
2 Check that the loading sensor, the ready sensor and Connecting PCB ☞ 65290
the film sensor are not soiled.
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Adjustment failure point Manual No. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Sensitivity adjustment failure in the loading ☞ 35010 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
sensor, ready sensor, or film sensor
☞ 89000
☞ 89010
Ready sensor
Film sensor
Film feed motor
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
41430 1/1
41432
No. 1432 No. 1433

Attach the MMC. Attach the AMC.

• This attention message will be released when the MMC is • This attention message will be released when the AMC is
attached. attached.
Condition Condition
number number
- The daily setup is carried out using the 135/240 - The daily setup is carried out using the 135/240
AMC-II when the light source registration is carried MMC-II when the light source registration is carried
out with 135/240 MMC-II. out with 135/240 AMC-II.
NOTE NOTE
• The light source registration of mount carrier can be carried • The light source registration of mount carrier can be carried
out only for either 135/240 MMC-II or 135/240 AMC-II. out only for either 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II.
• Carry out the light source registration before using the • Carry out the light source registration before using the
4. Troubleshooting
different type of the mount carrier. different type of the mount carrier.

1 Check the carrier code detector via input check with 1 Check the carrier code detection via input check with
the 135/240 MMC-II attached. the 135/240 AMC-II attached.
2 Carry out the light source registration. 2 Carry out the light source registration.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330 AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000 ☞ 89000
Wiring diagram [S-4] Wiring diagram [S-4]

☞ 89010 ☞ 89010
41432 1/1
41434
No. 1435
Insertion direction of film is different.
Insert the film from the rear end (end with
largest frame number).

YES or NO
• Select YES to eject the film.
• Select NO to continue film processing from the front end.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The 135 DX sensor detected that the film had been
inserted from the front end.
NOTE
• This attention message appears only when the setting of 135
4. Troubleshooting
Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function in
Additional tab of Operator Selections is ON.
Check Point
Adjustment.
3 Check the 135 DX sensor status via input check.
Diagnosis
135 DX sensor 1 or 2 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 62150
135 DX sensor 1 or 2 (135 AFC-II) ☞ 62650
135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
135 AFC connecting PCB 2 ☞ 65360
Power PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65260
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
41434 1/1
41438
Check Point
No. 1438
Set the attachment. 1 When the above attention message ☞ 35200
appears even though the attachment for
adjustment is set, check the detected
Attention message release status of the attachment for adjustment.
Set the attachment for adjustment and press YES.
Diagnosis
Condition
Suffix Condition
number Attachment Detection Switch ☞ 62670
33 The attachment which is set is other than the AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
attachment for adjustment when registering and
updating the light source, Or the attachment for NOTE
adjustment is not set. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
34 Pressing START on the Order Display while an Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
attachment other than the attachment (mask) is
attached.
☞ 89000
An attachment other than the attachment for
adjustment is set when carrying out area registration,
focus adjustment and film carrier adjustment. Or the ☞ 89010
4. Troubleshooting
attachment for adjustment is not set.
NOTE
• Crop card attachment is available for the use as the attachment
for adjustment.
G078428
41438 1/2
41438
No. 1439
Light Source was not updated. Would you
like to scan?

Pressing YES scans without updating the light source.
Pressing NO ejects film without scanning.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The film is set in the film carrier without updating the
light source.
Check Point
1 Update the light source by each film carrier.
4. Troubleshooting
41438 2/2
41500
Attention message: Disk/Media 1
No. 1500 No. 1501

Would you like to stop outputting media? The media is write protected.
Attention message release Countermeasure message

YES Release the write protection tab on the disk.
Condition YES

number
- The operation was interrupted during output to the Suffix Condition
media. number
- The media is write-protected when an attempt was
NOTE made to write data to the disk.
• It is used when you want to stop outputting to the media.
NOTE
• This message is displayed only for the Stand Alone Scanner.
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message.
• The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
(max: five orders)
4. Troubleshooting
• The number of the orders to be output is displayed in the
fourth line of the message.
Check Point
1 Check the write protection tab of the media indicated
in the message.
Diagnosis
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram
41500 1/1
41502
No. 1502 No. 1503

Replace the media.### The appropriate file was not found.###

Replace the disk. YES
YES or NO Condition
• Select YES to restart writing.
Suffix Condition
• Select NO to stop writing. number
- The readable file was not found when an attempt was
Condition made to read data.
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
- Although an attempt was made to write several data, • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
the media is filled to capacity. second line of the message.
Check Point
IMPORTANT
• When the data of which capacity is larger than the media 1 Check that the media containing the desired file has
4. Troubleshooting
is to be written, the message No. 1515 Data is too large been inserted.
to write. appears.
Diagnosis
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the Failed parts Manual No.
second line of the message. If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920
• The order number is displayed in the third line of the message. even if the media has been set, carry out the
(max: five orders) Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
• The number of the orders to be output is displayed in the Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
• The number of media, images and the processing time will be NOTE
displayed in the fifth line of the message. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
Check Point
1 Check the free space of the disk indicated by the ☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram
message.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41502 1/1
41504
No. 1504 No. 1505

Image Destination for the print channel is Exif Information could not be read.
not set.
Attention message release Although pressing the [YES] key executes the image data reading,
YES the auto correction (digital camera) and Exif printing specification
(date printing) function of the digital image become invalid. For
applying the auto correction, make the Digital Image Auto
Condition
Correction (other) valid. For details, refer to the manual.
Suffix Condition Attention message release
number YES
- In the state where the check is contained in neither
CD-R external writing system in a media output Condition
setting of a print channel, nor d-Storage, it was going
Suffix Condition
to output to external system.
number
- The Exif information which is memorized in the
Check Point image cannot be read when reading the image and
1 Check the print channel setting. printing.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
the message.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41504 1/1
41506
No. 1506
Would you like to remove the USB Flash
Memory?

YES or NO
• Press the YES key to start processing to disconnect the OS
and devices.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- ← and → have been pressed to remove the USB
Flash Memory.
NOTE
• When the device gets in the state possible to be removed
4. Troubleshooting
safely, Remove the USB Flash Memory. appears.
☞ 41514
41506 1/1
41508
No. 1508 No. 1509

There are some files that could not get Write the data. ##### Order Number
written to the media. Would you like to
stop processing? Countermeasure message
Replace the disk.
YES or NO
For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release • Select YES to start writing.
YES or NO • Select NO to stop writing.
• Select YES to stop the operation.
• Select NO to continue the operation. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Suffix Condition - The data is to be written into the hard disk.
number
NOTE
- The file name (folder name) which cannot carry out
the media copy was contained. • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
HD
4. Troubleshooting
41508 1/1
41510
No. 1510 No. 1511

Read the data. Set the media. Write the data. Set the media.

YES YES or NO
• Select YES to write data.
Condition • Select NO to stop writing data.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- The media is removed while reading. Suffix Condition
number
NOTE
- A media is not placed when the data is to be written
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the to the media.
• The order number is displayed in the third line of the message. NOTE
Check Point second line of the message.
1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set. • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
• The number of media will be displayed in the fourth line of
Diagnosis the message.
Failed parts Manual No. Check Point

If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920
1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set.
even if the media has been set, carry out the
Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000 Diagnosis
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) even if the media has been set, carry out the
Circuit diagram Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram NOTE
☞ CS 2-1 Control section • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
41510 1/1
41512
No. 1512 No. 1513

Data was not read from the media. Data was not written to the media. Format
the media?
Replace the disk. Countermeasure message
Attention message release Are you sure you want to format?
YES, PASS or NO
Condition • Select YES to format the media and write the data to the
Suffix Condition media.
number • Select PASS to write the data to the media without being
- A disk error occurs when the data is to be read from formatted the media.
the media. • Select NO to stop writing.
NOTE Condition
second line of the message. Suffix Condition
number
Check Point - A disk error occurs when the data is to be written to
4. Troubleshooting
the media.
1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set.
NOTE
Diagnosis • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
• If the file already exists in the media, the attention message
If the attention message above is displayed ☞ 35920 No. 1536 appears.
even if the media has been set, carry out the ☞ 41536
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000 Check Point
NOTE 1 Check that the media displayed in the message is set.

Diagnosis
Circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram Failed parts Manual No.
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
☞ CS 2-1 Control section NOTE
☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
41512 1/1
41514
No. 1514 No. 1515

Remove the USB Flash Memory. Data is too large to write.

YES
Condition Condition
number number
- It is in the state possible to remove the USB Flash - When the file is written to the media, the data cannot
Memory safely. be written as the file size is larger than the capacity of
the media.
NOTE
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check the size of the media displayed in the message.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41514 1/1
41516
No. 1516 No. 1517

Data is too large to read. Invalid image format. Failed to read.

YES or NO YES or NO
• Select YES to continue reading. • Select YES to continue reading.
• Select NO to stop reading. • Select NO to stop reading.
Condition Condition
number number
- Total pixels of the file to be read from the media are - Since the image format cannot be identified, printing
beyond 64 M pixels (12500 × 5120 pixels etc.) cannot be carried out.
- The both sides (length and width) of the image read
from the media are over 5120 pixels. (This does not NOTE
occur in the Edit Mode). • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
- One side of the image read from the media is over second line of the message.
12500 pixels. • The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
4. Troubleshooting
- When the data is saved in the media of the external the message.
system, one side of the data is over 7400 pixels. • This message will be displayed each time the file is not read.
NOTE Check Point

1 Check the format of the file displayed in the message.
• The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of NOTE
the message.
• Applicable input image format
• This message will be displayed each time the file is not read. Exif1.0, Exif2.1, JPEG (including Progressive JPEG and
CMYK Format), Flashpix, Bitmap, PSD (including Photoshop
Check Point document and CMYK Format), PCD (Photo CD), PCX, DCX
(Paint Brush Format), TGA (Taraga), and TIFF (RGB non-
1 Check the size of the file displayed in the message. compressed)
Diagnosis Diagnosis
Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000 Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram Circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram ☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram ☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram
☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting ☞ CS 2-1 Control section
41516 1/1
41518
No. 1518 No. 1519

Output media is the same as Input media. Data has been written to this media.
Select different one. Would you like to delete all the written
files?
YES Countermeasure message
Are you sure you want to format?
Condition Attention message release
YES or NO
Suffix Condition
number • Select YES to delete the data that is stored in the media and
write the data to the media.
- The same media is selected for input and output and
the YES key is pressed. • Select NO to stop writing.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- A disk error (There is already files) occurs when the
data is to be written to the CD-R/RW.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
CD
• This message appears only for the CD-RW.
Check Point
1 Check if the CD-RW is set.
Diagnosis
CD-R/RW drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41518 1/1
41520
No. 1520 No. 1521

Select the template. Template information does not match to
make the Album Print.
YES
Condition
- An attempt is made to scan and read the data without number
selecting the template when album printing. - The information file does not exist when selecting the
- An attempt is made to register without selecting the album template, or selected the album template
template when album print channel setting. without the image insertion area.
- The image insertion area of album template is
Check Point overlapped.
- A template other than album template is selected
1 Check if the album template is selected.
when selecting the album template.
- There are the areas of ovals or polygons.
4. Troubleshooting
- There are 41 areas or more.
Check Point
1 Correct the information file in the template
information correction display.
41520 1/1
41522
No. 1522 No. 1523

Are you sure to print the previous frame It was not registered as an option.
except selected one?
YES or NO
• Select YES to print. Condition
• Select NO to stop the operation. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - The input/output media drive which is selected in the
print channel setting has been removed. Or the option
Suffix Condition
registration has been released.
number
- An attempt is made to print the previous frame when NOTE
entering the 1 frame magnification display from the • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
judge display. second and third lines of the message.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check the media drive displayed in the message.
2 Check the setting for Option Registration.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41522 1/1
41524
No. 1524
CD-R External Writing System is being
output.

YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the operation again.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While writing to a CD-R with the CD-R external
writing kit for the external PC, you attempted to write
to a CD-R/RW with the QSS-Kids.
NOTE
• When the QSS-Kids and the CD-R external writing kit for the
4. Troubleshooting
external PC have been installed to an external PC, the message
appears on the QSS-Kids.
41524 1/1
41526
No. 1526 No. 1527

Cannot disconnect the USB flash memory. Write the data. Set the media.
Do you want to try again?
Attention message release Press the [NO] key to stop writing. Press the [YES] key to write
YES or NO the order. Press the [PASS] key to write the order at another time.
• Press the YES key to restart processing to disconnect the OS
PASS, YES or NO
and devices.
• Select PASS to write several orders to the media.
• Select YES to write to the media.
Condition • Select NO to stop writing to the media.

number
- The processing to disconnect the OS and devices was Suffix Condition
started to remove the USB Flash Memory, however, number
it has failed because the USB Flash Memory was - Displayed to check when the data is being written to
being accessed. the same media written once before.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• When the device gets in the state possible to be removed • The number of media to be saved can be set on this
safely, Remove the USB Flash Memory. appears. display.
☞ 41514
• The same number as that of label count which is set on
the Order Display appears as initial value.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. NOTE
USB Flash Memory Kit ☞ 88000 second line of the message.
NOTE • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) (max: five orders)
Circuit diagram fourth line of the message.
☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting • The number of media will be displayed in the fifth line of the
message.
41526 1/1
41528
No. 1528 No. 1529

Registered Print Type of Print Channel is Failed to read the bar code.
not for normal printing.
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition number
number - It is failed to read the bar code of CT terminal.
- When the prints are made from the CT terminal,
Print Type in Print Channel Setting has been set to Check Point
other than Normal Print.
1 Check that the bar code other than one output by the
NOTE CT terminal is read.
• When using the CT terminal with off-line process, this
message appears.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Change the print channel of QSS to the normal print
mode.
41528 1/1
41530
No. 1530 No. 1531

The data was not written to the Network The data was not written to the Network
Folder. Make sure a Network Folder Folder. Make sure the Network is
exists. connected.

YES or NO YES or NO
• Select YES to restart reading. • Select YES to restart reading.
• Select NO to stop writing. • Select NO to stop writing.
Condition Condition
number number
- There is no corresponding folder when outputting the - When outputting the data to the folder of the network,
data to the folder on the network. the network is not connected.
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if there is the corresponding folder. 1 Check the network connection.
41530 1/1
41532
No. 1532 No. 1533

Write the data. Data was saved to the storage media.

Press the [NO] key to stop writing. Press the [YES] key to write YES
the order. Press the [PASS] key to write the order at another time.
PASS, YES or NO
Suffix Condition
• Select PASS to write several orders to the hard disk.
number
• Select YES to write to the hard disk.
- The data has been written to the hard disk.
• Select NO to stop writing to the hard disk.
NOTE
Condition • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
Suffix Condition second line of the message.
number HD:
- After writing the data into a hard disk, it appears for • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
checking before writing more data continuously. (max: five orders)
• The number of the orders, images and the processing time are
NOTE displayed in the fourth line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
HD:
(max: five orders)
• When changing the order or before writing the data, this
message appears.
41532 1/1
41534
No. 1534 No. 1535

Data was not written to the Hard Disk. USB Flash Memory is not set.
Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the File Delete dialog. Delete Condition
unnecessary files in the hard disk. Suffix Condition
• Select NO to stop the operation. number
- The operation to remove the USB Flash Memory has
Condition been carried out when the USB Flash Memory is not
recognized. (Press ← and →.)
Suffix Condition
number
Check Point
- When the data is to be written to the hard disk, the
free space of hard disk is below 4 GB. 1 Check whether the USB Flash Memory is set.
NOTE
Diagnosis
• When media output is performed to the hard disk, this
4. Troubleshooting
message appears. Failed parts Manual No.
• When this message is displayed, the File Delete dialog box USB Flash Memory Kit ☞ 88000
appears.
• Read only files will not be deleted. NOTE
Check Point Circuit diagram
1 Delete unnecessary files. ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
Diagnosis
HD drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41534 1/1
41536
No. 1536 No. 1537

The data has already been written to this The appropriate file was not found.####
media. Format this media?
Countermeasure message YES or NO
Are you sure you want to format? • Select YES to read the next file.
Attention message release • Select NO to stop reading.
YES, PASS or NO
• Select YES to format the media and write the data to the Condition
media.
Suffix Condition
• Select PASS not to format the media and write the data to the
number
media.
- Several files have been read, but some of them are
• Select NO to stop writing.
not found.
Condition NOTE
Suffix Condition • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
number second line of the message.
- A disk error (files have already been there) occurs • The name of the missing file is displayed in the third line.
4. Troubleshooting
when the data is to be written to the media. • If all the files are not found, the attention message No. 1503
appears.
NOTE ☞ 41502
second line of the message. Check Point
Check Point 1 Check that the media containing the desired file has
been inserted.
1 Check the media displayed in the message.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Media or device displayed in the second line ☞ 88000
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram ☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram ☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram ☞ CS 2-1 Control section
☞ CS 2-1 Control section ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
41536 1/1
41538
No. 1538 No. 1539

There are still orders remaining for output. The data has already been written to this
Click the Output Media icon to output. media. Set a new media.

YES YES or NO
• Select YES to write data.
Condition • Select NO to stop writing.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- When the reserved orders are remained, Order Suffix Condition
Display has been changed to the Menu mode. number
- When the reserved orders are remained, the print - When writing to the CD-R, disk error has occurred.
channel has been changed to the other channel which
output media is different from the current one. NOTE
- When the reserved orders are remained, the output • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
media has been changed. second line of the message.
CD
4. Troubleshooting
• This message appears only for the CD-R.
Check Point
1 Check if the CD-R is placed.
Diagnosis
CD-R/RW drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41538 1/1
41540
No. 1540 No. 1541

Data could not be written to the media. The data for media output is waiting to be
Confirm the media drive setting. written. Settings cannot be changed until
the data is written to media.
YES or automatic release Attention message release
• This attention message will be automatically released when YES
the data saving is completed.
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number - When the reserved orders are remained (for example,
- The data is being written to the media. when not pressing the ORDER key after scanning),
the output media or the number of prints to be output
NOTE have been changed.
second line of the message. Check Point
1 Press the ORDER key and output the data to the
4. Troubleshooting
media.
41540 1/1
41542
No. 1542 No. 1543

The same order number data already This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be
exists. Would you like to overwrite? converted correctly. Would you like to
read the data?
YES, NO or PASS Countermeasure message
• Select YES to overwrite the image data. Convert the data to RGB with Adobe Photoshop etc., if needed.
• Select NO to write the image data to the hard disk or the Attention message release
media with _01 added to the folder name (order number) YES or NO
automatically. • Select YES to read the image data.
• Select PASS to stop writing the image data. • Select NO not to read the image data.
Condition Condition
number number
- When outputting to the media, the same order - It is attempted to read JPEG image data with CMYK
number data already exists in the media. format when prints are made from the media.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE NOTE
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
second line of the message. second line of the message.
• The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
the message.
Check Point
1 Change the data to the RGB format by Adobe
Photoshop etc.
41542 1/1
41544
No. 1545
The image size aspect ratio is not correct.
Data was not written.

YES or NO
• Select YES to restart reading.
• Select NO to stop writing.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Aspect ratio of the image is more than 1:6.6 when
outputting the image to CD-R external writing system
or d-Storage with normal mode.
- When saving image data into each media drive, the
aspect ratio of the input image exceeds the following
condition.
4. Troubleshooting
Output image size Limited ratio
16Base (2048 × 3072) 1: 3.5
4Base (1024 × 1536) 1: 7
Base (512 × 768) 1: 14
1/4Base (256 × 384) 1: 28
- No limit with ratio
NOTE
• The file name of which image size is out of the specification is
displayed in the third line of the message.
• Carry out the operations below to write the image which has
not been written.
Change the output image size without changing the aspect
ratio of the input image. Or process the input image to fulfill
the conditions above using the Adobe Photoshop.
41544 1/1
41546
No. 1546 No. 1547

Data could not be written to the media. Data was saved to the storage media.
Confirm that the media capacity matches Remove the media.
the Media Capacity Setting.
Countermeasure message YES or automatic release
Refer to the manual for corrective action. • This attention message will be automatically released when
Attention message release the data saving is completed.
YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number - The data has been written to the media.
- The capacity of the CD-R/RW to be used is smaller
than that of the media registered as an option when NOTE
writing data to the CD-R/RW. • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
Check Point • The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
(max: five orders)
- Make sure how large is the capacity of the media in
Option Registration. • The number of the orders, images, and the processing time are
displayed in the fourth line of the message.
NOTE
• The type of CD and the capacity of the media can be set in
Option Registration.
• For the type of CD there are two types, that of 12 cm and 8
cm. The capacity differs between those.
Type of CD Capacity
12 cm CD 640 to 720 MB
8 cm CD 150 to 300 MB
• The capacity is reference. Set the capacity of the media to be

used each time, because the capacity of CD-R/RW depends on
each manufacturers.
41546 1/1
41548
No. 1548 No. 1549

Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete Data is too small to read.
the image file(s)?
Countermeasure message YES or NO
Refer to the manual for corrective action. • Select YES to continue reading.
Attention message release • Select NO to stop reading.
YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the File Delete dialog. Delete the files Condition
in the hard disk.
Suffix Condition
number
Condition - When reading the data from media, the file size is
smaller than the inputting minimum size.
Suffix Condition - The image size is less than 120 pixels in the vertical
number direction and less than 160 pixels in the horizontal
- When Adobe Photoshop is started, the free space of direction when outputting the image to the CD-R
hard disk is below 4 GB. writing system with normal mode.
- The aspect ratio of the input image is less than the
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
following conditions when outputting the image to a
• The name of the corresponding drive is displayed in the third media other than CD-R writing system.
line of the message.
C:
Output image size Pixels
• When this message occurs, the File Delete dialog box appears.
16Base (2048 × 3072) No limit with ratio
• Read only files will not be deleted.
Check Point Base (512 × 768) No limit with ratio

1/4Base (256 × 384) No limit with ratio
1 Delete unnecessary files.
- The shorter side is less than 80
pixels.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. IMPORTANT
HD drive ☞ 88000 • Inputting minimum size from media is 32 pixels vertically
and 32 pixels horizontally.
NOTE
NOTE
Circuit diagram second line of the message.
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram • The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram the message.
41548 1/1
41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
No. 1550 No. 1551

Register the Calibration Plate Data. The calibration plate data is out of range.
Register the data?
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to resister the correction value.
Suffix Condition • Select NO not to resister the correction value.
number
IMPORTANT
- The unavailable data is registered in the current
calibration plate data. • When the message 1551: The calibration plate data is
out of range. Register the data? appears, be sure to
select NO.
Check Point
1 Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110 Condition
Suffix Condition
Diagnosis number
Failed parts Manual No. - When the colorimeter is calibrated, the difference
4. Troubleshooting
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130 between the two photometry values obtained by the
calibration plate measurements from the leading end
ATX mother board ☞ 88000 to 9 mm and from that to 18 mm is 100 or less.
Check Point
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) 1 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
Circuit diagram
cleaning sheet.
☞ CS 2-1 Control section Adjustment.
☞ CS 2-4 Around colorimeter unit IMPORTANT
• The calibration plate may not be set correctly or be
soiled. In this case, stop registering the correction value
with the NO key, check/clean the calibration plate and
set it properly.
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, and set it
properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit again.
If the same attention message appears again, update
the calibration plate data.
☞ 21110
• Then carry out Updating the Calibration Plate Data. If
the same attention message appears, the corrective
action should be taken according to the following
diagnosis.
Diagnosis
For defective parts
scratched on.
41550 1/2
41550

NOTE
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
41550 2/2
41552
No. 1552-####
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short.
It cannot be measured.
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While the paper is being fed to lead the paper front
end, the paper rear end has passed paper sensor 1.
0002 While the paper is being advanced, the paper rear end
has passed paper sensor 1.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 61000
Paper advance motor
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41552 1/1
41600
Attention message: Pricing unit
No. 1601-####
Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a
pricing sheet.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the standard setting of pricing unit is used for
printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.
0002 When type A (bar-code printer pricing unit) is used
for printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.
NOTE
• When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to
Not in use, this attention message does not appear.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 The cover on the pricing unit is open.
2 There is no pricing sheet.
3 Sheet feed switch is pressed.
Diagnosis
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
PU printer -
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ CS 2-3 Pricing Unit
41600 1/1
41602
No. 1603-####
The rest 2 order could be kept by the
Pricing Unit.
Print the Pricing Sheet.
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Standard pricing unit can store only two more orders
of data.
0002 Type A (bar-code printer pricing unit) can store only
two more orders of data.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-1 AC power supply connecting
41602 1/1
41604
No. 1604
Pricing Sheet Print Out Check

YES or NO
• Select YES to print the pricing sheet.
• Select NO not to print the pricing sheet.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- This message appears after the judgement is finished
or the ORDER key is pressed.
NOTE
• When PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order via Operator
Selections is set to Not in use, this attention message will not
appear after the judgement is completed.
4. Troubleshooting
41604 1/1
41620
Attention message: NMC
No. 1621
Would you like to delete the order?

YES or NO
• Select YES to delete the order.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The Delete button was clicked on Net Order Mode.
NOTE
• The receipt number is displayed in the third line of the
message.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 1/1
41622
No. 1622
Would you like to quit the Net Order
Receipt?

YES or NO
• Select YES to quit the net order mode.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The End button or NO key is pressed in the Net
Order Mode.
4. Troubleshooting
41622 1/1
41634
No. 1634
Data could not be received. Would you
like to delete the order?

YES or NO
• Select YES to delete the order.
• Select No to cancel the attention message and receive
customer order(s) again.
This message will appear onscreen again if data is not
received within 10 minutes.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt was made to load target image data
received from the external PC based on customer
order information received via Net Order. Since the
corresponding image data did not exist, it could not
4. Troubleshooting
be uploaded to the QSS within 10 minutes.
NOTE
message.
• The host name is displayed in the fourth line.
• The request number appears in the fifth line.
Check Point
1 Verify that the external PC and QSS are properly
connected.
2 Verify that the host PC is running normally.
3 Verify that external PC applications were not
interrupted and that the order request is correct.
41634 1/1
41636
No. 1636 No. 1637

Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print Channel was not set. The order was
Print Channel Setting is Normal Print. not accepted.

YES YES
NOTE
• Select YES to reserve the order. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Suffix Condition - When the QSS receives an order from the CT-1 on
number the Net Order Mode, required print channel by the
CT terminal was set for some print mode other than
- When the QSS receives an order from the Consumer
Normal Print.
Terminal (CT) on the Net Order Mode, the setting of
the required print channel is changed before prints are
NOTE
processed, though the print channel was existed
before. • The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• The print channel is displayed in the fifth line of the message.
• The receipt number is displayed in the third line of the • This message occurs on the Net Order Mode only.
message.
• The print channel is displayed in the forth line of the message. Check Point
• This message occurs on the Net Order Mode only.
Check Point
41636 1/1
41638
No. 1638 No. 1639-####

Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is Failed to read the DPOF file. The order
not Normal Print. The order was not was not accepted.
accepted.
YES
Condition
number 0001 DPOF file is edited, and the print channel has not
- When the QSS receives an order from the CT been set.
terminal on the Net Order Mode, required print 0002 DPOF file is edited, and the frame information has
channel by the CT terminal was set for some print not been set.
mode other than Normal Print. 0003 The network is interrupted while reading the DPOF
file, and the print type has not been set.
NOTE
0004 Image file set with the frame information does not
• The host name is displayed in the third line. exist.
4. Troubleshooting
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line. 0005 Image file set with the frame information cannot be
• The print channel is displayed in the fifth line of the message. copied.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. 0006 The order fails to be registered to the Net Order.
0007 DPOF file fails to be copied.
Check Point In the QSS-Kids, the setting of Terminal in Net
Folder Registration is wrong.
- Check the print channel setting.
0008 The request number is duplicated.
NOTE
• The host name is displayed in the third line.
• The request number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.
Check Point
- Check whether it is correct to the setting of Net
Folder Registration.
- Check the network connection.
- Check with another order.
41638 1/1
41640
No. 1641
Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm
the Print Channel.

YES
NOTE
• Pressing YES: OK reserves the order that brings up the
attention message.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the QSS receives an order from the Consumer
Terminal (CT) on the Net Order Mode, required print
channel is deleted before prints are processed, though
the print channel existed before.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
message.
• The print channel is displayed in the forth line of the message.
Check Point
41640 1/1
41642
No. 1642 No. 1643

Destination to save image is not set for The appropriate file was not found.
the QSS Print Channel. Confirm the Print
Channel. Attention message release
YES
YES Condition
NOTE Suffix Condition
• Pressing YES: OK reserves the order that brings up the number
attention message. - Any required files were not found when reading data
on the Net Order.
Condition
NOTE
Suffix Condition
• The host name appears in the second line.
number
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the
- When the QSS prints an order from the Consumer
third line.
Terminal (CT) in the Net Order Mode, the print
channel specified with the Consumer Terminal (CT) • This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.
was set to the External System as the output
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
destination, but it was not set for Writing to the CD-
R External Writing System or Saving to the d-
1 Check if there is the required files.
Storage.
2 Check the network connection.
NOTE
message.
• The print channel is displayed in the forth line of the message.
Check Point
41642 1/1
41644
No. 1644 No. 1645

Exif Information was not read. Data is too large to read.

Pressing the [YES] key can read the image data, but the auto YES or NO
correction (digital camera) and Exif printing specification (date • Select YES to continue reading.
printing) function of the digital image become invalid. When
• Select NO to stop reading.
applying the auto correction, valid Digital Image Auto
Correction (other). For details, refer to the manual.
YES Suffix Condition
number
Condition
- Total pixels of the file read on the Net Order are over
Suffix Condition 64 M pixels (12500 × 5120 pixels etc.).
number - The both sides (length and breadth) of the image read
- The Exif information which is memorized in the on the Net Order are over 5120 pixels.
image cannot be read when reading the image on the - One side of the image read on the Net Order is over
Net Order. 12500 pixels.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE NOTE
• The host name appears in the second line. • The host name appears in the second line.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the • The request number or reference number is displayed in the
third line. third line.
• The frame number is displayed in the fourth line. • The frame number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. • This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.
41644 1/1
41646
No. 1646 No. 1647

Invalid image format. Failed to read. The appropriate file was not found.

YES or NO YES or NO
• Select YES to continue reading. • Select YES to read the next file.
• Select NO to stop reading. • Select NO to stop reading.
Condition Condition
number number
- The image format cannot be recognized when reading - Several files have been read on the Net Order, but
the image on the Net Order. some of them are not found.
NOTE NOTE
• The host name appears in the second line. • The host name appears in the second line.
• The request number or reference number is displayed in the • The request number or reference number is displayed in the
third line. third line.
4. Troubleshooting
• The frame number is displayed in the fourth line. • The frame number is displayed in the fourth line.
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. • This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode.
• If all the files are not found, the attention message No.1643
Check Point appears.
1 Check the file format.
☞ 41642
NOTE Check Point

• Applicable input image format 1 Check if there is the required files.
Exif1.0, Exif2.1, JPEG (including Progressive JPEG and 2 Check the network connection.
CMYK Format), FlashPix, Bitmap, PSD (including
Photoshop document and CMYK Format), PCD (Photo CD),
PCX, DCX (Paint Brush Format), TGA (Taraga), and TIFF
(RGB non-compressed)
41646 1/1
41648
No. 1648 No. 1649

This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be The Aspect Ratio of image size is
converted correctly. Would you like to incorrect. Failed to write.
read the data?
Countermeasure message Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Convert the data to RGB with Adobe Photoshop etc., if needed. Attention message release
YES or NO • Select YES to continue writing.
• Select YES to read the image data. • Select NO to stop writing.
• Select NO not to read the image data.
Condition
number - Aspect ratio of the image is more than 1:6.6 when
- It is attempted to read the JPEG image data of the outputting the image to CD-R external writing system
CMYK format when reading the image on the Net in the normal mode on the Net Order.
Order. - The aspect ratio of the input image is beyond the
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE media other than CD-R external writing system on
• The host name is displayed in the third line. the Net Order.
fourth line. Output image size Limited ratio
• The frame number is displayed in the fifth line. 16Base (2048 × 3072) 1: 3.5
• This message occurs only in the Net Order Mode. 4Base (1024 × 1536) 1: 7
Base (512 × 768) 1: 14
Check Point 1/4Base (256 × 384) 1: 28
1 Change the data to the RGB format by Adobe - No limit with ratio
Photoshop etc.
NOTE
fourth line.
• The frame number is displayed in the fifth line.
41648 1/1
41650
No. 1650
Data is too small to read.

YES or NO
• Select YES to continue reading.
• Select NO to stop reading.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When reading the data from media on the Net Order,
the file size is smaller than the inputting minimum
size.
- The image size is less than 120 pixels in the vertical
direction and less than 160 pixels in the horizontal
direction when outputting the image to the CD-R
writing system in the normal mode on the Net Order.
4. Troubleshooting
- The aspect ratio of the input image is less than the
media other than CD-R writing system on the Net
Order.
Output image size Pixels

Base (512 × 768) No limit with ratio
1/4Base (256 × 384) No limit with ratio
- The shorter side is less than 80
pixels.
IMPORTANT
• Inputting minimum size from media is 32 pixels vertically
and 32 pixels horizontally.
NOTE
• The host name appears in the second line.
third line.
• The frame number is displayed in the fourth line.
41650 1/1
41652
No. 1653
The output media size is too large. The
data cannot be output to the External
System.
Set Media Output Size to anything but "-".
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- With the output image size of option registration set
to -, the input image is over 5000×7000 pixels.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
fourth line.
• The frame number is displayed in the fifth line.
41652 1/1
41656
No. 1657
Hold On Save could not be executed.
Secure enough space, then restart
processing.

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When saving order from the QSS-Kids to the
Compact Archive Unit, the space for Hold on Save
has 0 byte.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
fourth line.
41656 1/1
41658
No. 1659
Calibrating... Would you like to stop the
calibration?

YES or NO
• Select YES to quit the Net Order display and delete the LUT
confirmation file.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- End button at the Net Order Screen is clicked during
calibration
NOTE
• This message appears if calibration is performed from DP2 to
HotFolder.
4. Troubleshooting
41658 1/1
41800
Attention message: Software upgrade
Attention message: Software upgrade
NOTE
No. 1801-####
Execute software upgrade.
Wiring diagram [S-2/S-3]
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase. Wiring diagram [S-4]
YES
☞ 89010
Condition
Condition
Although the version of each control PCB is checked when the
power supply is turned ON, it is not correct.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB
4. Troubleshooting
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0080 Image processing PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB
0800 D-ICE PCB
2000 D-ICE control PCB
4000 Image correction PCB
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB
NOTE
• The name of PCB where the attention message arises is
displayed in the second line of the message.
• Carry out the corrective actions according to the following
diagnosis for the displayed PCB as a reference.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
Image correction PCB ☞ 64010
41800 1/1
41900
Attention message: Main
No. 1900-#### No. 1901

It was not registered as an option. Selected optional function is not available.
If you need to use, Install it.
YES
Condition
Condition Condition
When the setup or adjustment for the option which is not Suffix Condition
registered is to be carried out. number
- After the optional software has been uninstalled, an
Suffix Option attempt is made to use its function.
number
(bit) Check Point
0001 PU
1 Install the software of the option to use.
0002 NMC
0010 Flatbed scanner
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• To carry out the setup or adjustment, register as an option.
• The description of suffix number is displayed in the second
☞ 4002
41900 1/1
41902
No. 1902 No. 1903-####

Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Proceeding. One moment please. . .
Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop.
YES
Condition
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition 1 The F key is selected via the Order Display during
number processing.
- An attempt is made to select Menu using F via 2 The interrupt process is carried out while test prints
Order Display while Adobe Photoshop is being are made during setup.
used. 3 An attempt is made to change each control PCB on
the Menu display or subsequent during processing.
NOTE
• The operation relating to setup cannot be done when the NOTE
Adobe Photoshop is being used. • The suffix number varies depending on the operation in
progress.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Interrupting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing
NOTE
• In the service mode, attention number 1904 appears instead of
condition 3 of attention message No. 1903.
Diagnosis
The following part may have some problem when the error with
suffix number 0001 (interrupting) occurs.
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
41902 1/1
41904
No. 1904-#### No. 1905

Proceeding. One moment please. . . Program Timer was not set.

YES or NO YES
• Select YES to continue printing.
• Select NO to bring up the next display on your responsibility. Condition
Suffix Condition
Condition number
Condition - When the program timer is to be activated after close
down checks have been completed, the time of the
- An attempt is made to change each control PCB on
program timer has not been set yet.
the Menu display or subsequent during processing.
NOTE Check Point

• The suffix number varies depending on the operation in 1 Set the time of the program timer.
progress.
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
0001 Interrupting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing
NOTE
• This message is displayed only in the Service Mode.
41904 1/1
41908
No. 1909
Title was not set.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It is attempted to register the package print format
without setting its title in editing the package print
format.
Check Point
1 Set the title.
4. Troubleshooting
41908 1/1
41910
No. 1910 No. 1911

There is no frame. The format will be This Title data already exist.
deleted.
YES
Condition
number - It is attempted to register the package print format
- It is attempted to delete the package print format and with the same title as existing one in editing the
register it in editing the existing format. package print format.
- It is attempted to register it with no operation in
creating a new package format.
4. Troubleshooting
41910 1/1
41912
No. 1912 No. 1913

There is no format. New format will be This format is used in a Print Channel.
created. Would you like to edit?

YES YES or NO
NOTE
Condition • Select YES to overwrite the existing package format. The
Suffix Condition change in the package format is reflected on all the print
number channels to which the edited package format is set.
- It is attempted to edit an existing format with no • Select NO to create a new package format without overwriting
created package format. the existing one.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It is attempted to select the package format which is
set in print channel in editing the package print
4. Troubleshooting
format.
41912 1/1
41914
No. 1914
The format has reached maximum
capacity. No more data can be added.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- It is attempted to register it newly with the maximum
number of formats in editing the package print
format.
4. Troubleshooting
41914 1/1
41920
No. 1920-#### No. 1921-####

Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Capacity Booster Key was detected.
Confirm the connection status.
YES • Select YES to operate as the high capability type input
• Select YES to operate as the low capability type input section. section.
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
During the start-up, the capacity booster cannot be detected. For the machine with the capacity booster equipped, the capacity
booster has been detected again after the message, No. 1920
Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the
Suffix Condition connection status. appears.
number
0001 Capacity booster A
Suffix Condition
0002 Capacity booster B number
0003 Capacity booster A and B 0001 Capacity booster A
4. Troubleshooting
0002 Capacity booster B
Check Point 0003 Capacity booster A and B
1 Check that the booster hard key is set properly.
2 Check if the booster software is installed properly.
Diagnosis
Capacity booster ☞ 88000
ATX mother board
NOTE
Circuit diagram
41920 1/1
41922
No. 1922 No. 1923

Viewer Software was not found. Confirm Set the destination of Media Output to
the settings. other than External System.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
- The path set in the Operator Selections does not - The Package Prints has been selected in the print
exist when writing the viewer software. Or the viewer channel setting of long length print, and the external
software does not exist in the specified path. system has been selected for the media output.

1 Check the Path Setting of the viewer software in the 1 Change the setting to other than Package Prints, or
Operator Selections. other than external system for media output.
4. Troubleshooting
41922 1/1
41924
No. 1924 No. 1925

Set the paper width wider than 203 mm for Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode?
the Long Print.
YES
Condition
number - The End button is clicked on the Net Scan Mode
- An attempt is made to set less than 178 mm paper display.
width for the print channel setting of long length
print.
Check Point
1 Set 203 mm or more paper width.
4. Troubleshooting
41924 1/1
41926
No. 1926 No. 1927-####

Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Sort by Output Media Frame Number
Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". function cannot be used.

YES/START YES/START
When the attention message is canceled, machine processes
Condition without using the function.

number
- When registering the frame in the frame setting of the Condition
print channel setting display and print channel, the Sort by Output Media Frame Number function of the Operator
media print paper fitting is set to except for Cut, All Selections is set to Sort by Frame Number, but the Sort by
and Real Size. Output Media Frame Number function is not available for the
output external system.
Check Point
Suffix Condition
1 When registering the frame in the frame setting, number
check if the media print paper fitting is Cut or All, (bit)
4. Troubleshooting
Real Size.
0800 CD-R external writing system
1000 d-Storage
NOTE
• The message appears only once just after starting up the QSS.
It does not appear for the second time.
• The corresponding external system is displayed in the second
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Change the destination, or change the setting for the
Sort by Frame Number in the Operator Selections
to Without Sort by Frame Number.
41926 1/1
41928
No. 1928
DPOF file output function cannot be used.

YES/START
When the attention message is canceled, machine processes
without using the function.
Condition
Condition
DPOF File Output function of the Operator Selections is set to
output DPOF file, but the DPOF File Output function is not
available for the output external system.
Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
0800 CD-R external writing system
4. Troubleshooting
1000 d-Storage
NOTE
• The message appears only once just after starting up the QSS.
It does not appear for the second time.
• The corresponding external system is displayed in the second
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Change the destination, or change the setting for the
DPOF File Output in the Operator Selections to
Without outputting DPOF file.
41928 1/1
41932
No. 1933
Select an input media other than the
Compact Archive Unit.

YES/START
The attention message disappears.
Condition
Condition
When processing, an attempt is made so that the Compact
Archive Unit is set to Input Media in Print Channel on the Edit
while the Compact Archive Unit is set toTYPE 1.
NOTE
• If the Compact Archive Unit is set to TYPE 1, the attention
message above appears because the image data saved in the
Compact Archive Unit is RAW data which cannot be read in
the Edit Mode.
4. Troubleshooting
• If the image data is saved while the Compact Archive Unit is
set to TYPE 2, the attention message does not appear when
reading the image data in the Edit Mode.
• If the setting is changed to TYPE 2, reading the image data
that was saved with the TYPE 1 is not available.
Check Point
1 On the Option Registration, change the Type of the
Compact Archive Unit to TYPE 2.
2 Set other than the Compact Archive Unit to Input
Media.
41932 1/1
43370
Attention message: Compact archive unit
No. 3371-####
Could not execute Hold On Save.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The space for Hold on Save of Compact Archive Unit
is not sufficient to start scanning.
0002 The space for Hold on Save of Compact Archive Unit
is not sufficient to save data on the Archive Print
Selection display.
NOTE
• This attention message appears only when the compact
archive unit has been installed and Compact Archive Unit on
the Option Registration display has been selected.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Set some image data held on save to Auto Delete
Mode on the Archive Print Selection display.
NOTE
• Hold on Save Mode is indicated by Hold.
• Auto Delete Mode is indicated by blank.
• Defragmentation has no effect to restore the space for Hold on
Save when this message appears.
43370 1/1
43372
No. 3372 No. 3373

There is insufficient space left for Hold on The data could not be saved to the
Save. Compact Archive Unit. Would you like to
continue?
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to stop writing to the Compact Archive Unit
Suffix Condition (TYPE2) while continuing process of QSS-Kids.
number • Select NO to stop processing.
- There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save of
Compact Archive Unit. Condition
Suffix Condition
Check Point number
1 Set some image data held on save to Auto Delete - Start process of saving from QSS-Kids to the
Mode on the Archive Print Selection display. Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2) is failed.
NOTE NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Hold on Save Mode is indicated by Hold. • This message appears only when connecting the Compact
Archive Unit (TYPE2).
• Auto Delete Mode is indicated by blank.
• Defragmentation has no effect to restore the space for Hold on
Check Point
Save when this message appears.
1 Confirm that the destination is correctly set.
2 Confirm that the QSS-Kids is not in the offline mode.
3 Check if the QSS-Kids and the QSS are connected
correctly.
43372 1/1
43374
No. 3374 No. 3375

The Compact Archive Unit could not be The data could not be saved to the
used. Confirm the setting. Compact Archive Unit. Stop the process.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
- Cannot read data from the Compact Archive Unit - Data that was read in order to be written to the
(TYPE2) when bringing up the Archive File Compact Archive Unit contains errors
Selection display and the Archive Unit Adjustment
display. NOTE
• This message appears onscreen when data could not be read
NOTE from the media due to poor storage conditions.
• This message appears only when connecting the Compact
Archive Unit (TYPE2). Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point 1 Verify that the media can read the data properly.
2 Configure the settings saved on the Compact Archive
1 Check the Compact Archive Unit setting. Unit to OFF.
2 Check if the QSS-Kids and the QSS are connected
correctly.
43374 1/1
44000
Attention message: Edit
No. 4001
Are you sure about deleting?

YES or NO
• Select YES to delete.
• Select NO to stop.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt is made to delete the area made in the
template information correction display.
- An attempt is made to delete the image save data.
- An attempt is made to delete the all area in the
template information correction display.
- The delete button is pressed in the customer
information select screen.
4. Troubleshooting
- An attempt is made to delete the phrase data in the
Phrase Read display.
NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
44000 1/1
44002
No. 4002 No. 4003-####

Red Eye Correction cannot be executed Image cannot be inserted into the
no more. specified position.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
- The Red Eye Correction is executed over 20 times for 0001 The area for image inserting is not selected.
an image. 0002 The dropped area is not for image inserting.
0003 The frame is dropped on the area except the area for
NOTE
image inserting.
• This message appears in the Red Eye Correction operation.
• To repeat the Red Eye Correction over 20 times, reset with NOTE
UNDO. • This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the image is dropped in the area for image
inserting.
2 Check that the area for image inserting is selected.
44002 1/1
44004
No. 4004-####
Graphics are too large to insert.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The horizontal width of the graphic to insert is larger
than the template.
0002 The vertical width of the graphic to insert is larger
than the template.
NOTE
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Reduce the size of the graphic using an application
software of Adobe Photoshop.
44004 1/1
44006
No. 4006 No. 4007

Prints cannot be made with this Print The Letter Information was not read
Channel. Select a Print Channel using a successfully.
larger paper width.
YES
Condition
number - Some letter information file does not exist when
- The specified print size is larger than the paper size. reading a image.
NOTE NOTE
• This message appears in the mode for business card and ID • This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
photo.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Correct the information file in the template
4. Troubleshooting
1 Make paper advance length longer. information correction display.
2 Use the wide width paper.
44006 1/1
44008
No. 4009
Template file was not found. Select the
folder including the files.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- There is not the template in the folder selected in the
template selection screen.
- After selecting the folder in the template selection
screen, the CD-ROM is removed before reading.
NOTE
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if the CD-ROM is set securely.
2 Check if the folder containing the templates is
selected.
44008 1/1
44010
No. 4010
Specify the image area.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The image inserting area is not made in the template
NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the template
Check Point
1 Make the area for image inserting in the template
4. Troubleshooting
44010 1/1
44014
No. 4014 No. 4015

The saved data cannot be read with this Selected file already exists.
version.
YES
Condition
number - When making a new customer information file, there
- The version of the image saved data is old when is a same name file.
reading the data.
NOTE
NOTE • This message appears when operating in the Customer
• This message appears when reading an image in the Edit Information Input screen.
mode.
Check Point
Check Point 1 Save the data with another file name.
4. Troubleshooting
1 Make the image data again.
44014 1/1
44016
No. 4017
The head and jaw position is opposite, or
the selected area is too small.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- In ID photo mode, extremely small area is selected.
- The head and jaw position is opposite.
IMPORTANT
• When positioning the face in ID photo mode, position the
head first, then position the jaw.
• The jaw cannot be positioned above the head.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• In example A, the jaw is set to wrong position therefore the
face area become narrower.
• In example B, the head position is upside down.
Example A Example B
Head position 1 Jaw position 2
+
⊕
Jaw position 2 Head position 1
44016 1/1
44018
No. 4018 No. 4019

Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? If you Import, all customer information will
be deleted. Are you sure you want to
Attention message release Import?
YES or NO
• Select YES to continue printing. Attention message release
• Select NO to quit the edit mode. YES or NO
• Select YES to continue printing.
Condition • Select NO to stop importing.
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- Edit End is pressed during image editing in the edit Suffix Condition
mode. number
- An attempt is made to read the customer information
from CSV file during image editing.
4. Troubleshooting
44018 1/1
44020
No. 4020-#### No. 4021

Failed to write the file. Failed to read the file.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 The data base file for writing the customer - The customer information cannot be read from CSV
information cannot be opened. file.
0002 The CSV file for writing the customer information
cannot be opened. IMPORTANT
• The data base file format is mdb.
IMPORTANT • The data base file manages the customer information of
• The data base file format is mdb. CSV file format.
• The data base file manages the customer information of
CSV file format.
4. Troubleshooting
44020 1/1
44022
No. 4023
Image magnification ratio or reduction
ratio is out of range.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When specifying the cropping area using the mouse
in the edit mode or 1 frame magnification display,
magnification ratio exceeds the setting range.
NOTE
• The cropping value of image data in the edit mode or 1 frame
magnification display is from 10% to 400%.
4. Troubleshooting
44022 1/1
44024
No. 4024 No. 4025

Select the layer. This template has more than 16 layers.
This template cannot be used.
YES
Condition
- The default layer is not selected on the template edit number
display. - An attempt is made to move to the next screen with
selecting the template which has more than 16 layers
Check Point on the Template Select Screen.
1 Select the default layer.

Check Point
1 Use the template which has less than 16 layers.
4. Troubleshooting
44024 1/1
44026
No. 4026 No. 4027

The image size is too large to insert. The same data already exists. Would you
like to overwrite?
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to overwrite the file.
Suffix Condition • Select NO to stop the operation.
number
- The image size is too large to process for inserting Condition
the graphics such as illustration or logo.
Suffix Condition
number
Check Point
- There is the same data in the place where
1 Reduce the size of the graphic using the Adobe Export/Import of image data is performed.
Photoshop.
NOTE
• The data for saving images is controlled with the date when it
is created and saved for the first time. Therefore this message
4. Troubleshooting
does not appear even if another file has the same name.
• This message appears when overwriting the data for images.
• The name of the saved image is displayed in the third line of
the message.
44026 1/1
44028
No. 4028 No. 4029

Failed to export the Image Save File. The drive is empty.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
- An error occurs halfway through exporting the data - The media has not been inserted to the drive when
for images. performing Export/Import of the data for saving
images.
NOTE
• The name of the saved image is displayed in the third line of
the message.
4. Troubleshooting
44028 1/1
44030
No. 4030 No. 4031

Failed to delete the Exported Image Save There is insufficient space left on the disk.
Data.
YES
Condition
number - There is not enough space in the disk when
- The media is write-protected and the exported data performing Export/Import of the image data.
cannot be deleted when trying to delete it.
- The data is read only file and cannot be deleted when
trying to delete it.
NOTE
• The file name of image data is shown in the last line of the
message.
4. Troubleshooting
44030 1/1
44032
No. 4032 No. 4033

Template size is too large to read. Vertical templates cannot be used to make
frame prints. Select a horizontal template.
YES
Condition
- Both sides of vertical and horizontal are beyond 3700 number
pixels in the template. - You selected the template which has larger number of
- Either side of vertical and horizontal is beyond 5500 pixels in vertical than horizontal for the frame print.
pixels in the template.
- Either side of vertical and horizontal is beyond 11000 NOTE
pixels in the template. • This does not occur in the album print and edit modes.
NOTE
• The long length print cannot be made in the album print and
edit modes.
4. Troubleshooting
44032 1/1
44034
No. 4034 No. 4035

A pupil could not be detected in the Additional phrases could not be saved.
specified area.
YES
Condition
number - It is beyond the limit of savable phrase number.
- A pupil is not detected in the specified area.
4. Troubleshooting
44034 1/1
44036
No. 4036 No. 4037

The image size is too small to insert. The same file name already exists. Would
you like to overwrite?
YES or NO
Condition • Select YES to overwrite the file.
Suffix Condition • Select NO to stop the operation.
number
- Either side of vertical or horizontal is less than 32 Condition
pixels in the image you tried to insert.
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt is made to overwrite the customer
information file.
4. Troubleshooting
44036 1/1
44038
No. 4038 No. 4039

This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be Image size during editing is too large.
converted correctly. Would you like to
read the data? Countermeasure message
Change the Image Size to be input or the Magnification Ratio
smaller.
Convert the data to RGB with Adobe Photoshop etc., if needed.
YES
YES or NO
Condition
• Select YES to read the file.
• Select YES not to read the file. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - There is insufficient memory for image editing.
Suffix Condition
Check Point
number
- JPEG data with CMYK format is used for Insert 1 Reduce the image size with an application software
Graphics on the edit mode. such as Adobe Photoshop.
2 Set the image magnification ratio smaller.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• JPEG data with CMYK format cannot be converted by QSS
correctly. But it can read them.
• File name is shown in the last line of the message.
Check Point
1 Change the data to RGB format with an application
software such as Adobe Photoshop.
44038 1/1
44040
No. 4040 No. 4041

The database was not changed. Confirm A form larger than the print size cannot be
the property of each field. used.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
- When the data base file is made using the data base - On the form selection display for ID photo, multiple
creation software, the properties of field is different. larger forms than the print size set in the print
channel are selected.
Check Point
Check Point
1 Check the data base or properties of the field.
1 Check multiple forms or the print channel.
4. Troubleshooting
44040 1/1
44042
No. 4042 No. 4043

Single Form is not positioned. A Single Form protrudes from the Print
Area.
YES
Condition
- On the Multiple Form Setting display for ID photo, number
multiple forms are attempted to register without - On the Multiple Form Setting display for ID photo,
positioning single form. a single form protrudes from the print area.

1 Check that a single form is positioned. 1 Check the position of the single form.
2 Check the paper setting.
4. Troubleshooting
44042 1/1
44044
No. 4044 No. 4045

Single Form is overlapped. No more than three Single Form types can
be positioned.
YES
Condition
- On the Multiple Form Setting display for ID photo, number
the positioned single forms are overlapped. - On the Multiple Forms Setting display for ID photo,
more than four single form types are positioned.
Check Point
1 Check if the single forms are not overlapped. Check Point
1 Check if more than four single form types are not
positioned.
4. Troubleshooting
44044 1/1
44046
No. 4046 No. 4047

When the Paper Setting is changed, the The selected font was not found.
current position information is canceled.
Attention message release YES/START
YES or NO
• Selecting YES changes the paper setting. Condition
• Selecting NO does not change the paper setting. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - When editing the frame and the letter print which is
set in the edit mode, or when carrying out printing on
Suffix Condition
the print channel which is set the letter print, the
number
setting letter font is not found.
- On the Paper Setting display of Multiple Forms
Setting for ID photo, the paper setting was changed. NOTE
• The font name which cannot be found is displayed in the
second line.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if the font displayed in the second line of the
attention message is installed.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Change the setting font to the font which is -
available to use.
For the Windows standard font
• Perform the defragmentation. -
• Carry out the recovery. ☞ 88000
For the font which is installed additionally
• Perform the defragmentation. -
• Reinstall the font. -
44046 1/1
44048
No. 4048 No. 4049

The image size is too small to make a Test No more items can be added.
Print.
Attention message release YES/START
YES/START
Condition
number - The number of cross registered for the cross filter
- When test printing for correction patterns, the shorter exceeds 100.
side of the image is less than 32 pixels. - The number of areas not for soft filter correction
exeeds 10.
Check Point - The number of spot correction points exceeds 100.
- The number of tone curve correction points exceeds
1 Try again after increasing image magnification.
10.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 If you want to add more items, delete some from the
existing items first.
44048 1/1
45500
Error message: Processor 1
In the case of a cooling failure Manual No.

No. 5500
Cooling fan ☞ 63250
The processing solution temperature is
• If the cooling fan does not operate when DC 24 V in output
above the safety range. CD between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each cooling fan,
the tank cooling fan is defective.
No. 5501
The processing solution temperature is Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
above the safety range. BF Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5502 Processor power supply 2
above the safety range. STB When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Countermeasure message Thermosensor ☞ 63250
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the • Disconnect the connector of each thermosensor. If the
manual. measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
Alarm release differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
NO thermosensor is defective.
YES
4. Troubleshooting
Condition Actual temperature (°C) Resistance value (KΩ)
10 20.35
Error message No. Condition
20 12.59
No. 5500 The CD processing solution temperature
exceeds the safety range (setting 30 7.99
temperature + 1°C) after temperature 35 6.42
adjustment has been completed. (CD 38 5.65
thermosensor)
40 5.19
No. 5501 The BF processing solution temperature
45 4.22
exceeds the safety range (setting
temperature + 3°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (BF When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
thermosensor) Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5502 The STB processing solution temperature Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
exceeds the safety range (setting Processor power supply 2
temperature + 3°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB Processor power supply 3
thermosensor)
NOTE
Check Point
Circuit diagram
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor
Calibration is correctly entered. ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
(only when equipped with the chilling unit). ☞ PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB
3 Check that the cooling water solenoid valve for CD,
BF or STB works well (only when equipped with the Detailed diagram
cooling water unit). ☞ PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2)
4 Check that the tank cooling fans (FAN 1 to 3) operate ☞ PP 4-1 Cooling water plumbing unit
properly.
Diagnosis
In the case of a cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling water solenoid valve ☞ 63250
• If the cooling water solenoid valve does not operate when
DC 24 V is output between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
each cooling water solenoid valve, the solenoid valve is
defective.
Chilling unit ☞ 63250
45500 1/1
45503
No. 5503
The dryer temperature is above the safety
range.
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range
(setting temperature + 10°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (dryer temperature
sensor)
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the
measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
thermosensor is defective.
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance value (KΩ)

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
45503 1/1
45504

No. 5504
below the processing range. CD
No. 5505 Processor power supply 2
below the processing range. BF Heater name Resistance (Ω)
CD (H1) 72
No. 5506 BF (H2) 72
The processing solution temperature is STB (H3) 57.6
below the processing range. STB
Countermeasure message Thermosensor ☞ 63250
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of • Disconnect the connector of each thermosensor. If the
purchase. measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
Alarm release differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
NO thermosensor is defective.
Error message release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NO
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance value (KΩ)
error display is canceled.
10 20.35
Condition 20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
No. 5504 The CD processing solution temperature
falls below the processing range (setting 38 5.65
temperature − 1°C) after the temperature 40 5.19
adjustment has been completed. (CD 45 4.22
temperature sensor)
No. 5505 The BF processing solution temperature NOTE
falls below the processing range (setting • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
temperature − 3°C) after the temperature
adjustment has been completed. (BF Circuit diagram
temperature sensor) ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
No. 5506 The STB processing solution temperature ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
falls below the processing range (setting
temperature − 5°C) after the temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
temperature sensor)
Detailed diagram
Check Point ☞ PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1)
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor ☞ PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2)
Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit
(only when equipped with the chilling unit).
Diagnosis
F2 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
F5
F6
F7

Processing solution heater ☞ 63250
45504 1/1
45507

No. 5507
The dryer temperature is below the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
processing range. differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
Countermeasure message Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
purchase.
Alarm release
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
NO
Error message release 10 19.07
NO 20 11.92
The dryer temperature will be adjusted when the error display is 30 7.63
canceled.
40 5.05
Condition 50 3.41
60 2.35
Suffix Condition
number 70 1.66
- The dryer temperature falls below the processing 80 1.19

range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
processing. (dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis Circuit diagram
Blown fuses Manual No. ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
F1 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
F3 ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
F4 ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
F8
Detailed diagram
F9
F10
F11

Dryer heater ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer heater (H4). If the
measured resistance on the plug side differs greatly from the
values in the table below, the heater is defective.
Measured point Resistance (KΩ)

1-2 79.8
3-4 48.4
4-5 31.3
6-7 79.8
8-9 48.4
9-10 31.3
11-12 39.3
12-13 12.6

45507 1/1
45508
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.

No. 5508[N]
The processing solution level is too low.
Countermeasure message Processor power supply 2
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
NO
Failed parts
YES Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
Condition Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor relay PCB.
Suffix Condition Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2).
number
- The processing solution level detectors of the
processing solution float switches (CD: FS1, BF:
FS2, and STB: FS6) turned OFF. Failed parts
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing
4. Troubleshooting
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution NOTE
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
Check Point
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
2 Clean the strainer units of the replenisher pumps CD,
BF, and STB1 and the hoses. Check the output ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
amounts.
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float Detailed diagram
switch moves up and down smoothly. ☞ PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2)
☞ PP 3-4 Replenisher section (1)
Diagnosis ☞ PP 3-5 Replenisher section (2)
F15
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the processing solution float
switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the
jack side when the float is lifted, the float switch is
defective.

Replenisher pump ☞ 63250
Refilling water pump ☞ 63250
• If the replenisher pump does not start operating when AC 24
V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 of each replenisher
pump connector, the pump is defective.
45508 1/3
45508

No. 5508[SM]
• If the water supply pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
The processing solution level is too low. outputted between the pins (BF-W:PIN 3-4, STB-W:5-6) on
the connector of each water supply pump, the pump is
Countermeasure message defective.
Refer to the manual for corrective action. SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Alarm release
NO Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Error message release Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
YES Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Condition
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
• If the CD-W has any problem, the message No. 5524 Refilling
- The processing solution level detectors of the
water operation error. is displayed first.
processing solution float switches (CD: FS1, BF:
FS2, and STB: FS6) turned OFF. NOTE
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF.
Check Point ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
tank.
Detailed diagram
2 Clean the strainer units in the replenisher pumps
(CD-A: RP5, CD-B: RP6, CD-C: RP7, BF-A: RP8, ☞ PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2)
BF-B: RP9, and STB: RP10) and in the water supply ☞ PP 3-12 SM Replenisher section (1)
pumps (CD-W: RP-1, BF-W: RP-2, and STB-W: RP- ☞ PP 3-14 SM Replenisher section (3)
3) and hoses. Check the output amounts.
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float
switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the
jack side when the float is lifted, the float switch is
defective.

Replenisher pump ☞ 63250
• If the replenisher pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each
replenisher pump, the pump is defective.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63250
45508 2/3
45508
NOTE
No. 5509
The circulation amount has decreased.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
manual. ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
Alarm release
NO ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
YES Detailed diagram
NOTE ☞ PP 3-3 Processor section
• This error message will be displayed only when the machine is
equipped with the optional digital flowmeter.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The circulation amount of the CD processing solution
4. Troubleshooting
measured by the digital flowmeter falls below
3L/min.
- Although the machine is not equipped with a digital
flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via
Option Registration.
NOTE
• This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is
set to OFF via Option Registration.
Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
2 Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected
to the pump are clogged.
Diagnosis

Digital flowmeter ☞ 63250

Failed parts

Failed parts
45508 3/3
45510

No. 5510
40 5.05
Processor A/D conversion error.
50 3.41
Countermeasure message 60 2.35

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of 70 1.66
purchase. 80 1.19
Alarm release
NO # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
NO Failed parts
Condition
Suffix Condition NOTE
number • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
- The analog data detected by each thermosensor
Circuit diagram
cannot be converted to digital data.
IMPORTANT ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
• The A/D conversion is a process that converts analog ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
4. Troubleshooting
data of the temperature measured by the processing
solution thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the Detailed diagram
inner thermosensor into digital data via the processor
☞ PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2)
control PCB.
Diagnosis
Thermosensor ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of each thermosensor. If the
differs greatly from the values in table 1 below, the
differs greatly from the values in table 2 below, the
Table 1
10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22
Table 2
10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
45510 1/1
45511

No. 5511[N]
• If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is
The circulation pump has stopped. CD outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
circulation, the pump is defective.
No. 5513[N]
The circulation pump has stopped. BF Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
No. 5515[N] Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
No. 5516[N]
The circulation pump has stopped. STB2
NOTE
No. 5517[N]
Circuit diagram
No. 5518[N] ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
☞ PP 2-3 Around processor connecting PCB and CPU PCB
Contact us or your place of purchase.
4. Troubleshooting
Detailed diagram
Alarm release
NO ☞ PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1)
YES
Condition
No. 5511 The rotation detector built in the CD
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5513 The rotation detector built in the BF
No. 5515 The rotation detector built in the STB
No. 5516 The rotation detector built in the STB2
Check Point
Diagnosis

Circulation pump ☞ 63250
45511 1/2
45511

No. 5511[SM]
The circulation pump has stopped. CD
No. 5513[SM] Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
The circulation pump has stopped. BF Processor power supply 2
No. 5515[SM]
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 NOTE
No. 5516[SM]
Circuit diagram
No. 5517[SM] ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
No. 5518[SM]
Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
No. 5511 The rotation detector built in the CD
No. 5513 The rotation detector built in the BF
No. 5515 The rotation detector built in the STB
Check Point
Diagnosis
Circulation pump ☞ 63250
• If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is
outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
circulation, the pump is defective.
45511 2/2
45519
NOTE
No. 5519
Thermosensor error. CD
Circuit diagram
No. 5520 ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Thermosensor error. BF ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
No. 5521 ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
Thermosensor error. STB
Detailed diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2)
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
No. 5519 The temperature detected by the CD
thermosensor is not within a specified
range.
No. 5520 The temperature detected by the BF
range.
No. 5521 The temperature detected by the STB
range.
Diagnosis
• Disconnect the connector of the thermosensor. If the
differs greatly from the values in the table below, the

10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22

Failed parts
45519 1/1
45522
No. 5522
Dryer Thermosensor error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The temperature detected by the dryer thermosensor
is not within a specified range.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
• Disconnect the connectors of the dryer thermosensor and
inner thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins
1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the values in the
table below, the thermosensor is defective.

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
45522 1/1
45524
NOTE
No. 5524
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have
Refilling water operation error. CD-W a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level
detector and a safety thermostat for each.
No. 5525 The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water level detector for each.
No. 5526 Check Point

Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
No. 5527 tank.
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W 2 Check if the float of the processing solution float
switch moves up and down smoothly.
No. 5528 3 Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and
STB4-W to the sub-tank are not clogged.
No. 5529
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Refilling water pump ☞ 63250
4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release • The replenisher pump does not start operating when AC 24
NO V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
Error message release replenisher pump, the pump is defective.
YES Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Condition
Error message No. Condition Processor power supply 2
No. 5524 The refilling water level detector of the
CD processing solution float switch does When refilling water is incorrectly
not turn ON even though approximately Manual No.
detected
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started.
• Disconnect the connectors of the CD, BF, STB1, STB2,
STB3, and STB4 processing solution float switches. If there
BF processing solution float switch does
is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
not turn ON even though approximately
the float is raised, the float switch is defective.
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started. Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
No. 5526 The refilling water level detector of the Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
STB1 processing solution float switch Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed NOTE
since refilling water operation started. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
STB2 processing solution float switch Circuit diagram
does not turn ON even though ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
approximately 26 seconds have passed ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
since refilling water operation started.
No. 5528 The refilling water level detector of the ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
STB3 processing solution float switch
approximately 26 seconds have passed Detailed diagram
since refilling water operation started. ☞ PP 3-4 Replenisher section (1)
approximately 26 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.
45524 1/1
45530
NOTE
No. 5530
The Processor Top Cover is open.
Circuit diagram
No. 5531 ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
The dryer cover is open. ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Close the cover.
Detailed diagram
Alarm release
NO ☞ PP 3-7 Drive section
YES
Condition
No. 5530 While prints are being made, the
interlock switch (processor top cover)
turns OFF.
No. 5531 While prints are being made, the
4. Troubleshooting
interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch
(processor top cover) turns OFF.
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Check Point
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
2 Check that the dryer top cover and the dryer front
cover are securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250

Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63250
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
45530 1/1
45532

No. 5532
• Disconnect the connectors of the CD, BF and STB
The Processing Solution Safety thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and
Thermostat has activated. 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the values in the table
below, the thermosensor is defective.
Contact us or your place of purchase. Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Alarm release
NO
YES 10 20.35
20 12.59
Condition 30 7.99
Suffix Condition 35 6.42
number 38 5.65
- The safety thermostat of the processing solution float 40 5.19
switches CD, BF and STB turn OFF. 45 4.22
NOTE
In the case of a circulation failure Manual No.
• The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the
4. Troubleshooting
following temperatures. Circulation pump ☞ 63250
OPEN (OFF) 46±2.5°C • If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is
CLOSE (ON) 36±3°C outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch circulation, the pump is defective.
turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
pumps will stop. Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled. Processor power supply 2
2 Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump Processor power supply 3
are clogged.

Diagnosis
Failed parts
F15
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400 # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Failed parts
When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.
switch. If there is no conduction between pins 6 and 8 on the NOTE
jack side when the processing solution temperature is at • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
36°C or below, the float switch is defective.
Circuit diagram
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210 ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
Processor power supply 3 Detailed diagram
45532 1/2
45532

No. 5533
The Dryer Safety Thermostat has measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
activated. differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
Contact us or your place of purchase. Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Alarm release
NO Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
Error message release 10 19.07
YES
20 11.92
Condition 30 7.63
40 5.05
Suffix Condition
number 50 3.41
- The dryer safety thermostat turns OFF. 60 2.35
70 1.66
NOTE 80 1.19
• The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following
4. Troubleshooting
temperatures. # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
OPEN (OFF) 90±2.8°C
CLOSE (ON) 70±4.4°C Failed parts
• When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
and dryer fan go OFF. Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.
Diagnosis # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No. Failed parts
Dryer fan ☞ 63260 Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
Blown fuses Manual No. NOTE

F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
F15 Circuit diagram
F12 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No. ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 ☞ PP 2-3 Around processor I/O and CPU PCB
When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No. Detailed diagram
Dryer safety thermostat ☞ 63260 ☞ PP 3-8 Dryer section (1)
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer safety thermostat. If ☞ PP 3-10 Dryer section (3)
when the dryer section temperature is at 60°C or below, the
safety thermostat is defective.

45532 2/2
45534
No. 5534-#### No. 5535

Print Sorter Unit operation error. Paper has jammed in the processor
section.
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Countermeasure message
purchase. Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
NO YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 Although a specified time has passed since the print - After the printer feeds out the paper to the processor,
sorter unit started operating, the sorter home sensor the print sensors (right, center and left) in the dryer
does not turn LIGHT. unit do not turn DARK within a specified time.
0002 Although a specified time has passed since the sorter
home sensor turned LIGHT, it does not turn DARK. IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• Verify that paper is being fed properly.
Check Point ☞ 56100
1 Clean the sorter home sensor using a blower brush. • Pieces of paper are lined up in two rows, and they are
fed to the processor.
Diagnosis • These pieces of paper in each row are checked whether
they passed or not by the print sensors in the dryer unit.
In the case of an operation failure Manual No. • This error message will appear when the print sensors
Sorter motor ☞ 63260 failed to detect the prints even though the sensors tried
• If the conveyor motor (DM3) is not activated when DC 24 V to detect the prints six times continuously.
is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of
conveyor motor, the motor is defective. IMPORTANT
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210 • The error above may occur when the ARCNET
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the
Processor power supply 2 Version Check display.
☞ 37530
In the case of a detection failure Manual No. • Check the ARCNET communication path.
Sorter home sensor ☞ 63260 ☞ 50520
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Check Point
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400 1 Check that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are
securely attached.
NOTE 2 Make sure that the gears and the rollers rotate
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) smoothly after removing the paper processing rack
from the processing solution tank.
Circuit diagram
3 Check if the lower turn belt of the paper processing
☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram rack is ripped up.
☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram 4 Check that no paper remains in the dryer rack.
☞ PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB 5 Check if the print sensor is soiled.
Detailed diagram
Diagnosis
☞ PP 3-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit
Check the cause of failure in System Version ☞ 37530
Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET
communication error.
45534 1/2
45534

Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET ☞ 50520
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.

Dryer fan ☞ 63260

When the drive motor is defective Manual No.

Drive motor ☞ 63250
☞ 66200
4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB
In the case of a detection failure Manual No.

Paper sensor 2 ☞ 63110
Print sensor ☞ 63250

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
45534 2/2
45536
No. 5537
The Rack Stopper is not set.
Close the cover.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- While prints are being made, the rack stopper sensor
turns OFF.
Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
☞ PP 3-3 Processor section
45536 1/1
45538
No. 5538-#### No. 5539

Backup data error. Processor Print Conveyor Unit was removed.
Countermeasure message Alarm release

Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the NO
manual. Error message release
Alarm release YES
NO
Error message release Condition
NO
Suffix Condition
Condition number
- The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT while the
Suffix Condition drive motor is operating.
number
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is Check Point
abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the 1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.
processor control PCB are abnormal.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
digits of the suffix number. Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63260
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
being OFF or if the processor control PCB has been replaced Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
with a new one, this error message will appear. Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Diagnosis NOTE
When the data is erased Manual No. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400 Circuit diagram
Failed parts Manual No. ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 ☞ PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB
NOTE
Detailed diagram
☞ PP 3-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit
Circuit diagram
45538 1/1
45548
No. 5549-####
Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto
Adjustment error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- It was not adjusted properly when Drive Motor
Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed
in Functions of Drive Motor Revolution Count
Setting.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set
to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
0002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set
to 0, it was much than the required count.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
45548 1/1
45550
No. 5550
Drive Motor has stopped.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- The drive motor has stopped due to the protected
operation.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
45550 1/1
45700
Error message: SM replenishment

No. 5700-####[SM]
• If the replenishment pump and water supply pump do not
Replenishment pump operation error. CD- operate when AC 24 V is outputted between the pins (CD-
A A:1-2, CD-B:3-4, CD-C:5-6, CD-W:1-2, BF-A:7-8, BF-B:9-
10, STB:11-12) on the plug side of connectors for the
No. 5701-####[SM] pumps, the pumps are defective.
Replenishment pump operation error. CD- Replenisher pump sensor and water supply ☞ 63250
B pump sensor
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
No. 5702-####[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-
C
No. 5703-####[SM] Processor power supply 2
Replenishment pump operation error. CD- Processor power supply 3
W NOTE
No. 5704-####[SM] • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Replenishment pump operation error. BF- Circuit diagram
A ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
No. 5705-####[SM] ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-
B Detailed diagram
No. 5706-####[SM] ☞ PP 3-12 SM Replenisher section (1)
Replenishment pump operation error. STB
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays ON even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
0002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays OFF even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
Check Point
1 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
2 Clean the strainer.
3 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63250
45700 1/1
45708
NOTE
No. 5708[SM]
Replenishment Package solution
remaining error. Circuit diagram
No. 5709[SM] ☞ PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Replenishment Package solution ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
remaining error. ☞ PP 2-4 Around SM I/O PCB
Countermeasure message Detailed diagram
Alarm release ☞ PP 3-14 SM Replenisher section (3)
NO ☞ PP 3-15 SM Replenisher section (4)
YES
Condition
The attention message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment
Package with a new one. will be displayed when the
replenishment alarm value is set to -5% (initial value) in Package
4. Troubleshooting
Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes
empty. In this case, the error messages No. 5708 and 5709
Replenishment Package solution remaining error. will not be
displayed.
Suffix Condition
number
- The percentage of the replenishment remaining
amount (internal calculated value) to the
replenishment package capacity became smaller than
the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment
remaining amount < Package capacity ×
Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the
replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Check if the actual package capacity is same as the
one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Check if the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
3 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
4 Clean the strainer.
5 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 27830
replenishment solution sensor

Replenishment solution sensor CD-A, CD-B, ☞ 63250
CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, or STB
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
45708 1/1
45710
Check Point
No. 5710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W 1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
No. 5711[SM] 2 Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Check that the processing float switch moves
No. 5712[SM] smoothly.
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
Diagnosis
No. 5713[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63250
No. 5714[SM] • If the water supply pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W outputted between the pins (CD-W:1-2, BF-W:3-4, STB4:5-
6) on the connectors of water supply pumps CD-W, BF-W
No. 5715[SM] and STB4, the pump is defective.
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W Refilling water pump ☞ 63250
• The refilling water pump does not operate when AC 24 V is
Countermeasure message outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connectors of the
Refer to the manual for corrective action. refilling water pump, STB1, STB2 and STB3, the pump is
4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release defective.
NO SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
YES
Condition Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
When refilling water is incorrectly
CD processing solution float switch does Manual No.
detected
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation Processing solution float switch ☞ 63250
started. • Disconnect the connector of the processing solution float
No. 5711 The refilling water level detector of the switch. If there is no conduction between the pins (CD:5-6,
BF processing solution float switch does BF:5-6, STB:1-2, STB4:5-6) on the jack side, the float
not turn ON even though a specified time switch is defective.
has passed since refilling water operation Processor relay PCB ☞ 66200
started. Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5712 The refilling water level detector of the Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
does not turn ON even though a specified NOTE
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.
No. 5713 The refilling water level detector of the Circuit diagram
STB2 processing solution float switch ☞ PP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
does not turn ON even though a specified
operation started. ☞ PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB
No. 5714 The refilling water level detector of the ☞ PP 2-4 Around SM I/O PCB
does not turn ON even though a specified Detailed diagram
time has passed since refilling water ☞ PP 3-14 SM Replenisher section (3)
operation started.
does not turn ON even though a specified
operation started.
45710 1/1
46012
Error message: Printer 1
In the case of a detection failure (paper

No. 6012-#### end sensor)
Manual No.
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
No. 6013-#### Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Refer to the manual for corrective action. In the case of a detection failure (paper
Manual No.
Alarm release loading sensor)
NO Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Error message release Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
YES
Condition Multi power supply ☞ 66100
No. 6012 Paper cannot be loaded from paper
magazine A. Failed parts
No. 6013 Paper cannot be loaded from paper Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
magazine B. Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2).
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
after the paper loading has started, paper end sensors
A and/or B do not turn DARK. Failed parts
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
after the paper end sensors A and B have turned
DARK, the loading sensor does not turn DARK. NOTE
0003 Even though the paper passes the loading sensor and • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
a specified length of paper is advanced when the
deflection prevention operation is carried out Circuit diagram
during the paper loading and warp-proofing, paper ☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
end sensors A and/or B do not turn LIGHT. ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
Check Point ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the ☞ LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1
paper magazine. ☞ LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2
2 Clean the advance roller. ☞ LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No. Detailed diagram
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020 ☞ LP 3-2 Magazine unit
☞ LP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
In the case of an advance failure Manual No. ☞ LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit
Paper magazine motor A or B ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A or B/C ☞ 63060
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Manual No.
end sensor)
46012 1/1
46014

No. 6014-#### end sensor)
Manual No.
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
No. 6015-#### Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B
Manual No.
loading sensor)
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Alarm release Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
NO Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Error message release Multi power supply ☞ 66100
YES
NOTE
Condition • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Error message No. Condition Circuit diagram
No. 6014 Paper cannot be rewound into paper ☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
magazine A.
No. 6015 Paper cannot be rewound into paper
magazine B. ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition ☞ LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1
number ☞ LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound ☞ LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3
after the paper rewinding has started, the paper ☞ LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB
loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound
Detailed diagram
after the paper loading sensor has turned LIGHT,
paper end sensors A and/or B do not turn LIGHT. ☞ LP 3-2 Magazine unit
Check Point ☞ LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the
paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end
Diagnosis
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
In the case of an advance failure Manual No.

Paper magazine motor A or B ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A or B/C ☞ 63060

Manual No.
end sensor)
46014 1/1
46016
No. 6016-#### Cut home sensor ☞ 63060
Paper Cutter operation error. Cut end sensor
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
purchase. Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Alarm release Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NO
NO
Failed parts
Condition Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB.
Suffix Condition Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
number Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.
0001 The cut home sensor does not turn LIGHT even
though a specified time has passed after the cut
NOTE
operation started.
0002 The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though
a specified time has passed after the cut operation Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
started and the cut home sensor turned LIGHT. ☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
0003 Even when a specified time has passed after the cut ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
operation was completed, the cut end sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
0004 Even when a specified time has passed after the cut
operation was completed and the cut end sensor ☞ LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2
turned LIGHT, the cut home sensor does not turn
DARK. Detailed diagram
0005 The cut home sensor and cut end sensor are DARK in ☞ LP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
the initial operation.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.
NOTE
• The cutter blade may be locked or seized.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
In the case of an operation failure Manual No.

Cutter unit ☞ 25620
Cut motor ☞ 63060
• If the cut motor does not operate when DC 24 V is outputted
between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each cut motor, the
cut motor is defective.
Multi power supply
46016 1/3
46016
occurs, check that the rollers of the paper advance unit 2

No. 6017-#### and the processor loading unit are not soiled.
Paper has jammed in the printer section. Paper Advance Unit 2
Alarm release
NO Rollers
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The exposure start sensor does not turn DARK even
though the paper was fed to the exposure standby
position.
0002 The exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT even
though the paper was exposed and fed for a specified G074435
4. Troubleshooting
time.
0003 The paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK even though Processor loading unit
the paper was fed to the paper advance unit 1. Rollers
0004 The paper sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT even though
the paper was fed from the paper advance unit 1.
0005 The paper sensor 2 (left) does not turn DARK even
though the paper was fed to the processor loading
unit.
0006 The paper sensor 2 (left) does not turn LIGHT even
though the paper was fed from the processor loading
unit.
0007 The paper sensor 2 (center) does not turn DARK even
though the paper was fed to the processor loading G069077
unit. • When the suffix numbers from 0005 to 0010 of message
Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs,
0008 The paper sensor 2 (center) does not turn LIGHT
even though the paper was fed from the processor
loading unit.
0009 The paper sensor 2 (right) does not turn DARK even
though the paper was fed to the processor loading
unit.
0010 The paper sensor 2 (right) does not turn LIGHT even
though the paper was fed from the processor loading
unit.
Check Point
2 Check if the pressure guide is in position.
3 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• When the error of the suffix number 0005, 0007 or 0009
of message Paper has jammed in the printer section.
46016 2/3
46016
check that the spring 2 of paper advance unit 1 is not # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
broken.
Failed parts
Spring 2 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
Detailed diagram
G078460 ☞ LP 3-10 Paper advance unit 2 (3)
Diagnosis

Exposure advance motor 1 ☞ 63070
Exposure advance motor 2
Paper advance motor 2 ☞ 63090
Paper advance motor 3 ☞ 63100
Multi power supply

Exposure start sensor ☞ 63070
Paper sensor 2 (left, center or right) ☞ 63110
46016 3/3
46020

No. 6021-####
Paper remains in the printer section.
Countermeasure message Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Alarm release Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
NO
YES Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Condition # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Suffix Condition Failed parts

number Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB.
0001 Paper end sensor A turns DARK after the error Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.
printer section. was released.
0002 Paper end sensor B turns DARK after the error
Refer to 4202 ☞ Triple magazine PCB.
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the
4. Troubleshooting
0003 Paper end sensor C turns DARK after the error NOTE
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
0004 The loading sensor turns DARK after the error
printer section. was released. ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
0005 The exposure start sensor turns DARK after the error ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
printer section. was released. ☞ LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1
0006 The paper sensor 1 turns DARK after the error ☞ LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2
printer section. was released. ☞ LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3
0007 The paper sensor 2 (left) turns DARK after the error ☞ LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB
printer section. was released. Detailed diagram
0008 The paper sensor 2 (center) turns DARK after the ☞ LP 3-2 Magazine unit
error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the ☞ LP 3-3 Paper supply section (1)
0009 The paper sensor 2 (right) turns DARK after the error
printer section. was released. ☞ LP 3-10 Paper advance unit 2 (3)
Check Point
2 Check if the pressure guide is in position.
3 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.
Diagnosis

Paper end sensor A, B or C ☞ 63051
46020 1/1
46048
No. 6049
Pressure Guide operation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The home position is not detected even though the
pressure guide motor operated for a specified time.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the pressure guide sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis

Pressure guide motor ☞ 63090
Multi power supply

Pressure guide sensor ☞ 63090
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
46048 1/1
46054
No. 6054
The Initial Setup was not executed.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- An attempt is made to carry out printing without
initial setup.
NOTE
• Check the points and follow the diagnosis mentioned below
4. Troubleshooting
even though the initial setup has been finished.
Check Point
1 Allow the computer to read the backup data.
Diagnosis
In the case of failure Manual No.
Carry out initial setup. -
Computer ☞ 88000
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46054 1/1
46056
No. 6056-####
Printer system error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the RAM or the like on the printer control PCB
is checked during start-up, they are abnormal.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46056 1/1
46068
No. 6069
The printer top cover is open.
Remove any paper that remains then close the door.
Alarm release
NO
YES
the printer door is closed.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Interlock switch 1 (printer top cover) turns OFF.
NOTE
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock
4. Troubleshooting
switch (printer top cover) turns OFF.
Check Point
1 Check that the printer top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis


Interlock switch (printer top cover) ☞ 63050
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
46068 1/1
46072
No. 6073-#### IMPORTANT

Synchronous Sensor error. • Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
Replace the unit.
purchase.
Alarm release Failed parts
NO
NO Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ R-AOM driver.
Condition
Suffix Condition # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
number
0001 The synchronous signal does not enter within the Failed parts
specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB. Refer to 4252 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.
Diagnosis NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
Circuit diagram
• The output lines of R, G and B from the laser control
PCB to laser unit are out on their own. ☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
• Carry out R Laser Output ON, G Laser Output ON ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
and G Laser Output ON of Output ☞ LP 2-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Check→Printer→Engine Section. If the results are ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
shown below, each laser is normal.
☞ 35310 ☞ LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB
LP-1700 LP-2300
Laser Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous Detailed diagram
Sensor
Polygon Mirror 1380±7 1720±7
Frequency ☞ LP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
• If all lasers are abnormal, the synchronous sensors (in
the laser unit) may be defective.


B laser driver ☞ 66070
G laser driver
B-AOM driver ☞ 66080
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser power supply
46072 1/1
46074
Detailed diagram
No. 6074 ☞ LP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
B Laser control error. ☞ LP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
No. 6075 ☞ LP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
G Laser control error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Stop Alarm
Error Clear
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
From A communication or control error occurred between
0006 to the laser control PCB and the laser unit.
4. Troubleshooting
0011
IMPORTANT
• In the laser unit type B, this error message will not be
displayed.
Diagnosis
G laser driver
G-AOM driver
Laser power supply
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46074 1/1
46076
Circuit diagram
No. 6076-####
Polygon Mirror control error.
Countermeasure message ☞ LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of ☞ LP 2-9 Around laser unit
purchase.
Alarm release Detailed diagram
NO ☞ LP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The polygon mirror does not rotate properly.
0002 The polygon mirror frequency is out of range.
NOTE
• The processable range of polygon mirror frequency is from
4. Troubleshooting
1373 Hz to 1387 Hz.
• You can check the polygon mirror frequency via Input
Check.
Diagnosis

Laser power supply
AOM driver (In case of suffix number 0002) ☞ 66080
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.

Failed parts

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46076 1/2
46076
No. 6077-####
Interlock error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Unused
0002 When the printer control PCB had detected the
interlock, the laser control PCB had not detected the
interlock.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Laser power supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
46076 2/2
46080
No. 6081-####
Backup data error. Printer
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0### The backup data of the printer control PCB is
abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the printer
control PCB are abnormal.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the printer control PCB has been replaced
with a new one, this error message will appear.
Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

NOTE
Circuit diagram
46080 1/1
46082
Suffix Condition
Setup error. 0106 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
Countermeasure message specification registration setup. (B)
Refer to the manual for corrective action. 0107 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
Alarm release carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
NO specification registration setup. (R)
YES 0108 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (G)
Condition
0109 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
Suffix Condition carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
number specification registration setup. (B)
0001 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0201 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the daily setup. (R)
in the initial setup. (R) 0202 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0002 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0203 The center correction is out of allowable range when
in the initial setup. (G) carrying out the daily setup. (B)
4. Troubleshooting
0003 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0204 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the daily setup. (R)
in the initial setup. (B)
0004 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
0005 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (B)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
0301 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0006 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) (R)
0007 The tone correction is out of allowable range when 0302 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R) carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
0008 The tone correction is out of allowable range when (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G) 0303 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0009 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) (B)
0010 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup 0304 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
is out of allowable range. (R) carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
0011 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup (R)
is out of allowable range. (G) 0305 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0012 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
is out of allowable range. (B) (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
in the paper specification registration setup. (R) (B)
0102 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0401 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
in the paper specification registration setup. (G) 0402 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0103 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0403 The center correction is out of allowable range when
in the paper specification registration setup. (B) carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
specification registration setup. (R) 0405 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0105 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper 0406 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
specification registration setup. (G) carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
0501 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (R)
46082 1/2
46082
Suffix Condition Circuit diagram

number ☞ CS 2-1 Control section
0502 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
when carrying out each setup. (G)
0503 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (B)
0504 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (R) ☞ LP 2-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
0505 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
when carrying out each setup. (G) ☞ LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB
0506 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range ☞ LP 2-9 Around laser unit
when carrying out each setup. (B)
0507 The target density setting value is out of allowable Detailed diagram
range when carrying out each setup. (R) ☞ LP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
0508 The target density setting value is out of allowable ☞ LP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
range when carrying out each setup. (G)
0509 The target density setting value is out of allowable
range when carrying out each setup. (B)
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Calibrate the colorimeter.
Diagnosis
In case of an adjusting failure Manual No.
In the case of a colorimeter failure Manual No.

Colorimeter unit failure ☞ 21110
Calibration plate failure

G laser driver
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser power supply
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46082 2/2
46086

No. 6087
Laser Control PCB system error.
Laser power supply
purchase. Failed parts
Alarm release Refer to 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.
NO
Error message release Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
YES
NOTE
Condition Circuit diagram
An error occurs on the laser control PCB. ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
Suffix Condition ☞ LP 2-9 Around laser unit
number
0001 Data processing error
4. Troubleshooting
0002 Memory error
0003 Communication error
0004 Exposure operation error
0006 Exposure operation error
0007 Communication error
0009
0010
0011
0019
0022 Communication error between the printer control
PCB and laser control PCB occurs.
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is not normal.
Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
Diagnosis
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET ☞ 50520

46086 1/1
46100
NOTE
No. 6101-####
Paper Hold Motor operation error.
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LP 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
purchase. ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
Alarm release
NO ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Error message release ☞ LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2
NO
Detailed diagram
Condition ☞ LP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The paper hold sensor does not turn DARK from
LIGHT even though a specified time has elapsed
after starting the paper hold motor operation.
0002 The paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT from
DARK even though a specified time has elapsed after
4. Troubleshooting
starting the paper hold motor operation.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
Diagnosis

Paper hold sensor ☞ 63060

Paper hold motor ☞ 63060
Printer power supply 1
# Symptoms result from disconnection of connector

Failed parts
☞ Printer I/O PCB 1
☞ Printer I/O PCB 2
46100 1/1
46104
Circuit diagram
No. 6104-####
Printer Door is open.
Countermeasure message ☞ LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1
Remove any paper that remains then close Printer Doors 1 and 2. ☞ LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB
Alarm release
NO Detailed diagram
Error message release ☞ LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While prints are being made, the interlock switch
(printer doors 1 or 2) turns OFF.
0002 While prints are being made, the printer door 3
sensor turns OFF.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock
switch (printer door 1 or 2) or printer door 3 sensor turns OFF.
Check Point
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely
closed.
Diagnosis
of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2)

Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 63050
• Disconnect the connector of the interlock switches (printer
door 1 and 2). If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3
on the plug side when you place a magnet close to the
interlock switches (printer door 1 and 2), the interlock
switches are defective.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46104 1/2
46104
No. 6105 IMPORTANT

B Laser light source status error. • Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
No. 6106 Replace the unit.
G Laser light source status error.
Countermeasure message Failed parts
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.
purchase.
Refer to 4202 ☞ B laser driver.
Alarm release
NO Refer to 4202 ☞ G laser driver.
NO NOTE
Condition
Circuit diagram
Error message Condition
No.
6105 An error occurs in the light source state of
B laser. ☞ LP 2-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
6106 An error occurs in the light source state of ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
G laser. ☞ LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB
NOTE
• This error lets you know that the B/G laser head in the laser
unit has deteriorated. Detailed diagram
• When the error is released once, the error does not recur until ☞ LP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
the power supply is reset or the machine is started by the ☞ LP 3-13 Laser unit (3)
program timer. ☞ LP 3-14 Laser unit (4)
IMPORTANT
• If an error occurs every time the power supply is reset or
the machine is started by the program timer, check the
contents of Point. When there is no problem there, it is
highly possible that the laser unit is defective.
• Check each of G Laser Light Source Status and B
Laser Light Source Status for Input Check → Printer
→ Engine Section, and if it is OK, it is highly possible
that each part at the Failed parts is normal.
☞ 35210
• Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below if either G
Laser Light Source Status or B Laser Light Source
Status is No Good.
Diagnosis
Point
1 Check if the power (5 V) is supplied from the laser I/O PCB
and laser control PCB.

G laser driver
46104 2/2
46107
Circuit diagram
No. 6107-####
R Laser temperature is out of range.
Countermeasure message ☞ LP 2-9 Around laser unit
purchase. Detailed diagram
Alarm release ☞ LP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and
28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper limit
temperature) again.
0002 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and
4. Troubleshooting
28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature falls under 25.0°C (lower limit
temperature) again.
NOTE
• The R laser thermosensor is built into the R laser.
• You can check the temperature of R laser in Laser Unit
Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Perform the diagnosis of ☞ Specifying the occurring
cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R)
appears. Refer to 4302.
Diagnosis
Laser power supply
Laser unit cooling fans 1 or 2 (Suffix number ☞ 63050
0001)
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46107 1/1
46112

No. 6112-#### loading sensor)
Manual No.
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
C Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Countermeasure message # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Alarm release Failed parts
NO Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.
Error message release Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2).
YES
Condition # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Suffix Condition
Failed parts
number
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced
after the paper loading has started, paper end sensor
C does not turn DARK. NOTE
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
after the paper end sensor C has turned DARK, the
4. Troubleshooting
Circuit diagram
loading sensor does not turn DARK.
0003 Even though the paper passes the loading sensor and
a specified length of paper is advanced when the ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
deflection prevention operation is carried out ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
during the paper loading, paper end sensor C does not ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
paper magazine.
Detailed diagram
Diagnosis

Paper magazine motor C ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor B/C ☞ 63060

Manual No.
end sensor)

Manual No.
loading sensor)
Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
46112 1/2
46112
NOTE
No. 6113-####
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C
Circuit diagram
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
Alarm release ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
NO
Error message release ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
YES ☞ LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1
Condition ☞ LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3
Suffix Condition
number Detailed diagram
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound ☞ LP 3-2 Magazine unit
after the paper rewinding has started, the paper ☞ LP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound
after the paper loading sensor has turned LIGHT,
4. Troubleshooting
paper end sensor C does not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
paper magazine.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end
Diagnosis

Paper magazine motor C ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor B/C ☞ 63060

Manual No.
end sensor)

Manual No.
loading sensor)
46112 2/2
46134
Circuit diagram
No. 6134-####
Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor
operation error.
Detailed diagram
purchase. ☞ LP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The paper supply pressure change sensor does not
turn DARK even though a specified time elapsed
after starting the paper supply pressure change motor
operation.
4. Troubleshooting
0002 The paper supply pressure change sensor does not
turn LIGHT even though a specified time elapsed
after starting the paper supply pressure change motor
operation.
Diagnosis

Paper supply pressure change motor ☞ 63060

Paper supply pressure change sensor ☞ 63060

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46134 1/2
46134
NOTE
No. 6135-####
Arm Unit 1 operation error.
Circuit diagram
Alarm release
NO ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
NO ☞ LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2
Condition
Suffix Condition Detailed diagram
number ☞ LP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2)
0001 The zigzaging correction sensor does not turn DARK ☞ LP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1)
even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm
unit 1 for the specified length in the direction of
paper advance.
4. Troubleshooting
0002 The zigzaging correction sensor does not turn LIGHT
even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm
unit 1 for the specified length in the reverse direction
of paper advance when zigzag correction sensor is
DARK.
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Carry out paper sensor adjustment. ☞ 36000
Diagnosis

Paper supply arm motor (right or left) ☞ 63060

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 63070

Failed parts
46134 2/2
46136
NOTE
No. 6136-####
Exposure Advance Pressure Change
Motor 1 operation error. Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
purchase. ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Alarm release
NO
Detailed diagram
Condition ☞ LP 3-6 Exposure advance unit (2)
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not
turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the
specified length.
4. Troubleshooting
turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure
specified length.
Diagnosis

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 ☞ 63070

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 ☞ 63070

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1).

Failed parts
46136 1/2
46136
Circuit diagram
No. 6137-####
Exposure Advance Pressure Change
Motor 2 operation error. Detailed diagram
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
4. Troubleshooting
specified length.
turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure
specified length.
Diagnosis

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 ☞ 63060

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 ☞ 63070

Failed parts
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46136 2/2
46138

No. 6138-####
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation Failed parts
error. Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3.
No. 6139-#### NOTE

Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
operation error. Circuit diagram
Alarm release ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
NO
NO
Detailed diagram
Condition ☞ LP 3-8 Paper advance unit 2 (1)
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
0001 The arm sensor (left) or (right) does not turn DARK
even though the paper advance arm motor (left) or
(right) has operated for a specified pulse.
0002 The arm sensor (left) or (right) does not turn RIGHT
even though the paper advance arm motor (left) or
Check Point
1 Clean the arm sensor (right or left). ☞ 63100
Diagnosis

Paper advance arm motor (right or left) ☞ 63100
Multi power supply

Arm sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100

Failed parts
46138 1/1
46140
No. 6140-####
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.
No. 6141-####
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The lane select sensor (left) or (right) does not turn
DARK even though the lane select motor (left) or
4. Troubleshooting
0002 The lane select sensor (left) or (right) does not turn
LIGHT even though the lane select motor (left) or
Diagnosis

Lane select motor (right, left) ☞ 63100
Multi power supply

Lane select sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
46140 1/1
46142
No. 6142-####
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor Failed parts
(Left) operation error. Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3.
No. 6143-#### NOTE

Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
(Right) operation error. Circuit diagram
NO
NO
Detailed diagram
Condition ☞ LP 3-10 Paper advance unit 2 (3)
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
0001 The paper advance pressure change sensor (left) or
(right) does not turn DARK even though the paper
advance pressure change motor (left) or (right)
operated and the pressure roller increased the
pressure.
0002 The paper advance pressure release sensor (left) or
(right) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper
advance pressure change motor (left) or (right)
operated and the pressure roller released the pressure.
Diagnosis

Paper advance pressure change motor (right ☞ 63100
or left)
Multi power supply

Paper advance pressure change sensor (right ☞ 63100
or left)

Failed parts
46142 1/1
46148

No. 6148-####
Paper End Sensor A error.
No. 6149-#### Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Paper End Sensor B error. Multi power supply ☞ 66100
No. 6150-#### NOTE
Paper End Sensor C error. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
Intensity again. ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
NO
YES ☞ LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB
Condition Detailed diagram

4. Troubleshooting
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.
NOTE
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A, B or C ☞ 63051
46148 1/1
46151
NOTE
No. 6151-####
Paper Loading Sensor error.
Circuit diagram
Contact us or your place of purchase. ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
Alarm release ☞ LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
NO
Error message release ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
YES ☞ LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2
Condition Detailed diagram

Condition ☞ LP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1)
Adjustment.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
not turn DARK.
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
Diagnosis
46151 1/1
46152
Circuit diagram
No. 6152-####
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error.
No. 6153-#### ☞ LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right)
error. Detailed diagram
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment.
NOTE
Suffix Condition
number
not turn DARK.
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the zigzag correction sensor (right or left).
☞ 63070
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
Diagnosis
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 63070
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46152 1/1
46154
NOTE
No. 6155-####
Exposure Start Sensor error.
Circuit diagram
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
Intensity again.
Condition
Condition
Adjustment.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Suffix Condition
number
not turn DARK.
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the exposure start sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
Diagnosis
46154 1/1
46156
NOTE
No. 6157-####
Paper Sensor 1 error.
Circuit diagram
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
Intensity again.
Condition
Condition
Adjustment.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Suffix Condition
number
not turn DARK.
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean paper sensor 1 using a blower brush.
NOTE
Diagnosis
46156 1/1
46158

No. 6158-####
Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error.
No. 6159-#### Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error.
NOTE
No. 6160-#### • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
Intensity again. ☞ LP 2-2 DC power supply circuit diagram
Alarm release ☞ LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3
NO
Detailed diagram
YES
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Adjustment.
NOTE
Suffix Condition
number
not turn DARK.
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean paper sensor 2 using a blower brush.
NOTE
Diagnosis
46158 1/1
46172
No. 6173
Printer Door 3 is open. It may be
adversely affect print quality.
Close the printer door. When you inspect the paper currently
processing, check whether it is satisfactory.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- The print door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing
from paper magazine B or C.
NOTE
• This error appears to let the operator know that opening
4. Troubleshooting
printer door 3 during printing is a wrong operation and that
adversely affects the print quality.
Check Point
1 Check that the printer door 3 is securely closed.
Diagnosis

NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
46172 1/1
46176
Detailed diagram
No. 6177-#### ☞ LP 3-11 Laser unit (1)
Laser Unit temperature is out of range.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit
temperature) again.
0002 Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C
4. Troubleshooting
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature falls under 20.0°C (lower
limit temperature)again.
NOTE
• The laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Laser Unit
Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Diagnosis
Laser power supply
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 63050
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46176 1/1
46178
No. 6179
B/G Laser Output Unit error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Stop Alarm
Error Clear
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The type detection of the laser unit differs between
0002 lasers B and G.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B and G
have been securely connected.
Diagnosis
G laser driver
Laser power supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
46178 1/1
46186
No. 6187
Setup calculation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Problematic setup calculation result detected.
0002
NOTE
• Perform initial setup again if the error shown above occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Carry out initial setup. -
46186 1/1
46302
Error message: Scanner
No. 6303-####
Scanner Zoom 1 operation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-2/S-3]
scanner.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The zoom 1 pre-home sensor does not turn DARK
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified
4. Troubleshooting
pulse counterclockwise in its initial operation.
0002 The zoom 1 pre-home sensor does not turn LIGHT
pulse clockwise in its initial operation.
0003 The zoom 1 pre-home sensor does not turn DARK
pulse counterclockwise after the zoom 1 pre-home
sensor turned LIGHT in its initial operation.
0004 The zoom 1 home sensor does not turn LIGHT even
though the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse
counterclockwise after the zoom 1 pre-home sensor
turned DARK in its initial operation.
Diagnosis
NOTE

☞ 89000
46302 1/1
46304
No. 6304-#### No. 6305-####

Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. Scanner Focus operation error.
Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-2/S-3] • This error only occurs if you are using an [S-4] scanner.
scanner.
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number 0001 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
0001 The zoom 2 pre-home sensor does not turn LIGHT clockwise for specified distance, but focus home
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified sensor did not allow light to permeate lens.
4. Troubleshooting
pulse clockwise in its initial operation. 0002 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
0002 The zoom 2 pre-home sensor does not turn DARK counterclockwise for specified distance, but focus
even though the zoom lens operated for a specified home sensor did not block light.
pulse counterclockwise in its initial operation. 0003 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
0003 The zoom 2 home sensor does not turn LIGHT even clockwise for specified distance after focus home
though the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse sensor blocked light, but focus home sensor did not
counterclockwise after the zoom 2 pre-home sensor subsequently allow light to permeate lens.
turned DARK in its initial operation.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Scanner unit ☞ 20610
Scanner unit ☞ 20610 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Scanner power supply 2
Scanner power supply 2 Multi power supply (scanner)
NOTE
☞ 89000
46304 1/1
46306
No. 6306-####
Scanner IRIS operation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-2/S-3]
scanner.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The IRIS sensor does not turn DARK even though
the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse
4. Troubleshooting
clockwise in its initial operation.
0002 The IRIS sensor does not turn LIGHT even though
the zoom lens operated for a specified pulse
counterclockwise in its initial operation.
0003 IRIS sensor does not turn DARK even though the
zoom lens operated for a specified pulse clockwise
after the IRIS sensor turned LIGHT in its initial
operation.
Diagnosis

Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner unit.
NOTE

☞ 89000
46306 1/1
46308
No. 6309-####
Scanner change of light error.
purchase.
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the daily setup has not been
completed properly. After troubleshooting, carry out the
daily setup again.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
0005 The Light Source Update was carried out with the
film carrier which is not registered the light source.
Check Point
1 Register the light source.
46308 1/1
46310
No. 6311-####
Scanner data error.
purchase.
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the light source registration data
will be erased. In this case, you have to read backup
data or carry out the light source registration again.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
- While the backup data is being read, the detected data
is out of range.
NOTE
• Although the suffix numbers for this error message will vary
depending on the error occurring conditions, the corrective
action should be taken according to the the following check
point and diagnosis.
Check Point
1 Initialize the scanner data and carry out the light
source registration and the area registration.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46310 1/1
46318
No. 6319-####
Backup data error. Scanner AFC
manual.
Alarm release
NO
NO
• Select YES to read the backup data in the hard disk.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0### The backup data of the AFC/scanner control PCB is
abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the
AFC/scanner control PCB are abnormal.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the AFC/scanner control PCB has been
replaced with a new one, this error message will appear.
Diagnosis

NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ S 1-1 AC power supply connecting
☞ S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 0, 1, 2)
☞ S 1-4 Around scanner unit
46318 1/1
46320
Check Point
No. 6321-####
Focus auto adjustment error. 1 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit and
AFC slot.
Countermeasure message with it.
2 Check that the scanner dust prevention glass is not
Alarm release
soiled.
NO
Error message release 3 Check whether the scanner adjustment chart is damaged.
YES 4 Check the ND filter solenoid operates ☞ 35300
via Output Check.
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the Focus Auto Adjustment
IMPORTANT
has not been completed normally. After troubleshooting,
carry out the Focus Auto Adjustment again. ☞ 37020 • When the error above occurs during the focus
adjustment, the ND filter solenoid heats up and it may
Condition cause the malfunctions.
After cooling the ND filter solenoid for about ten minutes
Suffix Condition at OFF, carry out the focus adjustment again.
number
NOTE
Other There is a problem with internal operation values,
than such as arguments and variables. • For confirming the scanner adjustment chart, refer to ☞ 4600.
4. Troubleshooting
below
Diagnosis
627 For 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II, the focus
chart is inserted incorrectly. Blown fuses Manual No.
644 The assigned magnification is considerably different F27 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
from the magnification calculated from the scanned
F28
image.
661 Shading is abnormal.
694 The slot of the focus chart cannot be detected
correctly because of the dust on the focus chart or the
damage of the focus chart. LED light source unit ☞ 20620
711 The triangular slot of the focus chart cannot be AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
detected correctly because of the dust on the focus AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
chart or the damage of the focus chart. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
728 The focus chart cannot be detected correctly because Scanner power supply 2
of the dust on the focus chart or the damage of the
focus chart. Multi power supply (scanner)
805 The CCD for scanner IR and the CCD for image NOTE
scanning are out of positions.
1189 The light axis of the scanner is out of position.
1573 The scanner is considerably out of focus. Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
2657 The light axis of the scanner is out of position or the ☞ 89000
lens of the scanner is on a slant.
3362 For 135/240 AMC-II or 135/240 MMC-II, the Focus Wiring diagram [S-4]
Auto Adjustment is performed when the waveform ☞ 89010
cannot be recognized or is not in the normal range.
3412 The triangular slot of the focus chart cannot be
detected correctly because of the dust on the focus
chart or the damage of the focus chart.
3415 The triangular slot of the focus chart cannot be
detected correctly because of the dust on the focus
chart or the damage of the focus chart.
3620 The scanner is considerably out of focus.
46320 1/1
46322

No. 6322-####
Scanner input balance error.
Countermeasure message Multi power supply (scanner)

purchase. # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Alarm release Failed part(s) [S-4]
NO
Error message release ☞ 4190
NO
NOTE
Suffix Condition Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
number
☞ 89000
0001 Each gain value of R became out of range during the
0002 Each gain value of G became out of range during the
☞ 89010
0003 Each gain value of B became out of range during the
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Each gain value of IR became out of range during the
Check Point
1 Check that no dust is attached on the AFC lens unit and
AFC slot.
with it.
2 Check the ND filter solenoid operates ☞ 35300
via Output Check.
3 If the error described above only occurs ☞ 34500
when images are being processed on the
120 AFC, check to see whether or not
the 120 AFC diffuser has been installed.
IMPORTANT
• When the error above occurs via Light source
registration or Light source update, the ND filter solenoid
heats and malfunctions may occur.
When the ND filter solenoid is OFF, cool it for about ten
minutes, then carry out the light source update and light
source update again.
Diagnosis
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
DIMM ☞ 64050
46322 1/1
46324
No. 6324
F stop value range error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the Light source registration
has not been completed properly. After troubleshooting,
carry out the Light source registration again.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Since the aperture has been adjusted during light
4. Troubleshooting
source registration, the standard light intensity cannot
be obtained.
Check Point
1 Check that the LED light source section is neither
damaged nor soiled.
2 Reset the power supply.
Diagnosis
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46324 1/1
46326

No. 6327-####
Scanner Light Source Section
temperature adjustment error.
Countermeasure message Scanner power supply 2 ☞ 65060
purchase. # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Alarm release Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
NO
Error message release Refer to 4200 ☞ LED driver PCB.
NO Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 2 (PS2).
Condition Failed part(s) [S-4]

Suffix Condition ☞ 4190
number
0001 The temperature at the LED light source was 43 NOTE
degrees C or higher when temperature adjustment • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
began, and did not reach 45±1 degrees C after 30
minutes elapsed. Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
4. Troubleshooting
The temperature at the LED light source was 43 ☞ 89000
degrees C or lower when temperature adjustment
minutes elapsed.
0002 The temperature at the LED light source exceeded the
☞ 89010
upper range (50°C).
0003 The temperature at the LED light source fell below
the lower limit range (40 degree C) after the unit
entered standby status (45±1 degree C).
0004 The temperature at the LED light source was 43
degrees C or lower when temperature adjustment
minutes elapsed.
Check Point
1 Check that the room temperature is 15 to 30 degree
C.
2 Clean the scanner filter.
3 Check the LED cooling fan rotation.
IMPORTANT
• If the above message appears when starting the
operation (when the QSS is turned on by the program
timer) or when performing the dairy setup, the operation
temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) may be
out of the specified range (15 to 30 degree C).
For the operation specification of the LED light source
unit, refer to ☞ 62050.
• In the case above, each electrical part of the QSS is
normal.
Update the scanner light source after the operation
temperature of the QSS (LED light source unit) is within
the specified range.
Diagnosis
LED cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 62050
46326 1/1
46328
No. 6329-####
Analog setting communication error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 There is a problem with the communication between
to the scanner unit, AFC/scanner control PCB and main
0011 software at the light source registration.
0051 Abnormal operation of the scanner unit and
to AFC/scanner control PCB at the light source
4. Troubleshooting
0061 registration
IMPORTANT
• This error may occur when the ARCNET communication
status is abnormal.
☞ 37530
☞ 50520
Diagnosis
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46328 1/1
46330
No. 6330-#### No. 6331-####

Digital setting communication error. Line scanning communication error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
0001 There is a problem with the communication between 0001 There is a problem with the communication between
to the D-ICE control PCB and main software at the light the AFC/scanner control PCB, D-ICE control PCB,
0017 source registration. image processing PCB, and main software at the light
0051 Abnormal operation of the D-ICE control PCB source registration.
to during light source registration 0002 Abnormal operation of the AFC/scanner control
4. Troubleshooting
0066 PCB, D-ICE control PCB, image processing PCB at
the light source registration
IMPORTANT
• This error may occur when the ARCNET communication IMPORTANT
status is abnormal. • Since the scanner section is compatible with multiple
If the error occurs, check the following items. systems, the different system program may be installed
• Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the at the installation or replacement.
Version Check display. In this case, this error occurs because the versions of
☞ 37530 the program of the AFC/scanner control PCB and the
other program do not match.
Upgrade the program of the AFC/Scanner control PCB
☞ 50520 at the installation or replacement.
☞ 35600
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. status is abnormal.
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030 If the error occurs, check the following items.
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000 • Check the communication status of the ARCNET on the
NOTE ☞ 37530
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) • Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Check Point
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
NOTE

☞ 89000
46330 1/2
46330

☞ 89010
4. Troubleshooting
46330 2/2
46332

No. 6332-####
Light Source adjustment error.
Countermeasure message Scanner power supply 2
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Multi power supply (scanner)
purchase. PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
Alarm release
NO # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
NO Failed part(s) [S-4]
☞ 4190
Condition
Condition NOTE
Due to the failure of the light source or scanner, the light source • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
registration operation does not finished properly.
☞ 89000
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Adjustment failure (The measurement value does not
4. Troubleshooting
converge on the target value.) ☞ 89010
0002 Measurement value abnormal
0003 Data calculation error
0004 Lack of pixels
0005 Zoom value abnormal
0006 Image position abnormal
0007 Light amount abnormal
0008 Aperture value abnormal
0009 The dark level is not adjustable.
0010 The AFC was removed or the lane of the AFC was
changed, while executing the light source
registration.
0011 The light source registration was forced to be ended.
IMPORTANT
• If the message No.6332-0007 appears in registering the
light source or during updating the light source,
malfunctions may have been occurred in the ND filter
solenoid of the LED light source unit.
Check the ND filter solenoid operates via Output Check.
☞ 35300
Diagnosis
ND filter solenoid ☞ 62050
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
DIMM ☞ 64050
46332 1/2
46332

No. 6333-#### ☞ 89010
The Line Data is out of the Standard
Range Error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
Due to the poor contact between PCBs and connectors, the
scanning data has a problem and the operation of the light source
registration or the light source update does not finish properly.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Measurement value abnormal
to
0005
0006 Data calculation error
0007 Operation of the light source registration or the light
source update was shut down forcibly.
Check Point
1 Register and update the light source after cleaning the
AFC slot and the lens unit.
Diagnosis
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
DIMM ☞ 64050
NOTE

☞ 89000
46332 2/2
46336
No. 6336-####
Scanner Zoom operation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
IMPORTANT
• This error only occurs if you are using an [S-4] scanner.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 During initial operation, pulse motor moved
counterclockwise for specified distance, but zoom
home sensor did not block light.
4. Troubleshooting
clockwise for specified distance, but zoom home
sensor did not allow light to permeate lens.
counterclockwise for specified distance after zoom
home sensor allowed light to permeate lens, but zoom
home sensor did not then block light.
Diagnosis

☞ 4240
NOTE

☞ 89010
46336 1/1
46400
Error message: Film carrier

No. 6400-####
Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
Perforation Sensor error.
Countermeasure message AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
manual. Power PCB ☞ 65260
Alarm release AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NO
Error message release Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
YES
NOTE
Condition
Suffix Condition
number ☞ 89000
0001 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the
standard voltage of the perforation sensor and light Wiring diagram [S-4]
intensity level have been changed up to upper limit, ☞ 89010
the input status does not turn LIGHT.
135 AFC-II
4. Troubleshooting
standard voltage is lowered without changing the
light intensity level of the perforation sensor, the Adjustment failure point Manual No.
input status does not turn LIGHT. Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 35060
0003 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, although the perforation sensor
standard voltage of the perforation sensor has been
fixed at the upper limit and light intensity level has
been changed up to upper limit, the input status does
not turn DARK. 135 perforation sensor ☞ 62650
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
level of the perforation sensor were set to initial 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
value, the input status turns LIGHT. AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NOTE
• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
line. Power PCB ☞ 65260
135, 240 or 110 Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Check Point NOTE
1 Check that the perforation sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Diagnosis Wiring diagram [S-4]
135/240 AFC-ll, 110 AFC-II ☞ 89010
perforation sensor ☞ 35020

135 perforation sensor ☞ 62150
Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
Sensor PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65320
46400 1/2
46400

No. 6401-####
Loading Sensor error.
Countermeasure message Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
manual. Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Alarm release Connecting PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65310
NO
Error message release AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
YES Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Condition AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Suffix Condition Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
number
NOTE
standard voltage of the loading sensor and light • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
intensity level have been changed up to upper limit, Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
light intensity level of the loading sensor, the input Wiring diagram [S-4]
status does not turn LIGHT. ☞ 89010
standard voltage of the loading sensor has been fixed 135 AFC-II
at the upper limit and light intensity level has been
changed up to upper limit, the input status does not Adjustment failure point Manual No.
turn DARK. Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35060
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity sensor
level of the loading sensor were set to initial value,
the input status turns LIGHT. Failed parts Manual No.
NOTE 135 loading sensor ☞ 62650

• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
line. 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
135, 240, 110 or 120 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Check Point
1 Check that the loading sensor is not soiled. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Adjustment. NOTE
Diagnosis Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
135/240 AFC-ll, 120 AFC-II, 110 AFC-II ☞ 89000
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35000
sensor ☞ 35010 ☞ 89010
☞ 35020

46400 2/2
46402

No. 6402-####
Ready Sensor error.
Countermeasure message Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
manual. Connecting PCB (120 AFC-II) ☞ 65290
Alarm release Connecting PCB (110 AFC-II) ☞ 65310
NO
YES Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Condition AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Suffix Condition Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
number
NOTE
standard voltage of the ready sensor and light • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
intensity level have been changed up to upper limit, Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
light intensity level of the ready sensor, the input Wiring diagram [S-4]
status does not turn LIGHT. ☞ 89010
standard voltage of the ready sensor has been fixed at 135 AFC-II
the upper limit and light intensity level has been
changed up to upper limit, the input status does not Adjustment failure point Manual No.
turn DARK. Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ready ☞ 35060
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity sensor
level of the ready sensor were set to initial value, the
input status turns LIGHT.
NOTE 135 ready sensor ☞ 62650
• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
line of the message. 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
135, 240, 110 or 120
Check Point AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
1 Check that the ready sensors are not soiled.
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Adjustment.
NOTE
Diagnosis • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
135/240 AFC-ll, 120 AFC-II, 110 AFC-II Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Adjustment failure point Manual No. ☞ 89000
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ready ☞ 35000
sensor ☞ 35010 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 35020 ☞ 89010

135 ready sensor ☞ 62150
46402 1/2
46402

No. 6403-####
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
Countermeasure message Power PCB ☞ 65260
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Alarm release Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NO
Error message release NOTE
YES • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Condition Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000
Suffix Condition
number
0002 Even when the specified length has been fed after the
ready sensor turned DARK, the perforation sensor
☞ 89010
does not detect the perforation.
0003 Even when a specified length of film has been fed 135 AFC-II
after the ready sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor
4. Troubleshooting
does not turn LIGHT. (The film rear end is not fed.)
0005 Although a specified length of film has been fed
sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor
when film ejecting operation, the ready sensor does
not turn DARK. Failed parts Manual No.
0006 Even when a specified length of film has been fed 135 loading sensor ☞ 62650
after the ready sensor turned DARK while film
ejecting operation, the loading sensor does not turn 135 ready sensor
DARK. 135 perforation sensor
0014 Even when a specified length has been fed after the Rewinding sensor
perforation sensor turned DARK while film ejecting Film feed motor
operation, the ready sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0017 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam.
Check Point
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor and AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
perforation sensor are not soiled.
Adjustment.
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Diagnosis
NOTE
135/240 AFC-II • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Adjustment failure point Manual No. Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35000 ☞ 89000
Failed parts Manual No. ☞ 89010
135 ready sensor
Rewinding sensor
Film feed motor
46402 2/2
46404
Diagnosis
No. 6404-####
240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release Failed parts Manual No.
NO Loading sensor ☞ 62150
Error message release Ready sensor
YES
Perforation sensor
Condition VEI sensor
Rewinding sensor
Suffix Condition
number Spool key motor
0001 Even when a specified length is fed after the film Film feed motor
front end was fed from the cartridge, the loading PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
sensor does not detect the film front end. Sensor PCB (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65250
0002 Even when the specified length is fed after the Driver PCB 2 ☞ 65240
loading sensor detected the film front end, the ready
sensor does not turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Even when a specified length is fed after the ready
sensor turned DARK, the perforation sensor does not Connecting PCB 4 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65280
turn DARK. Connecting PCB 1 (135/240 AFC-II) ☞ 65200
0005 Even when a specified length is fed after the AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
perforation sensor turned DARK, the sensor cannot Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
detect the first perforation.
Power PCB ☞ 65260
0006 Even when a specified length is fed after the
perforation sensor turned DARK, the sensor cannot AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
detect the end perforation. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
0008 Even when the specified length is rewound when
rewinding the film, the ready sensor does not turn NOTE
LIGHT. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
0009 Even when the specified length is rewound when Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
rewinding the film, the loading sensor does not turn ☞ 89000
LIGHT.
1000 Even when the specified length of the film has been
rewound on rewinding the film, the detection of the
VEI sensor did not change. ☞ 89010
0011 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam.
0012- When pre-scanning is carried out, although a
0013 specified length is fed after the perforation sensor
turned DARK, the sensor cannot detect the next
perforation.
0014- When scanning is carried out, although a specified
0015 length is fed after the perforation sensor turned
DARK, the sensor cannot detect the next perforation.
Check Point
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor and
Adjustment.
3 Check if the VEI sensor and the rewinding sensor are
not soiled.
46404 1/2
46404

No. 6405-####
Power PCB ☞ 65260
Countermeasure message Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
NOTE
Alarm release
NO
Error message release Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
YES
☞ 89000
Condition
Suffix Condition ☞ 89010
number
sensor turned DARK, the perforation sensor cannot
detect the first perforation.
0003 Even when one or more film is fed after the ready
sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor cannot detect
4. Troubleshooting
the film rear end.
0004 While the film is being fed, the perforation sensor
between the specified length cannot detect the
continuous signals of DARK and LIGHT.
0005 After pre-scanning, although the specified length is
fed after the film feed started to the scanning
direction, the ready sensor does not turn DARK.
0006 While the film is being fed to the scanning direction,
although the specified length is fed after the ready
sensor has turned DARK, the loading sensor does not
turn DARK.
although the specified length is fed after the
perforation sensor has turned LIGHT, the ready
sensor does not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor and
Adjustment.
Diagnosis

Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Film feed motor
46404 2/2
46406

No. 6406-####
Countermeasure message NOTE
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Alarm release
NO Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Error message release ☞ 89000
YES
Condition
☞ 89010
Suffix Condition
number
sensor turned DARK, the film sensor does not turn
DARK.
0003 Even when a specified length of film has been fed
after the ready sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor
does not detect the film rear end.
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Although a specified length of film has been fed with
the film sensor DARK, the input status (rotation
detection) of the film feed sensor does not change.
0005 After pre-scanning, although the specified length is
fed after the film feed started to the scanning
direction, the ready sensor does not turn DARK.
although the specified length is fed after the ready
sensor has turned DARK, the loading sensor does not
turn DARK.
although the specified length is fed after the film
sensor has turned LIGHT, the ready sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check that the loading sensor, the ready sensor and
the film sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure in the loading ☞ 35010
sensor, ready sensor, or film sensor

Ready sensor
Film sensor
Film feed sensor
Film feed motor
Power PCB ☞ 65260
46406 1/2
46406
No. 6407-####
Spool Key operation error.
Confirm the Film Cartridge.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Unused
0002
0003 Even though the spool key motor has been rotated by
the specified angle, the VEI sensor does not detect
the rotation.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the VEI sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
VEI sensor ☞ 62150
Spool key motor
Power PCB ☞ 65260
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46406 2/2
46408
No. 6408 No. 6409-####

The Film Carrier is unlocked. The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
Alarm release Countermeasure message

NO Remove the cleaning leader. For details, refer to the manual.
Error message release Alarm release
YES NO
Condition YES

number
- The AFC lock sensor turns LIGHT when the film is Suffix Condition
in the AFC. number
0002 Although the cleaning leader is fed for a specified
Diagnosis length after the ready sensor detected the leader, the
perforation sensor does not turn DARK.
Failed parts Manual No. 0006 When ejecting the cleaning leader, although the
Film carrier lock sensor ☞ 62050 leader is fed for a specified length, the perforation
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 sensor does not turn LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 0007 Even when the specified length has been fed after the
perforation sensor turned LIGHT, the ready sensor
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 does not turn LIGHT.
NOTE 0008 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) 0009 When ejecting the cleaning leader, the loading sensor
turns RIGHT immediately after the ready sensor
Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3] detected the cleaning leader. (The cleaning leader is
☞ 89000 too short.)
Wiring diagram [S-4] Check Point

☞ 89010 1 Check that the cleaning leader is not defective.
2 Check if the ready sensor, perforation sensor and film
ejection sensor are soiled.
3 Clean the film feed route.
Adjustment.
Diagnosis

Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
VEI sensor
Rewinding sensor
Film feed motor
46408 1/2
46408

Power PCB ☞ 65260
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
4. Troubleshooting
46408 2/2
46410
NOTE
No. 6410-####
Film Sensor error.
manual. Wiring diagram [S-4]
Alarm release
NO
☞ 89010
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
standard voltage of the film sensor and light intensity
level have been changed up to upper limit, the input
status does not turn LIGHT.
0002 When adjusting the sensor sensitivity, the standard
4. Troubleshooting
voltage is lowered without changing the light
intensity level of the film sensor, the input status does
not turn LIGHT.
standard voltage of the film sensor has been fixed at
the upper limit and light intensity level has been
changed up to upper limit, the input status does not
turn DARK.
0004 When the standard voltage and the light intensity
level of the film sensor were set to initial value, the
input status turns LIGHT.
NOTE
• The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second
line.
120
Check Point
1 Check that the film sensor is not soiled.
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failure of the film sensitivity adjustment ☞ 35010

120 film sensor ☞ 62250
Power PCB ☞ 65260
46410 1/2
46410
Diagnosis
No. 6411-####
Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity 135/240 AFC-II
Adjustment was not executed. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Countermeasure message Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are not adjusted.
☞ 35020
0002 240 DX sensors 1 and 2 are not adjusted.
0003 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, 4, 240 DX sensors 1 and 2 are
not adjusted. AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
4. Troubleshooting
0004 The loading sensors (135 and 240), ready sensors NOTE
(135 and 240), and perforation sensors (135 and 240)
are not adjusted.
0005 The 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4, loading sensors Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
(135 and 240), ready sensors (135 and 240), and ☞ 89000
perforation sensors (135 and 240) are not adjusted.
0006 The 240 DX sensors 1 and 2, loading sensors (135 Wiring diagram [S-4]
and 240), ready sensors (135 and 240), and
perforation sensors (135 and 240) are not adjusted.
☞ 89010
0007 The 135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4, 240 DX sensors 1
and 2, loading sensors (135 and 240), ready sensors 135 AFC-II
(135 and 240), and perforation sensors (135 and 240)
are not adjusted.
0008 The 110 loading sensor, ready sensor and perforation
sensor are not adjusted. Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
0010 The 120 loading sensor, ready sensor and film sensor
are not adjusted. Failed parts Manual No.
NOTE
• This error message will be displayed at the following cases. NOTE
Refer to the diagnosis when the error message will be • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
displayed again even though the sensitivity adjustment was
carried out. Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
• The AFC/scanner control PCB was replaced. ☞ 89000
• Backup data cannot be retrieved from the AFC/scanner
control PCB. Wiring diagram [S-4]
• The sensor standard adjustments have not been ☞ 89010
completed properly.
• The name of the film carrier and the sensor to be adjust will be
displayed on the second line of the message.
Check Point
Adjustment.
46410 2/2
46412

No. 6412-####
135 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 6413-#### Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
135 DX Sensor 2 error. Power PCB ☞ 65260
No. 6414-####
NOTE
No. 6415-#### • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Alarm release ☞ 89010
NO
YES 135 AFC-II
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Suffix Condition Failure of 135 DX sensor standard
number adjustment
0001 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the value of
A/D exceeds 204 with minimum LED Light Intensity
Value.
135 DX sensor ☞ 62650
A/D does not exceed 204 with maximum LED Light 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
Intensity Value. 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
0003 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the adjusted AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
gain value exceeds 255. Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
0004 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, none Power PCB ☞ 65260
negative level calculated from inserting negative
exceeds 255.
0005 When adjusting the sensor LED light intensity, the
value does not reach until none negative level
NOTE
although the light intensity value has been maximum.
Check Point Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
1 Check that the 135 DX sensor is soiled. ☞ 89000

Adjustment. Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
Diagnosis
135/240 AFC-II
Failure of 135 DX sensor standard
adjustment

135 DX sensor ☞ 62150
46412 1/1
46416
NOTE
No. 6416-####
No. 6417-#### ☞ 89000
manual.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
A/D exceeds 204 with minimum LED Light Intensity
4. Troubleshooting
Value.
A/D does not exceed 204 with maximum LED Light
Intensity Value.
0003 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, the adjusted
gain value exceeds 255.
0004 When adjusting the DX sensor standard, none
negative level calculated from inserting negative
exceeds 255.
0005 When adjusting the sensor LED light intensity, the
value does not reach until none negative level
although the light intensity value has been maximum.
Check Point
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failure of 240 DX sensor standard ☞ 35000
adjustment

240 DX sensor ☞ 62150
Power PCB ☞ 65260
46416 1/1
46422
NOTE
No. 6423
Auto focus error.
Alarm release
NO
☞ 89010
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Even though the auto focus adjustment had been
performed against the mount for a specified time, the
adjustment is failure.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• This message appears only when the 135/240 MMC-II is
attached.
Check Point
1 Check that the film is placed on the mount.
2 Check that the AF sensor and mirror is not soiled.
3 Check that the scanner adjustment chart, emission
adjustment chart and the mount which is processed
normally are not damaged.
4 Check that the mount is processable with MMC.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Check that the light axis of the AF sensor is ☞ 35030
correctly positioned.
When adjusting the height of the mount ☞ 20850
carrier, check that the worm wheel swings
within the tolerance range of 4 mm (± one
tooth).

AF sensor ☞ 62450
AF motor ☞ 62450
• If the AF motor is not activated when DC24 V is outputted
between pins 1 and 2 of the AF motor connector, the AF
motor is defective.
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340
Power PCB ☞ 65260
46422 1/1
46424
No. 6424-#### No. 6425-####

Mount Unit operation error. Mount detection error.

Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. manual.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 When an attempt has been made to move the mount 0001 When the mount insertion cover sensor is ON, the
carrier to the home position, the mount carrier home mount sensor does not turn ON.
sensor does not turn DARK even after the mount 0002 When the mount is to be ejected, the mount sensor
carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified time. does not turn OFF.
0002 When an attempt has been made to move the mount
4. Troubleshooting
carrier from the home position, the mount carrier NOTE
home sensor does not turn LIGHT even after the • This message appears only when the 135/240 MMC-II is
mount carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified attached.
time.
0003 When the mount is to be ejected, the mount insertion Check Point
cover is not opened.
1 Check that the mount insertion cover sensor or the
NOTE mount sensor is not soiled.
• This message appears only when the 135/240 MMC-II is
attached. Diagnosis
Check Point
Mount insertion cover sensor ☞ 62450
1 Check that the mount carrier home sensor or the Mount sensor
mount carrier end sensor is not soiled.
2 Check if the mount unit slides smoothly.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Power PCB ☞ 65260
Mount carrier home sensor ☞ 62450 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Mount carrier slide motor Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
MMC connecting PCB ☞ 65330 NOTE
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
Power PCB ☞ 65260 ☞ 89000
Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060 Wiring diagram [S-4]
☞ 89010
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46424 1/1
46426
No. 6426
The lane is out of position.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The 135 or 240 lane limit switch turns OFF while the
film is being processed using the 135/240 AFC.
Check Point
1 Check that the lever is set securely and the lane limit
switch is pressed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Lane limit switch ☞ 62150
• If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 (135) or
between pins 1 and 3 (240) on the connector when the lane
limit switch is pressed, the lane limit switch is defective.
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46426 1/1
46428
No. 6429-####
System error. (AFC / Scanner control Failed part(s) [S-2/S-3]
PCB) Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner unit.

Countermeasure message Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
Alarm release Failed part(s) [S-4]
NO
☞ 4190
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number Refer to 4250 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
0001 When starting up the AFC/scanner control PCB,
conditions of ICs on the PCB were abnormal. Failed part(s) [S-4]
1000 The scanner status is BUSY when checking at ☞ 4240
startup.
3000 The zoom operation of scanner unit is abnormal. NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
3001 (Occurs only when using S-2/S-3 scanners.) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
3002 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
3003 The IRIS operation of scanner unit is abnormal. ☞ 89000
(Occurs only when using S-2/S-3 scanners.)
3004 Focus movement range is mathematically abnormal. Wiring diagram [S-4]
(Occurs only when using S-4 scanner.)
☞ 89010
4000 The communication between the image processing
PCB and AFC/scanner control PCB has some
problems.
4001 The communication between D-ICE control PCB and
AFC/scanner control PCB has some problems.
4002 The communication between the main PC and
AFC/scanner control PCB has some problems.
NOTE
• Suffix numbers for the error message will vary depending on
the error occurring condition. Carry out the corrective actions
according to the following diagnosis for each suffix numbers.
Check Point
When an error occurs due to communication ☞ 35600
error among the suffix numbers above,
upgrade the system.
Diagnosis

46428 1/1
46430
NOTE
No. 6431
Auto focus error.
Alarm release Wiring diagram [S-4]
NO
☞ 89010
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Even though the auto focus adjustment had been
performed against the mount for a specified time, the
adjustment is failure.
NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is
4. Troubleshooting
attached.
Check Point
1 Check that the film is placed on the mount.
2 Check that the AF sensor and mirror is not soiled.
3 Check that the scanner adjustment chart, emission
adjustment chart and the mount which is processed
normally are not damaged.
4 Check that the mount is processable with AMC.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Check that the light axis of the AF sensor is ☞ 35040
correctly positioned.
When adjusting the height of the mount ☞ 35040
carrier, check that the worm wheel swings
within the tolerance range of 4 mm (± one
tooth).

AF sensor ☞ 62550
AF motor
• If the AF motor is not activated when DC24 V is outputted
between pins 1 and 2 of the AF motor connector, the AF
motor is defective.
Power PCB ☞ 65260
46430 1/1
46432
No. 6432-#### No. 6433-####

Mount Unit operation error. Mount detection error.

Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 When an attempt has been made to move the mount 0001 Although the mount is fed to the mount carrier from
carrier to the home position, the mount carrier home insert stocker, the mount sensor does not turn ON.
sensor does not turn DARK even after the mount Or, the mount sensor (inlet) is ON in spite of there is
carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified time. no mount.
0002 When an attempt has been made to move the mount 0002 Although the mount is fed to the ejection stocker, the
carrier from the home position, the mount carrier mount sensor does not turn OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
home sensor does not turn LIGHT even after the
mount carrier slide motor has rotated for a specified NOTE
time. • This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is
attached.
NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is Check Point
attached.
1 Check that the mounts are correctly set in the mount
Check Point stocker.
2 Check that the weight of the mount stocker is set.
1 Check if the mount carrier sensor is soiled.
2 Check if the mount unit slides smoothly. Diagnosis
Diagnosis Failed parts Manual No.

Mount sensor (inlet) ☞ 62550
Mount carrier home sensor ☞ 62550 AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
Mount carrier slide motor
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340 Power PCB ☞ 65260
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 NOTE
Power PCB ☞ 65260 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]
NOTE
☞ 89000
☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46432 1/1
46434
No. 6434-#### No. 6435-####

Mount detection (inlet) error. Mount insertion operation error.

NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 Although the mount sensor (inlet) is not turned ON 0001 Although the mount insertion motor has rotated for a
when the mount is fed to the mount carrier, the mount specified time to return the mount insertion arm to
sensor turns ON. the home position, the insertion sensor 1 does not
turn DARK.
NOTE 0002 Although the mount insertion arm has been moved
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is for a specified time from the home position, the
4. Troubleshooting
attached. insertion sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT.
0003 Although the mount insertion arm has been moved to
Check Point the set position, the insertion sensor 2 does not turn
DARK.
1 Check that the mounts are correctly set in the mount
stocker. 0004 Although the mount insertion arm has been moved
for a specified time to return to the home position
2 Check that the weight of the mount stocker is set.
from the set position, the insertion sensor 2 does not
turn LIGHT.
Diagnosis
NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is
Mount sensor (inlet) ☞ 62550 attached.
Mount sensor
Mount carrier home sensor Diagnosis
PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070 Loading sensor 1 ☞ 62550
MMC sensor PCB ☞ 65340 Loading sensor 2
AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350 Mount carrier home sensor
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Mount carrier slide motor
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
Power PCB ☞ 65260 AMC connecting PCB ☞ 65350
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
NOTE Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Power PCB ☞ 65260
☞ 89000 NOTE
☞ 89010
☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46434 1/1
46436
No. 6436-#### No. 6437-####

Mount elevator operation error. Mount eject operation error.

NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 The mount elevator sensor does not turn DARK even 0001 The ejection sensor does not turn ON even though the
though the mount elevator motor revolves for a mount ejection solenoid operated and the mount
specified time. moved to the ejection position.
0002 The mount elevator sensor does not turn LIGHT even 0002 The ejection sensor does not turn OFF even though
though the mount elevator motor revolves for a the mount elevator motor revolved and the mount got
specified. out to the ejection stocker.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE NOTE
• This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is • This message appears only when the 135/240 AMC-II is
attached. attached.
Diagnosis Check Point

Failed parts Manual No. 1 Check if no mounts are left in the mount carrier.
Mount elevator sensor ☞ 62550 2 Confirm the set state of the mount stocker.
Mount elevator motor 3 Clean the mount ejection roller.
AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000 Diagnosis
Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060 Failed parts Manual No.
Power PCB ☞ 65260 Ejection sensor ☞ 62550
AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010 Mount ejection solenoid
NOTE
Power PCB ☞ 65260
☞ 89000 AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Wiring diagram [S-4] NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46436 1/1
46438

No. 6438-####
135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
Countermeasure message Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Power PCB ☞ 65260
Alarm release AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
NO
YES NOTE
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
☞ 89000
0002 Although the cleaning leader is fed for a specified
length after the ready sensor detected the leader, the
perforation sensor does not turn DARK. ☞ 89010
0007 When ejecting the leader, although the leader is fed
for a specified length, the perforation sensor does not 135 AFC-II
turn LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
0008 When ejecting the leader, although the leader is fed
for a specified length after the perforation sensor Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading ☞ 35060
turned LIGHT, the ready sensor does not turn sensor, ready sensor and perforation sensor
LIGHT.
0009 When the leader is ejected, although the leader is fed
for a specified length after the perforation sensor 135 loading sensor ☞ 62650
turned DARK, the ready sensor does not turn DARK. 135 ready sensor
(Unspecified cleaning leader is used.) 135 perforation sensor
0010 When the leader is ejected, although the leader is fed Rewinding sensor
for a specified length after the ready sensor turned
Film feed motor
DARK, the loading sensor does not turn DARK.
(Unspecified cleaning leader is used.) PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
0011 The rewinding sensor detected the film jam. 135 AFC sensor PCB ☞ 65370
Check Point AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
1 Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor, perforation
sensor, and film ejection sensor are not soiled. Power PCB ☞ 65260
2 Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
Adjustment. Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
Diagnosis NOTE
135/240 AFC-II
☞ 89000

☞ 89010
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Rewinding sensor
Film feed motor
46438 1/2
46438
No. 6439-####
The film strip is too short for processing.
Remove the film from the cartridge and proceed by strip. The film
length is shorter than prescribed. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When processing the stripped film, the loading sensor
turned LIGHT for a specified time before the ready
sensor detect the detach perforation after the film
feeding started.
4. Troubleshooting
0002 The ready sensor detected the detach perforation
before the last frame of the film is scanned.
NOTE
• This error occurs when the length of the IX240 film rear edge
is shorter than that is required for scanning.
Check Point
1 Check that the processed film has not the detach
perforation near the rear edge or the detach
perforation has not cut.
2 Check that the size A of the processed film indicated
below is not 125 mm or less.
Rear end perforation Turnaround

perforation
Detach
perforation
G058798
G058799
IMPORTANT
• Process the stripped IX240 cartridge film.
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Manual.
• If the size A is 125 mm or more, all the frames in the film
can be printed by stripping the film.
• The last few frames of film cannot be printed if the film
size is less than 125 mm.
46438 2/2
46440
No. 6441-#### Loading sensor ☞ 62250
The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped. Ready sensor
Film sensor
Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual. Film feed sensor
Alarm release Film feed motor
NO PM driver (film feed motor) ☞ 65070
YES
Condition AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Suffix Condition
number Power PCB ☞ 65260
0001 Although the cleaning leader is fed for a specified AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
length since the ready sensor detected the cleaning Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
leader, the film sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 Since the film sensor turned DARK, the signal of the NOTE
film feed sensor (motion detection) does not change • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
while the cleaning leader is being fed for a specified
4. Troubleshooting
length.
0003 Although a specified length of leader has been fed
☞ 89000
when ejecting, the film sensor does not turn DARK.
0004 Although a specified length of leader has been fed Wiring diagram [S-4]
since the film sensor turned LIGHT, the ready sensor ☞ 89010
does not turn LIGHT.
0005 Although a specified length of leader has been fed
since ejecting the leader started, the ready sensor
does not turn DARK. (Unspecified cleaning leader is
used.)
0006 When ejecting, although a specified length of leader
has been fed since the ready sensor turned DARK,
the loading sensor does not turn DARK. (Unspecified
cleaning leader is used.)
NOTE
• The specified length of 120 cleaning leader is 400 mm.
• Any cleaning leader which is out of the specification (170 mm
or less) will cause errors.
The suffix number of the possible error is 05.
• Any cleaning leader which is out of the specification (180 mm
or less) will cause errors.
The suffix number of the possible error is 05 or 06.
• Any cleaning leader which is out of the specification (223
mm) will cause errors. The suffix number of the possible error
is 06.
Check Point
1 Check that the loading sensor, ready sensor, film
sensor, and film feed sensor are not soiled.
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
sensor, ready sensor, film sensor, and film
feed sensor
46440 1/1
46442
135 AFC-II
No. 6442-####
The perforation of the film may be broken. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
perforation sensor
Remove the film and check the perforations and other film
condition. For details, refer to the manual. Failed parts Manual No.
Alarm release 135 perforation sensor ☞ 62650
NO
YES 135 AFC connecting PCB ☞ 65360
Condition Multi power supply (scanner) ☞ 65060
Suffix Condition Power PCB ☞ 65260
number AFC/scanner driver PCB ☞ 65010
0001 The perforation sensor does not change when a Scanner power supply 1 ☞ 65060
specified length of film is being fed in the pre-
scanning direction. NOTE
0002 The perforation sensor does not change when a • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
specified length of film is being fed in the scanning
4. Troubleshooting
direction.
☞ 89000
Check Point
1 Check that the perforation sensor is not soiled. ☞ 89010
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
135/240 AFC-ll
perforation sensor

Power PCB ☞ 65260
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46442 1/1
46444
No. 6443 No. 6444

Move Table operation error. Cartridge is out of position.

YES/START YES/START
NOTE NOTE
• Start initial operation after release. • Start initial operation after release.
Condition Condition
number number
01 Although it was going to return the move table of The cartridge limit switch (cartridge limit switches 1
MFC to the home position, even if it carried out fixed and 2) turns OFF while the 240 film is being
distance movement, the move table home sensor does processed.
not turn DARK.
02 Although fixed distance movement of the move table Check Point
of MFC was carried out from the home position, the
4. Troubleshooting
move table home sensor does not turn LIGHT. Check the status of the cartridge limit switch by
input check. ☞ 35200
03 During the move table of MFC operates (during
processing the film), the attachment (mask) code is
not detected. Diagnosis
NOTE
• This attention message appears when MFC is attached.
Cartridge limit switch 1 or 2 ☞ 62150
Check Point
NOTE
Suffix • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Manual No.
number
01,02 Check the status of Move Table Home Sensor via
Input Check. ☞ 35200 ☞ 89000
Check the operation of Move Table Slide Motor via
Output Check. ☞ 35300 Wiring diagram [S-4]
03 Check the Attachment Detection Switch status via ☞ 89010
input check. ☞ 35200
Diagnosis
Table home sensor ☞ 62660
Table slide motor ☞ 62660
PM driver ☞ 65070
NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46444 1/1
46502
Error message: Disk/Media
No. 6503
Formatting could not be executed.
Clean the disk drive with a disk cleaner. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The format error occurs in the driver controller.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
even if the media has been set, carry out the
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46502 1/1
46504
No. 6504 No. 6505

Backup data could not be read. Backup data could not be written.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
- When the power supply is turned ON, the backup - The backup data cannot be written to the hard disk.
data recovered from the hard disk cannot be read.
NOTE
NOTE • The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the
• The name of the corresponding media is displayed in the second line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
second line of the message. HD
HD
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. HD drive ☞ 88000
HD drive ☞ 88000 ATX mother board
ATX mother board ATX power supply
ATX power supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram ☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram ☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
46504 1/1
46506
No. 6506-####
Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary
image file(s).
Alarm release
NO
• Select NO to bring up the File Delete dialog box. Delete
unnecessary files in the hard disk.
• Select PASS to stop the operation.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the power supply is turned on or the data is to
be written to the hard disk, the free space of hard disk
drive is below 4 GB.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding drive is displayed in the third
C:
• Read only files will not be deleted.
Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary files.
Diagnosis
HD drive ☞ 88000
ATX mother board
ATX power supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46506 1/1
46550
Error message: Colorimeter
No. 6551-####
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the
front end of the paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn
DARK.
0002 When paper is being fed in paper advance operation,
paper sensor 2 turns LIGHT.
0003 When ejecting paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn
4. Troubleshooting
LIGHT although a specified length of paper is fed to
lead the front end of the paper.
Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
cleaning sheet.
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46550 1/1
46552
No. 6552-####
Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit
manual.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is
not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup
data is not stored in the HD of the computer.)
0002 The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is
not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup
4. Troubleshooting
data is stored in the HD of the computer.)
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding CPU PCB will be displayed in
the second line of the message.
• Backup data is saved on an EEPROM mounted on the PCB
and is not lost even if the system power is turned OFF for an
extended period of time.
• The message with suffix number 0002 appears after the
colorimeter control PCB was replaced. Clearing the error by
selecting NO reads the backup data of the paper front end
advance length correction and feed error correction from the
hard disk to the colorimeter control PCB.
Diagnosis

NOTE
Circuit diagram
46552 1/1
46554
No. 6554-####
Calibration Plate advance error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a
specified length, paper sensor 2 dose not turn DARK.
0002 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor
1 turns LIGHT from DARK.
0003 In initial operation, although a specified length of
moving to the home position was attempted to the
4. Troubleshooting
calibration plate, paper sensors 1 and 2 do not turn
LIGHT.
0004 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor
1 turns LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the calibration plate is set correctly.
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor

Failed parts
Refer to 4201 ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46554 1/1
46600
Error message: Pricing unit
No. 6600-#### No. 6601-##

Pricing Unit communication error. Pricing Unit operation error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
- The communication between the PU control PCB and 0001 Although a specified time has passed since printing
the pricing unit is not carried out normally. started, printing is not completed.
0002 Since excessive communication data is sent to the
NOTE 0003 pricing unit, the printing operation is delayed.
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is 0004
4. Troubleshooting
different. 0005 Even after a specified time has passed since the data
Suffix Type was transmitted to the personal computer, no signal is
number returned.
0002 Type A
NOTE
Bar code pricing unit • Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is
0003 Type B different.
Card printer pricing unit
Suffix Type
0004 Type C number
Bar code pricing unit 0001 Standard
Pricing Unit
0002 Type A
Check Point
Bar code pricing unit
1 Check that the pricing unit power supply is ON.
0003 Type B
Diagnosis
0004 Type C
Blown fuses Manual No. Bar code pricing unit
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64140 0005 Type D
For PC output
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100 Diagnosis
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000 Blown fuses Manual No.
Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170 F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
Circuit diagram ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170
46600 1/2
46600
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
46600 2/2
46602
No. 6602-#### No. 6603-####

Pricing Unit Printer operation error. Backup data error. PU

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
purchase. manual.
NO NO
NO NO
• Select YES to read the backup data in the hard disk.
Condition
Condition Condition
Abnormal data is sent from the card printer. Suffix Condition
Continuous check for two or more seconds detects that an error number
signal has been sent. 0### The backup data of the PU control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the PU
Suffix Type control PCB are abnormal.
number
4. Troubleshooting
0003 Type B NOTE
NOTE • If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is being OFF or if the PU control PCB has been replaced with a
different. new one, this error message will appear.
• When the pricing unit specification via Machine Specification
Diagnosis
is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
Diagnosis Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64140 Failed parts Manual No.
NOTE
Printer -
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100 Circuit diagram
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000 ☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram

Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170 ☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
NOTE ☞ CS 2-3 Pricing Unit
Circuit diagram
46602 1/1
46640
Error message: D-ICE control
The last two digits of suffix number (1####)

No. 6640-#### The last two digit indicate the magnification with which the focus
System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) adjustment data error is generated.
Suffix Film carrier
number
Alarm release 11## 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane), 135 AFC
NO 12## 240/240 AFC-II (135 lane)
Error message release 13## 110 AFC-II
YES
14## 120 AFC-II
Condition 15## 135/240 MMC-II
16## 135/240 AMC-II
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When starting up the D-ICE control PCB, conditions The last two digits of suffix number (22##, 23##)
of ICs on the PCB were abnormal. The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last two digits of
0100 During the actual scanning, an abnormal data is sent the suffix number.
to Digital ICE Control PCB.
0500 The buffer memory for main on the D-ICE PCB
Diagnosis
overflowed. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
0501 The buffer memory for interrupting on the D-ICE Carry out Focus Adjustment. ☞ 37020
PCB overflowed.
1### The focus adjustment data was abnormal. Failed parts Manual No.
22## Communication with the D-ICE control PCB was D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
23## abnormal.
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
4000 When starting up the D-ICE control PCB, conditions ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
of the D-ICE PCB was abnormal.
4100 Deleting data in the flash ROM on the D-ICE control
PCB failed.
4101 Writing data in the flash ROM on the D-ICE control
PCB failed. Failed parts
4200 Registering data in the flash ROM on the D-ICE Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE control PCB.
control PCB stopped. Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE PCB.
4201 Abnormal registered data was found in data
registering in the flash ROM on the D-ICE control
PCB. NOTE
8000 The condition of the D-ICE PCB was abnormal.
Circuit diagram
The third digit of suffix numbers (1###)
☞ - System connection diagram
The third digit indicates the film carrier where the focus adjustment
data error is generated.
Suffix Film carrier
number
11## 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane), 135 AFC
12## 240/240 AFC-II (135 lane)
13## 110 AFC-II
14## 120 AFC-II
15## 135/240 MMC-II
16## 135/240 AMC-II
46640 1/2
46640
NOTE
No. 6641-####
Backup Data error. D-ICE Control PCB
Circuit diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the ☞ CS 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
manual. ☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
IMPORTANT ☞ CS 2-1 Control section
• If the error message above appears, it cannot be
canceled for approx. 5 to 10 minutes unitl the Order
Display is displayed.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
0### The backup data of the D-ICE control PCB is
abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the D-ICE
control PCB are abnormal.
NOTE
• This error message appears when the D-ICE control is
replaced with a new one.
• When the data is written to the flash memory of D-ICE control
PCB, the power supply of QSS is turned OFF or the QSS
system is shut down.
During the Light Source Registration or Light Source Update,
the power supply of QSS is turned OFF or the QSS system is
shut down.
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, the backup data for
the D-ICE control PCB saved in HDD is sent to the D-
ICE control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the
error cannot be canceled.
After the completion of sending the backup data, the
error above can be canceled.
However, the backup data saved in HDD may have a
problem. If the error above occurs, we recommend
reading the backup data saved in a media at the close
down check.
Diagnosis
Read the backup data saved in a media at the ☞ 35400
close down check.

46640 2/2
46642
No. 6642-#### No. 6643-####

D-ICE Control PCB error. Digital Masking Unit operation error.

Contact us or your place of purchase. Contact us or your place of purchase.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
The D-ICE PCB had some problems while D-ICE control PCB Digital Masking Unit in Operator Selections is (with a
are communicating with the D-ICE PCB. check mark) but it has some problems when starting up or
upgrading the software.
Suffix Condition
0001 The data that D-ICE PCB received from the scanner number
is too small or too large. 0001 Digital Masking Unit could not be detected.
4. Troubleshooting
0002 The D-ICE PCB attempted to send image data to the 0002 Digital Masking Unit was abnormal.
image processing PCB but the image processing PCB
is not in receiving condition. NOTE
0003 The D-ICE PCB is abnormal. • When the check mark of Digital Masking Unit in Operator
0004 The communication between D-ICE PCB and D-ICE Selections is removed, this error does not occur.
control PCB has some problems.
Diagnosis
0005 The data that D-ICE control PCB received from D-
ICE PCB has some problems. Failed parts Manual No.
0006 D-ICE PCB has some problems when performing D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
self-diagnosis.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Scratch mend PCB 2 ☞ 64060
When the error message above appears, carry ☞ 35920 DIMM ☞ 64050
out Image Path Check (Film Series Image
Path) of Self-diagnostic.
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030 Failed parts
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000 Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE control PCB.
Scanner unit ☞ 20610 Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE PCB.
Refer to 4201 ☞ DIMM.
NOTE Refer to 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 2.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Refer to 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A].
Circuit diagram Refer to 4201 ☞ Data change-over PCB.
☞ CS 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1) NOTE
☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
☞ CS 2-1 Control section Circuit diagram
46642 1/1
46802
Error message: Software upgrade
Error message: Software upgrade
No. 6803
Language version of message data is
incorrect. Message display in English.
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the power supply is turned ON or when the
language of the machine specification is to be
changed, the selected language does not appear.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
46802 1/1
46822
Error message: Image processing PCB
Suffix Condition
Image Processing PCB Image data 0012 Processing does not end in a specified time when
operation error. transferring the image data to the main PC via the
image correction PCB from the main PC.
Countermeasure message 0013 Processing does not end in a specified time when
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of writing data to the expanded memory from the CPU
purchase. on the image processing PCB.
Alarm release 0014 Processing does not end in a specified time when
NO writing data to the composite memory from the CPU
Error message release on the image processing PCB.
NO
0020 The data size that is received in the input memory on
the image processing PCB via LVDS does not agree
Condition
with the data size that is notified by ARCNET.
Suffix Condition 0021 The image data received by the input memory on
number image processing PCB from the scanner unit via
0001 Processing does not end in a specified time when LVDS and the image information received by the
transferring the image data to the expanded memory image processing PCB from the AFC/scanner control
on the image processing PCB via the image PCB via ARCNET do not match.
correction PCB from the input memory on the image 0022 The data was expanded in the expanded memory on
4. Troubleshooting
processing PCB. the image processing PCB from the input memory on
0002 Processing does not end in a specified time when the image processing PCB but the size does not
transferring the image data to the main PC via LVDS agree.
from the input memory on the image processing 0023 The data was received in the expanded memory on
PCB. the image processing PCB from the main PC but the
0003 Processing does not end in a specified time when size does not agree.
transferring the image data to the main PC via the 0024 The data was received in the composite memory on
image correction PCB and then LVDS from the input the image processing PCB from the main PC but the
memory on the image processing PCB. size does not agree.
0004 Transferring does not end in a specified time when 0025 The data was written to the expanded memory from
transferring the image data from the expanded CPU on the image processing PCB but the size does
memory on the image processing PCB to the laser not agree.
control PCB. 0026 The data was written to the composite memory from
0005 Transferring does not end in a specified time when CPU on the image processing PCB but the size does
transferring the image data to the main PC via LVDS not agree.
from the expanded memory on the image processing 0027 From the main PC, 1 frame magnification was
PCB. performed to the main PC but the size does not agree.
0006 Transferring does not end in a specified time when 0040 The communication with the image correction PCB
transferring the image data to the CD-R external has some problems.
writing system via LVDS from the expanded memory
on the image processing PCB. 0050 CMS data is abnormal.
0007 Processing does not end in a specified time when 0060 Undefined error
transferring the image data to the input memory on 0061 Does not occur normally.
the image processing PCB via LVDS from the main 0062
PC.
0063
0008 Processing does not end in a specified time when
0070 The data was resent to the CD-R external writing
transferring the image data to the expanded memory
system more than three times.
on the image processing PCB via LVDS and then the
image correction PCB from the main PC. 0071 The notification that data resending to the CD-R
external writing system was completed was sent more
than three times.
transferring the image data to the composite memory
on the image processing PCB via LVDS and then the NOTE
image correction PCB from the main PC. • Although the suffix numbers for these error messages vary
0010 Processing does not end in a specified time when depending on the error occurring conditions, the corrective
transferring the image data to the input memory on action should be taken according to the following check point
the image processing PCB via the D-ICE PCB from and diagnosis.
the scanner unit.
Target PCB
transferring the image data to the main PC via the D- Symbol Object
ICE PCB from the scanner unit. A Image processing PCB
46822 1/2
46822
Symbol Object Diagnosis

B Image correction PCB Failed parts Manual No.
C PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB When the suffix numbers 0010, 0011, 0021 ☞ 35920
D AFC/scanner control PCB or scanner unit of the error message above appears, carry
E D-ICE control PCB out Image Path Check (Film Series Image
Path) of Self-diagnostic.
F Laser control PCB
G Buffer PCB unit (CD-R external writing system)
Check point D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
Suffix A B C D E F G
number ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
0001 $ $ Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
0002 $ $ AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
0003 $ $ $ PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
0004 $ $ CD-R external writing system -
0005 $ $ Scanner unit ☞ 20610

0006 $ $
4. Troubleshooting
0007 $ $
0008 $ $ $ Failed parts
0009 $ $ Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner unit.
0010 $ $ $ Refer to 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.
0011 $ $ $ $ Refer to 4201 ☞ Image correction PCB.
0012 $ $ $ Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE PCB.
0013 $ Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
0014 $
0020 $ $ NOTE
0021 $ $ $ • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
0022 $ $ Circuit diagram
0023 $ $ $ ☞ CS 1-1 AC Power supply circuit diagram
0024 $ $ ☞ CS 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1)
0025 $ ☞ CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2)
0026 $ ☞ CS 2-1 Control section
0027 $ $ $ ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
0040 $ $
0050 $
0070 $
0071 $
IMPORTANT
status is abnormal.
☞ 37530
☞ 50520
46822 2/2
46900
Error: Main
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6900-####
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
Main control system error. depending on the suffix number (bit).
Countermeasure message Suffix

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of number Countermeasure Manual No.
purchase. (bit)
Alarm release 0004 Reinstall the QSS system ☞ 88000
NO 0010 program.
Error message release 0040
NO 0080
0001 Carry out the recovery.
Condition 0002
0100
Condition
0200
Because of the QSS control system, it is in a condition that the
main control system cannot assume, such as that there is no
0400 Initialize the Compact Archive ☞ 36700
Unit.
necessary file, the file is damaged and the data to be collated is
not consistent. 0800 When recurs, get the log data. ☞ 37500
1000 Check the connection of each ☞ 88000
Suffix Condition media drive.
4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit) Suffix
0001 ARCNET or LVDS cannot be used. number Failed parts Manual No.
(bit)
0002 There is not enough memory, failed to operate.
0004 There is no initial data file.
0040 Hard disk (for system) ☞ 88000
0080
0008 It loses one frame of the scanned images (0 frame). 0200
0010 The temporary file can not be made. 0800
0020 The number of scanned images is too many. 0001 D-ICE PCB ☞ 64030
0040 Check the error of the backup data. Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
0080 Check the error of the backup data. PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
0100 Communication error between tasks 0001 Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
0200 The backup file of the frame format cannot be found. 0008
0020
0400 The data base file of the archive is damaged.
0008 Scanner unit ☞ 20610
0800 The data mainly processed is not consistent.
0020
1000 When writing the data to the input media like MO,
1000 Each media drive ☞ 88000
the image data is not written normally.
NOTE
NOTE
• If the failed part is on the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB, check
the setting of DS1.
☞ 4002 # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
Failed parts
Check Point Refer to 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.
1 Reset the power supply. Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE control PCB.
2 Read the data of the machine. Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
☞ 35400
3 When recurs, get the log data. NOTE

☞ 89000

☞ 89010
46900 1/3
46900
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6901-####
ARCNET communication error. Failed parts Manual No.
purchase. Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET ☞ 50520
Alarm release communication error.
NO
Error message release Failed parts Manual No.
NO
ARCNET cable -
Condition Printer control PCB ☞ 66000

Condition
When the power supply is turned ON, the version is checked, or
software is upgraded, an ARCNET communication error occurs.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the
instant power failure. Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix PCB ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
number PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
(bit)
Power PCB ☞ 64160
Desk power supply 1 ☞ 64170
Desk power supply 2
Multi power supply (printer) ☞ 66100
0100 PU control PCB
CD-R writing system -
0800 CD-R writing system
d-Storage -
1000 d-Storage
2000 D-ICE control PCB # Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring
IMPORTANT Failed parts
• When this error occurs, the operation may not be Refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
continued. It is necessary to reset the power supply of Refer to 4200 ☞ Multi power supply (scanner) (PS3).
QSS. Refer to 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.
• The PCB without reference to the error may be Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE control PCB.
displayed in the second line depending on the equipped
options, cable connecting position and/or ARCNET
communication feature. Refer to 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 1.
Check the ARCNET communication path other than the Refer to 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 2.
displayed PCB. Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB.
☞ 50520 Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4).
☞ 37530 Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
NOTE
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
the second line of the message.
☞ 4190
Suffix number display. NOTE
Check Point Wiring diagrams [S-2/S-3]

☞ 89000
46900 2/3
46900
Error: Main

☞ 89010
4. Troubleshooting
46900 3/3
46902
Error: Main
No. 6902-#### No. 6903-####

LVDS communication error. Serial communication error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO YES or NO
• Select YES to continue the communication.
Condition • Select NO to abort the communication.
Condition
The LVDS communication error occurs. Condition
Condition
Suffix PCB The serial communication has an error.
number
(bit)
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
0002 Image processing PCB (bit)
0001 Between the ATX mother board and the colorimeter
NOTE control PCB
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in 0002 Between the colorimeter and the colorimeter control
the second line of the message. PCB
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to NOTE
Suffix number display. • The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
☞ 4002 the second line of the message.
Diagnosis For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Failed parts Manual No. Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000 Diagnosis
# Symptoms due to the connection failure of wiring Check the communication status of the ☞ 37530
colorimeter unit in System Version Check at
Failed parts No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
Refer to 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.
NOTE Serial cable -
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
Circuit diagram
☞ - System connection diagram Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
☞ CS 2-1 Control section Power PCB ☞ 64160
☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170
☞ S 1-7 Around ARCNET and LVDS
Failed parts
Refer to 4201 ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB.
Refer to 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 2.
46902 1/2
46902
Error: Main
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
46902 2/2
46906
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6906-####
Failed to change the mode. Enter to the Failed parts Manual No.
next mode? ARCNET cable -

Countermeasure message AFC/scanner control PCB ☞ 65000
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
purchase. Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
Alarm release
NO PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Error message release Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
• Select PASS to change the mode again. D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
• Select NO to stop the change. ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
• Select YES to enter the next mode. PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
Condition NOTE
Condition
Circuit diagram
Each control PCB does not return any signal when the mode is
changed. ☞ - System connection diagram
4. Troubleshooting
The first figure of suffix number:
The mode which you are going to bring up is displayed.
☞ S 1-7 Around ARCNET and LVDS
Suffix PCB ☞ LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB
number
(bit)
1### Normal mode
2### Input/Output mode
3### Setup mode
4### Adjustment mode
5### Start Up Checks mode
6### Close Down Checks mode
7### Program timer mode
8### Input Check mode
F### Unknown
The last three digits of suffix number:

Each control PCB which was failed to change the mode is
indicated by the total of the bit operation.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
#002 AFC/scanner control PCB
#004 Image processing PCB
#008 Printer control PCB
#080 Processor control PCB
#100 PU control PCB
#800 LASER
NOTE
☞ 4002
46906 1/2
46906
Error: Main
No. 6907-####
The file was not found.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The required file for setup does not exist.
NOTE
• The file name where the error arises will be displayed in the
4. Troubleshooting
• Although the suffix numbers for these error messages will
vary depending on the error occurring conditions, the
corrective action should be taken according to the following
diagnosis.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46906 2/2
46908
Error: Main

No. 6908-####
Processing response error.
Countermeasure message ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB ☞ 88000
purchase. CD-R writing system -
Alarm release d-Storage -
NO
Error message release NOTE
NO • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Condition Circuit diagram
Condition
When the processing command is given, each CPU does not
return any signal. ☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the ☞ S 1-7 Around ARCNET and LVDS
instant power failure. ☞ LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB
Suffix PCB
4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit)
0100 PU control PCB
0800 CD-R writing system
1000 d-Storage
2000 D-ICE control PCB
4000 Image correction PCB
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB
NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
☞ 4002
Check Point
Diagnosis
ARCNET cable -
46908 1/2
46908
Error: Main
No. 6909-####
CPU was reset. Abort the process.
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
The CPU is reset due to power failure.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
☞ 4002
Check Point
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
46908 2/2
46912
Error: Main
No. 6913-####
System was shut down forcibly. Restart
the system.
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
System has shut down forcibly while processing.
NOTE
• Although the suffix numbers for these error messages will
vary depending on the error occurring conditions, the
4. Troubleshooting
corrective action should be taken according to the message.
Check Point
2 Check whether there is any error concurred with, take
a corrective action, when the error has occurred.
46912 1/1
46916
Error: Main
No. 6916-####
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error.
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
Functions. Then restart the personal computer.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
An error occurred at the diagnostic check of the PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB.
Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
4. Troubleshooting
0001 Standard PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB
0002 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB for Compact Archive
Unit (option)
NOTE
☞ 4002
Diagnosis
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46916 1/1
46918
Error: Main
No. 6918-####
Failed to start the DLS.
Restart the system. If this error recurs, contact your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The signal of starting failure from DLS has been
notified to QSS.
0002 The signal of completing starting from DLS has not
been notified to QSS although a specified time has
passed.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
☞ 37600
☞ 88000
4. If it does not work out, execute the recovery.
☞ 88000
46918 1/1
46922
Error: Main
No. 6922-####
Device control error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 An error of Windows about the USB flash memory is
detected using the self-diagnostic function of the
main control system.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Confirm whether the USB flash memory is not being
removed during reading data from the USB flash
memory.
2 Failure in the USB flash memory
Diagnosis
Failure in the USB Flash Memory ☞ 88000
Compatible Kit
46922 1/1
48360
Error: Compact Archive Unit
No. 8361
Archive File read error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Reading image data is failed while printing from the
compact archive unit.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Hard disk drive ☞ 88000
NOTE
Circuit diagram
48360 1/1
48362
No. 8362 No. 8363

Archive File write error. Compact Archive Unit processing error.

Refer to the manual for corrective action. Refer to the manual for corrective action.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
- Writing data is failed while saving the image to the - Cannot communicate with the Compact Archive Unit
compact archive unit. (TYPE2) in order to save to, or print from the
Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2).
Diagnosis
NOTE
Failed parts Manual No. • This message appears only in the case of Compact Archive
4. Troubleshooting
Hard disk drive ☞ 88000 Unit (TYPE2).
NOTE Check Point

1 Check the settings for Option Registration and
Circuit diagram Operator Selections of the Compact Archive Unit
☞ CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram (TYPE2).
☞ CS 2-2 PC connecting 2 If this occurs while using the QSS-Kids, check the
connection between the QSS-Kids and the machine.
3 Initialize the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2).
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
48362 1/1
48364
No. 8364
Compact Archive Unit cannot be used.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
Compact Archive Unit cannot be used at the start-up of QSS or
when reading back-up data.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 There is no hard disk drive available for use.
4. Troubleshooting
0002 There is only one PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (for
TYPE1 only).
0003 The hard disk drive has not been formatted.
0004 The capacity of the hard disk drive has become below
the lower limit.
Check Point
1 Reset Option Registration of the Compact Archive
Unit (TYPE2) and reset the power supply.
Restart the machine, carry out Option Registration
again, and check.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Circuit diagram
48364 1/1
49000
Error message: Edit
Error message: Edit
No. 9000-#### No. 9001-####

Edit mode System error. Edit mode Information file error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 There is no .dll in Windows 2000. 0001 The image insertion information is defective when
0002 AlhpaBlend function is not supported in Windows reading an information file in the Edit mode.
2000. 0002 The letter information is defective when reading an
0003 The image information file is broken when entering information file in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode. 0003 There is an unknown information data when reading
4. Troubleshooting
0004 There is not the image information file when entering information file extend data in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
NOTE
0005 Making data for frame printing is failed.
• This message appears when reading an information file in the
0006 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
0007 Changing the size of template image is failed when Check Point
entering in image editing mode.
0008 Changing the magnification of inserted image data is 1 Check if the information file is not broken in the
failed. template information correction screen.
0009 Reading the letter information file in the template 2 Install the option template again.
selection display is failed.
0010 Reading phrase data is failed.
0011 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering
the information file correction display.
0012 Changing the size of template image is failed when
entering the information file correction display.
0013 Opening the file is failed.
0014 Memory mapping is failed.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Install the QSS software again. ☞ 88000
Carry out the recovery.
49000 1/1
49002
Error message: Edit
No. 9002-#### No. 9003-####

Edit mode Image data error. Edit mode Image read error.

This file format cannot be read, or this file is broken. Select the Saved image is broken. Remake the data, and save it.
correct file. Alarm release
Alarm release NO
NO Error message release
Error message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number 0001 The image saved data to read is broken.
0001 Reading PSD file is failed. 0002 There is not the information file in the image saved
0002 Copying the image inserted in Inserted Graphics is data to read.
failed. 0003 There is not the template file in the image saved data
0003 The inserted image data cannot be read by Plug-in. to read.
0004 Reading PSD file is failed.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
0005 Reading PSD image file is failed.
• This message appears when reading an image in the Edit
0006 There is not the image file to insert. mode.
0007 Reading image file to insert is failed.
0008 The layer information to read image is defective. Check Point
0009 Reading Bitmap file in the preview screen is failed. 1 Make the image data again.
0010 Reading thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Diagnosis
0011 Writing thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Countermeasure Manual No.
0012 There is not a file when receiving the template file Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
name. Install the QSS software again. ☞ 88000
NOTE
Check Point
1 Check if the corrective image data is selected.
2 Carry out the operation using another image data.
Diagnosis
Install the QSS software again. ☞ 88000
49002 1/1
5000
Starting up/Closing down Operation .................................................................................... 50500

Startup sequence ................................................................................................................................................50500
Startup sequence (DLS specification) ...............................................................................................................50501
Startup sequence for PC ....................................................................................................................................50510
ARCNET communication ..................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow .........................................................................................................................50520
How to use the fiber cutter ................................................................................................................................50520
How to use the aspirator ....................................................................................................................................50520
Data flow chart ..................................................................................................................... 50600
Data flow in printing (negative/positive) ...........................................................................................................50600
Data flow in printing (media) ............................................................................................................................50610
Data flow in data saving ....................................................................................................................................50620
Data flow to the CD-R external writing system ................................................................................................50630
Data flow to the CAU ........................................................................................................................................50640
Data flow in the image processing PCB ............................................................................................................50650
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB .............................................................................................................................50660
Data flow of the Net Scan mode [Stand Alone Scanner] ..................................................................................50670
Data flow in the Image Processing PCB [Stand Alone Scanner] ......................................................................50680
5 Operation sequence
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification) ................................................................................... 50800
Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS specification] ..............................................50800
Data flow in printing [DLS specification] .........................................................................................................50810
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification] ...................................................................................................50820
Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification] ...........................................................................50830
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification] ............................................................................................50840
Film carrier section .............................................................................................................. 51010
Film feed operation (135) ..................................................................................................................................51010
Film feed operation (MMC) ..............................................................................................................................51510
Film advance operation (AMC) .........................................................................................................................51550
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................. 55000
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................................................55000
Paper advance operation .................................................................................................... 55100
Paper supply operation (loading operation) .......................................................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation) ..................................................................................................55200
Exposure advance operation ..............................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation) ...............................................................................55400
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation) ...............................................................................55500
Paper rewind operation ......................................................................................................................................55600
Paper splicing operation ....................................................................................................................................55700
Paper end operation ...........................................................................................................................................55800
Fogged paper operation .....................................................................................................................................55900
Processor paper advance operation .................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation ....................................................................................................................56100
5000 1/2
5000
Print conveyor unit operation ............................................................................................... 56200

Print conveyor unit operation ............................................................................................................................56200
Print sorter unit operation .................................................................................................... 56300
Print sorter unit operation ..................................................................................................................................56300
5 Operation sequence
5000 2/2
50500
Starting up/Closing down Operation
Startup sequence
• This section covers starting up flow.
1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.
G070717
2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns ON.
• The processor control PCB turns ON the relay (X10) of the processor relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.
3. The control PCBs turn ON.
4. The machine starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Relays of the processor relay PCB (X1, X6 and X7) turn ON.
5. The machine starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.
6. The machine starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.
7. The D-ICE control PCB turns on the power supply of the built-in personal computer.
• The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.
8. The PC starts up and it starts up the QSS software.

• The PC checks the free space on drive C of the hard disk drive while it starts up the QSS software.
When the main software does not start normally
• No. 6900: Main control system error.
☞ 46900
When the free space on the drive C of hard disk drive is 4 GB or less
• No. 6506: Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s).
☞ 46506
9. Check the status of backup data on the hard disk drive.

• When starting the main software, the status of backup data of each control PCB in the hard disk drive is checked.
50500 1/4
50500
When the backup data in the hard disk drive is not normal
☞ 46900
10. Check the communication status between the main software and each control PCB.
• After the backup data is checked, the machine checks the communication status between control PCBs.
• The checking order is shown below.
1. Processor control PCB
2. D-ICE control PCB
3. AFC/scanner control PCB
4. PU control PCB*1
5. Image processing PCB
6. Printer control PCB
7. Laser control PCB
8. CD-R writing system*1
9. d-Storage*1
10. Colorimeter Control PCB*2
*1. The machine checks the communication status of the PCBs only when these options are registered for Option Registration.
*2. The machine does not check the communication status of the colorimeter control PCB in ARCNET communication but in Serial
communication. Then regardless of the other control PCBs' communication orders, the machine checks the colorimeter control PCB when
the main software starts up.
NOTE
• Even if error occurs in the D-ICE control PCB while the main software is checking the communication status of the control
PCBs, the main software checks the communication status of the control PCBs in order of communication status checking.
When the colorimeter control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6903: Serial communication error.
☞ 46902
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and colorimeter control PCB became normal, backup data is written to
the colorimeter control PCB from the hard disk drive.
When the processor control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6901-0008: ARCNET communication error.
☞ 46900
When the D-ICE control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the AFC/scanner control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the PU control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the image processing PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the printer control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and each control PCB became normal, backup data is written to the
printer control PCB from the hard disk drive.
50500 2/4
50500
• After writing the backup data, the printer will be initialized.

When the laser control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and the laser control PCB became normal, backup data is written to the
laser control PCB from the hard disk drive.
• After writing the backup data, the temperature in the laser unit will be controlled.
When the CD-R writing system does not start normally
• No. 4211: The data cannot be output to the CD-R external writing system. Confirm the power supply of CD-R external
writing system.
Refer to the Service Manual of CD-R external writing system.
When the d-Storage does not start normally
• No. 4216: The data cannot be output to the d-Storage. Confirm the power supply of d-Storage.
Refer to the Service Manual of d-Storage.
11. The process for starting the QSS software completes.

NOTE
• After the QSS software starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any key is
pressed.
• The machine shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The machine shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.
12. It displays the message The processing solution temperatures are being adjusted.
13. The temperature adjustment of the processing solutions is completed.
14. It displays Laser temperatures are being adjusted..

• It displays this only when the temperature adjustment for the laser is not completed at this point.
15. Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.
16. It displays Scanner temperature is being adjusted..
17. It displays LED Light Source Standby.
18. Temperature adjustment of the scanner is completed.
19. Temperature adjustment of the LED light source is completed.
20. The machine performs the light source update.

NOTE
• When starting up in the program timer, the light source update is carried out for the mounted film carrier automatically.
If pressing the manual sorter switch or turning on the circuit breaker to start up, No. 1306:Update the light source. If film
remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. will be displayed after the Start-up checks is completed if it is necessary.
50500 3/4
50500
21. After all temperature adjustments are completed, the message Would you like to proceed to the
operation mode? appears.
NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this message will not appear.
22. The YES key is pressed.

NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this operation is not necessary.
23. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality..
24. The machine displays an attention/error message if any.
25. The machine displays Start Up Checks mode.
50500 4/4
50501
Startup sequence (DLS specification)
• This section covers starting up flow.
1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.
G070717
2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns ON.
• The processor control PCB turns ON the relay (X10) of the processor relay PCB.
3. The control PCBs turn ON.
4. The machine starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Relays of the processor relay PCB (X1, X6 and X7) turn ON.
5. The machine starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.
6. The machine starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.
7. The D-ICE control PCB turns on the power supply of the built-in personal computer.
• The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.
8. PC starts, and QSS System Program starts up.

• The process for starting the QSS System Program is carried out.
When the main software does not start normally
☞ 46900
9. DLS System Management Software starts up.

• By the order from the QSS System Program, DLS System Management Software starts up.
When DLS System Management Software does not start up
• No. 6918: Failed to start the DLS.
☞ 46918
50501 1/4
50501
10. Check the status of backup data on the hard disk drive.
• When starting the main software, the status of backup data of each control PCB in the hard disk drive is checked.
When the backup data in the hard disk drive is not normal
☞ 46900
11. Check the communication status between the main software and each control PCB.
• After the backup data is checked, the machine checks the communication status between control PCBs.
• The checking order is shown below.
1. Processor control PCB
2. D-ICE control PCB
3. AFC/scanner control PCB
4. Image processing PCB
5. Printer control PCB
6. Laser control PCB
7. Colorimeter Control PCB*1
*1. The machine does not check the communication status of the colorimeter control PCB in ARCNET communication but in Serial
communication. Then regardless of the other control PCBs' communication orders, the machine checks the colorimeter control PCB when
the main software starts up.
NOTE
• Even if error occurs in the D-ICE control PCB while the main software is checking the communication status of the control
PCBs, the main software checks the communication status of the control PCBs in order of communication status checking.
When the colorimeter control PCB does not start normally
• No. 6903: Serial communication error.
☞ 46902
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and colorimeter control PCB became normal, backup data is written to
the colorimeter control PCB from the hard disk drive.
When the processor control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the D-ICE control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the AFC/scanner control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the image processing PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
When the printer control PCB does not start normally
☞ 46900
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and each control PCB became normal, backup data is written to the
printer control PCB from the hard disk drive.
• After writing the backup data, the printer will be initialized.
When the laser control PCB does not start normally
50501 2/4
50501
☞ 46900
NOTE
• After the communication between the main software and the laser control PCB became normal, backup data is written to the
laser control PCB from the hard disk drive.
• After writing the backup data, the temperature in the laser unit will be controlled.
12. The process for starting QSS System Program completes.

• After starting up the QSS System Program, it controls the starting up of DLS System Management Software.
When DLS System Management Software does not start up
• No. 6918: Failed to start the DLS.
☞ 46918
NOTE
• After the QSS System Program starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any
key is pressed.
• The machine shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The machine shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.
13. The process for starting DLS System Management Software completes.
14. The machine displays the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode?.
NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this message will not appear.
15. The YES key is pressed.

NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this operation is not necessary.
16. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality..
17. The machine displays an attention/error message if any.
18. The machine displays Start Up Checks mode.
19. The temperature adjustment for the laser unit completes.
20. The temperature adjustment for the scanner completes.
21. The temperature adjustment for the LED light source completes.
22. The machine performs the light source update.

NOTE
• When starting up in the program timer, the light source update is carried out for the mounted film carrier automatically.
If pressing the manual sorter switch or turning on the circuit breaker to start up, No. 1306:Update the light source. If film
remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. will be displayed after the Start-up checks is completed if it is necessary.
50501 3/4
50501
23. The adjustment of processing solution temperature completes.
50501 4/4
50510
Startup sequence for PC
This section covers the startup sequence of widely used PC (Windows 2000).
IMPORTANT
• The screens described in this section may be different from the actual ones or may not be displayed depending on the PC
type or connected devices.
1. Standby status
(1) Standby current is supplied from the ATX power supply to the mother board.
2. Power ON
(1) Power ON signal is input to the ATX power supply.

(2) Power LED turns on.
(3) Power is supplied to the mother board.
(4) Power is supplied to the built-in drives.
3. POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in starting up)
(1) VGA BIOS test
• Video board test
G057479
(2) CPU, memory test

• Resetting CPU
• DRAM check
G057480
(3) IDE connected device detection

• Program execution in BIOS
• Keyboard connection check
• Reading CMOS memory setting
• Initializing the chipset and on-board I/O
• Detecting the floppy disk
• Detecting the IDE hard disk
50510 1/4
50510
G057481
(4) SCSI connected device detection

• Detecting the SCSI connected device
G057482
(5) System configurations
• Displaying the system settings (settings for the software and hardware)
G057483
(6) PCI device listing

• Displaying the PCI devices
G057484
(7) Starting disk searching

(8) Selecting the device where the OS installed
50510 2/4
50510
4. Reading the NTLDR (NT loader, which is the program to start the OS)
(1) Starting the bootstrap loader in the BIOS ROM (to initialize the program)
(2) Searching the MBR (master boot record, the first sector) in the hard disk
(3) NTLDR moves to the RAM
(4) Searching the system file to start the OS with NTLDR in the hard disk
(5) The system file to start the OS moves to the RAM by NTLDR.
5. Starting the OS
NOTE
• The files required to start the OS.
File name Explanation

boot.ini Controls the installed OS, location to save the OS, the OS starting as a default and
waiting time for starting up the PC.
ntldr Displays the starting menu, reads the OS.
ntdetect.com Collects the hardware information and writes it to the OS (registry).
(1) "Starting Windows" display
White progress bar appears.
G057485
(2) "Starting up" display

Blue progress bar appears.
G057486
50510 3/4
50510
(3) "Please wait" display
G057487
50510 4/4
ARCNET communication figure (without option)
ATX mother board
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET
PCB (standard)
Printer control PCB

Laser control PCB Processor control PCB
J/P223 J/P224
J/P221
J/P219 J/P220 J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET communication flow
J/P1516 J/P1517 J/P222
Order of the ARCNET communication (without option)

ARCNET
ARCNET
J/P74 2 D-ICE control PCB
50520
50520
J/P73
J/P54
J/P443 J/P442 4 Image processing PCB
J/P53 5 Printer control PCB
6 Laser control PCB
J/P76
D-ICE control PCB ARCNET (Connector emission side)
Image correction ARCNET (Connector detection side)
PCB J/P75
AFC/scanner control
J/P72 J/P20 PCB
J/P71 J/P21
Image processing
D-ICE PCB
PCB
G076422
ARCNET communication
1/12
Processor control PCB PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard) ARCNET communication figure (with option)
J/P518 J/P517
ATX mother board
Printer control PCB
Laser control PCB

J/P224
J/P223 J/P221
J/P220 J/P222
J/P219
J/P1516 J/P1517
ARCNET-HUB PCB
J/P135
Order of the ARCNET communication (with option)

J/P136
ARCNET 1 Processor control PCB
J/P74
J/P73 2 D-ICE control PCB
J/P54
4 PU control PCB
50520
50520
J/P443 J/P442 J/P53

J/P76 J/P133 6 Printer control PCB
D-ICE control 7 Laser control PCB
PCB 8 CD-R writing system
Image correction PCB J/P134
J/P75 9 d-Storage
J/P137
J/P138 ARCNET (Connector emission side)
AFC/scanner ARCNET (Connector detection side)
J/P139
J/P72 J/P20 control PCB J/P140
J/P71 J/P21
Image processing PCB D-ICE PCB

J/P299 J/P300
PU control PCB
(option)
PCI-ARCNET CD-R external writing system (option)

conversion PCB d-Storage (option)
(option)
G076416
2/12
50520
IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication figure appears above. You can connect the ARCNET cable to any port if IN/OUT is correct.
The actual connecting position of the ARCNET cable may be different from the above ARCNET communication figure.
! Order of the ARCNET communication

No. Order of the ARCNET communication No. Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB 6 Printer control PCB
2 D-ICE control PCB 7 Laser control PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB 8 CD-R writing system
4 PU control PCB 9 d-Storage
! ARCNET communication at the starting up
This figure of the ARCNET communication is an image.

Actual data communication path is different.
PC (PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB)
d-Storage (ID##) Processor control PCB (ID##)
CD-R writing system (ID##) D-ICE control PCB (ID##)
Laser control PCB (ID##) AFC/scanner control PCB (ID##)
Printer control PCB (ID##) PU control PCB (ID##)
Image processing PCB (ID##)
G077176
1. All the PCBs which are involved in the ARCNET communication network have their own IDs.
2. At starting up the machine, the PC requires the processor control PCB to transmit data in order of the
ARCNET communication.
3. When the processor control PCB receives the data transmission requirement from the PC, it returns the
signal of the communication OK.
50520 3/12
50520
4. After receiving the signal of the communication OK from the processor control PCB, the ARCNET
communication between the PC and the processor control PCB turns OK.
NOTE
• After turning the ARCNET communication between the PC and the processor control PCB to OK, Version of the System
Version Check display appears and OK is displayed at Communication.
Version OK
S3059-01-SM00
5. After turning the ARCNET communication between the PC and the processor control PCB to OK, the
same communication check as the processor control PCB will be executed in order of D-ICE control
PCB → AFC/scanner control PCB and ARCNET communication.
6. The system starts up normally after completing the communication check of all the PCBs involving to
the network.
! Diagnosis procedure at the ARCNET communication error
Example: When No. 6901-0010 AFC/scanner control PCB occurs
1. Check the communication status of all the control PCBs.
2. Since the communication status of the System Version Check display is - , or the control PCB, which
version is not displayed, might be damaged, check mainly the PCB first.
IMPORTANT
• If the communication status of the ARCNET is in poor condition, it may take several minutes before OK
appears at Communication or the version of each control PCB appears at Version, in the System Version
Check display.
In addition, when the ARCNET communication status is in poor condition, the machine may repeatedly cycle
through indications of Communication, OK, and -.
• When the option is not equipped, or depending on the model composition, the communication status may be
displayed by - in the System Version Check display.
• For diagnosis with System Version Check, refer to ☞ Example 1: Judgement of failed part System Version
Check.
Version Communication
S3059-01-SM00
3. When No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error AFC/Scanner control PCB occurs at turning on the
power supply, it is highly probable that the ARCNET communication paths of No. 6901-0001 ARCNET
communication error: Processor control PCB and No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error: D-ICE
control PCB are normal. Therefore, exclude those parts from the diagnosis.
NOTE
• Carry out the diagnosis confirming the above display and the following table.
50520 4/12
50520
See illustration. ☞ ARCNET communication flow

$ : Make a diagnosis.
− : Do not make a diagnosis.
−/$ Parts for diagnosis (without option) −/$ Parts for diagnosis (with option)
− PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB − PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB
− D-ICE control PCB − D-ICE control PCB
− Printer control PCB − Printer control PCB
− Processor control PCB − Processor control PCB
$ AFC/scanner control PCB − ARCNET-HUB PCB
$ Image processing PCB $ AFC/scanner control PCB
$ Laser control PCB $ PU control PCB
$ Image processing PCB
$ Laser control PCB
$ CD-R writing system
$ d-Storage
4. Check the connecting condition of ARCNET PCB, ARCNET cable and cable after the parts for diagnosis
are decided.
Check point
(1) Check that the cable is securely attached to the connector for ARCNET PCB.
(2) Check if the ARCNET cable takes off from the connector of the ARCNET PCB only for pulling it a little.
IMPORTANT
• When the ARCNET cable comes off only by pulling the cable lightly although its sheath is not shaved,
there is a possibility that the stopper of the connector on the ARCNET PCB is damaged is high, replace
the ARCNET PCB.
Stopper
G077187
(3) When the sheath of ARCNET cable is shaved and gets thin, replace the cable or cut it.
IMPORTANT
• When the sheath of ARCNET cable is shaved and it is thin, replace the cable.
50520 5/12
50520
For details about how to cut the cable, refer to ☞ How to use the fiber cutter.
ARCNET cable
Chips of shaved
G077188
5. When you remove the ARCNET cable, check whether the red light has come out from the IN cable
(connected to the black connector) of ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• Since it is necessary to check the power supply of the machine in the state where it turned ON in order to
confirm the connection state of the ARCNET PCB, ARCNET cable, and cables, be sure to work carefully
enough to each PCB.
Check point
(1) When two or more IN cables are on the PCB, and the red light is weak compared with the other IN cable or the red
light has not shone, check whether the chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath have collected in the connector of
the PCB for OUT.
Check defects of the ARCNET cable.
For details about how to clean inside the connector, refer to ☞ How to use the aspirator.
IN cables
Red lights
G077181
50520 6/12
50520
6. When you remove the ARCNET cable, check whether the red light has come out from the OUT
connector on the ARCNET PCB.
Check point
(1) When there are two or more OUT connectors on the PCB, compare and check the strength of light of OUT
connector on other PCB.
IN connector
Red light (OUT connector)

G077180
(2) When the red light is weak compared with the other connector or the red light has not shone, check whether the
chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath have collected in the connector.
IMPORTANT
• Check whether the chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath have collected in the IN connector at the
same time.
Connector
Chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath
G077182
7. Check whether +5 V is supplied to each ARCNET PCB from each power supply PCB as a factor which
ARCNET communication error occurs in addition to the above.
NOTE
• When +5 V is not supplied to the ARCNET PCB, the red light does not come from the OUT connector on the ARCNET
PCB.
8. After confirming the check points mentioned above, when normal, replace each PCB.
! Diagnosis appendix
Example 1: Judgement of failed part System Version Check

1. If the communication status of the ARCNET is in poor condition, - may appear at Communication, or
version of some control PCBs may not appear at Version, in the System Version Check display. (The
50520 7/12
50520
colorimeter unit, the NMC1 and the NMC2 may not be inclusive if they are not for the ARCNET
communication.)
Version Communication
S3059-01-SM00
2. In the case above, either the IN connector or the OUT connector of each control PCB is not connected
securely.
Loose connection of either the IN or the OUT connector of each control PCB is highly suspected.
In such cases, specify which control PCB is causing trouble and disconnect its IN and OUT connectors. This may be helpful to
stabilize the ARCNET communication, and Communication and Version of control PCBs other than those of the control PCB
causing trouble may appear.
IMPORTANT
• Depending on the communication status of the ARCNET, it is sometimes required to restart the PC to bring up
the Version and Communication in the System Version Check display, even when the physical ARCNET
communication status is in normal condition.
IN connector Red light (OUT connector)
G077180
3. In the case of Step 2 as above, check the connection of the cable and the control PCB connector that is
causing trouble.
Cleaning inside the connectors on the ARCNET PCB, cutting the ARCNET cable or replacing the ARCNET cable or
ARCNET control PCB solves the trouble.
IMPORTANT
• If the problem is caused by the D-ICE control PCB, the printer control PCB, or the ARCNET-HUB PCB, above
diagnosis may not be applicable because these PCBs are equipped with HUB function.
Example 2: Judgment of failure place (when either laser control PCB or printer control PCB is out of order)
NOTE
• It is an explanation for the case when the message No. 6901-0200 Printer control PCB is displayed.
1. Replace connector (2) with connector (1) on the printer control PCB.
50520 8/12
50520
2. If replacing the connector of the printer control PCB results in recurrence of No. 6901-0001 ARCNET
communication error. Processor control PCB, it is highly probable that the cause of failure lies in the
printer control PCB.
Printer control PCB

Laser control PCB
ARCNET
(1) (2)
G077185
Example 3: Judgment of failure place with the ARCNET cable
NOTE
• It is an explanation for the case when the message No. 6901-0200 Printer control PCB is displayed.
• The method of diagnosis in case there is an empty connector of ARCNET PCB, such as ARCNET-HUB PCB, is explained.
• To perform the diagnosis using the ARCNET cable, it is necessary to prepare the ARCNET cable in advance.
1. Disconnect the cable connected to the laser control PCB, and replace it with the ARCNET cable from
the prepared ARCNET-HUB PCB.
50520 9/12
50520
2. If "ARCNET communication error" does not occur as a result of replacing the ARCNET cable, it is highly
probable that the cause of failure lies in the printer control PCB.
Laser control PCB Printer control PCB
ARCNET
ARCNET-HUB PCB
Prepared ARCNET cable

G077186
50520 10/12
50520
How to use the fiber cutter
! How to use the fiber cutter
1. Remove the ARCNET cable.

2. Cut the ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• Cut the ARCNET cable at 15 mm from the end.
• To keep the quality of cutting surface, cut the ARCNET cable only once with each hole of the fiber cutter.
Cutting holes
Before cutting (abnormal)
After cutting (normal)
G081991
IMPORTANT
• If the end of ARCNET cable is in the following condition, cut it.
No. Condition of ARCNET cable Illustration

1 The cable surface is sticky. -
2 The cable surface is thick and soft.
NOTE
• If the cable surface is thick and soft, it may not be inserted into the
hole of fiber cutter.
In this case, cut the ARCNET cable using a nipper or the like, and
then cut the end of the cable with the fiber cutter.
3 The cable surface is shaved.
3. Check the condition of the end of ARCNET cable and that no dust is attached on it.
4. Clean inside of the ARCNET connector if necessary.
☞ How to use the aspirator
5. Connect the ARCNET cable.
50520 11/12
50520
How to use the aspirator
! How to use the aspirator
1. Remove the ARCNET cable.

2. Attach the front end of aspirator to the connector on ARCNET PCB to suck out the dust.
Dust
Front end of aspirator
Aspirator
G081992
3. Connect the ARCNET cable.
50520 12/12
AOM
Mirror ATX mother board
VIDEO BOARD
Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM LVDS/ARC
driver
NET PCB
Bl LVDS (standard)
ase
r G-AOM
driver
G
la
ser B-AOM
driver
Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB
ARCNET
Polygon mirror
LVDS ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens
Synchronous sensor
ARCNET
J/P455 J/P456
ARCNET
Image correction
Data flow in printing (negative/positive)
PCB
50600
50600
D-ICE control PCB AFC/scanner

control PCB
Prescanning data
Actual scanning data
Image processing D-ICE PCB

PCB
LVDS
PCB
[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM
Data change-over
Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2
Scratch mend PCB 1
Digital masking unit (option)
G072346
1/2
Data flow chart
Data flow chart
50600
Data flow chart
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.
1. The scanner unit scans a film.
2. The D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50660.
NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].
3. The image correction PCB performs image correction of actual scanning data such as color and
density correction, DSA, and image rotation.
IMPORTANT
• Prescanning data does not go through the image correction PCB.
• Prescanning data goes through the D-ICE PCB → the image processing PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as
the image data for PJP to be displayed on the monitor.
NOTE
• The prescanning data is used for the index print.
• For details about the image correction PCB, image processing PCB and their data flows, refer to ☞ 50650.
4. Image data editing such as frame combination and front print combination is performed in the image
processing PCB.
5. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.
6. The laser unit exposes the paper.
50600 2/2
AOM ATX mother board
Mirror
VIDEO BOARD
Media drive
R laser R-AOM PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard)
driver
Bl
ase G-AOM LVDS
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
HDD (Standard)
driver
ARCNET
Data flow in printing (media)
Polygon mirror LVDS ARCNET ARCNET

ARCNET
Lens
ARCNET
Synchronous sensor J/P455 J/P456
ARCNET
Image correction
PCB AFC/scanner
50610
50610
D-ICE control PCB

control PCB
Setup print data
Image data (print)
Image processing
PJP image data (monitor display)
D-ICE PCB
PCB
LVDS
PCB
[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM
Data change-over
Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2
Scratch mend PCB 1
G072349
1/2
Data flow chart
50610
Data flow chart
! Input of this system operation is the media and output is a print.
1. PC reads the image data from a media.

NOTE
• The PJP image data is generated in the PC and displayed on the monitor.
2. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the PC.
3. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA, and
image rotation.
IMPORTANT
• Setup print data goes through the image correction PCB but color and density correction and CMS correction
are not performed.
NOTE
processing PCB.
50610 2/2
Mirror AOM
VIDEO BOARD ATX mother board
Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM LVDS/ARC
driver
NET PCB
Bl LVDS
ase
r G-AOM
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
Media
driver
ARCNET
Data flow in data saving
Polygon mirror ARCNET ARCNET

LVDS
ARCNET
Lens
Synchronous sensor
ARCNET
J/P455 J/P456
ARCNET
Image correction
PCB
50620
50620

Prescanning data
control PCB
D-ICE PCB
Image processing
PCB
LVDS
PCB
[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM
Data change-over
Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2
Scratch mend PCB 1
G072350
1/2
Data flow chart
50620
Data flow chart
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation (including the Bravo).
IMPORTANT
NOTE
PCB 1 [J485].
image rotation.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
4. The image processing PCB performs color correction of the image data such as CMS.
IMPORTANT
• When the data is output to a media, the image processing PCB does not perform image data editing such as
frame combination and front print combination.
5. The machine outputs the image data to a media.
50620 2/2
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard)
Mirror AOM
ATX mother
HDD
VIDEO board
BOARD
(Standard)
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS
Bl
ase
r G-AOM
CAU HDD (Option)
driver LVDS
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver FLATBED
Printer control PCB SCANNER(A4)
ARCNET
(Option)
Polygon mirror LVDS

ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens LVDS
Synchronous sensor
ARCNET
J/P1350 J/P456 ARCNET
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB
ARCNET
PCB
ARCNET-HUB PCB
Prescanning data
50630
HDD
50630

control PCB PU control PCB
Image correction
PCB
DSP PCB
CD-R WRITER
Buffer
IEEE1394
(option)
Data flow to the CD-R external writing system
ARCNET
D-ICE PCB
ATX mother board
LVDS
PCB
[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM
PCB (option)
PCI-/ARCNET
Data change-over
CD-R external writing system

Scratch mend PCB 1
Scratch mend PCB 1
(option)
Scratch mend PCB 2
G072347
1/2
Data flow chart
50630
Data flow chart
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CD-R
external writing system.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
PCB 1 [J485].
3. The image correction PCB performs image correction of actual scanning data such as color and
density correction, DSA, and image rotation.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
IMPORTANT
• When the data is output to the CD-R external writing system, the image processing PCB does not perform
image data editing such as frame combination and front print combination.
• The buffer PCB does not perform color conversion.
5. The image data is sent to the buffer PCB of the CD-R external writing system from the image
processing PCB.
6. DSP PCB performs JPEG conversion and edge sharpening.
7. HDD saves the image data temporarily.
8. The image data is output to the CD-R external writing system from IEEE1394.
50630 2/2
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard)
Mirror AOM
ATX mother
board
HDD
VIDEO
BOARD
(Standard)
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS
Bl
ase
r G-AOM
driver LVDS
G
Printing from CAU
la
se
r B-AOM
driver FLATBED
Data flow to the CAU
Printer control PCB SCANNER(A4)

Output to the CAU (TYPE2)
ARCNET
(Option)
(Option)
CAU HDD
Polygon mirror
LVDS
ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens LVDS
Synchronous sensor
ARCNET
J/P456 ARCNET
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB
J/P445 J/P455 ARCNET

ARCNET-HUB PCB
PCB
50640
50640
HDD
control PCB PU control PCB
PCB
DSP PCB
CD-R WRITER
Buffer
IEEE1394
(option)
Image correction
ARCNET
Prescanning data
D-ICE PCB
ATX mother board
Image processing PCB LVDS
PCB
[J485]
DIMM
[J484A]
PCB (option)
PCI-/ARCNET
CD-R external writing system
Data change-over
Scratch mend PCB 1
Scratch mend PCB 1
(option)
Scratch mend PCB 2
G072354
1/3
Data flow chart
50640
Data flow chart
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CAU.
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1: 12 bits)
IMPORTANT
NOTE
PCB 1 [J485].
3. The image data is output to the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (option) from the input memory in the image
processing PCB.
IMPORTANT
• For details about the image processing PCB and the data flow, refer to ☞ 50650.
• In the case of the CAU (TYPE1), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data and the image data are saved in the HDD of the CAU. In the case
of reading from the CAU, the Correction value shows the value corrected.
• The image data saved in the CAU (TYPE1) is raw data for the scanner. It is not general data. It cannot be
used unless the QSS processes the data.
4. The image data is saved in the HDD of the CAU.
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE2: 8 bits)
IMPORTANT
NOTE
PCB 1 [J485].
3. The image data is output to the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard) from the composition processing
section in the image processing PCB.
IMPORTANT
• For details about the image processing PCB and the data flow, refer to ☞ 50650.
50640 2/3
50640
Data flow chart
• In the case of the CAU (TYPE2), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data is not saved to the HDD of the CAU. In the case of reading from
the CAU, all Correction value is N.
• Save the image data saved to the CAU (TYPE2) as JPEG data.
NOTE
• In the case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.
• For the details about the difference between the CAU (TYPE1) and the CAU (TYPE2), refer to Compact Archive Unit
Operator's Manual, Difference between TYPE1 and TYPE2.
4. The image data is saved in the HDD of the CAU.
Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)
1. The image data is output to the image processing PCB via standard PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB from
the HDD of the CAU.
image rotation.
NOTE
processing PCB.
50640 3/3
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB Printing from the CAU (TYPE1 and TYPE2)
(Option) Printing from a media
Printing from the FB scanner
Index print
Sample print D-ICE PCB
Setup print
FLATBED
SCANNER(A4)
PCI-
LVDS/ARC J/P456
LVDS Image input section
NET PCB
Prescanning data
(standard)
Outputting to media
ATX mother
Input memory
board
HDD
CAU HDD (Option)

(Standard)
VIDEO
BOARD Output to the CAU (TYPE1)
LVDS Image correction PCB
J/P445
Outputting to the CD-R external writing system
Outputting frame image from the HDD (standard)

Data flow in the image processing PCB
J/P1350 CMS section
Media drive
50650
50650
LVDS Development memory

Composite
memory
HDD
Package print
PCB
DSP PCB
CD-R WRITER
Buffer
IEEE1394
Composition processing section
LVDS
Outputting to media
ATX mother board Output to the CAU (TYPE2)
Outputting to the CD-R external Laser control PCB

writing system
Parts mounted on the image processing PCB
CD-R external writing system (option)

Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2), (others)
Laser unit
PCB (option)
PCI-/ARCNET
G072353
1/3
Data flow chart
50650
Data flow chart
! The route of image data in the image processing PCB is described as the system
operation.
2. The image data is sent to the image input section of the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.
IMPORTANT
3. The image input section of the image processing PCB sends the image data that has been input from
the D-ICE PCB to the input memory or LVDS cables.
4. When the image processing PCB is in process, its input memory stores the image data temporarily.
5. Image processing on the image correction PCB varies depending whether the input data is film or not.
☞ When the input media is film
☞ When the input media is not film
6. CMS section of the image processing PCB performs CMS correction.
7. When the composition processing section of the image processing PCB is in process, its development
memory stores the image data temporarily.
8. The composition processing section of the image processing PCB combines the frame image or front
print image to the image data.
IMPORTANT
• The composition image such as frame image and front print is not saved in the CAU (TYPE1), a media or the
CD-R external writing system.
• In the case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.
NOTE
• The frame data is sent from the HDD (standard) via the composite memory.
! When the input media is film
image rotation.
2. Convert the image data which is input onto the image correction PCB from 12 bit to 8 bit.
IMPORTANT
• When printing from the CAU (type 1: 12 bit image data), take the same process as ☞ 2.
50650 2/3
50650
Data flow chart
• You can see the image data converted from 12 bit to 8 bit on the PC monitor even when processing from film
in the Edit mode. For this reason, you do not need to print in some cases.
If an abnormal image occurs, check the condition of input image in the Edit mode.
3. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the image correction PCB.
! When the input media is not film
image rotation.
IMPORTANT
• Setup print data and sample print data go through the image correction PCB but color and density correction
and CMS correction are not performed.
50650 3/3
50660
Data flow chart
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB
Actual scanning data (digital masking)
Actual scanning data (D-ICE is OFF)
Actual scanning data (standard)
Prescanning data
Adjustment data
Parts mounted on the D-ICE PCB
Option: Digital masking unit
D-ICE PCB
DIMM (Option)
SUB1
Scratch mend PCB 2

(Option)
Data change-over PCB Scratch mend PCB 1

(Option) [J484A] (option)

(Option)
MAIN
Image correction
PCB
Image processing
PCB
G072352
50660 1/2
50660
Data flow chart
! The route of image data in the D-ICE PCB is described as the system operation.
NOTE
• 1. The image data goes through SUB1 and MAIN whether processing is performed or not.
SUB1 {digital adjustment for the scanner (such as shading)}
MAIN {controlling output to the image processing PCB}
• 2. If DIMM is installed, the image data goes through it whether processing is performed or not.
• 3. D-ICE PCB does not perform scratch erasing for prescanning, but processing 1 above of SUB 1 and MAIN is performed.
• 4. Processing for the actual scanning (D-ICE is OFF) is the same as processing 3 above.
• 5. Adjustment indicates adjustments for the scanner such as the light source registration, light axis adjustment and focus
adjustment.
1. When scratch mend PCB 2 is in process, the DIMM stores the actual scanning data temporarily.
(Option)
NOTE
• Processing time of digital masking depends on how much scratches are on a film.
2. SUB1 of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
IMPORTANT
NOTE
• This performs digital adjustment such as shading for the scanner.
3. Scratch mend PCB 2, the data change-over PCB, scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A], and scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485] detect the scratches and dust on a film and correct them. (Option)
NOTE
• Three scratch mend PCBs share the tasks to improve the processing speed of scratch erasing.
PCB 1 [J485].
4. MAIN of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
IMPORTANT
NOTE
• Besides detecting and correcting the scratches and dust on the film base layer, this controls D-ICE totally, communicates
with the D-ICE control PCB, and controls outputting image data to the image processing PCB.
5. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.
IMPORTANT
the image data for PJP to be displayed on the monitor. Refer to ☞ 50600.
• Prescanning data and test print data for setup do not go through the digital masking unit. Scratch erasing
process for base layer (standard) is not performed in D-ICE PCB.
NOTE
50660 2/2
50670
Data flow chart
Data flow of the Net Scan mode [Stand Alone Scanner]
Prescanning data
External PC
LAN PORT
VIDEO
LAN BOARD
BOARD
ATX mother board
ATX mother
board
HDD
LVDS
VIDEO BOARD
LVDS/ARC
NET PCB
PCI-
DIMM
AFC/scanner
control PCB
ARCNET
ARCNET
Scratch mend PCB 2

ARCNET
Data change-over
D-ICE PCB

LVDS
PCB
D-ICE control PCB
Scratch mend PCB 1

[J484A]
Scratch mend PCB 1

[J485]
J/P456
J/P455
Image correction
Image processing
LVDS
PCB
PCB
G076401
50670 1/2
50670
Data flow chart
! Input for this system operation is performed by film scanning operation and the
external PC.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
PCB 1 [J485].
3. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA,
rotation and cropping.
IMPORTANT
• Prescanning data goes through the D-ICE PCB → the image processing PCB, and then it is sent to the
external PC as the image data for PJP.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
• When 48bit is selected, the image processing PCB does not perform color correction of the image data such
as CMS.
5. The image data is output to the external PC via QSS computer.
50670 2/2
50680
Data flow chart
Data flow in the Image Processing PCB [Stand Alone Scanner]
24 bit scanning data 48 bit scanning data
Prescanning data Parts mounted on the image processing PCB

Image correction PCB
Development memory
Image input section
Input memory
CMS section
D-ICE PCB
Composite
memory
J/P456
J/P445
J/P1350
LVDS
LVDS
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET
BOARD
VIDEO
PCB (standard)
VIDEO
BOARD
ATX mother
ATX mother
LAN
board
BOARD
board
LAN PORT
HDD
Media drive HDD

(Standard) External PC
G076402
50680 1/2
50680
Data flow chart
operation.
2. The image data is sent to the image input section of the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.
IMPORTANT
3. The image input section of the image processing PCB sends the image data that has been input from
the D-ICE PCB to the input memory or LVDS cables.
4. When the image processing PCB is in process, its input memory stores the image data temporarily.
5. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA,
rotation and cropping.
IMPORTANT
• When 48bit is selected, the image data is output from the image processing PCB via J/P456 (LVDS)→QSS
computer to the external PC.
7. CMS section of the image processing PCB performs CMS correction.
8. When the composition processing section of the image processing PCB is in process, its development
memory stores the image data temporarily.
9. The image data is output to the external PC via QSS computer.
50680 2/2
50800
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)
Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS

specification]
Input
Editing
Output
Network Order (Option by Kodak) Scanner Media
Desk section
PC LAN PCI-
Media drive
LVDS/ARCNET
PCB
System Management
Software
Editing
HDD (system)
KIAS (Z:) WIP (V:) PrintBuf (Y:)
HDD (archive)
Archive (U:)
Image processing
PCB
Printer Laser control PCB
QSS System Program
G072417
50800 1/2
50800
! Data flow around the DLS System Management Software is described.

NOTE
• For details about the data flow of scanner and printer, refer to the descriptions below.
• Data flow in printing (negative/positive) [DLS specification]
☞ 50810
• Data flow in data saving [DLS specification]
☞ 50820
• Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification]
☞ 50830
• Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification]
☞ 50840
1. The image data is read into WIP (V:) from the input devices such as scanner or media.
NOTE
• For the Network Order (Option by Kodak), the image data input to KIAS (Z:) from the network device is transferred to
WIP (V:).
2. The image is edited in the Preview display.

NOTE
• The sequence of editing operations such as color and density correction, image rotation, scaling, front print, index print
and template composition is performed all in the System Management Software.
3. By pressing Start Job, the edited image data is saved in WIP (V:) and transferred to PrintBuf (Y:).
4. The image data is transferred from PrintBuf (Y:) to each output device such as printer, media and
archive.
50800 2/2
Mirror VIDEO BOARD
Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS/ARC
NET PCB
Bl LVDS
ase
r G-AOM (standard) HDD
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
ARCNET
Polygon mirror
LVDS ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens
Synchronous sensor
ARCNET
J/P455 J/P456
ARCNET
Image correction
Data flow in printing [DLS specification]
PCB
50810
50810
Print data

Image data
control PCB
Prescanning data

PCB
LVDS
PCB
[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM
Data change-over
Scratch mend PCB 1
Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2
G076404
1/2
50810
! Input is film scanning operation or the image data and output is printing operation.
1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position
analysis.
Actual scan data is used for index print and preview.
2. Scanning data detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and corrects them on the D-ICE PCB.
(Standard)
IMPORTANT
NOTE
PCB 1 [J485].
3. Scanning data sends the image data to HDD via D-ICE PCB→Image processing PCB→PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB→ATX mother board, to display the data on the monitor.
NOTE
• For details, refer to ☞ 50800.
4. When input is image, the image data is transferred to HDD from the media drive.
NOTE
5. On the computer, the color and density correction of scanning data is performed and the print data is
transferred to the image processing PCB.
NOTE
6. On the image processing PCB, the paper fitting of the image is performed and the image data is output
to the laser unit via the laser control PCB.
50810 2/2
Mirror VIDEO BOARD
Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS/ARC
Bl LVDS NET PCB
ase
r G-AOM (standard) HDD
driver
Media
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
ARCNET
Polygon mirror LVDS ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens
ARCNET
Synchronous sensor J/P455 J/P456
ARCNET
Image correction
PCB
50820
50820

Saving Data
control PCB
Scanning data
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification]
Prescanning data

PCB
LVDS
PCB
[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM
Data change-over
Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2
Scratch mend PCB 1
G076405
1/2
50820
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation.
2. Scanning data detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and corrects them on the D-ICE PCB.
(Standard)
IMPORTANT
NOTE
PCB 1 [J485].
3. Scanning data sends the image data to HDD via D-ICE PCB→Image processing PCB→PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB→ATX mother board, to display the data on the monitor.
NOTE
4. On the computer, the color and density correction of scanning data is performed and the image data is
written to each media.
NOTE
50820 2/2
Printing from archive
Printing from a media
Index print
Sample print
Setup print PCI-LVDS/ARCNET
PCB (standard)
D-ICE PCB
Archive
ATX mother J/P456
Media drive
LVDS Image input section

board
Scanning data
Prescanning data
Printing from a media
Input memory
HDD
VIDEO
(Standard)
BOARD
J/P445
LVDS Image correction PCB
J/P1350 CMS section
50830
50830
Development memory
Composite
Print data
memory

Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification]
Laser control PCB

Parts mounted on the image processing PCB
Laser unit
G076406
1/2
50830
operation.
2. Scanning data transfers the image data to the image input section of the image processing PCB from
the D-ICE PCB.
NOTE
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position
check.
3. Scanning data transfers the image data, which has been input from the D-ICE PCB in the image input
section of the image processing PCB, to the LVDS cables via the input memory.
4. Scanning data sends the image data to HDD via PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB→ATX mother board, to
display the data on the monitor.
5. On the computer, the color and density correction of scanning data is performed and the print data is
transferred to the image correction PCB.
NOTE
• When printing from archive or media, print via HDD (standard).
6. Paper fitting of image is performed on the image correction PCB.
8. Without processing in the CMS section, Development memory and Composition processing section on
the image processing PCB, the image data is output to the laser unit via the laser control PCB.
NOTE
• When the composition processing section of the image processing PCB is in process, its development memory stores the
image data temporarily.
50830 2/2
50840
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification]
Scanning data (digital masking)
Scanning data (D-ICE is OFF)
Scanning data (standard)
Prescanning data
Adjustment data
Parts mounted on the D-ICE PCB
Option: Digital masking unit
D-ICE PCB
DIMM (Option)
SUB1
Scratch mend PCB 2

(Option)
Data change-over PCB Scratch mend PCB 1

(Option) [J484A] (option)

(Option)
MAIN
Image correction
PCB
Image processing
PCB
G072352
50840 1/2
50840
! The route of image data in the D-ICE PCB is described as the system operation.
NOTE
• 1. The image data goes through SUB1 and MAIN whether processing is performed or not.
SUB1 {digital adjustment for the scanner (such as shading)}
MAIN {controlling output to the image processing PCB}
• 2. If DIMM is installed, the image data goes through it whether processing is performed or not.
• 3. For scanning data (D-ICE is OFF), erasing scratches is not performed on the D-ICE PCB. However, the above 1 process of
SUB1 and MAIN is performed.
• 4. Adjustment indicates adjustments for the scanner such as the light source registration, light axis adjustment and focus
adjustment.
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position check.
1. When the scratch mend PCB 2 is in process, the DIMM stores the scanning data temporarily. (Option)
NOTE
• Processing time of digital masking depends on how much scratches are on a film.
2. SUB1 of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
NOTE
• This performs digital adjustment such as shading for the scanner.
3. Scratch mend PCB 2, the data change-over PCB, scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A], and scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485] detect the scratches and dust on a film and correct them. (Option)
NOTE
• Three scratch mend PCBs share the tasks to improve the processing speed of scratch erasing.
PCB 1 [J485].
4. MAIN of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
NOTE
• Besides detecting and correcting the scratches and dust on the film base layer, this controls D-ICE totally, communicates
with the D-ICE control PCB, and controls outputting image data to the image processing PCB.
5. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.
IMPORTANT
• Test print for setup does not go through the digital masking unit. Scratch erasing process for base layer
(standard) is not performed in D-ICE PCB.
NOTE
50840 2/2
51010
Film carrier section
Film feed operation (135)
This section explains the process of the film being loaded, pre-scanned, scanned and ejected.
! Flow chart
1. The film is inserted.
2. The film has passed the loading sensor.

• Film feed motor: ON
Loading sensor
Rewinding unit Film
G068353
3. Reading of the DX code starts.
DX sensor
G068353
4. The film has passed the ready sensor.

When the ready sensor does not detect the film though the specified length advances with the loading
sensor turned DARK:
• No. 6403
When the ready sensor does not detect the film though the specified length advances after loading
sensor turned LIGHT with the film undetected by the ready sensor:
• Film feed motor: reverse
• The film is ejected, because the minimum required length is not detected.
Ready sensor
G068353
51010 1/5
51010
5. The film is fed.
When the 135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function is set to ON in the Operator
Selections:
• Go to Step 6.
When the 135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function is set to OFF in the Operator
Selections:
• Go to Step 8.
6. The film is fed for a specified length from the ready sensor.
• Film feed motor: OFF
When the DX code sensor detects the film's front end (end with the small frame number):
• No. 1435
Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film:
• No. 6403
Rewinding sensor Perforation sensor
G068353
7. The film is fed.

• Film feed motor: ON (reverse)
8. The film is fed just before the scanning position.

Scanning position
G068353
9. Pre-scanning starts.
• LED light source: ON
10. The film has passed the perforation sensor.

• No. 6403
51010 2/5
51010
Rewinding sensor Perforation sensor
G068353
11. The front end of the film enters the rewinding unit.
When the rewinding sensor detects film jam:

• No. 6405
12. The rear end of the film has passed the ready sensor.
When the ready sensor does not detect the rear end of the film:
• No. 6403
NOTE
• This error message appears when the ready sensor detected the film and a specified length of film was fed, but the ready
sensor did not turn LIGHT.
Rewinding sensor Ready sensor
G068353
13. The rear end of the film passes the scanning position.
Scanning position
G068353
14. The pre-scanning is completed.

When the scanning cannot be started even if one minute have passed after prescanning:
• LED light source :OFF
15. Scanning starts.

51010 3/5
51010
When LED light source is OFF

When the scanning cannot be started:
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the rear end of the film waits before the
scanning position until the memory has enough free space.
Perforation sensor
G068353
When the ready sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6403
Ready sensor
G068353
17. The rear end of the film has passed the loading sensor.
When the loading sensor does not detect the film:

• No. 6403
Loading sensor
G068353
51010 4/5
51010
18. The final frame of the film has passed the scanning position.
Scanning position
G068353
19. Scanning is completed.
20. The film is ejected.

When the next film is not processed even if one minute has passed:
51010 5/5
51110
This section explains the process of the film being loaded, scanned and ejected.
! Flow chart
1. A film cartridge is set.

• Cartridge limit switches 1 and 2: ON
When the IPI sensor recognizes that the film is undeveloped
• No. 1403
Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
2. The light lock door is opened.

• Light lock door motor: ON/OFF
Rewinding unit
Light lock door
G068354
3. The film is rewound by 1.5 revolution (spool key spindle).

• Spool key motor: ON (reverse)
4. The film front end is fed.

• Film feed motor: ON (forward)
• Spool key motor: ON (forward)
5. The front end of the film has passed the loading sensor.
When the loading sensor does not detect the film front end:
• Operation goes back to Step 3 and the film is rewound (retry).
When the loading sensor cannot detect the front end of the film after retrying:
• No. 6404
Film
Loading sensor
G068354
51110 1/5
51110
6. The front end of the film has passed the ready sensor.
• Spool key motor: OFF
When the ready sensor does not detect the film front end:
• No. 6404
DX sensor
Ready sensor
G068354
7. DX sensor starts reading the data other than the magnetic data.
NOTE
• The data other than the magnetic data are the DX code, frame numbers and FID.
8. The front end of the film passes the scanning position.
Scanning position
G068354
10. Reading of the the magnetic data starts.
11. The front end of the film has passed the perforation sensor.
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film advance:
• No. 6404
Perforation sensor
Rewinding sensor
G068354
51110 2/5
51110
12. Rewinding of the film front end starts.
When the rewinding sensor detects film jam:

• No. 6404
13. The turn round perforation has passed the ready sensor.
14. The turn round perforation passes the scanning position.

15. Check the read magnetic data.
When the magnetic data has not been read:

• No. 1404
The IX frame data is incomplete.
• If scanning is selected again, the magnetic data is read again after rewinding of the film.
Scanning position
G068354
16. Pre-scanning is completed.


• Spool key motor: ON (reverse)
When the perforation sensor cannot detect film rewinding or rotation detection by VEI sensor does not
change
• No. 6404
Scanning position
G068354
51110 3/5
51110
18. The final frame of the film passes the scanning position.
Scanning position
G068354

20. The film is fed.

When the magnetic data is not written:
• Go to Step 26.
21. The front end of the film passes the perforation sensor.
• No. 6404
Perforation sensor
G068354
22. The turn round perforation passes the scanning position.

Scanning position
Magnetic head
G068354
23. Magnetic data writing starts.

NOTE
• It waits until the writing data has been sent from the personal computer.
51110 4/5
51110
24. The leading edge of the film passes the magnetic head.
Magnetic head
G068354
25. Writing of the magnetic data is completed.

Ready sensor
G068354
• No. 6404
27. A specified length of the film is rewound.

• Spool key motor: ON
28. The VEI of the cartridge is set to the "Processed".

• Spool key motor: ON/OFF
When 3 revolutions of the spool key spindle does not make VEI set position detectable
• No. 6407
Spool Key operation error.
29. The light lock door is closed.

• Light lock door motor: ON
Light lock door
G068354
30. Remove the cartridge.
51110 5/5
51310
! Flow chart
Rewinding unit
Loading sensor
G050826
• No. 6406
When the loading sensor turns LIGHT before the specified length of the film advances after the ready
sensor detected the film:
Ready sensor
G050827
4. The front end of the film has passed the scanning position.
Scanning position
G050854
51310 1/4
51310
6. The film sensor detects film advance.
When the film sensor does not detect the film advance:
• No. 6406
Film sensor
G050828

• No. 6406
Ready sensor
G050829

Scanning position
G050830

51310 2/4
51310

Scanning position
G050831
When the ready sensor does not detect the rear end of the film:
• No. 6406
Ready sensor
G050832

• No. 6406
Loading sensor
G069968
13. The first frame of the film passes the scanning position.
51310 3/4
51310
Scanning position
G050833
15. The film is fed at a high speed.

• Film feed motor: ON (high speed)
16. Film is ejected.

51310 4/4
51410
! Flow chart
Rewinding unit
Loading sensor
G050837
• No. 6405
When the loading sensor turns LIGHT before the specified length of the film advances after the ready
sensor detected the film:
Ready sensor
G050838
4. The front end of the film has passed the scanning position.
Scanning position
G050855
51410 1/4
51410
6. The front end of the film has passed the perforation sensor.

• No. 6405
Perforation sensor
G050839

Scanning position
G050856
9. Scanning starts.
Scanning position
G050840
51410 2/4
51410
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film advance:
• No. 6405
• No. 6405
Ready sensor
G050841
• No. 6405
Loading sensor
G069969
12. The first frame of the film passes the scanning position.
Scanning position
G050842
14. The film is fed at a high speed.

51410 3/4
51410
15. Film is ejected.

51410 4/4
51510
Film feed operation (MMC)
This section explains the process of the mount insertion cover being opened and the mount being ejected.
NOTE
• When the mount insertion cover is not open, it opens after returning the carrier to its home position.
! Flow chart
1. The mount carrier moves to the left. (The mount insertion cover is closed.)
• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)
Scanning position
Moves to the left.
Detection plate Mount carrier home sensor
G052535
When the mount carrier home sensor is not LIGHT: (mount carrier does not move)
• No. 6424
Mount Unit operation error.
2. The mount carrier moves to the home position.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)
Moves to the right.
Detection plate Mount carrier home sensor
G052534
When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK: (mount carrier does not move)
• No. 6424
3. The mount insertion cover is open.

When the mount insertion cover sensor is not LIGHT: (mount insertion cover does not open)
• No. 6424
4. After inserting the mount, close the mount insertion cover.

• Mount insertion cover sensor: DARK
• Mount sensor: DARK
51510 1/4
51510
5. The mount carrier is moved to the position of the focus adjustment.

Mount
Mount insertion cover sensor
G052536
6. The auto focus is adjusted.

• AF motor: ON (forward/reverse)
When the auto focus adjustment is not finished:
• No. 6423
Auto focus error.
Moves up and down.
AF sensors
G052537
Moves to the left.
G052696
8. Pre-scanning finishes and the mount carrier stops at the scanning start position.
• Mount carrier slide motor: OFF
9. Scanning starts.
51510 2/4
51510

• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the mount carrier waits before the
Moves to the right.
Scanning start position
G052539

Scanning start position
G052540

When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK: (mount carrier does not move)
• No. 6424
Moves to the right.
Mount insertion cover sensor

Mount carrier home sensor
G052542
12. The mount insertion cover is open.
When the mount insertion cover sensor is not LIGHT: (mount insertion cover does not open)
• No. 6424
51510 3/4
51510
13. The mount is ejected.
51510 4/4
51550
Film advance operation (AMC)
This section explains the process of the mount insertion and the mount ejection.
NOTE
• If the mount carrier is not in the home position, move it to the home position before the operation.
! Flow chart
1. The loading stocker is set to the AMC.
When the mount sensor (inlet) does not turn DARK after pressing the YES/START key:
• No. 1429
Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
Loading stocker
Mount sensor (inlet)
Mount insertion motor

Mount
Loading sensor 1
Loading sensor 2
G058785
2. Move the mount from the loading stocker to the mount carrier.
• Mount loading motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
If mount sensor 1 does not allow light to penetrate or mount sensor 2 does not block light (mount
ejector pin does not move into loading position) during mount loading:
• No. 6435
Mount insertion operation error.
When the mount sensor is not DARK:
• No. 6433
Mount detection error.
When the mount sensor turns DARK after the mount sensor (inlet) turned DARK starting with LIGHT:
• Dummy mount is detected.
After the dummy mounts are ejected, the mount sensor get back to the home position to start processing the following
order.
When the mount sensor stays LIGHT after the mount sensor (inlet) started with LIGHT
• The loading stocker is empty.
It gets back to the home position and stops processing.
51550 1/7
51550
Loading stocker
Mount sensor
Mount Mount insertion motor
Loading sensor 1
Mount loading pin Loading sensor 2

Mount carrier
G058793
3. Move the mount loading pin to the home position.

• Mount loading motor: ON (forward)/OFF
When the loading sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT or the loading sensor 1 does not turn DARK when the
mount loading pin is moving to the home position after the mount is loaded (the mount loading pin
does not move to the home position):
• No. 6435
Mount insertion operation error.
Loading stocker
Mount sensor
Mount Mount insertion motor
Mount loading pin
Loading sensor 1
Mount carrier Loading sensor 2
G058792
4. Auto focus adjustment

• AF motor: ON (forward/reverse)
When the auto focus adjustment is not finished:
• No. 6431
Auto focus error.
51550 2/7
51550
Mount
Moves up and AF sensors AF motor

down.
G058786
IMPORTANT
• The mount carrier moves to the pre-scanning start position at high speed.
• The mount carrier moves at middle speed after starting pre-scanning.
• The mount carrier moves to the pre-scanning start position

at high speed.
Scanning position
Mount
G057568
• The mount carrier moves at middle speed after starting

pre-scanning. Mount carrier slide motor
G058787
51550 3/7
51550
6. Pre-scanning finishes and the mount carrier stops after the scanning position.
Mount
Scanning position
G058788
7. Scanning starts.
IMPORTANT
• The mount carrier moves to the scanning start position at high speed.
• The mount carrier moves at low speed after starting scanning.
• When the free space of the memory in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the mount carrier waits before the
• The mount carrier moves to the scanning start position
at high speed. Scanning position
Mount
G057565
51550 4/7
51550
• The mount carrier moves at low speed after starting

scanning.
G057567
Mount
G057566
9. The mount carrier moves to the ejection side at high speed.

Mount
G058788
10. The mount moves to the ejection position.

• Mount ejection solenoid: ON/OFF
51550 5/7
51550
When the mount sensor does not turn LIGHT:

• No. 6433
Mount detection error.
When the ejection sensor does not turn DARK:
• No. 6437
Mount eject operation error.
Ejection position
Mount ejection solenoid
Mount
Mount sensor
Ejection sensor
Mount ejection roller

G058789
11. The mount moves to the ejection stocker.
• Mount elevator motor: ON/OFF
When the mount elevator sensor does not turn DARK -> LIGHT -> DARK:
• No. 6436
Mount elevator operation error.
When the ejection sensor does not turn LIGHT:
• No. 6437
Mount eject operation error.
Mount elevator motor

Ejection stocker
Mount
Ejection sensor
Mount elevator sensor

G058790
12. The mount is ejected.

• Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
51550 6/7
51550
When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK:

• No. 6432
Mount
Mount carrier home sensor
Mount carrier
G058791
14. The following mount is processed.
• Return to Step 2.
51550 7/7
55000
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the printer by dotted lines.
Arm unit 2 Paper Advance Unit 2
Paper Advance Unit 1 Processor loading unit

Laser unit
Exposure advance unit CVP unit
Paper cutter unit
Arm unit 1
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine C
Paper magazine A Paper supply unit A Paper supply unit
G068369
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the processor by dotted lines.
Print conveyor unit
No. 1 upper guide
Dryer rack
Processing tanks and processing

racks
G082012
55000 1/1
55100
Paper advance operation
Paper supply operation (loading operation)
This section covers how the paper is advanced to the exposure advance unit by arm unit 1 since the paper is loaded.
NOTE
• Paper supply operation (loading operation) varies by the paper advance length.
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less
• ☞ When the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm and 165.5 mm
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more
! When the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less
Paper advance motor 1
Paper magazine B
Paper end sensor B
Paper magazine motor B
Paper supply motor B/C
Paper end sensor C
Paper magazine A

Paper magazine motor A
Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C
Paper end sensor A

Paper magazine C
∗The solid line indicates the paper.
G068487
1. Paper loading starts.
2. The paper is advanced.

• Paper magazine motor A/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A, B/C: ON
3. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.
When Paper end sensors A/B/C cannot detect the paper.

• No. 6012
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
55100 1/6
55100
• No. 6013
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
• No. 6112
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C
4. The paper passes through the paper loading sensor.
When the paper loading sensor cannot detect any paper

• No. 6012
• No. 6013
• No. 6112
5. The paper is advanced for the paper length.

• Paper magazine motor A/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper supply motor A, B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper advance motor 1: ON/OFF
6. The paper is cut.
• Cut motor: ON/OFF
When cutting is not completed.
• No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.
7. Paper is advanced to Arm unit 1 receiving position.

When Arm unit 1 is not on standby in receiving position.
• The paper stays at the paper standby position until arm unit 1 comes down to its receiving position.
8. Loading and cutting are completed.
55100 2/6
55100
! When the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm and 165.5 mm
Paper magazine B
Paper end sensor B
Paper end sensor C
Paper magazine A

Paper end sensor A Paper magazine C
G068488


• No. 6012
• No. 6013
• No. 6112

• No. 6012
55100 3/6
55100
• No. 6013
• No. 6112

• Paper advance motor 1: ON

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 carries the paper at the same speed of loading.
☞ 55200
• No. 6016
8. Loading and cutting are completed.
55100 4/6
55100
! When the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more
Paper magazine B
Paper end sensor B
Paper end sensor C
Paper magazine A

Paper supply motor A Paper magazine motor C
Paper end sensor A Paper magazine C
G068489


• No. 6012
• No. 6013
• No. 6112

• No. 6012
55100 5/6
55100
• No. 6013
• No. 6112

6. The loading is completed.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper advance length is 165.6 mm and more, paper cut operation is performed in paper supply
operation (arm unit 1 operation).
☞ 55200
55100 6/6
55200
Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation)
This section describes how arm unit 1 carries the loaded paper to the exposure advance unit.
NOTE
• Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation) varies by the paper advance length.
1. Arm unit 1 pressures the loaded paper.

• Paper hold motor: ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn DARK.
• No. 6101
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
Paper advance rollers
G068490
2. Arm unit 1 carries paper to the exposure advance unit.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF
• Paper magazine motor A/B/C: OFF
• Paper supply motor A/BC: OFF
Zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn DARK.
• No. 6135
55200 1/21
55200
IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 carries the paper at the same speed of loading until the paper passes through the paper advance
rollers.
Paper supply arm motor (right or left)
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A

∗The solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C
G068491
3. The zigzag correction is performed.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON/OFF
NOTE
• The zigzag correction is performed after paper advance operation stops.
4. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure.
• Paper hold motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6101
55200 2/21
55200
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068492
5. Arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving standby position.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (reverse)/OFF
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6135
55200 3/21
55200
G068493

• No. 6101
55200 4/21
55200
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068494
2. Arm unit 1 and the paper are advanced for the paper length.
IMPORTANT
55200 5/21
55200
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A

G068495

• No. 6016
55200 6/21
55200
Cut motor
Cut end sensor
Cut home sensor

G068496

• No. 6135
IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 carries the paper at the same speed of the paper advance rollers until the paper passes through
the paper advance rollers.
55200 7/21
55200
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A

G068497

NOTE
6. When the paper advance length is 300 mm or more, paper supply pressure is released.
• Paper supply pressure change motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn DARK
• No. 6134
Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error.
55200 8/21
55200
Paper supply pressure change motor
G068498
7. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure.
• No. 6101
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068499
55200 9/21
55200
8. Arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving standby position.

• No. 6135
G068500

• No. 6101
55200 10/21
55200
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068494

• No. 6135
IMPORTANT
55200 11/21
55200
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A

G069826

NOTE

• Paper magazine motor A (or B, C): ON
• Paper supply motor A (or B, C): ON
IMPORTANT
• The machine makes a loop in the paper supply unit to adjust advance speeds of exposure advance operation
and paper supply operation.
55200 12/21
55200
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A
G069827

• No. 6016
55200 13/21
55200
Cut motor
Cut end sensor
Cut home sensor

G069828
6. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then paper supply pressure is released.
• No. 6134
G069829
55200 14/21
55200
7. Arm unit 1 releases pressure.

• No. 6101
Paper hold motor
Paper hold motor
G069830
8. When the exposure start sensor changed LIGHT from DARK, arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving
standby position.

• No. 6135
When the exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT after the specified time.
• No. 6017
Paper has jammed in the printer section.
55200 15/21
55200
G068500

• No. 6101
55200 16/21
55200
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068494

• No. 6135
IMPORTANT
55200 17/21
55200
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A
G069826

NOTE
4. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure. The
machine starts loop control and advances the paper for the paper length.

IMPORTANT
• The machine makes a loop in the paper supply unit to adjust advance speeds of exposure advance operation
and paper supply operation.
• No. 6101
55200 18/21
55200
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A
G069965

• No. 6016
55200 19/21
55200
Cut motor
Cut end sensor
Cut home sensor

G069966
6. Paper supply pressure is released.

• No. 6134
G069967
55200 20/21
55200
7. When the exposure start sensor changed LIGHT from DARK, arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving
standby position.

• No. 6135
When the exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT after the specified time.
• No. 6017
Paper has jammed in the printer section.
G068500
55200 21/21
55300
Exposure advance operation
This section explains the paper advance operation via the exposure advance unit during exposure.
! Flow chart
1. The paper is transferred from arm unit 1.
The status of the exposure advance unit is as follows.

• Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON (released)/OFF
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet released/exit pressured)/OFF
2. The paper is exposed and advanced.

• Exposure advance motors 1 and 2: ON
3. The paper leading end is advanced for the specific length from the exposure advance inlet roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressured/exit released)/OFF
When exposure advance pressure does not change
• No. 6137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 2
G069831
4. The paper leading end is advanced for the another specific length from the exposure advance inlet
roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON (released)/OFF

• Exposure advance motor 1: OFF
When exposure advance pressure does not change
• No. 6136
55300 1/3
55300
Exposure starting
position
Exposure advance pressure change

motor 1
G069832
5. The paper is advanced to the exposure position.

• The laser emission is started.
6. The paper leading end is advanced for the specific length from the exposure advance exit roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (exit pressured)/OFF
When exposure advance pressure cannot be changed.
• No. 6137

motor 2
G069833
7. The paper rear end is advanced to the position a specified distance away from the front of the
exposure advance inlet roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure slightly released)/OFF

• No. 6137
55300 2/3
55300

motor 2
G069834
8. The paper rear end is advanced to the position another specified distance away from the front of the
exposure advance inlet roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure released)/OFF

• No. 6137

motor 2
G069835
55300 3/3
55400
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation)
This section covers how the paper goes through the paper advance unit 1.
NOTE
• Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation) varies by the paper advance length.
1. Paper is advanced to paper advance unit 1.
2. The paper leading end passes 15 mm before the advance inlet roller.
3. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF
Pressure guide motor
G069836
4. The paper rear end passed the exposure center by 2 mm.
5. When paper advance unit 1 pressures the paper, the paper advance motor 2 starts working to
advance the paper.
• Pressure guide motor: ON (pressured)/OFF

55400 1/6
55400

G069837
6. Paper advance motor 2 changes its speed to high speed.
7. After paper advance motor 2 stops, paper advance unit 1 releases pressure.
• Paper advance motor 2: OFF
G069838

55400 2/6
55400
G069836
advance the paper at the exposure speed.
G069837
6. Paper advance motor 2 stops.


55400 3/6
55400
G069838
G069836
55400 4/6
55400

G069836
advance the paper at the exposure speed.


G069837
6. The paper rear end passed 130 mm from the exposure advance exit roller.

55400 5/6
55400
G069838
8. After pressure of paper advance unit 1 is released completely, paper advance motor 2 stops.
55400 6/6
55500
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation)
This section covers how the paper goes through the paper advance unit 2.
NOTE
• Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation) varies by the paper width and the paper advance length.
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and 305.0 mm
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 305.1 mm or more
• ☞ The paper width is 165.0 mm or more.
Paper advance pressure change sensor (left)
Lane select motor (left)
Lane select sensor (left)
Arm sensor (right)

Paper advance arm motor (left)
Paper advance pressure change motor (left)

Paper advance pressure change motor (right)
Arm sensor (right)

Paper advance arm motor (right)
Lane select sensor (right)
Lane select motor (right)
Paper advance pressure change sensor (right)
G069962
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
1. Paper is advanced from paper advance unit 1.
55500 1/17
55500
2. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to its standby position
and arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving position.
• Lane select motors (right)(left): ON/OFF

• Paper advance arm motors (right)(left): ON/OFF
When the arm sensors (right)(left) do not turn DARK.
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.
When the lane select sensor (left) does not turn DARK.
• No. 6140
When the lane select sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6141
G069839
3. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (right).
4. Arm unit 2 (right) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right): ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn DARK.
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.
55500 2/17
55500
G069841
5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the processor loading unit.

• Lane select motor (right): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motor (right): ON/OFF
When the arm sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6139
G069842
6. Arm unit 2 (right) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right) :ON (released)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6143
55500 3/17
55500
G069843
7. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to paper receiving position of paper advance unit 1.
• Lane select motor (left): ON/OFF
Lane select sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6140
G069844
8. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (left).
9. Arm unit 2 (left) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn DARK.
• No. 6142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.
55500 4/17
55500
G069845
10. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to the processor loading unit and arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper
receiving position of the paper advance unit 1.

When the arm sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6138
When the arm sensor (right) does not turn DARK.
• No. 6139
G069944
11. Arm unit 2 (left) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left) :ON (released)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6142
55500 5/17
55500
G069945
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and
305.0 mm
2. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to its standby position
and arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving position.

• No. 6138
• No. 6139
• No. 6140
• No. 6141
55500 6/17
55500
G069839
• No. 6143
G069841
5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper advance standby position.

• Lane select motor (right): ON/OFF
• No. 6139
When the lane select sensor (right) does not turn DARK.
• No. 6141
55500 7/17
55500
G069946
6. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to paper receiving position of paper advance unit 1.
• Lane select motor (left): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motor (left): ON/OFF
Lane select sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6140
G069947
7. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (left).
8. Arm unit 2 (left) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn DARK.
• No. 6142
55500 8/17
55500
G069949
9. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to the paper advance standby position.

• Paper advance arm motor (left): ON/OFF
When the arm sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6138
G069950
10. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to the processor loading unit.

• No. 6141
55500 9/17
55500
G069951
11. Arm units 2 (right, left) release the pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motors (right)(left): ON (released)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensors (right)(left) do not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6142
• No. 6143
G069952
12. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving
position.

• No. 6138
• No. 6139
55500 10/17
55500
• No. 6140
• No. 6141
G069970
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 305.1 mm or
more
2. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving
position.

• No. 6138
• No. 6139
• No. 6140
• No. 6141
55500 11/17
55500
G069839
IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 2 advances the paper at the same speed of exposure speed without pressuring the paper.
• It pressures the paper after exposure.
• No. 6143
G069971
5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the processor loading unit.

• No. 6139
55500 12/17
55500
G069953
6. Arm unit 2 (right) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right) :ON (released)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6143
G069954
7. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper receiving position.

When the arm sensor (right) does not turn DARK.
• No. 6139
55500 13/17
55500
G069955
! The paper width is 165.0 mm or more.
2. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to the paper receiving position.
• No. 6138
• No. 6139
G069956
3. The paper is advanced to arm units 2 (right)(left).
55500 14/17
55500
4. Arm units 2 (right)(left) pressure the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motors (right)(left): ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensors (right)(left) do not turn DARK.
• No. 6142
• No. 6143
G069958
5. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to the processor loading unit.

When the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6138
• No. 6139
55500 15/17
55500
G069959
6. Arm units 2 (right, left) release the pressure.
• Paper advance pressure change motors (right)(left): ON (released)/OFF
When the paper advance pressure change sensors (right)(left) do not turn LIGHT.
• No. 6142
• No. 6143
G069960
7. Arm units 2 (right)(left) move to the paper receiving position.

• No. 6138
• No. 6139
55500 16/17
55500
G069961
55500 17/17
55600
Paper rewind operation
This section covers how the paper is rewound.

Paper rewind conditions
• The paper is changed to the paper in another paper magazine from the paper which is being loaded from the paper magazine.
• No operation is made for a specified time with the paper loaded.
• Rewind Paper is selected.
• The paper end sensor is detecting the paper when the power supply is turned ON.
• When an error occurs
• After paper magazine replacement, the interlock switch (printer door) is detected.
! Flow chart
1. Paper rewind operation starts.

• Paper magazine motor A/B/C: ON (reverse)
• Paper supply motor A/BC: ON (reverse)
2. The paper leading end passed through the paper loading sensor.
When the paper loading sensor does not detect the paper leading end
• No. 6014-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
• No. 6015-01
3. The paper leading end passed through the paper end sensor.
When the paper end sensor does not detect the paper leading end
• No. 6014-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
• No. 6015-02
4. Stop the paper in the magazine.

• Paper magazine motor A/B/C: OFF
5. Paper rewind operation is completed.
55600 1/1
55700
Paper splicing operation
This section explains the paper splicing operation.

NOTE
• The paper with a splice hole cannot be advanced in the printer section. Remove the paper from the paper supply unit.
Condition of paper splicing operation
• The splice hole is detected by paper loading sensor while printing.
Loading sensor
Splice hole
Cut-forbidden area: 228.1 mm Exposure possible area

G058719
! Flow chart
1. Paper is being processed.
2. The paper loading sensor detected the splice hole of the paper.
3. The paper is advanced to the cut position.
When the splice hole is detected and the paper that is advancing is 12 mm or less before the cut
position
• The paper cut position is the border of the paper exposure possible area and the cut-forbidden area.
When the splice hole is detected and the paper that is advancing is 12.1 mm or more before the cut
position
• The paper advances to the paper joint.
4. The paper is cut. ☞ 55100 ☞ 55200

When the cut paper has only the exposure possible area
• After exposing the cut paper, advance the splicing paper to the cut position and cut it again.
When the cut paper includes the splice parts
• The cut paper is stopped.
5. Rewind the paper.
6. The paper splicing operation is complete.

• No. 1019
Remove the paper splice.
55700 1/1
55800
Paper end operation
This section describes the operation of paper end.
! Flow chart
1. Paper is being processed.
2. The paper rear end passed through the paper end sensor.
When printable area is longer than the print setting advance length at the detection of the paper end.
• Proceed the operation.
When the length of printable + exposable area is shorter than the rest of print length at the detection of
paper end.
• The the paper is not cut and the machine performs Step 5.
When the paper is in exposure and the length of printable + exposable area is equal to or longer than
the rest of the print length at the detection of paper end.
• Proceed the operation.
When the paper is in exposure and the length of printable + exposable area is shorter than the rest of
print length at the detection of paper end.
• The operation goes on but the print need to be made again.
Paper end sensor Paper cut position
Exposure possible area Printable area
30 mm
Cut-forbidden area
Lane A: 194 mm
Lane B: 174.9 mm
Lane C: 174.9 mm
G058720
4. The paper is cut. ☞ 55100 ☞ 55200
5. Advance all the paper to the exposure section.
6. The paper end processing is complete.

• No. 1000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
• No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
• No. 1052
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C
55800 1/1
55900
Fogged paper operation
This section explains the fogged paper processing operation.

Condition of fogged paper processing operation
• The printer door is opened while the printer or paper is being loaded.
• The printer top cover is opened with printer door closes.
! Flow chart (when the printer door is opened)
1. Close printer doors 1, 2, and 3.
2. The paper end sensor checks if there is any paper.
When the paper end sensor detects paper

• The machine rewinds the paper and perform Step 4.
When the paper end sensor does not detect any paper
• No. 1002
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
• No. 1003
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B
• No. 1053
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C
• If Yes is selected, the machine performs Step 4.
• If No is selected, fogged paper operation is ended.
3. The paper loading operation starts.

• Feed the paper leading end 100 mm from the paper cutting position.
Paper roll
Paper magazine
Manual cutter
Fogged feed 100 mm
G058721
5. The paper is cut. ☞ 55100 ☞ 55200
6. The paper is advanced to the exposure section.
55900 1/2
55900
7. The fogged paper processing is complete.
55900 2/2
56100
Processor paper advance operation
This section explains the process that begins with the paper entering the processor and ends with it being deposited into either the print
conveyor unit or the print receiving tray (large). It is a precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
1. The processor enters the following states when the paper is loaded. ☞ 55100
• Processor drive motor: ON
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
2. The back edge of the paper passes through paper sensor 2 (left, center, right), which is located in the
processor loading unit.
Print conveyor unit

Print receiving tray (large)
Paper sensor 2 (left, center, right)
Position A
G082003
3. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
• The following data are transmitted to the processor by the printer.
Transmission data list

1 Information of paper advance length 5 Information of print counts
2 Information of paper width 6 Information of paper advance position
3 Information of paper surface 7 Information of paper lane
4 Order information 8 Information of splice
56100 1/4
56100
4. Paper arrived at the dryer rack.

• The paper advance procedures listed below vary with print paper width and advance length.
Paper width Advance length Paper advance procedure references

Between 82.5 and 152 mm. Between 82.5 and 305 mm. ☞ Paper output to the print conveyor unit
Between 82.5 and 305 mm. Between 305.1 and 457.2 mm. ☞ Paper sent to the print receiving tray
Between 152.1 and 305 mm. Between 82.5 and 305 mm. (large)/long length print tray:
Between 203.3 and 305 mm. Between 457.3 and 914 mm.
NOTE
• The printer examines print size to determine whether prints should be sent to the print conveyor unit or the print
receiving tray (large)/long length print tray, and then issues appropriate instructions to the processor.
! Paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray:
1. Leading edge of paper passed through dryer lane select sensor.

• If the dryer lane select sensor fails to detect paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray in six
consecutive attempts within a specified amount of time, the following error message will appear onscreen: No. 5535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.
☞ 45534
Dryer lane select sensor: SE45
Long Length Print Tray
Print receiving tray (large)
G082004
• The leading edge of the paper being sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray passes through the dryer
lane select sensor, activating the dryer lane select solenoid and causing the select guide to move into the print receiving
tray (large) position after a specified amount of time elapses.
• The trailing edge of the paper being sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray passes through the dryer
lane select sensor, activating the dryer lane select solenoid and causing the select guide to move into the print conveyor
position after a specified amount of time elapses.
NOTE
• Paper other than standard prints also sent to the print receiving tray (large)
Types of paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)

Leading-edge feed paper Trailing-edge feed paper
Fogged paper Splice section
Control strips
56100 2/4
56100
Dryer rack
A specified time A specified time
Dryer lane select sensor
Dryer lane select solenoid: OFF Dryer lane select solenoid: ON Dryer lane select solenoid: ON
Lane select guide: print receiving tray (large) Lane select guide: print conveyor
G082005
2. Paper is sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray:
NOTE
• The long length print tray must be installed to accommodate prints with an advance length of 457.3 mm or over.
• Maximum capacity of print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray
Receiving tray Maximum capacity
Print receiving tray (large) 50
Long Length Print Tray 10
• Component status a specified amount of time after the dryer lane select sensor detects the trailing edge of the last sheet
of paper.
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF
56100 3/4
56100
! Paper output to the print conveyor unit
1. The paper front end passed through the print sensor in the dryer rack.
• The following message is displayed onscreen if the print sensor fails to detect paper sent to the print conveyor unit six
consecutive times within the specified time period: No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ☞ 45534
Print sensor (right): SE28
Print sensor (center): SE29
Print sensor (left): SE30
Print conveyor unit
G082006
• The print sensor (left, center, right) detects paper sent to the print conveyor unit.
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left)
2 4 6
1 3 5
Print sensor (center)
Print sensor (right)
G082007
2. The prints are ejected to the print conveyor unit.

• For movement of the print conveyor unit, refer to ☞ 56200.
NOTE
• A specified length of time after the print sensor detects the trailing edge of the final sheet of paper
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF
56100 4/4
56200
Print conveyor unit operation
This section explains the process that begins with paper passing through the dryer rack print sensor and ends with it being output to the
print sorter unit.
NOTE
• Print conveyor operation varies in accordance with differences in paper advance methods brought about by a variety of paper widths
and advance lengths.
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and 305.0 mm
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
NOTE
• For details on paper advancement inside the printer itself, refer to ☞ 55500.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, refer to
☞ 56100
2. The print sensor detects the paper rear end.
4. Conveyor belt starts to move.
• Conveyor motor: ON
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper rear end.
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left)
A specified time
Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON

G082008
5. Paper is output into the print sorter unit's print receiving tray.
6. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.
56200 1/2
56200
7. The print receiving tray moves.

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, refer to ☞ 56300.
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and
305.0 mm
NOTE
• For details on paper advancement inside the printer itself, refer to ☞ 55500.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, refer to
☞ 56100
2. The print sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
4. Conveyor belt starts to move.
• Conveyor motor: ON (rotation)
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left)

A specified time
Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON

G071653
5. Paper is output into the print sorter unit's print receiving tray.
6. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, refer to ☞ 56300.
56200 2/2
56300
Print sorter unit operation
This section explains the operation until the print receiving tray starts to move, after paper is ejected to the print sorter unit.
1. The last piece of paper of an order is ejected to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit.

• Sorter motor: ON
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print receiving tray moves.
• Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
• Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• If condition 2 is not met (inadequate interval between customer orders), the print receiving tray will not start until a
specified length of time elapses.
Sorter motor: DM4
Sorter home sensor: SE26
G082009
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left) A specified time

A specified time
Order Order Order

Sorter motor: ON Sorter motor: ON
Longer than the Shorter than the specified

Sorter motor: OFF
specified time time
G082010
56300 1/2
56300
NOTE
• Print size and quantity sorted by the print sorter unit vary in accordance with the type of size-specific sorting being
performed.
Paper width Advance length Maximum capacity
Type 1 Type 2
Between 82.5 and 102 mm. Between 82.5 and 305 mm. 50 82
Between 102.1 and 152 mm. Between 82.5 and 254 mm. 50 82
Between 254.1 and 305 mm. 50 50
3. Print receiving tray operation stops.

• Sorter motor: OFF
Condition: The sorter home sensor turns DARK.
4. The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
• When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, the message No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter
Unit. appears. ☞ 40504
• The print sorter unit is not activated until attention message No. 0505 is canceled.
Print full sensor: SE27
G082011
56300 2/2
6000
6. Electrical parts
Position of electrical parts (desk section) ............................................................................ 61000

Desk section (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) .......................................................................................61000
Position of electrical parts (scanner section) ....................................................................... 62000
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-2] ........................................................................................................62000
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-2] ..........................................................................................62050
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section) ................................................................ 62100
135/240 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) .................................................................................................................62100
135/240 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ..................................................................................................62150
120 AFC-II (positions of PCBs) ........................................................................................................................62200
120 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts) ..........................................................................................................62250
135/240 MMC-II (positions of PCBs) ...............................................................................................................62400
135/240 MMC-II (positions of electrical parts) ................................................................................................62450
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) .................................................................................................62500
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts) .................................................................................................62550
6 Electrical parts
MFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .................................................................................62660
MFC (position and description of electrical parts) ............................................................................................62670
Position of electrical parts (printer section) .......................................................................... 63000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) ...................................................................................................................63000
Printer section (positions of electrical parts) .....................................................................................................63050
Paper magazine mounts A, B and C (positions of electrical parts) ...................................................................63051
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts) ................................................................................................63060
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts) ........................................................................................63070
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) ....................................................................................63080
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63090
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63100
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts) .........................................................................................63110
Description of PCB (processor section) ............................................................................... 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] ........................................................................................................63200
Processor section (position of PCB) [SM] ........................................................................................................63200
Positions of electrical parts (processor section) .................................................................. 63250
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] ..........................................................................................63250
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] .......................................................................................63250
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) .......................... 63260
Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................63260
6000 1/3
6000
Descriptions of PCB (desk section) ..................................................................................... 64000

Image processing PCB (J390864) .....................................................................................................................64000
Image correction PCB (J390913) ......................................................................................................................64010
D-ICE control PCB (J390946) ..........................................................................................................................64030
D-ICE PCB (J390903) .......................................................................................................................................64040
D-ICE control PCB and removing the D-ICE PCB ..........................................................................................64045
DIMM (I090499) ...............................................................................................................................................64050
Scratch mend PCB 2 (J390905) .........................................................................................................................64060
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] (J390904) .......................................................64070
Data change-over PCB (J390906) .....................................................................................................................64080
ARCNET HUB PCB (J390479) ........................................................................................................................64100
Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645) ...............................................................................................................64110
Keyboard switch PCB (J390794) ......................................................................................................................64120
Colorimeter control PCB (J390801) ..................................................................................................................64130
PU control PCB (J307103) ................................................................................................................................64140
Power PCB (J390938) .......................................................................................................................................64160
Description of power supply (desk section) ......................................................................................................64170
Description of PCB (scanner section) .................................................................................. 65000
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390879) ................................................................................................................65000
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390768) [S-2/S-3] ..................................................................................................65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4] .........................................................................................................65010
LED driver PCB ................................................................................................................................................65020
Power supply (scanner) .....................................................................................................................................65060
PM driver ...........................................................................................................................................................65070
6 Electrical parts
Description of PCB (film carrier section) .............................................................................. 65200
Connecting PCB 1 (J390756) ............................................................................................................................65200
Connecting PCB 2 (J390482) ............................................................................................................................65210
Connecting PCB 3 (J490255) ............................................................................................................................65220
Driver PCB 1 (J390368) ....................................................................................................................................65230
Driver PCB 2 .....................................................................................................................................................65240
Sensor PCB (J390757) .......................................................................................................................................65250
Power PCB (J390755) .......................................................................................................................................65260
Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051) ...........................................................................................................65270
Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784) ...........................................................................................................65270
Connecting PCB 4 (J390579) ............................................................................................................................65280
Connecting PCB (J390371) ...............................................................................................................................65290
Sensor PCB (J390385) .......................................................................................................................................65300
Connecting PCB (J390372) ...............................................................................................................................65310
Sensor PCB (J390394) .......................................................................................................................................65320
MMC connecting PCB (J390483) .....................................................................................................................65330
MMC sensor PCB (J390389) ............................................................................................................................65340
AMC connecting PCB (J390700) ......................................................................................................................65350
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390779) ................................................................................................................65360
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709) .......................................................................................................................65370
Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit (W411413/W411414) ...................................................................................65380
Connecting PCB 1 (J390783) ............................................................................................................................65390
Connecting PCB 2 (J490291) ............................................................................................................................65400
6000 2/3
6000
Description of PCB (printer section) .................................................................................... 66000

Printer control PCB (J390947) ..........................................................................................................................66000
Laser control PCB (J390919) ............................................................................................................................66010
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390866) .............................................................................................................................66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390867) .............................................................................................................................66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J390868) .............................................................................................................................66040
Triple magazine PCB (J390835) .......................................................................................................................66050
Laser I/O PCB (J390945) ..................................................................................................................................66060
B and G laser drivers (J390973) Laser unit (Type A1) ....................................................................................66070
B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1) ....................................................................................66070
AOM driver (I124020) ......................................................................................................................................66080
CVP PCB (J390943) ..........................................................................................................................................66090
Power supply (printer section) ...........................................................................................................................66100
Description of PCB (processor section) ............................................................................... 66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [N] ...............................................................................................................66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM] ............................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [N] .....................................................................................................................66210
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM] ..................................................................................................................66210
Processor relay PCB (J390917) .........................................................................................................................66220
SM I/O PCB (J390330) [SM] ............................................................................................................................66600
Power supply (processor) ..................................................................................................................................67400
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) ..............................................................................68050
Cables ................................................................................................................................. 68100
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable ....................................................................68100
6 Electrical parts
Handling the flat cable .......................................................................................................................................68200
Power ON/OFF .................................................................................................................... 68500
Operation when the power supply is turned on .................................................................................................68500
When power is not supplied to input and output sections (How to use the starter jumper) .............................68550
6000 3/3
61000
Position of electrical parts (desk section)
Desk section (positions of PCBs and electrical parts)
! Position (front face)

3
5
4
1 7
G068447
Desk section (PCB) (front)

No. Name Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 Keyboard connecting PCB J390645 ☞ 64110
*1
2 Colorimeter Control PCB J390801 ☞ 64130
6. Electrical parts
Desk section (electrical parts) (front)
No. Name Symbol Remarks
3 Colorimeter − Colorimeter unit *1
4 Paper sensor 1 SE75
6 Paper advance motor PM12
7 Pressure change solenoid SOL1
*1. For the Stand Alone Scanner, this is not attached.
61000 1/3
61000
! Position (back face)
8: For standard PC
8: For high-spec PC
17 9
16 10
12
6 11
1
7
15
14
6. Electrical parts
4 5 15 13
3 G068431
Desk section (PCB) (back)

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No. Remarks
1 Image correction PCB J390913 ☞ 64010
2 Image processing PCB J390864 ☞ 64000
3 Power PCB J390938 ☞ 64160
4 Desk power supply 1 PS2 I038293 ☞ 64170
5 Desk power supply 2 PS3 I038263
6 PU control PCB J307103 ☞ 64140 Option*2*3
7 ARCNET-HUB PCB J390479 ☞ 64100 Option*3
8 Keyboard switch PCB J390794 ☞ 64120 The attaching
position of PCBs
is different
between the
standard PC and
the high-spec PC.
9 D-ICE control PCB J390946 ☞ 64030
10 D-ICE PCB J390903 ☞ 64040 *2
11 Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] J390904 ☞ 64070 Option*1*2

12 Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]
13 Data change-over PCB J390906 ☞ 64080 Option*1*2
14 Scratch mend PCB 2 J390905 ☞ 64060 Option*1*2
15 DIMM I090499 ☞ 64050 Option*1*2
*1. The digital masking unit (Z809810-01) consists of two scratch mend PCBs 1, a data change-over PCB, a scratch mend PCB 2, and a DIMM.
61000 2/3
61000
*2. For the Stand Alone Printer, this PCB is not attached.
*3. For the DLS specification, this PCB is not attached.
Desk section (electrical parts) (back)

15 D-ICE PCB cooling fan FAN2 Blowing (always ON when 200 V is
supplied to desk power supply 2)
16 Control unit cooling fan FAN1 Exhaust (always ON when 200 V is
supplied to desk power supply 2)
17 Buzzer BZ1
6. Electrical parts
61000 3/3
62000
Position of electrical parts (scanner section)
Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-2]
Each of the three following scanner types has a unique scanner section PCB location: S-2, S-3, and S-4.
• For S-3, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-3].
• For S-4, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of PCBs) [S-4].
! Position (back face) [S-2]

1
2
6. Electrical parts
5 6
G068429
Scanner Section (Back face) [S-2]

1 AFC/scanner control PCB J390879 ☞ 65000
2 AFC/scanner driver PCB J390768 ☞ 65010
3 LED driver PCB J390999 ☞ 65020 The part in
(J390995) parentheses is no
(J390870) longer available.
4 Multi power supply (scanner) PS3 I038373 ☞ 65060
5 Scanner power supply 1 PS1 I038379
7 PM driver (film feed motor) PMD1 I043111 ☞ 65070
62000 1/3
62000
1
7
4 6 5
G077179

☞ 65020
6. Electrical parts
3 LED driver PCB J390999
62000 2/3
62000
1
6
3 5 4
G078475

6. Electrical parts
62000 3/3
62050
Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-2]
The location of the electrical parts in each of the following scanners is unique: S-2, S-3, and S-4.
• For S-3, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-3].
• For S-4, refer to ☞ Scanner section (positions of electrical parts) [S-4].
! Position (front face) [S-2]
2
3
6. Electrical parts
5 6
G068445
Scanner section (front face) [S-2]

No. Name Symbol Parts No. Remarks
1 Film ready lamp LED1 W410409
2 ND filter solenoid SOL2 Inside of LED light source unit
3 Film carrier lock sensor SE51
4 LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
5 LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 Blowing ☞ Operation specification
6 LED light source unit Refer to ☞ Details of LED light source
unit.
Refer to ☞ Operation specification.
Details of LED light source unit

• You can check the LED light source unit type in the System Version Check display. ☞ 35500
$ indicates that it is possible to change in LED light source unit.
62050 1/7
62050
− indicates that it is not possible to change in LED light source unit.
LED light source unit Replacement parts

LED light source unit (Type LED light source unit (Type LED light source unit (Type 2)
0) 1)
(Type 0) $ Replace in LED light source kit Replace in LED light source kit
1*1 2*1
Z022495 (Type 1) → − $ Replace in LED light source kit
2*1
Z024047 (Type 2) → − − $
Z022937(no longer
available)→
*1. Details of LED light source kit
Details Part No.

LED light source kit 1 LED light source unit type 1 (Z022495) Z022489 (No longer available)
LED driver PCB (J390995)
Cable
LED light source kit 2 LED light source unit type 2 (Z024047) Z024049
(Z022937)(No longer available) Z022939 (No longer available)
Cable
NOTE
• For details about how to remove the LED light source unit, refer to the following.
☞ 20620
• ND Filter Solenoid, LED Heater (High), LED Heater (Medium), LED Heater (Low), B LED, G LED, R1 LED, R2 LED, D LED
and LED thermosensor are built in the LED light source unit.
6. Electrical parts
G068446
62050 2/7
62050

7 Control box cooling fan 1 FAN5 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
8 Control box cooling fan 2 FAN6
9 Power supply cooling fan FAN4
Operation specification
Name Symbol Operation condition
LED light source unit - Controlled temperature: 45.0±1°C
LED cooling fan 1 FAN1 When the LED thermosensor is 45.4°C or more: Fan ON
LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 When the LED thermosensor is 45.0°C or less: Fan OFF
Power supply cooling fan FAN4 When scanner power supply 2 is ON, the fan is always ON.
Control box cooling fan 1 FAN5
NOTE
• All the fans above are OFF while the program timer activates.
6. Electrical parts
62050 3/7
62050
2
3
6. Electrical parts
5 6
G068445

6 LED light source unit Z024051(Type 3) Refer to ☞ Operation specification.
Z023408(no
longer available)
NOTE
☞ 20620
• LED light source unit type is checked in the System Version Check display. ☞ 35500
62050 4/7
62050
8
G077199

7 Control box cooling fan 1 FAN4 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
When the LED thermosensor is 45.0°C or less: Fan OFF
6. Electrical parts
LED cooling fan 2 FAN2
NOTE
62050 5/7
62050
2
3
6. Electrical parts
5 6
G078479

6 LED light source unit Z023547 [S- ☞ Operation specification
4]
IMPORTANT
• S-4 LED light source unit(s) cannot be used with the S-2 or the S-3.
NOTE
☞ 20620
62050 6/7
62050
8
G078478

7 Control box cooling fan FAN4 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
6. Electrical parts
LED cooling fan 2 FAN2 When the LED thermosensor is 45.0°C or less: Fan OFF
Control box cooling fan FAN4
NOTE
62050 7/7
62100
Position of electrical parts (Film Carrier Section)
135/240 AFC-II (positions of PCBs)
! Position
The advance unit which is removed and turned

over
3
6
1
7
4
10
5
G051054
135/240 AFC-II
No. Name Symbol Part No. Manual No. Remarks
1 Connecting PCB 1 J390756 ☞ 65200
6. Electrical parts
4 Driver PCB 1 J390368 ☞ 65230
5 Driver PCB 2 J390519 ☞ 65240 One of the two types of
J391115 PCBs is installed in this
system.
The two types of PCBs
are not compatible.
6 Sensor PCB J390757 ☞ 65250 The PCB cannot be
replaced.
7 Power PCB J390755 ☞ 65260
8 Magnetic head PCB J391050 ☞ 65270 Type R/W only
(J390497) The part in parentheses is
no longer available.
J391051 Type R only
(J390784) The part in parentheses is
no longer available.
10 Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit*1 W411413 ☞ 65380 Type R/W only
W411414 Type R only
*1. Unnecessary when using the magnetic head PCB (J390497) (J390784).
62100 1/1
62150
135/240 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
2 13
8
3
4
10 11
9
12
5 5
27
14
12
13
21
3
7 1 22
20
10 7
Magnetic head unit
2
1
11 4
23 15
6. Electrical parts
8 9
16
When the magnetic head unit is opened When the rear cover is opened
24 18
17
19
26 25
6
G057595
135/240 AFC-II
1 135 loading sensor SE52
2 135 ready sensor SE53
3 135 perforation sensor SE54
62150 1/2
62150

6 VEI sensor SE57
8 135 DX sensor 1 SE147 Uses for Film Detection as well.
9 135 DX sensor 2 SE148
14 Rewinding sensor SE78
15 135 lane limit switch LM1
16 240 lane limit switch LM2
17 IPI sensor SE79
18 Cartridge limit switch 1 LM4
19 Cartridge limit switch 2 LM5
20 Panorama shutter solenoid SOL5
21 Film feed motor PM1
22 Light lock door motor PM2
23 Spool key motor PM3
24 Read head (camera track) Type R
24 Read head (camera track) Type R/W
25 Read head (photo finishing track)
26 Write head (photo finishing track)
27 Film feed motor cooling fan FAN31 Exhaust
6. Electrical parts
62150 2/2
62200
120 AFC-II (positions of PCBs)
! Position
G051055
120 AFC-II
1 Connecting PCB J390371 ☞ 65290
6. Electrical parts
2 Sensor PCB J390385 ☞ 65300
62200 1/1
62250
120 AFC-II (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
2
4
1
G051034
120 AFC-II
6. Electrical parts
1 Loading sensor SE64
2 Ready sensor SE65
3 Film sensor SE66
4 Film feed sensor SE67
62250 1/1
62300
! Position
6. Electrical parts
G052691
110 AFC-II
1 Connecting PCB J390372 ☞ 65310
2 Sensor PCB J390394 ☞ 65320
62300 1/1
62350
! Position
2
3
6. Electrical parts
3
G052690
110 AFC-II
1 Loading sensor SE90
2 Ready sensor SE91
3 Perforation sensor SE92
62350 1/1
62400
135/240 MMC-II (positions of PCBs)
! Position
2
1
6. Electrical parts
G052688
135/240 MMC-II
1 MMC connecting PCB J390483 ☞ 65330
2 MMC sensor PCB J390389 ☞ 65340
62400 1/1
62450
135/240 MMC-II (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
8
4
6
6. Electrical parts
9
2
3
G052686
135/240 MMC-II
1 Mount carrier home sensor SE68
2 Mount sensor SE70
3 AF sensor SE72
4 Mount carrier sensor (upper) SE73
5 Mount carrier sensor (lower) SE74
6 Mount insertion cover sensor SE77
7 AF motor DM9
8 Mount carrier slide motor PM11
9 Mount insertion cover open switch SM3
62450 1/1
62500
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
2
1
G058784
6. Electrical parts
135/240 AMC-II
1 AMC connecting PCB J390700 ☞ 65350
2 MMC sensor PCB J390389 ☞ 65340
62500 1/1
62550
135/240 AMC-II (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
6
9 14
1
12
15
10
11
13
6. Electrical parts
3
7,8
5
G060697
135/240 AMC-II
1 Mount carrier home sensor SE156
2 Loading sensor 1 SE157
3 Loading sensor 2 SE158
4 Mount elevator sensor SE159
5 AF sensor SE160
6 Mount sensor (inlet) SE161
7 Mount carrier sensor (lower) SE162
8 Mount carrier sensor (upper) SE163
9 Mount sensor SE164
10 Ejection sensor SE165
11 Mount insertion motor DM14
12 Mount elevator motor DM15
13 AF motor DM16
14 Mount carrier slide motor PM17
15 Mount ejection solenoid SOL26
62550 1/1
62600
! Position
6. Electrical parts
G057668
135 AFC-II
1 135 AFC connecting PCB J390779 ☞ 65360
2 135 AFC sensor PCB J390709 ☞ 65370
62600 1/1
62650
! Position
3
4,5
2
6,7
9
8
6,7
6. Electrical parts
2
4,5
10
G057597
135 AFC-II
8 Rewinding sensor SE78
10 Panorama shutter solenoid SOL5
62650 1/1
62660
MFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)
! Position
6. Electrical parts
G071630
MFC
No. Name Symbol Parts No. Manual No.
62660 1/1
62670
MFC (position and description of electrical parts)
! Position
3
5
2
10
9
8
7
6
6. Electrical parts
1 4
G071629
MFC
1 Table home sensor SE116
2 Table slide motor PM20
3 Film pressure magnet MH1
4 Film pressure switch SW8
5 Film viewer L8
6 Attachment Detection Switch 1 LM21 These switches are positioned at
7 Attachment Detection Switch 2 LM22 connecting PCB 2. ☞ 65400
8 Attachment Detection Switch 3 LM23
62670 1/1
63000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Printer section (positions of PCBs)
! Position 1
4
1
5
10 9 8
6. Electrical parts
11
6 7
G068432
Printer section 1
1 B-AOM driver I124020 ☞ 66080 The part in
2 G-AOM driver (I124019) parentheses is no
(I124012) longer available.
3 R-AOM driver
4 Laser control PCB J390919 ☞ 66010
5 Laser I/O PCB J390945 ☞ 66060
6 B laser driver J390973 ☞ 66070 Laser unit (Type
7 G laser driver A1)
6 B laser driver J390929 Laser unit (Type
7 G laser driver B1)
8 Printer control PCB J390947 ☞ 66000
9 Multi power supply (printer) PS4 I038160 ☞ 66100
10 Printer I/O PCB 3 J390868 ☞ 66040
11 Laser power supply PS5 I038286 ☞ 66100
63000 1/2
63000
! Position 2
7 4
5
6. Electrical parts
1 2 3 G069576
Printer section 2
1 Printer I/O PCB 1 J390866 ☞ 66020
2 CVP PCB J390943 ☞ 66090 Option
3 Printer power supply 3 PS3 I038364 ☞ 66100
4 Printer power supply 1 PS1 I038361
5 Printer power supply 2 PS2 I038287
6 Printer I/O PCB 2 J390867 ☞ 66030
7 Triple magazine PCB J390835 ☞ 66050
63000 2/2
63050
Printer section (positions of electrical parts)
! Position (front face)
7
11
6. Electrical parts
10
3 1 2 4
G068441
Printer main body (front face)

*1
1 Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) LS2
2 Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2) LS3
3 Printer Door 3 Sensor LS4
4 Inner cooling fan FAN1 Blowing (the fan is always ON.)
5 Control box cooling fan 4 FAN6 Intake (the fan is always ON.)
*1
6 Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) LS1
7 Paper advance section cooling fan 2 FAN7 Blowing (the fan is always ON.)
8 Inner thermosensor TH1
9 Paper magazine lamp B/C L1
10 Paper magazine lamp A L2
11 Counter CO Option
*1. When LS1, 2, and 3 turns OFF, all motors in the printer stops and the following sensors turns as follows: cut home sensor (LIGHT), cut end
sensor (LIGHT), paper loading sensor (LIGHT), paper supply pressure change sensor (DARK), paper hold sensor (DARK), and paper end sensor
B (DARK)
Also, the control signals of B, G and R-AOM drivers are cut off and laser light is not output from the laser unit.
63050 1/2
63050
! Position (back face)
1
6
G068443
Printer main body (back face)

1 Laser unit cooling fan 1 FAN8 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF controlling of
2 Laser unit cooling fan 2 FAN9 laser unit cooling fan 1 and 2.
3 Control box cooling fan 3 FAN4 Exhaust (the fan is always ON.)
6. Electrical parts
6 Paper advance section cooling fan 1 FAN5
63050 2/2
63051
Paper magazine mounts A, B and C (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
Paper magazine mount B 3 1
8
Paper magazine mount A
6. Electrical parts
7 9
Paper magazine mount C
6
4
5
G068427
Paper magazine mount B

1 Paper magazine motor B PM1
2 Paper magazine code sensor B SE1
3 Paper end sensor B SE4
Paper magazine mount C

4 Paper magazine motor C PM2
5 Paper magazine code sensor C SE2
6 Paper end sensor C SE5
Paper magazine mount A

7 Paper magazine motor A PM3
8 Paper magazine code sensor A SE3
9 Paper end sensor A SE6
63051 1/1
63060
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
2 1
11 7
13
14
12 8 9 10
3
6. Electrical parts
4
G068425
Paper supply unit

1 Paper supply arm motor (left) PM7
2 Paper supply arm motor (right) PM8
3 Paper hold motor DM3
4 Paper hold sensor SE11
5 Paper supply pressure change motor DM2
6 Paper supply pressure change sensor SE10
7 Paper loading sensor SE7
8 Cut home sensor SE8
9 Cut end sensor SE9
10 Cut motor DM1
11 Ribbon advance motor DM6
12 Paper supply motor A PM5
13 Paper advance motor 1 PM6
14 Paper supply motor B/C PM4
63060 1/1
63070
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
7
Front
4
5
Front
1
3
2
G068426
6. Electrical parts
1 Zigzagging correction sensor (left) SE12
2 Zigzagging correction sensor (right) SE13
3 Exposure start sensor SE14
4 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 SE15
5 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 SE16
6 Exposure advance motor 1 PM9
7 Exposure advance motor 2 PM11
8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM10
9 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 PM12
63070 1/1
63080
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts)
! Type of the laser unit and identifying its type

There are two types of laser unit. One is type A1 and another one is type B1. There is no difference in functions and quality.
Name Parts No. Name Parts No. Remarks

Laser unit (Type A1) Z022425 Laser unit Z023718 The part in
(Z022427) parentheses is
no longer
available.
B and G laser drivers J390973
Laser unit (Type B1) Z022426 Laser unit Z023719 The part in
(Z020964) parentheses is
no longer
available.
B and G laser drivers J390929
NOTE
• For details about how to remove the laser unit, refer to the following.
☞ 26710
• It is not necessary to change the setting because it recognizes the type of the laser unit when installed.
IMPORTANT
• There are two ways to identify the type of the laser unit which is equipped as described below.
1. It can be identified by the version of the LASER on the System Version Check display.
☞ 35500
2. It can be identified by the label placed on the laser unit.
6. Electrical parts
Laser unit (Type A1) Black letters on a white background First four-digit number is No.
0913.
Laser unit (Type B1) Black letter on a yellow First four-digit number is No.
background 0912.
Laser unit
0913######## 0912########
Type A1 Type B1
Either of these labels is affixed.

G072401
• Basically, the laser unit should be replaced with the same type of the laser unit and the laser drivers (B and G).
☞ 66070
• The laser unit and B, G laser drivers can be replaced separately if they are replaced with the same type. However,
they cannot be used if they are different types. (connecting cables neither.)
When the laser unit is replaced with different type laser unit, it needs to be replaced with a set of the laser unit and the
laser drivers (B and G).
63080 1/2
63080
! Position
1
G068440
Laser unit
1 Laser unit heater H5 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF controlling of
the laser unit heater.
6. Electrical parts
63080 2/2
63090
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
4
1 G068422

1 Paper advance motor 2 PM13 Not working when the interlock switches
2 Pressure guide motor PM14 (printer doors 1 and 2) and interlock switch 1
(printer top cover) are OFF.
6. Electrical parts
3 Pressure guide sensor SE17
63090 1/1
63100
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
12 5 3 10 7
11 6 13
6. Electrical parts
1 8
2 4
G068424

1 Arm sensor (left) SE19
2 Arm sensor (right) SE20
3 Lane select motor (left) PM17
4 Lane select motor (right) PM18
5 Paper advance pressure change motor (left) DM4
6 Paper advance pressure change motor (right) DM5
7 Paper advance arm motor (left) PM15
8 Paper advance arm motor (right) PM16
9 Paper advance motor 3 PM19
10 Lane select sensor (left) SE21
11 Lane select sensor (right) SE22
12 Paper advance pressure change sensor (left) SE23
13 Paper advance pressure change sensor (right) SE24
63100 1/1
63110
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
G068423

1 Paper sensor 2 (left) SE25
2 Paper sensor 2 (center) SE26
3 Paper sensor 2 (right) SE27
6. Electrical parts
63110 1/1
63200
Description of PCB (processor section)
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N]

Additional PCBs are in this section depending on machine specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor section (position of PCB) [SM].
! Position
1 5
4 2
3 7 G068433
6. Electrical parts
Processor section
1 Processor control PCB J390878 ☞ 66200
2 Processor I/O PCB J390798 ☞ 66210
3 Processor relay PCB J390917 ☞ 66220
4 Transistor PCB J404493 Cooling water
solenoid valve
(option)
5 Processor power supply 1 PS1 I038320 ☞ 67400
6 Processor power supply 2 PS2 I038286
7 Processor power supply 3 PS3
63200 1/2
63200
Processor section (position of PCB) [SM]
! Position
1
G070039
SM replenishment unit
1 SM I/O PCB J390330 ☞ 66600
6. Electrical parts
63200 2/2
63250
Positions of electrical parts (processor section)
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM].
! Position
20 9 8 7
10, 42, 1, 11, 43, 2, 3, 4, 5, 17, 12, 44, 6
18
21
25
23 24
26 to 31
49
22
6. Electrical parts
19
39, 40, 41
45
13, 14, 15
46 50
47
51
48
52
38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 16

G068434
Processor section
1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
63250 1/7
63250

3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD effluent float switch FS7
8 BF effluent float switch FS8
9 STB effluent float switch FS9
10 CD thermosensor TH1
11 BF thermosensor TH2
12 STB thermosensor TH3
13 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
14 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
15 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
16 Refilling water tank level sensor LSE4
17 Interlock switch (processor top cover) LS4
18 Rack stopper sensor LS14
19 Power supply cooling fan FAN14 Circulation ☞ Operation
specification of the fan
6. Electrical parts
20 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
21 Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 Blowing ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
22 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 Intake ☞ Operation specification of
the fan
23 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
of the fan
25 Drive motor M3 If replaced, carry out Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33600
26 CD circulation pump P1
27 BF circulation pump P3
28 STB1 circulation pump P5
32 CD-W refilling water pump P9
33 BF-W refilling water pump P10
34 STB1-W refilling water pump P11
38 Cleaning pump 1 P15
39 CD replenisher pump RP1
63250 2/7
63250

40 BF replenisher pump RP2
41 STB replenisher pump RP3
42 CD heater H1
43 BF heater H2
44 STB heater H3
45 Hour meter HM1 Option
46 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1 Option
47 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2 Option
48 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3 Option
49 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
50 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2 Refer to 4203 ☞ Earth leakage
circuit breaker 1 (NFB2).
Operation specification of the fan

Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is more than the setting
Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is ON. When the CD or BF processing solution
temperature is less than the setting temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is OFF.
Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12
Exhaust fan FAN13 When the top cover is closed, the fan is always ON.
When the top cover is opened, the fan is OFF.
Power supply cooling fan FAN14 The fan is always ON.
6. Electrical parts
Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 When the drive motor operates, the fan is ON. When the drive motor stops, the fan is
OFF.
NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are OFF while the program timer activates.
63250 3/7
63250
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM]
! Position
16
9 8 7
21
17
10,28,1,11,12,29,2,3,4,5,6,13,30,6
19
20
14
22 to 27
15
18
6. Electrical parts
32
31 36
33
35
37
34
38
G070016
Processing tank section

1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
63250 4/7
63250

STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD effluent float switch FS7
8 BF effluent float switch FS8
9 STB effluent float switch FS9
10 CD thermosensor TH1
11 BF thermosensor TH2
12 STB thermosensor TH3
13 Interlock switch (processor top cover) LS4
14 Rack stopper sensor LS14
15 Power supply cooling fan FAN14 Circulation ☞ Operation
specification of the fan
16 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
17 Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 Blowing ☞ Operation specification
of the fan
18 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 Intake ☞ Operation specification of
the fan
of the fan
6. Electrical parts
of the fan
21 Drive motor M3 If replaced, carry out Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33600
22 CD circulation pump P1
23 BF circulation pump P3
28 CD heater H1
29 BF heater H2
30 STB heater H3
31 Hour meter HM1 Option
32 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1 Option
33 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2 Option
34 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3 Option
35 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
63250 5/7
63250
! Position
26 3 21 13 22
2
23
25
29
24 6
4 28
27
19
12
18
10
17
20
6. Electrical parts
9 16
14
15 11
8
7 G070041
SM replenishment unit
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35
5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
11 BF-A replenishment solution sensor SE42
12 BF-B replenishment solution sensor SE43
13 CD-W water supply pump sensor SE44
14 Water supply tank level sensor LSE5
15 Replenishment package sensor P-1 LS6
16 Replenishment package sensor P-2 LS7
63250 6/7
63250

20 Cleaning pump 1 P15
21 CD-W water supply pump RP1
22 BF-W water supply pump RP2
23 STB4-W water supply pump RP3
24 CD-A replenisher pump RP5
25 CD-B replenisher pump RP6
26 CD-C replenisher pump RP7
27 BF-A replenisher pump RP8
28 BF-B replenisher pump RP9
29 STB replenisher pump RP10
6. Electrical parts
63250 7/7
63260
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts)
! Position
18
13 1 17
6 5 4 15
11
16
8
7
6. Electrical parts
12 14
10
G068390
Dryer section, order classification section

1 Conveyor unit sensor SE25
2 Sorter home sensor SE26
3 Print full sensor SE27
4 Print sensor (right) SE28
5 Print sensor (center) SE29
6 Print sensor (left) SE30
7 Dryer lane select sensor SE45
8 Dryer safety thermostat STH3
9 Dryer thermosensor TH4
10 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS5
63260 1/2
63260

11 Manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch) SW1
12 Dryer fan FAN15
13 Conveyor motor DM3
14 Sorter motor DM4
15 Dryer selection solenoid SOL16
16 Dryer heater H4
17 Processor condition lamp
18 Signal lamp Option
6. Electrical parts
63260 2/2
64000
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)
Image processing PCB (J390864)
Image processing PCB (new)
Unused Unused depending on the conditions
6. Electrical parts
G078391
Image processing PCB (old)
Unused
Unused depending on the conditions
G068419
64000 1/3
64000
! Function
• Receives the image data from the D-ICE PCB.
• Stores the image data in the input memory temporarily and the development memory to process and edit the image data.
• Performs transmission and reception of the image data with the image correction PCB.
• Performs inputting and outputting the image data with PC.
• Performs inputting and outputting the image data with the external PC.
• Outputs the image data to the laser control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
IMPORTANT
• Although the parts mounted on the image processing PCB (new) and the image processing PCB (old) are different,
they are compatible with each other.
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Check the settings of DIP switches.
IMPORTANT
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables connect to the connectors P443 (IN) and P442 (OUT) and the LVDS cables
connect to the connectors J1350, J445, J455, and J456. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling the optical
fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
! 3. Adjustment after replacement
6. Electrical parts
• Read the system program.
☞ 35600
! 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• Refer to 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.
! Unused connector
IMPORTANT
• The parts mounted on the image processing PCB (new) and the image processing PCB (old) are different.
Connector No. Purpose Remarks

J445 Connecting to the Compact Archive Unit When the Compact Archive Unit (option) is
equipped
P450 Connecting to D-ICE PCB When scanner section is equipped
P451 to P454 Unused
J455 Connecting to the laser control PCB When the printer is equipped
J1350 Connected to CD-R writing kit for external PC (Option)
CN1 to CN5 Unused
JP1 and JP2 Unused
! Component parts table
IMPORTANT
• The parts mounted on the image processing PCB (new) and the image processing PCB (old) are different.
64000 2/3
64000
LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 Status display ON when sending data to the PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB
LED2 Status display ON when sending data to the PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB (option)
LED3 Status display ON when sending data to the external PC
LED4 Status display ON when sending data to the laser control PCB
LED5 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED6 Status display Blinks when the image data is input from D-ICE
PCB and it is being processed in the image
processing PCB.
LED7 Status display Blinks when accessing to the input memory
LED8 Status display Blinks when the data is input from the image
correction PCB and the data is being processed.
LED9 Status display Blinks when accessing to the development
memory
LED10 Status display Blinks when the data is being received in LVDS
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Unused Impossible
TP2 to TP10 Ground Possible
TP11 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP12 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement Possible
Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks
6. Electrical parts
DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn OFF. *1
DS2 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
8 OFF Unused
*1. DS1 is a push button switch.

If the push button switch is not pushed, it is OFF.
64000 3/3
64010
Image correction PCB (J390913)
Memory
6. Electrical parts
Unused
G070032
! Function
• Performs auto sharpness, auto contrast, scaling, image rotation, and density correction to the input image.
NOTE
• The two memories have been attached to the image correction PCB cannot be replaced alone.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• Check that the two memories have been attached to the image correction PCB.

☞ 35600
• Refer to 4201 ☞ Image correction PCB.
64010 1/2
64010
! Unused connector
P1348 Unused
P1349 Unused
P1365 Unused
CN1 Unused

LED1 Unused
LED2 Unused
LED3 Unused
LED4 Unused

TP1 to 5 Unused Impossible The test pin is unmounted.
TP7 to 34 Unused Impossible
TP68 to 72 Ground Possible
TP78 to 82 Unused Impossible The test pin is unmounted.
Jumper No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks
6. Electrical parts
JP3 1 Open Reset The test pin is unmounted.
NOTE
• Some PCBs have connector(s) and test point(s) on their back side.
• Other ground(s) than TP68 to TP72 is on the PCB.
64010 2/2
64030
D-ICE control PCB (J390946)
Optical fiber cable
Unused
G068438
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls the D-ICE PCB
• Controls the buzzer and PC power switch of ON
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• Backup the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
• To remove the D-ICE control PCB, read the procedures for removing the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB. ☞ 64045
IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable to any connector below only if you do not miss out on IN and OUT.
• This PCB has the connectors (below) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions
for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
Optical fiber cable list

OUT J71, J73, J75, J53
IN J72, J74, J76, J54

☞ 35600
• Read the data of the machine.
☞ 35400
64030 1/2
64030

• Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE control PCB.
! Unused connector
P55 Unused

LED1 DC5 V input check ON when power is supplied.

TP1 DC5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible

2
3
6. Electrical parts
4
64030 2/2
64040
D-ICE PCB (J390903)
Unused
6. Electrical parts
G068437
! Function
• Communicates with the D-ICE control PCB
• Transfers the image data to image processing PCB from the scanner
• Performs the image cut of the input image from the scanner by film size.
• Detects and corrects the scratch and dust on the film base layer.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• To remove the D-ICE PCB, read the procedures for removing the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB. ☞ 64045
IMPORTANT
• The LVDS cable connects to the connector P436 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling the
optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

☞ 35600
64040 1/2
64040

• Refer to 4201 ☞ D−ICE PCB.
! Unused connector
J485 Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] Option
J484A Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A]
J486 Data change-over PCB Option
J487
J483 Scratch mend PCB 2 Option
J480 DIMM Option
CN−MAIN Unused
CN−SUB Unused

LED2 DC3.3 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC2.5 V−1 input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 DC2.5 V−2 input check ON when power is supplied.
LED5 to 12 Unused

6. Electrical parts
TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 DC1.4 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible
TP7 DC2.5 V−1 input check Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
TP9 DC2.5 V−2 input check Possible
TP10 Ground Possible

2
3
4
2
3
4
64040 2/2
64045
D-ICE control PCB and removing the D-ICE PCB
1. Remove the rear cover.

☞ 20050
2. Remove the D-ICE PCB cooling fan. (Loosen three screws.)
D-ICE PCB cooling fan
G070237
3. Disconnect all connectors from the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB.
6. Electrical parts
4. Remove the six PCB spacers of the D-ICE PCB and PCB pressers 1 and 2. (six screws)
PCB spacers
PCB presser 1
PCB spacer
PCB presser 2
PCB spacers
G068212
5. Remove the four screws of the D-ICE control PCB.
64045 1/2
64045
6. Remove the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB together and separate them to replace.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to remove those D-ICE control PCB and D-ICE PCB together. If you remove one of them only, the
spacer that fixes the PCBs may damage the PCB.
D-ICE control PCB
Connection
D-ICE PCB
G072360
6. Electrical parts
64045 2/2
64050
DIMM (I090499)
Terminal
G070040
! Function
• Stores the image data temporarily
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• Do not touch the terminal.

• None
6. Electrical parts
• Refer to 4201 ☞ DIMM.
! Unused connector
• None
64050 1/1
64060
Scratch mend PCB 2 (J390905)
G068411
! Function
• Corrects the scratches on the film base layer
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
6. Electrical parts
• Do not touch the terminal of CN2.

• None

• Refer to 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 2.
! Unused connector
• None

TP1 Ground Possible
TP3 Voltage measurement Possible Must be between 3.1 V and 3.5
V.
TP4 Voltage measurement Possible Must be between 1.7 V and 1.9
V.
TP6 Ground Possible
64060 1/2
64060

SW1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2
6. Electrical parts
64060 2/2
64070
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] (J390904)
Unused
G068444
! Function
• Corrects the scratches on the film emulsion layer
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• Do not touch the terminal of CN1.

• None

• Refer to 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A].
• Refer to 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485].
! Unused connector
CN3 Unused

LED1 Unused
LED2 Unused
LED3 Unused
LED4 Unused
64070 1/2
64070

TP1 DC1.4 V (ground) Possible

2
3
4
6. Electrical parts
64070 2/2
64080
Data change-over PCB (J390906)
G068410
! Function
• The data change-over PCB relays the image data when scratch mend PCB 1 is mounted on the D-ICE PCB.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• None

• None

• Refer to 4201 ☞ Data change-over PCB.
! Unused connector
• None
64080 1/1
64100
ARCNET HUB PCB (J390479)
Optical fiber cable
Unused

G068391
! Function
• Relays ARCNET communication.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable for the ARCNET HUB PCB to any connectors below unless you miss to
distinguish the IN/OUT side of the cable. The positions of unused connectors may vary by model.
• This PCB has the connectors (below) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions
for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
Optical fiber cable list
OUT J133, J135, J137, J139
IN J134, J136, J138, J140

J131, J132 Unused
J137, J138 Connected to CD-R writing kit for external PC Option
J139, J140 Connected to the PU control PCB Option
J141 to J146 Unused
! Unused connector
• None
64100 1/2
64100

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Status

TP2 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
64100 2/2
64110
Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645)
G057402
! Function
• Connects the operation keyboard.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
☞ 61000
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None

• None
64110 1/1
64120
Keyboard switch PCB (J390794)
6. Electrical parts
G068402
! Function
• Relays signals of the operation keyboard, full keyboard and mouse to the PC.
NOTE
• The power is not supplied to the keyboard switch PCB unless the PC is ON.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None

64120 1/2
64120

TP3 Ground Possible
Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F24 T3.15 A/125 V ATX power supply protection
6. Electrical parts
64120 2/2
64130
Colorimeter control PCB (J390801)
May not be mounted depending on conditions
G068401
! Function
• Controls the colorimeter unit.
• Relays the communication between the colorimeter and PC.
• Communicates with the PC.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

☞ 35600
☞ 35400
• Correct the front end advance length and the error by the colorimeter unit adjustment.
☞ 35100
• Refer to 4201 ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB.
! Unused connector
• None
64130 1/2
64130
IMPORTANT
• Though sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.


TP4 Ground Possible DC+5 V, DC+12 V
TP5 Ground Possible DC+24 V

2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
6. Electrical parts
64130 2/2
64140
PU control PCB (J307103)

G068417
6. Electrical parts
! Function
• Controls the pricing unit.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• This PCB has connectors P299 (IN) and P300 (OUT) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

☞ 35600
☞ 35400
! Unused connector
P301 Pricing unit keyboard connection
64140 1/2
64140

P302 Pricing unit display connection
P303 PU data communication unit connection
P306 Connection to the printer power supply of the pricing
unit


TP1 DC+24 V voltage check Possible
TP2 DC+5 V voltage check Possible
TP3 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible

2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
6. Electrical parts
8 OFF Unused
64140 2/2
64160
Power PCB (J390938)
Unused
G068403
! Function
• Supplies the voltage of AC 200 V.
• Protects the power surge.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• Move the jumper connector (J100) in P100 to the PCB with which you are going to replace.

• None

• Refer to 4201 ☞ Power PCB.
! Unused connector
P103 Unused

FL1 250 V/T5 A Lighting surge protection Cannot be replaced.
FL1 250 V/T5 A Lighting surge protection Cannot be replaced.
64160 1/1
64170
Description of power supply (desk section)
G068404
! Function
Symbol Name Parts Function Remarks
No.
PS2 Desk power supply 1 I038293 Supplies the power to DC+5 V
each PCB.
PS3 Desk power supply 2 I038263 Supplies the power to DC+24 V
each PCB.
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If these functions are
operated, turn off the circuit breaker of the machine and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection
function is operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
Power supply Precautions for replacement
Desk power supply 1 Do not touch each volume which has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
Desk power supply 2 shipping.

• None

Power supply Reference
Desk power supply 1 Refer to 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 1.
Desk power supply 2 Refer to 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 2.
! Unused connector
• None
64170 1/2
64170

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks
Desk power supply 1 F1 T6.3 AH/250 V AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Desk power supply 2 F1 T5 AH/250 V AC 200 V power
supply protection
6. Electrical parts
64170 2/2
65000
Description of PCB (scanner section)
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390879)
Unused, or unmounted depending on the Unused depending on the conditions

conditions
6. Electrical parts
G068413
! Function
• Controls each AFC
• Controls the scanner unit and LED light source unit.
! 1. Position
☞ 62000
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• This PCB has connectors J20 (OUT) and J21 (IN) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

☞ 35600
☞ 35400
65000 1/3
65000
• Carry out the sensor standard adjustment for each AFC.
135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC

Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment Adjustment
☞ 35000 ☞ 35010 ☞ 35020 ☞ 35060

• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner control PCB.
• [If using S-4], refer to ☞ 4190
! Unused connector
P7 For the LED light source unit type 0: Unused
For the LED light source unit types 1, 2 and 3:
Connects to the R LED relay connector J/P168.
S-4: Not used
P11 S-2/S-3: Not used
When using S-4: Used to display scanner type (S-
4) during system version confirmation.
P14 Unused For only J390879-04 or later: P14 Unmounted
J10 Unused
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT

LED4 DC3.3 V input check ON when power is supplied.

TP2 DC+5 V−1 voltage measurement Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible
TP7 Ground Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
65000 2/3
65000

2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
6. Electrical parts
65000 3/3
65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390768) [S-2/S-3]
The AFC/Scanner Driver PCB performs different functions in S-2/S-3 and S-4.
• For S-4, refer to ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4].
6. Electrical parts
Unused/unmounted depending on
conditions
G068414
! Function
• Controls motors of the scanner section and relays sensors.
• Supplies the power to the film carrier and the film cleaner.
IMPORTANT
• Although the parts mounted on the AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-03 or later) and AFC/Scanner driver PCB (-02 or
earlier) are different, they are compatible with each other.
65010 1/6
65010
! 1. Position
☞ 62000
• None

• None

• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to 4200 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to 4250 ☞ AFC/scanner driver PCB.
! Unused connector
IMPORTANT
P31 Unused For only J390768-03 or later: Unmounted
P32 Unused
6. Electrical parts
P33 Unused
P36 Unused
P37 Unused
P39 Unused
P43 Film cleaner Option
P44 Unused
IMPORTANT

LED1 Unused
LED2 DC+36 V−2 (AFC) output check ON when the power is supplied to AFC.
LED3 DC+36 V−1 input check ON when power is supplied.

TP1 DC+36 V−1 voltage Possible
measurement
TP2 DC+24 V−1 voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+5 V−1 voltage measurement Possible
65010 2/6
65010

TP4 Ground Possible

F26 T6.3 A/125 V DC+36 V−1 power supply
protection
protection
protection
6. Electrical parts
65010 3/6
65010
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) [S-4]
P143 P56 P64 P38 P29 P43

P33 P57 P44 P40 P28
P42
TP4 TP3 TP2
TP5
P142
P41
LED7
TP6 P46
P144 LED3
F3
TP9 TP7
TP13 F2 P65
TP15
LED2 TP10
LED4 LED5 LED6

TP12 P37
TP14 F1
LED1 TP11
P140 P30
P26
P27 P141 P70 P66
6. Electrical parts
LED8
TP16 TP1
F4
Not mounted
G081994
! Function
• Controls motors of the scanner section and relays sensors.
• Supplies the power to the film carrier and the film cleaner.
• Controls the LED electric current, temperature, filter solenoid of LED light source unit.
IMPORTANT
• AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) can only be used with S-4 and is not compatible with S-2/S-3 scanner driver
PCBs.
• S-4 contains no LED driver PCB because its AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) has the functionality of the LED
driver PCBs in S-2 and S-3.
! 1. Position
☞ 62000
• None
65010 4/6
65010

• None


! Unused connector
• None

LED4 Heater high range check ON when heater high range is set
LED5 Heater middle range check ON when heater middle range is set
LED6 Heater low range check ON when heater low range is set
LED7 Used when verifying DC+36V (AFC) power ON when the power is supplied to AFC.
output
IMPORTANT
6. Electrical parts

TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 G heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 18 V (When the LED4 is
goes on in standby state)
TP3 B heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4 is
TP4 R eater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4 is
TP5 Ground Possible
TP7 Ground Possible
TP9 Ground Possible
TP14 DC−12 V voltage measurement Possible

F1 T3.15 A/125 V DC+5 V power supply
protection
65010 5/6
65010

protection
protection
protection
6. Electrical parts
65010 6/6
65020
LED driver PCB
6. Electrical parts
G068415
LED driver PCB (J390870), (J390995)
G076394
65020 1/3
65020
! Function
• Controls the LED electric current, temperature, ND filter solenoid of LED light source unit.
IMPORTANT
• S-4 contains no LED driver PCB because its AFC/scanner driver PCB (J391106) is equipped with equivalent
functions.
☞ 65010
! 1. Position
☞ 62000
• Depending on the type of the LED light source unit, the PCB is different.
LED light source unit LED driver PCB

Type 0 J390870 (No longer available)
Type 1 J390995 (No longer available)
Type 2, Type 3 J390999
Details of LED driver PCB

$ indicates that it is possible to change in LED driver PCB.
− indicates that it is not possible to change in LED driver PCB.
LED driver PCB Replacement parts

J390870 (Type 0) J390995 (Type 1) J390999 (Type 2)
6. Electrical parts
J390870→ $ Replace in LED light source kit Replace in LED light source kit
1*1 2*1
J390995→ − $ Replace in LED light source kit
2*1
J390999→ − − $
*1. Details of LED light source kit
Details Part No.

LED light source kit 1 LED light source unit type 1 (Z022495) Z022489 (No longer available)
Cable
LED light source kit 2 LED light source unit type 2 (Z024047) Z024049
(Z022937)(No longer available) Z022939 (No longer available)
Cable
NOTE
• There are two ways as described below to identify the type of the LED driver PCB or LED light source unit which is equipped as
described below.
• Checking the number sticker which is attached on the top of LED light source unit ☞ 20620
• Checking on the System Version Check display ☞ 35500

• None

• Refer to 4200 ☞ LED driver PCB.
65020 2/3
65020

• Refer to 4252 ☞ LED driver PCB.
! Unused connector
• None

LED1 DC+5 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 Heater high range check ON when heater high range is set
LED5 Heater middle range check ON when heater middle range is set
LED6 Heater low range check ON when heater low range is set

TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 G heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 18 V (When the LED4
is goes on in standby state)
TP3 B heater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4
TP4 R eater voltage measurement Possible Approx. 16 V (When the LED4
TP5 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
TP7 Ground Possible
TP9 Ground Possible
TP14 DC−12 V voltage measurement Possible

protection
protection
protection
65020 3/3
65060
Power supply (scanner)
G068416
! Function
Symbol Name Parts [S-2/S-3] Functions [S-4] Functions
No.
PS1 Scanner power I038379 Power supply to AFC/scanner Power supply to AFC/scanner DC+36 V
supply 1 driver PCB and LED driver PCB. driver PCB.
PS2 Scanner power I038263 Power supply to AFC/scanner Power supply to the AFC/scanner DC+24 V
6. Electrical parts
supply 2 control PCB, AFC/scanner driver control PCB, AFC/scanner driver
PCB and the LED driver PCB. PCB.
PS3 Multi power supply I038373 Power supply (DC+5 V) to Power supply to the AFC/scanner DC+5 V,
(scanner) AFC/scanner control PCB, control PCB(DC +5 V), DC+15 V
AFC/scanner driver PCB and AFC/Scanner driver PCB (DC+5
LED driver PCB. Power supply V, +15 V), and scanner
(DC+15 V) to scanner unit. unit(DC+15V).
IMPORTANT
! 1. Position
☞ 62000
Scanner power supply 1 Do not touch each volume which has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
Scanner power supply 2 shipping.

• None
65060 1/2
65060

Power supply [S-2/S-3] Reference(s) [S-4] Reference(s)
Scanner power supply 1 Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 1 Refer to ☞ 4190.
(PS1).
Scanner power supply 2 Refer to 4200 ☞ Scanner power supply 2
(PS2).
Multi power supply (scanner) Refer to 4200 ☞ Multi power supply
(scanner) (PS3).
! Unused connector
• None

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks
Scanner power supply 1 F1 T5 AH/250 V AC 200-240 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Scanner power supply 2 F1 T5 AH/250 V AC 200-240 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Multi power supply (scanner) F1 T2.5 AH/250 V AC 200-240 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
6. Electrical parts
65060 2/2
65070
PM driver
PMD1
G068412
! Function
Symbol Name Parts Function Adjustments and Remarks
No. precautions for PCB
replacement
PMD1 PM driver (film feed I043111 Controls the film feed Do not touch each All connectors are
motor) motor. potentiometer which has used.
been adjusted by the
manufacturer before
shipping.
! Position
☞ 62000
! Symptom due to the poor connection of wiring
6. Electrical parts
• [If using S-2/S-3], refer to 4200 ☞ PM driver (film feed motor) (PMD1).
65070 1/1
65200
Description of PCB (film carrier section)
Connecting PCB 1 (J390756)
G057586
! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB, the sensor PCB and the magnetic head PCB.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
IMPORTANT
• The flat cables connect to connectors P1001 and P1002 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when
6. Electrical parts
handling the flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

• None
! Unused connector
• None

• None
65200 1/1
65210
G051012
! Function
• Changes the sensor of the film feed route when 135 and 240 lanes are switched.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
IMPORTANT
6. Electrical parts
• The flat cable is connected to connector P1010 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then work properly. ☞ 68200

• None
! Unused connector
• None

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible The test point may not be
TP2 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible mounted.
65210 1/1
65220
G051013
! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and driver PCB 2.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
IMPORTANT
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None

• None
65220 1/1
65230
Driver PCB 1 (J390368)
G051014
! Function
• Controls the light lock door motor and the film feed motor cooling fan.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
• None

• None
6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
• None

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Status
TP2 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible mounted.
65230 1/1
65240
Driver PCB 2

Part No.
J390519
Unused
G068378

Part No.
J391115
6. Electrical parts
G082023
IMPORTANT
• J390519 and J391115 are incompatible due to differences in the methods used to install them. Confirm the parts number
and be sure to judge the PCB type.
! Function
• Controls the spool key motor.
• Inputs the limit switch of 135 or 240 lane.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
IMPORTANT

• None
65240 1/2
65240
! Unused connector
P1035 Unused J391115 is not equipped with this connector.

• None
6. Electrical parts
65240 2/2
65250
Sensor PCB (J390757)
G051016
! Function
• Amplifies the input signal of the film feed route and relays the other sensors.
• Writes the magnetic data.
! Handling the PCB
IMPORTANT
• This sensor PCB cannot be replaced.
Because the wires connected to each DX sensor and the LED PCB are being soldered and the wiring is complicated
and difficult to return it to the original condition.
6. Electrical parts
! Position
☞ 62100
! Unused connector
• None

• None
65250 1/1
65260
Power PCB (J390755)
Unused
G068379
! Function
• Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and +12 V.
• Controls the panorama shutter solenoid.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None
! Unused connector
P1051 Unused
P1052 Unused The connector may not be mounted.

TP1 Ground Possible The test point may not be
mounted.
65260 1/1
65270
Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051)
When the magnetic head unit is not equipped the magnetic preamplifier PCB, refer to ☞ Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784).
J391050 [135/240 AFC-II (R/W) only], J391051 [135/240 AFC-II (R) only]
Part No.
J39105#-00
G075908
IMPORTANT
• Although the form of J391050 and J391051 is the same but it is not compatible. Confirm the parts number and be sure to
judge the PCB type.
! Function
• Reads and writes the magnetic data.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
☞ 62100
IMPORTANT

• None
! Unused connector
• None

• None
65270 1/3
65270
Magnetic head PCB (J390497/J390784)
When the magnetic head unit is equipped the magnetic preamplifier PCB, refer to ☞ Magnetic head PCB (J391050/J391051).
J390497 [135/240 AFC and 135/240 AFC-II (R/W) only]
G051018
J390784 [for 135/240 AFC-II (R) only]
6. Electrical parts
G057590
! Function
• Reads and writes the magnetic data.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
IMPORTANT
• This magnetic head PCB needs to be replaced at the same time with the magnetic head unit. Refer to ☞ 20760.
It is because manufacture of PCB is stopped and it is incompatible with a substitute PCB [☞ Magnetic head PCB
(J391050/J391051)].

• None
! Unused connector
• None
65270 2/3
65270

• None
6. Electrical parts
65270 3/3
65280
Unused
G068380
! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and connecting PCB 2.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT

• None
! Unused connector
P1005 Unused

• None
65280 1/1
65290
Connecting PCB (J390371)
G051020
! Function
• Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and 120 AFC sensor PCB.
! 1. Position
☞ 62200
• None
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None

mounted.
65290 1/1
65300
G051021
! Function
• Relays the input signals of the film feed route.
! 1. Position
☞ 62200
• None

• None
6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
• None

mounted.
65300 1/1
65310
Connecting PCB (J390372)
G052692
! Function
• Relays the sensor signals of the 110 AFC.
! 1. Position
☞ 62300
• None
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None

TP1 Ground Possible
65310 1/1
65320
Unused
G068381
! Function
• Detects the sensor of the 110 AFC.
! 1. Position
☞ 62300
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None
! Unused connector
P1084 Unused

TP1 Ground Possible
65320 1/1
65330
MMC connecting PCB (J390483)
G052687
! Function
• Detects the MMC sensor.
• Controls (other than output checks) and drives of the AF motor.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 62400
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None

TP4 Ground Possible
65330 1/1
65340
MMC sensor PCB (J390389)
G052689
! Function
• Relays the signal to the AMC or MMC sensor.
• Relays the output signal to the AMC or MMC motor.
! 1. Position
135/240 MMC
☞ 62400
135/240 AMC
☞ 62500
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None

TP1 Ground Possible
65340 1/1
65350
AMC connecting PCB (J390700)
TP3
P1301 P1305 P1299 P1304 P1298 P1297 P1296

P1292
P1303 TP4 TP2 TP1
P1300 P1302 P1293 P1294 P1291 P1295
G060696
! Function
• Relays the signal to the AMC sensor.
• Relays the output signals to the AMC motor.
! 1. Position
☞ 62500
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None
! Unused connector
• None

TP4 Ground Possible
65350 1/1
65360
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390779)
G057589
! Function
• Controls the sensors (emission side) of the film feed route and relays the input signal.
• Controls the panorama shutter solenoid.
! 1. Position
☞ 62600
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT

• None
! Unused connector
• None

• None
65360 1/1
65370
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709)
G057666
! Function
• Amplifies the input signals of the film feed route.
! 1. Position
☞ 62600
IMPORTANT
6. Electrical parts

• None
! Unused connector
• None

TP2 Ground Possible mounted.
65370 1/1
65380
Magnetic preamplifier PCB unit (W411413/W411414)
For W411413 (135/240 AFC-II (R/W) only)
G071640
For W411414 (135/240 AFC-II (R) only)
G071641
! Function
• Amplification of the magnetic head signal
IMPORTANT
• W411413 corresponds to reading of both a camera track and a photo finishing track, and W411414 corresponds only
to reading of a camera track.
! 1. Position
☞ 62100
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None
! Unused connector
W411413
• None
W411414
P1041 Unused Not mounted

• None
65380 1/1
65390
Unused
G071631
! Function
1. Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and DC+12 V.
2. Controls the film pressure magnet.
3. Controls the film viewer.
4. Relays the sensors and switches.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
☞ 62660
• None

• None
! Unused connector
P1320 Unused

• None
65390 1/1
65400
G071632
! Function
1. Detects each attachment.
2. Relays the film pressure magnet.
! 1. Position
☞ 62660
• None
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None

Switch No. Name Purpose
SW1 Attachment Detection Switch 1 Detects each attachment. ☞ 62670
SW2 Attachment Detection Switch 2
65400 1/1
66000
Description of PCB (printer section)
Printer control PCB (J390947)
Unused
6. Electrical parts
G068355
! Function
• Controls the printer I/O PCB.
• Communicates with the laser control PCB.
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable to any connector below only if you do not miss out on IN and OUT.
• This PCB has connectors J219 (OUT), J220 (IN), J221 (OUT), J222 (IN), J223 (OUT) and J224 (IN) which are
connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS
cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

☞ 35600
66000 1/2
66000
☞ 35400
• Carry out paper sensor adjustment.
☞ 36000
• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB.
! Unused connector
P210 Corresponds to the CVP. Option
P213 Unused
P214 Unused

LED2 DC+3.3 V input check ON when power is supplied.

TP2 to TP6 Ground Possible
TP8 to TP15 Unused Impossible
6. Electrical parts
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
66000 2/2
66010
Laser control PCB (J390919)
6. Electrical parts
Unused
G068356
! Function
• Controls the laser unit.
• Receives the image data from the image processing PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
IMPORTANT
• The shapes of the connectors (J/P1501, J/P1502 and J/P1503) of laser control PCB are the same. Be careful not to
connect to the wrong connector.
IMPORTANT
• This PCB has connectors J1517 (IN) and J1516 (OUT) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read
the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
66010 1/2
66010

☞ 35600
• Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
! Unused connector
P1509 Unused
P1510 Unused
P1518 Unused
P1521 Unused
CN1 Unused
CN2 Unused
CN3 Unused

TP402 to 407 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
TP412 DC+5 V-0 voltage measurement Possible

2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
8 OFF Unused
66010 2/2
66020
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390866)
Unused

G068357
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls paper magazine motors B and C, exposure advance motors 1 and 2, exposure advance pressure change motors 1 and 2,
paper advance motor 2, pressure guide motor, paper advance section cooling fan 1, inner cooling fan, control box cooling fan 1,
and counter. Switches ON/OFF by interlock switches (printer doors 1 and 2).
• Relays the power supply to PCBs.
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
• Since the shape of several connectors on the PCB are the same, replace the PCB with much care.

• None

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.

! Unused connector
P232 Counter Option
P236 Unused
66020 1/2
66020

P243 Unused
P244 Unused
P255 CVP unit Option

LED1 DC+24 V-1 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the
interlock switch is OFF.
LED4 DC+36 V input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the
LED6 For checking the interlock OFF when the interlock switch is OFF.

TP1 DC+24 V-1 voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is
measurement OFF.
measurement OFF.
TP4 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is
OFF.
6. Electrical parts
TP6 DC+5 V interlock check Possible 0 V when interlock switch is
OFF.
TP7 Ground Possible
TP8 Ground Possible

protection
protection
protection
protection
66020 2/2
66030

G068358
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls the electrical parts of paper supply unit.
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
• None

• None

! Unused connector
P267 Triple magazine Option

OFF.
66030 1/2
66030

OFF.
OFF.
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
66030 2/2
66040
G068359
! Function
• Relays the control signals and input signals of paper magazine mounts B and C, exposure advance unit, paper advance unit 1,
paper advance unit 2, and processor loading unit.
• Drive function of motors of paper advance unit 2.
• Drive function of control box cooling fans 2, 3, and 4.
• Relays the control signals of paper magazine lamp B/C.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
• Since the shape of several connectors on the PCB are the same, replace the PCB with much care.

• None


! Unused connector
• None

66040 1/2
66040

measurement OFF.
measurement OFF.
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible

protection
protection
6. Electrical parts
66040 2/2
66050
Triple magazine PCB (J390835)
Unused
G068360
! Function
• Controls the electrical parts of the triple magazine unit.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
☞ 63000
• None

• None

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Triple magazine PCB.
! Unused connector
P302 Unused

OFF.
TP4 Ground Possible
66050 1/1
66060
Laser I/O PCB (J390945)
G068361
! Function
• Controls the interlocks of B-AOM driver, G-AOM driver and R-AOM driver.
• Controls the laser unit heater, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2, and paper advance section cooling fan 2.
• Relays the control signals of B laser driver, G laser driver and R laser driver.
• Supplies the power to each PCB.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
• None

• None

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

• Refer to 4252 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.
! Unused connector
• None
IMPORTANT
66060 1/3
66060
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP1 DC+12 V voltage Possible When the normal value (+12 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the multi power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the multi power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP2 Ground Possible Ground when TP1, TP3, TP9, TP11, TP12, and TP13
are measured.
TP3 DC-12 V voltage Possible When the normal value (−12 V) is not detected:
and laser I/O PCB
and laser I/O PCB
TP5 Ground Possible Ground when TP4 and TP10 are measured.
and laser I/O PCB
TP7 Ground Possible Ground when TP6 is measured.
TP8 DC+24 V-1 voltage Possible When the normal value (+24 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
and laser I/O PCB
6. Electrical parts
TP9 R laser temperature Possible When the normal value (+1 V) is not detected:
control standard voltage • Failure in the laser control PCB
check
• Failure in the laser I/O PCB
• Disconnection or short-circuit of thermosensor
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP11 R laser temperature Possible When the normal value (more than 0 V to less than 1 V)
control section status is not detected:
check • 0 V means the thermosensor is broken.
• 1 V or more means the thermosensor is short-
circuit.
You can check the thermosensor status by the resistance
between pins 7 and 8 on the connector (J1532)
connected to the laser I/O PCB.
• ∞ Ω means the thermosensor is broken.
• 0Ω means the thermosensor is short-circuit.
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.
TP12 Peltier drive control Possible When the normal value (0 V to 5 V) is not detected:
voltage check • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Disconnection or short-circuit of cable for Peltier
drive
Replace the laser unit for the Peltier drive failure.
66060 2/3
66060

voltmeter
TP13 R laser light intensity Possible When the normal value (+5.3 V) is not detected:
adjustment voltage check • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser unit
• Disconnection or short-circuit of the cable for R
laser
Replace the laser unit for the cable of R laser
TP14 Ground Possible Ground when TP8 is measured.

protection
protection
protection
6. Electrical parts
66060 3/3
66070
B and G laser drivers (J390973) Laser unit (Type A1)
B and G laser drivers are different depending on the type A1 and B1 of laser unit.
• For the laser unit (type B1), refer to ☞ B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1).
B laser driver G laser driver
Unused
G074521
! Function
• Controls B laser and G laser.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
• None

• None
! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
B laser driver P1656 Unused
G laser driver P1666 Unused

• None
66070 1/2
66070
B and G laser drivers (J390929) Laser unit (Type B1)
B laser driver G laser driver
Unused
G068362
! Function
• Controls B laser and G laser.
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
6. Electrical parts
• None

• None

• Refer to 4202 ☞ B laser driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ G laser driver.
! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
B laser driver P1656 Unused
G laser driver P1666 Unused

• None
66070 2/2
66080
AOM driver (I124020)
B-AOM driver G-AOM driver R-AOM driver
G058738
IMPORTANT
• Since there is a compatibility between the AOM drivers of (I124020), (I124019), and (I124012), it is possible to use them
by mixture.
NOTE
• The white label is attached to the back side of AOM driver (I124020).
• A blue label is attached on the back of the AOM driver (I124019).
• A white label is attached on the back of the discontinued AOM driver (I124012).
! Function
• Converts the image data to the signal that controls the AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
• Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
• None

• Carry out initial setup.

• Refer to 4202 ☞ B-AOM driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ G-AOM driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ R-AOM driver.
! Unused connector
• None

• None
66080 1/2
66080
! Removing the AOM driver

☞ 26550
3. Remove the processor loading unit.
☞ 26610
4. Remove the wiring cover. (Loosen two screws.)
Wiring cover
G072357
5. Remove the AOM driver unit. (Loosen two screws.)

IMPORTANT
6. Electrical parts
• Raise the AOM driver and remove it, then place on the processor top cover.
• Operate with extreme care for wiring to the laser unit, laser control PCB and laser I/O PCB.
Loosen this screw.
R-AOM driver
G-AOM driver
B-AOM driver
AOM driver unit
Processor top cover

Loosen this screw.
G072358
66080 2/2
66090
CVP PCB (J390943)
G066110
! Function
• Controls the correction value printing unit.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
• None

• None

• Refer to 4202 ☞ CVP PCB.

• Refer to 4252 ☞ CVP PCB.
! Unused connector
• None
IMPORTANT

voltmeter
TP2 Ground Possible
66090 1/2
66090

voltmeter

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply 0 V when interlock switch is OFF.
protection
6. Electrical parts
66090 2/2
66100
Power supply (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
Unused
G068367
! Function
No.
PS1 Printer power supply 1 I038361 Supplies the power to DC+24 V
each PCB.
printer I/O PCB 1.
printer I/O PCB 1.
PS4 Multi power supply I038160 Supplies the power to DC+5 V, DC+12 V,
(printer) each PCB. DC-12 V
PS5 Laser power supply I038286 Supplies the power to DC+24 V
laser I/O PCB.
IMPORTANT
66100 1/2
66100
! 1. Position
☞ 63000
Printer power supply 1 Do not touch each volume which has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
Printer power supply 2 shipping.
Multi power supply
Laser power supply

• None

Printer power supply 1 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1).
Multi power supply Refer to 4202 ☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4).
Laser power supply Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply (PS5).
! Unused connector
6. Electrical parts
Power supply Connector No. Purpose Remarks
Printer power supply 1 CN2 Unused
CN52 Unused
Printer power supply 2 None
Printer power supply 3 None
Multi power supply CN4 Unused
Laser power supply None

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Printer power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Printer power supply 2 F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
Printer power supply 3 F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
Multi power supply F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
Laser power supply F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
66100 2/2
66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [N]

• For the SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM].
6. Electrical parts
Unused May not be mounted depending on conditions

G070014
! Function
• Controls the processor section.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
☞ 35400
• Check the connector for jumper.
IMPORTANT
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables are connected to the connectors J517 (IN) and J518 (OUT). Be sure to read
•
66200 1/4
66200

☞ 35600
☞ 35400
• Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.
! Unused connector
P512 Digital flowmeter Option
P520 Unused
IMPORTANT

6. Electrical parts
TP1 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
TP10 Thermosensor input voltage Impossible
measurement
TP11 Thermosensor standard voltage Possible 2.5 V
measurement
measurement

2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
Jumper No. Setting Open Short Remarks

JP2 Open When operated Unused Be sure to set to open.
66200 2/4
66200
Processor control PCB (J390878) [SM]
6. Electrical parts
Unused depending on the conditions May not be mounted depending on conditions
G068364
! Function
• Controls the processor section.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
☞ 35400
• Check the connector for jumper.
IMPORTANT
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables are connected to the connectors J517 (IN) and J518 (OUT). Be sure to read
•

☞ 35600
☞ 35400
66200 3/4
66200
! Unused connector
P512 Digital flowmeter Option
IMPORTANT


TP1 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
TP10 Thermosensor input voltage Impossible
measurement
measurement
measurement

2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
Jumper No. Setting Open Short Remarks

JP2 Open When operated Unused Be sure to set Open.
66200 4/4
66210
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM].
G068365
! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None

• None

• Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

• Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.
! Unused connector
P671 Unused
P672 Unused
P673 Hour meter Option
P675 Unused
P676 Unused
66210 1/5
66210

P684 Unused
P691 For chilling unit Option
P692 For cooling water unit Option
P700 Unused
P701 Signal lamp Option
IMPORTANT

LED1 SSR18 operation check (CD replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED2 SSR19 operation check (BF replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED3 SSR20 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED4 Unused
LED5 Unused
LED6 Relay X13 operation check (effluent float switch) ON during operation
LED7 Relay X12 operation check (program timer) OFF when the program timer operates.
LED8 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED9 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED10 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED11 Unused
LED13 Conveyor motor reverse operation check ON during operation
LED14 Conveyor motor forward operation check ON during operation
6. Electrical parts
LED15 Sorter motor operation check ON during operation
LED16 Refilling water pump and cleaning pump The LED status during operation is shown in the
LED17 operation check table.*1
LED18
*1. Table (You can check whether the pump is working by ON/OFF of LED16, 17 and 18.)
CD−W BF−W STB1−W STB2−W STB3−W STB4−W

Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water
pump pump pump pump pump pump
LED16 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED17 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
LED18 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
Cleaning
pump
LED16 ON
LED17 ON
LED18 ON

TP1 AC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+5 V power supply Possible
measurement
66210 2/5
66210

TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible

F14 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage
protection
protection
F16 T3.15 A/125 V AC+24 V power supply
protection
6. Electrical parts
66210 3/5
66210
Processor I/O PCB (J390798) [SM]

G068392
! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
☞ 63200
• None

• None
! Unused connector
P671 Unused
P672 Unused
P673 Hour meter Option
P675 Unused
P677 Unused
P683 Unused
P685 Unused
P688 Unused
P691 For chilling unit Option
P692 For cooling water unit Option
P700 Unused
P701 Signal lamp Option
66210 4/5
66210
IMPORTANT

LED1 to 4 Unused
LED5 CD circulation amount check ON when CD circulation amount has decreased.
LED6 Relay X13 operation check (effluent float switch) ON during operation
LED7 Relay X12 operation check (program timer) OFF when the program timer operates.
LED8 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED9 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED10 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED11 Unused
LED13 Conveyor motor reverse operation check ON during operation
LED14 Conveyor motor forward operation check ON during operation
LED15 Sorter motor operation check ON during operation
LED16 to 18 Unused

TP3 DC+5 V power supply Possible
measurement
6. Electrical parts
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible

protection
protection
F16 T3.15 A/125 V AC+24 V power supply
protection
66210 5/5
66220
Processor relay PCB (J390917)
6. Electrical parts
Unused
G068366
! Function
• Changes the power supply specifications.
• Supplies the power to each unit.
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, and drive motor
• Protects the power surge.
• Supplies the power of AC 200 V line.
66220 1/3
66220
• Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on processor relay PCB. If
processor relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the main power supply.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• Wire the terminal strip TA3 according to the voltage specification of the main body.
• Check the voltages of P642, P645, P658, and P661.
IMPORTANT
• Replace the connector so that the voltage described on the connector lower part matches the applied one.

• None

• Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor relay PCB.

• Refer to 4253 ☞ Processor relay PCB.
! Unused connector
6. Electrical parts
P647 Unused The starter jumper is connected at forced startup.

LED1 SSR1 operation check (CD heater) ON during operation
LED2 SSR2 operation check (BF heater) ON during operation
LED3 SSR3 operation check (STB heater) ON during operation
LED4 SSR4 and 6 operation check (dryer heater 1) ON during operation
LED5 SSR5 and 7 operation check (dryer heater 2) ON during operation
LED6 SSR8 operation check (dryer heater 3) ON during operation
LED7 Relays X6 and X7 operation check (processing ON during operation
solution float switch)
LED8 Relay X1 operation check (processing solution ON during operation
float switch safety thermostat)
LED9 Relay X10 operation check (printer main relay) ON during operation
LED10 Relay X8 operation check (dryer cover) ON during operation
LED11 Relay X5 operation check (processor top cover) ON during operation
LED12 Relays X2, 3 and 4 operation check (dryer safety ON during operation
thermostat)
LED13 Relay X9 operation check (dryer fan) ON during operation

66220 2/3
66220

TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 Ground Possible

FL1 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
surges
surges
surges
F1 T10 A/250 V Dryer heater
F2 T10 A/250 V Processing solution heater
F4 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F5 T3.15 A/250 V CD heater
F6 T3.15 A/250 V BF heater
F7 T5 A/250 V STB heater
F9 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F12 T3.15 A/250 V Dryer fan
6. Electrical parts
protection
protection
66220 3/3
66600
SM I/O PCB (J390330) [SM]
Unused
G070013
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the SM replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Drives each replenisher pump and water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None

• Adjust the sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor, after replacing the PCB.
☞ 27830
! Unused connector
P606 Unused

LED1 CD−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED2 CD−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED3 CD−C replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED4 STB replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
66600 1/2
66600

LED5 BF−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED6 BF−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED8 DC+24 V−A input check ON when power is supplied.
LED9 DC+24 V−B input check ON when power is supplied.
LED10 SSR12 operation check (CD−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED11 SSR13 operation check (CD−B replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED12 SSR14 operation check (CD−C replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED13 SSR15 operation check (BF−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED14 SSR16 operation check (BF−B replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED15 SSR17 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation

TP2 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TPG1 Ground Possible
TPG2 Ground Possible
VR No. Purpose Remarks
6. Electrical parts
VR1 CD−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR2 CD−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR3 CD−C replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR4 STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR5 BF−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR6 BF−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
66600 2/2
67400
Power supply (processor)
G068368
! Function
No.
PS1 Processor power supply 1 I038320 Supplies the power to DC+5 V
each PCB.
PS2 Processor power supply 2 I038286 Supplies the power to DC+24 V
each PCB and fan.
PS3 Processor power supply 3 Supplies the power to DC+24 V
each PCB, drive motor,
and circulation pump.
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
Processor power supply 1 Do not touch each volume which has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
Processor power supply 2 shipping.

• None

Processor power supply 1 Refer to 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1).
67400 1/2
67400
! Unused connector
• None

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Processor power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
supply protection
supply protection
6. Electrical parts
67400 2/2
68050
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan)
• Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply before starting this operation.
To set the power supply specification, wire between terminal strips TA1 and TA2 of the processor power supply section and connect
jumper connectors (J642, J645, J658 and J661) on the processor relay PCB.
TA1 TA2 G068501
! Change procedure
1. Wiring change
Wiring Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V Three phases, three wires (AC 200 Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V
No. to AC 240 V) V to AC 240 V) to AC 415 V)
A L1 − 1 L1 − 1 L1 − 1
B L2 − 2 L2 − 2 L2 − 3
6. Electrical parts
C L3 − 6 L3 − 4 L3 − 5
D N−6 N−6 N−2
F 1−3 1−5 6−6
H 2−4 2−3 2−4
J 3−5 6−6 6−6
2. Check the connectors of dryer fan (J645) and dryer heater (J658 and J661).
Check that the connectors (J645, J658 and J661) on the processor relay PCB are connected to their input voltage.
3. Check the connection of the connectors for transformer.
Check that the connector (J642) on the processor relay PCB are connected to the power supply for 200 V.
4. Checking the description on the tag
Check the tag attached around the circuit breaker to see if the description on the tag matches with the power supply
specifications.
If the power supply specification is changed, change the description on the tag.
5. Indication change of the power supply specification
In the Machine Specification mode, change the power supply specification. ☞ 35800
68050 1/4
68050
! Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)
Processor relay PCB
6. Electrical parts
Connect the connector for jumper according to each input voltage.
G068448
68050 2/4
68050
! Three phases, three wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)
Processor relay PCB
6. Electrical parts
G068449
68050 3/4
68050
! Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V to AC 415 V)
Processor relay PCB
6. Electrical parts
G068450
68050 4/4
68100
Cables
Cables
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable
! PCBs which connect to the optical fiber cable

PCB name Connector No. on the PCB Manual No. Remarks
ARCNET HUB PCB J133 (OUT), J134 (IN) ☞ 64100
J135 (OUT), J136 (IN)
J137 (OUT), J138 (IN)
J139 (OUT), J140 (IN)
J139 (OUT), J140 (IN)
AFC/scanner control PCB J20(OUT), J21(IN) ☞ 65000
D-ICE control PCB J71(OUT), J72(IN) ☞ 64030
J73(OUT), J74(IN)
J75(OUT), J76(IN)
J53(OUT), J54(IN)
Printer control PCB J219(OUT), J220(IN) ☞ 66000
J221(OUT), J222(IN)
J223(OUT), J224(IN)
Laser control PCB J1516(OUT), J1517(IN) ☞ 66010
Processor control PCB J518(OUT), J517(IN) ☞ 66200
Image processing PCB J442(OUT), J443(IN) ☞ 64000
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB CN3(OUT), CN2(IN) ☞ 88000
PU control PCB P300 (OUT), P299 (IN) ☞ 64140 Option
! Precautions when handling the optical fiber cable
6. Electrical parts
• Do not bend the optical fiber cable by R25 mm or less. The cable may break. Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50
mm. When inserting, removing, or laying the cable, do not use force. Do not secure the cable with mini-bands, clamps or the like.
Optical fiber cable
G051006
• When the optical fiber cable is to be removed from the PCB, pull the cable straight out while pressing part A in the direction
indicated by the arrow. When the cable is to be connected, push it straight as far as it will go.
Part A Optical fiber cable
Connector on the PCB

G051007
IMPORTANT
• If pulling the optical fiber cable out forcibly without pressing part A, the sheath of the cable is broken and a part of
the sheath remains in the connector, resulting in the communication error.
68100 1/3
68100
Cables
• Since the optical fiber cable is provided with IN and OUT ends, be careful to connect them correctly. If part A of the connector on
the PCB is white, the cable end should indicate OUT. If part A is black, the cable end should indicate IN. The OUT cable end is
marked using a white tape. There is no marking on the IN cable end.
OUT
Part A (White) Optical fiber cable

Marking on the cable
The arrow on the connector indicates the direction to the connector.
G051008
IN
Part A (Black) Optical fiber cable
No marking on the cable
The arrow on the connector indicates the direction to the PCB.
G051009
6. Electrical parts
• If the optical fiber cable is damaged, it cannot be reused even after the damaged part has been cut off. A communication error
occurs.
Optical fiber cable
Do not reuse this cable even if the damaged part

has been cut off.
Damaged part
G051010
• Do not place an excessive load on the optical fiber cable or let a hard or heavy object fall on it.
• Do not damage the sheath of the optical fiber cable. A dent or flaw on the sheath is however small, means the optical fiber cable
cannot be used.
• Never touch the end face of the optical fiber cable with bare hands. Communication will not be possible if oil or dust adheres to
the cable end, or if the cable end is scratched.
! PCBs and unit to which the LVDS cable has been connected
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB CN1 ☞ 88000
Laser control PCB P1513 ☞ 66010
Scanner unit P60 -
D-ICE PCB P436 ☞ 64040
Image processing PCB J1350, J445, J455, J456 ☞ 64000
68100 2/3
68100
Cables
! Precautions when handling the LVDS cable

Do not bend the LVDS cable by R20 mm or less. The cable may break. Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm. When
inserting, removing, attaching the ferrite core, or wiring the cable, do not use force.
LVDS cable
G063561
6. Electrical parts
68100 3/3
68200
Cables
Handling the flat cable
! PCBs to which the flat cable has been connected

For the connector is insertion type
Connecting PCB 1 P1002 ☞ 65200 135/240 AFC-II
Driver PCB 2 P1032 ☞ 65240 135/240 AFC-II
Magnetic head PCB P1040 ☞ 65270 135/240 AFC-II
Connecting PCB P1074 ☞ 65290 120 AFC-II
Sensor PCB P1080 ☞ 65300 120 AFC-II
Connecting PCB P1074 ☞ 65310 110 AFC-II
Sensor PCB P1080 ☞ 65320 110 AFC-II
MMC connecting PCB P1172 ☞ 65330 135/240 MMC-II
MMC sensor PCB P1181 ☞ 65340 135/240 MMC-II 135/240 AMC-II
AMC connecting PCB P1303 ☞ 65350 135/240 AMC-II
For the connector is sandwich type (A)

Sensor PCB P1014 ☞ 65250 135/240 AFC-II
135 AFC connecting PCB P1292 ☞ 65360 135/240 AFC-II
6. Electrical parts
135 AFC sensor PCB P1295 ☞ 65370 135/240 AFC-II
! Precautions when handling the flat cable

For the connector is insertion type
1. Connect the flat cable straight.
Pay attention that the connection of the cable may peel off. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable
peeling off, the PCB and cable are damaged.
Contact section
Flat cable
Connector
G052634
2. Be sure to insert the flat cable as far as it will go. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable inserted
insufficiently, the PCB and cable are damaged.
3. Check the insertion direction of the flat cable and then proceed.
68200 1/2
68200
Cables
For the connector is sandwich type (A)

1. When removing the flat cable, open the lock plate of the connector, and then remove the flat cable. If the flat cable is pulled out
while the lock plate is not opened, the lock plate is damaged.
Flat cable (The connection side is downward.)
Release
Lock plate
Fix.
Connector
G054665
2. When connecting the flat cable to the connector, do not allow the cable to be tilted.
Pay attention that the connection of the cable may peel off. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable
peeling off, the PCB and cable are damaged.
3. Be sure to insert the flat cable as far as it will go and lock it with a lock plate. If the main power supply of the machine is turned
on with the cable being locked insufficiently, the PCB and cable are damaged.
4. Insert the flat cable with the connection side downward.
6. Electrical parts
68200 2/2
68500
Power ON/OFF
Power ON/OFF
Operation when the power supply is turned on
! When the circuit breaker was turned off during operation
1. Turn on the circuit breaker.

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on and the temperature adjustment starts.
3. The power supplies of the input section and the printer section are turned on.
4. The personal computer will start in three minutes.
5. After communication check, the input section and the printer section are initialized.
The system program starts.
! When the circuit breaker was turned off while the program timer is activating
1. Turn on the circuit breaker.

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on to activate the program timer.
3. Press the manual sorter switch two seconds.
4. At the same time when the temperature adjustment starts, the processor status lamp blinks.
6. Electrical parts
68500 1/1
68550
Power ON/OFF
When power is not supplied to input and output sections (How to use the
starter jumper)
! Function
• You can supply power forcibly using the starter jumper when 200 V to 240 V is not supplied to the input and output sections
during operation.
! Status
• Power (200 V to 240 V) is not supplied to the input and output sections during operation.
• When the program timer is activated or temperature is being increased if the manual sorter switch is pressed for two seconds or
longer, the power (from 200 V to 240 V ) is not supplied to the input and output sections.
! Position of the starter jumper
Starter jumper
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB
G077192
68550 1/2
68550
Power ON/OFF
! Diagnosis
Are the personal computer, monitor, and each unit in the input and
output sections operating?
Not operating Yes, they are operating.
No problem.
Is LED9 on the processor relay PCB ON?
ON OFF
Mend or
replace. Confirm that the circuit breaker of input section is ON.
Check the connector imperfect contact and cable

connection.
There is a J/P646 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P355 (connecting)
problem. ↔ J/P123 (connecting) ↔ J/P161 (connecting)
Check the Processor relay PCB.
No problem.
Check the connector imperfect contact and cable connection.

J/P656 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P797 (processor power 3)
J/P656 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P798 (processor power 3)
There is a Check the blown fuse.

problem. F14 (125 V/6.3 A) (processor relay PCB)
Check the Processor relay PCB.
6. Electrical parts
No problem.
Turn off the power supply and attach the starter jumper on the connector (P647) of
processor relay PCB. Make the main relay between 200 V and 240 V turn ON forcibly.
Check the version of processor via System Version Check.
Version cannot be checked. Version can be checked.
Upgrade the software.

Turn off the power and remove the starter jumper. Turn on the power
again, and then check that LED9 of the processor relay PCB is ON.
ON
OFF
Processor control PCB failure
68550 2/2
7000
Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................. 70010

Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) .....................................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) ..............................................70020
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Scanner] ..............................................................................................70021
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer] ................................................................................................70022
Procedure for downgrading the profile data ......................................................................................................70025
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..............................................70040
Processor setting check [N] ...............................................................................................................................70050
Processor setting check [SM] ............................................................................................................................70050
7 Setup for service personnel
7000 1/1
70010
Setup for service personnel
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature

adjustment)
! Procedures
1. No.1319:Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. may appear onscreen when
the machine is turned on.
If the attention message shown above appears onscreen, scanner-related data will be initialized after the system is restarted.
For details, refer to ☞ 41318.
2. When registering or updating the light source at the installation, the messages No.6331:Line
scanning communication error. or No.6900:Main control system error. may appear.
When the error above occurs, release the error and upgrade the system using the CD so as not to display this error message.
3. Upgrading the system program

Upgrade the system program.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of scanner section/desk section/printer
section/processor section may not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
• For details about Software Upgrade, refer to To upgrade the QSS software ☞ 88000 in Installation procedure of the
QSS software .
NOTE
• If the system program is updated in installation, you do not have to backup the data of the machine as explained in To
upgrade the QSS software.
4. Preparation of the tools for the setup

Prepare the following tools before setup for installation.
• Service personnel floppy disk Type B

• Scanner adjustment chart
• For 135 AFC
• For 240 AFC
• For 120 AFC
• For 110 AFC
• For MMC
• For AMC
• Floppy disk for data backup
NOTE
• The service personnel floppy disk Type B and the adjustment chart are the service personnel tools. Refer to Service
personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
5. Setting the magazine code of paper magazine

Set the paper magazine code to the paper width and paper surface to be used.
6. Loading paper into the paper magazine

Load the paper to be used for the initial setup into the paper magazine.
70010 1/5
70010
7. Cleaning of the optical parts

Clean the optical parts below.
" Auto film carrier
Clean each brush, peripheral cooling fan, each sensor, each roller, and film path surface.
" Cleaning the laser unit
Cleaning the laser dustproof glass and pressure guide
" Light source unit (input section)
Clean the dust prevention glass.
• For details about how to clean, refer to Maintenance Manual.
8. Entering the service personnel password

Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter the service personnel password on the Menu
display.
(1) Press F to select Menu.

(2) Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
(3) Press the F key and -1 key.
(4) Enter the password (2260).
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.
9. Reading the initial data

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).
• For details about how to read the initial data, refer to ☞ 35400.
NOTE
• Read All Data in the service personnel level.
• There are four initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details

INITIAL DATA1 The data related to the input section
INITIAL DATA2 The data related to the printer and exposure devices
INITIAL DATA3 The data related to the processor
INITIAL DATA4 The data related to the scanner and film carriers

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → Service Data → Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) → All Data
10. Install the Capacity Booster Software.

• For details about how to install the Capacity Booster Software, refer to ☞ 88000.
NOTE
• If the capacity booster is not set as an option, this is not required.
11. Registering and checking the machine specification

Register all the items.
Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
• For details about how to register and check, refer to ☞ 35800.
70010 2/5
70010
IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment ☞ 33600
12. Installing the optional software

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification
Install the optional software such as QSS template frame, QSS template calendar and QSS template album.
For details of the Installation procedure of optional software, refer to Installing the application software in the Image
Editing Operator's Manual.
NOTE
• When no optional software is used, this is not required.
13. Check the registration of the options.

Check if the equipped options are registered.
Extension → Option Registration
NOTE
14. Check the processor setting.

☞ 70050
15. Adjust the sensor of the film carrier.

Carry out the adjustment of the film carrier sensor.
The adjustment items vary depending on which film carrier is attached.
135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC
DX Sensor Standard ☞ 35010 ☞ 35020 DX Sensor Standard
☞ 35000 ☞ 35060
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
16. Check the light axis and swing and tilt of the scanner unit.
Check that Light Axis Adjustment and Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right positions.
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC, use the 120 AFC and 110 AFC for checking.
(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
When the difference of the displayed values is the following values or less, it is in position.
When using S-2/S-3, if the difference of the displayed values is more than the values in the table, Light Axis
Adjustment is required.
70010 3/5
70010
For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table,Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.
Priority*1 Film carrier to be set Difference of G values when adjusting the
light axis
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 ±37 pixels
2 120 AFC ±28 pixels
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.
(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check.
When the displayed values are the following values or less, it is in position.
The Swing and Tilt of S-2/S-3 must be adjusted if the difference between the values displayed exceeds that shown in
the table.
For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table,Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.
IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) is less than the following value for that, checking the
Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC is not required.
Priority*1 Film carrier to be set Value when checking the swing and tilt
adjustment
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 27/54 step
2 120 AFC 27/54 step
3 110 AFC 24/54 step
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the priority
above.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 37000.

17. Light Source Registration
Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration
18. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers to be used.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each film carrier and mount carrier using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers that the user uses.
• For the film carrier and mount carrier, carry out the focus adjustment for the magnification rate.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment
70010 4/5
70010
19. Scanner light source update

NOTE
• After carrying out the focus adjustment of the scanner unit, be sure to carry out light source update.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update
20. Paper Sensor Adjustment

Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Paper Sensor Adjustment to adjust each
sensor.
☞ 36000
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
The work to do until the processing solution temperature is adjusted is now completed. After the temperature adjustment of the
processing solution has been completed, proceed to the next item ☞ 70020 Works after completing the temperature adjustment.
70010 5/5
70020
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature

adjustment)
! Procedures
1. Process control strip.

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Extension → Maintenance → Process Control Strip
• For details about how to process, refer to Control strip processing in the Maintenance Manual.
2. Checking the exposure advance adjustment

Go to Exposure Advance Adjustment → Functions → Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/B/C) and confirm
following two points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A, B or C, it is complete.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment
Paper Front End to 0 mm-line Test Paper

Measurement Value
A
For checking 0 mm-line to 254

mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value

Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
Left Right
For checking zigzagging of the

Rear end
G070022
(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
(2) Check the 0 mm-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.
70020 1/7
70020
(3) Check the zigzag of exposure advance unit.

Check the image length of both sides. If the difference between left and right is 0.2 mm or more, carry out zigzaging
adjustment for the exposure advance unit.
3. Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Go to Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Functions → Test Print 1 (Paper Magazines A/B/C) and make test prints
and correct zigzagging so that the zigzagging amount (A-C) is within ±0.3 mm for both two test prints.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B and C.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction
Line A
A

B
C
Line C
G068462
4. Checking the Exposure Center Correction, Exposure Position Adjustment, Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment and Exposure Magnification Correction
Go to Exposure Position Adjustment → F: Functions → Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/B/C) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm following four points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
NOTE
• The following example is 305 mm test printing.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment
70020 2/7
70020
Center line
For checking the exposure center

correction (for each paper magazine)
For checking main scanning image

(BLOCK−B)
For checking sub scanning

images (BLOCK−D1)
(BLOCK−D2)
For checking the exposure

magnification correction
Exposure magnification fine adjustment checking
chart

G070021
(1) Check the Exposure Magnification Correction.

Check that the image size is specified one against the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the distance of 160 lines.
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, B or C, it is
complete.
(2) Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.
Check that each line makes a straight line in the rows (0a-0h) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-B and the
lines (0) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-D1 and BLOCK-D2 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried out by magazine A, B or C, it is complete.
(3) Checking the Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment
Check with the exposure magnification fine adjustment checking chart on the 160 line to see if lines of cyan, magenta
and yellow are in a straight line.
IMPORTANT
• When the Exposure Magnification Correction is carried out by magazine A, B or C, it is complete.
70020 3/7
70020
(4) Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

Check that the length A between left end and center of the test print is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A, B and C.
5. Paper specification registration

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
Check that the setup switch is set to ON.
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 32510.
6. Initial Setup
Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display.
Extension → Setup → Initial Setup
7. Paper Magazine Registration Setup

Use the paper type which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width.
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Registering the paper magazine
and surface to be used.
8. Print Channel Setting [Prints from the film]

NOTE
Set the print channel to print from each film.
Extension → Setup → Print Channel
9. Print Channel Setting [Each media, Flatbed Scanner]

NOTE
(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
70020 4/7
70020
10. Checking the print color and density [Master Data]

NOTE
(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 135F negative•positive which is frequently
used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in the following mode.
Film type Input mode
135 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→Master Data→Scanner Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).
135 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→Master Data→Scanner Slope, then correct N
• For details, refer to Correcting the Master Data (Correcting to all the films) in the Operator's Manual -
Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)
11. Checking the print color and density [Reference Slope, Scanner Slope]
NOTE
(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 240 negative•positive, 120 negative•positive,
and 110 negative•positive, which are frequently used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in the following mode.
Film type Input mode
240 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→240→Reference Slope, then correct N

240 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→240→Scanner Slope, then correct N (normal),
U (under), and O (over).
110 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→110→Scanner Slope, then correct N
110 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→110→Scanner Slope, then correct N (normal),
120 negative (6×4.5, 6×6, 6×7, Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→Each negative size→Scanner Slope, then
6×8, 6×9) correct N (normal), U (under), and O (over).
120 positive (6×4.5, 6×6, 6×7, Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→Each negative size→Scanner Slope, then
6×8, 6×9) correct N (normal), U (under), and O (over).
• For details, refer to Carry out the reference slope correction (each film) in the Operator's Manual -
Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
12. Checking the print color and density [DX Slope]

NOTE
70020 5/7
70020
(1) If color and density corrections are necessary for each negative size (135F, 135H, 135P, 135HD, 240) by each
manufacture•film sensitivity, correct them in the following mode.
Negative Input mode
135F negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→135F→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
135H negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→135H→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
135P negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→135P→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
135HD negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→135HD→DX Slope, then correct N (normal),
240 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→240→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
• For the operation procedures, refer to Carrying out the DX Slope Correction (each negative) in the Operator's
Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
13. Letter blur check

NOTE
Go to Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Black Balance Adjustment to make a test print. If the
colors around the letters on the print is blurred too much, adjust it if necessary.
14. Banding check

Go to Paper Pressure Operation Correction → Functions→Test Print Confirmation (magazines A/B/C) to make test
prints. Check banding for each paper type.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
15. Monitor setup

In the case of specifications other than DLS
Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.
Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
For DLS specification
Adjust the monitor.
• For details about Monitor adjustment, refer to ☞ 88000.
70020 6/7
70020
16. DSA setting [Negative•Positive (135, 240, 120, and 110)]

NOTE
(1) For the film of 135, 240, 120 and 110, if the DSA correction is needed, set each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For details, refer to Correcting the Automatic Contrast, the Automatic Sharpness and the Chroma in the
Operator's Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA
17. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]
NOTE
(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner or Net Order, set each DSA
via Master Data.
NOTE
18. Formatting a floppy disk for backup data

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.

This floppy disk is used to save the internal data of the machine after the setup has been completed during installation.
IMPORTANT
• A floppy disk is necessary for the backup data of user level.
• Four floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.
Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → All Data → Format Floppy Disk
19. Saving the backup data

Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 18.
This completes the works.
70020 7/7
70021
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Scanner]
! Procedures
1. In the case of the stand-alone scanner, No.6901:ARCNET communication error. occurs when the
power supply is turned ON.
2. When registering or updating the light source at the installation, the messages No.6331:Line
scanning communication error. or No.6900:Main control system error. may appear.
If one of the errors (1, 2) described above occurs, cancel the error and use the CD to upgrade the system.
Procedure: Press and hold Ctrl+Alt+Delete. Select the following in the order shown here: Windows Task Manager,
Applications, Order Display, QSS-SEQ, End Task to quit the QSS software.
3. Upgrading system using the CD

Insert the QSS software CD into the CD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of desk section/printer section/processor section may
not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
QSS software .
NOTE


NOTE
• There are two initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details
INITIAL DATA4 The data related to the scanner and film carriers

5. Install the Capacity Booster A Software.

• For details about how to install the Capacity Booster A Software, refer to ☞ 88000.
NOTE

70021 1/4
70021

• Scanner adjustment chart
• For 135 AFC
• For 240 AFC
• For 120 AFC
• For 110 AFC
• For MMC
• For AMC
NOTE
☞ 80310

" Auto film carrier
Clean each brush, peripheral cooling fan, each sensor, each roller, and film path surface.
" Light source unit (input section)
Clean the dust prevention glass.

display.


• Install the optional software such as CD-R Engine.
NOTE

12. Adjust the sensor of the film carrier.

Carry out the adjustment of the film carrier sensor.
70021 2/4
70021
The adjustment items vary depending on which film carrier is attached.
135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC

DX Sensor Standard ☞ 35010 ☞ 35020 DX Sensor Standard
☞ 35000 ☞ 35060
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
13. Check the light axis and swing and tilt of the scanner unit.
Check that Light Axis Adjustment and Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right positions.
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC, use the 120 AFC and 110 AFC for checking.
(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
When the difference of the displayed values is the following values or less, it is in position. If the difference of the
displayed values is more than the values in the table, Light Axis Adjustment is required.
Priority*1 Film carrier to be set Difference of G values when adjusting the
light axis
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 ±37 pixels
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.
(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check.

When the displayed values are the following values or less, it is in position. If the displayed values are more than the
values in the table, Swing and Tilt Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) is less than the following value for that, checking the
Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC is not required.
Priority*1 Film carrier to be set Value when checking the swing and tilt
adjustment
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 27/54 step
2 120 AFC 27/54 step
3 110 AFC 24/54 step
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the priority
above.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
14. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
70021 3/4
70021

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration
15. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers to be used.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each film carrier and mount carrier using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers that the user uses.
• For the film carrier and mount carrier, carry out the focus adjustment for the magnification rate.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment
16. Print Channel Setting Scanning size from film

Set the scanning size to scan from each film.

IMPORTANT
• Two floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.

70021 4/4
70022
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer]
! Procedures
1. In the case of the stand-alone scanner, No.6640:System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) and
No.6901:ARCNET communication error. occur when the power supply is turned ON.
When the error mentioned above occurs, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete and select the Oder display and QSS-SEQ in the
Applications from Windows Task Manager, then click End Task to quit the QSS software.
2. If you need to downgrade the version of the profile data due to the difference betweeen the version of
factory-installed profile data in the machine and that of the system program, refer to ☞ 70025.
IMPORTANT
• If the version of factory-installed profile data for the machine and system program version are the same, there
is no need to downgrade the version of profile data.

IMPORTANT
QSS software .
NOTE

NOTE
• There are three initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details
INITIAL DATA2 The data related to the printer and exposure devices
INITIAL DATA3 The data related to the processor

5. Install the Capacity Booster Software.

• For details about how to install the Capacity Booster Software, refer to ☞ 88000.
NOTE

70022 1/8
70022

IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment ☞ 33600

NOTE
☞ 80310
8. Setting the magazine code of paper magazine

Set the paper magazine code to the paper width and paper surface to be used.
9. Loading paper into the paper magazine

Load the paper to be used for the initial setup into the paper magazine.

" Cleaning the laser unit

Cleaning the laser dustproof glass and pressure guide

display.


• Install the optional software such as QSS template frame, QSS template calendar and QSS template album.
• For details of the Installation procedure of optional software, refer to Installing the application software in the
Image Editing Operator's Manual.
NOTE
70022 2/8
70022

14. Check the processor setting.

☞ 70050
15. Paper Sensor Adjustment
Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Paper Sensor Adjustment to adjust each
sensor.
☞ 36000
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
16. Process control strip.

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Extension → Maintenance → Process Control Strip
• For details about how to process, refer to Control strip processing in the Maintenance Manual.
17. Checking the exposure advance adjustment

Go to Exposure Advance Adjustment→Functions→Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/B/C) and confirm
following two points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A, B or C, it is complete.

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment
70022 3/8
70022
Paper Front End to 0 mm-line Test Paper

Measurement Value
A
For checking 0 mm-line to 254
mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
Left Right
For checking zigzagging of the

Rear end
G070022
(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
(2) Check the 0 mm-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.

(3) Check the zigzag of exposure advance unit.
Check the image length of both sides. If the difference between left and right is 0.2 mm or more, carry out zigzaging
adjustment for the exposure advance unit.
18. Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Go to Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Functions → Test Print 1 (Paper Magazines A/B/C) and make test prints
and correct zigzagging so that the zigzagging amount (A-C) is within ±0.3 mm for both two test prints.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B and C.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction
70022 4/8
70022
Line A
A
B
C
Line C
G068462
19. Checking the Exposure Center Correction, Exposure Position Adjustment, Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment and Exposure Magnification Correction
Go to Exposure Position Adjustment → F: Functions → Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/B/C) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm following four points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.

NOTE
• The following example is 305 mm test printing.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment
70022 5/8
70022
Center line
For checking the exposure center

correction (for each paper magazine)
For checking main scanning image

(BLOCK−B)
For checking sub scanning

images (BLOCK−D1)
(BLOCK−D2)
For checking the exposure

magnification correction
Exposure magnification fine adjustment checking
chart

G070021
(1) Check the Exposure Magnification Correction.

Check that the image size is specified one against the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the distance of 160 lines.
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, B or C, it is
complete.
(2) Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.
Check that each line makes a straight line in the rows (0a-0h) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-B and the
lines (0) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-D1 and BLOCK-D2 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried out by magazine A, B or C, it is complete.
(3) Checking the Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment
Check with the exposure magnification fine adjustment checking chart on the 160 line to see if lines of cyan, magenta
and yellow are in a straight line.
IMPORTANT
• When the Exposure Magnification Correction is carried out by magazine A, B or C, it is complete.
70022 6/8
70022
(4) Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

Check that the length A between left end and center of the test print is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A, B and C.
20. Paper specification registration

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
Check that the setup switch is set to ON.
21. Initial Setup

Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display.
Extension → Setup → Initial Setup
22. Paper Magazine Registration Setup

Use the paper type which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width.
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Registering the paper magazine
and surface to be used.
23. Print Channel Setting [Each media, Flatbed Scanner]

(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
24. Letter blur check

Go to Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Black Balance Adjustment to make a test print. If the
colors around the letters on the print is blurred too much, adjust it if necessary.
25. Banding check

Go to Paper Pressure Operation Correction → Functions→Test Print Confirmation (magazines A/B/C) to make test
prints. Check banding for each paper type.
70022 7/8
70022

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
26. Monitor setup

Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.
Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
27. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]
(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner, or Net Order, set each DSA
via Master Data.
NOTE

IMPORTANT
• Four floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.


70022 8/8
70025
Procedure for downgrading the profile data
! Procedures
IMPORTANT
• You need to downgrade the version of the profile data when the version of the factory-installed profile data in the
machine and the system program version are different.
• In order to downgrade the version of the profile data, delete the Pf folder. In steps following this, upgrade the system
version and install the profile data using the CD. This recreates the profile data.
1. Delete the profile data.
(1) Bring up the Start menu and select Accessories via Programs.
(2) Select Windows Explorer.
(3) Open My Computer and delete Pf folder located in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS−32_33\Data in the Local Disc:C.

IMPORTANT
QSS software .
NOTE
3. Install profile data of which the version matches the system program version.

Insert the profile data CD into the CD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If you do not install profile data, normal color print may not be available.
• For details about how to install, refer to Procedure for installing the profile data ☞ 88000.
70025 1/1
70040
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and

Japanese)
The English messages are displayed on the monitor on the machines which are to be shipped outside Japan.
It is necessary to set the Regional Options and install the translated message data so that the messages in the local language are displayed
and text in that language can be input.
Change the setting according to the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Prepare the following data in advance.
• Translated message file (Save the data to a floppy disk.)
• Translated HELP files (Save the data to a CD-R or a CD-R/W.)
! To bring up the Windows display
Bring up the Windows display when setting each item such as the dictionary function relating to the Windows system.
Switch the display according to the following procedure.
1. Bring up the Close Down Checks display.
Click F via Order Display. → Menu → Extension → Close Down Checks
Close Down Checks display
S0009-00-UM02
2. Click F: Functions.
The F: Functions display appears.

F: Functions display
S0009-00-UM62
3. Click Quit The Application.

The confirmation window to end the application appears.
4. Click YES: Execute.
The confirmation window appears again.
5. Click YES: Execute.
The Windows display appears.
! To install the message file
Build the translated local language's message file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following
procedure.
1. Insert the floppy disk in which the message data is saved into the floppy disk drive.
2. Double-click Setup.exe in the floppy disk.
Installation starts.
70040 1/9
70040
3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050657
4. Click Finish.

G050660
Installation of the message file is complete.
Next, install the HELP file.
! To install the HELP file

Build the translated local language's Help file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following procedure.
1. Insert the CD-ROM in which the HELP file is saved into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the Setup.exe file in the CD-R or the CD-R/W.
Installation starts.
70040 2/9
70040
3. Click Next.
G056142
4. Click Finish.

G056143
Installation of the HELP file is complete.
Next, make setting for the language.
! Setting the language
1. Select Start → Settings → Control Panel.

Example: Windows display
G050628
70040 3/9
70040
2. Double-click Regional Options.

Select the items in the following order.
Example: Control Panel display
G050683
The Regional Options display appears.
3. Click the General tab (index) and set the region (country) and language.
(1) Select the appropriate language and check the box in the Language settings for the system list.
Example: Regional Options display
G050662
70040 4/9
70040
(2) Click and click the appropriate locale (location).

G050612
4. Click the Input Locales tab (index) and set the dictionary function.
(1) Click Add.
G050663
(2) Select the Input locale.
Example: Add Input Locale display
G050666
70040 5/9
70040
(3) Select the Keyboard layout.

Example: Add Input Locale display
G050666
(4) Click OK.

The display returns to the Regional Options display.
(5) Select the language as default use.
G050663
(6) Click Set as Default.

The language is registered as the default.
G050663
5. Click Apply.
G050663
70040 6/9
70040
6. Click OK.
G050663
7. Insert the Windows 2000 Professional CD-R or CD-R/W into the CD-ROM drive and click OK.
G050664
The file copy starts. After the copy, you are prompted to restart the system.
8. Click No.
G050667
9. Restart the machine.

(1) Click Start and click Shut Down.
Example: Windows display
G050604
70040 7/9
70040
(2) Click , and click Shut down.

Example: Shut down Windows display
G050605
(3) Click OK.

Windows is quit and monitor display disappears.
(4) Confirm that the power lamp goes off.
Power lamp
G069106
(5) Turn off the circuit breaker.

Circuit breaker
G069048
(6) Turn on the circuit breaker in 10 seconds after it was turned off.
Circuit breaker
G069049
The power turns ON and after a while, the power supply of the display monitor turns ON automatically and then the
message Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality. appears.
This completes the operation.
70040 8/9
70040
10. Select the appropriate language on the Machine Specification display.

Select the appropriate language and set it.
(1) Bring up the Machine Specification display.

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
(2) Click and select Language.
Example: Machine Specification display
S3066-00-SM00
(3) Click and select HELP Language.

Example: Machine Specification display

S3066-00-SM00
(4) Click YES: Enter.
70040 9/9
70050
Processor setting check [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Processor setting check [SM].
! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed
1. Check the measured value of the pump output amount.

Measure the pump output amount and check if the measured value is the same as the registered value.
If the measured value is different from the setting value, register the measured value.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount.
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting
70050 1/3
70050
Processor setting check [SM]
! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed
1. Initial replenishment operation of the pump

Prepare the containers to receive the solutions from CD-A, CD-B, CD-C and STB replenisher pumps, and carry out the initial
replenishment operation.
To measure the accurate pump output amounts, this operation is carried out only for these pumps.
NOTE
• When the initial replenishment is executed, all the replenisher pumps and water supply pumps operate simultaneously.
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting → F: Functions → Initial Replenishment Operation
70050 2/3
70050
70050 3/3
8000
8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts .................................................................................................. 80110

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Desk Section) .......................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Scanner Section) ..................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer Section) ....................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] ........................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM] .....................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N] ..........................................................................................80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM] .......................................................................................80110
Positions of paper jam release labels .................................................................................. 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels .................................................................................................................80210
Service personnel tool list .................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] ...........................................................................................................................80310
Service personnel tool list [SM] ........................................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................. 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ...........................................................................................................81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) ...........................................................................81020
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors ................................................................ 81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] ....................................................................................81510
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ................................................... 88000
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume) ................................................................................88000
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................... 89000
Table of wiring diagrams ...................................................................................................................................89000
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................... 89010
Wiring diagram table [S-4] ................................................................................................................................89010
8 Appendix
8000 1/1
80110
Periodically replaced parts
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Desk

Section)
The list below shows the checks and replacement of parts that need to be performed regularly by user and service personnel to keep the
normal machine operation.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, check them regularly and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need replacing according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement timing
varies depending on the operating condition of the machine.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you do not always have to replace the parts on the specified timing.
• As to the periodically replaced parts, replace the parts when the processing time or the number of prints processed
reaches the specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values described below do not indicate any warranty periods.
NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the machines which are to be shipped outside Japan.
! List for maintenance

For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.
! PC control unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q' Reason for
g ard ty maintenance/replace
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the floppy disk U Clean it using a commercially - Whene - - Data may not be read
drive available floppy disk for cleaning. ver properly from the media
necess drive.
ary
Cleaning the MO drive U Clean it using the optional MO head - 3-
cleaner. month
U: user, S: service personnel
! Desk unit
8. Appendix
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the air filter U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A128749 1- - 2 If the air does not flow
cleaner. week smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.
80110 1/30
80110
! CRT monitor unit B

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the display U Wipe the tube face gently using a - Whene - - The dirt on the display
monitor soft cloth. If the dirt cannot be ver monitor makes difficult
removed, wipe it using the firmly necess to judge correctly at
squeezed damp soft cloth with a ary correcting scanned
neutral detergent and water. image color and density,
and that may adversely
affect the print finish.
! Flatbed scanner
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the flatbed U Wipe the glass surface using a soft - Whene - - The dirt on the glass
scanner cloth. ver surface may adversely
necess affect the scanning
ary image.
! Colorimeter unit
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the calibration U At Start Up Checks Z021441 At 2-year 1 Since the dirty
plate*1 If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe startin calibration plate makes
it using a firmly squeezed damp soft g up the registration with the
cloth. After that, wipe it using a dry 1- incorrect standard value
8. Appendix
cloth. month at the setup, it may
At monthly check adversely affects the
Wipe the measurement area using a print finish.
firmly squeezed damp soft cloth
with a neutral detergent diluted with
water. Then, wipe and dry it up
using a dry soft cloth.
Cleaning the advance U Clean with a colorimeter cleaning - 6- - - The measurement of the
roller sheet. month setup prints may fail.
*1. Periodically replaced parts: It is necessary to replace even if two years has not been passed, when the parts has been deteriorated in quality
(including calibration data FD).
80110 2/30
80110
! Film receiving box

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the film U At Start Up Checks - At - 1 It damages the film. Be
receiving box Clean using the vacuum cleaner. startin sure to remove dust.
If the dirt even remains, wipe it g up
using the firmly squeezed damp soft
cloth.
! Table peripheral section

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the operation U Clean it using the blower brush, a - Whene - - Dust coming into the
keyboard or the computer vacuum cleaner, the firmly- ver product may cause a
keyboard squeezed damp cloth, etc. necess machine failure.
ary
! List of periodically replaced parts

For the procedure of replacing the maintenance parts by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.
! Colorimeter unit
Part name U/S Part No. Q'ty Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Calibration plate unit B*1 U Z021441 1 2-year Since the dirty or deteriorated
calibration plate makes the registration
with the incorrect standard value at the
setup, it may adversely affects the print
8. Appendix
finish.
*1. It is necessary to replace even if two years has not been passed, when the parts has been deteriorated in quality (including calibration data FD).
! PC control unit
replacement
Battery pack*1 S I085024 1 3-year If the battery pack deteriorates, the PC
2 may not shut down properly when
power goes out temporary, and the
HDD may be damaged.
Lithium battery S I085026 1 If the lithium battery deteriorates, the
(For use with setting data stored on the mother board
PC-NRT-RS2, may be lost or the clock may slow.
RD2)
I085027
PC-NRT-RS6
80110 3/30
80110

replacement
USB A TO A (FEMALE) U I068443 1 Every 1500 orders If the cable unit connecting USB
CABLE ASSY*2 memory deteriorates, data may not be
read properly from the media drive.
*1. Within three years from the date shown on the battery replacement label (for required two battery packs for high-spec PC)
*2. Only for specific models are set as option.
8. Appendix
80110 4/30
80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

(Scanner Section)
IMPORTANT
NOTE

! LED light source unit

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the dust U Clean it using the blower brush. - At - - If dust is not removed
prevention glass in the If the dust cannot be removed, wipe closin from the dust prevention
LED light source unit it using a cleaning cloth. g glass, it may adversely
down affect the print quality.
! Scanner unit
8. Appendix
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the scanner dust U Clean it using the blower brush. - At - - If dust is not removed
prevention glass If the dust cannot be removed, wipe closin from the dust prevention
it using a cleaning cloth. g glass, it may adversely
down affect the print quality.
! Main body frame unit

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the brush for the U Use a vacuum cleaner and so on. - At - - It damages the film. Be
film cleaner closin sure to remove dust.
g
down
80110 5/30
80110
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the film carrier U Wipe it using a cloth. - 1- - - To prevent dust
mount rail and the week accumulates on the lens
peripheral area unit of the film carrier
and the dust prevention
glass in the LED light
source unit.
Cleaning the air filter U Remove the air filter at the bottom - - - If the air does not flow
of the scanner section, and vacuum smoothly due to the dust
the dust using a vacuum cleaner. accumulated on the air
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn filter, the temperature in
the side with dust down and wash it the control box may
with running water. increase and it may
cause malfunction of the
PCBs.
Cleaning the discharge U Clean the discharge terminal - - - If dust accumulates at
terminal section of the section with a cotton swab. Remove the discharge terminal
film cleaner the dust by rubbing both brushes. section, it makes
impossible to remove
static electricity and the
dust cannot be removed
in result.
! 135/240 AFC-II, 135 AFC-II, 120 AFC-II, 110 AFC-II

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the film path U Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - At - - If dust is not removed
surface damp cloth. closin from the film path, it
Dry it up after wiping each part. g may adversely affect the
down print quality as dust
1- appears on the print or
8. Appendix
week the image data. It also
damages the film. Be
sure to remove dust.
Cleaning each sensor U Clean it using the blower brush. - At - - The error related to the
closin sensors of the film
g carrier such as Film has
down stopped at the Film
Carrier. may occur.
Cleaning the film advance U Clean it using the cleaning leader. - At - - Remove the dust on the
roller closin film path, otherwise the
g film advance rollers
down may slip and a black
Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - 1- margin may appear on
damp soft cloth while rotating the week the printed image. Also,
roller. the message Film has
Dry it up after wiping each part. stopped at the Film
Carrier. may occur.
80110 6/30
80110
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the magnetic U Clean it using the cleaning leader. - At - - Attention message No.
head *1 closin 1404: The IX frame
g data is incomplete.
down may occur.
Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - 1-
damp cloth. week
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe
it using a cotton swab dipped in
isopropyl alcohol.
Cleaning the dummy head U Clean it using the cleaning leader. - At
*1 Wipe it using the firmly squeezed closin
damp cloth. g
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe down
it using a cotton swab dipped in
isopropyl alcohol.
Cleaning the brush (upper U Clean it using the blower brush. - - - It damages the film. Be
and lower ones) sure to remove dust.
Cleaning the slot at the U Clean by the blower brush. If dust - - - If dust is not removed
scanner opening cannot be removed, wipe it with the from the light path, it
maintenance stick. may adversely affect the
Cleaning the film inlet U Clean it using the blower brush. - print quality.
Cleaning the rewinding U Wipe it using the firmly squeezed - - - Be sure to remove dust
unit damp cloth. since it may damage the
If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe film or may cause
it using a cotton swab dipped in defective winding.
isopropyl alcohol.
Dry it up after wiping each part.
Cleaning the lens unit U Clean the both sides using the - - - Remove the dust from
blower brush or air spray. the light path,
If the dust cannot be removed, wipe otherwise, it may
it using a cleaning cloth. adversely affect the
print quality as dust
appears on the print or
the image data. Also, it
8. Appendix
may cause unevenness
of the scanner light
source at updating the
light source.
Cleaning the bottom side U Wipe it using a cloth. - 1- - - It is to prevent dust
of AFC week accumulates on the dust
prevention glass in the
LED light source unit.
Maintenance stick U Wash the rubber section under - Whene - - Dust adheres on the
running water or with neutral ver light path, and it may
detergent, and firmly squeeze and necess adversely affect the
dry it completely. ary print quality.
*1. Not equipped with 135 AFC-II 120 AFC-II 110 AFC-II.
80110 7/30
80110
! 135/240 AMC-II 135/240 MMC-II

replac ment
ement
timing
Loading stocker*1 U Clean the inside of it using the - At - - It is to prevent dust
Ejection stocker*1 U firmly-squeezed damp cloth or the - closin accumulates on the each
blower brush. g section of the mount and
Mount ejection roller*1 U Clean it using the firmly squeezed - down the film carrier.
damp cloth.
Mount carrier*1 U Clean it using the blower brush. -
Ejection stocker mount*1 U -
Cleaning the reflection U Clean it using a moistened cotton - The message No. 6423
mirror swab with water or a blower brush. Auto focus error. may
Wipe it using a dry cotton swab not occur.
to make unevenness.
Cleaning each sensor U Clean it using the blower brush. - If each sensor may get
dirt, Mount detection
error or Mount
operation error may
occur.
Lens unit U Clean the both sides using the - Remove the dust from
light source.
*1. Not equipped on 135/240 MMC-II.

8. Appendix
80110 8/30
80110
! MFC
replac ment
ement
timing
Film viewer U Clean it using the blower brush. If - At - - It is to prevent dust from
Surface of the move table U the dirt cannot be removed, wipe it - closin adhering each part.
using the firmly-squeezed damp g
cloth. down
*1
Lens unit U Clean the both sides using the - Remove the dust from
light source.
Cleaning the attachment U Clean the both sides using the - Remove the dust,
(film setting side, film blower brush or air spray. otherwise it may
pressure side) adversely affect the
print quality as it
the image data.
*1. Wipe the part or item once a week using the firmly-squeezed damp cloth.

None
! List of consumable parts

None
8. Appendix
80110 9/30
80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer

Section)
IMPORTANT
NOTE

! Paper magazine section

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the inside of U Remove the paper dust using a - Whene - - It may damage the
paper magazine vacuum cleaner when loading the ver paper, or may fail the
Cleaning the surrounding U paper. - necess paper loading.
part of the roller ary
Cleaning the paper U Wiping it using the firmly squeezed -
advance roller in the paper damp cloth
magazine
8. Appendix
80110 10/30
80110
! Paper magazine mount A, B, C

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning paper magazine U Remove the paper magazine and - 3- - - The messages No. 1004,
code sensors A, B and C clean the sensors using a blower month No. 1005, No. 1067:
brush. Attach the Paper
Magazine. Paper
Magazine A, B, C No.
1010, No. 1011, No.
1068: Change the
Paper Magazine.
Paper Magazine A, B,
C may appear.
Cleaning paper end U A: Pull out the magazine mount and - The message No. 6017:
sensors A, B and C clean the sensors using a blower Paper has jammed in
brush. the printer section.
B, C: Clean the sensors using a may appear.
blower brush.
8. Appendix
80110 11/30
80110
! Paper supply unit

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the advance U Pull out the unit and check if it is - Whene - - The paper advance
roller not dirty. ver length may vary. Also,
Cleaning the advance U If it is dirty, clean it using the - necess the message No. 6012,
roller (for paper magazine blower brush and wipe it using the ary 6013, 6112: Paper did
B, C) firmly squeezed damp cloth, if the not load. Paper
dirt cannot be removed. Magazine A, B, C may
Cleaning the advance U -
appear.
roller (for paper magazine
A)
Paper supply pressure U Pull out the unit and clean it using - 3- The message No. 6134:
change sensor the blower brush. month Paper Supply Pressure
Change Motor
operation error. may
appear.
Paper hold sensor U - The message No. 6101:
Paper Hold Motor
appear.
Pressure pin of arm unit 1 U Set the cleaning sheet (for cleaning - 6- Paper may meander.
arm unit 1) to arm unit 1 and clean month The message No. 6017:
it. Cleaning sheet is a user's Paper has jammed in
periodically replaced parts.) the printer section.
may appear.
Slide shaft of arm unit 1 U Pull out the unit and apply a grease. - If arm unit 1 does not
move smoothly, it will
cause paper meandering
or paper jam.
Manual cutter S Check if it cuts well and replace it if A067078 Whene 1 Paper cutting may not
not. ver be available when paper
necess jams.
ary
Paper cutter S Check if it cuts well and replace it if H076033 2-year 1 The dull paper cutter
not. (Replace it when the print may cause the paper end
counter reaches 1,500,000 everted.
8. Appendix
approximately.)
! CVP unit (option)

replac ment
ement
timing
Dot head unit S Check the imprinting condition and I086167 3-year - 1 Although the ribbon
replace it if any dots are missing. cassette is replaced,
(One of the maintenance parts. imprinting may not
Replace it when the print counter perform correctly.
reaches 2,700,000 approximately.)
80110 12/30
80110
! Exposure advance unit

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the pressure U Remove the pressure guide and - 1- - - Line appears on a print.
guide and roller check if it is not dirty. week Also, it may occur that
Cleaning the paper path U If it is dirty, clean it using the - Whene the paper meanders in
surface and roller of the blower brush. ver the exposure advance
exposure advance unit If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe necess unit, or it may not
it using the firmly squeezed damp ary correctly execute
Cleaning the exposure U -
cloth. Exposure Start
advance inlet pressure
Position Correction or
roller
Exposure Advance
Motor Speed
Correction.
Cleaning the exposure U Remove the pressure guide unit and - 3- The message No. 6017:
start sensor clean the sensors using a blower month Paper has jammed in
brush. the printer section.
may appear.
! Laser unit
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the laser U Blow the dust off using a blower - 1- - - Line may be printed.
dustproof glass brush. month
Wipe it using the cleaning sheet if
necessary.
! Paper Advance Unit 1

8. Appendix
replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the advance U Check if it is not dirty. - Whene - - The message No. 6017-
roller If it is dirty, clean it using the ver 0002, 0003, 0004:
Cleaning the pressure U blower brush. - necess Paper has jammed in
roller If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe ary the printer section.
it using the firmly squeezed damp may appear.
cloth.
Cleaning paper sensor 1 U Clean the sensors using the blower - 3-
brush. month
Ink ribbon cassette U Check the printing density. - Whene - 1 If ink runs out, back
ver print may not be printed
necess properly.
ary
80110 13/30
80110
! Paper Advance Unit 2

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning arm unit 2 U Check if it is not dirty. - Whene - - Scratches may appear
If it is dirty, clean it using the ver on the prints.
Cleaning the advance U blower brush. - necess The messages No. 6017-
roller If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe ary 0005, 0007, 0009:
it using the firmly squeezed damp Paper has jammed in
Cleaning the roller of the U -
cloth. the printer section.
pressure guide
may appear.
Cleaning the arm sensors U Clean the sensors using the blower - 3- No. 6138, 6139: Paper
(left and right) brush. month advance arm motor
(right or left)
occur.
Cleaning the selection U - No. 6138, 6141: Lane
sensors (left and right) Select Motor
(Left)/(Right)
occur.
! Processor loading unit

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning the paper U Check if it is not dirty. If it is dirty, - Whene - - No. 6017-0005, 0006,
advance rollers and paper clean it using the blower brush. ver 0007, 0008, 0009,
path surface If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe necess 0010:Paper has
it using the firmly squeezed damp ary jammed in the printer
cloth. section.may appear.
Cleaning paper sensor 2 U Clean the sensors using the blower - 3-
(left, center and right) brush. month
8. Appendix
! Printer control box 1

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning air filter (1) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A074340 1- - 1 If the air does not flow
cleaner. month smoothly due to the dust
PCBs.
80110 14/30
80110
! Printer control box 2

replac ment
ement
timing
Cleaning air filter (2) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A074343 1- - 1 If the air does not flow
Cleaning air filter (3) U cleaner. A074346 month 1 smoothly due to the dust
PCBs.

For the procedure of replacing the maintenance parts by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.
! Paper supply unit

replacement
Cleaning sheet*1 U A076719 1 Every cleaning (Clean Paper may meander. The message No.
it every six months.) 6017: Paper has jammed in the
printer section. may appear.
*1. Replace it every cleaning arm unit 1.


For the procedure of replacing the consumable part, refer to Maintenance Manual.
! Paper supply unit

Part name U/S Part No. Q'ty Reference value of Reason for
consumption maintenance/replacement
8. Appendix
Ink ribbon cassette U H086044 1 100,000 prints If ink runs out, back print may not be
printed properly.
80110 15/30
80110

(Processor Section) [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM].
IMPORTANT
NOTE

! Upper guide
Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Q'ty Q'ty Reason for
maintenance g ard PP- PP- maintenance/replac
replac 1213 1217 ement
ement
timing
Upper guides (Nos. 2 to 6) U Automatic cleaning every - At - - - The print may get
and squeegee unit close down checks. closin damaged, dirty or
g uneven. The message
down No. 5535: Paper has
Cleaning upper guide U Clean it using a soft sponge - 1- - - - jammed in the
(No.1)*1 processor section.
8. Appendix
with running lukewarm week
water. After that, dry it up may appear.
and reattach it as it was.
Cleaning upper guide (No. U Clean it with pouring warm
2) and squeegee unit*1 water and a soft sponge.
Then soak it in a bat filled
with water.
Cleaning upper guides U Clean them using a soft
(Nos. 3 to 6)*1 sponge with running
lukewarm water. After that,
dry them up and reattach
them as they were.
Cleaning the guides of U Clean them using a soft
processing racks (Nos. 1 sponge with running
to 6)*1 lukewarm water. After that,
reattach them as they were.
Cleaning upper guides U Clean them using a soft - 1- - - -
(Nos. 1 to 6) and squeegee sponge with running month
unit lukewarm water. Then
check its damage or wear.
80110 16/30
80110
ement
timing
Turn roller (2) (Nos. 3 to 6 S Check its damage or wear. A056679 2-year 2-year 8 8 The print may get
upper guides) If it is damaged or worn, bent, damaged, dirty
Turn roller (3) (Nos. 3 to 6 S replace it with a new one. C007827 8 8 or uneven. The
upper guides) Check it every six months message No. 5535:
after two years has passed. Paper has jammed in
Squeegee roller (2) S A076106 1 1
If necessary, replace it with the processor section.
(Squeegee unit)
a new one. may appear.
Squeegee roller (3) S A074141 1 1
(Squeegee unit)
Squeegee roller (2) (45, S A081790 2*2 2*2
25-second processing)
(No. 2 upper guide)
Squeegee roller (2) (45, S A078885 1*2 1*2
25-second processing)
(No. 2 upper guide)
Squeegee roller (2) (30- S 3*2 3*2
second processing) (No. 2
upper guide)
Squeegee roller (4) (No. 1 S A074136 3 3
upper guide and squeegee
unit)
Pressure bushing (13) S Check its damage or wear. A032741 3-year 2700 28 28 The message No.
Pressure bushing (12) S If it is damaged or worn, A032742 hours 28 28 5535: Paper has
replace it with a new one. jammed in the
Idle gear (32T) S A050696 1 1
Check it every six months processor section.
Double gear S after three years has passed. A050698 8 8 may appear.
If necessary, replace it with
a new one.
(As standard replacement
timing, replace it every
three year when it works for
three hours per day.)
*1. Perform it at the close down checks on the day for the weekly regular checks.
*2. The quantity varies depending on the processor specification.
8. Appendix
80110 17/30
80110
! Processing rack section [N]

ement
timing
Processing racks (Nos. 1 U Wash it using a soft sponge - 1- - - - The print may get
to 6) with running lukewarm month bent, damaged, dirty
water (30 to 40 degrees or uneven. The
centigrade) so that any message No. 5535:
crystals are dissolved. Paper has jammed in
Lower turn belt (For CD U Wash it using a soft sponge A049949 2 2 the processor section.
and BF) with running lukewarm may appear.
Lower turn belt (2) (For U water. Check its damage A060316 4 4
STB) and scratch. If necessary,
replace it with a new one.
Side roller (3) (For 45 S Check its damage or wear. A072989 2-year 2-year 15*1 19*1
seconds) (Nos. 1 and 2 If it is damaged or worn,
processing racks) replace it with a new one.
Side roller (3) (For 30 Check it every six months 11*1 13*1
seconds) (Nos. 1 and 2 after two years has passed.
processing racks) If necessary, replace it with
a new one.
Side roller (3) (For 25 9*1 11*1
seconds) (Nos. 1 and 2
processing racks)
Side roller (4) (For 45 S B020741 25*1 37*1
seconds)
Side roller (4) (For 30 13*1 15*1
seconds)
Side roller (4) (For 25 19*1 29*1
seconds)
Gasket S Check its damage. If it is B013955 2-year 2-year 6 6 Since the gasket is
damaged, replace it with a attached to prevent the
new one. processing solution
Check it every six months evaporated, the
after two years has passed. processing solution
If necessary, replace it with may be deteriorated
a new one. faster if the gasket is
damaged.
8. Appendix
80110 18/30
80110
ement
timing
Bearing (1) (45, 30- S Check its damage or wear. A035075 3-year 2700 8*1 8*1 The message No.
second processing) If it is damaged or worn, hours 5535: Paper has
Bearing (1) (For 25 replace it with a new one. 6*1 8 *1 jammed in the
seconds) Check it every six months processor section.

after three years has passed. *1 may appear.
Bevel gear (22T) (For 45 S A035155 26*1 34
seconds)
a new one.
Bevel gear (22T) (For 30 (As standard replacement 18*1 20*1
seconds) timing, replace it every
Bevel gear (22T) (For 25 three year when it works for 20*1 26*1
seconds) three hours per day.)
Bevel gear S A050695 6 6
Idle gear (32T) S A050696 6 6
Center bushing (For 45 S A216227 40*1 56*1
seconds)
Center bushing (For 30 24*1 28*1
seconds)
Center bushing (For 25 28*1 40*1
seconds)
Bevel gear (2) (For 45 S A220062 26*1 34*1
seconds)
Bevel gear (2) (For 30 18*1 20*1
seconds)
Bevel gear (2) (For 25 20*1 26*1
seconds)
Bushing (1) S B010247 12 12
Bearing (3) assembly S A051198 6 6
! Tank section [N]

8. Appendix
ement
timing
Float switch U Push and sink the upper of - 3- - - - The crystallized
the float with a stick and month processing solution on
check that the float moves the float may make the
up and down. float immovable
vertically. It may
damage on the
automatic refilling
function as the change
of the processing
solution amount
cannot be detected
correctly, and the
processing solution
may be deteriorated
faster in result.
80110 19/30
80110
ement
timing
Cleaning the processing U Wash it using a brush with - 1-year - - - The print may get
solution tanks water. damaged, dirty or
Cleaning the reducing U Wash it using a sponge with - uneven.
solution block (For 25 water.
seconds)
Filter cartridge U Check that it is not clogged H029037 2- 2- 6 6 If the filter cartridge is
or deformed. In that case, week week dirty, it affects print
replace it with a new one. quality. It affects the
circulation of the
solution as well, and
the message No. 5500,
5501, 5502: The
processing solution
temperature is above
the safety range. CD,
BF, STB may appear
in result.
! Frame section
ement
timing
Automatic cleaning pipe U Check whether or not - 2- - - - If crystals are stuck on
crystals stick on the opening week the opening of the
of the automatic cleaning automatic cleaning
pipe. If necessary, remove pipe, water cannot be
the pipe and wash it with spouted to wash the
such as a toothbrush. upper guides and the
print may get
damaged, dirty or
uneven, accordingly.
8. Appendix
Cleaning the air filter U Vacuum the dust using a - 1- - - - If the air flow is
vacuum cleaner. month interfered by the dust
If the dirt cannot be accumulated on the air
removed, turn the side with filter, it cannot cool
dust down and wash it with down the processing
running water. tanks and the message
The processing
solution temperature
is above the safety
range. CD, BF, STB
may appear.
80110 20/30
80110
! Replenisher section [N]

ement
timing
Refilling water and water U Check the water amount. - At - - - The message No. 500,
supply tanks closin 603, 801: Add water
g to the Refilling
down Water Tank. may
appear.
Washing the replenisher U Wash it with water. H056009 1- 1-year 3*1 3*1 The replenishment
pump strainer (Replace it with a new one month solution cannot be
when it has been seriously replenished correctly
damaged.) and the processing
Poppet valve (Fluoro S Check its damage. If it is I091004 3-year 3-year 2*1 2*1 solution may be
rubber CP-47L, VPII, damaged, replace it with a deteriorated faster in
QLII, ACPII) new one. result. The pump may
be damaged as well.
Poppet valve (EPDMCP- I091003 4*1 4*1
47L, VPII, QLII, ACPII) Check it every six months
after three years has passed.
Poppet valve (EPDM 6*1 6*1
Chemicals other than the
a new one.
above)

! Effluent section
ement
timing
Effluent tank U Collect the effluent. - At - - - The message No. 503,
closin 610: Empty the
g Effluent Tank. may
down appear during the
Whene printing.
ver
8. Appendix
necess
ary
! Dryer rack section

ement
timing
Cleaning the dryer rack U Check the dirt and damage - 1- - - - The print may get
of each part. month damaged, dirty or
If the roller is dirt, wipe it uneven.
using the firmly squeezed
damp cloth.
80110 21/30
80110
ement
timing
Cleaning print sensors U Wipe it using a cotton swab. - 3- - - - The message No.
(left, center and right). month 5535: Paper has
jammed in the
processor section.
may appear.
Dryer drive chain U Lubricate the lubricating - The driving torque
felt. increases and that
After lubricating, turn the adversely affects the
knob to spread the oil to the paper advance. It may
dryer drive chain fully. wear and damage the
parts related to the
drive as well.
Cleaning the dryer U Wipe it using a cotton swab. - Lane selection
selection sensor operation may be out
of order and the
message
No.5535:Paper has
jammed in the
processor section.
may appear. Also, the
print may get bent or
damaged, or the wider
size prints may be
ejected to the
conveyer unit.
Ejection roller S Check its damage or wear. A058613 2-year 2-year 2 2 It adversely affects the
Ejection roller S If it is damaged or worn, A058598 6 6 print alignment. The
replace it with a new one. print may get bent,
Check it every six months damaged, dirty or
after two years has passed. uneven. The message
If necessary, replace it with No. 5535: Paper has
a new one. jammed in the
Pile cloth S Check its dirt and damage. H039113 3-year 3-year 2 2 processor section.
If it is dirt or damaged , may appear.
replace it with a new one.
8. Appendix
Check it every six months
after three years has passed.
a new one.
Center roller bushing S Check its damage or wear. A066056 3-year 2700 31 31 The message No.
Inlet roller bushing S If it is damaged or worn, A065831 hours 3 3 5535: Paper has
Pressure bushing S A221212 4 4
Squeegee bushing S after three years has passed. A220261 2 2 may appear.
Pressure spring bushing S If necessary, replace it with A220296 2 2
Squeegee bushing S a new one. A125698 6 6
(For standard replacement
Advance roller (1) S timing, replace it every A069408 2 2 The print may get
Advance roller (3) S three years if it works three A069411 3 3 bent, damaged, dirty
hours per day.) or uneven. The
Advance roller (5) S A069414 3 3
) message No. 5535:
Advance roller (6) S A069417 2 2 Paper has jammed in
Advance roller (8) S A069420 1 1 the processor section.
Advance roller (7) S B018381 1 1 may appear.
Advance roller (10) S A076046 1 1
80110 22/30
80110
ement
timing
Dryer selection solenoid S Check the operation via I034254 3-year 1,500, 1 1 If the dryer selection
output check. 000 solenoid has an
Check and replace it every times operation failure, the
three years. message
(when processing 200 rolls No.5535:Paper has
of 24-print films per day jammed in the
and its 25% is width wide processor section.
size prints.) may appear. Also, the
print may get bent or
damaged, or the wider
size prints may be
ejected to the
conveyer unit.
! Print sorter section

ement
timing
Cleaning the print full U Clean it with a dry cloth. - Whene - - - Although the print
sensor ver does not exist, the
necess message No. 505:
ary Remove the prints
from the Print Sorter
Unit. may appear.
Cleaning the print U Check its dirt and damage. - Whene It adversely affects the
conveyor If necessary, wipe it with ver print alignment. The
the firmly-squeezed damp necess print may get dirty as
cloth. ary well.
! Option
8. Appendix
ement
timing
Cleaning Y-type strainer U Clean it using a toothbrush - 1- - - - The clogged strainer
(cooling water pluming with running water. month would affect the flow
unit) of the cooling water,
and the message No.
5500, 5501, 5502 The
processing solution
temperature is above
the safety range. CD,
BF, STB may occur.

None
80110 23/30
80110

None
8. Appendix
80110 24/30
80110

(Processor Section) [SM]
Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to ☞ List
of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N].

! Upper guide [SM]

ement
timing
Squeegee roller (2) (No. 2 S Check its damage or wear. A081790 2-year 2-year 2 2 The print may get
upper guide) If it is damaged or worn, bent, damaged, dirty
Squeegee roller (2) (No. 2 S replace it with a new one. A078885 1 1 or uneven. The
upper guide) Check it every six months message No. 5535:
! Processing rack section [SM]

ement
timing
Side roller (3) (Nos. 1 and S Check its damage or wear. A072989 2-year 2-year 9 11 The print may get
2 processing racks) If it is damaged or worn, bent, damaged, dirty
Side roller (4) (SM) S replace it with a new one. B020741 19 29 or uneven. The
Check it every six months message No. 5535:
Side roller (4) (SM-S) S 11 13
8. Appendix
Bearing (1) S Check its damage or wear. A035075 3-year 2700 6 8 The message No.
Bevel gear (22T) (SM) S If it is damaged or worn, A035155 hours 20 26 5535: Paper has
Bevel gear (22T) (SM-S) S 16 18
Center bushing (SM) S after three years has passed. A216227 28 40 may appear.
Center bushing (SM-S) S If necessary, replace it with 20 24
Bevel gear (2) (SM) S a new one. A220062 20 26
(As standard replacement
Bevel gear (2) (SM-S) S timing, replace it every 16 18
three year when it works for
three hours per day.)
80110 25/30
80110
! Tank section [SM]

ement
timing
Cleaning the reducing U Wash it using a sponge with - 1-year - - - The print may get
solution block water. damaged, dirty or
uneven.
! Replenisher section [SM]

ement
timing
Cleaning the probe U Clean with the specified - Whene - - - The adhered solution
Cleaning the probe holder U cotton swab dipped in water - ver crystallizes and
(Perform at the replacement necess damages the probe in
of the replenishment ary result, or soils around
package.) the machine.
Cleaning the U - The replenishment
replenishment solution solution cannot be
sensor detected correctly, and
although it still
remains, the message
No. 700, 705: Replace
the Replenishment
Package with a new
one. may appear.
Washing the replenisher U Wash it with water. H056009 1- 1-year 7 7 The replenishment
pump strainer (Replace it with a new one month solution cannot be
when it has been seriously replenished correctly
damaged.) and the processing
Poppet valve S Check its damage. If it is I091040 3-year 3-year 8 8 solution may be
(Except for STB) damaged, replace it with a deteriorated faster in
(Fluoro rubber) new one. result. The pump may
be damaged as well.
8. Appendix
Poppet valve S Check it every six months I091003 2 2
(Except for STB) after three years has passed.
(EPDM) If necessary, replace it with
a new one.
! Replenisher section [SM]

replacement
Probe (2) assembly (CD-C S A054659 1 1-year The replenishment solution cannot be
only) replenished correctly and the
Probe (1) assembly S A054658 5 1-year processing solution may be deteriorated
(Except CD-C) faster in result. That causes the solution
leakage and makes dirty in the area
around as well.
80110 26/30
80110

replacement
Poppet valve (STB only) S I091040 2 1-year The replenishment solution cannot be
replenished correctly and the
processing solution may be deteriorated
faster in result. The pump may be
damaged as well.
8. Appendix
80110 27/30
80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N]
This list is to check Maintenance parts/Periodically replaced parts depending on the period for service personnel.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM].
! Whenever necessary
Block Unit Parts or checking items Remarks
Printer section ☞ Paper supply unit Manual cutter
! Biennial
Printer section ☞ Paper supply unit Paper cutter
Processor section ☞ Upper guide Turn roller (2)
Turn roller (3)
Squeegee roller assembly (2)
☞ Processing rack section [N] Gasket
Side roller (3)
Side roller (4)
☞ Dryer rack section Ejection roller
Ejection roller
! Triennial
Desk section ☞ PC control unit Battery pack Periodically replaced
Lithium battery parts
8. Appendix
Printer section ☞ CVP unit (option) Dot head unit
Processor section ☞ Upper guide Pressure bushing (13)
Pressure bushing (12)
Idle gear (32T)
Double gear
☞ Processing rack section [N] Bearing (1)
Bevel gear (22T)
Bevel gear
Idle gear (32T)
Center bushing
Bevel gear (2)
Bushing (1)
Bearing (3) assembly
☞ Replenisher section [N] Poppet valve
80110 28/30
80110

Processor section ☞ Dryer rack section Pile cloth
Center roller bushing
Inlet roller bushing
Pressure bushing
Squeegee bushing
Pressure spring bushing
Squeegee bushing
Advance roller (1)
Advance roller (3)
Advance roller (5)
Advance roller (6)
Advance roller (8)
Advance roller (7)
Advance roller (10)
Self holding solenoid
8. Appendix
80110 29/30
80110
List for checking/replacing (service personnel) [SM]
Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to ☞ List
for checking/replacing (service personnel) [N].
! Annual
Processor section ☞ Replenisher section [SM] Probe (2) assembly Periodically replaced
Probe (1) assembly parts
Poppet valve
! Biennial
Processor section ☞ Upper guide [SM] Squeegee roller (2)
Squeegee roller (2)
☞ Processing rack section [SM] Side roller (3)
Side roller (4)
! Triennial
Processor section ☞ Processing rack section [SM] Bearing (1)
Bevel gear (22T)
Center bushing
Bevel gear (2)
☞ Replenisher section [SM] Poppet valve
(Except for STB)
8. Appendix
80110 30/30
80210
Positions of paper jam release labels
! Explanation
The paper jam release label is affixed at the back of printer top cover.
8. Appendix
G068197
80210 1/3
80210
The paper jam release label is affixed at the back of the printer door.
8. Appendix
G068200
80210 2/3
80210
The paper jam release label is affixed at the back of the print sorter unit.
8. Appendix
G068196
80210 3/3
80310
Service personnel tool list
Service personnel tool list [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Service personnel tool list [SM].
(Desk section and scanner section)
Tool Part No. Explanation
Scanner adjustment chart (135) Z019786-01 Used for the scanner adjustment such as swing and tilt adjustment,
Scanner adjustment chart (240) Z019039-01 light axis adjustment and focus adjustment (with the card case).*1
Scanner adjustment chart (120) Z019787-01
Scanner adjustment chart (110) Z019041-01
Scanner adjustment chart (mount) Z019668-01 Used to adjust the focus (with the color soft clear case).*1
Scanner adjustment chart (crop card) Z022046-01 Used to adjust focus for the crop card attachment of MFC
Height adjustment jig A064841-01 Used to adjust the position of the emission lamp and detection
sensor of the 135/240 AMC.
Height adjustment jig A060553-01 Used to adjust the position of the emission lamp and detection
sensor of the 135/240 MMC.
AMC emission adjustment chart Z808669-01 Used to adjust the position of the emission lamp and detection
sensor of the 135/240 AMC or MMC.
Colorimeter height adjustment jig A066490-01 Used to adjust the height of measuring point of the colorimeter.
Service personnel floppy disk F000472-01 Used to enter the service personnel password.
Noritsu-eNET system program unit Z019675-01 Used for remote service.
*1. Since the scanner adjustment chart is very thin, keep it in the case when handling.
(Printer section)
Head adjustment jig A050486-01 Used to adjust the printing pressure of the CVP.
Optical fiber cable pushing bar A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
Loupe H099039-00 Used to adjust the exposure position.
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal there.
For details about how to use the fiber cutter, refer to 50520 ☞ How
to use the fiber cutter.
Aspirator H103007-00 Used to suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to
8. Appendix
the ARCNET cable.
For details about how to use the aspirator, refer to 50520 ☞ How to
use the aspirator.
(Processor section)
Grounding resistance measurement cable unit W407756-01 Used to check the grounding resistance between input section and
printer section or processor section.
80310 1/2
80310
Service personnel tool list [SM]
Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to
☞ Service personnel tool list [N].
(Processor section)
Air exhaust tool (pipe type) assembly A050400-01 Used when installing the SM specification and replacing the
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM machines)
Probe replacing jig A053235-01 Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional
SM machines)
8. Appendix
80310 2/2
81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list
Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.
QSS operation keyboard Corresponded full keyboard Remarks

F F1
REPT F2
ORDER F3
N F4
Y F5
M F6
C F7
D F8
-1 F9
+1 F10
PASS F11
NO/STOP F12
YES/START ENT
← ←
→ →
↑ ↑
↓ ↓
Operation keyboard
8. Appendix
G050097
81010 1/1
81020
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification)
Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.
QSS operation keyboard Corresponded full keyboard Operations on the DLS software
F F1 Not in use
REPT F2 Not in use
ORDER F3 Order number changing
N F4 Correction value input (Normal) N
Y F5 Y correction
M F6 M correction
C F7 C correction
D F8 D correction
-1 F9 Correction value input (-1)
+1 F10 Correction value input (+1)
PASS F11 Passed frame setting
NO/STOP F12 Not in use
YES/START ENT Same as Start Job
← ← ←
→ → →
↑ ↑ ↑
↓ ↓ ↓
Operation keyboard
8. Appendix
G050097
81020 1/1
81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM]
This list indicates the information relating to the suffix numbers in the No. 0700 and 0705 Replace the Replenishment Package with a
new one. P-# attention messages.
☞ 40700?☞ 40704
• 0 indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in DARK status.
• - indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in LIGHT status.
Suffix Status of the replenishment solution sensor Attention message
number P-1 P-2
CD-A CD-B CD-C STB BF-A BF-B
01 0 - - - - - P-1 -
02 - 0 - - - - P-1 -
03 0 0 - - - - P-1 -
04 - - 0 - - - P-1 -
05 0 - 0 - - - P-1 -
06 - 0 0 - - - P-1 -
07 0 0 0 - - - P-1 -
08 - - - 0 - - P-1 -
09 0 - - 0 - - P-1 -
10 - 0 - 0 - - P-1 -
11 0 0 - 0 - - P-1 -
12 - - 0 0 - - P-1 -
13 0 - 0 0 - - P-1 -
14 - 0 0 0 - - P-1 -
15 0 0 0 0 - - P-1 -
16 - - - - 0 - - P-2
17 0 - - - 0 - P-1 P-2
18 - 0 - - 0 - P-1 P-2
19 0 0 - - 0 - P-1 P-2
20 - - 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
21 0 - 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
22 - 0 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
23 0 0 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
8. Appendix
24 - - - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
25 0 - - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
26 - 0 - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
27 0 0 - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
28 - - 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
29 0 - 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
30 - 0 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
31 0 0 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
32 - - - - - 0 - P-2
33 0 - - - - 0 P-1 P-2
34 - 0 - - - 0 P-1 P-2
35 0 0 - - - 0 P-1 P-2
36 - - 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
37 0 - 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
38 - 0 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
39 0 0 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
40 - - - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
41 0 - - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
81510 1/2
81510
Suffix Status of the replenishment solution sensor Attention message

number P-1 P-2
CD-A CD-B CD-C STB BF-A BF-B
42 - 0 - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
43 0 0 - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
44 - - 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
45 0 - 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
46 - 0 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
47 0 0 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
48 - - - - 0 0 - P-2
49 0 - - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
50 - 0 - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
51 0 0 - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
52 - - 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
53 0 - 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
54 - 0 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
55 0 0 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
56 - - - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
57 0 - - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
58 - 0 - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
59 0 0 - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
60 - - 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
61 0 - 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
62 - 0 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
63 0 0 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
8. Appendix
81510 2/2
88000
Contents in the QSS Service Manual (additional volume)
The Service Manual of this machine consists of the QSS Service Manual and the PC Service Manual.
The QSS Service Manual does not contain the explanations related to the PC.
The QSS Service Manual consists of the following chapters.
To view the PC Service Manual, click the button below. (This button is valid only when viewing the CD manual.)
G068163
Item Manual No.

# 1. ☞ Cautions for work 10000
# 2. ☞ Replacement and adjustment of parts 20000
# 3. ☞ Mode 30000
# 4. ☞ Troubleshooting 40000
# 5. ☞ Operation sequence 50000
# 6. ☞ Electrical parts 60000
# 7. ☞ Setup for service personnel 70000
# 8. ☞ Appendix 80000
8. Appendix
88000 1/1
89000
Table of wiring diagrams
Block No. Item Diagram No.

- System connection diagram J308920
- QSS-32PRO System connection diagram J309139
- S900SA/S1700SA System connection diagram J309140
! Desk section
CS 1-1 AC power supply circuit diagram J308837
CS 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1) J308838
CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) J308839
CS 1-4 PC power supply circuit diagram J308836
PC power supply circuit diagram J309091
PC power supply circuit diagram J309710
CS 2-1 Control section J308834
CS 2-2 PC connecting J308835
CS 2-3 Pricing Unit J308840
CS 2-4 Around colorimeter unit J404653
! Scanner section
S 1-1 AC power supply connecting (type 0,1,2) J308862
AC power supply connecting (type 3) J309559
S 1-2 DC power supply connecting (type 0, 1, 2) J308863
DC power supply connecting (type 3) J309560
S 1-3 Around scanner mount (type 0,1,2) J308864
Around scanner mount (type 3) J309561
S 1-4 Around scanner unit J308865
Around scanner unit (type 3) J309562
8. Appendix
S 1-5 Around AFC/scanner driver PCB J308866
Around AFC/scanner driver PCB (type 3) J309563
S 1-6 Around LED driver PCB (type 0) J309514
Around LED driver PCB (type 1) J309515
S 1-7 Around ARCNET/LVDS J309108
S 1-8 135/240 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309073
S 1-9 135 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309074
S 1-12 135/240 AMC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309077
S 1-13 135/240 MMC-II power supply circuit diagram J309078
S 1-14 MFC power supply circuit diagram J309739
S 4-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J308868
S 4-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J308869
S 5-1 135 AFC-II J308870
89000 1/4
89000

S 6-1 120 AFC-II J308871
S7-1 110 AFC-II J308872
S 8-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J308873
S 8-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J308874
S 9-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J308875
S 9-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J308876
S 10-1 MFC (circuit diagram) J309740
S 12-1 Scanner mount section/cooling fan (type 0,1,2) J308877
Scanner mount section/cooling fan (type 3) J309707
S 12-2 Scanner unit J308878
S 12-3 Around LED light source unit (1) (type 0) J309516
Around LED light source unit (1) (type 1) J309517
S 13-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J308881
S 13-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J308882
S 13-3 135/240 AFC-II (3) J308883
S 13-4 135/240 AFC-II (4) J308884
S 13-5 135/240 AFC-II (5) J308885
S 13-6 135/240 AFC-II (6) J308886
S 13-7 135/240 AFC-II (7) J308887
S 13-8 135/240 AFC-II (8) J308888
S 14-1 135 AFC-II (1) J308889
S 14-2 135 AFC-II (2) J308890
8. Appendix
S 15-1 120 AFC-II J308891
S 16-1 110 AFC-II J308892
S 17-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J308893
S 17-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J308894
S 17-3 135/240 AMC-II (3) J308895
S 18-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J308896
S 18-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J308897
S 19-1 MFC (1) J309741
S 19-2 MFC (2) J309742
! Printer section
LP 1-1 AC power supply circuit diagram J308953
LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1) J308954
LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) J308955
LP 2-1 AC power supply connecting J308972
89000 2/4
89000
LP 2-2 DC power supply connecting J308973

LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB J308974
LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1 J308975
LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB J308978
LP 2-8 Correction value printing unit J308979
LP 2-9 Around laser unit (type B1) J308980
Around laser unit (type A1) J309447
LP 3-1 Frame section J308956

LP 3-2 Magazine mount unit J308957
LP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1) J308958
LP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2) J308959
LP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1) J308960
LP 3-6 Exposure advance unit (2) J308961
LP 3-7 Paper Advance Unit 1 J308962
LP 3-8 Paper advance unit 2 (1) J308963
LP 3-11 Laser unit (1) J308966
LP 3-14 Laser unit (4) (type B1) J308969
Laser unit (4) (type A1) J309448
LP 3-15 Correction value printing unit J308970
LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit J308971
! Processor section
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) J308921
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [N] J308924
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [SM] J308925
8. Appendix
PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB J308844
PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB J308845
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [N] J308846
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [SM] J308847
PP 2-4 Around SM I/O PCB [SM] J308850
PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [N] J308928

PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [SM] J308929
PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2) J308930
PP 3-3 Processor section J308931
PP 3-4 Replenisher section (1) [N] J308932
PP 3-5 Replenisher section (2) [N] J308934
PP 3-6 Effluent block J308936
PP 3-7 Drive section J308937
PP 3-8 Dryer section (1) J308938
89000 3/4
89000
PP 3-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit J308941

PP 3-12 SM replenisher section (1) [SM] J308942
PP 4-1 Cooling water plumbing unit J308952
! Accessories
KIDS 1-1 Keyboard Expansion Kit J404678
BRAVO II 1-1 BRAVO II J404680
8. Appendix
89000 4/4
89010
Wiring diagram table [S-4]
! Scanner [S-4]
S 1-1 AC power supply connecting J309799
S 1-2 DC power supply connecting J309800
S 1-3 Around scanner mount J309801
S 1-4 Around scanner unit J309802
S 1-5 Scanner driver PCB area J309803
S 1-6 Around AFC/scanner driver PCB J309804
S 1-8 135/240 AFC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309879
S 1-12 135/240 AMC-II Power supply circuit diagram J309883
S 1-13 135/240 MMC-II power supply circuit diagram J309884
S 1-14 MFC power supply circuit diagram J309885
S 4-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J309886
S 4-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J309887
S 5-1 135 AFC-II J309888
S 6-1 120 AFC-II J309889
S7-1 110 AFC-II J309890
S 8-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J309891
S 8-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J309892
S 9-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J309893
S 9-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J309894
S 10-1 MFC (circuit diagram) J309895
S 12-1 Scanner mount section/cooling fan J309896
S 12-2 Scanner unit J309897
S 12-3 Around LED light source unit (1) J309898
8. Appendix
S 13-1 135/240 AFC-II (1) J308881
S 13-2 135/240 AFC-II (2) J308882
S 13-3 135/240 AFC-II (3) J308883
S 13-4 135/240 AFC-II (4) J308884
S 13-5 135/240 AFC-II (5) J308885
S 13-6 135/240 AFC-II (6) J308886
S 13-7 135/240 AFC-II (7) J308887
S 13-8 135/240 AFC-II (8) J308888
S 14-1 135 AFC-II (1) J308889
S 14-2 135 AFC-II (2) J308890
S 15-1 120 AFC-II J308891
S 16-1 110 AFC-II J308892
S 17-1 135/240 AMC-II (1) J308893
S 17-2 135/240 AMC-II (2) J308894
S 17-3 135/240 AMC-II (3) J308895
S 18-1 135/240 MMC-II (1) J308896
S 18-2 135/240 MMC-II (2) J308897
89010 1/3
89010

S 19-1 MFC (1) J309741
S 19-2 MFC (2) J309742
8. Appendix
89010 2/3
89010
8. Appendix
89010 3/3

En32ser 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En32ser 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

distributed by www.minilablaser.

Issued in June 2005

– for service personnel only –

1.Cautions for work

2.Replacement and adjustment of parts

7.Setup for service personnel

Notes to service personnel

Tapping truss head screw

Spike truss head screw (green)

Washer head screw (for ground)

System Scanner Control Station Laser Printer Paper Processor

QSS-3202 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3203 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217

QSS-3211 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3212 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3213 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217

S-900SA S-2/S-3 CS-1

QSS-3202 PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3211 DLS S-2/S-3 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

About the chapters

" 1. Cautions for work

Marks and symbols used in this manual

This is called the alert symbol mark.

Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

Processing solutions Abbreviations

This page is intentionally blank.

1. Cautions for work

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Film carrier section (135/240 AFC-II) ..................................................................................... 20700

Order classification section .................................................................................................... 27410

DLS mode structure chart ...................................................................................................... 32000

Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35000

Laser Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 37300

System Error messages (No. 3-) .............................................................................................. 4910

Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500

Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000

Attention message: Film carrier ............................................................................................. 41400

Attention message: Disk/Media 1 ........................................................................................... 41500

Attention message: Disk/Media 2 ........................................................................................... 41530

Attention message: NMC ....................................................................................................... 41620

Attention message: Compact archive unit .............................................................................. 43370

Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500

Error message: SM replenishment ......................................................................................... 45700

Error message: Printer 2 ........................................................................................................ 46138

Error message: Film carrier .................................................................................................... 46400

Error message: Pricing unit .................................................................................................... 46600

Data flow chart ....................................................................................................................... 50600

Position of electrical parts (scanner section) .......................................................................... 62000

Descriptions of PCB (desk section) ........................................................................................ 64000

Description of PCB (printer section) ....................................................................................... 66000

7. Setup for service personnel

1. Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010

1 Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words)

1. Cautions for work

Example of warning label

Symbol mark (warning

Warning text (warning

Location of warning labels

1. Cautions for work

Printer processor section

1. Cautions for work